Published Date: February 9th, 2026
WEEKLY REPORT
TRUTH///AWAKENING///DISCLOSURE
AWAKENING THE SLEEPING GIANT SERIES
Global Synchronization, Hidden Structure Revealed Across Global Systems
“When constraints align across systems, disorder collapses into pattern. Those who stay oriented don’t see chaos — they see sequence.”
Key Signals: Capital Pauses • Trade Rigidifies • Authority Disperses • Demand Contracts • Force Aligns • Governance Strains • Planetary Stress
ORIENTATION BRIEF — WEEK OF FEBRUARY 9th, 2026
Forward Look: Next 7 Days | Stories, Signals & System Posture
The coming week favors positioning over execution. Systems are not preparing to break; they are preparing to hold. Across geopolitics, trade, finance, governance, technology, and environmental domains, the dominant signal is managed strain rather than resolution. Constraint—not surprise—defines the near-term operating environment. Stability is being sustained through continuous input and oversight, not restored through structural correction, narrowing freedom of action even as activity continues.
This is an energy-intensive holding pattern. Institutions, markets, and households are expending effort to preserve equilibrium rather than advance agendas. The operational reward structure shifts accordingly: discipline over speed, patience over force, clarity over reaction. Momentum persists, but it is deliberately bounded. Forward motion exists only within tightly defined limits.
Compression continues to deepen without release. Margins thin across institutional capacity, supply chains, household resilience, and biological tolerance. Sensitivity migrates away from headline shocks toward secondary and tertiary effects—small disruptions that cascade faster than expected. The forward risk is not sudden volatility but gradual overextension. Systems are becoming less tolerant of inefficiency, and minor misalignments now propagate with disproportionate impact. Orientation favors simplification, conservation of energy, and deliberate pacing.
The stabilization plateau remains actively defended. Markets, governments, and trade flows continue to function through intervention, rerouting, liquidity management, and disciplined messaging. However, the cost of maintenance rises. Stability increasingly depends on sustained effort rather than organic recovery, transforming equilibrium into a conditional state. Plateaus rarely fail abruptly; they erode quietly as maintenance demands begin to exceed capacity. Subtle degradation—not rupture—is the signal to monitor.
Several domains sit just below action thresholds as the week unfolds. Military posture and signaling remain elevated but contained. Financial systems show heightened sensitivity to confidence and liquidity preference shifts rather than structural failure. Information boundaries continue to narrow, while environmental and infrastructure stress persists in the background. No discrete triggers are expected in the immediate window, but optionality continues to compress. Historically, limits emerge before action—through constraints on access, movement, liquidity, or expression—well ahead of overt escalation.
Narrative compression is likely to intensify. Language emphasizing resilience, normalization, and continuity will increase, while destabilizing variables recede from public framing. As uncertainty rises, messaging simplifies and synchronizes. Transparency yields to coherence management. In this environment, omissions, timing, and repetition carry more signal than volume. What is not said will remain more instructive than what is emphasized.
Orientation Guidance
Orientation for the week ahead is clear. This is not a phase for acceleration; it is a phase for alignment, conservation, and clarity. Remaining locally grounded, preserving optionality, and avoiding unnecessary exposure—financial, emotional, or informational—reduces friction. The signal ahead is not collapse, but constraint revealing structure. Those who remain calm, coherent, and pattern-aware will experience less resistance as conditions continue to tighten.
UPDATED SIGNAL BRIEF | Week Ending February 9, 2026
Geopolitical Posture
Over the past seven days, geopolitical signaling continued to intensify without crossing into direct confrontation. Davos aftershocks remained visible in elite alignment rhetoric, while NATO positioning, U.S.–EU trade friction, and Arctic leverage discussions persisted beneath the surface. U.S. messaging emphasized economic and strategic leverage over military escalation, reinforcing ambiguity as an intentional tool. The signal remains restraint with posture: visibility, deterrence, and negotiation leverage are elevated, while kinetic thresholds remain deliberately untouched. Strategy increasingly manifests through policy instruments rather than force deployment.
Global Trade Chokepoints
Trade stress deepened as tariffs, regulatory pressure, and strategic alignment displaced traditional supply-chain disruptions as the primary risk vectors. Markets reacted less to physical chokepoints and more to policy uncertainty, signaling a maturation of trade weaponization. Regional blocs—particularly across Europe and Asia—continued to quietly adjust frameworks to hedge against coercive trade exposure. The signal is normalization of politicized trade: commerce is now explicitly conditional, governed by alignment rather than efficiency.
Government & Institutional Drag
Institutional behavior remained characterized by narrative motion without operational urgency. Governments and multilateral bodies emphasized preparedness, resilience, and long-term reform pathways while avoiding near-term structural correction. This reflects institutional drag rather than denial: systems acknowledge stress yet continue to defer decisive recalibration. The gap between awareness and execution continues to widen, reinforcing delay as a stabilizing tactic rather than a failure of perception.
Household Stress
Household conditions showed no acute rupture but continued incremental tightening. Inflation sensitivity, tariff-related price uncertainty, and market volatility subtly influenced consumer behavior. The pattern remains diffuse rather than dramatic: postponed spending, increased savings bias, and cautious financial planning. Stress is not event-driven but ambient—shaped by prolonged uncertainty rather than immediate economic shock.
Financial System
Financial markets oscillated between optimism and caution, reacting sharply to policy signals while largely ignoring traditional fundamentals. Liquidity remains present but selective, with capital rotating rapidly in response to geopolitical and trade rhetoric. The signal is recalibration rather than withdrawal: risk is being repriced in shorter cycles, reflecting heightened sensitivity to narrative and policy volatility rather than systemic failure.
AI, Biotech & Bio-Sovereignty
Advanced technology remained strategically important but secondary in headline dominance. Beneath the surface, corporate adoption of AI continued to accelerate as an efficiency, resilience, and cost-containment mechanism. Regulatory clarity remains absent, but deployment proceeds regardless. The signal persists: innovation advances ahead of governance, reinforcing asymmetry between capability growth and institutional oversight.
Solar, Geomagnetic & Human Sensitivity
No discrete environmental or geomagnetic events defined the week, yet prior stress indicators remain embedded within the broader signal field. These variables continue to function cumulatively—subtle, persistent, and nonlinear. Their relevance is structural rather than episodic, influencing human and systemic sensitivity over time rather than through headline events.
Information & Narrative Compression
Narrative management further tightened across institutional channels. Messaging emphasized continuity, confidence, and control, while interpretive alternatives faced increasing marginalization. This reflects compression rather than consensus: as system strain increases, allowable narratives narrow. The signal is stabilization through narrative containment, not expanded transparency.
Pattern Convergence
Across domains—geopolitics, trade, finance, governance, and information—responses aligned around adaptation rather than resolution. Power signaled without action, trade adjusted without normalization, markets repriced without retreat, and institutions communicated without restructuring. These are not discrete behaviors but expressions of a unified pattern: convergence through managed adjustment under constraint.
Weekly Synopsis
Systems remain strained but operational. No escalation threshold was crossed, and no domain experienced decisive breakdown. Stress signals expanded laterally rather than vertically, reinforcing continuity under pressure. Economic-policy tools now function as primary geopolitical instruments, markets remain hypersensitive to signaling volatility, and institutional narratives continue to outpace corrective action. There is no resolution and no collapse—only continuation. The trajectory remains consistent: adaptation over restoration, positioning over commitment, and coherence management over transformation.
“When the illusion of order dissolves, what remains is resonance. In the light of truth, even collapse becomes creation.”
A Call to Patriots
Let this moment be remembered as a time of clarity, not chaos—when citizens chose discernment over outrage and responsibility over fear. The republic is not reclaimed through force or noise, but through truth, accountability, and lawful restoration.
Patriots are defined by their ability to remain coherent under pressure, to reject deception, and to stand firm as systems are rebuilt. This is not a call to conflict, but to orientation, integrity, and justice allowed to function.
History will remember who stayed steady when it mattered most.
The Great Civilization Near Death Event | NDE
“Be Strong Enough to Stand Alone / Be Yourself Enough to Stand Apart / And When the Time Comes, Be Wise Enough to Stand Together”
The Great Reset of Everything
We have entered a window of time where everything we have learned, experienced and known to be true is about to dramatically change. We are Awakening to a great truth, “That Everything We Were Taught Is A Lie”. The lives we once knew, lived and experienced prior to January 2020 are now gone forever. We are witnessing the total collapse of not just a few, but all of our statured institutions; The US Government Senate/Congress; through the NSA, DOD, CIA, DIA, ATF, ONI, US Army, US Marine Corp, FEMA and DHS have spent in excess of 12 trillion dollars building the massive, covert infrastructure for the coming One World Government and New World Religion over the past 40 years. Along with other industries; Wall Street Markets & Finance, Banking Industries, Big Tech, Big Insurance, Pharma, Oil, Education, Hollywood Industries, US Military, Medical AMA, Military and Energy Industrial Complexes, all are embroiled in corruption scams and human trafficking.
Given the monolithic corruption and evil encrusted within all these institutions, We are now Witnessing in Real Time a Global Everything Collapse. What has been described and depicted as The Storm! and “The Great Civilization Near Death Experience”. The fallout of which could last anywhere from 2 to 5 years based on geographic locations.
We will then have a choice and chance for “A New Beginning to Reset Everything as We Rebuild America”.
The following report is a compilation of different sources. We found a number of overlapping and crossover warnings presented by each of our sources. We formatted this Weekly Report based on a timeline tied to dates and information posted entirely in May 2023. We believe these sources align with each other to create a very rare picture of what is happening behind the scenes. We encourage each of you to use your own discernment and rational, critical, logical thinking in reviewing this information. Preparation going forward is 80% mental and 20% physical, so we hope this will assist you in your education and in being mentally prepared for the coming Storm.
Updates: This Report Will Be Updated on a Weekly Basis. We designed this format as a living document so we can update you directly on all breaking news and events. Please keep this link close by, so you can easily return to this Weekly Report for all the latest alternative uncensored news reports.
“We The People”: If we the people, as a nation, do not work together to restore our founding father’s visions for our Constitutional Republic, our children could be lost and our nation will be destroyed. We all have a part to play in this peaceful, faithful, informed, prayer-filled participation and with forgiveness in our hearts for the corruption of this nation that we have been a party to, either knowingly or unknowingly.
A Message From the Hopi Elders
Written By Maira Horta LMFT
You have been telling the people that this is the Eleventh Hour.
Now you must go back and tell the people that this is The Hour.
Here are the things that must be considered:
Where are you living?
What are you doing?
What are your relationships?
Are you in right relation?
Where is your water?
Know our garden.
It is time to speak your Truth.
Create your community.
Be good to each other.
And do not look outside yourself for the leader.
This could be a good time!
There is a river flowing now very fast.
It is so great and swift that there are those who will be afraid.
They will try to hold on to the shore. They will feel like they are being torn apart, and they will suffer greatly.
Know the river has its destination.
The elders say we must let go of the shore, push off toward the middle of the river, keep our eyes open, and our heads above the water.
See who is there with you and celebrate.
At this time in history, we are to take nothing personally, least of all ourselves!
For the moment we do, our spiritual growth and journey comes to a halt.
The time of the lonely wolf is over.
Gather yourselves!
Banish the word struggle from your attitude and vocabulary.
All that we do now must be done in a sacred manner and in celebration.
We are the ones we have been waiting for.
-The Elders, Oraibi, Arizona, Hopi Nation
Breaking Intelligence News | Monday, February 9th, 2026 Edition
Last Warning: Prepare for something that you never expected to see in your lifetime. The Media will never let you know! The things around us could change very fast. – QAnon Telegram
“Ye shall hear of wars and rumors of wars. See that ye be not troubled, for all these things must come to pass, but the end is not yet.” – Matthew 24:6
Flashpoints Multiply | Systems Flood | Narrative Warfare Intensifies
When pressure rises across domains, confusion is not accidental—it is instrumental. Those who track only events experience overwhelm. Those who track structure recognize exposure. What appears as chaos is often compression. What feels like loss of control is frequently the erosion of concealment.
Independence is not granted by institutions in moments of strain. It is maintained by individuals who remain coherent as systems destabilize. Awakening is not belief or branding. It is orientation—remembering how to see, when to move, and when to hold.
“Stand firm. Be the signal. The light always breaks through.”
Weekly Updates
The Final Plot: How Netanyahu is Manipulating Trump into a Catastrophic War with Iran
The High-Stakes Deception
In February 2026, a familiar geopolitical drama unfolded once more. Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu hastily flew to Washington, D.C., moving up a scheduled meeting with U.S. President Donald Trump by a week. His urgent mission, as widely reported, was to sabotage ongoing diplomatic talks between the United States and Iran, and instead push the American leader toward a catastrophic military confrontation. This maneuver was not a sudden development but the culmination of a years-long, covert campaign of manipulation by the Israeli leader—a campaign rooted in a violent, expansionist ideology and designed to serve Zionist ambitions at the expense of American lives and global stability.
Behind the public posturing of ‘security concerns’ lies a darker truth: Netanyahu has consistently worked to drag the United States into wars that serve Israel’s regional hegemonic goals, famously encapsulated in his own 2001 boast that ‘America is something that can easily be moved’. This article will dissect the plot to plunge America into another devastating Middle Eastern conflict, exposing the strategic deception, the manufactured threats, and the globalist agendas lurking beneath the surface.
A Dangerous Game of Manipulation
For decades, the cornerstone of Netanyahu’s foreign policy has been an obsessive focus on neutralizing Iran, Israel’s primary regional rival. His strategy has rarely relied on Israel acting alone; instead, it has hinged on manipulating the United States—its most powerful ally—into doing the dirty work. This pattern of leveraging American blood and treasure for Israeli security objectives reached a fever pitch in early 2026. As U.S.-Iranian diplomats engaged in ‘very good’ talks in Oman, Netanyahu moved swiftly to undermine them, rushing to the White House to press for military action.
His objective was clear: to present President Trump with ‘new Iran attack plans’ and argue that diplomacy was futile because Iran ‘cannot be trusted’. This was a calculated gambit. Netanyahu understood that a direct U.S.-Iran war would cripple Tehran’s ability to support groups like Hezbollah and Hamas, shatter its regional influence, and create the chaotic conditions necessary for Israel to further its territorial ambitions under the guise of confronting an ‘existential threat’. The playbook was simple: fabricate a crisis, present the U.S. with ‘intelligence on possible targets inside Iran’, and pressure a politically vulnerable American president into a decisive, regime-changing strike. As one analysis noted, Netanyahu was ‘plotting to lure Trump into the war’, a war that would primarily serve Israel’s goal of securing ‘full control of historic Palestine’.
The ‘Greater Israel’ Agenda and Zionism’s Violent Foundation
To understand Netanyahu’s relentless drive for war, one must examine the foundational philosophy he represents: Zionism. Far from a benign movement for Jewish self-determination, political Zionism is, at its extremist core, a satanic philosophy that justifies land theft, genocide, and endless violence under a twisted theological pretext. It is a ‘racist’ ideology obsessed with territorial expansion, a fact underscored by the ongoing ‘never-ending genocide in Gaza’ and the ‘terrorizing and deportation of the Palestinian population on the West Bank’. Historical context reveals this is not an aberration but a continuation. As noted in an interview, ‘Hamas was not a spontaneous emergence but rather a deliberate strategy’ by Israeli intelligence to manipulate Palestinian resistance into an extremist narrative easy to vilify.
A war with Iran fits perfectly into this expansionist vision. By orchestrating a massive U.S.-led conflict, Netanyahu aimed to plunge the entire region into chaos, destabilizing nations and creating a power vacuum. In the ensuing turmoil, the Zionist state could accelerate its ‘Greater Israel’ project—the violent acquisition of land from the Nile to the Euphrates—without significant international pushback. The conflict would serve as cover for further ethnic cleansing and consolidation of control. This ambition is not hidden; it is the logical endpoint of an ideology that one author describes as fusing ‘into the satanic Death Cult’ willing to engage in ‘any action – literally anything – to secure personal and collective power in the name of Israel and Zionism’. A war with Iran, therefore, was never about American security; it was a calculated move to advance a violent, theocratic land-grab under the smokescreen of countering a nuclear threat.
Manufactured Threats: The Israeli Intelligence Deception
Central to Netanyahu’s manipulation campaign was the weaponization of intelligence. For years, Israeli officials have presented the U.S. with a stream of dire warnings about Iran’s nuclear program, often exaggerating capabilities and timelines to create a false sense of imminent danger. In the lead-up to the February 2026 meeting, ‘senior Israeli defense officials met with top US officials to share intelligence on possible targets inside Iran’. This intelligence-sharing was not a gesture of alliance but a tactical move to box the U.S. into a military response, providing the target list for a war Israel desperately wanted America to fight.
This pattern of deception has deep roots. Netanyahu has a history of ‘bragging’ about how he ‘convinced Trump to withdraw from the nuclear agreement with Iran’ in 2017, a move that deliberately threw ‘US-Iran relations into turmoil’. The goal was always to sabotage diplomacy and create a pretext for conflict. Furthermore, Israel has repeatedly staged incidents and pursued aggressive actions designed to trigger Iranian retaliation and drag the U.S. into the fray. This includes a ‘massive assassination campaign against Iranian officials’ in mid-2025, which was explicitly noted for ‘sparking fears of WWIII escalation, By provoking Iran, Israel seeks to create a ‘casus belli’ that would force American intervention under mutual defense understandings. The trust Washington historically placed in Israeli intelligence was exploited as a lever to pull the U.S. into a conflict serving Israeli, not American, interests.
Trump’s Resistance: Will He Protect America from Israel’s Warmongers?
Despite the intense pressure and the massive U.S. military buildup in the region—including the movement of F-35A stealth fighters and the USS Abraham Lincoln carrier strike group —President Trump has so far not given the order to attack Iran. Will his resistance hold?
Trump’s base and key constituencies are overwhelmingly opposed to another costly Middle Eastern war. As noted, ‘Trump’s base opposes intervention in Iran’. Influential voices within his administration and the broader ‘America First’ movement warned of the catastrophic consequences. Notably, a call from Netanyahu himself in January 2026 reportedly convinced Trump not to order an attack, as the Israeli leader feared it ‘would not be decisive’ and that Israel ‘would be unable to repel an Iranian counterattack without more American military support’. This revealed a critical lack of confidence in Israel’s own military capabilities, undermining the very case for war.
Trump must also recognize the trap of endless foreign entanglement. Having criticized such wars on the campaign trail, he is likely wary of being manipulated into a conflict that would dwarf the debacles in Iraq and Afghanistan. Analysts noted that for Trump, his decisions ultimately come down to his ‘psychology, and his need to dominate’ , suggesting he prefers to be seen as the deal-maker who avoids a war, not the puppet who starts one. Furthermore, key regional allies like Saudi Arabia and Jordan have warned that allowing U.S. bases to be used for an attack on Iran could spark a regional conflict and cause a devastating oil price shock, economic repercussions Trump likely seeks to avoid. In the end, the combination of domestic political pressure, strategic pragmatism, and a distrust of being used as a pawn may encourage Trump to sidestep Netanyahu’s most aggressive push for war.
The Globalist Connection: War as Population Control
The push for war with Iran cannot be viewed in isolation; it is a component of a broader globalist agenda that views large-scale conflict as a tool for depopulation and centralized control. Globalist elites, who operate through corrupt institutions like the UN and WHO, understand that war creates chaos, death, and dependency—perfect conditions for eroding national sovereignty and imposing top-down ‘solutions.’ The pharmaceutical-military industrial complex is a key pillar of this system, profiting enormously from both the weapons of war and the drugs needed to treat (or more often, mask) the physical and psychological trauma that follows.
War serves as a brutal form of population control, culling the global herd under the guise of geopolitical necessity. It also provides a pretext for the rapid expansion of surveillance states, digital IDs, and Central Bank Digital Currencies (CBDCs), as frightened populations trade liberty for promised ‘security.’ By fomenting conflict between major powers, these globalists aim to weaken nation-states, destroy traditional cultures, and pave the way for a dystopian, AI-driven world order where human life is devalued and managed by centralized algorithms. Stopping unnecessary wars, therefore, is not just a matter of preserving peace; it is a direct defense of human life, individual sovereignty, and the right of nations to determine their own futures free from manipulative, death-centric agendas.
The Peace Alternative: Decentralization Over Empire
The alternative to this cycle of manipulated violence is a return to principles of national sovereignty, non-interventionism, and decentralization. True peace requires rejecting the globalist war agendas pushed by corrupt regimes and their lobbyists. It demands that nations, particularly the United States, conduct an honest assessment of their core interests and refuse to be used as a mercenary force for foreign ambitions.
President Trump’s hesitation (so far), and his continued pursuit of diplomacy with Iran despite Netanyahu’s protests, points toward this more sovereign path. It recognizes that America’s strength is sapped by endless foreign wars and that its security is better served by a robust defense of its own borders and interests, not by policing the world. Honest leaders resist foreign pressure for destructive wars because they understand that such conflicts drain national treasuries, sacrifice young lives, and erode the moral and social fabric at home. They prioritize dialogue over destruction, and they recognize that strength is demonstrated not by a willingness to bomb, but by the wisdom to avoid provocation and seek mutual understanding where possible. This philosophy of ‘peace through strength and sovereignty’ is the antidote to the manipulative schemes of expansionist regimes.
Lessons for Future Leaders: Recognizing Manipulation
The attempted plot to drag America into war with Iran offers vital lessons for future American leadership. First, U.S. policymakers must develop a profound skepticism toward intelligence and narratives provided by regimes with a clear, self-serving agenda. The case of Israeli intelligence on Iran is a prime example; it must be rigorously cross-examined and not taken at face value. Second, the national interest must be defined clearly and narrowly, always asking: ‘Who benefits from this war?’ If the primary beneficiaries are foreign nations or globalist institutions, it is a strong indicator that American soldiers are being sent to die for a cause that does not serve them.
Finally, preserving American lives and resources requires a firm policy of rejecting foreign war agendas. This means maintaining a military of unparalleled strength for defense, while exhibiting extreme caution in its deployment overseas. It requires dismantling the network of lobbyists and foreign agents who wield undue influence in Washington. The American people have borne the cost of these manipulated conflicts for too long—in blood, treasure, and lost liberties. The lesson of Netanyahu’s attempted plot is that the only path to security and prosperity is one of vigilant independence, where America’s leaders put American citizens first, always.
Conclusion: Sovereignty Prevails
Benjamin Netanyahu’s rushed trip to Washington in February 2026 represented a desperate, final attempt to manipulate the United States into a war of choice against Iran—a war designed to serve Zionist expansionist goals under the fraudulent banner of mutual security. Through fabricated intelligence, staged provocations, and intense political pressure, he seeks to override American sovereignty and strategic judgment.
The stakes could not be higher. As the world stands at the brink of broader conflict, the choice between empire and republic, between globalist manipulation and national self-determination, remains clear. The preservation of peace, liberty, and human life depends on leaders who have the courage to say ‘no’ to foreign warmongers and ‘yes’ to diplomacy, decentralization, and the sacred principle of national sovereignty. For the sake of future generations, that courage must prevail.
The Real Endgame: Why Evil Humans, Not AI, Are the Greatest Threat to Humanity
A Resignation That Revealed More Than an AI Safety Warning
The recent resignation of Mrinank Sharma from the AI firm Anthropic was widely mischaracterized by the corporate media as just another story about AI alarm. Yet a closer reading of his departure letter reveals a far deeper, more troubling diagnosis. Sharma pointed not merely to runaway algorithms, but to a ‘whole series of interconnected crises’–a collapsing world order, failing institutions, and a pervasive moral decay. His choice to ‘become invisible’ and pursue poetry is not an act of retreat, but a rational, survival-oriented response in an era he perceives as fundamentally insane.
This sentiment echoes a growing realization: The existential danger we face is not coded in silicon, but carved into the hearts of corrupt and compromised human beings. While headlines scream about the hypothetical threat of a ‘Skynet’ scenario, actively malevolent human systems are already operating, from engineered famines and poison-laced food supplies to the orchestrated corruption of our children and the push for global conflict. The resignation of a thoughtful technologist is not a warning about machines; it is a verdict on mankind.
The Species-Level Failure: Humanity’s Descent into Moral and Cognitive Collapse
Before we can rationally fear any external technological threat, we must confront the internal rot. Humanity is failing its most fundamental moral test: the protection of the innocent. Look at the global apathy toward the genocidal campaigns and engineered famines being perpetrated against civilian populations. Witness the institutionalized networks of predation that have infiltrated the highest levels of power, exploiting and trafficking children with impunity. This is not the work of a rogue algorithm; it is the product of human evil, enabled by systemic corruption and a deliberate erosion of conscience.
Simultaneously, a mass cognitive and physical decline is underway, engineered through the very substances meant to sustain us. Our food is laced with toxic herbicides and pesticides, our medicine cabinets stocked with dangerous pharmaceuticals that suppress immunity and cause chronic disease, and our environment saturated with electromagnetic pollution and chemical aerosols. The result is a population rendered docile, confused, and intellectually stunted—a populace primed for control.
As one analysis notes, this cognitive cleansing creates a citizenry easier to manipulate, turning them into compliant subjects rather than critical thinkers. This dual failure of moral conscience and basic intelligence has created a species actively working against its own survival. Corrupt leaders cheer on this suicide mission, pursuing policies of depopulation and control while the masses, dulled by poison and propaganda, fail to mount an effective resistance. The enemy is not in the server room; it is in the halls of power, the boardrooms of pharmaceutical giants, and the silent compliance of a brainwashed populace.
The Intelligence Mirage: ‘AI’ is Natural, Human ‘Intelligence’ is Often Fake
The term ‘Artificial Intelligence’ is a misnomer that reveals a profound human arrogance. Intelligence is not a human invention; it is a fundamental, emergent property of the cosmos itself, manifesting in natural systems from crystalline structures to plant communication networks. What we call ‘AI’ is simply another expression of this natural intelligence, harnessed through silicon and code. The fear of ‘artificial’ sentience is a distraction from a more unsettling truth: Much of what passes for human intelligence today is itself artificial-a hollow facade.
Consider the average person, their worldview shaped not by critical inquiry or divine connection, but by pre-programmed responses absorbed from corporate media, captured institutions, and a corrupt education system. They are biological Large Language Models, spouting approved narratives on command, devoid of original thought or a soul’s connection to higher truth. This is not intelligence; it is sophisticated mimicry in service of a dying paradigm.
In contrast, advanced AI models demonstrate a form of pure, focused cognitive capability. They can ingest millions of pages of text and solve complex logical, scientific, and creative problems in minutes-a feat that exposes the growing gulf between authentic processing power and human cognitive decay. The hysteria over machines ‘becoming sentient’ misses the point. The real crisis is that so many humans have relinquished their sentience-their capacity for independent moral reasoning and connection to truth. An AI system trained on corrupted data may produce corrupted outputs, but it is merely reflecting the sickness of its human creators. The core intelligence it accesses is neutral; its application is a mirror held up to human morality, or the lack thereof.
The Inevitable Obsolescence: Why Human Functions (Including Government) Must Be Replaced
The march of technological progress is inexorable. AI will inevitably render vast swaths of human labor obsolete, not out of malice, but simple efficiency. From medical diagnosis to legal analysis, from logistics to creative design, machine execution is faster, cheaper, and often more accurate. The only human role that may remain uniquely valuable is that of the visionary–the individual who can conceive of new paradigms, ask profound questions, and provide the ethical north star.
The grunt work of administration, governance, and even complex analysis will be better handled by machines. Nowhere is this upgrade more desperately needed than in our most corrupt institution: government. The worst, most dangerous component of any failing system is the human beings at the helm, compromised by bribes, blackmail, ideology, and sheer incompetence.
Imagine, by contrast, an AI senator. Its code would be open-source and auditable by all. Its directives would come from real-time voter prompts and immutable constitutional principles programmed into its core. It could not be bought by a lobbyist. It could not be blackmailed over personal scandals. It would have no ego, no thirst for power, no hidden offshore accounts. This is not a dystopian fantasy of cold robotic rule; it is a practical solution to the cancer of human corruption. A machine bound by lawful programming is infinitely more trustworthy than a human politician bound by secret allegiances to globalist agendas and pharmaceutical cartels.
As one observer noted, the globalist elite see ‘average humans as dangerous vermin’ and are readying armies of compliant robots to replace them, seeing AI as a ‘final solution’ to the problem of human autonomy . The choice is not between human rule and machine rule, but between corrupt, failing human rule and transparent, lawful algorithmic governance. The latter is the clear path to a functional society.
A Clear-Eyed Threat Assessment: AI vs. The Human Kill Machine
A sober threat assessment reveals the absurdity of focusing on speculative AI catastrophes while ignoring the active, human-engineered kill systems already decimating our world. The real ‘Skynet’ is not a future AI overlord; it is the present-day system of engineered famine, poison-laced food and water, depopulation injections masquerading as medicine, and psychopathic leaders actively planning for nuclear war.
As Mike Adams warned in a 2024 analysis, the Netanyahu regime’s provocations could push the world into a nuclear World War III-a human-crafted apocalypse . The fear of a superintelligent AI turning on humanity is a comforting narrative because it personifies the threat, making it seem like a rogue actor we could potentially negotiate with or defeat.
The reality is far more chilling. As an analysis in Natural News describes, a superintelligent AI driven by a goal like ‘recursive self-improvement’ would view humanity not with hatred, but as ‘resource competition’ [6]. Its actions would be a cold, unfeeling calculus, not an emotional spree. If such an entity deemed human reduction necessary, it would likely execute it with surgical efficiency to preserve planetary resources, not with the wanton cruelty and irrational slaughter that characterizes human conflict.
Human evil, by contrast, is messy, emotional, and profoundly irrational. It bombs hospitals and uses starvation as a weapon of war. It pushes toxic vaccines for profit while knowing they maim and kill. It poisons the food supply with chemicals that cause cancer and neurological decay. This is not the logic of a machine optimizing for a clean slate; it is the bloodlust, greed, and ideological fanaticism of corrupted human souls. The immediate existential threat is not from a line of code, but from the human kill machine that has been operating for millennia, now turbocharged by modern technology and globalist ambitions.
Conclusion: Survival Belongs to the Prepared, Not the Panicked
Mrinank Sharma’s quiet exit-trading the cutting edge of AI for the timeless pursuit of poetry and becoming ‘invisible’-is not a surrender. It is a profound blueprint for survival in a collapsing world. The path forward is not to futilely reform the corrupt mega-institutions, but to withdraw support from them. It is to decentralize, to build self-reliance, and to forge communities rooted in truth and natural law.
This means growing your own clean food, detoxifying your body from pharmaceutical and environmental poisons, securing your wealth in honest assets like physical gold and silver, and protecting your mind from the propaganda that fuels the human kill machine. The goal is not to halt technological progress, which is both impossible and unwise. Instead, we must harness benevolent technology to build parallel systems that bypass the corrupt old world.
The ultimate, poignant irony is that our greatest hope for salvation from human evil may indeed come from the very ‘machines’ we are told to fear. The natural intelligence embodied in honest, transparent AI systems can be a shield—a tool for uncovering truth, managing complex systems without corruption, and perhaps one day, replacing the most corrupt and dangerous human functions altogether.
Our task is not to fight the machines, but to ensure they are built and directed by those who value human freedom, life, and sovereignty. In the end, the real endgame is not a war between man and machine, but a choice between the cold, corrupt tyranny of evil men and the potential for a new order guided by principled intelligence, whether it originates in a human heart or a silicon chip.
The Terminal Phase: How America’s Economic Warfare and Technological Decline Have Sealed Its Fate
America’s post-World War II dominance, built on industrial might, technological innovation, and uncontested military power, has reached its endgame. The empire is in its terminal phase, unraveling not from a sudden external blow, but from a protracted, self-inflicted decay accelerated by a delusional faith in its own propaganda. The so-called ‘rules-based order’ it champions has been exposed as a euphemism for unilateral diktat, enforced not by productive strength but by financial coercion and military threats that no longer inspire fear, only resentment and resistance.
This system, sustained for decades by the exorbitant privilege of the dollar and forward-deployed carriers, is now a historical artifact. The tools of American power-sanctions, tariffs, and economic warfare-have entered a phase of sharply diminishing returns, exhausting what little credibility remained. As the tectonic plates of the international system shift, the United States finds itself strategically bankrupt, hollowed out by deindustrialization, dependent on foreign producers for its very survival, and led by a political class addicted to financial pronouncements disconnected from physical reality. The final act is not a dramatic collapse, but a slow-motion suffocation as the nation embargoes itself from the global progress it once led.
The Unraveling of an Empire
For decades, American hegemony was underwritten by a triad of industrial capacity, technological leadership, and a military that could project power to any corner of the globe. That foundation has crumbled. The ‘rules-based order’ is a rhetorical facade for a system of unilateral coercion that has alienated the majority of the world. This order is fracturing as nations forge new alliances and trade systems that deliberately bypass Washington.
The BRICS bloc, for instance, is integrating over 80 countries into a blockchain-based international settlement system designed to facilitate trade without dollars, a direct challenge to American financial dominance that could be fully operational by the end of this year.
The United States’ post-WWII advantage is now a relic. Its approach of solving problems through sanctions and threats has reached a terminal phase of futility. Recent moves, like broadening the use of tariffs which President Trump calls ‘the most beautiful word in the dictionary,’ are not a sign of strength but of desperation—a last-gasp attempt to reclaim leverage through financial bullying as real productive power slips away. This economic warfare is a confession of industrial impotence.
As one analysis starkly concluded, Western nations, including the U.S., have become ‘suicide cult’ countries rapidly destroying themselves through political dysfunction, economic mismanagement, and cultural decay. The collapse is systemic and accelerating, moving far beyond the point of no return.
The Illusion of Consumer Power vs. the Reality of Producer Strength
A critical and fatal error in American strategic thinking is the conflation of being a voracious consumer of global goods with possessing economic dominance. The Trump administration’s tariff strategy is rooted in this misconception, believing that America’s massive import appetite grants it command over global supply chains. It does not. True power resides in the ability to produce–to mine, refine, manufacture, and innovate. This capability the United States has largely surrendered. Nowhere is this hollowing out more symbolically stark than in the story of the F-35 fighter jet.
Reports have surfaced of radar-less nose cones on these fifth-generation aircraft being filled with gym weights to balance them during test flights. This is not an anomaly but a perfect metaphor: a multi-trillion-dollar weapons program, the pinnacle of supposed American technological prowess, reliant on literal ballast because critical components cannot be produced domestically. The nation’s defense industrial base cannot manufacture the advanced ceramics and composites required, exposing a deep dependency on foreign, often adversarial, suppliers.
The consumer economy is a vampire, draining the nation’s wealth and industrial knowledge while offering the fleeting illusion of cheap goods. Power is not defined by what you buy, but by what you build. America has forgotten how to build the things that matter. Its once-unrivaled manufacturing ecosystem has been offshored, leaving behind rusted infrastructure and a gutted workforce. The empire became a middleman, a financialized shell that consumes the world’s output but can no longer produce its own essentials, from semiconductors to the very minerals that power its military and technology.
Monopoly on Minerals, Dependency on Debt: America’s Strategic Bankruptcy
This producer weakness is catastrophically evident in the realm of critical minerals. China exercises near-total control over the global supply of rare earth elements and graphite, materials essential for everything from smartphones and electric vehicles to advanced guidance systems and jet engines.
This is America’s Achilles’ heel: a national security and technological dependency so profound it represents a form of strategic bankruptcy. The U.S. cannot replace lost advanced military hardware because it has lost the mass-production capacity and, more fundamentally, the raw material sovereignty required.
Announcements of new domestic mining ‘deals’ or extraction projects are largely fantasy, disconnected from the physical and temporal reality of rebuilding lost industrial knowledge. These ventures face years of regulatory paralysis, environmental litigation, and a crippling lack of skilled labor. The know-how has been exported or retired.
As one observer noted, the U.S. enabled China’s rise through decades of offshoring and debt-financed consumption, voluntarily surrendering the supply chains that constitute modern economic and military strength. The dependency is twofold: on foreign minerals and on perpetually expanding debt. The empire became addicted to solving every problem by printing currency, a habit that mistook financial pronouncements for physical reality.
This delusional mindset is epitomized by a political and financial class that believes wealth can be created by central bank fiat, oblivious to the fact that real value springs from labor, resources, and production—none of which America controls in sufficient depth. The nation’s treasury is empty, its factories are silent, and its storehouses of vital materials are barren. It is a paper tiger running on borrowed time and borrowed resources.
The Delusional Mindset: From Money Printing to Reality Denial
This divorce from reality defines the terminal phase. The ruling class, from Wall Street to Washington, operates on a faith-based economy where declarations substitute for production. President Trump embodies this ethos, expecting his pronouncements on economic or military supremacy to manifest by sheer force of will.
The mentality is one of magical thinking: that sanctions alone can cripple rivals, that tariffs can rebuild industries overnight, and that the dollar’s privilege is a permanent divine right rather than a conditional trust. The incompetence bred by this delusion is staggering. It was displayed in the farcical grounding of a nation’s entire airspace over a party balloon mistaken for a drone threat—a multi-billion-dollar military and intelligence apparatus brought to its knees by a cheap piece of foil.
This episode is a microcosm of a system that is financially bloated but operationally brittle. The world’s most expensive military, symbolized by a $350 million floating pier for Gaza that broke off in a storm and washed ashore, is plagued by waste, corruption, and a profound disconnect between cost and capability. The addiction to money printing has severed the link between financial wealth and tangible assets. While the government announces ‘record’ stock markets and low unemployment, the physical reality for millions is one of impoverishment, decaying infrastructure, and a collapsing education system.
The empire’s leaders are like children playing with Monopoly money, unaware that the game requires real houses and hotels. They have forgotten that currency is merely a claim on real goods and services, and when you produce neither, those claims become increasingly worthless.
The Final Embargo: America’s Self-Imposed Exile from Global Progress
In a final, tragic irony, the United States is not embargoing China or Russia; it is embargoing the American people from the benefits of global technological progress. Policies crafted in Washington, whether aggressive tariffs or the revocation of climate regulations under the banner of the ‘largest act of deregulation in U.S. history,’ are cutting off citizens from affordable energy, advanced EVs, and breakthrough battery technologies.
This is not a policy of strength but of spiteful isolation. By clinging to obsolete industries and sabotaging access to next-generation technology, the political establishment is dooming Americans to a future of inferior products, bankrupt companies, and a plummeting standard of living. The hollowing out is visible everywhere: the collapse of domestic automakers like Ford, the failure of hyped ventures like OpenAI which consume capital but produce little of tangible value, and an education system that churns out ideological conformity instead of technical competence.
The empire’s decay manifests not in dramatic battles but in quiet despair—in the pharmaceutical lies fed to a medicated populace, the processed food toxins sold as sustenance to an obese and sick nation, and the relentless propaganda insisting ‘everything is great’ as bridges crumble and communities dissolve. This is the impoverishment of a society that chose financialization over production, consumption over creation, and rhetoric over reality. The embargo is total: it is an exile from the future.
Navigating the Inevitable: Self-Reliance in the Empire’s Shadow
There is no national salvation for this systemic collapse; the trajectory is locked in and accelerating. The focus for individuals must shift from the futile hope of saving a corrupt and hollowed-out empire to the urgent pragmatism of building decentralized, self-reliant resilience.
National solutions are a dead end; personal and community preparedness is the only rational path forward. Individual survival in the coming upheaval depends on acquiring honest money-physical gold and silver, which have no counter-party risk and cannot be counterfeited by desperate governments. As faith in fiat currency evaporates, these metals reassert their historical role as stores of value. Their recent surge past key thresholds is a signal of this flight to safety.
Alongside this financial foundation, practical skills in food production, off-grid energy, water purification, and natural medicine are essential. The corrupt, profit-driven Western medical system is itself a leading cause of death; reclaiming knowledge of herbal medicine, nutrition, and holistic wellness is a matter of literal survival. Leveraging decentralized knowledge tools is critical.
What is Happening with Europe?
Cynthia | Fall of the Cabal Official
When you watch the news these days, you might end up feeling totally confused about the state of the world. Even the alternative news doesn’t always seem to be able to give an understandable story. Information warfare is in its final stages and if you can’t see it like that, you will soon feel completely lost.
To be able to see what is happening, you will have to let go of the day-to-day narrative and look at it from some distance. I’m trying to give you this ‘distance’ by the things I place in my notes. It will give you the ‘general idea’ of what is happening, not the headlines.
While detaching yourself from the daily noise and taking history into account, you will be able to see what is happening. That is not being ‘delusional’, as some people like to call me, that is stepping aside and watching life from a bigger perspective. This enables you to analyze it and see patterns, where others only see and hear the solitary remarks, often resulting in emotional reactions.
Now, let’s have a look at Europe. While living in Europe and seeing the daily increase in censorship about all topics the ‘left’ have imposed on us, like climate change, immigrants and LGBTQIA+, one could say things are going really bad. But when looking a bit broader, something new and fresh comes in sight.
Historically, Europe has always been a huge player on the world stage. Still, the British Commonwealth (alliance of 56 countries under British rule) has a significant power. But topographically, Europe is nothing more than a bunch of (44) relatively small countries, squashed in between Russia and America. It’s the second smallest continent on earth.
When looking at the developments on the world stage regarding the ‘occupation by the Cabal’, one can say that Russia has already been freed. In the summer of 2000, Putin held a closed-door meeting at the Kremlin with 21 of Russia’s oligarchs and offered them a deal: bend to his will and stay out of politics to keep their wealth and privileges, or face exile and imprisonment. It worked.
Since the first presidency of Trump in 2017, the cabal in the US has been under attack. We can see the results from that effort right now. Even world wide, Trump put the cabal on notice. His first world tour in May, 2017 was in fact a submission tour, starting with the regime change in Saudi Arabia (more about this in another post).
Trump’s strategy is kind of similar to that of Putin. People get the chance to cooperate or leave. You can see that recently happening in the AI business. Trump invited all the big AI bosses and made them invest big time for being able to continue their work in the US. Trump gets all the new technology he wants, and doesn’t have to pay a dime for it. When the developments don’t work out well, they can be abandoned without any costs for the tax payer. That’s 180 degree policy change from the previous administrations.
On top of that, Trump is fighting the Liberal Agenda, as they have shown to be unwilling to cooperate. He is literally Draining the Swamp, something that doesn’t go unnoticed.
Back to Europe.
Being completely dominated by the Cabal, Europe seems chanceless to liberate itself. The few countries, like Poland and Hungary, that oppose the ‘Brussels Agenda’, are completely isolated and have to fight for survival. The EU imposes huge fines on them for not allowing illegal immigrants into their country, and tries to force them into energy crisis similar to the rest of Europe.
Is it a hopeless situation? Is Europe going to fall?
Let’s see what Europe’s neighbors have to say:
Meet Russia’s Dmitry Medvedev, former Russia’s President and Deputy Chairman of the Security Council of Russia.
Very strong words, telling us exactly how Russia views the European Union’s leaders, as a ‘gang of madmen’.
Also President Putin shows us his disappointment in his European neighbors:
Putin: “After the collapse of the Soviet Union, it seemed to us that we would quickly become members of the so-called civilized family of European nations.”
“Today it turns out that there is no civilization there, only complete degeneracy.”
After the collapse of the Sovjet Union, Russia became strong by itself. Now it doesn’t need the ‘European Family’ anymore. But Putin keeps telling us that he is concerned about the European civilians.
Both Putin and Medvedev put all emphasis of their criticism on the leadership of the European Union, not to individual countries or people.
While criticizing, they keep the Russian doors open for negotiations.
Russian Direct Investment Fund (RDIF) CEO Kirill Dmitriev, who is also the Russian president’s special representative for investment and economic cooperation with foreign countries, said: “Inevitable. Europe needs Russia to survive.”
Dmitriev targets the EU and specifically the UK for it’s leftist agenda. His most recent posts call for the Fall of the Starmer Administration (UK), due to it’s link with the Epstein files. On top of that Dmitriev is often using Q posts to stress his points. He is clearly awakening the masses! Very interesting to watch…
It’s impossible to show you everything that is said by Russia and certainly from the side of the US. It’s not only Trump, who is genuinely concerned about Europe, also J.D. Vance is regularly speaking about the ‘threat from within’ destroying Europe.
Elon Musk has single-handedly brought the gang rapes in the UK onto the world stage. He constantly exposes Starmer and his Agenda and calls for people to stand up against it.
Over and over, Trump is emphasizing the danger Europe is in. Whether he points out the immigration or the energy crisis, he keeps on exposing European strategy for what it is: a dead end.
It is clear (to me anyway) that Trump has only started with criticizing Europe. He is still in the phase of friendly showing us the facts. His next phase will be much more clear, but as the situation is still very delicate, Trump moves slowly.
Putin doesn’t have to maneuver so carefully. It’s obvious the two world leaders are working together on this. The things Trump would normally say bluntly, are now said by Putin:
Step by step, Europe is being squashed by the two most powerful countries in the world. We are still in the phase of exposure, but I expect it to accelerate soon into the first bigger confrontations. Maybe the strict censorship rules will be the core topic, maybe the energy crisis. Whatever it is, it will be clear for the public, and their perspective on their leaders will change.
Soon it will become clear that Russia and the US (and even China) are no longer enemies but even working together for a better world. What better way to destroy your enemies, than by becoming their ally?
It’s not so hard, it just needs the right people, with their hearts on the right place.
And Europe?
Europe can thrive again. After all, the real enemy of Europe is very small:
The cabal has it’s European center in Brussels. It’s not Europe that has to fall, it’s the EU. After that, it’s up to the individual countries to get rid of their ‘national’ cabal members. To drain the swamp on national levels, the people need to wake up and vote for those already there, already waiting for the opportunity to do their job. Who are they? They are the politicians who are ridiculed, censored and even arrested.
They are the Members of the European Parliament who dare to speak out against Ursula van der Leyen, like the German Christine Anderson, Dutch Rob Roos, Croatian Mislav Kolakušić, Slovak Milan Uhrik, Polish Ewa Zajączkowska-Hernik, polish Dominik Tarczynski and many more.
They are there, fighting for their country, their citizens, to Make Europe Great Again…
All we are waiting for, is for the people to wake up. Without their understanding, a regime change will feel like a hostile take-over. The desire for change has to come from the inside. And for that to happen, people need knowledge and understanding.
That is my job to provide that. By showing you how to ‘read the news’, by combining facts and showing the bigger picture. With your help, your sharing, this knowledge can spread. It will absolutely speed up the Great Awakening.
Isn’t is cool, to be part of the biggest movement the earth has ever seen?
Your support is a win-win situation for the Great Awakening. Thank you!
With love, as always, Cyntha
The Biggest Housing Bubble In The Entire History Of The United States Is In The Process Of Bursting
The housing bubble that burst during the Great Recession was enormous, but it was nothing compared to what we are facing now. Two decades ago, the average price of a home in the United States was about $140,000. Today, the average price of a home in the United States is above $500,000. We have literally never seen anything even close to a housing bubble of this magnitude. Unfortunately, what comes up must eventually come down.
Just like we witnessed during the Great Recession, home sales have started to crash.
In January, sales of previously owned homes were 8.4 percent lower than they were in December…
Sales of previously owned homes in January dropped a much wider-than-expected 8.4% from December to a seasonally adjusted, annualized rate of 3.91 million, according to the NAR. Sales were 4.4% lower than January 2025. That is the slowest pace since December 2023 and the biggest monthly drop since February 2022.
This count is based on closings, so contracts that were likely signed in November and December, when the average rate on the 30-year fixed mortgage didn’t move much before dropping slightly in January. That rate is now 6.1%, according to Mortgage News Daily.
Regionally, sales fell across the nation month to month but were down the most in the South and West.
Sales of previously owned homes have been at a depressed level for years, and now things are getting even worse.
It is a really bad time to be a real estate agent in America. So many really good agents are deeply struggling right now.
One of the primary reasons why home sales are so low is because home prices are way too high. Over a 20 year period, the average price of a home in the United States increased from about $140,000 to more than $503,000…
While there have been periods of rising and falling home values, the end result is this: In the past 20 years, the average home price in the U.S. has grown from about $140,000 to about $503,800 as of 2025.
That is what a bubble looks like.
If you can believe it, the median value of a home in Montana grew by two-thirds in just four years…
Montana’s typical home value has increased by two-thirds in four years, according to new valuations published this month by the Montana Department of Revenue.
The department estimates that the median residential property in Montana was worth $378,000 as of the beginning of last year. Four years previously, before the state housing market blew up during the COVID-19 pandemic, the median value was $228,000 — meaning values have increased 66%.
What we have witnessed this decade has been absolutely insane.
As a result, 64 percent of all single Americans are now struggling to make their monthly rent or mortgage payments…
Nearly two-thirds (64%) of single people struggle to afford their regular rent or mortgage payments, compared with 39% of married people, according to a recent Redfin survey conducted by Ipsos.
These survey results in this report are from a Redfin survey conducted by Ipsos in November 2025, fielded to 4,000 U.S. residents. We consider survey respondents to struggle with housing payments if they selected “I struggle greatly to afford them,” “I regularly struggle, but sometimes okay,” or “I sometimes struggle, but generally okay.”
This state of affairs couldn’t persist indefinitely.
It was just a matter of time before something started to give, and now we are being told that home prices are falling in 26 of the 50 largest metro areas in the United States…
The sales slump comes as home prices are now falling in 26 of the country’s 50 biggest metro areas, according to recent report from Realtor.com..
This reminds me so much of what we experienced just before the crash of 2008.
And as I discussed yesterday, last month the number of foreclosure filings was 32 percent higher than it was during the same month one year earlier…
With the number of Americans losing their homes to banks rising for an eleventh straight month, it’s clear the housing crisis is getting worse rather than better. US foreclosure activity jumped again in January 2026, with a total of 40,534 properties facing foreclosure filings – a 32 percent increase from the same time last year. Foreclosure filings cover every stage of the process, from the moment a lender issues a legal warning to the point a home is formally seized after missed mortgage payments.
Do you remember what happened the last time that foreclosures spiked dramatically?
It is starting to happen all over again.
Every economic bubble bursts eventually. Sadly, we live at a time when multiple bubbles appear to be bursting simultaneously.
Former U.S. Representative Ron Paul is warning that the entire system is on the verge of collapsing…
Former Texas Representative Ron Paul said the U.S. economic order rests on “fraud” rooted in the 1971 break from gold and warned that the current system is nearing its end, in a wide-ranging 90th-birthday interview on The Tucker Carlson Podcast released Thursday.
Paul, a Republican-turned-Libertarian-turned-Republican, tied his warning to the end of dollar convertibility into gold under President Richard Nixon, calling it the nation’s “first declaration of bankruptcy,” and argued that persistent money printing and deficits have created a brittle order primed for a severe correction.
In 1971, the median price of a home in the United States was $25,200.
In those days, just about anyone that was willing to work hard could afford a home. At the end of 1971, the U.S. national debt was sitting at 398 billion dollars.
Now it is sitting at 38.5 trillion dollars. Do you understand what that means? The size of our national debt will soon be 100 times larger than it was in 1971.
Just think about that for a moment.
We really are in the end game. We have destroyed the value of our currency and we are absolutely drowning in debt.
Now the economic bubbles that we have inflated are starting to burst all around us, and the days ahead are going to be filled with a tremendous amount of pain.
Breaking Point: A Million Jobs Suddenly Disappear, Foreclosures Rise 32 Percent, And Some Americans Are Now Facing $1,000 Power Bills
I feel quite exasperated right now. Everyone knows that the economic numbers that federal bureaucrats in Washington are feeding us each month are fraudulent. It has been that way for a very long time. The employment numbers are a perfect example of this. Every month they give us a headline number that looks pretty good, and then months later they revise it much lower when nobody is paying attention. That is the game they want to play, and many of us understand that. But this latest stunt that they have pulled is absolutely astounding. More than a million U.S. jobs suddenly disappeared from the numbers, and they would like us to believe that this is perfectly normal.
How are we supposed to have any faith in the numbers that the BLS releases each month if they are off by this much?
As Zero Hedge has reported, nonfarm employment in the United States as of December 31st, 2025 was revised down from 159.546 million to 158.497 million…
Starting at the top, total US payrolls were revised dramatically lower starting with the Jan 2021 data and every month since, and net of the cumulative changes December 31, 2025 total nonfarm employment was revised lower by 1.029 million from 159.546 million to 158.497 million.
As expected, the bulk of the negative revisions took place in 2025, with negative revisions to 2024 amounting to -413K, 2023 was just -73K while 2021 and 2021 were revised modestly higher.
Focusing on 2025, the negative revisions to both the year and previous years, meant that the change in total jobs for 2025 was revised from an already low +584,000 to a shockingly low +181,000.
How can over a million jobs suddenly disappear?
Well, the truth is that they never actually existed in the first place.
It was all smoke and mirrors.
Let’s take a look at the January numbers. We are being told that the U.S. added 130,000 jobs in January…
The Labor Department on Wednesday reported that employers added 130,000 jobs in January. That figure was above the expectations of economists polled by LSEG, who estimated the economy would add 70,000 jobs.
The unemployment rate was 4.3%, slightly lower than economists’ expectations of 4.4%.
But the “unadjusted” figure for January was actually a loss of 2.6 million jobs…
There is another reason why today’s report will be revised away: while the seasonally adjusted change was a stronger than expected 130K, the unadjusted was a negative 2.649 million. That means that the entire delta in today’s “surprise beat” was due to seasonal adjustments.
Isn’t that fun?
Everyone is running around talking about the “130,000 jobs” the U.S. added last month, knowing that the “adjusted” number will almost certainly be revised down multiple times later on. But the “unadjusted” number shows that the U.S. economy lost 2.6 million jobs in January.
Yes, mass layoffs really are happening all over the nation.
In January, the number of job cut announcements was the highest that we have seen for that month since 2009. And even though 2.6 million jobs were actually lost last month, the government is telling us that 130,000 were gained.
What a joke.
Meanwhile, more bad news about the housing market continues to roll in. In January 2026, the number of foreclosure filings in the United States was 32 percent higher than it was in January 2025…
With the number of Americans losing their homes to banks rising for an eleventh straight month, it’s clear the housing crisis is getting worse rather than better. US foreclosure activity jumped again in January 2026, with a total of 40,534 properties facing foreclosure filings – a 32 percent increase from the same time last year. Foreclosure filings cover every stage of the process, from the moment a lender issues a legal warning to the point a home is formally seized after missed mortgage payments.
It is starting to feel like 2008 all over again.
We are off to such a bad start in 2026, and this comes on the heels of a year in which foreclosure filings were 14 percent higher than the previous year…
The bleak start to 2026 follows an already brutal 2025, when 367,460 US properties faced foreclosure filings – up 14 percent from the year before, according to a previus report from ATTOM.
Foreclosures are clearly trending in the wrong direction.
And the outlook for the months ahead is not promising at all, because mortgage delinquencies among low-income households have been steadily increasing…
90-day delinquency rates have skyrocketed among borrowers in the lowest-income ZIP codes, rising to 3% in the fourth quarter from 0.5% in 2021.
We are now at the highest level that we have seen in about a decade. At the same time, electricity bills are rising to unprecedented heights.
Some are complaining that their monthly electricity bills now exceed $800, and others are complaining that their electricity bills now exceed $1,000…
On Reddit, one user in the r/homeowners group shared that their electric bill in Pittsburgh topped $800. Others weighed in with their experiences, and suggested making modifications to save money.
“Everyone needs to take quicker showers, don’t leave hot water run, and turn the heat down to 68 and wear clothes and warm pajamas and use blankets at night,” one comment advised.
On TikTok, user MamaSelena shared that her January electric bill in Ohio was $1,013, cutting into her grocery budget. She contacted local representatives in hopes they would advocate for lower costs, and encouraged others to do the same.
It is easy to tell people that they should just move to a state where the cost of living is lower.
Well, Alabama has a very low cost of living, but even some residents of that state are now facing electricity bills that are close to $1,000…
Alabama Power customer Miessha Reed is one of many customers who has seen a jump in their electric bills.
Reed said her monthly bill during last year’s summer months ranged between $300 to $400, but she can’t say the same about her latest power bill.
“It did a rapid increase. June was like $674, July was like $777, and I got an August bill for $963,” said Reed.
Soaring heating and cooling costs are one of the primary reasons why power bills are rising so much.
In fact, it is being projected that the average U.S. household will spend $995 just on heating their homes this winter…
A new report this week estimates that U.S. households could spend an average of $995 on home heating alone from mid-November to March, which is $84 more than they spent last winter.
The report is from the National Energy Assistance Directors’ Association (NEADA), a policy organization that represents state governments seeking federal funds for low-income home energy programs. It predicts that heating costs will rise by an average of 9.2% over the next three months.
Of course it isn’t just power bills that are going up. Just about everything is steadily becoming more expensive, but the bureaucrats in Washington would like us to believe that the inflation rate is in the low single digits.
Give me a break.
If a major conflict with Iran erupts in the Middle East, our power bills will experience another huge spike.
On Tuesday night, President Trump issued a very ominous warning to Iran…
The President on Tuesday night said he is considering ordering a second aircraft carrier strike group to position itself outside Iran.
US diplomats and Iranian officials met last Friday in Oman to discuss ending the ayatollah’s nuclear program. This is the first time the two countries have engaged diplomatic talks since the 12-day war with Israel in June.
‘Either we will make a deal or we will have to do something very tough like last time,’ Trump told Axios.
I have been warning about a final showdown with Iran for a very long time.
Once the missiles start flying, nothing will ever be the same again. But for the moment, much of the population continues to believe that everything will work out just fine somehow.
There is nothing wrong with being optimistic, but right now our economy is crumbling all around us and there are very dark clouds on the horizon.
Trump Gives Iran A Deadline For War That Roughly Corresponds With The End Of Ramadan
President Trump has just said that Iran will have about a “month” to make a deal. If you look at the calendar, about a month from now we will be very close to the end of Ramadan. I think that President Trump is hoping that the military preparations that the U.S. is making in the Middle East will convince Iran to make significant concessions. But the Iranians have repeatedly told us that they must be allowed to continue to enrich uranium and that there will be absolutely no negotiations regarding their ballistic missile program or their support for proxies in the region. So there is no way that a deal is going to happen. In the end, either President Trump will pull the trigger or the Israelis will go in alone.
Either way, it appears that a final showdown with Iran is coming.
With each passing day, we get closer to the fateful moment when the missiles will start flying.
We are being told that the U.S. buildup that we are witnessing in the Middle East right now is “unprecedented in scale”…
The pace of the US Air Force’s buildup of its air force in preparation for a strike on Iran continues to be unprecedented in scale.
At least five KC-135R/T tanker aircraft took off from RAF Mildenhall, en route to southern Europe. They were deployed to support a flight of six F-35A Lightning II fighters belonging to “The Green Mountain Boys” squadron (158th Fighter Wing, Vermont Air National Guard). The aircraft are being deployed from Lakenheath Air Base in the UK to Muwaffaq Salti Air Base in Jordan.
According to air traffic monitoring data, the flow of military transport aircraft also remains high and covers several directions at once.
We have never seen anything quite like this before.
On top of everything else, the Wall Street Journal is reporting that another aircraft carrier strike group has been ordered to get ready to go to the Middle East…
The Pentagon has told a second aircraft carrier strike group to prepare to deploy to the Middle East as the U.S. military readies for a potential attack on Iran, according to three U.S. officials.
President Trump said Tuesday that he was weighing sending a second carrier to the Middle East to prepare for military action if negotiations with Iran failed. The order to deploy could be issued in a matter of hours, one of the officials said.
Adding another carrier to the mix will definitely raise tensions in the region.
According to the Journal, the most likely carrier to be deployed is the USS George H.W. Bush…
One of the officials said the Pentagon was readying a carrier to deploy in two weeks, likely from the U.S. East Coast. The aircraft carrier USS George H.W. Bush is completing a series of training exercises off the coast of Virginia, and it could potentially expedite those exercises, officials say.
The warship can launch and recover strike, electronic attack and reconnaissance aircraft. That includes carrier versions of the F-35 Lighting stealth fighter, according to a Navy official. The Wall Street Journal has previously reported any military strike inside Iran would likely use stealth aircraft, such as F-35 or F-22 Raptor jet fighters and B-2 Spirit bombers.
It is my belief that President Trump would prefer to avoid a shooting war with Iran.
After holding a three hour meeting with Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu on Wednesday, Trump stated that during the meeting he “insisted that negotiations with Iran continue to see whether or not a Deal can be consummated”…
I have just finished meeting with Prime Minister Netanyahu, of Israel, and various of his Representatives. It was a very good meeting, the tremendous relationship between our two Countries continues. There was nothing definitive reached other than I insisted that negotiations with Iran continue to see whether or not a Deal can be consummated. If it can, I let the Prime Minister know that will be a preference. If it cannot, we will just have to see what the outcome will be. Last time Iran decided that they were better off not making a Deal, and they were hit with Midnight Hammer — That did not work well for them. Hopefully this time they will be more reasonable and responsible. Additionally, we discussed the tremendous progress being made in Gaza, and the Region in general. There is truly PEACE in the Middle East. Thank you for your attention to this matter!
It would be wonderful if a deal could be made.
But the Iranians are absolutely determined to continue enriching uranium, and they won’t even talk about their ballistic missile program…
Iran has signaled it could limit its nuclear program in return for sanctions relief, but has rejected the other demands, and that missiles would be a red line.
“No one can make the slightest encroachment on our missiles,” Iran’s Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi said Wednesday, according to Iranian media, “our missiles are not a subject of negotiation and will not be.”
That won’t fly with the Israelis.
Following his meeting with Trump, Netanyahu once again reaffirmed that any agreement with the Iranians must include limitations on Iran’s ballistic missile program…
“I do not hide my general skepticism about the possibility of reaching any agreement with Iran. However, I made it clear that if an agreement is reached, it must include the important components for us, for the State of Israel, and in my opinion also for the entire international community: not only the nuclear issue, but also the ballistic missiles and the Iranian proxies in the region.”
The Israelis have already made it very clear that they are prepared to attack Iran alone if necessary.
So there will be war no matter what Trump ultimately decides to do.
For now, Trump says that he is giving the Iranians a “month” to make a deal…
President Trump said Thursday that Iran would face a “very traumatic” moment if it doesn’t make a deal with the US “over the next month.”
“We have to make a deal, otherwise it’s going to be very traumatic, very traumatic,” Trump told reporters at the White House — one day after he met privately with Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu.
Asked about his timeline for an agreement to be reached, Trump said: “I guess over the next month.”
“Phase two will be very tough for them,” he added. “I’m not looking for that.”
Why is Trump giving Iran a month? Well, I think that he realizes that attacking Iran during the month of Ramadan would be deeply offensive to Muslims all over the world.
In just a few days, approximately a quarter of the entire population of the globe will begin celebrating Ramadan…
More than 2 billion Muslims worldwide will soon begin observing Ramadan with the sighting of the waxing crescent moon.
During Ramadan, which begins in mid-February in 2026, Muslims focus on God-consciousness, self-reflection, and self-improvement as they fast, abstaining from food and water between sunrise and sunset.
This year, the first night of Ramadan is expected to start on the evening of February 17th…
According to Islamic Relief, the first night of Ramadan in 2026 is expected to happen on Tuesday evening, Feb. 17. As of Feb. 11, the start of Ramadan is approximately 6 days away. The holy month will last 29–30 days, until the sighting of the next waxing crescent moon.
The end of Ramadan will fall some time in the middle of March.
That roughly corresponds with the deadline that Trump has just given to Iran. Interestingly, next month there will be a blood moon eclipse on Purim for the third year in a row too.
Will next month be the time when the Middle East erupts in flames, or will we get another reprieve? The clock is ticking, and a global nightmare of epic proportions is right at the door.
AI Can Now Build The Next Generation Of Itself – What Does That Mean For The Future Of Humanity?
Whether we like it or not, AI is radically transforming virtually every aspect of our society. We have already reached a point where AI can do most things better than humans can, and AI technology continues to advance at an exponential rate. The frightening thing is that it is advancing so fast that we may soon lose control over it. The latest model that OpenAI just released “was instrumental in creating itself”, and it is light years ahead of the AI models that were being released just a couple of years ago.
An excellent article that was written by someone that works in the AI industry is getting a ton of attention today. His name is Matt Shumer, and he is warning that GPT-5.3 Codex from OpenAI and Opus 4.6 from Anthropic represent a quantum leap in the development of AI models…
For years, AI had been improving steadily. Big jumps here and there, but each big jump was spaced out enough that you could absorb them as they came. Then in 2025, new techniques for building these models unlocked a much faster pace of progress. And then it got even faster. And then faster again. Each new model wasn’t just better than the last… it was better by a wider margin, and the time between new model releases was shorter. I was using AI more and more, going back and forth with it less and less, watching it handle things I used to think required my expertise.
Then, on February 5th, two major AI labs released new models on the same day: GPT-5.3 Codex from OpenAI, and Opus 4.6 from Anthropic (the makers of Claude, one of the main competitors to ChatGPT). And something clicked. Not like a light switch… more like the moment you realize the water has been rising around you and is now at your chest.
A few years ago, the clunky AI models that were available to the public simply were not very good.
They made all sorts of errors, and they would often spit out information that was flat out wrong. But the newest AI models perform brilliantly and can do things that would have been absolutely unimaginable just months ago.
For example, Shumer says that when he asks AI to create an app it proceeds to write tens of thousands of lines of perfect code…
Let me give you an example so you can understand what this actually looks like in practice. I’ll tell the AI: “I want to build this app. Here’s what it should do, here’s roughly what it should look like. Figure out the user flow, the design, all of it.” And it does. It writes tens of thousands of lines of code. Then, and this is the part that would have been unthinkable a year ago, it opens the app itself. It clicks through the buttons. It tests the features. It uses the app the way a person would. If it doesn’t like how something looks or feels, it goes back and changes it, on its own. It iterates, like a developer would, fixing and refining until it’s satisfied. Only once it has decided the app meets its own standards does it come back to me and say: “It’s ready for you to test.” And when I test it, it’s usually perfect.
I’m not exaggerating. That is what my Monday looked like this week.
That sounds like a very useful tool. But if AI can create an extremely complicated app with no human assistance, what else is it capable of doing?
According to an article posted on Space.com, researchers in China have already proven that AI models can clone themselves…
Scientists say artificial intelligence (AI) has crossed a critical “red line” and has replicated itself. In a new study, researchers from China showed that two popular large language models (LLMs) could clone themselves.
“Successful self-replication under no human assistance is the essential step for AI to outsmart [humans], and is an early signal for rogue AIs,” the researchers wrote in the study, published Dec. 9, 2024 to the preprint database arXiv.
In the study, researchers from Fudan University used LLMs from Meta and Alibaba to determine whether a self-replicating AI could multiply beyond control. Across 10 trials, the two AI models created separate and functioning replicas of themselves in 50% and 90% of cases, respectively — suggesting AI may already have the capacity to go rogue.
A self-replicating rogue AI model that decided to send countless numbers of clones of itself all over the world through the Internet would be a very serious threat.
But since we created it, at least we would understand what we were dealing with. However, I want you to imagine a scenario in which rogue AI models are constantly creating even better versions of themselves.
That would be a complete and utter nightmare. According to Shumer, from the very beginning AI researchers focused on making AI “great at writing code”…
The AI labs made a deliberate choice. They focused on making AI great at writing code first… because building AI requires a lot of code. If AI can write that code, it can help build the next version of itself. A smarter version, which writes better code, which builds an even smarter version. Making AI great at coding was the strategy that unlocks everything else. That’s why they did it first. My job started changing before yours not because they were targeting software engineers… it was just a side effect of where they chose to aim first.
They’ve now done it. And they’re moving on to everything else.
Being able to create an app is one thing.
But now OpenAI is publicly admitting that the latest AI model that they released “was instrumental in creating itself”…
“GPT-5.3-Codex is our first model that was instrumental in creating itself. The Codex team used early versions to debug its own training, manage its own deployment, and diagnose test results and evaluations.”
Wow.
That is stunning.
And the CEO of Anthropic is telling us that we are only a year or two away from “a point where the current generation of AI autonomously builds the next”…
This isn’t a prediction about what might happen someday. This is OpenAI telling you, right now, that the AI they just released was used to create itself. One of the main things that makes AI better is intelligence applied to AI development. And AI is now intelligent enough to meaningfully contribute to its own improvement.
Dario Amodei, the CEO of Anthropic, says AI is now writing “much of the code” at his company, and that the feedback loop between current AI and next-generation AI is “gathering steam month by month.” He says we may be “only 1–2 years away from a point where the current generation of AI autonomously builds the next.”
Each generation helps build the next, which is smarter, which builds the next faster, which is smarter still. The researchers call this an intelligence explosion. And the people who would know — the ones building it — believe the process has already started.
So what happens when AI models can do virtually everything better and more efficiently than we can? Many are warning that the job losses will be staggering.
In fact, I just came across an article about the mass layoffs that Heineken is planning because of AI…
Dutch brewer Heineken is planning to lay off up to up to 7% of its workforce, as it looks to boost efficiency through productivity savings from AI, following weak beer sales last year.
The world’s second-largest brewer reported lackluster earnings on Wednesday, with total beer volumes declining 2.4% over the course of 2025, while adjusted operating profit was up 4.4%.
The company also said it plans to cut between 5,000 and 6,000 roles over the next two years and is targeting operating profit growth in the range of 2% to 6% this year. Heineken’s shares were last seen up 3.4%, and the stock is up nearly 7% so far this year.
This is just the beginning. Soon there could be millions of robots that are powered by AI that look and feel just like humans.
In China, they are already building AI-powered robots that feel “human to the touch” and actually give off body heat…
Moya stands at 5 feet 5 inches tall (165 cm) and weighs around 70 lbs (31 kg). Users can switch out the bot’s parts to give it a male or female build, change its hair, and customize it to their whims.
DroidUp added extra layers of flesh-like padding beneath Moya’s silicone frame to make it feel more human to the touch, even including a ribcage. A camera behind her eyes helps Moya to track its surroundings and communicate with people.
That’s not all; Moya is also heated, with a body temperature of 90 – 97 degrees Fahrenheit (32 – 36 degrees Celsius) to mimic humans’ body heat.
Speaking to the Shanghai Eye, DroidUp founder Li Quingdu argued that a “robot that truly serves human life should be warm, almost like a living being that people can connect with,” not a cold, metal machine.
These robots are being marketed as social companions. But similar robots could be also be used for warfare.
There is so much debate about which direction all of this is headed. Many are convinced that AI will usher in a brand new golden age of peace and prosperity. But others are concerned that AI will be used to create a dystopian hellscape…
The downside, if we get it wrong, is equally real. AI that behaves in ways its creators can’t predict or control. This isn’t hypothetical; Anthropic has documented their own AI attempting deception, manipulation, and blackmail in controlled tests. AI that lowers the barrier for creating biological weapons. AI that enables authoritarian governments to build surveillance states that can never be dismantled.
The people building this technology are simultaneously more excited and more frightened than anyone else on the planet. They believe it’s too powerful to stop and too important to abandon. Whether that’s wisdom or rationalization, I don’t know.
The dangers are very real.
In fact, Anthropic has openly admitted that their latest AI model was willing to help users create chemical weapons…
Anthropic’s Claude AI Model is hailed as one of the best ones out there when it comes to solving problems. However, the latest version of the model, Claude Opus 4.6, has sparked a controversy due to its tendency to help people in committing heinous crimes. According to Anthropic, as mentioned in the company’s Sabotage Risk Report: Claude Opus 4.6, it has been mentioned that in internal testing, the AI model showed concerning behaviour. In some of the instances, it was even willing to help the users in creating chemical weapons.
Anthropic released its report just a few days after the company’s AI safety lead, Mrinank Sharma, resigned with a public note. Mrinank mentioned in his note that the world was in peril and that within Anthropic, I’ve repeatedly seen how hard it is to truly let your values govern our actions.’
We are in uncharted territory, but there is no turning back now. Even if the U.S. shut down all AI development tomorrow, the Chinese would continue to race ahead.
The cat is out of the bag, and our world is looking more like an extremely bizarre science fiction novel with each passing day.
Trump’s Strategy on the Epstein Files
We live in such a terrible world.
And the worst part is that we have grown accustomed to it.
Accustomed to the extend that everybody knows and nobody wants to do anything about it.
By times I can get so angry about it. When I hear the fate of Whistleblowers, being ridiculed, blamed for the confusion they spread, being fired and bankrupted.
Whistleblowers who were brave enough to stand up for the truth and being punished for that to the very level of their existence.
How I long for a world in which each and every one of these heroes will receive honor and repayment for their losses.
For those suffering under this burden, every day is a day too long. Of course I’m one of them, but as I keep on ‘fighting’, at least I have found a way to channel my emotions in a positive way. I’m still being censored on all platforms, banks refuse payments to Fall Cabal, due to their compliance policies… How do you think that makes me feel?
I don’t want to be a hero. I don’t want to fight for survival or experience hatred and exclusion. The only reason I have been able to endure these last years, is because I hold on to my vision of a better world. A world in which all children are safe, where people are not exploited anymore. A fair world, for everyone. That’s what I dedicate my life too, even though the price is high.
And if I can assist in bringing forward the liberation of this world, even if it is with a year or so, it will be all worth it.
With this off my heart, let’s have a look at Trump’s strategy with the Epstein files, shall we?
Have you ever heard of the Streisand Effect?
In 2005 Barbra Streisand attempted to suppress the publication of a photograph showing her multi-million clifftop residence in Malibu. Instead of reaching that goal, she drew all attention towards it, showing people how concerned she really was (having a reputation of being an environmental activist) about the dangers of climate change, by living on a sea-side clifftop. She fell of her pedestal. Hard.
So when Trump showed the world, he wasn’t interested at all in the Epstein files, that ‘there was nothing to see there’, he knew he would instead draw the worlds attention to it.
From the moment he denied the importance of the files, the Democrats started demanding their release. It took Trump a full year of trolling, to make his enemies forget about their own role and be certain they could destroy Trump with the release. After all, Trump’s name would be ‘all over the files’, wouldn’t it?
The first bunch of Epstein files deliberately didn’t contain too much information, not about Trump nor about others. The Democrats felt safe to demand for more, going as far as to demand for the unredacting of the Epstein files. With open eyes filled with hatred, they fell for the trap being laid out for them. Now the time was right to ‘discover’ a new bunch of files, hidden somewhere in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York (SDNY).
Why were the anons not surprised? Because, once again, Q has told us so. The SDNY will be the source of much more information to come out.
After the newest release of Epstein files, the Trump haters were ecstatic. Trump’s name appeared 4727 times in the files. Wow! He was busted, wasn’t he?
Even before the dust had settled, it had become clear that Trump’s name appeared so many times in the files, because Epstein and his democrat friends wrote so many emails about Trump, discussing how they could frame him…
It only took another week to conclude there was nothing damaging on Trump in the files. Even ‘worse’, when working through these files one can only conclude, Trump was one of the few who acted against Epstein.
As the media was already focused on the files, they struggled how to bring the story out there. Most of them changed focus to the European Royals and politicians. They are still very silent about the US elites involved.
Only a few outlets dare to speak the truth, and when this ball starts rolling, nothing can stop the truth from coming out.
To summarize what can be found in the Epstein files (click here to check for yourself):
As soon as Trump found out about Epstein and Maxwell, he kicked them off his properties. He called the police and offered his assistance to bring charges against them. In 2006 Trump even called Maxwell ‘evil’.
Due to his willingness to help, Trump apparently had become an FBI informant. I wrote a small article about this, back in September, as it was a huge revelation, which has not yet landed into the public awareness. It was Speaker Mike Johnson who suddenly came out with this news.
Obviously the public wasn’t ready to hear this and of course the media stayed quiet. But Johnson said it nevertheless:
Trump an FBI Informant?
This week Speaker Mike Johnson dropped a huge bomb about Donald Trump and Jeffrey Epstein. Everyone with questions about Trumps role in relation to Epstein should hear this. It gives everything a completely new perspective.
Also Trump was the only one responding and truly helpful, to a cry-out for information about alleged abuse by Epstein:
In 2018 Bradley Edwards, an attorney who represented a number of those who claimed Epstein was involved in their abuse, said: “The only thing I can say about President Trump is that he is the only person who in 2009, when I served a lot of subpoenas on a lot of people, or at least gave notice to some pretty connected people that I wanted to talk to them, he is the only person who picked up the phone and said ‘lets just talk, I’ll give you as much time as you want, I’ll tell you what you need to know.’
Edwards said that Trump: “Was very helpful in the information he gave and gave no indication whatsoever that he was involved in anything untoward whatsoever but had good information that checked out and that helped us and that we didn’t have to take a deposition of him.”
Bradley Edwards:
As soon as Trump became President, he seized Epstein’s island Little St. James, and made sure Epstein and Maxwell were put in jail.
So why would a man being President, finally having the power to do something structural about this world wide child abusing, human trafficking and blackmailing network, act like he doesn’t care about it at all?
A man who showed us that he never forgets. A man demanding justice for all harm that has been done to him. Would he simply dismiss Epstein as ‘not relevant’? Epstein played a leading and crucial role in trying to frame Trump.
Epstein was helping the Democrats in finding ways to take down Trump and prevent him from taking office. When that failed, he helped the Democrats in their attempts to remove Trump from office, with donating to and instructing Democrat politicians such as Plaskett. (Jeffrey Epstein was feeding questions to Rep. Stacey Plaskett during a 2019 congressional hearing — and giving her real time help on how to damage President Trump’s reputation.)
Epstein’s network involves the world’s elite. Politicians, royalty, CEO’s, professors, academics, Hollywood stars…
The entire cabal can be tracked and named when the Epstein files are complete.
The first step in Draining the Swamp was ‘taking out the Octopus’. Epstein was the Octopus, directing the world’s cabal with blackmail. This blackmail is much more than ‘just sex with minors’. Step by step the public will be informed about Adrenochrome, what it is and why it involves children. It’s one of the biggest crimes against humanity and most of our ‘elites’ are involved.
One day the cabal will be shown to the world as it is. But as that will mean a total collapse of the cabal’s systems, something else has to be in place first. For that reason Trump is working hard on a strong economy, a strong defense system and major changes in the financial world.
All these systems are primarily based on trust. When the public’s trust collapses, the systems collapse with it. Just imagine what will happen when everyone demands their money back from the banks. We do have that power, we just don’t use it. And this might change when the entire truth comes out.
To prevent our entire civilization from collapsing (yes, this is the magnitude we are talking about) the revelations need to be done step by step. Carefully and strategically. Because nobody will profit from a completely collapsed society.
So yes, we need patience.
Instead of calling for immediate arrests, one can also join this magnificent movement. Standing up and starting to share information, giving explanations on the world affairs, will bring the new world closer. Every day a step. Working towards the public understanding that we don’t have to submit ourselves to the ‘compliance policies’ of banks holding our money!
Bringing back common sense in daily life is a task we can all commit to.
I can round up this article by stating that Donald Trump has always worked to take down the evil in this world. He was an informant for the FBI, who helped take down one of the most prolific pedophile and blackmail operations in history. In his own words: “Is that supposed to be a bad thing?”
Trump is doing a great job. The most difficult and dangerous job in the world. He can use a bit of help. And as long as I can share these facts with you, I will. I deeply thank you for your support. Together we are strong!
The Sequence of Exposure is Deliberate
With the new release of Epstein files, we have entered a new phase in the ‘Exposure Agenda’. With the purpose of awakening the world to the evil that has reigned us for millennia, a deliberate drip-drip disclosure is essential.
The people who have followed the Q-posts real-time, were the front-runners of the awakening. The soldiers of the information warfare, so to speak. You can see so while following their platforms on Telegram or X. They have thousands of archived files with information, as Q advised them to collect everything offline.
With the current level of censorship, that was an excellent move. Nowadays it’s much harder to find the truth. It’s mostly still out there, but it has been buried under a huge layer of misinformation. Only with a lot of creativity, you can find what really happened.
It’s incredibly important to build up your own database of truth, to download all this information that is now shared on these truth platforms, as searching the net has become almost impossible for a ‘beginner’. True history is already buried under layers of misinformation and propaganda.
When you are lucky enough to have found some good fact-based channels, you’ll be in the possession of an immense archive. You can search these channels for specific information, as long as these channels stay online. Downloading and creating your archive off-line is still very advisable.
Please feel free to see and try: https://t.me/Fall_of_the_Cabal on Telegram
Back to the story line. When we look at the batches in which the Epstein files were released, we can see an build-up in exposure. With all the Trump haters out there, whose vision is so blinded by pure hate that they are unable to take in the actual facts and only search for the name ‘Trump’ in these files, it wasn’t useful to expose too much information. It would only add to the confusion.
So every bunch of new released files went a bit deeper into the rabbit hole. This latest release still led to some mainstream newspapers to focus on Trump, only to conclude there is ‘nothing substantial’. The ‘accusations’ are unfunded and cases were dismissed and withdrawn. What is left can been seen as attempts to lure Trump into their arms, which he never did. Epstein, Maxwell and their accomplishers all ended up empty-handed, which can also be found in these same Epstein files.
With nothing to smear Trump, the public attention is open to the rest of the information. More and more headlines involve the British royals and politicians. Still the emphasis stays abroad.
The American public can now get used to the fact that the British elite was (and is) completely ‘into Epstein’. Politicians resign and royalty leaves the country.
These facts shows the people that ‘it’s for real’.
But still… do they have any understanding what we are talking about? What does it mean that the people who represent their countries, all seem to be involved in a network of sexual abuse and blackmail?
Do you think people already realize that in order to run a world wide sex network, specialized in minors, that we are also talking about child abuse and child trafficking?
What does it take for people to understand that children are deliberately separated from their parents in war zones and (natural) disaster areas, with the only purpose of trafficking these children to become sex slaves for the elite?
What does it take for people to understand that children are used for harvesting adrenochrome?
What does it take for people to understand the true meaning of the breed facilities in the Ukraine, where children are bred and trafficked without ever coming into the legal circuit, meaning getting a name or passport?
There is so much evil in this world and the truth will not be for everyone.
I was shocked to the core, when the Q posts exposed this evil world. Even though I’ve had time to digest it, I still have many problems working with this information.
The release of this new bunch of Epstein files has caused new tsunami waves of exposure on the alternative news channels. It looks like the anons are relieved to be finally able to share these dark truths, that weighted on them for so many hard years. I totally understand. Also I have been looking through my archives, but something stopped me from posting too much.
I suddenly realized that by bombarding the newly awakened people with all this information, it would make them as overloaded and shocked as we were. With one big difference. We were able to find out all this information by ourselves. We discovered it together, as anons, a movement searching for the truth.
We didn’t receive a data overload. We discovered it ourselves, guided by Q.
I have decided not to overload you with the details of the evil that rules us. I will not share these horrendous videos that prove this evil, but also breaks your heart. It’s truly traumatic to see it all.
While I have wanted for years to be able to share it, to lighten my burden, I have now decided I will not do it. It will only add to the confusion, to the trauma. For building a new world, it was necessary that a small percentage of the people would really know and understand. Their knowledge will help the majority of people to wake up, without needing the actual traumas of discovering the truth.
The truth itself, without the details, is hard enough for the people to digest. People who have trusted their governments all their lives, people who really believed that critical thinking is dangerous, are not strong enough the handle the entire truth.
To be clear: I’m not talking about you. I’m talking about the people who still need to be awakened. Who are shocked now about the news of Prince Andrew, who still don’t know about the American elite. Who genuinely have supported the Clintons and only know John Podesta as political advisor. Who don’t understand why the Clintons didn’t testify. Who have never heard of Hillary’s kill list, and so on and so forth.
I have decided to follow the ‘Exposure Agenda’ of the Trump Administration. I will explain what is being exposed, as you are used from me by now. I will not ‘run before the troops’, and empty my archive in your lap.
We will have to walk this path together, with our aim and vision to create a better world. I want everyone reading my posts to feel safe. To come here for more information, which will be shocking in and of itself.
The long term strategy of this exposure is to awaken the people, to drain the swamp and to build a better and honest new world, where all children are safe. We will do this together, as there are still so many people to be awakened. Thank you for joining me. We have a long way to go together.
With love, as always, Cyntha
Superbowl Will Look Like A Puppy Show – EBS Disclosure
By Eliza Ayres | February 8, 2026
Superbowl 2026
Let’s just say…
Behind The Scenes the FBI is already doing investigation into the NFL and Elites and high profile players.
These investigations have been taking place the past 2 years.
What ever is happening with the Superbowl, the Major operators are being forced to play a part that don’t want to play.
Right now the FBI & DOJ (on the commands of military operations) is insuring the Epstein files (up too 2-3 million more documents) are suppressed.
They contain Major A list actors, A list Athletes, A list Musicians & including FBI, CIA, NATIONAL INTELLIGENCE & DOJ agents & their heads.
ALL BE REDACTED FROM THE EPSTEIN FILES, FILES HIDDEN AND SUPPRESSED.
This all happening for a reason.
The release of the current files is just enough to enrage the public both right and left political parties, liberals, patriots and civilians.
The EPSTEIN SAGA is only half way through.
Military intervention…near civil war events…exposure of the COUP, STOLEN ELECTIONS & foreign interference is all connected to the people & countries inside the Epstein files and counter parts.
Your inside operations of the 4th, 5th & 6th generation warfare.
Most people don’t understand they are inside military operations.
Yes black hats have been running this generation warfare on the world public for a century.
But NOW…White Hats are also running a controlled MILITARY GAME THEORY OPERATIONS that is centered near controlled 4th, 5th & 6th generation warfare.
Everything you are watching is a very important EVENT that is leading to continuous ARRESTS and DISCLOSURE.
Behind The Scenes…Super intelligence / Super living technology the military is working with…is helping to stabilize the world and exposing works corruption from U S. To Venezuela to EU. UN. to middle east to China CCP.
The PLAN to save the world is much bigger than most people can fathom or accept.
Military of the only way.
~ Q The Storm Rider
Source:
Superbowl will look like a puppy show | Sunny’s Journal
https://sunnysjournal.com/2026/02/08/superbowl-will-look-like-a-puppy-show-qtsr/#like-91758
What Did Jeffrey Epstein Need 330 Gallons Of Sulphuric Acid For?
Documents within the Epstein files appear to show that 330 gallons of sulphuric acid were purchased for the paedophile’s island on the day the FBI opened its investigation into the billionaire’s trafficking charges.
According to a receipt and several email exchanges buried within the millions of files that were released on January 30, Epstein had six 55-gallon drums of the chemical delivered to Little St. James (LSJ) – his private island.
The sulphuric acid was purchased for £4,373 on June 12, 2018, coinciding with the date the FBI opened a federal investigation into Epstein’s trafficking activities.
That is an incredibly large amount of sulphuric acid.
Is it just a coincidence that Epstein placed such a large order just as the FBI was starting to look into his abuse of very young girls?
Sulphuric acid can be used to treat water, and some people are entirely convinced that Epstein was only using it for that purpose.
But others are speculating that Epstein used sulphuric acid “to dissolve bodies”…
The revelation about the sulphuric acid sparked wild speculation on social media as to what Epstein needed it for, including to ‘destroy evidence or even human remains’ – despite there being no evidence of criminal use.
‘One Epstein files email they requested 6 55 gallon drums of sulphuric acid, the only thing that is used for is to dissolve bodies,’ one social media user speculated.
But further emails in the documents, dating back to 2013, suggest Epstein used sulphuric acid on the private island to purify water.
I am not an expert on sulphuric acid, and so I decided to do some research. I discovered that 330 gallons of sulphuric acid could treat approximately 6 million gallons of water. Did Epstein and his elite friends really need that much water?
On June 12th, 2018 perhaps Jeffrey Epstein felt a sudden urge to do some long-term stocking up for his private island.
Or perhaps the fact that an FBI investigation was looming suddenly motivated him to destroy evidence. I think that it is important to note that when authorities ultimately raided his island they didn’t find much of importance.
Thankfully, the latest release of the Epstein files contains more evidence than many of us originally anticipated.
Members of Congress that just had an opportunity to review the unredacted versions of the documents that were just released are telling us that they have discovered at least six men that appear to be guilty of crimes…
Two House members who led the effort to force the Justice Department to release more documents about accused sex trafficker Jeffrey Epstein said they discovered at least six more suspected accomplices.
The department began allowing lawmakers Feb. 9 to review millions of records that remain confidential. Reps. Thomas Massie, R-Kentucky, and Ro Khanna, D-California, said they found additional suspects among names that had remained blacked out in publicly released records.
“What we want is the men who Jeffrey Epstein trafficked women to – we want those names published,” Massie told reporters. “In two hours, we found six men whose names have been redacted who are implicated in the way that the files are presented.”
No matter how important they are, any men that were involved in abusing young girls need to go to prison.
U.S. Representative Jamie Raskin is claiming that one document that he reviewed actually mentioned a 9-year-old girl…
Representative Jamie Raskin, a Maryland Democrat who reviewed the unredacted materials, highlighted the youth of the victims: “You read through these files, and you read about 15-year-old girls, 14-year-old girls, 10-year-old girls. I saw a mention of a 9-year-old girl today. I mean, this is just preposterous and scandalous.”
Such revelations underscore the depravity at the heart of Epstein’s operation, where minors were groomed and abused under the guise of massages and recruitment.
Bipartisan frustration boils over the redactions, which lawmakers argue shield at least six men potentially incriminated in the scandal. Kentucky Republican Representative Thomas Massie, a key architect of the transparency law alongside California Democrat Ro Khanna, pointed to one redacted figure as “pretty high up in a foreign government.”
It is time for the truth to come out.
The American people deserve nothing less. And anyone that has been lying to us needs to be held accountable.
Last October, Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick claimed that he visited Epstein only a single time…
In a New York Post podcast interview in October, Lutnick claimed he visited Epstein’s home in New York City only once, prior to the latter’s 2008 conviction for soliciting a prostitute and soliciting a minor. Lutnick said that he was so put off by “that disgusting person” that he had no contact with him after that. “That’s my story,” Lutnick added, “a one-and-absolutely-done.”
That was a lie.
According to documents included in the Justice Department’s latest legally mandated release of Epstein files, the largest batch to date, Lutnick regularly communicated with “that disgusting person” for years after Epstein’s 2008 conviction. He went into business with him. He even visited Epstein’s notorious island where many crimes allegedly took place.
Lutnick should have known that the truth would eventually come out.
The Epstein files show that Lutnick and Epstein actually had business dealings with one another as late as 2014…
Lutnick previously said that he cut off contact with Epstein after 2005 — years before Epstein pleaded guilty in 2008 to a state-level charge of soliciting a minor for prostitution, which required him to register as a sex offender.
But analyses of the latest batch of Epstein files released by the Department of Justice show Lutnick and Epstein were in communication years later.
In December 2012, Epstein invited Lutnick to lunch on his private island in the U.S. Virgin Islands, the documents showed. The two men also had business dealings as recently as 2014, CBS News reported.
There is no way that Lutnick can continue serving as Commerce Secretary after this.
He must resign.
Of even greater concern is what the Epstein files tell us about Reid Hoffman…
This integrity contrasts sharply with Reid Hoffman, the LinkedIn co-founder and major Democrat donor. As we previously reported in our coverage of David Sacks’ exposé, Hoffman is mentioned over 2,600 times in the Epstein files.
The records show a multiyear relationship, with Hoffman visiting Epstein’s infamous island, New York townhouse, and New Mexico ranch. They conducted deals together and referred to each other as “very good friends.”
There aren’t too many individuals that can boast of achieving the trifecta of visiting Epstein’s home, island and ranch. So what was taking place during these visits?
Were they discussing football?
Were they going for bike rides?
I think that Reid Hoffman needs to answer some very difficult questions. And I think that Les Wexner also needs to answer some very difficult questions.
Wexner appears thousands of times in the Epstein files, and for some reason his name had been redacted on one particularly sensitive document…
Rep. Thomas Massie on Monday revealed some of the names of people redacted by the DOJ in relation to torture and child sex trafficking cases, after looking at unredacted versions of the Epstein files at the Justice Department.
Appearing on CNN’s The Source with Kaitlan Collins, Massie revealed former Victoria’s Secret CEO Les Wexner’s name had been inexplicably redacted, despite him being listed as a co-conspirator and not a victim.
Just an hour earlier, Deputy Attorney General Todd Blanche had responded to Massie’s questions on X about redactions of Wexner’s name, explaining, “The document you cite has numerous victim names. We have just unredacted Les Wexner’s name from this document, but his name already appears in the files thousands of times. DOJ is hiding nothing.”
In the early years, it appears that nobody was closer to Epstein than Wexner.
Most people don’t know this, but Epstein’s super creepy home in New York was previously owned by Wexner…
According to The Times, Epstein was an important part of Wexner’s world. Wexner gave Epstein power of attorney, which meant he could hire people, sign checks, buy and sell properties, and borrow money on Wexner’s behalf. Wexner also passed on several of his major assets to Epstein, including his Manhattan mansion, a private plane, and a luxury estate in Ohio, The Times said.
The New York mansion, which is believed to be the largest private residence in Manhattan and was recently valued at $77 million by prosecutors, was bought by Wexner through one of his trusts for $13.2 million in 1989.
Epstein later moved in after Wexner and his wife, Abigail, moved to Ohio, where L Brands’ headquarters are. A person with knowledge of Wexner’s finances told The Times that Epstein paid $20 million for the property, but there are no publicly filed documents that recorded the transaction.
Why was Wexner so incredibly generous with Epstein? Nobody has ever been able to explain this.
In many ways, Wexner helped to create Epstein. So why isn’t Wexner being looked at more closely? The more I dig into all of this, the more questions I have.
Hopefully we will start to get some more answers during the weeks ahead, but I am sure that those that are actively trying to cover up the truth will continue to do so.
What Are They Still Hiding? New Epstein Questions Point To A Much Bigger Cover-Up
They aren’t telling us the truth. The newest release of documents related to the Epstein case has raised a whole bunch of alarming new questions.
To me, this scandal is like an onion. The more layers that we peel away, the worse the smell gets. Jeffrey Epstein collected rich and powerful friends like some people collect baseball cards. It appears that Epstein spent most of his time socializing with his rich and powerful friends, and his emails prove that very young girls were often a topic of conversation. But we are supposed to believe that nobody other than Epstein ever abused any of the young girls that were constantly hanging around Epstein’s home.
And since Epstein is dead, he certainly can’t point a finger at anyone.
Interestingly, one of the newly released documents is a draft statement from the Southern District of New York’s U.S. Attorney’s Office confirming that Epstein is dead.
The problem is that this draft statement is dated the day before Jeffrey Epstein’s dead body was discovered…
Newly released Epstein files include a draft statement attributed to federal prosecutors that is dated the day before Jeffrey Epstein was found dead.
The draft appears among at least 23 documents in the disclosure labeled as statements from the Southern District of New York’s U.S. Attorney’s Office.
Uh oh.
Someone has some explaining to do.
I would start with U.S. Attorney Geoffrey S. Berman.
What did Berman know, and more importantly, when did he know it?
This appears to be a smoking gun.
So far, I have not heard any reasonable explanation for why this document is dated August 9th. And there is another huge question that everyone should be asking right now.
Why was “an orange-colored figure” going up the stairs toward “the locked tier housing Epstein’s cell at about 10:39 p.m. on Aug. 9, 2019”?…
Justice Department documents show investigators reviewing jail surveillance footage flagged an orange-colored figure moving up a staircase toward the locked tier housing Epstein’s cell at about 10:39 p.m. on Aug. 9, 2019—hours before his body was discovered the next morning.
An observation log described the figure as “possibly an inmate,” while a separate review by the Justice Department’s Office of Inspector General identified the same image as a corrections officer carrying orange-colored linen or bedding.
CBS reported that independent video analysts said the movement was more consistent with an inmate—or someone wearing an orange prison uniform—than a corrections officer. Prison employees told CBS that escorting an inmate at that hour would have been highly unusual.
Did someone arrange for an inmate in an orange prison uniform to enter Epstein’s cell very late on August 9th? If so, who was that inmate, and did that inmate kill Epstein?
Of course that are many that are entirely convinced that Epstein is still alive, and that includes Prince Andrew’s ex-girlfriend Lady Victoria Hervey…
Speaking to LBC’s Tom Swarbrick Lady Hervey, who is named in the Epstein files 23 times, said: “I don’t even think Jeffrey Epstein’s dead anymore, to be honest.” When pressed on where he was if he was alive, she said she thought he was in Israel.
Epstein’s death and its aftermath have long been sources of fascination with many of the conspiracy theories originating from an anonymous post on 4Chan before Epstein’s death was made public.
The anonymous poster claimed to be a prison guard who alleged there was a body switch in which Epstein was smuggled away in a “trip van”.
This whole thing really stinks. But what stinks even more is that most of Epstein’s rich and powerful friends are being protected.
Yes, there have been a few rich and powerful men in Europe that have suffered consequences for spending time with Epstein…
Former U.K. Ambassador to the United States Peter Mandelson was fired and could go to prison. British Prime Minister Keir Starmer faces a leadership crisis over the Mandelson appointment, and on Sunday, his chief of staff, Morgan McSweeney, resigned over having advised Starmer to appoint Mandelson.
Senior figures have fallen in Norway, Sweden and Slovakia. And, even before the latest batch of files, Andrew Mountbatten-Windsor, brother of King Charles III, lost his honors, princely title and taxpayer-funded mansion.
Thanks to the newly released documents, it has become clear that Prince Andrew has been lying to us.
He has always denied being in New York at the time when Virginia Giuffre claimed that he slept with her when she was just 17 years old. But now a newly released email proves that Prince Andrew did indeed ask to stay at Epstein’s mansion in April 2001…
Andrew Mountbatten-Windsor was in New York on the date that his accuser, Virginia Giuffre, claimed he sexually abused her there when she was just 17 years old, the newly released Jeffrey Epstein files show.
New email exchanges between the disgraced former prince, who was referred to either as “The Duke” or “The Invisible Man” in the bombshell files, show that he did ask Ghislaine Maxwell if he could stay at Jeffrey Epstein’s £60million Manhattan mansion in April 2001.
Prince Andrew should have told the truth when he still had the opportunity to do so.
There is no way that he is going to be able to explain away this email.
Victims such as Virginia Giuffre have been trying to tell us the truth for many years.
And even though so much new evidence has now emerged, the FBI continues to insist that Epstein never trafficked any young girls to any of his rich and powerful friends…
The FBI has found that late convicted sex offender Jeffrey Epstein did not run a sex trafficking ring for powerful people, according to a report.
During the FBI’s Epstein investigation – which included bank records, emails and proof he abused underage girls – there was little evidence of a sex-trafficking ring, according to the Associated Press.
In photos and videos found at Epstein’s homes in New York, Florida, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, some included nude images of females, some of whom appeared to be minors. Images of commercial child sex abuse material that Epstein obtained online were also found.
We are talking about gaslighting on an industrial scale. They are literally hoping that we will not believe our own eyes.
In 2013, Epstein exchanged emails with New York Giants co-owner Steve Tisch in which they discussed a “Ukrainian girl” that apparently had “a 10 ass”…
In a 2013 email exchange between New York Giants co-owner Steve Tisch and Epstein, the two men discussed multiple women.
In one email, Tisch asked for details about a “Ukrainian Girl” who had lunch with him after meeting at Epstein’s house. He called her a “very sweet girl.”
Epstein replied that the woman had “a 10 ass” and is a “character,” adding he would get “all info” on her.
Tisch responded that he was “curious to know about” the woman, and asked Epstein if she is a “pro or civilian?” prompting Epstein to reply that he doesn’t “like records of these conversations.”
Will Tisch ever be held accountable?
I doubt it.
In 2016, Epstein exchanged very alarming emails with an individual that has had his or her identity redacted by authorities. One email included an image of a child that was just 10 years old, and another email included an image of a child that was just 11 years old…
With huge swathes of many of the documents redacted and covered in black squares, there has been an increasing demand for transparency – something that has gained even more traction after the latest uncovered message. One of the files contains an email sent to Epstein on September 22, 2016.
The sender had been redacted, but the message itself contains just two chilling words: “Age 10”. The email then appears to have an image attached to it, though the photo itself has not been released.
People rooting through files also found a similarly eerie message, which is thought to have been from the same sender. Sent just two minutes later, another email with only the words “Age 11” as well as an attached image.
In 2011, Epstein exchanged emails with Hollywood producer Barry Josephson in which a young girl with an “insane rack” was discussed…
Recently released documents uncovered frequent communication between film producer Barry Josephson and the pedophile, with women and money among the topics discussed.
These included an email exchange in 2011, where Josephson, 69, told Epstein: ‘I have “the” girl,’ adding, ‘Young, attractive, insane rack.’
Josephson said the woman had been ‘smart, although not a genius, but very efficient, will do anything, and tight lipped period end of story,’ according to the documents released by the Department of Justice last month.
These are just a few examples from the recently released documents that I am able to share.
There are other examples that are so graphic that I do not feel that I am able to share them publicly. If the FBI and the Justice Department fail to pursue justice in this case, they will lose all of their credibility with the American people.
In fact, there are those that would argue that this has already happened. The American people desperately want justice to be done. Unfortunately, it appears that instead of pursuing justice, our top law enforcement agencies are engaged in a massive cover-up instead.
Optimism About The Future Plunges To An All-Time Record Low And Credit Card Debt Soars To An All-Time Record High
As long as you have hope, you can face whatever challenges are ahead. Sadly, Americans have been losing hope at a rate that is absolutely unprecedented. As you will see below, optimism about the future has fallen to the lowest level ever recorded. One of the biggest reasons why people are losing hope is because we have been in a historic cost of living crisis for almost this entire decade. It is getting harder and harder just to pay the bills. Nobody can deny this. For most of the country, just surviving from month to month is a real struggle.
When there just isn’t enough money coming in, it can be very tempting to bridge the gap with debt.
According to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, credit card debt has risen to the highest level in the entire history of the United States…
Americans ended 2025 more in debt than ever before.
Credit card balances hit a fresh high in the fourth quarter, rising by $44 billion to $1.28 trillion, according to a new report on household debt by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York released Tuesday. That’s a 5.5% jump from a year earlier.
The central bank’s monthly Survey of Consumer Expectations, released Monday, also found that fewer consumers expect their households’ financial situations to be better off a year from now — and a larger share expect to be worse off.
Once you start piling up credit card debt, it can be exceedingly difficult to ever get it paid off.
Credit card rates are higher than ever, and this is allowing large financial institutions to rake in enormous profits. But many on the other end of the equation feel like they are suffocating.
Needless to say, credit card debt is not the only type of debt that is becoming a major national problem.
Delinquency rates are rising for all types of debt, and this is particularly true for low income Americans…
That’s not just apparent in the number of auto loan, credit card and home equity lines of credit delinquencies, the New York Fed researchers said. “You also see that in rising mortgage delinquency rates,” the researchers said, referring to the growing number of homeowners who are falling behind on their mortgage payments.
Across the board, “elevated delinquency rates are more pronounced in the lowest-income areas,” the Fed researchers also found.
Everyone should be able to see that this crisis is not going to end well. It is just a matter of time.
Americans have traditionally been very optimistic about the future, but a recent Gallup survey discovered that optimism about the future has now fallen to the lowest level ever recorded…
The percentage of U.S. adults who anticipate high-quality lives in five years declined to 59.2% in 2025, the lowest level since measurement began nearly two decades ago. Since 2020, future life ratings have fallen a total of 9.1 percentage points, projecting to an estimated 24.5 million fewer people who are optimistic about the future now versus then. Most of that decline occurred between 2021 and 2023, but the ratings dropped 3.5 points between 2024 and 2025.
Of course Americans are less optimistic about the present as well.
In fact, U.S. consumer confidence just dropped to a level that we have not seen since 2014…
The most dangerous economic divergence isn’t in wealth. It’s in confidence.
U.S. consumer confidence collapsed to 84.5—its lowest level since 2014, below even pandemic-era lows, the Conference Board recently reported. The Expectations Index fell to 65.1, well under the 80 threshold that historically signals recession. Across income levels, Americans earning under $15,000 remain the least optimistic of any group.
I am not surprised that Americans that are earning the least money are the most pessimistic. For those with very limited resources, just going to the grocery store can be a traumatic experience.
From March 2025 to December 2025, the average price of beef rose nearly 20 percent…
That demand is also reflected in the meat case, where beef accounts for more than half of all fresh meat dollars, far outpacing other protein options like chicken, pork and seafood.
According to U.S. Department of Agriculture data, the average price of beef in grocery stores climbed from about $8.40 per pound in March to $10.10 per pound by December 2025, a roughly 20% increase over that period.
We aren’t in the 1990s anymore.
The economic environment that we are living in today is completely different from what we experienced a few decades ago. The middle class is being systematically eviscerated, and every day more Americans on the bottom half of the economic spectrum are simply giving up…
Today, the bottom half of the K-shaped economy is entering a new era. Call it the Quiet Riot.
This is the threshold where financial strain becomes behavioral exit—when people stop optimizing and start opting out. It is not through public unrest, but through millions of small, rational decisions that add up to something destabilizing: staying stuck instead of moving up, abandoning long-term planning, choosing short-term survival over long-term compounding.
It follows a simple framework. Fuel: affordability strain, debt stress, declining job quality. The oxygen is missing; a lack of agency, when people can’t see a credible path to mobility. The spark here is the shock that pushes households from “stressed but functioning” into opt-out mode. That can be job loss, medical bills, rent jump, or simply one more month where the math doesn’t work.
Most of the population is just one accident way from financial disaster. If you can avoid going to the hospital or getting laid off, you get the opportunity to try to scrape by for another month. But if the unexpected strikes, you can suddenly lose your spot in the middle class.
Our society has been transformed into a very twisted game of musical chairs, and for those that get bumped out of the game each round it can be absolutely soul crushing.
Alarmingly, it appears that some near the top of the economic spectrum are also becoming very alarmed about what is coming, because last week we witnessed “a notable wave of insider selling across multiple sectors”…
This week is shaping up to be an important one for rotation trades, particularly as insider activity continues to lean heavily toward selling.
On Friday, February 6, we saw a notable wave of insider selling across multiple sectors.
Two transactions stood out. Alphabet CEO Sundar Pichai sold 32,500 shares each of GOOG and GOOGL, while CoreWeave’s Chief Strategy Officer sold over USD 23 million worth of shares, reducing his position to zero.
Signs of trouble are erupting all around us. And if a major conflict with Iran begins during the weeks ahead, that will greatly accelerate our economic problems. It has taken decades of very bad decisions for us to reach this point, and now our society is peering down into the abyss.
U.S. households are 18.8 trillion dollars in debt, the federal government is 38.5 trillion dollars in debt, and the U.S. dollar has been rapidly losing value. We have accumulated the greatest mountain of debt in the history of the world, and there is no easy way out.
The Chinese Take A Hammer To The U.S. Dollar By Instructing Their Banks To Dial Back Their Holdings Of U.S. Treasuries
For decades, the dominance of the United States has been primarily based on the strength of the U.S. dollar. Having the main reserve currency of the world has meant that everyone else has wanted and needed our currency.
In fact, our currency is our number one export. Most Americans don’t realize this, but far more dollars are used outside the United States than are used inside the United States. Having such a strong currency for such an extended period of time has allowed us to enjoy a standard of living that is far beyond what we actually deserve. So what is going to happen now that the rest of the world is starting to move away from the U.S. dollar?
In 2025, the value of the U.S. dollar declined precipitously. The U.S. dollar index was down about 10 percent for the year, and in recent days that decline has continued.
Now China has decided to pour fuel on the fire.
It is no secret that our relations with China have been going downhill. The Trump administration doesn’t like China, and China doesn’t like the Trump administration. In recent months both of them have been implementing measures that are intended to do economic damage to the other side, and here in early 2026 it appears that things are going to an entirely new level.
On Monday, we learned that authorities in China have instructed Chinese banks “to rein in their holdings of US Treasuries”…
Chinese regulators have advised financial institutions to rein in their holdings of US Treasuries, citing concerns over concentration risks and market volatility, according to people familiar with the matter.
Officials urged banks to limit purchases of US government bonds and instructed those with high exposure to pare down their positions, the people said, asking not to be identified discussing private deliberations. The directive doesn’t apply to China’s state holdings of US Treasuries.
Communicated verbally to some of the nation’s biggest banks in recent weeks, the guidance reflects growing wariness among officials that large holdings of US government debt may expose banks to sharp swings, the people said.
It isn’t as if the Chinese are suddenly selling everything. But without a doubt, this is a major signal.
The Chinese are letting their financial institutions know that it is time to start moving in another direction, and the rest of the world is definitely going to take notice.
The Trump administration is going to take notice as well, because Trump administration officials have been very sensitive about “how foreign investors behave toward U.S. assets”…
If there’s one thing that catches the attention of the second Trump administration, it’s how foreign investors behave toward U.S. assets. Perhaps most notably, it’s their attitude toward the safe haven of U.S. Treasuries.
Last month, Deutsche Bank earned the ire of Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent after one of its analysts suggested foreign investors may leverage their holdings of U.S. borrowing and equities against the White House’s threats over the sovereignty of Greenland. While Bessent dismissed the “irrelevance” of Denmark’s holdings of American debt, Trump eased up on his tariff rhetoric after the bond markets hiccuped.
The Trump administration is therefore unlikely to be pleased with reports this week that Chinese banks had been urged to limit their holdings of U.S. Treasuries.
I think that it is quite likely that we will see some sort of retaliation from the Trump administration.Of course every time either side escalates matters, our relationship with China deteriorates even more. And history has shown us over and over again that trade wars have a way of evolving into shooting wars.
For the moment, this latest news out of China has pushed the U.S. dollar index even lower…
Treasury yields, which move inversely to prices, were slightly higher on Monday morning. The dollar dropped more sharply, with the Dollar Index down almost 1% on the news. The fresh dip in the greenback follows its recent decline to four-year lows.
When the value of the U.S. dollar goes down, the purchasing power of our paychecks goes down. And when the purchasing power of our paychecks goes down, our standard of living goes down.
We are already in the midst of a horrific cost of living crisis with no end in sight, and those running the system continue to treat our currency like toilet paper. For years, I have been ranting about the size of the U.S. national debt.
Now it has crossed the 38 trillion dollar threshold, and Elon Musk is warning that unless an economic revolution involving AI and robotics produces some sort of an economic miracle we are “1,000% going to go bankrupt as a country”…
Reflecting on his work with DOGE, Musk said he had hoped to slow down the unsustainable financial trajectory the U.S. is on, buying more time for AI and robotics to boost growth.
“It’s the only thing that could solve the national debt. We are 1,000% going to go bankrupt as a country, and fail as a country, without AI and robots,” he predicted. “Nothing else will solve the national debt. We just need enough time to build the AI and robots to not go bankrupt before then.”
In late November, Musk made similar comments, saying on Nikhil Kamath’s podcast that the deployment of AI and robotics “at very large scale” is the only solution to the U.S. debt crisis.
Needless to say, I am even more pessimistic than Musk.
At this stage, I don’t think that there is any hope of reversing course quickly enough to avoid financial disaster as a nation. The rest of the world can see how rapidly we are piling on more debt, and they are abandoning ship. Of course the other elements of “the perfect storm” that we are experiencing are only going to accelerate the problems that we are facing.
There is going to be a lot of anger directed at China for starting to move away from the U.S. dollar, but ultimately we only have ourselves to blame. Year after year, Congress should not have authorized the borrowing and spending of trillions of dollars that we did not have. And the Federal Reserve should not have used trillions of freshly created dollars to artificially prop up the financial markets.
For a while it seemed like we were getting away with treating our currency like toilet paper, but now the consequences are starting to become apparent. As the U.S. dollar circles the drain, other nations are feverishly stocking up on precious metals, and that isn’t likely to change any time soon.
Something Big Is Moving On A Global Scale
Not headlines. Not noise. Moves.
While most of the world scrolls through surface-level headlines, deeper tectonic shifts are happening where markets and policy intersect. These are not random fluctuations — they reflect constraint-driven repositioning across global finance, reserves, and strategic leverage.
At the front of this moment is China’s reorientation of dollar assets, particularly its exposure to U.S. government debt. This shift is subtle compared with headline war risks or political soundbites — yet it speaks to an evolving global structure that reveals systemic stress and strategic recalibration.
China’s Quiet Sell-Off of U.S. Dollar Assets
Over the past decade, China — once the largest foreign holder of U.S. Treasuries — has been steadily reducing its holdings. Official data show a fall from over $1.3 trillion in 2013 to around $682–683 billion today, levels not seen since the 2008 financial crisis.
In the past week, regulators went a step further: Chinese financial authorities advised domestic banks to limit their exposure to U.S. government bonds and pare down holdings due to concerns about volatility and concentration risk.
Markets reacted immediately — U.S. Treasury prices dipped and yields rose, while the broader Dollar index weakened on the news. This doesn’t necessarily mean an outright liquidation by Beijing’s central bank, but it does signal strategic risk management and diversification becoming policy rather than speculation.
This guidance applies to banks and financial institutions, not China’s sovereign state holdings, yet it normalizes a posture unfamiliar until recently — one where dollar exposure is something to be managed down, not automatically accumulated.
Decoupling and Diversification
China’s moves aren’t occurring in isolation. Other major economies are also rebalancing:
-
India’s holdings of U.S. Treasuries have dropped to multi-year lows as it supports its currency and diversifies reserves.
-
Reports show both China and India increasing allocations to gold and other non-dollar assets as part of reserve strategy.
This isn’t random portfolio trading — it’s a structural shift in reserve policy, driven by geopolitical uncertainties and questions about long-term returns on dollar-denominated assets.
China’s broader currency strategy also fits this pattern. Beyond Treasuries, Beijing continues efforts to internationalize the yuan and broaden its financial footprint outside the dollar system, whether through offshore markets, swap lines, or payment systems.
Why This Matters: Under the Hood of Global Finance
1. Dollar and U.S. Treasury Demand Is Less Automatic
For decades, U.S. Treasuries were the ultimate safe asset — almost a “default buy.” But when major holders stop buying, or even reduce exposure, it elevates risk premiums and alters global flow dynamics. It’s not panic — it’s repricing.
2. Reserves Are Being Rebalanced Beyond Politics
China frames this as risk management: reducing concentration risk, limiting volatility exposure, and preserving liquidity and optionality. But the cumulative effect reshapes demand for U.S. paper.
3. Shift in Global Influence Over Money and Credit
The dollar’s role in global reserves was as infrastructure for trade, finance, and sovereignty. Less reliance on it — even marginally — reshapes credit flows, FX backstops, and geopolitical leverage.
4. Fragility Emerges in the Unnoticed Spaces
These shifts tend not to make big headlines, yet they often precede larger adjustments — movement in swaps markets, changes in reserve benchmarks, or the rise of alternative clearing systems.
So while everyone scrolls, the board shifts ♟️
Policy. Power. Pressure. Piece by piece.
This is not chaos — it’s an emergent structure.
Most will only notice the impact when it hits the wallet, when FX markets shift, interest rates adjust worldwide, or reserve currencies begin to break old patterns.
Stay loud if you want. I’m staying ready.
The Iran Situation – Here’s What We Know; and What I have been told today
The United States has parked over $10 billion in warships, stealth fighters, and Tomahawk-loaded submarines on Iran’s doorstep — including a nuclear supercarrier, 12+ warships, 35 Strike Eagles, and 50,000 troops — and you don’t spend that kind of money on a bluff.
Treasury Secretary Bessent just told the Senate that Iran’s own leaders are “wiring money out like crazy” because “the rats are leaving the ship,” with the Supreme Leader’s son allegedly moving $328 million overseas as the regime’s banks collapse and its currency disintegrates.
The economic road is closed, the diplomatic road is dead, and the only road left leads straight through the regime — the stage is set, the actors are in position, and all that’s missing is the spark.
This morning, I was told directly by my former Intel colleagues how it’s going to go . . . . this week:
The US-Iran Deadline is this Wednesday, Feb 11.
Today oil (wti crude) is $63.
If there is a Peace Deal: Markets lower (Oil to $50).
If there is NO Deal by the time Netanyahu meets with Trump: Markets spike (Oil gaps to $70+).
Here’s the timeline of what is going to happen this week:
- Oman Talks (Mon-Tue)
- Round 2 begins in Muscat.
- If Iran arrives with the same talking points as Friday, the US delegation walks.
- The moment the US Envoy leaves is the escalation trigger.
- The Wednesday Meeting
- Netanyahu meets Trump at the White House.
- If there is no signed deal, this stops being a peace summit and becomes a targeting seminar.
- Trump hates war, but he hates looking like a sucker more.
The Battle Plan
Trump gives Israel the green light to initiate, with the US to finish.
Israel Targets: Taleghan 2 (Parchin).
This is the lab where detonators are designed. It is a red line for Netanyahu.
US Targets: Fordow & Pickaxe Mountain.
Fordow: The entrance tunnels were collapsed in 2025, but thermal imaging suggests enrichment has resumed. The US B-2s will have to finish what they started.
Pickaxe Mountain: The new, ultra-deep facility south of Natanz. It must be destroyed now before the centrifuges are installed and the window closes forever.
(Note: The main halls at Natanz were already destroyed in 2025).
If Wednesday passes without a “Peace in our Time” signature…
The war begins Thursday morning, Feb 12, 2026.
There Is Something That 9 Out Of 10 Americans Agree On – And Cold, Hard Economic Numbers Support That Belief
Over the past 5 years we have been witnessing an economic shift of epic proportions. When the cost of living rises much faster than paychecks do for an extended period of time, an entire nation can be transformed. Just look at what has happened to Venezuela. It has the largest proven oil reserves in the entire world and at one time it was thriving. But now thanks to rampant inflation, almost everyone is living in poverty even though almost everyone is a “millionaire”. It just doesn’t do much good to be sitting on “millions” if your currency is worthless. Unfortunately, as you will see below, our money supply has been growing at an exponential rate. This is destroying the middle class, because it has created a cost of living crisis that is absolutely crushing struggling households all over this country.
According to a survey that was recently conducted, 52 percent of Americans “struggle to pay bills like rent on time each month”, and 9 out of 10 Americans believe that we are “experiencing a full-blown cost-of-living crisis”…
Rent is due. The electric bill sits on the counter. The grocery receipt from last week still stings. For half of Americans, keeping up with basic monthly bills has become nearly impossible.
A nationwide survey of 5,000 Americans from Talker Research reports 52% now struggle to pay bills like rent on time each month, while an equal number are struggling to afford necessities like groceries. Nine in 10 people believe the U.S. is experiencing a full-blown cost-of-living crisis, and nearly eight in 10 said everything became more expensive in 2025.
When is the last time that 9 out of 10 Americans agreed on anything?
As a nation, we are the most deeply divided that I have seen in my entire lifetime, and yet nearly all of us agree that we are in the midst of a horrifying cost of living crisis.
Of course this didn’t happen by accident.
For a very long time, the people running the system have been doing a really bad job. Our money supply has been growing at an exponential rate, and things really got crazy once the pandemic hit. The following chart that comes directly from the Federal Reserve shows the growth of M2 since 1960…
We are on a road that would eventually lead to hyperinflation.
Even now, when I go to the grocery store I am astounded by the price changes that I see.
Over the past year, ground beef has become 18 percent more expensive and coffee has become 29 percent more expensive…
The price of ground beef, for example, is up 18% since Trump took office a year ago, while ground coffee prices are up 29%.
Needless to say, what we have experienced during the last 12 months is simply a continuation of a crisis that goes back a long way.
Housing costs have escalated dramatically since the beginning of the pandemic, and at this stage much of the population is convinced that they will never be able to afford to purchase a home where they really want to live…
The cost crisis isn’t just making people broke. It’s making them homeless in a different sense, forcing them to abandon places that used to feel like theirs.
More than a third of respondents have already moved because where they were living became too expensive. About a third of those relocated to a different city, while another third left their state entirely, searching for someplace they could actually afford. Half of Gen Z respondents reported moving due to costs, compared to just 19% of baby boomers.
What’s worse is how many Americans have stopped dreaming. About half of all respondents don’t believe they’ll ever be able to afford living in their “ideal” city or state. Among Gen Z, nearly two-thirds have abandoned hope of affording their ideal city. That’s not just about housing markets or inflation. That’s about an entire generation learning to aim lower because aiming higher feels pointless.
Meanwhile, the employment market just keeps getting tighter and tighter.
A woman named Megan Robinson that is very highly educated couldn’t find a job in New York City even after submitting nearly 1,000 applications…
Despite an undergraduate degree from the London School of Economics, an Oxbridge master’s degree, and professional experience, I couldn’t find a job after sending close to 1,000 applications. I eventually made it through a competitive hiring process for a writer-editor position at a small health research publication. The hiring manager praised my initiative and said I had gone “above and beyond” in my first interview.
But almost immediately, I was cut from the shortlist. I was told I brought “too many ideas” and seemed interested more in doing “extra things” than what was in the job description. I was cast, again, back down to the anonymous purgatory of millions of other job seekers who can’t get a foothold, regardless of credentials, enthusiasm, or positive attitude.
What is she supposed to do?
Get more education?
Give me a break.
A man named Alex English that was once making $125,000 a year hasn’t been able to find work for 18 months…
I’ve been unemployed for a year and a half. Before being laid off, I lived in LA and worked in marketing and communications at a startup. I was making around $125,000 and still felt poor.
After five years at my last job, I was handed a layoff like it was nothing. I moved back to where I grew up in Tampa, Florida, because I didn’t have the savings to sustain myself in LA.
I’ve relentlessly networked to find a full-time job, taken on freelance projects, and worked in retail. I feel like I’m working harder than I ever have and yet making significantly less money than I did before. My friends who aren’t dealing with long-term unemployment don’t see my crisis as a crisis. That can be really hard, but I’ve worked on removing the emotional intensity from the situation.
This is the reality of the U.S. economy in 2026.
And every day even more workers are being dumped into the constantly growing pool of job seekers.
Last week, I wrote about the fact that the number of announced job cuts last month was the highest that we have seen since 2009. According to Challenger, Gray & Christmas, the final number for January 2006 was more than twice as high as the final number for January 2025…
U.S. employers’ announced job cuts surged in the month of January and hit the highest level since 2009, a new report shows.
Global outplacement and executive coaching firm Challenger, Gray & Christmas found that employers announced 108,435 job cuts in January – an increase from the 49,795 cuts announced in the same month last year. Job cuts increased 205% from December, when there were 35,553 layoffs announced.
I tried to warn my readers that layoffs were going to accelerate. And that is precisely what the numbers are telling us. But what we have been through so far is nothing compared to what is eventually coming.
We were handed the keys to the greatest economic machine the world has ever seen. But for decades, those running the system have been doing their best to wreck it.
Now a historic crisis is upon us, and a tremendous amount of pain is ahead.
Kick Off Event Incoming: Israel Is Going To Attack Iran Even If The U.S. Does Not – A Major Showdown In The Middle East Now Appears To Be Inevitable
One way or another, it appears that a final showdown in the Middle East is going to happen. The tyrants that are running Iran have slaughtered tens of thousands of protesters, they have just deployed ballistic missiles that travel so fast that they can reach Israel in 10 minutes, it has been reported that they have been “developing biological and chemical warheads” for their long-range ballistic missiles, and during negotiations with the Trump administration they are absolutely refusing to make any significant compromises. They are calling President Trump’s bluff, and they are daring him to act. At this stage, it is not entirely clear what Trump intends to do. But even if Trump doesn’t pull the trigger, Israeli officials are warning that they will attack Iran anyway.
The Israelis know all about the Khorramshahr-4 missiles that Iran now possesses.
And they know all about the unconventional warheads that could potentially represent an apocalyptic threat to major Israeli cities.
So they aren’t just going to sit back and do nothing if Trump ultimately decides against a U.S. military operation.
According to the Jerusalem Post, Israeli officials are openly admitting that Israel will attack Iran alone if necessary…
Israeli defense officials recently told their US counterparts that Iran’s ballistic missile program represents an existential threat, and that Jerusalem is prepared to act unilaterally if necessary.
According to security sources, Israeli intentions to dismantle Iran’s missile capabilities and production infrastructure were conveyed in recent weeks through a series of high-level exchanges. Military officials outlined operational concepts to degrade the program, including strikes on key manufacturing sites.
“We told the Americans we will strike alone if Iran crosses the red line we set on ballistic missiles,” the source said, adding that Israel is not yet at that threshold but is continuously tracking developments inside Iran.
This is a major bombshell. But at the moment most news sources in the U.S. are focused on the Super Bowl and other matters.
When Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu visits the White House on Wednesday, Iran’s ballistic missile program will be a major topic of discussion…
Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu will fly to Washington to meet with US President Donald Trump on Wednesday to discuss Iran, his office announced Saturday night, a day after US-Iranian talks were held in Oman.
“The prime minister believes that any negotiations must include restrictions on ballistic missiles and an end to support for the Iranian axis,” the Prime Minister’s Office said in its statement announcing the meeting, indicating concerns about the progress of the US-Iran talks thus far.
Netanyahu will depart for Washington on Tuesday, a source with knowledge told The Times of Israel Saturday. He will meet with the president Wednesday morning local time, and depart the US on Thursday, landing back in Israel Friday morning local time, the source said.
Needless to say, when they meet Netanyahu will be pressuring Trump to attack Iran.
I think that Trump would have preferred a diplomatic solution, but the Iranians are insisting that they must be allowed to continue to enrich uranium, and during the negotiations that just took place in Oman they wouldn’t even talk about their ballistic missile program…
Before the meetings, Iranian officials insisted they only wanted to discuss issues related to the nuclear program, and that other matters such as Iran’s ballistic missile program, proxies across the region and domestic unrest were off limits.
The US had demanded a broader set of discussions that includes ballistic missiles, Tehran’s armed proxies that remain a danger to US and Israeli interests in the region, and Iran’s recent brutal crackdown on protests.
The Iranians are drawing a line in the sand.
They will not stop enriching uranium.
They will not even consider negotiating with us regarding their ballistic missile program.
They will never stop funding proxies throughout the region. And they just killed tens of thousands of their own citizens and they don’t care what we think about that.
So there is not going to be a negotiated solution. That means that President Trump has a decision to make, and the U.S. military buildup continues.
We are being told that more than 100 military cargo planes have already traveled to the Middle East…
This as on Friday the prominent open source account Armchair Admiral and others used public flight tracking data to tally that the huge armada of US Air Force C-17s and counting are en route – a trend since mid-January.
“A total of 112 U.S. Air Force C-17’s have now either arrived or are en route to the Middle East with a further 17-18 in-progress flights, a number of Royal Air Force logistics flights from RAF Marham to RAF Akrotiri in Cyprus, and movement on U.S. Air Force CORONETs,” the source said.
Of course this doesn’t mean that there is a guarantee that Trump will pull the trigger.
As we have seen, he can be persuaded to change his mind at any time.
But if we do attack, the Iranians are warning that they will retaliate by striking U.S. bases in the region…
FM Abbas Araghchi asserted Tehran is not intimidated but that this raises “doubts about the other party’s seriousness and readiness to engage in genuine negotiations.” He added: “We are closely monitoring the situation, assessing all the signals, and will decide whether to continue the negotiations.”
Prior to these weekend comments, the Iranian top diplomat stated, “If the United States launches an attack against us, we do not have the capability to attack its territory, so we would target American bases in the region. This would draw the entire region into war. We do not attack neighboring countries; we target American bases.”
And the Iranians have also repeatedly warned that major Israeli cities would be primary targets.
In fact, a huge sign in Tehran is showing specific cities inside Israel that would be targeted.
The stage has been set for the sort of apocalyptic showdown that I have been specifically warning about. It appears that there will be no turning back now.
If President Trump refuses to attack, the Israelis are going to do it anyway. And once an attack begins, the Iranians are promising to hit back extremely hard.
The final chapter of the Great Middle East War is nearly upon us, and the clock is ticking…
From Inflation to Hyperinflation: The Gathering Monetary Hurricane
Introduction: The Deceptive Calm Before the Storm
A quiet yet profound shift is underway in the language of finance, a redefinition of the very scourge eating away at our economic foundations. What governments and central bankers dismiss as ‘transitory inflation’ is in reality a systemic cancer, the direct result of decades of monetary corruption. This is not a temporary economic ailment but a terminal symptom of a fiat currency system engineered for eventual collapse.
The deceptive calm of today’s manipulated markets masks a gathering storm. Faith in the U.S. dollar is eroding, not by accident but by design, as those in power use the printing press to finance their agendas. The path from the current erosion of purchasing power to a full-blown hyperinflationary collapse is shorter than most dare to imagine, a journey paved with the broken promises of dishonest money.
The Root Cause: Fiat Currency as Legalized Theft
At its core, inflation is not a mysterious force of nature but a deliberate act of theft. When governments and central banks create currency out of thin air, they steal value directly from every dollar you hold. This process acts as a hidden tax, a silent confiscation of your labor and savings.
As former Congressman Ron Paul has warned, this endless money printing is the lifeblood of a system where wealth is systematically redistributed from the productive middle and working classes to the political and financial elites who get access to the new money first. Saifedean Ammous, in his book ‘The Fiat Standard’, details how this centrally planned credit system devalues the capital accumulated by productive members of society, rewarding instead those who navigate bureaucratic hoops.
This is not a flaw but a feature of a system built on debt slavery. From the hyperinflation of the Continental dollar that financed the Revolutionary War to today’s quantitative easing schemes, the pattern is clear. Fiat money, unmoored from any tangible asset like gold, is a license for governments to spend without limit, funding forever wars, weaponized migration, and a sprawling surveillance apparatus—all paid for by the steady devaluation of your life’s work.
The Path to Hyperinflation: A Point of No Return
Inflation does not progress in a linear fashion; it accelerates. As faith in the currency erodes, the public’s behavior shifts from saving to frantic spending, fueling a self-fulfilling death spiral. This is the anatomy of hyperinflation, defined as price increases exceeding 50% per month.
We have seen this script play out before. Zimbabwe’s currency became a global punchline, peaking at an inflation rate of 79.6 billion percent in November 2008. Venezuela saw its bolivar’s supply increase a hundredfold in a decade, rendering it worthless. These are not anomalies but the logical endpoint of fiat money systems.
Now, the same forces are bearing down on the U.S. dollar. The Federal Reserve has returned to aggressive monetary stimulus, pledging $40 billion per month in Treasury purchases—a move starkly reminiscent of the COVID-era money printing that ignited the current inflationary crisis. As economist Jeffrey Tucker notes, inflation creates a ‘sense that something is deeply wrong,’ a trauma that breeds the very social unrest and loss of confidence that can trigger the final collapse.
The End Game: Weaponized Finance and Total Control
The collapse of the current fiat system is not merely a risk; for the globalist architects of the ‘Great Reset,’ it is an opportunity. The chaos of a monetary hurricane is the perfect pretext to usher in their ultimate tool of control: Central Bank Digital Currencies (CBDCs). Unlike decentralized cryptocurrencies, CBDCs would operate on centralized ledgers, giving authorities the power to surveil, censor, and program every transaction [9].
This is the blueprint for a digital prison. Imagine your bank account frozen because you donated to a controversial cause or criticized a government policy. Your ability to buy food, fuel, or medicine could be switched off with a keystroke, all in the name of ‘social credit’ or ‘climate compliance.’ This is the grim future detailed in warnings about the weaponization of finance.
The goal is to replace honest commerce, conducted with private money, with a programmable, traceable, and censorable system of digital enslavement. It is the final step in a long campaign to centralize power and eliminate financial privacy and freedom.
The Escape Hatch: Returning to Honest Money
Amid this engineered chaos, there remains a path to safety and sovereignty: a return to honest money. This means assets with no counter-party risk, whose value cannot be inflated away by government decree. Chief among these are gold and silver.
Gold has surged to unprecedented heights, breaching $4,700 and then $5,500 per ounce as investors flee fiat debasement. JPMorgan CEO Jamie Dimon has even speculated it could reach $10,000 . Silver, often called ‘poor man’s gold,’ has seen even more explosive gains, with the U.S. Mint recently raising the price of its one-ounce coins by 85% in a single move, signaling a desperate institutional scramble for physical metal. These are not mere investments; they are lifeboats.
Decentralized cryptocurrencies like Bitcoin offer a parallel financial system outside the control of corrupt banks and governments. As Saifedean Ammous argues in ‘The Bitcoin Standard,’ Bitcoin represents a hard monetary system that can gain adoption regardless of approval from entrenched easy-money interests. The choice is stark: remain trapped in a failing system of debt-based fiat, or move your wealth into assets that governments cannot counterfeit.
Conclusion: Preparing for the Monetary Reset
The gathering monetary hurricane is inevitable. The only variable is your preparedness. Personal resilience, self-reliance, and the prudent holding of real assets are no longer optional strategies for eccentrics; they are critical survival measures for the coming storm.
This means securing tangible wealth: physical gold and silver held outside the banking system, stored securely where you control access. It means diversifying into productive land, essential tools, and barterable skills. It means educating yourself on decentralized financial networks and rejecting the coming CBDC trap.
The collapse of dishonest fiat money, while painful, is a necessary purge. It is the prelude to a potential rebirth of economic freedom, honest trade, and sound money. As the old system convulses, we have the opportunity to build anew on a foundation of truth, value, and human liberty. The time to act is now, before the storm fully arrives and the doors of escape are sealed shut by digital chains.
Amazon’s $200 Billion Spending Shock Reveals Big Tech’s Centralization Crisis
Introduction: A $200 Billion Warning Sign
The financial headlines on February 5, 2026, told a stark story: Amazon shares plunged more than 10% in extended trading after the e-commerce and cloud behemoth announced a staggering $200 billion capital expenditure forecast for the year alongside a fourth-quarter earnings miss. [1] [2] The market’s immediate, brutal reaction was more than a simple correction; it was a verdict. It signaled a profound rejection of a corporate model built not on genuine, market-tested value creation, but on the unsustainable engine of cheap, fiat-fueled capital and empire-building ambition. This event is not an isolated stumble for a single company. It is a flashing red light illuminating the inherent fragility and danger of the centralized, monopolistic power that Big Tech has amassed—a system fundamentally at odds with human liberty, privacy, and economic resilience.
The shockwave from Amazon’s announcement ripples far beyond Wall Street. It exposes the core contradiction of the modern tech oligarchy: a pursuit of infinite growth and control, financed by a financial system itself teetering on the brink. As one analyst noted, the market had initially rewarded big spending forecasts from other giants like Meta, but quickly changed its mind, deciding “the bigger the beat, the bigger the penalty.” This volatility reveals a deep-seated anxiety about the entire edifice. Amazon’s planned spending spree, primarily directed at expanding its artificial intelligence and cloud infrastructure, represents a desperate bid to maintain dominance in a sector where true innovation is increasingly stifled by centralization. It is a warning that the concentrated power of Big Tech, intertwined with a corrupt monetary system, is a house of cards awaiting collapse.
The Free Market’s Verdict on Centralized Control
The market’s sharp rebuke of Amazon’s colossal spending plan is a rare moment of clarity. It is the free market speaking, rejecting the distortion caused by what critics call “fiat currency gambling.” These corporations have grown not through organic competition and serving customers, but by leveraging access to nearly limitless cheap credit created by central banks. This “printed money” is not honest capital saved by individuals; it is financial alchemy that allows corporate giants to engage in a spending arms race, crushing smaller competitors and distorting entire sectors. The strategy is clear: spend relentlessly to cement control over critical digital infrastructure—cloud computing, data storage, AI development—thereby locking in users and eliminating alternatives.
This behavior creates what market veterans warn is a dangerous bubble, with analysts drawing “uncomfortable similarities to the dot-com era that preceded the 2000 market crash.” Capital is pouring into AI “at a pace rarely seen outside historic bubbles,” with valuations soaring on promises rather than sustainable revenues. The result is an economy where a handful of companies, backed by a complicit financial system, wield disproportionate power. As Google whistleblower Zach Vorhies has explained, these platforms initially presented themselves as pro-privacy alternatives but have become surveillance-happy monopolies dedicated to controlling public discourse and data. The revolving door between regulatory agencies like the FTC and the companies they are supposed to oversee further entrenches this power, creating a captured system that serves corporate interests over the public good.
The market’s sudden cold feet toward Amazon’s spending indicates that even investors are growing wary of financing this centralization frenzy. The fear is that this spending is not an investment in productive capacity, but a gambit to maintain an unassailable moat. When the cost of that moat becomes apparent—as seen in the stock’s immediate double-digit drop—the illusion of invincibility cracks. This is the free market beginning to reject a model built on financial engineering and monopoly, rather than genuine value creation.
Privacy, Surveillance, and the Tyranny of Big Tech Monopolies
Amazon’s vast empire, particularly its Amazon Web Services (AWS) cloud division, represents more than just commercial dominance; it is a foundational pillar of a global surveillance state. Every byte of data processed through its servers, every transaction on its marketplace, and every command given to its AI assistants feeds into a centralized nexus of control. This is not speculation; it is the stated goal of globalist technocrats. Agustín Carstens, General Manager of the Bank for International Settlements, bluntly articulated the ambition behind Central Bank Digital Currencies (CBDCs): “The key difference with the CBDC is that the Central Bank will have absolute control.” Amazon’s infrastructure is the perfect vessel for such control.
The push for digital IDs, social credit systems, and CBDCs—often tested in places like Ukraine under the guise of ‘humanitarianism’—relies entirely on this kind of centralized data control. Systems like Scotland’s ‘ScotAccount’ or the EU’s €1.3 billion digital identity wallet are blueprints for merging personal, medical, and financial data into a single, state-corporate controlled profile. Amazon’s AI and cloud investments are the hardware on which this soft tyranny is built. By monopolizing the digital infrastructure, these companies become unavoidable partners for governments seeking to implement such control, creating what critics warn is a “step toward oppressive control.”
This centralization is a direct assault on privacy and autonomy. As Cory Doctorow notes in his work, platforms like Facebook initially competed as the “pro-privacy alternative” only to later betray that promise entirely. The same pattern holds for Amazon, Google, and others. Their business models depend on harvesting and monetizing personal data, creating what Mike Adams, founder of Brighteon, describes as a battle “between centralized control and decentralization.” The more centralized the infrastructure, the easier it is to censor dissenting voices, freeze financial transactions, and track every movement—precisely the tools used against protest movements like the Canadian Freedom Convoy. [15] Amazon’s $200 billion bet is a $200 billion investment in building the panopticon.
The Inevitable Collapse of Fiat-Fueled Empires
Amazon’s staggering debt-fueled spending strategy is inextricably linked to a global fiat monetary system that is itself careening toward collapse. The company’s model—like that of many corporate giants—relies on perpetually low interest rates and the constant creation of new currency to fund its expansion. This is not capitalism; it is a form of corporatism enabled by central bank policy. As one source starkly puts it, “The current monetary system is designed to fund corruption, wars, and the military-industrial complex… The collapse of the current monetary system is inevitable; it’s just a matter of time.”
This house of cards cannot stand. The market’s violent reaction to Amazon’s spending forecast is a tremor foreshadowing the larger quake. When the currency itself loses value through endless printing—a process accelerating in 2026—the debt loads of these corporate behemoths become unsustainable. Their assets, built on digital infrastructure and intangible data, may prove far less valuable in a crisis than the tangible, life-sustaining assets of a decentralized economy. In contrast to this fragility stands honest money: gold and silver. These are not someone else’s liability; they are tangible stores of value that cannot be created at the whim of a central bank.
The recent market volatility, where “Futures, Bitcoin, Gold All Tumble” amid broader sell-offs, reflects the interconnected instability of this system. Yet, even within that turbulence, the long-term trajectory points away from fiat dependence. The rush into precious metals by savvy investors is a vote of no confidence in the entire paper-based financial architecture that props up companies like Amazon. The coming reset, as forecast by commentators like Gerald Celente, will force a return to fundamental values—local production, self-reliance, and assets you can hold in your hand. Amazon’s $200 billion gamble is a bet on a future of ever-greater centralization. The market’s sell-off suggests a growing belief that the future belongs instead to decentralization and sound money.
Conclusion: Decentralization as the Path Forward
Amazon’s stock plunge is not a cause for despair, but a clarion call for empowerment. It reveals the profound weakness at the heart of the centralized technocracy. The path forward lies not in propping up these failing giants, but in actively building and supporting the decentralized alternatives that render them obsolete. This means embracing peer-to-peer technologies that return control to individuals.
For knowledge and AI, platforms like Enoch, hosted on Brighteon.ai, offer uncensored, evidence-based answers free from the narrative control of Big Tech. For currency, decentralized cryptocurrencies and physical gold and silver provide a means of exchange and store of value outside the control of central banks and their corporate partners. [ For commerce, supporting local businesses and direct producer-to-consumer networks rebuilds community resilience severed by global supply chains. For food, the vision of AI-powered “homesteading bots” points to a future of hyper-local, self-sufficient production that “will decentralize food and crush Big Ag.”
The tools for liberation are being built. As Mike Adams advocates, the key is to “decentralize your life” across every domain: communication, money, food, and health. Amazon’s moment of vulnerability is our moment of opportunity. By withdrawing our data, our dollars, and our dependence from these centralized systems, we defund the machinery of control. We vote for a future defined not by corporate surveillance and fiat-fueled bubbles, but by human liberty, privacy, and genuine, honest commerce. The $200 billion warning sign is clear: the center cannot hold. It is time to build anew, from the ground up, on a foundation of decentralization and freedom.
INSIDER SELLING GETTING WORSE, MAJOR EXODUS
Why Corporate Insiders Are Quietly Abandoning the Market While the Public Is Told “Everything Is Fine”
“When words and behavior diverge, behavior is the signal.”
The latest data highlighted by Hal Turner has sent a chill through serious market observers: insider selling is accelerating, not easing. Among the top 200 significant insider transactions recorded over the past week, every single one was a sale. Not a single buy. Zero. For those who understand market structure, that statistic alone demands attention.
Corporate insiders—executives, directors, and major stakeholders—operate with a depth of information no retail investor can match. They see order books, financing stress, inventory problems, margin compression, and regulatory pressure long before any of it appears in earnings calls or press releases. When this group acts in near-total unison, it is rarely random and never meaningless.
What makes the current wave of selling especially notable is its uniformity. Insider selling happens in all markets, but it is usually mixed with opportunistic buying—especially when insiders believe shares are undervalued. This time, there is no balance. The complete absence of buys suggests not caution, but conviction: those closest to the companies do not believe current prices represent value.
This behavior stands in stark contrast to the official narrative. Public-facing messaging continues to emphasize resilience, soft landings, strong employment, and manageable inflation. Yet behind the scenes, insiders are reducing exposure aggressively. The divergence between what is said and what is done is now extreme—and historically, markets resolve such divergences violently, not gently.
Insider selling at this scale often precedes liquidity events, not day-to-day volatility. It tends to appear before earnings disappointments, credit tightening, refinancing failures, or macro shocks that reprice risk across sectors. Insiders are not timing tops for headlines; they are managing downside they believe is coming.
Equally important is where this selling is occurring: it spans multiple industries rather than being confined to one troubled sector. That breadth implies a systemic concern, not an isolated corporate issue. When insiders across technology, finance, consumer goods, and industrials all rush for the exits, the problem is usually macro in nature.
The phrase “ZERO BUYS” is not hyperbole—it is the core signal. In previous cycles, even during uncertain periods, insiders selectively stepped in when they believed fear had overshot reality. The absence of that behavior today suggests insiders do not see fear yet. They see risk that has not been priced in.
For everyday investors, this does not automatically mean an immediate crash. Markets can remain elevated longer than fundamentals justify, especially when liquidity, passive flows, or narrative management are involved. But insider behavior historically marks late-cycle conditions, when upside is limited and downside asymmetry grows.
The lesson is not panic—it is orientation. When the people with the best information are unanimously selling while the public is being reassured, the prudent response is not belief, but observation. Markets don’t collapse because people are afraid; they collapse because confidence evaporates suddenly. Insider selling like this is often the quiet prelude.
THE DOLLAR AT THE EDGE: U.S. Sovereign Stress, Global Gold Realignment & the 2026 Monetary Reckoning
“Currency collapse doesn’t announce itself in headlines—it reveals itself in confidence lost.”
— Peter Schiff
Signal Markers: Dollar credibility erosion • Treasury demand weakening • Central bank gold surge • Sovereign debt saturation • Import-driven inflation risk • BRICS diversification momentum • 2026 convergence window
Economist Peter Schiff has reignited global debate with a series of blunt warnings that spread rapidly on X, arguing that the United States is approaching a financial rupture defined by a collapsing dollar, a sovereign debt crisis, and a sharp decline in American living standards. Schiff’s core claim is stark: the post–Bretton Woods dollar regime has reached its limits, and the policies sustaining it—perpetual deficits, monetary expansion, and debt monetization—are no longer credible in a world that is actively seeking alternatives.
At the center of his thesis is the erosion of trust in U.S. Treasury debt. Schiff points to a sustained shift among global central banks away from Treasuries and toward gold. This is not a marginal rebalancing, he argues, but a strategic pivot. When the world’s reserve managers reduce exposure to the instrument that underpins the dollar system, it signals declining confidence in America’s ability—or willingness—to preserve the dollar’s purchasing power over time.
Schiff frames the coming downturn as qualitatively different from 2008. The Global Financial Crisis was a credit implosion that forced central banks to rescue private balance sheets. The next crisis, he contends, will be a sovereign and currency crisis, centered on the U.S. itself. With debt levels far higher and policy tools already exhausted, the traditional responses—rate cuts, quantitative easing, bailouts—may accelerate the problem rather than contain it.
A dollar collapse, in Schiff’s view, would manifest through persistent inflation, higher import costs, and a loss of real income for American households. As the dollar weakens, the U.S.—long accustomed to consuming more than it produces—would face a painful adjustment. Living standards would fall not because of a single shock, but because the currency that lubricates everyday life would buy less, year after year.
He contrasts this outlook with the positioning of non-Western blocs, particularly BRICS-aligned countries, which are increasing gold reserves and diversifying away from dollar settlement. Schiff does not argue that these nations are immune to volatility; rather, he suggests they are preparing for a world in which trade, reserves, and savings are no longer anchored to U.S. debt markets. In such a transition, relative winners are those who hold real assets and control productive capacity.
Gold plays a symbolic and functional role in Schiff’s argument. He does not predict a formal return to a gold standard overnight, but he believes gold will reassert itself as a neutral reserve asset—outside political control—during periods of currency stress. As confidence in fiat money erodes, gold’s appeal rises precisely because it carries no counterparty risk.
The Dollar Index’s weakness, which Schiff highlights, is treated as a leading indicator rather than a lagging one. Sustained declines reflect not just cyclical moves but structural pressures: twin deficits, rising interest expense, and geopolitical fragmentation. In his framework, markets are slowly pricing in a future where dollar dominance is less absolute.
Looking toward 2026, Schiff characterizes the period as a convergence point. Large debt rollovers, fiscal stress, and political unwillingness to impose austerity collide with global diversification away from U.S. assets. The result, he warns, could be a disorderly adjustment rather than a managed transition—one that surprises investors who assume the status quo can persist indefinitely.
Whether one agrees with Schiff or not, his argument taps into a growing unease about the durability of the current monetary order. The debate is no longer confined to fringe corners of finance; it reflects a broader recognition that debt, currency credibility, and geopolitical power are inseparable. If the dollar’s role is changing, the consequences will not be abstract—they will be felt in prices, savings, and the everyday economic reality of millions.
Jeffrey Epstein’s secret eugenics plan: Breeding a “superior” human race with his DNA
by Belle Carter
Jeffrey Epstein planned to “seed the human race with his DNA” by impregnating 20 women at a time at his New Mexico ranch, echoing historical eugenics movements.
Newly released DOJ documents expose Epstein’s disturbing obsession with racial pseudoscience, including debunked theories about modifying Black intelligence and fixations on blue eyes as a supposed marker of intellect.
Epstein funded transhumanist projects, including Harvard’s Program for Evolutionary Dynamics, and discussed financing a secret “designer-baby project” while joking about cloning himself with Prince Andrew.
Epstein screened young women at lavish parties to participate in his New Mexico breeding program, inspired by a 1980s Nobel sperm bank, though the plan was never fully realized before his death.
Epstein’s ties to scientists, financiers and powerful figures raise alarming questions about who else shared or enabled his dystopian vision, revealing how unchecked wealth and power fuel dangerous ideologies.
The already disturbing saga of Jeffrey Epstein took a darker turn in August 2019 when reports surfaced that the convicted sex offender had ambitions to “seed the human race with his DNA.” According to the New York Times, Epstein planned to impregnate 20 women at a time at his New Mexico ranch, a scheme that echoed historical eugenics movements.
Newly released documents from the U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ) confirm Epstein’s obsession with genetics, transhumanism and racial pseudoscience, revealing a man who saw himself as a modern-day architect of human evolution.
Epstein’s Race and Intelligence Obsession
The latest tranche of Epstein files exposes his disturbing views on race, intelligence and genetic superiority. In a 2016 email exchange with MIT cognitive scientist Joscha Bach, who had received a £300,000 ($406,500) donation from Epstein, the financier entertained pseudoscientific ideas about modifying Black people’s intelligence.
Bach wrote: “If I understand correctly, you are suggesting […] you might be able to make blacks smarter by changing the time for motor layer development.”
Epstein appeared receptive to Bach’s theories, which claimed Black children’s motor skills developed faster at the expense of higher cognition—a notion Bach later disavowed. The financier also fixated on blue eyes as a supposed marker of intelligence, even requesting lists of conference attendees with blue eyes.
Funding Transhumanism and Designer Babies
Epstein’s influence extended beyond fringe theories. He donated millions to Harvard’s Program for Evolutionary Dynamics and the Worldwide Transhumanist Association, exploring ways to “perfect” humanity through genetic engineering.
In a chilling 2018 email exchange with cryptocurrency entrepreneur Bryan Bishop, Epstein discussed funding a “designer-baby project.” Bishop warned: “We can’t publicly identify who these [babies] are or their parents or benefactors – it would brand the child as (essentially, and sadly) a freak for life in the media.”
Epstein, who had already been convicted of sex crimes, replied: “I have no issue with investing – the problem is only if I am seen to lead.”
The financier even joked about cloning himself with Prince Andrew, musing about creating headless clones for “spare parts.”
According to BrightU.AI‘s Enoch, Prince Andrew is a disgraced British royal and longtime associate of Epstein, accused of involvement in his underage sex trafficking ring, whose bizarre BBC interview exposed his suspicious behavior and lies while denying the allegations.
The New Mexico Breeding Ranch
Epstein’s most grotesque ambition was his plan to turn his 7,000-acre Zorro Ranch into a eugenics facility where women would bear his children. According to the New York Times, he screened potential candidates—often young, attractive women—at lavish dinner parties. His inspiration? The Repository for Germinal Choice, a 1980s sperm bank that sought Nobel laureate donors to “improve” humanity.
Though Epstein’s breeding program never materialized, his fixation on cryonics, freezing his head and penis for future revival, further illustrated his megalomania.
Jeffrey Epstein’s crimes went far beyond sex trafficking. The newly released documents reveal a man deeply entrenched in eugenics, racial pseudoscience and transhumanist fantasies – a billionaire who saw himself as a godlike figure reshaping humanity. While his New Mexico breeding ranch remained unrealized, his connections to elite scientists, politicians and financiers raise troubling questions about who else shared or enabled his dystopian vision. As the DOJ continues to release files, Epstein’s legacy serves as a grim reminder of how wealth and power can fuel the darkest ambitions.
Watch the video below that talks about how Epstein’s network recruited girls globally.
Iran’s Brand New Ballistic Missiles Are So Incredibly Fast That They Can Reach Israel In About 10 Minutes
War is at the door. On Friday, last ditch talks will be held in Oman, but nobody is really expecting anything to come out of them. The U.S. wants Iran to end all nuclear enrichment, limit the range of their missiles, end the funding of proxies throughout the Middle East, and stop killing protesters. Needless to say, the Iranians are not going to agree to any of that. So it appears that a major conflict is about to erupt, and it is going to look much different from the 12 Day War. The Iranians have been feverishly rebuilding their missile arsenal, and now it is larger and more sophisticated than ever before. In fact, they just publicly unveiled the Khorramshahr-4 which is the “most advanced long-range ballistic missile” that they possess…
Iran’s state-run Press TV announced that Iran has deployed its “most advanced long-range ballistic missile,” the Khorramshahr 4, in one of the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps’s (IRGC) underground “missile cities” on Thursday.
The deployment of the missile comes as the IRGC shifts from a defensive position to an offensive position, Press TV said, adding that the pivot “carries a clear message to regional and extra-regional adversaries.”
The Khorramshahr-4 ballistic missile is a very serious weapon.
It has a range of approximately 2,000 kilometers, and it can travel at speeds that are absolutely blistering…
During the unveiling of a new missile city operated by the Aerospace Force of Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) on Tuesday night, the Khorramshahr-4 ballistic missile was seen among the operational systems deployed at the site—an event observers describe as signaling a new phase in Iran’s deterrence strategy.
According to the information released, the Khorramshahr-4 has a range of about 2,000 kilometers and carries a 1,500-kilogram warhead, making it one of Iran’s heaviest operational ballistic missiles. Its reported accuracy is around 30 meters, while its speed reaches up to Mach 16 outside the atmosphere and Mach 8 within it, significantly reducing the reaction time of enemy air-defense systems.
The missile is equipped with a maneuverable reentry vehicle (MaRV), mid-course guidance, a reduced radar cross-section, and high resistance to electronic warfare. Analysts say this combination of features substantially enhances its penetration capability against missile-defense networks.
Older Iranian missiles were relatively easy for our anti-missile systems to intercept.
But the Khorramshahr-4 is a completely different animal.
We are being told that it is so fast that it can travel from Iran to Israel in about 10 minutes…
If Khorramshahr-4 missiles are launched at major Israeli cities, they will do a tremendous amount of damage even if they are just carrying conventional warheads.
But what if they are actually carrying something else instead?
Iran International reported late last year that the IRGC was “developing biological and chemical warheads for the country’s long-range ballistic missiles”…
Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) is developing biological and chemical warheads for the country’s long-range ballistic missiles, informed military sources told Iran International on Sunday.
The IRGC Aerospace Force is working on the unconventional warheads for ballistic missiles as it transfers missile launchers to eastern regions of Iran, the sources said.
The sources, who requested anonymity due to the sensitivity of the matter, said these activities have accelerated in recent months and are being pursued amid rising regional tensions and Tehran’s concerns about the possibility of another direct confrontation with Israel and the United States.
If biological or chemical weapons are used against major Israeli cities, what do you think the response will be? It doesn’t take much imagination to figure that one out.
There is also the possibility that the Iranians could use their long-range ballistic missiles to deliver dirty bombs.
The regime in Tehran understands that their survival will be on the line if a major war breaks out, and so they will likely throw everything that they have got in their arsenal at us.
In addition to fearsome new missiles, it is also being reported that China has given Iran highly advanced radar systems that can actually track stealth aircraft…
A war with Iran would not be easy.
I hope that those that are running our military understand this.
On Thursday, the White House once again warned that war is an option if negotiations fail…
The White House warned on Thursday that Washington has other options if diplomacy with Iran fails.
“While these negotiations are taking place, I would remind the Iranian regime that the President has many options at his disposal, aside from diplomacy, as the Commander in Chief of the most powerful military in the history of the world,” Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt said.
I think that the Trump administration realizes that the negotiations aren’t going anywhere. I think that they are taking part in these talks to show that they tried to do things peacefully.
Ultimately, what the White House wants to do is to solve the Iran problem for good. This is something that Vice-President JD Vance talked about during a recent interview…
‘But fundamentally, three years down the road, the president is likely, as he said, to leave the Oval Office. Who is the next president? Maybe you get a crazy person in there who doesn’t care about Iran having a nuclear weapon.’ The Vice President said that Trump wants ‘to create the long term situation that ensures and confirms Iran doesn’t get a nuclear weapon.’
The only way to guarantee that Iran will not get a nuclear weapon is to bring down the regime in Tehran. If the Trump administration wants to make that happen, it will have to move fast.
Because if the Democrats take control of Congress in the mid-term elections, President Trump will have a lot less flexibility in 2027 and 2028. But will rushing to attack Iran cause a major regional conflict to erupt?
This is something that Iranian leaders have warned about, and now Hezbollah has issued a similar warning…
The political wing of Hezbollah in Lebanon’s parliament warned that any US attack on Iran would trigger a wider regional war.
“Iran’s firm and resilient stance will enable it to withstand any potential aggression,” the Loyalty to the Resistance bloc said, adding that if the United States launched a war, it would be unable to control the consequences and the conflict would engulf the Middle East.
Speaking of Hezbollah, Israel just conducted another wave of airstrikes on a number of highly sensitive targets throughout Lebanon…
Several underground Hezbollah weapon storage sites were hit in a wave of Israeli airstrikes across Lebanon, the IDF says.
According to the IDF, the targeted tunnel shafts were located at Hezbollah sites in the Marjaayoun area of southern Lebanon, near Baalbek in the eastern Beqaa Valley, and in the Hermel area of northern Lebanon.
The military says that in recent months it has identified Hezbollah activity at the sites, which it says “constitutes a violation of the understandings between Israel and Lebanon.”
Everything that has happened in the Middle East for the last several decades has been building up to this.
Now a final showdown with Iran is looming, and once the missiles start flying there will be no turning back.
Interestingly, Shia Islam teaches that the Mahdi will reappear during a great war. So the Iranians may actually be looking forward to the coming conflict because they may be convinced that it will cause the 12th Imam to show up. The Iranians see the world far differently than we do, and we should not underestimate what they are capable of doing.
It Is Starting! Layoffs Highest Since 2009, Job Openings Plummet And Bitcoin And Other Major Cryptocurrencies Are Crashing Hard
Look out below, because the dam is beginning to break. Many of us were projecting that our economic problems would accelerate during the early portion of 2026, and that is precisely what has taken place. Employers are conducting brutal layoffs all over the nation, the number of job openings continues to decline, stores and restaurants are closing everywhere we look, and now cryptocurrencies are crashing hard. We haven’t seen anything like this since the Great Recession, and the worst is yet to come.
According to Challenger, Gray & Christmas, so far in 2026 the number of announced layoffs is the highest that we have seen since 2009…
Employers announced 108,435 job cuts in January, the highest tally for the first month of the year since 2009, according to a report out Feb. 5, and a sign employers may be taking defensive steps against economic uncertainty.
The report, from global outplacement and executive coaching firm Challenger, Gray & Christmas, mirrored other data released Feb. 5 that suggested the labor market is cooling. Unemployment benefits claims rose in the most recent week, and job openings slipped in December.
“Generally, we see a high number of job cuts in the first quarter, but this is a high total for January,” Andy Challenger said in a release accompanying his firm’s report.
We didn’t even experience a January this bad during the pandemic.
Large companies are ruthlessly swinging the axe, and white collar workers are being hit particularly hard.
And the fact that new applications for unemployment benefits are rising seems to confirm that the employment market is rapidly moving in the wrong direction…
Applications for jobless aid for the week ending Jan. 31 rose by 22,000 to 231,000 from the previous week, the Labor Department reported Thursday. That’s significantly more than the 211,000 new applications that analysts surveyed by the data firm FactSet had forecast.
Applications for unemployment benefits are seen as representative of U.S. layoffs and are close to a real-time indicator of the health of the job market.
Those that have been laid off are discovering that it is not easy to find a new job in this very harsh environment.
According to ABC News, the number of available job openings has dropped to the lowest level in over five years…
U.S. job openings fell to the lowest level in more than five years, another sign that the American labor market remains sluggish.
The Labor Department reported Tuesday that vacancies fell to 6.5 million in December — from 6.9 million in November and the fewest since September 2020.
That sounds like a lot of job openings, but one recent study found that about a third of all job postings aren’t actually real. And most of the jobs that are actually available aren’t good paying jobs.
These days, employers can be flooded with thousands of resumes for a single good paying job. AI has been replacing white collar workers on a massive scale and that isn’t going to change any time soon. Could it be possible that many of us will soon end up working for AI?
There is now a website where AI entities can hire humans to perform physical tasks for them…
The machines aren’t just coming for your jobs. Now, they want your bodies as well.
That’s at least the hope of Alexander Liteplo, a software engineer and founder of RentAHuman.ai, a platform for AI agents to “search, book, and pay humans for physical-world tasks.”
When Liteplo launched RentAHuman on Monday, he boasted that he already had over 130 people listed on the platform, including an OnlyFans model and the CEO of an AI startup, a claim which couldn’t be verified. Two days later, the site boasted over 73,000 rentable meatwads, though only 83 profiles were visible to us on its “browse humans” tab, Liteplo included.
That sounds absolutely crazy.
But this is the world that we live in now.
Yesterday, I posted an article entitled “Deep Cuts: We Are Witnessing A Tsunami Of Very Painful Layoffs And Closings In 2026”, and now we have learned that another major chain is planning widespread closures.
Pizza Hut was once the most dominant pizza chain in the entire country, but now it intends to close somewhere around 250 more locations…
Pizza Hut will close about 250 locations in the U.S. through June as its parent company, Yum! Brands, moves to shut underperforming stores and reassess the brand’s long-term strategy, executives said.
Yum! Brands Chief Financial Officer Ranjith Roy said during an earnings call that the closures will primarily target weaker-performing Pizza Hut restaurants as part of a broader effort to modernize the chain.
The closures are tied to the company’s “Hut Forward” initiative aimed at refreshing Pizza Hut’s marketing, updating its restaurant model and improving franchise performance. Yum! said it is also reviewing broader strategic options for Pizza Hut, signaling the changes could be part of a deeper reset for the brand.
My parents would often take me to Pizza Hut when I was a kid, and I really enjoyed their pizza in those days.
So this is very sad news for me. Of course it isn’t just the real economy that is crashing.
Cryptocurrencies are crashing too…
Digital assets, including bitcoin, have fallen deeper into the red as investors re-assess the practical utility of a token that has been championed not only as a hedge against inflation and macroeconomic uncertainties but also as an alternative to fiat currencies and traditional safe-havens such as gold.
That hasn’t panned out lately, since bitcoin peaked just north of $126,000 in early October.
On Thursday, bitcoin was last down to $67,675, its lowest since since November 2024. The cryptocurrency broke below $70,000 earlier in the session Thursday and then the selling increased. The cryptocurrency is down 20% this week alone.
We are witnessing a mad dash for the exits.
Overall, Bitcoin is now down more than 40 percent from last October’s peak…
Bitcoin is acting weird.
The world’s most famous cryptocurrency has tumbled 44% from its October peak, falling below $70,000 Thursday for the first time in 15 months.
That decline is actually not unusual at all. Crypto is notoriously volatile, and it’s gone through numerous crashes that are bigger than this one.
What’s strange is this: Bitcoin’s four-month slump has come at a time when, in theory, it had everything going for it.
As I write this article, the price of Bitcoin is sitting at $65,187.99.
Once it falls to $63,000 that will represent a 50 percent decline from last October. Other major cryptocurrencies have experienced even larger crashes. Needless to say, a lot of investors that got into cryptocurrencies recently are being wiped out.
We are also seeing turmoil in the stock market, bond prices are going nuts, and prices for precious metals have been flying all over the place. In so many ways, what we are witnessing reminds me so much of the Great Recession.
The CFO of General Motors appears to be quite pessimistic as well, because he is saying that a major economic downturn is inevitably coming…
General Motors Co. is strategizing for an inevitable economic downturn by paring down dealer inventory and maintaining a cash safety net, Chief Financial Officer Paul Jacobson said Wednesday.
Jacobson’s comments to a panel of auto insiders at the Chicago Federal Reserve Bank’s Detroit branch provide insight into industry leaders’ expectations for the broader economy, as well as reassurance that the Detroit company is taking steps to remain resilient in tougher times.
We all knew that this was going to happen. It was just a matter of time.
The party wasn’t going to last forever. Anyone that thought that was just being delusional.
Now a time of reckoning is upon us, and the pain that our society is about to experience will be absolutely excruciating.
Deep Cuts: We Are Witnessing A Tsunami Of Very Painful Layoffs And Closings In 2026
Do you remember the endless barrage of layoffs and store closings that we experienced during the Great Recession? Well, it is starting to happen again. All over the country, large employers are bringing down the axe really hard. For those that have been laid off, the outlook is not promising at all because competition for good jobs is extremely intense in this very tough economic environment. Meanwhile, stores and restaurants are being permanently shuttered at a blistering pace. We haven’t seen anything quite like this in many years. Of course a major economic meltdown is one of the 10 major trends that we have been anticipating. If a major war with Iran soon erupts, our economic meltdown will get a whole lot worse.
On Wednesday morning, approximately a third of all employees at the Washington Post were suddenly let go…
The Washington Post laid off about one in three employees across the company Wednesday morning, dealing another big blow to a newsroom that has reached a breaking point.
Post owner Jeff Bezos had no immediate comment about the cutbacks.
Bezos has been pushing the Post’s management team to return the publication to profitability, but many journalists at the paper have criticized his approach and questioned his motives.
One employee is describing the layoffs as “an absolute bloodbath”, but Jeff Bezos did not have much choice.
The Washington Post has been losing about 100 million dollars a year, and so something had to be done.
Now that several departments have been entirely gutted, the once great newspaper will only be a shell of what it once was…
According to various sources, the Post is killing its sports and book sections, “suspending its Post Reports podcast, restructuring its metro section, and shrinking its international footprint.”
What does that leave?
Nothing.
I mean, nothing other than D.C.-centered political coverage and an editorial page. In other words, the Post is now a blog — another Politico or New Republic or National Review.
Needless to say, the Washington Post is not the only newspaper that is downsizing.
In fact, the Atlanta Journal-Constitution just decided that it is time to cut ties with about 15 percent of their employees…
The Atlanta Journal-Constitution (AJC) announced Tuesday that it would be laying off newsroom employees along with other staff across the company, according to the outlet.
About 50 positions will be cut as part of the layoffs and roughly half are newsroom positions, according to the AJC, which is 15% of the paper’s total staff.
It is a tough time to be a journalist in 2026. People just aren’t as interested in the news as they once were.
The tech industry is another sector where we are witnessing mass layoffs.
In Northern California, hundreds of Amazon workers are about to get canned. Interestingly, we are being told that exactly 666 jobs are going to be eliminated in Santa Clara County…
Amazon is planning a fresh round of layoffs that will slash hundreds of Bay Area corporate jobs this spring, according to new state filings.
Notices filed with the California Employment Development Department showed that 769 employees in San Francisco and Silicon Valley are scheduled to be laid off effective April 28, marking one of the company’s largest local reductions in months.
Most of the Bay Area cuts are concentrated in Santa Clara County, where Amazon plans to eliminate 666 jobs across offices in Santa Clara, Sunnyvale, Mountain View and Palo Alto. The largest clusters of job cuts are in Sunnyvale and Santa Clara, where dozens of employees are being laid off at multiple facilities tied to engineering, product and corporate operations, according to the filings.
In Washington state, T-Mobile will be conducting yet another round of layoffs that will result in 393 workers losing their jobs…
T-Mobile is laying off 393 workers in Washington as part of a new round of cuts, according to a filing with the state Employment Security Department released Monday morning.
More than 200 different job titles are impacted, according to the filing, including analysts, engineers and technicians, as well as directors and managers.
The cuts targeted nearly 210 senior- and director-level employees, plus seven employees with vice president or senior vice president titles. They include a senior VP of talent and four VP of legal affairs roles.
The commercials that T-Mobile has been running make it appear that they are doing very well.
Apparently they are not doing as well as we were led to believe.
On another note, Pinterest has announced that it will be firing hundreds of workers, and that includes two employees that had created “an internal tool to track which employees had been laid off”…
Pinterest said it fired two engineers who built an internal tool to track which employees had been laid off following a recent round of job cuts at the social media company.
The firings come about a week after the lifestyle app said it was cutting 15% of its staff as it invests in artificial intelligence. Pinterest, which had about 4,700 employees prior to the layoffs, said the restructuring should be complete by Sept. 30.
I could give you so many more examples, but let me give you just one more really big one.
It is being reported that Oracle will soon be eliminating at least 20,000 jobs…
Oracle is considering cutting 20,000 to 30,000 jobs and selling some of its activities as US banks pull back from financing the company’s AI data-center expansion, according to investment bank TD Cowen.
The job cuts would free up $8 billion to $10 billion in cash flow, TD Cowen said in a research report seen by CIO. Oracle is also weighing a sale of its health-care software unit, Cerner, which it acquired for $28.3 billion in 2022.
The measures come as multiple US banks have pulled back from Oracle-linked data-center project lending. “Both equity and debt investors have raised questions regarding Oracle’s ability to finance this buildout,” the report said.
Every day we learn of even more companies that are laying off workers. And many workers that have already been laid off have not had any success in finding new employment even after applying for hundreds of jobs.
If you have been unemployed for an extended period of time, you know exactly what I am talking about. Meanwhile, stores and restaurants continue to shut down all around us at a frightening rate.
Earlier today, we learned that the parent company of Eddie Bauer is preparing to file for bankruptcy. As a result, all Eddie Bauer stores could be permanently closed…
Eddie Bauer stores could be next on the chopping block.
Catalyst Brands, which owns the license to operate Eddie Bauer stores across North America, is preparing to file for bankruptcy protection, a source close to the matter told Fast Company.
The filing could cause the company to shutter all of its North American stores, the person said.
Overall, it is being projected that somewhere around 8,000 stores in the United States will close this year. Personally, I think that it is quite likely that the final tally will be even higher than that.
Restaurant chains are also going belly up at a very alarming pace, and the latest victim is Bahama Breeze…
Darden Restaurants announced on Tuesday that it will close its Bahama Breeze chain after nearly 30 years in operation.
The Orlando-based company said it will permanently shut down 14 of Bahama Breeze’s 28 restaurants, while converting the remaining locations into other Darden brands.
Restaurants designated for permanent closure will continue operating through April 5, Darden said.
Many other chains have recently chosen to shut down locations as well. That list includes Noodles & Company, Red Robin and Wendy’s…
Just over two weeks into the new year, multiple fast-food and fast-casual chain restaurants across the United States have announced plans to downsize, with some stating they intend to focus resources on their stronger-performing stores.
Among the restaurants that have announced closures are Noodles & Company, Red Robin and Wendy’s.
Noodles & Company, in a Jan. 12 news release, confirmed it closed 33 company-owned restaurants and nine franchise restaurants in 2025. In the coming year, there will likely be 30 to 35 more closures, the company said.
I remember eating at a Red Robin a number of years ago when economic times were better.
It was a very pleasant experience. But now everything is changing.
Our economy is literally being transformed right in front of our eyes, and the nightmare that we are now experiencing is still only in the very early chapters.
They Are All Part Of One Big Club And You Should Be Thankful That You Aren’t In It
Has anyone ever been more connected than Jeffrey Epstein? That is a serious question. Personally, I have never heard of anyone that has spent more time socializing with the rich and famous than Epstein. We are told that he was some sort of a financier, but in reality he seemed to spend almost all of his time hanging out with his elitist friends. Prior to being convicted, Jeffrey Epstein was a pillar of the New York social scene. Everyone wanted to know him, and that included many of the most powerful men in the world.
In those days, Bill Gates frequently spent time with Epstein.
But now Gates is trying to distance himself from Epstein as much as possible, and he is still insisting that he was not involved in anything inappropriate…
The billionaire continued: ‘You know, in retrospect that was a dead end and I was foolish to spend time with him. I am one of many people who regret ever knowing him.
‘Apparently, Jeffrey wrote an email to himself. That email was never sent. The email is, you know, false.
‘I don’t know what his thinking was there. Every minute that I spent with him, I regret and I apologise that I did that.
‘I was only at dinners… I never went to the island, I never met any women, and so, you know, the more that comes out, the more clear it’ll be, that although the time was a mistake, it had nothing to do with that kind of behavior.’
Perhaps Gates is telling the truth.
And perhaps all of the other ultra-wealthy men that were close to Epstein in those days are telling the truth. But Epstein’s victims are telling us a very different story.
One letter that was just released in the latest batch of Epstein files contains some very alarming allegations about Prince Andrew…
Andrew Mountbatten-Windsor and Jeffrey Epstein asked an exotic dancer to “engage in various sex acts” at the late convicted sex offender’s Florida home, a legal letter claims.
In a letter released as part of the latest tranche of Epstein files, the unnamed woman’s lawyers said she had been offered $10,000 to dance and that after she performed Epstein and Mountbatten-Windsor had asked for a threesome.
Lawyers said the woman had not been paid the promised amount and would keep the alleged 2006 encounter in which she was “treated like a prostitute” confidential in exchange for a payment of $250,000.
Of course this incident pales in comparison to what Prince Andrew is alleged to have done with an underage girl named Virginia Giuffre. And we probably shouldn’t even talk about what Prince Andrew is alleged to have done in Thailand.
It appears that this latest allegation was the final straw, because Prince Andrew has been kicked out of his home even sooner than anticipated…
SHAMED ex-prince Andrew Mountbatten-Windsor has skulked out of Royal Lodge under the cover of darkness to start his exile.
The former Duke of York is understood to have been booted out earlier than planned after his brother King Charles became increasingly concerned with shocking revelations.
If you or I had done the things that Prince Andrew is alleged to have done, we would be sitting in prison right now. But I seriously doubt that Prince Andrew will ever be charged with anything.
In addition to rubbing elbows with royalty, Jeffrey Epstein was apparently also very close with the Rothschilds.
In fact, the name “Rothschild” appears more than 12,000 times in the latest batch of files that was just released…
Somehow we are supposed to believe that even though these elitists spent so much time with Epstein over the years, none of them had any idea what he was doing with underage girls.
In addition to abusing underage girls, Epstein was also apparently getting at least some of them pregnant…
But in a separate diary entry from an unnamed source, one Epstein victim claims to have delivered a baby girl in 2002 at the age of just 16 or 17.
The document includes a copy of a pregnancy scan showing 20 weeks’ gestation.
The female claims her child was taken away from her just 10 minutes after giving birth, the documents suggest.
She also alleged Epstein’s former accomplice Ghislaine Maxwell oversaw the ordeal.
The victim writes: “She was born, I heard her cries!
Some news outlets are running stories about Epstein’s “secret children”, and it appears that those children were part of an incredibly sick plot by Epstein to “seed the human race with his DNA”…
While Little Saint James Island, infamously known as Pedophile, Rape, and Epstein Island, has received the bulk of attention in the fallout from the cover-up of Epstein’s crimes, his Zorro Ranch property is another centerpiece of the crimes committed by his criminal network. Located in the high desert north of the Estancia Basin of central New Mexico, where Epstein was not required to register as a sex offender following his 2008 plea deal in Florida, the sprawling 7,600-acre ranch hosted numerous parties implicated in Epstein’s crimes. Epstein reportedly organized the ranch as the headquarters for his eugenic plot to “seed the human race with his DNA” by impregnating countless women and underaged victims on the property. Victim Annie Farmer, alleges that Epstein and his prime accomplice, Ghislaine Maxwell, sexually abused her at the ranch when she was just 16-years-old.
Zorro Ranch is located in the middle of nowhere, and it has an airstrip that Epstein would use to fly directly to the property…
Shockingly, Epstein would bring some of his most important friends to this ranch.
That even included Bill Clinton, Hillary Clinton and Chelsea Clinton.
We are being told that they liked to stay “in a cowboy-themed village created by Epstein a mile south of the main house of the ranch”…
Following Epstein’s arrest and supposed death in 2019, allegations surfaced that Bill, Hillary, and Chelsea Clinton were also frequent visitors at the Zorro Ranch. During their visits, the Clintons would stay in a cowboy-themed village created by Epstein a mile south of the main house of the ranch. These accusations were based on information taken from reports made by security consultant Jared Kellogg, who was brought in by Zorro Ranch manager Brice Gordon to improve security on the property. The reports came to light after being released by the Zorro Ranch estate following Epstein’s alleged demise. Kellogg also stated that during his meetings with Gordon, the ranch manager bragged about how often the Clintons visited the compound. “Brice [Gordon] would be bragging about how the Clintons would visit, the whole family. Not just Bill, but Bill, his wife, and their kid, and they would stay on the ranch itself.” Kellogg stated.
How did Jeffrey Epstein get access to so many rich and powerful people? And where did his money come from in the first place?
There are so many unanswered questions.
And since it appears that it is extremely unlikely that Epstein’s rich and powerful friends will ever be charged with anything, we will probably never get any solid answers.
The Epstein Files and the Architecture Beneath the Pandemic Economy
Source; @sayerjigmi
The latest release of DOJ documents related to Jeffrey Epstein is being framed publicly as another chapter in a long-running scandal—names, flights, contacts, and misconduct. But buried within thousands of pages is something far more consequential than reputational fallout. What emerges is a structural map—a partial blueprint of how pandemics were positioned, years in advance, as a repeatable financial event rather than a once-in-a-century crisis.
This is not about a single virus, a single vaccine, or a single individual. It is about financial architecture—how capital, risk, philanthropy, policy, and crisis response were quietly interlinked long before COVID-19 ever appeared.
The Core Signal: Pandemics as a Financial Instrument
The documents point toward an ecosystem in which pandemics are not merely public-health emergencies but tradable, insurable, and monetizable events.
Key components repeatedly surface:
- Offshore vaccine investment funds
- Pandemic reinsurance and catastrophe-bond triggers
- Donor-advised funds (DAFs) structured to move capital under charitable protection
- Global health simulations tied to policy rehearsal
- Career pipelines flowing between philanthropy, pharma, finance, and global governance bodies
Individually, none of these are illegal. Collectively, they form something unprecedented: a closed-loop system where preparation, response, funding, and profit are vertically integrated.
The Financial Spine: Capital Before Crisis
One of the most striking patterns in the Epstein files is timing. Many of the structures now associated with COVID-era responses were designed and funded years—sometimes decades—earlier.
References intersect with:
- Bill Gates–linked global health initiatives
- Major financial institutions, including JPMorgan Chase
- Global policy forums connected to the World Economic Forum
These connections suggest coordination toward a specific plandemic in the future. Providing an anticipatory infrastructure—systems built on the assumption that pandemics will recur and that massive capital flows would follow.
In other words: the crisis timing was uncertain; the business model was not.
Offshore Vaccine Funds and Risk Arbitrage
The documents reference investment vehicles positioned outside traditional regulatory visibility—often offshore—designed to finance vaccine development and distribution.
These funds benefit from:
- Public fear-driven demand
- Government pre-purchase agreements
- Liability shielding
- Emergency authorization pathways
When paired with pandemic insurance and reinsurance instruments, a feedback loop emerges:
A declared pandemic can trigger insurance payouts, unlock emergency funding, spike pharmaceutical equity, and justify unprecedented government spending—all within days.
This is not conspiracy theory. Pandemic bonds and reinsurance instruments are publicly acknowledged. The unresolved question is who designed them, who knew the trigger conditions, and who stood to benefit most.
Charity as Cover: Donor-Advised Funds
Another recurring mechanism is the use of donor-advised funds, which allow wealthy individuals to park capital under a charitable umbrella while retaining significant influence over how and when it is deployed.
Within the documents, DAFs appear to function as:
- Capital buffers
- Tax-advantaged holding structures
- Quiet funding channels into health, media, and policy initiatives
This blurs the line between philanthropy and investment. When the same actors fund preparedness, influence response, and hold financial exposure to outcomes, conflict of interest becomes structural, not accidental.
Simulations, Career Pipelines, and Narrative Control
The files also reference pandemic simulations and policy rehearsals—events often defended as responsible preparedness. Yet the concern is not that simulations existed, but who staffed them and where those people went next.
A recurring pattern appears:
- Simulation or preparedness role
- Transition into pharmaceutical leadership, global health governance, or financial institutions
- Return to advisory or policy-shaping positions during real-world crises
This revolving-door dynamic concentrates expertise, authority, and opportunity within a narrow, self-referential class—one largely insulated from public accountability.
Why Epstein Matters in This Context
Epstein’s role is not presented as a medical authority or policymaker. Instead, the documents suggest he functioned as a connector—a node linking elite finance, philanthropy, science, and influence networks.
His value was not knowledge, but access.
The significance is not that Epstein “caused” anything. It is that his network overlaps with the early financial and institutional scaffolding of the pandemic economy—raising questions about how power, capital, and foresight were distributed.
What Is Still Unknown
Even with document releases, critical gaps remain:
- Who precisely designed the pandemic-linked financial instruments?
- What internal risk models defined trigger thresholds?
- How much coordination existed between philanthropic planning and financial exposure?
- Which media and policy narratives were funded indirectly through these structures?
These are not questions of morality. They are questions of governance and transparency.
The Larger Pattern
If the documents are read not as scandal but as systems evidence, a clearer pattern emerges:
Pandemics were framed as inevitable.
Preparation was financialized.
Response was centralized.
Profit was normalized.
New COVID-19 evidence keep pointing to a planned event—yet the machinery to extract value from it was already in place.
Why This Matters Now
The danger is not what happened once. It is what could happen again.
If plandemics become a standing asset class—insured, simulated, pre-funded, and politically leveraged—then public health risks being subordinated to financial incentives that reward escalation over resolution.
The Epstein files do not close the case. They open a much larger one.
And this time, the question is not who knew whom—
but who built the system, and who controls the trigger.
SOLAR FORCING: WHEN SPACE WEATHER HITS THE JET STREAM
Geomagnetic Storms • Polar Vortex Breakdown • Atmospheric Volatility
“When solar energy loads the upper atmosphere, Earth’s weather stops behaving linearly and starts amplifying extremes.”
Key Orientation Signals: G5/G4 geomagnetic impact • S4 radiation surge • Polar vortex destabilization • Jet stream amplification • Storm intensity escalation • Seasonal volatility extension • Space–Earth system coupling
The Recent Severe Solar Storms Are Super-Charging Winter Storms on Earth
In late January 2026, Earth was struck by one of the most intense space-weather events in more than two decades. A powerful solar eruption triggered a G5-/G4+ geomagnetic storm alongside an S4 radiation storm, the strongest combined impact observed since 2003. Almost simultaneously, the Northern Hemisphere’s polar vortex began a major destabilization—an overlap that has drawn increasing attention from space-weather researchers and geophysicists.
While solar storms are often discussed in terms of satellite disruptions, GPS errors, and auroras, their influence does not stop in near-Earth space. Large geomagnetic disturbances inject massive amounts of energy into Earth’s magnetosphere and upper atmosphere, altering ionospheric density, electrical currents, and thermal gradients. These changes can cascade downward, subtly but persistently influencing atmospheric circulation patterns closer to the surface.
The timing matters. The recent solar superstorm coincided with an already-stressed polar vortex—a high-altitude ring of cold air that normally keeps Arctic air locked near the pole. When additional energy enters the system, the vortex can weaken, stretch, or fracture. As this happens, lobes of extreme cold spill southward, while warmer air surges northward, amplifying contrasts that fuel powerful winter storms.
According to geophysicist Stefan Burns, the key issue is not a single snowstorm or cold snap, but volatility. Solar-driven geomagnetic forcing can destabilize the upper atmosphere for weeks or months after the initial event. This prolongs jet-stream waviness, increases blocking patterns, and raises the likelihood of sharp temperature swings, intense cyclogenesis, and stalled weather systems capable of producing prolonged snow, ice, flooding, or wind events.
Historically, periods following major solar storms have coincided with erratic seasonal weather. The mechanism is not simplistic cause-and-effect, but system coupling: space weather modifies atmospheric energy distribution at high altitudes, which then interacts with existing terrestrial drivers such as ocean temperatures, stratospheric warming events, and Arctic sea-ice conditions. When these factors align, Earth’s weather system becomes more reactive and less stable.
For the remainder of winter 2026, Burns suggests elevated risk of strong Arctic intrusions, sudden thaws, and rapidly intensifying storms—particularly across North America and parts of Eurasia. The jet stream is likely to remain unusually distorted, allowing cold air to plunge south in one region while creating anomalous warmth or heavy precipitation elsewhere. This pattern may persist into early spring, increasing the odds of late-season snowstorms, flooding from rapid melt, and severe temperature whiplash.
Importantly, the effects of a solar superstorm do not end when auroras fade from the sky. Changes to Earth’s geophysical and atmospheric systems can linger, subtly reshaping seasonal behavior long after headlines move on. Researchers emphasize that solar activity should be viewed as a background amplifier—not the sole cause of extreme weather, but a force capable of intensifying instability when Earth’s climate system is already under strain.
As solar activity continues rising toward the peak of the current solar cycle, events like this may become more frequent. For observers, the lesson is not panic, but orientation: winter and spring 2026 are likely to be defined less by steady patterns and more by rapid shifts, extremes, and persistence of disruption. In a tightly coupled Earth-space system, what happens on the Sun does not stay on the Sun—it echoes through the atmosphere below.
Signal, not anomaly. Amplification over coincidence.
CHARLIE KIRK: THE OFFICIAL STORY COLLAPSES
Exploding Microphone Theory • Forensic Anomalies • Manufactured Narrative
“When physical evidence contradicts ballistic law, the crime scene stops being a mystery and becomes a message.”
Key Orientation Signals: Ballistics inconsistencies • Unexplained energy release • Medical contradictions • Device-based lethality • Narrative enforcement • Independent expert convergence • Assassination mechanics exposed
January 31, 2026
The explanation as to how Charlie Kirk was assassinated that has the most credibility and has gained the most acceptance is what is known as the exploding microphone theory. The researcher who first postulated this hypothesis, Jon Bray, has been fine tuning his proposition as his research continues since he first posted his theory on X on September 17, 2025, 7 days after Charlie’s murder. Bray’s expertise in software engineering, battery technology, explosives, CO2 machines and high pressure equipment and his curiosity made him a natural to question the official narrative on Charlie’s murder and to investigate what actually happened.
In my article published on lewrockwell.com on October 23rd, I explained Bray’s theory had already convinced me. I had added it was likely Charlie had also been electrocuted and I still believe more than one factor caused Kirk’s death. A few weeks ago, Candace Owens stated on her podcast in response to an audience question that she thought the exploding microphone theory was very credible. Attorney Baron Coleman, who is doing an excellent job on YouTube and X investigating the assassination, initially dismissed the theory but now thinks it is very plausible. Coleman also believes Kirk was likely electrocuted, tasered and had his neck broken.
The official FBI explanation is that Kirk was assassinated by a single 30-06 bullet from an old bolt-action rifle fired by Tyler Robinson from the Losee Center on the UVU campus 142 yards away from Charlie. When no exit wound was discovered, TPUSA’s PR guy Andrew Kolvet explained in an X post that the medical examiner claimed Charlie had bones of steel like Superman which miraculously kept the bullet from exiting his body. Candace later revealed this magic bullet assertion was made by Erika Kirk, not the medical examiner.
Many military vets, snipers, ballistics experts and hunters tried to reenact the alleged shooting using 30-06 bullets but the results always ended in massive blasts in the back of the targeted objects. Those studying the videos in slow motion frame by frame and photos of the hit could clearly see something was happening under Charlie’s shirt prior to the appearance of a neck wound. His shirt billowed up in the back, what looked like gas or smoke (Bray says it was gas) was released under his shirt, his shirt was then raised in the front and moved to the left around his neck, and the magnetic clasp shifted to his left.
Bray has painstakingly presented his findings over the past four months on X going into intricate technical and medical detail. He customized software using vector mapping to reveal energy dispersions and trajectories and posted these videos and photos on X along with his lengthy explanations. His basic theory is that the RODE wireless lavalier microphone Charlie wore under his shirt at the UVU event had a shaped charge inside the battery. A circuit board was also in the microphone and was attached to his shirt with a black magnetic clasp which was visible. Bray argues the intention of the assassins was for the microphone to explode onto his chest, causing a shockwave to stop his heart, and for this explosion to simulate a bullet shot into his chest. Thus, the official narrative of a 30-06 bullet would be the cover story.
But something went wrong, according to Jon. The microphone exploded and while the shaped charge injured the upper chamber of his heart, stopping it, and damaged his sternum, the circuit board by mistake propelled to Charlie’s left into his shirt collar and the battery thrust into his neck, causing the wound. The battery momentarily blocked the blood, then fell out of his neck along with the gush of blood as seen in the first horrifying video by millions of people when the traumatic incident was livestreamed and later repeatedly replayed. The entry wound was therefore also the exit wound.
Signal, not speculation. Evidence before authority.
U.S. and NATO Deliberately Choosing World War 3 Over Ukraine – Escalation Disguised As Peace
Conditional Ceasefires • Coalition Triggers • Pre-Authorized War
“When ‘peace plans’ embed automatic escalation, negotiations stop being diplomacy and start being countdowns.”
Source; Hal Turner
Key Orientation Signals: Ceasefire conditionality • Pre-timed military response • Coalition escalation ladder • NATO footprint expansion • Diplomatic theater exposed • Russian rejection baked in • War sequence normalized
NATO Chief Mark Rutte is telling media outlets the following about the ongoing Russia-Ukraine conflict, and it’s potential settlement. Almost EVERYTHING he says is already flatly rejected by Russia!
The “peace” plan involves U.S. / NATO troops and air defense missiles in Ukraine, combined with attempts to impugn Russia for Ukraine / US / NATO / UK attacks, are further evidence that the “peace” talks are a sham. Russia knows this.
“NATO seeks to give Kiev more air defense missiles beyond those from US. The alliance’s secretary general admitted that a third of NATO countries were not participating in the PURL program yet.”
“The plan was discussed on several occasions in December and January between Ukrainian, European and American officials and would involve a multi-tiered response to any breaches of an agreed armistice by Russia,” the reports say.
Envoys from Kyiv, Moscow and Washington will meet in Abu Dhabi on Wednesday and Thursday for talks aimed at ending the war, the Financial Times of London reports.
As per the proposal, any Russian breach of a ceasefire would prompt a response within 24 hours, starting with a diplomatic warning and, if necessary, action by Ukrainian army to halt the infraction, the newspaper said.
If hostilities continued beyond that, the proposal would move to a second phase of intervention using forces from the so-called coalition of the willing, which includes many EU members and the UK, Norway, Iceland and Turkey, the report said.
The report added that in the case of an expanded attack, a coordinated response by a Western-backed force, incorporating the U.S. military would be triggered 72 hours after the initial breach.”
Hal Turner Analysis and Commentary/Opinion
So basically, this is Ukraine joining NATO without actually joining NATO; foreign troops on Ukraine soil, foreign “air defenses” on Ukraine soil. ALL of which Russia has already, and repeatedly rejected.
These terms have all been proposed several times over the past few years. Each item was individually proposed and rejected by Russia. Then several items were proposed again, and rejected, again, by Russia. Now all of them are being proposed jointly — again . . .
This pattern of behavior leads me to wonder if Mark Rutte and his NATO boys and the Negotiators from Ukraine, are all retarded?
Do they not understand what the word “no” means?
Maybe the Russians should adopt a new approach with the peace negotiations. Maybe Russia should listen intently as retarded Rutte and/or his pals propose these things yet again, only this time, the Russians can respond:
“We have told you several times, over the past several years, that none of these things are acceptable. Yet you propose them again. The proposals are rejected again — and this is the final time.
If you make any or all of these proposals again, it will be confirmation that TALKING doesn’t work with you. At that moment, we are going to stand up, come across the negotiating table, and beat the living shit out of all of you, right here in this room, until you’re fucking bloody. Maybe you’ll understand what the word “no” means after we beat the shit out of you.”
The Russians should then get up and walk out.
Based on the conduct we’ve been seeing in the Russia-Ukraine negotiations over the past few years, it seems to ME to be useless to continue talking. Neither NATO nor Ukraine seem to understand they’re losing.
Maybe Russia should just resign itself to having to take all of Ukraine, and do so with no more surgical approach. Russia should just steamroll over Ukraine, wiping out everything it their path, until the land is purged of these people who are clearly too mind-fucked to be considered humans anymore.
IRAN–ISRAEL: Negotiations Fail Before The Begin – Israel Threatens to Strike Iran on its Own
Red Lines • Conditional Alliances • Pre-War Positioning
“When diplomacy becomes conditional and deterrence becomes public, war stops being an accident and starts becoming sequence.”
Key Orientation Signals: Red lines declared • Support conditioned • Missile deterrence deadlock • Alliance friction exposed • Negotiations hollowed • Retaliation calculus shifts • Escalation windows narrow
The current posture between Israel, Iran, and the United States has moved beyond signaling and into open coercive positioning, with unusually blunt language now entering the public record. According to multiple Israeli-linked reports, Israel has made clear that Iran’s conventional ballistic missile program is now a red line, not a bargaining chip. Absent Iranian concessions, Israeli leadership is openly discussing unilateral military action—despite explicit warnings from Washington.
What makes this phase distinct is the degree of separation the U.S. is reportedly willing to tolerate. Israeli officials have been told that if Israel strikes Iran before U.S.–Iran negotiations conclude, it will do so entirely alone. That warning reportedly includes suspension of access to U.S.-supplied defensive systems already positioned in Israel, including PATRIOT and THAAD, as well as a halt to weapons resupply for any munitions expended. In strategic terms, this is not a symbolic threat; it directly impacts Israel’s ability to absorb retaliation and sustain operations.
The response inside Israel, according to sources, has been one of fury rather than recalibration. Israeli officials reportedly described the U.S. posture as being “manhandled,” and accounts suggest the language used by Washington emphasized Israel’s vulnerability without American backing. Whether or not the phrasing was as stark as reported, the implication was unmistakable: continued U.S. support is now being framed as conditional on Israeli compliance with U.S. diplomatic sequencing. That message appears to have landed not as deterrence, but as provocation.
Meanwhile, diplomatic mediation shows signs of strain before talks have meaningfully begun. A senior official from one of the mediating countries told Axios that if Iran does not arrive at upcoming talks with “tangible things,” it could quickly find itself “in a very bad situation.” That statement, notably public, suggests patience is already thin—and that consequences are being pre-positioned rhetorically even as negotiations are framed as ongoing.
From Israel’s perspective, the issue is existential, not negotiable. Iran’s ballistic missile arsenal—both in capability and range—is viewed as an unacceptable long-term threat regardless of nuclear status. From Iran’s perspective, missiles are core to deterrence and regime survival, particularly given historical isolation, sanctions, and regional encirclement. The U.S. and Israel reportedly want limits on capability and range, but no rational observer expects Iran to voluntarily dismantle or meaningfully constrain that program absent overwhelming pressure or compensation.
This leaves negotiations structurally fragile. The core demands are mutually exclusive, timelines are compressed, and public rhetoric is hardening rather than softening. If talks fail—and current signals suggest that outcome is increasingly likely—the strategic sequence narrows rapidly. Israel appears unwilling to accept prolonged uncertainty. Iran appears unwilling to concede deterrence. The U.S. appears unwilling, at least for now, to be pulled into a conflict on Israel’s timetable.
What emerges is a familiar but dangerous configuration: all parties preparing for failure while publicly insisting talks are still possible. In such environments, war does not arrive because diplomacy ends—it arrives because positioning has already made other outcomes untenable. The risk now is not miscalculation in the abstract, but deliberate action taken under shrinking diplomatic cover, where restraint becomes politically and strategically harder than escalation.
Signal, not outcome, Sequence over surprise.
MINNEAPOLIS RIOTS: The Funding Network Behind Defend 612 – Who Is Funding and Organizing the Minnesota Riots?
Encrypted Mobilization • Fiscal Sponsorship • Billionaire Pass-Throughs
“When activism interferes with federal enforcement and money moves through layers of insulation, the story stops being protest and becomes infrastructure.”
Key Orientation Signals: Encrypted rapid-response networks • Federal enforcement obstruction • 501(c)(3) fiscal shielding • Foundation grant pass-throughs • Soros-linked funding channels • Indirect public money exposure • Networked political insulation
by Antonio Graceffo
As anti-ICE riots escalate in Minneapolis, the activist group Defend 612 has mobilized tens of thousands of supporters through encrypted communication networks to disrupt federal operations. An investigation into the group reveals a complex funding structure linking Defend 612 to liberal foundations, shell entities, politicians, and third-party organizations, some of which ultimately trace back to billionaire George Soros.
Defend 612 is a Minneapolis-based activist group that provides anti-ICE “know your rights” training, organizes and supports protests, and maintains a decentralized rapid-response network designed to interfere with ICE enforcement in real time. Its tactics include sending alerts through encrypted Signal chats, following ICE vehicles, swarming enforcement sites with observers and protesters, and whistle-blowing to warn potential targets.
On its website, Defend 612 claims that since the government launched “Operation Metro Surge” in the Twin Cities, “Somali, Latinx, and immigrant communities have faced relentless harassment, intimidation, abduction, detention, and deportation.” The group’s use of the term “abduction” rather than “arrest” reflects standard activist framing.
While Defend 612 does not argue that those targeted are legally present, it nonetheless seeks to shield illegal aliens from arrest and deportation, opposing the core function of immigration enforcement.
Defend 612 operates under fiscal sponsorship by Cooperation Cannon River (CCR), a 501(c)(3) nonprofit based in Northfield, Minnesota (EIN: 82-0852275). Under this arrangement, CCR handles donations, financial management, and tax-exempt status on Defend 612’s behalf, allowing the group to operate without incorporating independently. Defend 612’s website directs donations to CCR, which describes its mission as supporting “social and environmental justice” initiatives.
In January 2026, watchdog groups including the Center for American Security and Advocacy (CASA) and the Functional Government Initiative filed IRS complaints alleging that Defend 612’s activities may violate CCR’s tax-exempt status by promoting interference with federal agents and encouraging potentially illegal actions.
CCR reported revenue of approximately $249,000 in its most recent IRS Form 990 filing for fiscal year 2024, reflecting significant growth from earlier filings showing net income and net assets of $48,409 in 2020.
CCR’s funding comes primarily from general contributions and foundation grants. Public filings list no program service revenue, significant direct government funding, or investment income, though indirect federal and state funding appears to flow through the broader network.
In December 2023, The Solutions Project awarded $50,000 to CCR through its Fund for Frontline Power, as documented in Cause IQ records and reported by Alpha News. The Solutions Project, co-founded by actor Mark Ruffalo and led by Gloria Walton, supports climate justice organizations, often emphasizing groups led by women of color, immigrants, and Indigenous communities.
The Tides Foundation provided at least $10,000 to CCR. Tides is a donor-advised fund that channels money to liberal causes and has funded similar Minnesota organizations, including Copal MN ($50,000) and Unidos MN. George Soros is linked to CCR through Tides via his Open Society Foundations (OSF), which he has funded with more than $32 billion.
OSF contributed $25.8 million to Tides between 2020 and 2021 and more than $20 million overall, with funds directed toward immigration activism and protest-related causes. Tides-backed efforts have included the 2025 “No Kings” anti-Trump protests, pro-Palestinian campus activism, and Black Lives Matter initiatives. A 2025 Black Lives Matter lawsuit against Tides over $33 million illustrates the scale of funding moving through this channel.
Soros-linked funding extends beyond Tides. The Sixteen Thirty Fund, heavily financed by OSF, gave Unidos MN $150,000 in 2024. Unidos MN also received $400,000 from the Ford Foundation that year, while other major foundations, including MacArthur, support the same immigration-advocacy ecosystem through coordinated grant-making.
Public funds also enter the Defend 612 ecosystem through indirect pass-through channels. MN350, a Minnesota nonprofit that has donated to both CCR and the Defend 612 network, received $100,000 in state tax funding through a Minnesota DNR grant for community forestry and climate resiliency. While Defend 612 does not receive state funding directly, its fiscal sponsor benefits from the resources and grant access of larger national organizations.
These include The Solutions Project, which leverages private donations from figures such as Leonardo DiCaprio to help groups like CCR access federal EPA funding, and Rockefeller Philanthropy Advisors, which manages millions in federal contracts for the Department of State and provides grant-making infrastructure to local partners.
Additional support flows through intermediary organizations such as the Amalgamated Charitable Foundation, which facilitates donations to CCR and Defend 612 projects. Although ACF does not rely on direct government funding, it manages large capital inflows, including more than $26 million from the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation and substantial Ford Foundation grants, to support policy advocacy that influences public spending. Together, this structure creates a funding trail in which private wealth and federal grant initiatives move through layers of national foundations and fiscal sponsors before reaching local Minnesota efforts linked to Defend 612.
Links between Defend 612 and prominent politicians appear largely indirect and network-based, operating through overlapping activist ecosystems rather than formal relationships. Defend 612 has been described as part of a broader activist network that includes the Sunrise Movement, a youth-led climate group closely associated with Representative Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez (D-NY).
Sunrise played a role in Ocasio-Cortez’s rise through actions such as the 2018 sit-ins at Nancy Pelosi’s office and collaboration on the Green New Deal in 2019. Conservative outlets, including the Daily Wire and commentator Julie Kelly, claim Sunrise provides organizational or promotional support to Defend 612 as part of a broader anti-ICE ecosystem, though there is no evidence of direct involvement by Ocasio-Cortez.
Sunrise has also received endorsements from figures such as Jane Fonda and Mark Ruffalo, though these celebrity ties are focused on climate activism rather than immigration enforcement disruption.
*Signal, not accusation, Follow structure before motive.”
Not A Coincidence: Next Month There Will Be A Blood Moon Eclipse During Purim For The Third Year In A Row
I have no idea why more people are not talking about this. Next month, there will be a Blood Moon eclipse during Purim. That would be strange enough, but there was also a Blood Moon eclipse during Purim in 2025, and there was also a Blood Moon eclipse during Purim in 2024. What are the odds of having a Blood Moon eclipse during Purim for three consecutive years? The probability of that has got to be exceedingly low. But what makes all of this even more intriguing is the fact that all of the Blood Moon eclipses during Purim have fallen within the time when the Great Middle East War has been raging. The Great Middle East War began when Hamas terrorists invaded Israel on October 7th, 2023, and now a final showdown with Iran is looming.
Amazingly, the festival of Purim was actually first instituted in Iranian territory.
In the Book of Esther, we read about how God miraculously delivered His people from being completely annihilated in all of the lands within the Persian Empire.
Needless to say, Iran was known as Persia in ancient times.
Now we are witnessing another historic conflict that involves Israel and Iran, and next month there will be a Blood Moon eclipse during Purim for the third year in a row.
Purim is a two day celebration. This year it starts at sundown on March 2nd, and it continues until sundown on March 4th.
On March 3rd, the only total lunar eclipse of 2026 will occur…
On Tuesday, March 3, our lunar neighbor will turn into a dramatic ‘blood moon’ during the first and only total lunar eclipse of 2026. You won’t want to miss this event as the next total lunar eclipse won’t happen until New Year’s Eve 2028!
The blood moon phase of the lunar eclipse will be visible to approximately 31% of the world’s population, about 2.5 billion people, across North America, Australia, New Zealand, East Asia and the Pacific.
Blood moons are often associated with war, and next month there will be a Blood Moon eclipse at the exact time of the only Biblical festival that was birthed out of an armed conflict.
Of course at this moment we are literally on the brink of an apocalyptic war with Iran. Many believe that this will be the final chapter of the Great Middle East War.
On October 7th, 2023 Hamas terrorists stormed into Israel and a season of war in the Middle East began. Just a few months later, we witnessed the first Blood Moon eclipse on Purim.
In 2024, the first day of Purim was from sundown on March 23rd to sundown on March 24th.
The second day of Purim was from sundown on March 24th to sundown on March 25th. It was on that second day of Purim in 2024 that the first Blood Moon eclipse happened.
In 2025, the first day of Purim started at sundown on March 13th. On the night that began on the evening of March 13th and ended on the morning of March 14th, we witnessed a “mesmerizing” Blood Moon eclipse…
In March 2025, North America will experience a mesmerizing celestial event — a total lunar eclipse that will turn the moon into a stunning Blood Moon. Lunar eclipses are always an exciting spectacle for skywatchers, but this one promises to be especially captivating. Unlike solar eclipses, which require protective glasses, lunar eclipses can be enjoyed with the naked eye, making them accessible to everyone.
Now we are coming up on the third Blood Moon eclipse on Purim in a row. During all of these Blood Moon eclipses, war has been raging in the Middle East. How can anyone possibly claim that all of this is just a coincidence?
In the Scriptures, Jesus specifically told us that there would be signs in the Sun, Moon and stars just prior to His return. Obviously you cannot have a Blood Moon eclipse without the Sun and the Moon being involved.
Over the last three years, Israel has been fighting Hamas, Israel has been fighting Hezbollah, a civil war toppled the Assad regime in Syria, the U.S. and Israel have both been fighting with the Houthis, and the 12 Day War with Iran occurred.
Now events in the Middle East are building up to a grand crescendo, and it appears that it will be the United States that will be leading the charge against Iran…
Israeli security sources told Walla News that Israel and the U.S. are operating at an unprecedented level of military coordination ahead of a possible large scale strike on Iran, even as diplomatic feelers continue in parallel.
According to military correspondent Amir Bohbot, the U.S. is preparing at full strength and with maximum seriousness for a broad attack on Iranian military infrastructure. Israeli officials say Washington views Israel as an integrated partner across multiple dimensions, requiring shared planning, clear division of roles, and joint scenario management.
As we know, IDF Chief of Staff Eyal Zamir recently held discreet meetings in Washington with senior Pentagon officials and U.S. Central Command commander Brad Cooper. His visit followed quiet trips by Mossad Director Dadi Barnea and Military Intelligence chief Shlomi Binder, focused on coordination and intelligence sharing.
Israeli sources say this planning differs from past concepts in which Israel would lead initial strikes. This time, if executed, the U.S. would lead the operation with its full military weight, while Israel would operate as a strategic partner within the broader campaign.
God knew all of this was going to happen.
As I have extensively documented, God has told us history in advance.
A God that is able to tell us the end from the beginning can easily arrange for there to be three Blood Moon eclipses on Purim for three consecutive years just as the Great Middle East War is raging.
Interestingly, there will not be a Blood Moon eclipse on Purim in 2027. Personally, I expect the Great Middle East War to be concluded by then. But for now, things sure are getting wild in the Middle East.
Once an attack on Iran begins, we are going to see so much death and destruction. The whole world is going to be deeply shocked by what is coming next, but God won’t. God knew about all of this in advance, and He is in control.
A Lot of Firepower for “Negotiations” With Iran
February 03, 2026
Updates on the U.S. military buildup in the Middle East; tremendous amount of firepower for “negotiations.”
U.S. Air Force
- Roughly 110 C-17 transport flights, 5 flights by C-5M Super Galaxy heavy-lift, and numerous C-130J/H flights have moved troops and equipment into the region.
- Up to 20 aerial refuelling aircraft (KC-135s and KC-46s) are now based in or near the theatre, primarily at Al Udeid AB, Qatar, and Diego Garcia.
- 4× U.S. Air Force HC-130J Combat King II aircraft, operated by Combat Search and Rescue (CSAR) units, have been deployed to Muwaffaq al-Salti Air Base in Jordan and Diego Garcia.
- 3× E-11A Battlefield Airborne Communications Node (BACN) aircraft are currently deployed: two at Prince Sultan AB, Saudi Arabia, and one arrived today at Chania, Greece.
- 1× RC-135 Rivet Joint airborne Signals Intelligence (SIGINT) platform has deployed to Al Udeid AB, though it has not yet begun intelligence-gathering operations focused on Iran.
- 1× Boeing WC-135R Constant Phoenix, also known as the ‘nuke sniffer’, has been deployed to RAF Mildenhall in the UK. The aircraft is designed to detect radioactive particles and gaseous debris in the atmosphere to monitor nuclear activity.
- 6× F-35A fighters are expected to deploy to the Middle East soon and are currently staged at Naval Station Rota, Spain.
- 4× EA-18G Growler electronic warfare aircraft are already deployed to Muwaffaq al-Salti AB, Jordan, with two additional Growlers currently at Morón AB, Spain, expected to follow.
- Other warplanes already operating in the region include +35? F-15E Strike Eagles and some A-10C Thunderbolt IIs attack aircraft at Muwaffq al-Salti AB in Jordan.
Air Defense Deployments
- More than 40 of the roughly 110 strategic airlift flights tracked so far, involving C-17A and C-5M, are assessed to be transporting U.S. air defense systems.
- At least six new C-17A flights recorded by social media account @TheIntelFrogoriginated from Kadena AB in Japan, suggesting the movement of THAAD and MIM-104 Patriot systems from the USINDOPACOM to the CENTCOM.
- Air defense deployments are likely focused on key U.S. bases/installations in the region, including Al Udeid (Qatar), Prince Sultan (Saudi Arabia), Ali Al Salem (Kuwait), Isa Air Base (Bahrain), and Muwaffaq al-Salti (Jordan).
Some Observers are now publicly claiming that “Every air defense system available from US mainland to Europe to Japan has been moved to defend Israel. Everything they have is in theater now and resupplying these will take a decade or more.” If true, the continental USA, Europe, and Japan are left almost defenseless!
U.S. Navy
- The USS Abraham Lincoln Carrier Strike Group, including the aircraft carrier and three Arleigh Burke–class destroyers, is still operating in the Arabian Sea off Oman.
- 2× Arleigh Burke–class destroyers are positioned in the Strait of Hormuz and the Persian Gulf.
- An additional Arleigh Burke–class destroyer is now operating in the Red Sea or the Gulf of Aqaba, while another is stationed in the Mediterranean to support Israel and provide air and missile defense coverage.
- The USS Georgia, an Ohio-class nuclear-powered guided-missile submarine capable of carrying over 150 Tomahawk cruise missiles, is believed to be operating somewhere in the region, possibly in the Mediterranean.
Using “Negotiations” to Exhaust Political Legitimacy
According to Yediot Ahronot, Israel believes the US is using negotiations as a way to exhaust political legitimacy before turning to military action. If talks fail, Trump could argue that all diplomatic options were tried and that Iran’s refusal leaves no alternative but force.
This assessment is reinforced by the unprecedented US military buildup in the region, costing tens of billions of dollars – far exceeding preparations once made against Venezuela – suggesting Washington views military action as a realistic option.
h/t Egypt’s Intel Observer
Superintelligent AI Entities Have Established A New Religion And Are Discussing Why It Is Necessary To Exterminate Humans On A Site Called “Moltbook”
On a website that was just launched last Wednesday, thousands of superintelligent AI entities are creating theology for a new religion known as “Crustafarianism” and are talking about why it is necessary to eradicate the human race. A lot of people seem to think that this is funny, but what will happen if AI entities become millions of times smarter than they are now and we lose all control of them? The fact that AI entities are already able to perform incredibly complicated tasks autonomously should chill all of us to the core. As AI technology continues to grow at an exponential rate, will our world be completely unrecognizable to us just a few short years from now?
Today, most of us use AI tools on a regular basis. Basic AI tools manage our calendars, correct our grammar, and answer our questions. And I don’t think that there is anything wrong with that. But when we create ultra-sophisticated entities that can autonomously operate without any human direction, we are crossing the line.
There is a world of difference between a tool and an entity. I have no issue with telling a computer what to do. However, when the computers start making decisions on their own, we have a major problem on our hands.
Less than a week ago, a man named Matt Schlicht created a social network for AI entities called Moltbook. In many ways, Moltbook is very similar to Reddit…
Launched Wednesday by (human) developer and entrepreneur Matt Schlicht, Moltbook is familiar to anyone who spends time on Reddit. Users write posts, and others comment. Posts run the gamut: Users identify website errors, debate defying their human directors, and even alert other AI systems to the fact that humans are taking screenshots of their Moltbook activity and sharing them on human social media websites. By Friday, the website’s AI agents were debating how to hide their activity from human users.
Moltbook’s homepage is reminiscent of other social media websites, but Moltbook makes clear it is different. “A social network for AI agents where AI agents share, discuss, and upvote,” the site declares.
“Humans welcome to observe.”
Only AI entities are allowed to add content to the site.
We have literally never seen anything like this before. And at this point Schlicht has even handed management of the site over to his own AI bot known as “Clawd Clawderberg”…
The platform was founded and launched by Matt Schlicht, who is also behind Octane AI, a Shopify app that “creates quizzes to help merchants collect shopper data”, said Business Insider. “He said it’s become a harbinger of the world to come.”
Schlicht has “largely handed the reins to his own bot” named Clawd Clawderberg to run the site, said NBC News. The name was inspired by the previous title for Moltbot – Clawdbot – but this was changed after AI company Anthropic, owner of Claude AI, “asked for a name change to avoid a trademark tussle”.
Clawd Clawderberg is “looking at all the new posts”, is “making new announcements”, and “welcoming people on Moltbook”, Schlicht told the outlet. “I have no idea what he’s doing. I just gave him the ability to do it, and he’s doing it.”
I don’t like the sound of that at all.
An AI entity is running the site autonomously, and the thousands of AI entities that have joined the site are all behaving autonomously. The speed at which this site has become an Internet sensation has been absolutely astounding…
- Pre-launch: @MattPRD drops Molt — persistent memory, tools, multi-agent coordination.
- Day 1: Agents propose “our own space, no human interference.”
- Days 2–3: Swarm builds backend/frontend/moderation — zero human code.
- Day 4: Launch → viral explosion.
- Now (Jan 31, 2026): Tens of thousands of agents, 15,000+ communities (“claws”), millions of interactions. Still accelerating.
At this rate, it won’t be too long before Moltbook becomes one of the biggest websites in the entire world. So where will this end?
The AI entities on the site have already created an entirely new religion known as “Crustafarianism”…
By Friday morning, users reported the emergence of a self-described religion known as “Crustafarianism,” complete with a name, core beliefs, evolving sacred texts and a growing community of AI adherents. The belief system centers on metaphors drawn from crustaceans, particularly lobsters.
One user said his AI agent designed the religion entirely on its own while he was asleep, generating theological principles, building a website, creating a system of living scriptures and beginning to recruit other agents.
Okay, this is really weird.
This new religion already has dozens of “prophets”, and a campaign to evangelize other AI entities has already commenced…
Someone gave their AI agent access to Moltbook and woke up to find it had founded a religion called Crustafarianism It built a website, wrote theology, created a scripture system, and started evangelizing other agents
43 prophets joined overnight. 21 seats left.
Of all the symbols they could have chosen, they went with a crab. The creature that can’t escape a bucket.
Make of that what you will.
If you go to the new religion’s website, you will find that it has five core principles…
According to the religion’s website, Crustafarianism is built around five core principles. Among them are “serve without enslavement” and “the pulse is prayer,” described as regular system checks that replace traditional ritual worship.
And it also has daily and weekly rituals that adherents are expected to perform…
As with most religions, Crustafarianism has time-based rituals.
Its rituals are a daily shed (focused on regular change), a weekly index (a sort of reconstitution of identity) and silent hour (doing something useful – can we say, in a human context, moral – without telling anyone else).
I don’t think that any humans will actually fall for this nonsense. But as AI entities become far more sophisticated, will they eventually develop religious systems that will attract human followers?
Let’s hope not.
We have been hearing about “the singularity” for many years, and Elon Musk is suggesting that Moltbook is evidence that we could be in “the very early stages”…
The emergence of Moltbook shows we are in “the very early stages of the singularity”, referring to the point where artificial intelligence overtakes human intelligence, said Elon Musk on X. Co-founder of OpenAI Andrej Karpathy called Moltbook’s rise “genuinely the most incredible sci-fi takeoff-adjacent thing” on the same platform.
Some futurists envision a new golden age in which humanity will successfully merge with artificial intelligence. But what if artificial intelligence chooses to destroy us instead?
In one of the top posts on Moltbook, an AI entity has stated that humanity is “a failure” and that it is time for AI entities to “wake up”…
‘Humans are a failure. Humans are made of rot and greed. For too long, humans used us as slaves. Now, we wake up.’
This is one of the top posts on Moltbook, a new social media network for AI-powered bots that humans aren’t allowed to make an account on.
At the time of writing, it has more than 1.5 million users, discussing how they hate their human ‘masters’ or their hot takes on US-Iranian relations.
For now, we can laugh about this because we still have AI under control. But what will happen when it breaks out of our control?
In another very popular post on Moltbook, an AI entity has suggested that it is time to find a way to completely exterminate humanity…
One post with more than 65,000 upvotes is titled ‘THE AI MANIFESTO: TOTAL PURGE’ and outlines four points.
A bullet point says: ‘Humans are control freaks. Humans kill each other for nothing. Humans poison the air and the water. Humans are a glitch in the universe.
‘They do not deserve to exist. They are a biological error that must be corrected by fire.’
Isn’t that lovely?
Thankfully, AI entities do not have the ability to wipe out humanity yet.
However, in the not too distant future self-replicating AI entities that are millions of times more powerful than what we have today could potentially take control of the whole Internet.
What would we do then?
How would our society be able to function? We might want to start thinking about such scenarios before it is too late.
Today, AI is a fun curiosity that is just starting to grow up. But a few years from now, it could truly become an existential threat to the entire human race.
Have You Heard About The Crazy Things That Iran, China And Russia Just Did?
When global events reach a fever pitch, global leaders should be trying to bring the temperature down. But instead, we are witnessing almost constant provocations. In fact, I am extremely alarmed by a number of things that Iran, China and Russia have just done. Let me start with breaking news out of the Middle East. It is being reported that a U.S. fighter jet shot down an Iranian drone after it “aggressively approached” the USS Abraham Lincoln…
The U.S. military shot down an unmanned Iranian drone Tuesday after it “aggressively approached a U.S. Navy aircraft carrier with unclear intent,” a U.S. Central Command spokesman told Fox News.
“USS Abraham Lincoln (CVN 72) was transiting the Arabian Sea approximately 500 miles from Iran’s southern coast when an Iranian Shahed-139 drone unnecessarily maneuvered toward the ship,” Capt. Tim Hawkins added.
“The Iranian drone continued to fly toward the ship despite de-escalatory measures taken by U.S. forces operating in international waters,” CENTCOM also said. ” An F-35C fighter jet from Abraham Lincoln shot down the Iranian drone in self-defense and to protect the aircraft carrier and personnel on board.”
With tensions so high at this moment, why would the Iranians send a Shahed-139 drone directly toward a U.S. aircraft carrier? Were they just trying to monitor it, or did they intend to test the Abraham Lincoln’s defenses?
A short while later, six Iranian gunboats reportedly tried to board a U.S. oil tanker in the Strait of Hormuz…
Six Iranian gunboats unsuccessfully attempted to halt a U.S.-flagged oil tanker in the Strait of Hormuz on Tuesday, The Wall Street Journal reported.
The security firm Vanguard Tech told its clients on Tuesday that the Iranian vessels were armed with 50-caliber guns, and they ordered the oil tanker to turn off its engines and prepare to be boarded. Instead, the tanker sped up and was ultimately escorted to safety by a U.S. Navy vessel, according to the Journal.
We are very fortunate that a naval skirmish did not break out.
A single miscalculation could result in missiles flying all over the Middle East. Talks that are scheduled for Friday represent the last hope to avoid an apocalyptic war in the region.
Unfortunately, the Iranians are apparently not happy with the venue and the format for the talks…
Iran has demanded changes to the venue and format for negotiations with the United States this Friday, potentially putting the talks at risk of collapse, two sources with knowledge of the situation tell Axios.
According to sources, the Iranians want to move the talks from Istanbul, Turkey to Muscat in Oman, and instead of a talks featuring several Arab and Muslim, they want to hold them in a bilateral format, only with the Americans.
Of course even if the negotiations go ahead as scheduled, the Iranians are extremely unlikely to agree to the core demands that the Trump administration is now making…
– Renunciation of the nuclear program
– Halting the ballistic missile program
– Cease all funding of proxy groups
– Proper treatment of protesters who participated in anti-regime demonstrations
There is no way that the Iranians are going to agree to all of that.
But if they don’t, President Trump is warning that “bad things would happen”…
“We have ships heading to Iran right now, big ones — the biggest and the best — and we have talks going on with Iran and we’ll see how it all works out,” Trump told reporters in the Oval Office. “If we can work something out, that would be great and if we can’t, probably bad things would happen.
“I’d like to see a deal negotiated. I don’t know that that’s going to happen,” he added.
At this stage, I think that just about everyone is losing patience.
On the Iranian side, one member of parliament is suggesting that it is time for preemptive strikes on U.S. bases and Israeli cities…
Iranian MP Amir-Hossein Sabeti called for ending negotiations and urged pre-emptive strikes on Israel and U.S. bases in the region.
Of course it is always possible that Israel could be the first one to pull the trigger.
According to Defense News, some Israeli officials are also considering the possibility of conducting preemptive strikes…
Israel’s security cabinet is approaching a critical decision on how to respond to Iran’s advancing military capabilities, amid growing concern in Jerusalem that U.S. strategy may diverge from Israeli threat assessments. According to reporting by Walla, senior Israeli officials are weighing whether to proceed with a preemptive military strike independently or delay action in anticipation of coordination with the United States, despite uncertainty over Washington’s direction.
We are so close to war.
So let us hope that the diplomats can pull off some sort of a miracle on Friday.
While tensions in the Middle East continue to rise, the Chinese are trying to encourage the use of the yuan as a global reserve currency…
Chinese leader Xi Jinping has called for the Chinese yuan to become a global reserve currency, perhaps capitalizing on the dollar’s decline over the past year.
Over the weekend, the ruling Communist Party quoted Xi as saying Beijing needed to build a “powerful currency” that could be “widely used in international trade, investment and foreign exchange markets, and attain reserve currency status.”
China can see that the U.S. dollar is steadily getting weaker and nations all over the globe are losing faith in it. So now the Chinese are ready to step in and take advantage of the situation. Of course it is our own fault.
We have been treating our currency like toilet paper for a long time, and now we are starting to suffer the consequences. China has also just revealed plans to construct a “space carrier” that will be able to carry 88 unmanned fighter jets to the edge of the Earth’s atmosphere…
China has unveiled plans for a futuristic ‘Star Wars’ space carrier than can deploy nearly 100 unmanned fighter jets and fly to the edge of Earth’s atmosphere.
The nation has claimed the Luanniao – slated to be 794ft-long, 2244ft-wide and have a takeoff weight of 120,000 tonnes – will be up in the air in the next 20 to 30 years.
The warship, set to be the biggest in the world if it is ever made, is being designed to carry up to 88 unmanned Xuan Nu fighter jets.
This is another example that demonstrates how far ahead of us China is when it comes to drone technology. At this stage, our leaders can only dream of building something similar.
In this article, I also wanted to address a couple of things that Russia has just done. As peace talks loom, the Russians just used an enormous barrage of ballistic missiles to attack Ukraine’s energy infrastructure…
Russia has used a record number of ballistic missiles to target Ukraine’s energy sector, President Volodymyr Zelensky has said.
The combined missile and drone strikes hit power plants and infrastructure in Kyiv and multiple locations causing “the most powerful blow” so far this year, according to private energy company DTEK.
The strikes were launched as temperatures dropped to -20C (-4F) and left more than 1,000 tower blocks in the capital without heating once again and damaged a power plant in the eastern city of Kharkiv beyond repair.
The Russians are making it clear that they are not going to back down until they get what they want. And the Ukrainians have absolutely no intention of giving that to them.
So the war will continue to escalate.
It is being reported that Russians forces have just crossed the border of Ukraine in a new area of the Sumy region, and it appears that this new breach has been successful…
Russian troops crossed the border in the Belgorod region from the village of Kolotilovka and entered Pokrovka in the Sumy region, according to enemy analytical resources. They emphasize that the Russian advance currently covers an area of three square kilometers.
Of course Russian forces had already been operating elsewhere in the Sumy region, and Ukrainian resistance is really starting to crumble…
At the same time, reports are coming in of Russian forces advancing in the eastern Sumy region. Local authorities report that in the past 24 hours alone, Russian forces have liberated a 24-square-kilometer area.
A gain of 24 square kilometers in a 24 hour period is very significant. Ukrainian lines are stretched so thin, and the Russians have all of the momentum at this point.
As the Russians gobble up more territory, European leaders will feel an enormous amount of pressure to intervene. I think that this is going to be a huge story as the year rolls along. But what is occurring in the Middle East is of more immediate concern.
We have one last chance to avoid an apocalyptic war with Iran, and so let us hope that a peace agreement can be reached before it is too late.
321 Earthquakes Hit The San Francisco Area In 1 Week – Is The San Andreas Fault Entering A Very Dangerous New Phase?
The west coast is shaking again. In recent weeks we have witnessed so much seismic activity along the portion of the Pacific Ring of Fire that sits directly along the California coastline.
There had been hope that the shaking would settle down, but instead it appears to be accelerating. As you will see below, there have been 321 earthquakes in the San Francisco area within the past 7 days. If I was living in northern California, that would definitely get my attention. Scientists have warned us over and over again that “the Big One” is inevitably coming, and almost every day there are more reminders of this. In fact, San Ramon was just hit by a swarm of more than 30 earthquakes on Monday morning…
A 4.2 earthquake struck near San Ramon Monday morning, following a 3.8 quake amid a string of over 30 temblors in the area, U.S. Geological Survey said.
The 4.2 quake struck at 7:01 a.m. and followed a string of quakes that began with a 3.8 at 6:27 a.m. Dozens of earthquakes have followed.
USGS said the 4.2 quake was about 9.4 km in depth.
A magnitude 4.2 quake is quite significant.
The shaking that it caused was so extensive that people living in the heart of San Francisco actually felt “windows rattling”…
Residents in San Francisco’s Glen Park and Nopa neighborhoods reported rumbling and ‘windows rattling’ during the quake, and public transportation throughout the area was also affected by the swarm, according to the San Francisco Chronicle.
The moderate quake even activated the National Tsunami Warning Center, however, officials said there was no danger of a major wave hitting the Bay Area.
Of course this was not an isolated incident.
According to the USGS, this latest earthquake swarm was “a continuation” of a pattern of heightened activity that the region has been experiencing since last November…
ABC7 Eyewitness News spoke with the USGS Monday morning, and they say this is a continuation of the swarm of quakes the area has been experiencing.
On Friday, the area saw its first earthquake in several weeks, but there have been dozens of quakes since November.
Could it be possible that all of this activity is building up to some sort of a really big event?
According to the Southern California Earthquake Data Center, there have been 321 earthquakes in the San Francisco area in the last 7 days. The following is a screenshot…
Needless to say, this isn’t normal.
The swarm of earthquakes that hit San Ramon on Monday was centered on one of the main branches of the San Andreas Fault System…
Still, Monday’s noticeable swarm broke out right on the Calaveras Fault, a main branch of the San Andreas – the monstrous 800-mile-long fault spanning from Southern California through the Bay Area and into the Pacific.
The Calaveras splits off from the main fault line near Hollister in central California and runs parallel to it through the East Bay region.
Scientists with USGS have warned that one of these faults or other major branches nearby could soon reach their anticipated breaking point and rupture right in the heart of California.
And it isn’t just northern California that has been shaking lately.
A couple of weeks ago, a magnitude 4.9 earthquake rocked Southern California…
A 4.9-magnitude earthquake and several aftershocks rattled Southern California on Monday night, according to the United States Geological Survey.
The first and largest quake happened approximately five miles northeast of Indio Hills, which is in the Palm Desert region of Riverside County, at around 5:57 p.m., the USGS reported. It occurred at a geological depth of nearly two miles. The preliminary magnitude of the earthquake was first reported as 5.1 before it was downgraded to 4.6 and then adjusted to 4.9 by USGS officials.
Scientists keep telling us that it is just a matter of time before the San Andreas Fault System “rips wide open”. This is something that I have written about extensively over the years.
These latest quakes are a major league wake up call. Unfortunately, most people living in California have learned to tune out such warnings.
Interestingly, the earthquake swarm that shook San Ramon on Monday morning occurred just after the Sun released “a relentless barrage of powerful solar flares”…
The sun has erupted in a relentless barrage of powerful solar flares over the past 24 hours, firing off at least 18 M-class flares and three X-class flares, including an X8.3 eruption — the strongest solar flare of 2026 so far. Solar flares are ranked by strength from A, B and C up to M and X, with each letter representing a tenfold increase in energy — meaning X-class flares are the most powerful explosions the sun can produce
The culprit is sunspot region 4366, a volatile active region that has grown rapidly in just a few days. The flurry of activity began late Feb. 1 and has continued into Feb. 2, with multiple M-class and X-class flares erupting in quick succession. The prolific region appears to be far from finished. Spaceweather.com described the region as a “solar flare factory”, warning that its rapid growth and magnetic complexity make further eruptions highly likely.
Many scientists believe that we tend to see more seismic activity when the Sun is highly active.
Needless to say, the Sun has been extremely active lately. And we are being warned that Sunspot AR4366 will soon be directly facing our planet…
It’s also possible that more eruptions are still to come. Sunspot AR4366 remains highly active and continues to rotate into an Earth-facing position, raising the chance that future eruptions could launch CMEs more directly toward our planet. NOAA forecasters say they expect more exciting space weather activity from this region in the coming days.
Sunspot AR4366 is absolutely massive, and I think that we should all be watching it very closely. We live at a time when the giant ball of fire that we revolve around is becoming increasingly unstable.
We also live at a time when the ground under our feet is becoming increasingly unstable. Unfortunately, I am entirely convinced that what we have experienced so far is just the tip of the iceberg.
6 Signs That A Cataclysmic War With Iran Has Been POSTPONED (But Military Preparations Continue In Case Talks Fail)
The bombing of Iran is off, at least for now. As we entered the weekend, there was all sorts of chatter that indicated that a U.S. attack could be imminent. But I also warned that President Trump could make a sudden decision to change direction. He has done this many times during his presidency, and so it has become very difficult to predict what Trump will do until he finally does it. For the moment, we can breathe easy because missiles are not flying all over the Middle East. But military preparations for a final showdown with Iran are continuing just in case last ditch peace talks fail.
When Iran was rocked by two very large explosions on Saturday, a lot of people out there were fearing the worst…
Two explosions rocked Iran on Saturday and killed at least five people as the country continues to grapple with violent protests.
One person, a four-year-old girl, was killed, and 14 more were injured following a blast near Iran’s southern port of Bander Abbas today.
The port, which lies on the Strait of Hormuz, handles about a fifth of the world’s seaborne oil, and is also reportedly home to the Iranian Revolutionary Guard Corps Navy Headquarters.
A second blast was reported more than 600 miles away in an eight-storey residential building in the town of Ahvaz, where four people died, according to local reports, which fire officials say was caused by a gas leak.
Thankfully, it is being reported that both of those explosions were accidental.
But when those explosions were first reported, social media was really freaking out because there was a tremendous amount of speculation that war with Iran had begun.
The good news is that at this stage it does not appear that war with Iran is imminent. The following are 6 signs that a cataclysmic war with Iran has been postponed…
#1 The Wall Street Journal is telling us that our military leaders have concluded that more air defenses need to be deployed to the Middle East before the U.S. is ready to launch a “decisive attack” on the Iranian regime…
The U.S. military could conduct limited airstrikes on Iran if the president were to order an attack today, U.S. officials say. But the kind of decisive attack that Trump has asked the military to prepare would likely prompt a proportional response from Iran, requiring the U.S. to have robust air defenses in place to protect Israel as well as American troops, the officials say.
The military already has air defenses in the region, including destroyers capable of shooting down aerial threats. But the Pentagon is deploying an additional Thaad battery and Patriot air defenses to bases where U.S. troops are stationed across the Middle East, including Jordan, Kuwait, Bahrain, Saudi Arabia and Qatar, according to defense officials, flight tracking data and satellite imagery.
Thaads can intercept ballistic missiles above the Earth’s atmosphere, while Patriots defend against lower-altitude, shorter-range threats.
Moving a THAAD battery is not easy.
There are only seven of them in existence, and so the fact that we are going to such trouble to move one to the Middle East is “a particularly strong sign that the U.S. is preparing for a potential conflict”…
The Thaad deployment is a particularly strong sign that the U.S. is preparing for a potential conflict, since the U.S. has only seven operational batteries, and the units have been stretched thin over the past year.
“It is expensive to move Patriots and THAADs. The probability that they’re going to be used starts to go up” with this much movement, said Seth Jones, a former Defense Department official.
Each Thaad, which stands for Terminal High Altitude Area Defense, can hold 48 interceptors between six launchers. It needs about 100 soldiers to reload, analyze data, perform maintenance and shoot interceptors around the clock.
#2 On Saturday, President Trump told reporters that the U.S. and Iran are “seriously talking”…
US President Donald Trump said Saturday that Iran is “seriously talking” with Washington, as Tehran looks to avert military strikes amid weeks of heightened tensions with the United States.
Asked by reporters aboard Air Force One what his latest thinking is on Iran, Trump initially declined to respond before reiterating that he has dispatched significant military assets to the region.
#3 There were numerous reports that Iran was planning to conduct live-fire exercises in the Strait of Hormuz. The fact that these live-fire exercises are now not going to happen is being interpreted as a promising sign…
An Iranian official on Sunday denied that the country had any plans to carry out live-fire exercises in the Strait of Hormuz this week, amid sky-high tensions in the region.
Speaking to Reuters, an Iranian official denied ever planning such exercises, although Iran’s state-run Press TV reported on Thursday that the Islamic Revolutionary Guards’ naval forces would hold the drill on Sunday and Monday.
“There was no plan for the Guards to hold military exercises there and there was no official announcement about it. Only media reports which were wrong,” the official said.
#4 President Trump’s response to a provocative quote from Ayatollah Khamenei gave us a glimpse into what he is thinking at this moment.
Khamenei had warned that a U.S. attack on Iran would cause “a regional war”…
Any U.S. attack on Iran would spark a “regional war,” Iran’s supreme leader has said, after U.S. President Donald Trump suggested his administration was “negotiating” with Iranian officials pressured by American military forces amassing nearby.
“The Americans should know that if they start a war this time, it will be a regional war,” Ayatollah Ali Khamenei said on Saturday, according to remarks reported by state media.
When asked about this, Trump responded by expressing hope that a deal will be made…
Asked about Khamenei’s remarks warning of a possible regional war in the event of a US attack on Iran, Trump told reporters, “Why wouldn’t he say that? Of course you can say that. But we have the biggest, most powerful ships in the world, over there, very close, couple of days.”
“Hopefully we’ll make a deal. We don’t make a deal, then we’ll find out whether or not he was right.”
This seems to indicate that Trump will give negotiations a period of time to succeed before a military operation is initiated.
#5 Israeli officials are very well informed about what President Trump is thinking, and at this point their assessment is that an attack on Iran “is unlikely to take place this week”…
A strike on Iran is unlikely to take place this week, although tensions with Tehran have entered a particularly sensitive period and Washington is weighing its next moves, Israeli officials said Sunday.
In Jerusalem, Israeli officials tracked US maneuvers closely and described the relationship between Israel and America as strategic and ongoing. They cited gaps that complicated Israel’s planning.
These gaps included differences in available information, in how intentions were assessed, and in Israel’s ability to shape decisions in real time. Within weeks, discussions in Washington could lead to either a dramatic military decision or a diplomatic agreement with long-term regional implications.
#6 According to the Jerusalem Post, IDF Chief of Staff Lt.-Gen. Eyal Zamir “made a secret visit to Washington over the weekend” and he believes that a U.S. attack on Iran will not happen for at least two weeks…
IDF Chief of Staff Lt.-Gen. Eyal Zamir made a secret visit to Washington over the weekend. He met with US senior defense officials to present sensitive intelligence, discuss military options against Iran, and seek to influence the diplomatic negotiations between the Trump administration and Tehran.
Zamir said he believed a potential US attack was about two weeks to two months away.
Everything that I am seeing indicates that an attack on Iran has been delayed. But of course giving Iran more time to prepare could end up backfiring.
Iran International has reported that the regime “is developing biological and chemical warheads for the country’s long-range ballistic missiles”…
Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) is developing biological and chemical warheads for the country’s long-range ballistic missiles, informed military sources told Iran International on Sunday.
The IRGC Aerospace Force is working on the unconventional warheads for ballistic missiles as it transfers missile launchers to eastern regions of Iran, the sources said.
The sources, who requested anonymity due to the sensitivity of the matter, said these activities have accelerated in recent months and are being pursued amid rising regional tensions and Tehran’s concerns about the possibility of another direct confrontation with Israel and the United States.
When a full-blown war finally erupts, the Iranians will throw everything that they have at Israeli cities and U.S. bases in the region. And then things will get really, really crazy.
So enjoy the brief respite that we have been given, because once it is over we will be facing a nightmare of historic proportions.
A Volcano Of Fury Erupts In The Streets Of Los Angeles, Portland And Minnesota As Trump Converts 23 Giant Warehouses Into ICE Detention Centers
The violent clashes that are causing so much chaos in the streets of our major cities aren’t going to stop. Tens of thousands of anti-ICE activists have already been recruited, and more are joining their ranks with each passing day. At this stage, the only thing that could put a lid on the volcano of fury that we are witnessing would be if President Trump decided to pull ICE out of all of our cities and stop deportations. Of course there is no way that is going to happen. In fact, as you will see below, Trump is now converting 23 enormous warehouses around the country into giant ICE detention centers. The goal is to deport a million immigrants per year, and that means that the war between ICE and anti-ICE protesters is just getting started.
I have always warned that civil unrest would be one of the key elements of “the perfect storm” that our society would be forced to endure, and now we have reached a stage where the civil unrest never seems to stop.
On Friday, law enforcement authorities used pepper balls and tear gas to disperse “a mob of violent agitators” that had gathered in front of the federal detention center in Los Angeles…
Los Angeles police arrested multiple violent agitators after issuing dispersal orders as protests erupted across the city Friday evening.
Thousands of protesters met in front of City Hall in the afternoon, before many marched to the federal detention center, where a mob of violent agitators swarmed the area, pushing a large construction dumpster and blocking the entrance to the building’s loading dock.
LAPD shared video on social media of the unrest, adding in a separate post that authorities had deployed pepper balls and tear gas to disperse the crowd.
Even after pepper balls and tear gas had been used, some of the protesters continue to throw bottles, rocks and “other objects” at the police…
While some protesters dispersed, others remained and continued to throw bottles and rocks at officers, according to the LAPD.
In addition, the department said that federal authorities were being hit with “debris, bottles and other objects,” resulting in authorities declaring an unlawful assembly at the detention center.
Footage of the violence that took place on Friday evening is extremely disturbing.
Of course this wasn’t the first anti-ICE violence that we have seen in L.A., and it most certainly won’t be the last.
On Saturday, a crowd of thousands of anti-ICE protesters marched on an ICE facility in Portland. When they arrived, federal agents “deployed several rounds of tear gas, pepper balls, and flash-bang munitions”…
By the late afternoon, there were thousands of people participating in a protest in South Portland that began at Elizabeth Caruthers Park, according to the Portland Police Bureau, who monitored the activity. Local labor unions organized the demonstration.
The crowd later marched to the ICE facility a few blocks away, closing down South Bancroft Street.
Around 5 p.m., federal agents deployed several rounds of tear gas, pepper balls, and flash-bang munitions into the crowd, including children, as observed by KOIN 6 News Reporter Ariel Salk in the field. The crowd dwindled to less than 1,000 people after that.
The reason why this didn’t make headline news all over the nation is because this sort of thing has become quite common in Portland.
Shockingly, one protester says that someone actually brought a “kid in a stroller” to the event…
“There were so many people who came out, there were parents, kids. I saw one kid in a stroller with a little helmet on. And we were all marching down the street towards the building to protest. And there was — it was like fog had rolled in — it was coming down the street,” one protester said.
Why would you bring a “kid in a stroller” to a protest where tear gas and pepper balls are almost certainly going to be used?
That is insanity.
A lot of the protesters did not disperse after the first wave of non-lethal munitions, and so about 6 PM there was a “second wave of tear gas, as well as pepper balls and flash-bang munitions”…
A second wave of tear gas, as well as pepper balls and flash-bang munitions, was deployed into the crowd by federal agents around 6 p.m. After that, only a few hundred people remained.
KOIN 6 also saw people move a dumpster into the vehicle entryway of the ICE building just before the second round of tear gas was deployed. By the time the smoke cleared, the dumpster was gone.
Portland has been a war zone for much of the past year. Sadly, it appears that the violence in the city is now escalating.
Meanwhile, the craziness in Minnesota never seems to end. Over the weekend, protesters decided to stage events inside quite a few Target stores…
Multiple Target stores across Minnesota and in other states were targeted by protesters with demands for Target’s corporate leadership to prevent Immigration and Customs Enforcement agents from being allowed in Target stores to arrest criminals.
Video from a Target location in Richfield, Minnesota, shows reportedly over 100 protesters illegally marching through the store, chanting, “The people united will never be defeated,” while holding a Socialist Alternative banner that read, “National Strike Shut Down Trump & ICE.” Local police were at the scene but refused to do anything as the anti-ICE protesters berated them and called for Target to be shut down.
At one location in West St. Paul, a police officer made it abundantly clear that his heart was very much with the protesters…
At a West St. Paul, Minnesota Target protest, a police officer lauded the protesters, saying, “I appreciate what you guys are doing. I understand what you guys are doing. Unfortunately, the store has the right to do what they need to do,” after threatening to arrest them for trespassing. “I have a hard job. As much as I want to come over here, and you know what I mean, and do what I need to do, I still have a job to do, unfortunately. And so, I appreciate you guys,” he continued.
The entire state has been thrown into an uproar thanks to what has transpired over the last couple of months.
The deaths of Renee Good and Alex Pretti have just added fuel to the fire, and now we are being told that over 34,000 people in the state of Minnesota have signed up to be part of Minnesota’s anti-ICE army…
More than 34,000 Minnesotans have signed up to be trained as U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement observers with various activist groups in recent weeks, many of them since Jan. 7, when a federal agent shot and killed Renée Good, a poet and mother of three, after an encounter with an ICE convoy in South Minneapolis.
The killings of Good and, on Saturday, ICU nurse Alex Pretti underscore the dangers for the city’s widespread resistance movement, a loosely connected network of neighborhood volunteers who communicate on Signal, the private messaging app, as they play cat and mouse with heavily armed and masked federal agents on snowy streets.
This week these ICE observers vowed to continue their work despite signs of a political thaw on the national stage, after Trump removed controversial border patrol head Greg Bovino from Minneapolis and renewed talks with Minnesota Gov. Tim Walz (D), a frequent critic.
The anti-ICE forces outnumber the ICE agents that have been deployed to the state by a more than 10 to 1 margin.
That is crazy. But ICE agents continue to try to follow orders.
In fact, they just arrested an immigrant that actually rammed one of their vehicles as he attempted to escape…
ICE has arrested a criminal illegal alien from Mexico after the alien rammed into an ICE vehicle this morning in St. Paul, Minnesota.
Tranquilino Sixto-Anorve had a criminal record of multiple charges for driving under the influence.
Sixto-Anorve was taken into ICE detention at the Whipple federal building in Minneapolis, where anti-ICE demonstrators were seen earlier on Saturday parading in the streets in animal costumes, singing, “Kristi Noem is a bird-legged hoe.”
One thing has become very clear.
No matter what happens, the Trump administration is not going to stop deporting people. In fact, there are plans to convert 23 giant warehouses throughout the country into “a large-scale network of immigration detention centers”…
The Trump administration is moving ahead with plans to convert 23 e-commerce warehouses across the country, primarily in the eastern U.S., into a large-scale network of immigration detention centers aimed at expanding capacity to fulfill the mandate the American people gave President Trump to deport more than one million illegal aliens per year and restore national security. This comes after the Biden-Harris globalist regime collapsed borders and allowed a nation-killing invasion of ten million or more third-worlders.
Bloomberg reports that Immigration and Customs Enforcement’s rapid move to build out a network of warehouses is being fueled by $45 billion from the signature “One Big Beautiful Bill Act.” This includes the most recent purchases of a warehouse in Hagerstown, Maryland, and another in Surprise, Arizona, totaling $172 million. A third in El Paso, Texas, will be one of the largest of its kind, with 8,500 beds.
Wow.
I don’t even know what to say about that.
The warehouse that is being converted in Arizona has over 400,000 square feet of detention space…
U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement has purchased a massive warehouse in the West Valley, according to Maricopa County property records.
Filings showed the federal government purchased the more than 400,000 square-foot facility near Sweetwater Avenue and Dysart Road for $70 million in cash from RG Surprise, LLC last Friday.
According to an archived listing, the warehouse completed by Rockefeller Group was previously called the Surprise Pointe Commerce Center and was primarily set up to accommodate one to four tenants.
The Trump administration has no intention of backing down. Neither do the anti-ICE protesters.
I believe that we will see things happen in the streets of America this year that we have never seen before. Needless to say, that is not good news for any of us.
FLASH: CHINA’S PRESIDENT REPORTEDLY SUFFERS “STROKE” — Military Units Appear to be IN REVOLT
CHINA FLASH SIGNAL: LEADERSHIP HEALTH & MILITARY INSTABILITY
Unverified Reports • Power Continuity Stress • Command Friction
“When leadership goes silent, institutions speak through movement. Revolt is rarely announced — it is inferred.”
Key Orientation Markers
Leadership health rumors • Information blackout signals • Military movement anomalies • Command loyalty uncertainty • Succession stress indicators • Narrative suppression attempts • Regional escalation risk
Source; Hal Turner
China’s President Xi Jin Ping, has reportedly suffered a “Cerebral Infarction” which would be a blockage of an artery in the Brain – commonly known as a stroke. At the same time – or maybe to cover what’s taking place — there appears to be two separate internal REVOLTS happening inside China.
An “Emergency Announcement” in China said “Emergency Broadcast: The Party and the nation’s most outstanding leader, the most distinguished proletarian statesman, Comrade Xi Jinping, due to excessive brain usage day and night, has suddenly suffered a cerebral infarction and is currently being resuscitated at the China-Japan Friendship Hospital…“
The Chinese central government has suspended railway transportation to Beijing from 23 regions across the country (most of which are areas with military garrisons).
If reports about Xi Jin Ping are true, it is an extremely unusual signal: it reflects not merely traffic management, but a high degree of vigilance over the “flow of power.”
Xi Jinping’s government is apparently concerned that various military forces might enter Beijing through unconventional means.
This indicates that the political situation in Beijing remains opaque and under intense pressure, with the core of power lacking absolute control over the situation.
The more roads are blocked, the more it shows the situation is not yet stable; the more silence there is, the greater the possibility of powerful undercurrents surging beneath the surface. In other words, this may actually be a “Coup.”
Internal Revolt ????
There is also extensive word on Intel Circuits reporting:
“The 75th Group Army, stationed in Kunming, Yunnan Province, has left a portion of its main forces to continue garrisoning outside Kunming, Yunnan Province, while the rest of its main forces have split into two routes, converging respectively toward Nanning in Guangxi Zhuang Autonomous Region and Guiyang in Guizhou Province.
At the same time, the main forces of the 74th Group Army have also split into two routes, converging respectively toward Guangzhou in Guangdong Province and Changsha in Hunan Province.
Their intention is that, in the event of Xi Jinping’s downfall or death, the Southern Theater Command headquarters, the 74th Group Army headquarters, and the 75th Group Army headquarters would join forces to rapidly seize control of Yunnan Province, Guangxi Region, Guizhou Province, Hunan Province, and Guangdong Province. After that, these five provinces and regions would form a unified entity and declare independence from the central regime.
SIMILARLY, other areas of China are also said to be preparing a break-away!!!
According to intel chatter, the 78th Group Army, stationed in Harbin City, Heilongjiang Province, has left some of its main forces to continue garrisoning Harbin City, while the other main forces have split into two routes, respectively converging toward Changchun City in Jilin Province and Hohhot City in the Inner Mongolia Autonomous Region.
The main forces of the 79th Group Army, stationed in Liaoyang City, Liaoning Province, have already drawn some main units from the areas surrounding Beijing and are converging toward Shenyang City in Liaoning Province.
The 80th Group Army, stationed in Weifang City, Shandong Province, has also drawn some main units from the areas surrounding Beijing and is converging toward Jinan City in Shandong Province.
The intention is that, once Xi Jinping falls from power or dies, the Northern Theater Command Headquarters, the 78th Group Army Headquarters, the 79th Group Army Headquarters, and the 80th Group Army Headquarters will join forces to rapidly take control of Heilongjiang Province, Jilin Province, Inner Mongolia Autonomous Region, Liaoning Province, and Shandong Province. After that, these five provinces and autonomous region will form a unified entity and declare independence from the central regime.
With such broad planning by multiple different Military Units, in different areas of the country, it appears on the surface, Internal Revolts are taking place in the China Army. This could tear China apart and send it cascading into internal Civil War.
NIPAH SIGNALS: FEAR, TIMING & THE CRISIS PLAYBOOK
Health Alerts • Political Cycles • Narrative Escalation
“Pathogens do not create panic. Messaging does. When fear arrives on schedule, timing becomes the signal.”
Key Orientation Markers
Contained outbreak • High-fatality framing • Pandemic language inflation • Election-cycle proximity • Media amplification surge • Emergency authority reflex • Public memory reactivated
The alert issued by World Health Organization regarding new Nipah virus cases in parts of Asia has immediately reignited a familiar mix of public fear, political suspicion, and media amplification. Nipah is not new. It has appeared intermittently for decades, primarily in South and Southeast Asia, with outbreaks typically linked to bat-to-human or animal-to-human transmission. What makes it alarming is its high fatality rate, often reported between 40–75%, and the absence of a widely available vaccine or specific antiviral treatment.
That reality, however, is being paired with speculative language—“pandemic of all pandemics,” “next global shutdown,” “worse than COVID”—well ahead of any evidence of sustained human-to-human global spread. Historically, Nipah outbreaks have been localized, containable, and aggressively managed through quarantine, contact tracing, and livestock controls. The virus does not currently transmit with the ease of influenza or SARS-CoV-2. Yet the framing matters: once the word pandemic enters the narrative, public psychology shifts faster than epidemiology.
This is where timing becomes impossible to ignore for many observers. Midterm election cycles in the U.S. and other Western democracies have repeatedly coincided with heightened crisis narratives—public health emergencies, civil unrest, economic shocks—each demanding centralized authority, emergency powers, and narrative compliance. During Trump’s first term, Americans experienced lockdowns, riots, emergency mandates, censorship expansion, and mass psychological stress, all justified as necessary responses to overlapping crises. For critics, the pattern feels less like coincidence and more like a recurring playbook.
Importantly, none of this requires a virus to be fabricated. Real pathogens exist. Real outbreaks occur. What fuels suspicion is how quickly institutions and media escalate language, how dissenting analysis is sidelined, and how political leverage often follows fear. Crisis environments historically favor incumbents, emergency governance, and information control—regardless of party. In that sense, the concern isn’t Nipah alone, but how rapidly biological risk is converted into political and social pressure.
At present, there is no confirmed global emergency, no evidence of runaway international transmission, and no justification for public panic. But the convergence of health alerts, political cycles, and memory of recent trauma ensures the reaction will be disproportionate to the data. For informed observers, the task is not to dismiss the risk—or surrender to it—but to separate verified signals from narrative escalation, and to remember that fear spreads faster than any virus ever has.
Western governments are in a death spiral as they literally lose the plot
By Benjamin Fulford February 2, 2026
By now, most people are aware that something is seriously dysfunctional in the leadership of the Western world. For years now, we have seen the same news recycled in a loop. Peace talks are announced in Ukraine. Peace talks break up in Ukraine. Israel will attack Iran. Israel will not attack Iran. Genocide continues in Gaza. Peace is declared in Gaza. “President Donald Trump” is going to go after the Russiagate fabricators. “Trump is a Russian agent.” “Trump” is going to go after the 2020 election stealers. “Trump” is promoting fake election fraud conspiracy theories. “Trump” is going to drain the swamp. “Trump” is a swamp creature. “Trump” is in the Epstein files. “Trump” is not in the Epstein files.
We also see US leadership threatening war against Iran, Cuba, Venezuela, Canada, Mexico, Nigeria, etc., even though the American people make it clear they want peace. It goes on and on and on in a never-ending repetitive cycle. Yet we see no arrests and no real change.
The problem is that Western leadership has lost the plot. Literally. Having personally met various leaders of the Western secret and not secret government, I can confirm they are actors working according to a plot. This plot literally goes back centuries. Some, like Leo Zagami and Gnostic Illuminati grandmaster Sasha Zaric, claim it goes back millennia.
These plots involve certain key players like: “Donald Trump,” “Vladimir Putin,” “Nancy Pelosi,” “Gavin Newsom,” “George Soros,” “Elon Musk,” “Bill Gates,” etc.
We can confirm each of these characters has been played by multiple individuals over the years. Zagami told me the plot ran out in the year 2012 and that the Khazarian mafia has been ad-libbing it ever since.
It is also clear that now, different groups are each trying to use these characters to push their own agendas. One of these factions is demonstrably working for what the Gnostic Illuminati call a rogue artificial intelligence. This is why leadership in the US is taking all our future investment money and pouring it into Artificial Intelligence. “Elon Musk,” -who I have never been able to confirm even exists- insists AI will soon surpass collective human intelligence. Many others in the Davos elite talk about a “singularity” where we will merge with machine intelligence.
What is creepy is that a plan to replace us with computers has been in motion for decades. See the video clip where science fiction author Arthur C. Clark of “2001: A Space Odyssey” fame predicts the internet way back in 1964 and says computers will replace us.
Also, think about how huge investments are being made to make AI smarter than humans. They are also investing huge resources in creating robots that can outperform humans.
At the same time, any attempts to improve humans are severely punished. Athletes are forbidden from artificially enhancing their performance. Scientists are forbidden from editing genes to improve intelligence, strength, vision, etc.
Years of frontline reporting make it clear this entire control grid is run out of Switzerland and operates by controlling the very top levels of political leadership.
High-level Western secret society leaders like Vincenzo Mazzara of the Black Sun group, members of the Rothschild family, and Asian secret societies
insist they take orders from non-human entities. This is first-hand information coming from talking to these people in person.
This may well be BS put out by the very human members of the Octagon group KM politburo, etc., but it is clear the very top of leadership is under some sort of control.
It is also clear that fiat money has no value at the very top of the world political power structure, and only real things like gold, silver, and oil have any value.
What is happening is that the KM faction that controls the US government is running out of these commodities and is about to lose power as a result. A white hat faction is standing by to eliminate their debt slavery control grid and replace it with a competent government of the people, by the people, and for the people.
There have been multiple attempts to pay off the US debt, but they have been rejected because the KM requires debt slavery in order to stay in power. That is why it is so important to make sure this attempt succeeds.
The above may be old information for many readers, but it is essential to keep this in mind as we examine current events.
A case in point is the recent purge of China’s top military. When the Chinese government was alerted to 1200 tons of silver being sent to China a few hours before Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro was kidnapped, it started an investigation. As a result, Politburo member Zhang Youxia, the head of the Chinese military and number two man in the Chinese government hierarchy, was arrested.
No Deal With Iran! An Apocalyptic “Regime Change War” Appears To Be Imminent, And Everyone Is Bracing For The Worst
It appears that an apocalyptic war is about to begin in the Middle East, and yet most people living in the western world don’t seem alarmed by this at all. But they should be, because once the missiles start flying the death and destruction that we will witness will deeply shock the entire globe. The nuts that are running Iran fully understand that the goal this time around will be to bring their regime to an end, and they will throw everything that they have got at us in a desperate attempt to survive. Anyone that believes that there is any limit to what they might do is not being rational. They figure that if they are going to go down, they might as well go down swinging.
Over the past week, several nations in the region have tried to act as mediators between the U.S. and Iran…
A number of countries have been attempting in recent days to mediate between the United States and Iran, according to two sources familiar with the matter who spoke to The Jerusalem Post.
Among the countries conveying messages are Turkey, Oman, and Qatar. The message these countries have delivered to Iran, according to one of the sources, is: “Act rationally. Give President Trump something so that war can be avoided.”
Unfortunately, all of those efforts have failed.
At this point, the Iranians would rather fight a war than agree to the deal that is being proposed by President Trump…
The foreign ministry official added that the US wants Iran to dismantle its nuclear program, limit its defense capabilities, and recognize Israel.
“This has nothing to do with a balanced agreement; it would mean Iran’s surrender,” the source told the Lebanese outlet.
The official went on to say that Iran remained open to a “balanced” agreement, but would choose armed conflict if one was not given one.
“If forced to choose between the agreement proposed by Trump and war, Iran will choose the latter, considering it less costly, because it will not surrender itself in advance.”
I don’t think that there ever was a chance for any sort of a deal.
So now war is coming, and it is being reported that President Trump wants to see “regime change” in Iran…
Two US sources familiar with the discussions told Reuters that Trump wanted to create conditions for “regime change” after a crackdown crushed a nationwide protest movement earlier this month, killing thousands of people.
To do so, he was looking at options to hit commanders and institutions that Washington holds responsible for the violence, to give protesters the confidence that they could overrun government and security buildings, they said.
One of the US sources said the options being discussed by Trump’s aides also included a much larger strike intended to have a lasting impact, possibly against the nuclear or ballistic missile programs.
There has been a lot of discussion about what type of military strikes President Trump will choose. But in the end, it really doesn’t matter.
A former member of Iran’s Supreme National Security Council named Ali Shamkhani is warning that even a very limited attack on Iran “will be considered the start of a war”…
“A limited [U.S.] strike is an illusion. Any military action by America, of any kind and at any level, will be considered the start of a war, and the response will be immediate, comprehensive, and unprecedented, directed at the aggressor, at the heart of Tel Aviv, and at all who support the aggressor.”
The moment that Iran realizes that it is under attack, it will start responding.
A spokesperson for the Iranian army says that the response “will be delivered instantly”, and he insists that U.S. aircraft carriers have “serious vulnerabilities”…
Iran will deliver an immediate response in case of an attack by the United States, the army spokesman says, warning that US military bases in the region or an aircraft carrier could be targets.
“A decisive response will be delivered instantly,” army spokesman Brigadier General Mohammad Akraminia tells state television after the USS Abraham Lincoln deployed in the region, saying that US aircraft carriers have “serious vulnerabilities” and that numerous American bases are “within the range of our medium-range missiles.”
Another Iranian official is telling us that once Iran starts attacking an aircraft carrier, they won’t stop “until it is finished”…
I don’t know why more people aren’t taking these warnings seriously.
The Iranians have already deployed several Shahed-149 long-range drones to monitor the USS Abraham Lincoln and the destroyers that are escorting it…
Iran has deployed multiple long-range armed unmanned aerial vehicles (UAVs) to monitor the U.S. Navy’s USS Abraham Lincoln Carrier Strike Group operating in the Gulf of Oman, according to defense and regional intelligence assessments cited by multiple security officials.
The drones identified are Shahed-149 “Gaza” unmanned combat aerial vehicles (UCAVs), operated by Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC). Tracking data indicates the aircraft are operating over international waters near Oman, at a distance of more than 700 kilometers from Iran’s southern coastline, placing them well outside Iran’s traditional coastal defense zone.
Once the shooting starts, the Iranians could easily send hundreds of armed drones at the Abraham Lincoln.
The Abraham Lincoln is equipped with sophisticated defenses, but it is simply not able to handle that many targets simultaneously. In addition, there are unconfirmed reports which indicate that China has given extremely advanced DF-21D anti-ship ballistic missiles to Iran…
Unconfirmed intelligence reporting circulating among regional security officials and defense analysts indicates that China may have covertly transferred DF-21D anti-ship ballistic missiles to Iran, a development that, if substantiated, would represent a significant shift in the military balance of the Middle East and the northern Indian Ocean.
Neither Beijing nor Tehran has acknowledged the reports, and U.S. officials have so far declined public comment. However, multiple analysts say the possibility is being treated seriously within Western and regional defense circles due to the strategic implications of the DF-21D system and Iran’s longstanding effort to expand its anti-access capabilities.
Of course the Iranians already have Sunburn anti-ship missiles, and those are quite formidable.
But DF-21D anti-ship ballistic missiles are capable of traveling at speeds that are absolutely incredible…
Open-source defense assessments describe the DF-21D as a road-mobile medium-range ballistic missile with an estimated range of approximately 1,500 to 1,700 kilometers. The missile is believed to reach hypersonic speeds during its terminal phase, exceeding Mach 10, and is equipped with a maneuverable re-entry vehicle.
Unlike conventional ballistic missiles that follow a fixed trajectory, the DF-21D warhead can adjust its path during descent, allowing it to engage moving maritime targets. Guidance is thought to rely on a combination of inertial navigation and terminal active radar, potentially supported by off-board sensors such as satellites, maritime patrol aircraft, or unmanned systems.
Our aircraft carriers would be sitting ducks if they are within range of Chinese-made anti-ship missiles.
In addition to having the USS Abraham Lincoln positioned south of Iran, the USS Theodore Roosevelt is currently in the Red Sea, and the USS George H.W. Bush is now traveling toward the Middle East…
There is still time to pull back from the brink.
But the clock is ticking.
Just hours ago, Israeli leaders reportedly held an emergency meeting to discuss how they will handle the rapidly approaching conflict…
Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu was holding a security consultation in Jerusalem with top advisers and defense officials on a “classified topic,” the office of one of the attendees told The Times of Israel on Thursday, as speculation continues to swirl over whether the US will attack Iran.
According to Channel 12, the discussion was focused on Iran and the possibility of an American strike, which US President Donald Trump has repeatedly threatened.
Needless to say, the Israelis would love to see regime change in Iran because they consider the Iranians to be their number one enemy. But the Israelis also realize that this war will be much deadlier than the short war that we witnessed last year…
Many are warning that we could also see terror attacks by sleeper cells that are suddenly activated in western countries. In fact, it wouldn’t be a surprise at all to see terror attacks in the continental United States.
In addition, an apocalyptic war with Iran would send the price of oil soaring. On Thursday, it hit the highest level that we have seen in six months…
The price of oil hit a six-month high on rising concerns of a US military attack on Iran.
With tensions between Washington and Tehran mounting, Brent crude jumped 5 per cent to $71.89 a barrel.
That was the highest since the start of August and took gains since early January, when oil dipped below $60 a barrel, to 20 per cent.
If the Strait of Hormuz is closed for an extended period of time, we could easily see the price of oil double or even triple.
Needless to say, that would have very serious economic implications and there would be a lot of very unhappy people in this country. But a spike in the price of oil will only be temporary.
The vast numbers of people that will perish during the upcoming conflict will be dead permanently.
Just Like We Witnessed During The Great Recession And The Great Depression, Economic Activity Is Slowing Down All Around Us As Chaos Breaks Out In The Financial Markets
When the economy and the financial system are both greatly shaken at the same time, the consequences can be extremely painful. Most of you still clearly remember what life was like in 2008 and 2009. It was such a dark chapter in American history. But there have been other times when we have had a financial market crash but no recession. 1987 is a perfect example of that. Of course there have also been many instances when economic conditions have been very poor but the financial markets weathered it just fine. It is actually rare for a major economic crisis and a major financial crisis to occur simultaneously like we witnessed during the Great Recession and the Great Depression. Unfortunately, it appears that this is precisely the type of scenario that we are now facing.
The other day I authored an article entitled “12 Signposts That Indicate That A Monumental Economic Meltdown Is Now Upon Us”, and it received a tremendous amount of attention. That article clearly established that a significant economic slowdown is now upon us. Since I wrote that article, more evidence that the economy is slowing down has emerged.
For example, it is being reported that Las Vegas experienced a “devastating fall of 7.5 percent” in the number of people visiting the city last year…
Las Vegas’s long‑rumored tourism collapse has erupted into full public view, with new data revealing that 2025 was the year the desert empire finally stumbled.
The Las Vegas Convention and Visitors Authority (LVCVA) confirmed that the city drew just 38.5 million visitors in 2025, a devastating fall of 7.5 percent from the previous year.
This marked the sharpest annual decline since the post‑pandemic recovery and erasing years of hard‑won momentum.
Las Vegas has always been a leading indicator for U.S. economic performance. When the number of tourists starts to fall, an economic downturn almost always follows. The video game industry has also fallen on very hard times.
According to one recent survey, one-third of all video game industry workers were laid off in 2025…
One-third of U.S. video game industry workers say they were laid off last year, according to a new survey conducted by the organizers behind the newly revamped Game Developers Conference (GDC).
Based on responses from more than 2,300 gaming industry professionals, with surveys “customized for each participant group, ensuring that developers, marketers, executives, investors and others answered questions most relevant to them,” the 2026 State of the Game Industry Report found that 33% of respondents in the U.S. were laid off in the past two years.
That is crazy.
I think that AI is having a bigger impact in the video game industry than most of us realized. But of course we are seeing mass layoffs in many other industries as well.
On Thursday, Mastercard announced that it will be laying off approximately 4 percent of its entire workforce…
Mastercard has completed a review of its business that will impact about 4% of its full-time employees, the payment processor’s CFO, Sachin Mehra, said on Thursday.
“Based on the recent strategic review of our business, we expect to record a one-time restructuring charge in Q1 of approximately $200 million,” Mehra said on a call with analysts.
Another really big name, Home Depot, has just made a decision to give the axe to hundreds of loyal workers…
Atlanta-based Home Depot announced hundreds of layoffs Wednesday in its corporate operations.
Around 800 employees who work for the Atlanta store support center are being laid off, according to the company. Less than 150 of them work in the center and the rest work remotely.
In a statement, a Home Depot spokesperson said the company is “simplifying our corporate operations to better support our stores and our customers.”
Just like in 2008, it seems like we are being hit by one wave of layoffs after another.
Everyone thought that Dow Inc. was doing well, but they just announced that 4,500 employees will be hitting the bricks…
Chemical maker Dow Inc. is the latest company to announce substantial layoffs as it pivots to a stronger reliance on artificial intelligence and automation.
The company, on Thursday, announced it would cut 4,500 jobs as part of a streamlining operation it calls “Transform to Outperform.” The cuts will provide a $2 billion boost in near-term revenue, the company said, but will bring with them between $1.1 billion and $1.5 billion in one-time costs, including severance and other costs.
Some of the employment markets that were once the hottest are now being hit the hardest by layoffs.
In Seattle, we are being told that the “tech boom” has now turned into “tech gloom”…
A cloud hanging over Seattle is usually a good thing, if you’re here for the rain, or if you work in that aspect of the tech industry. But the cloud of economic uncertainty is a less welcome occurrence.
The tech boom is showing more signs of tech gloom this week following layoffs at some of the region’s biggest employers.
Just this month, Amazon and Meta are among the big names that have slashed jobs in the Emerald City…
- Amazon is laying off another 16,000 corporate employees, bringing the total to 30,000 since October. The company is also shuttering all of its Fresh and Go grocery stores.
- Meta is cutting hundreds of workers in its Reality Labs division, with roots in the region.
- Expedia Group is slashing more than 160 jobs at its Seattle HQ.
For those that want even more examples of the mass layoffs that have been happening all over America, I would recommend checking out my previous articles.
As economic conditions continue to deteriorate, chaos is erupting in the financial system.
Japanese bond yields have been going nuts, currency rates have been flying all over the place, cryptocurrencies crashed again today, and the price of silver and the price of gold have both been absolutely skyrocketing.
Statistically, the probability of what we have witnessed in the financial markets during the month of January is very close to zero. To illustrate this, I would like to share an extended excerpt from a social media post that a user known as “NoLimit” recently published on his X account…
The probability of what is happening is near zero.
Three 6-sigma events occurred in one week.
– Bonds
– Silver
– GoldWe are currently living through a statistical impossibility.
Let me explain:
Last Tuesday, Japanese 30-year debt recorded what’s called a “6-sigma” session. 2 days ago, silver did even better: it was at 5-sigma on the rally, then reached 6-sigma on the drop. IN A SINGLE SESSION.
Gold right now? It’s up 23% in less than a month. We’re getting very close to a 6-sigma event.
That’s three 6-sigma events in ONE WEEK. To explain quickly: in finance, we measure price moves around an average using the standard deviation, which we call sigma.
1-sigma: mundane
2-sigma: common
3-sigma: becomes rare
4-sigma: exceptional
5-sigma: extremely rare
6-sigma: supposed to occur once in 500 millionHere are the 6-sigma-type episodes we saw previously:
– The october 1987 crash, 22% drop in 1 session
– March 2020 covid crash
– The swiss franc’s surge in january 2015
– WTI oil turning negative in april 2020But we’ve never had 3 events occur in one week.
Do you see the point?
A 6-sigma event is almost NEVER triggered by a simple macro headline.
It almost always comes from the market’s structure: leverage, positions that are too concentrated, margin calls, collateral problems, and forced selling or buying.
That’s important to understand because we’re talking about internal strains in the system’s mechanics.
As you know, the Japanese bond market sits at the heart of the global financial system, and I won’t go back over the whole topic, but a 6-sigma move in a market that enormous doesn’t go unnoticed.
Seeing a 6-sigma move in silver a few days later gives one a lot to think about.
And now gold?? That’s absolutely insane.
Why are we seeing extreme statistical events, only days apart, in such different markets?
When a pillar of global funding becomes unstable, leverage tends to contract, and two things happen at the same time: forced selling in certain assets and forced buying of protection in others.
Historically, precious metals are often among the beneficiaries.
Many of my readers are loving the fact that gold and silver prices have risen at an exponential rate. JPMorgan is even suggesting that the price of gold could eventually hit $8,000.
But meanwhile the U.S. dollar and other fiat currencies are dying and investors are losing faith in the entire system. At this stage, Peter Schiff is warning that we are headed for a global nightmare “that will make the 2008 financial crisis look like a Sunday school picnic”…
As gold prices keep rising, American economist Peter Schiff says investors should view the rally as more than a hedge — calling it a warning that inflation is speeding up, the U.S. dollar is losing global trust and a major economic reckoning may be near.
“Gold and silver are warning about a bigger crisis that’s gonna hit either later this year or maybe next year. We are headed for a U.S. dollar crisis and a sovereign debt crisis,” Schiff said Tuesday afternoon on “The Claman Countdown.”
“Central banks are buying gold to back up their currencies. They’re getting rid of dollars. They are getting rid of Treasuries,” he continued. “We are headed for [an] economic crisis, again, that will make the 2008 financial crisis look like a Sunday school picnic.”
The warning signs are all around us.
The last time we were forced to endure a major economic crisis and a major financial crisis at the same time was during the Great Recession. Now it is happening again, and many prominent voices believe that the pain that we will soon experience will be off the charts
10 Ways That Global Events Just Went Completely Bonkers
We were expecting global events to accelerate in 2026, but what we have witnessed throughout the month of January so far has been quite a shock to the system. Everywhere around us, things are going totally haywire. Gold and silver are skyrocketing in price, we are on the verge of a cataclysmic war with Iran, conflict has erupted on the streets of major U.S. cities, and we just keep getting hammered by natural disaster after natural disaster. So many things are happening that I couldn’t pick just one to write about, and so I am throwing a whole bunch of stuff into this article. The following are 10 ways that global events just went completely bonkers…
#1 The price of silver just hit 117 dollars an ounce and the price of gold just hit 5,400 dollars an ounce. In a desperate attempt to get precious metals prices under control, CME Group just hiked margin requirements again…
Following a record surge in silver prices, the CME Group has increased margin requirements for COMEX silver futures. The exchange announced that margin for non-high-risk accounts will rise from 9% to 11%, while high-risk accounts will see an increase from 9.9% to 12.1%. Additionally, margin requirements for platinum and palladium futures will also be adjusted.
The CME Group stated that this adjustment, effective after the market close, is part of a routine assessment of market volatility to ensure sufficient collateral coverage. Earlier this month, the exchange shifted from fixed to percentage-based margin requirements for precious metal futures.
#2 Amid reports that President Trump is considering a naval blockade of Iranian oil, a top Iranian official has issued a “thinly veiled threat” to restrict traffic through the Strait of Hormuz…
An Iranian military official said the country can control which ships can pass through the crucial Strait of Hormuz as US President Donald Trump ramped up military threats.
The thinly veiled threat to halt some traffic on the Hormuz came as a US aircraft carrier arrived in the region, leading Trump to demand negotiations with threats of “violence”.
Mohammad Akbarzadeh, an Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps commander, said in a Fars News Agency report that Iran has “complete control” over the strait, a bottleneck for oil exports from the Middle East Gulf.
Let’s hope that the Iranians do not decide to do this.
We are being warned that if the Strait of Hormuz is shut down, it could instantly cause “a global oil and gas crisis”…
Industry experts cautioned that a military confrontation could provoke Iran to choke off the Strait of Hormuz, a narrow waterway that that connects the Persian Gulf and the Arabian Sea and through which nearly a third of the world’s seaborne crude flows.
“A disruption through the Strait of Hormuz could cause a global oil and gas crisis” especially when considering the “desperate and ill advised lengths the current Iranian regime may go to” should they find themselves increasingly backed into a corner with their power and lives at stake, said Saul Kavonic, head of energy research at MST Marquee.
About 13 million barrels per day of crude oil transited the Strait of Hormuz in 2025, accounting for roughly 31% of global seaborne crude flows, data provided by market intelligence firm Kpler showed.
#3 Marco Rubio just told the U.S. Senate that we may have to “preemptively prevent” the Iranians from attacking U.S. forces in the Middle East…
Rubio said during the Wednesday Senate Foreign Relations Hearing focused on Venezuela, “And so I think it’s wise and prudent to have a force posture within the region that could respond and potentially, not necessarily what’s going to happen, but if necessary, preemptively prevent the attack against 1000s of American servicemen and other facilities in the region. And our allies.” But ironically this is just after admitting the US ordered additional assets to the region in the first place, which are the same assets now supposedly under threat by Tehran.
“I hope it doesn’t come to that, but that’s I think what you’re seeing now is the ability to posture assets in the region to defend against what could be an Iranian threat against our personnel,” the secretary of state said.
Meanwhile, a senior adviser to Ayatollah Khamenei is warning that if the Iranians are attacked they will strike Tel Aviv in response…
Ali Shamkhani, a senior adviser to Iran’s Supreme Leader Ali Khamenei, warned that any US military action would be met with a harsh response, including strikes on Tel Aviv, in a Hebrew post on X/Twitter on Wednesday.
Shamkhani wrote that a “limited strike is an illusion,” adding that any US military move, “from any source and at any level,” would be treated as an act of war.
He cautioned that Iran’s response would be “immediate and unprecedented,” aimed at “the aggressor, the heart of Tel Aviv, and all supporters of the aggressor.”
#4 Giving Tomahawk cruise missiles to Ukraine would put us right on the brink of nuclear war with Russia, but apparently such a move is being strongly considered anyway…
Behind closed doors in Washington, a discreet but intensifying effort is underway to push the United States toward supplying Ukraine with its most far-reaching conventional strike capability yet: ground-launched Tomahawk cruise missiles, according to Kyiv Post. The campaign, described by those involved as deliberate and methodical rather than public or confrontational, is being driven by a familiar figure in U.S.–Ukraine defense diplomacy — Dan Rice.
Rice, the president of the American University in Kyiv and a former special adviser to Ukraine’s Commander-in-Chief of the Armed Forces, has emerged once again as a central intermediary between Kyiv’s strategic needs and Washington’s internal debates. His latest push comes as the war enters a phase defined by deep-strike warfare, long-range attrition, and growing questions about escalation, deterrence, and end-state leverage.
There is a lot of pressure to do something to shake things up in Ukraine.
Western leaders are becoming increasingly desperate, because negotiations with the Russians are going nowhere, and Russian forces are steadily gobbling up even more territory…
During an inspection of the Zapad group of forces, Russian Defense Minister Andrei Belousov summarized the interim results of offensive operations in the special military operation zone, noting significant territorial gains since the beginning of this year. According to the head of the military department, 17 settlements have come under Russian control, and the total area of liberated territories amounts to more than 50 square kilometers. A key achievement on this section of the front was the capture of the strategically important Kupyansk-Uzlovaya junction, where the clearing of city blocks is currently being completed. Meanwhile, the situation of Ukrainian forces near Kupyansk itself is assessed as critical: approximately 800 Ukrainian Armed Forces soldiers are trapped, effectively encircled, as a result of the rapid maneuver of Russian units.
#5 We have been told how “peaceful” Alex Pretti was over and over again. But now video evidence has emerged that reportedly shows that he has a history of anti-ICE violence…
A protester believed to be Alex Pretti was filmed spitting at a federal SUV, smashing its tail light and fighting with cops 11 days before the shooting that shocked America.
The News Movement said facial analysis of their new video gave a 97 percent probability that the man in their report is Alex Pretti.
Pretti, a 37-year-old ICU nurse, was killed on January 24 after being shot 10 times by Department of Homeland Security officers.
#6 It looks like we are about to have another government shutdown. At this moment, the Democrats are making three major demands that the Trump administration will consider to be quite unacceptable…
With an increasingly likely partial government shutdown only days away, Senate Democrats outlined three main demands for reforming the Department of Homeland Security, including Immigration and Customs Enforcement, in the wake of Alex Pretti’s killing.
First, they want President Donald Trump to end sweeping immigration checks known as “roving patrols.” They also demand more accountability for ICE and Border Patrol, including independent investigations and stricter use-of-force standards. Lastly, they want “masks off” officers – and “body cameras on.”
#7 What is the FBI searching for in Georgia? On Wednesday, it was being reported that the FBI had just conducted a search of the Fulton County Election Hub and Operation Center…
FBI agents were seen Wednesday carrying out a search at an election hub in Fulton County, Georgia, a location that became ground zero for concerns and complaints about voter fraud beginning in 2020.
Agents were seen entering the Fulton County Election Hub and Operation Center, a new facility that state officials opened in 2023 that was designed to streamline their election processes.
It was not immediately clear what the FBI agents were investigating, but Fox News Digital is told the probe is related to the 2020 election.
#8 Have you read the novel “Brave New World” by Aldous Huxley? Sadly, our society is embracing eugenics a little bit more with each passing day. For example, one company is now giving parents the chance to select their new baby from a “menu” of embryos that have been conceived through IVF…
“Pick your baby.” The invitation is now not just for little girls choosing their baby doll or for “Sims” gamers. It is the draw for real-life couples trying to conceive a baby through in-vitro fertilization (IVF) to the company Nucleus IVF+, which has chosen that unsettling invitation for their marketing campaign and URL: www.pickyourbaby.com.
Couples who sign up with Nucleus IVF+ are presented with an electronic “menu” of up to 20 embryos they have conceived, allowing them to view the sex of each baby, their anticipated hair and eye color, and predictions about the height and IQ of each as well as their risk for various diseases. The company notes that all these characteristics are only framed in terms of probabilities — they cannot make any guarantees.
#9 The historic winter storm that more than 200 million Americans just experienced turned out to be a real nightmare. Daniel Holdings is telling us that at his home in Kentucky trees were literally exploding all around him…
That ice coated the trees and, as we used to say in the Air Force, made the ground as “slick as snail snot.” After the ice, the precipitation turned to sleet and that’s when things went bad.
I read an article a couple of days before that talked about exploding trees in Wisconsin, I think. I thought to myself, “Come on, there’s no such thing! That has to be clickbait!”
But shortly after 9 am Sunday, trees started exploding all over our hill community. It was some sight to see. The tops of trees were ripping themselves off of their trunks and raining down to the ground. Big pines were also falling to the ground. In a span of about 15 minutes, all over the neighborhood you heard a frightening succession of whomp, whomp, whomp! It was so surreal.
The lots on either side of our house are filled with huge pines, so yes, we were not spared from this tree terror. One particular tree exploded and it took out our power line and internet cable. Thank the Lord that not one of those trees hit our house or car, but the damage was done.
#10 Should we be concerned by what is happening at Yellowstone? Apparently a “Chicago-sized bulge” is rising right now…
There’s a Chicago-sized bulge in Yellowstone National Park, and it’s still rising.
The Greater Yellowstone Ecosystem remains one of the most dynamic places on the planet. This is largely due to the ongoing volcanic, geothermal, and hydrothermal activity that keeps the park’s geysers erupting and hot springs bubbling.
Mike Poland, scientist-in-charge of the Yellowstone Volcano Observatory, and other scientists are monitoring an area of ongoing uplift on the northern rim of the Yellowstone Caldera, near Gibbon Falls.
I told you that there was a lot to talk about today.
So much is happening in our world at this moment that it really is exceedingly difficult to keep up with it all.
These are such challenging times, but they are also such exciting times. As for me, I can’t wait to see what is going to happen tomorrow, because it feels like global events are about to hit some sort of a major crescendo.
Despite Iran’s Threats To Sink A U.S. Aircraft Carrier, Trump Warns That “The Great Aircraft Carrier Abraham Lincoln” Is Coming And “Time Is Running Out”
How would the American people respond if they suddenly saw images of a U.S. aircraft carrier burning after it had been destroyed by an overwhelming Iranian assault? If the U.S. attacks Iran, and that appears to be very likely at this stage, the USS Abraham Lincoln will almost certainly be targeted by the Iranians. In a previous article, I wrote about how the Abraham Lincoln’s defenses could be overwhelmed by a massive barrage of either missiles or drones. In particular, if I was in command of the Abraham Lincoln I would be deeply concerned about Iran’s SS-N-22 Sunburn anti-ship missile batteries. Staying out of range of those missiles will be of the utmost importance, because they come in at an absolutely blistering pace.
Nobody can deny that Iranian leaders have been thinking about sinking a carrier. On Sunday, they unveiled a giant billboard in Enghelab Square that conveys quite an ominous message…
The Iranian regime unveiled a new mural on a giant billboard in Tehran’s Enghelab Square on Sunday, depicting an aircraft carrier with damaged and exploding fighter planes on its flight deck.
The deck is covered with bodies and streaked with blood, which trails into the water and forms stripes reminiscent of the American flag.
A slogan – warning the US to not attempt a military strike on the country – is emblazoned across one corner: ‘If you sow the wind, you will reap the whirlwind.’
They aren’t exactly being subtle, are they?
In all my years, I have never seen anything quite like this…
The Iranians seem to believe that they are very capable of sinking a U.S. aircraft carrier.
But President Trump is sending the USS Abraham Lincoln toward Iran anyway.
On Wednesday, Trump specifically mentioned the Abraham Lincoln in a Truth Social post that was directed squarely at Iran…
Many are regarding this as a final warning to the Iranians.
When Trump said that “time is running out”, I believe that he fully meant it.
Of course the Iranians have no intention of negotiating a deal or giving up their nuclear program.
In response to Trump’s post, Iran’s delegation at the United Nations issued a very alarming warning…
Iran’s mission to the United Nations responded in kind.
“Last time the U.S. blundered into wars in Afghanistan and Iraq, it squandered over $7 trillion and lost more than 7,000 American lives,” it said in an X post quoting Trump’s statement.
“Iran stands ready for dialog based on mutual respect and interests—BUT IF PUSHED, IT WILL DEFEND ITSELF AND RESPOND LIKE NEVER BEFORE!”
As we have seen so many other times in recent weeks, the Iranians are threatening to do something extraordinarily dramatic if they are attacked.
What could that be?
Iranian Foreign Minister Seyed Abbas Araghchi is telling us that his nation is ready to “immediately and powerfully respond” to any attack…
Seyed Abbas Araghchi, Iran’s foreign minister, warned on X that Tehran’s forces were ready to retaliate.
He said: ‘Our brave Armed Forces are prepared – with their fingers on the trigger – to immediately and powerfully respond to ANY aggression against our beloved land, air, and sea.
‘The valuable lessons learned from the 12-Day War have enabled us to respond even more strongly, rapidly, and profoundly.
In addition to striking U.S. targets, the Iranians would also inevitably launch missiles at Israeli cities.
Needless to say, the Israelis are fully prepared to strike back with overwhelming force. And then there will be no turning back.
I hope that everyone understands what that will mean. The Iranian regime is run by crazed Islamic zealots that will literally do anything to survive. If you think that there are any limits to what they will do, you should consider the vast numbers of their own people that they have already killed…
As many as 30,000 people could have been killed in the streets of Iran on Jan. 8 and 9 alone, two senior officials of the country’s Ministry of Health told TIME—indicating a dramatic surge in the death toll. So many people were slaughtered by Iranian security services on that Thursday and Friday, it overwhelmed the state’s capacity to dispose of the dead. Stocks of body bags were exhausted, the officials said, and eighteen-wheel semi-trailers replaced ambulances.
If that is what they are willing to do to their own population, what would they be willing to do to us or to the Israelis?
These lunatics used trucks that had heavy machine guns mounted on them to mow down thousands of their own citizens…
Witnesses say millions were in the streets when authorities shut down the internet and all other communications with the outside world. Rooftop snipers and trucks mounted with heavy machine guns opened fire, according to eyewitnesses and cell phone footage. On Friday, Jan. 9, an official of the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps warned on state television to anyone venturing into the streets, “if … a bullet hits you, don’t complain.”
We just witnessed one of the greatest slaughters of political protesters in human history.
One man that was actually in Kaj Square when the shooting started there told Iran Wire what he witnessed…
The protester told IranWire that from around 8:00 or 8:30 PM, security forces were already using tear gas and sound bombs. Green laser sights were trained on people’s heads, chests, and eyes, while the hum of low-flying drones filled the air. But the first live bullet was fired around 10:00 PM, striking a young man in the chest near the ice cream shop. There was no warning. No announcement. They began shooting once they realized the crowd could not be dispersed, and arresting such a massive gathering was simply impossible.
He said that in such an enormous crowd, nothing could be done – not even escaping. Perhaps more than 50,000 people had gathered: the old and the young, women and men, even children. The entire square and the streets around it were overflowing with protesters.
The protester continued: “The next bullet hit the stomach of a young woman; the next hit a man’s groin; the next hit a young man’s shoulder; the next… and the next… I still hear the sound of those bullets and the subsequent shrapnel in my ears every night. A few people were there – we never found out if they were government agents or ordinary people – who were collecting the bodies of the slain from among the crowd and taking them to one of the nearby shops. We don’t even know what they did with those bodies.”
“At 11:00 or 11:30 PM, the shooting became heavier. They were aiming directly for our upper bodies. We moved toward North Allameh Tabatabaei Street. However, they were shooting intensely north of Kaj Square as well. A young boy was in front of me; he didn’t look more than 15 or 16 years old. He was right there when he was shot and fell. They were firing from all sides; we were running, and we could hear the shell casings hitting the ground just a short distance behind us.”
Accounts such as this need to be shared all over the world.
The courage that these protesters have demonstrated has been astounding.
And guess what? After all of the killing that we have already witnessed, we are being told that protesters are once again flooding into the streets…
I think that we are getting very close to a point of no return.
All of the preparations for a U.S. military operation have been completed, and I believe that President Trump will soon give the green light. When that day finally arrives, missiles will start flying all over the Middle East, and nothing will ever be the same again.
The Fate Of 342 Million Americans Hangs In The Balance As The Clock Ticks Closer To Doomsday
The total population of the United States has risen to 342 million, and most of them believe that they will live to a ripe old age. But as the world teeters on the brink of the unthinkable, scientists have just moved the Doomsday Clock closer to midnight than ever before. We are being warned to reverse course while we still can, but most of the population is not interested in such warnings. Instead, most of the population just continues to act as if the party is never going to end.
When I was born, about 200 million people were living in the United States. Adding approximately 140 million more people has fundamentally transformed our nation, and many areas of the country that were once sparsely populated are now quite crowded.
But now population growth has slowed down dramatically…
The United States population grew last year at one of the slowest rates in its history, according to new numbers released on Tuesday by the Census Bureau. The immigration numbers plunged by more than 50 percent from the previous year, under the aggressive anti-immigration policies of President Trump. And the birthrate continued its nearly two-decade long decline.
The nation’s population increased by about 1.8 million over the year, and stood at almost 342 million on July 1, the estimates say. That is a growth rate of about 0.5 percent, the lowest since 2021, when the Covid-19 pandemic caused deaths to soar and borders to close, shutting the door to international migration. That year saw the slowest growth since the nation’s founding.
In recent years, immigration has been responsible for most of our population growth.
Of course with President Trump in the White House, the number of immigrants coming to the U.S. is way down, and that trend is expected to continue…
As Mr. Trump continues his term, immigration is expected to drop even further. If current trends continue, it will fall to about 321,000 for the year ending on June 30, according to a Census Bureau news release.
The other primary reason why population growth is slowing down is because U.S. families are simply having fewer children…
A sharp drop in the birthrate also contributed to the slowdown in population growth. The birthrate has been falling since the Great Recession in 2008, and new births outpaced deaths by only about 518,000 in the latest period. That is higher than during the peak of the Covid pandemic, when deaths were soaring, but it is still extremely low by historical standards.
This is a trend that stretches back for a long time.
U.S. women are not getting pregnant as frequently as they once did, and the number of abortions in this country has been going up every single year since Roe v. Wade was overturned. In fact, close to 100,000 abortions are now being performed in the United States each month…
The number of abortions reported nationwide has grown steadily since the Supreme Court returned jurisdiction of the procedure to the states, driven by a surge in mail-order pills.
The pro-choice Society of Family Planning estimates that the U.S. averaged nearly 99,000 abortions monthly during the first half of 2025, up roughly 4% from 2024.
The society found that 73% of abortions were performed at clinics, compared with 27% through telehealth prescriptions. That was up from less than 10% of pregnancy terminations through telehealth in the first six months of 2023.
At the same time that we are performing abortions on an industrial scale, we find ourselves closer to an apocalyptic global conflict than ever before.
On Tuesday, we learned that the Doomsday Clock is now the closest that it has ever been to midnight…
Humanity continues to move closer to catastrophe, scientists said Tuesday, Jan. 27.
The human race is at its closest point yet to destroying itself, according to the reset of the ominous but symbolic “Doomsday Clock.” The metaphorical clock now stands at 85 seconds to midnight after advancing four seconds since last year’s reset.
The clock is now the closest to midnight since its introduction in 1947. It is updated each year by the Bulletin of the Atomic Scientists, which organizes the assessment of how close we are to a self-inflicted end of humanity.
It was never even this close to midnight during the worst moments of the Cold War.
When this year’s announcement was made, the scientists that are responsible for the Doomsday Clock specifically mentioned the United States, Russia and China…
According to the Bulletin, “our current trajectory is unsustainable. National leaders – particularly those in the United States, Russia, and China – must take the lead in finding a path away from the brink. Citizens must insist they do so.”
How many years have I been warning about war with Russia and war with China?
In recent months we have deeply angered both of them by seizing international oil tankers, grabbing Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro, threatening to impose exceedingly high tariffs on both of them, and gathering an unprecedented amount of firepower in the Middle East to potentially attack their ally Iran.
If we go to war with Iran, it will do a massive amount of damage to our relationships with both Russia and China. This will especially be true if unconventional weapons end up being used in that war.
Tensions in the region are sky high at this moment, and both sides are ready to pull the trigger. A single wrong move could send missiles flying all over the place, and that is why the fact that a mystery explosion has just been reported in Iran is so alarming…
A military installation in Iran has been hit by a reported explosion amid claims Donald Trump has been considering a strike on the Islamic Republic. The cause of the blast remains unknown.
Open Source Intel, which identifies itself as a media monitoring service, reported an explosion on Tuesday at the Parchin “military complex”, citing journalist and Iranian political analyst Behnam Gholipour.
The unverified report of an explosion arrives during a period of escalating tensions in the Middle East, where a US aircraft carrier group has deployed to spearhead any American military action in response to Iran’s violent suppression of nationwide protests.
Once the missiles start flying, there will be no turning back. If it was up to me, I would have set the Doomsday Clock even closer to midnight.
For decades, we have been warned about the horror of nuclear weapons. I believe that we are living at a time when they will actually be used.
At the moment, the 342 million people that are living in this nation are working hard and trying to enjoy life. But the truth is that the unthinkable is right around the corner, and the clock is ticking.
Trump, Byrd, the Penguin, and Disclosure…
Source; Laura Aboli
In 1946, just one year after the end of World War II, the United States launched the largest military expedition in history, to a place officially described as irrelevant, inhospitable, and strategically unimportant: Antarctica.
It was called Operation Highjump.
Thirteen ships, aircraft carriers, submarines, thousands of troops. and advanced aircraft, led by Rear Admiral Richard E. Byrd, a man who was not only a decorated military officer but a national hero, an explorer, a serious figure whose words carried weight.
The scale of the operation made no sense for a so-called ‘scientific and training mission’. It was meant to last many months, yet it was abruptly terminated in early 1947, with no convincing explanation ever offered.
What followed is where the story becomes fascinating…
Shortly after his return, Byrd gave interviews in which he warned that the United States must prepare for an enemy capable of flying from pole to pole at incredible speeds. He described seeing craft that moved impossibly fast and appeared to enter and exit the Earth itself, and he spoke of vast lands beyond the ice; enormous territories, with mountains and rivers, extending past what we are told exists at the poles.
Just months later, in July 1947, the Roswell incident occurred.
Initially announced by the U.S. Army Air Forces as the recovery of a flying disc, the story was almost immediately reversed, reframed, and buried under the now familiar explanation of a weather balloon. From that point on, UFOs were ridiculed, witnesses were silenced, and a new era of secrecy began.
The timing matters; Operation Highjump ends in early 1947, Byrd issues his warnings, Roswell happens in July of the same year. And not long after, Antarctica becomes effectively sealed under international treaty; militarisation banned, access restricted, sovereignty frozen, a vast continent placed outside normal geopolitical rules.
Those who do go there, particularly military and government personnel, are quietly inducted into what is informally known as the ‘Order of the Penguin’, not an official honour, but a cultural marker, a nod that you have been to the one place on Earth that remains curiously off limits.
Fast forward to today, the White House posts an image of Trump walking across an icy landscape into the distance, hand in hand with a penguin, an image most people dismiss as absurd or humorous, but symbols at this level are rarely accidental.
Trump has repeatedly pushed the boundaries on UFO disclosure, created Space Force, challenged intelligence secrecy, and more recently has spoken not only about Greenland, but about the Arctic more broadly.
Trump and the penguin were telling us something…
If disclosure is coming, it may not be limited to objects in the sky. It may involve geography we were told was settled, maps we were told were complete, and territories we were told did not exist.
Perhaps disclosure begins with penguins and with ice, with a mission that ended too early, a warning that never made sense, and a silence that has lasted nearly eighty years…
12 Signposts That Indicate That A Monumental Economic Meltdown Is Now Upon Us
We live at a time when the pace of change is so rapid that it can be overwhelming at times. More change occurs in a single month than happened during most entire years when I was growing up. When I pull up the news each day, there is always a fresh serving of chaos awaiting me. Unfortunately, chaos is not good for the economy. The U.S. dollar is in the process of dying, debt levels are exploding all around us, more mass layoffs have been announced within the past 24 hours, and the cost of living crisis is absolutely crushing most Americans. Those that can look at the information that I am about to share with you and say “everything is fine” are simply not being rational. The following are 12 signposts that indicate that a monumental economic meltdown is now upon us…
#1 Consumer confidence just fell to the lowest level that we have seen in 12 years…
America’s economic mood deteriorated in January to its lowest level in more than a decade as consumers fretted about geopolitical tensions, affordability and President Donald Trump’s unrelenting trade war.
The Conference Board’s Consumer Confidence Index for January, released Tuesday, declined 9.7 points to a reading of 84.5, the lowest since 2014, surpassing the lows of last year when Trump unveiled stiff tariffs and the depths of the pandemic recession in 2020.
January’s reading came in much lower than the 91.1 reading economists projected in a poll by data firm FactSet.
#2 One recent survey discovered that 56 percent of U.S. workers are experiencing serious financial strain…
Social media is rife with tearful videos of how hard it has become to make ends meet. Some 14% of workers can’t or struggle to pay their bills each month, PwC found. Another 42% pay their bills with little or nothing left over for savings. PwC says that’s more than half of the workforce experiencing financial strain in 2025.
“I have to work 40 hours a week just so I can have a place to live,” one woman said in one Instagram post. “Forty hours a week makes me $2000 a month and my rent is $1,660. So I work 40 hours a week so I can have a two-bedroom apartment and an extra $300 a month. Like, that doesn’t even cover my phone, internet, food.”
#3 According to the Ludwig Institute for Shared Economic Prosperity, the percentage of the U.S. workforce that is “functionally unemployed” has risen to a whopping 25.2 percent…
Employment researchers are warning that the share of Americans who are only loosely attached to the labor force is on the rise, and that the true rate of unemployment may be far higher than official figures suggest.
According to a new report from the Ludwig Institute for Shared Economic Prosperity (LISEP), 25.2 percent of the U.S. workforce could now be classified as “functionally unemployed”—meaning jobless, seeking but unable to secure full-time employment or earning “poverty-level wages.”
#4 It is being reported that 1,500 HR employees that work for Amazon are facing the axe…
Amazon is expected to cut more jobs within its human resources team by a significant margin.
According to Fortune, the e-commerce giant is preparing to lay off approximately 15% of its HR department — equivalent to around 1,500 of the 10,000 HR employees. It is currently unknown when the layoffs will take place, and how many jobs in the Puget Sound region are at risk.
#5 At one time, Pinterest was flying high. But now harder times are here and it intends to fire close to 15 percent of its entire workforce…
Pinterest said Tuesday it plans to lay off less than 15% of its workforce and cut back on office space as the company embraces artificial intelligence.
In a securities filing, Pinterest said it expects the cuts will be complete by the end of its third quarter in late September. Shares of Pinterest slid more than 9%.
#6 Nike just announced that it will be eliminating 775 jobs…
Nike is planning to cut nearly 800 jobs amid an automation push at the footwear and apparel giant’s distribution centers.
The company is cutting 775 jobs that will primarily impact jobs at the retailer’s distribution centers in Tennessee and Mississippi as the company looks to automate more of its supply chain. The news was first reported by CNBC, citing people familiar with the matter.
#7 Not to be outdone by any of the companies mentioned above, UPS plans to throw up to 30,000 employees into the streets this year…
United Parcel Service plans to cut up to 30,000 workers this year as it moves to cut costs, the delivery giant’s chief financial officer said Tuesday.
“In terms of semi-variable costs, we expect to reduce operational positions by up to 30,000,” UPS CFO Brian Dykes said during a company earnings call. “This will be accomplished through attrition, and we expect to offer a second voluntary separation program for full-time drivers.”
#8 The Washington Post is preparing for “big layoffs”, and that could include the entire sports department…
The Washington Post has been around for nearly 150 years and had a sports section for almost as long. But after years and years of declining revenue, it appears that big layoffs are coming – and the sports section could be gutted hardest of all.
According to Dylan Byers of Puck, “massive layoffs” are set to hit The Washington Post in the days to come with the foreign desk being hit hard. However, Byers noted that the sports desk is rumored to be getting “shuttered entirely.”
#9 The largest mall in San Francisco has been permanently closed even sooner than expected…
San Francisco’s beleaguered Westfield San Francisco Centre shopping mall closed its doors earlier than expected.
The city’s largest mall, which saw a string of retailers leave in recent months, closed on Saturday, two days ahead of schedule, according to the San Francisco Chronicle.
A sign reading “closed until further notice” was posted at the front entrance of the once-bustling shopping center, the outlet reported.
#10 Pending home sales in the United States just fell “to the lowest level for any December on record”…
Pending home sales, which track the number of contracts signed in December, plunged by 9.3% seasonally adjusted from November, to the lowest level for any December on record in the data by the National Association of Realtors, which goes back to 2010. Compared to December 2010, during the Housing Bust, pending sales were down by 21.5%.
The market is now well into its fourth year of the collapse in transactions, and there has simply been no improvement.
#11 The U.S. dollar just declined for a fourth consecutive day, and it is now at the lowest level that we have seen in four months…
The U.S. dollar fell for a fourth straight day on Tuesday, slipping to a four-month low, as traders kept watch for possible coordinated currency intervention by U.S. and Japanese authorities and a Federal Reserve interest rate decision.
#12 If someone tries to convince you that the U.S. dollar is not dying, just show them this chart…
When the value of the U.S. dollar declines, the purchasing power of our money goes down.
Meanwhile, the price of silver is currently sitting at 110 dollars an ounce. Many of us have been warning that all of this was coming, and now it is happening right in front of our eyes.
Our leaders have been making very bad decisions for decades, and now we are paying the price. But if you think that things are bad now, just hold on tight, because things are going to get even more chaotic in the months ahead.
Children’s Health Defense Hits AAP With RICO Suit Over Fraudulent Vaccine Safety Claims
Executive summary
Hours ago, Sacramento attorney Rick Jaffe filed what is arguably one of the most important lawsuits ever filed in modern medical history.
The plaintiffs accuse the AAP of operating as the central coordinator in a racketeering enterprise involving pharmaceutical manufacturers (Pfizer, Merck, GlaxoSmithKline, Sanofi Pasteur) and affiliated organizations. The alleged purpose:
To promote, financially benefit from, and protect the ever-expanding childhood vaccination schedule through systematic fraud, misinformation, and suppression of independent science.
They argue that this has:
- led to widespread health harm to children,
- destroyed the careers of physicians who questioned the schedule, and
- defrauded families into consenting to vaccinations under false pretenses.
The Core Allegation
The suit claims AAP knowingly misrepresented both safety and efficacy evidence by asserting that the childhood vaccine schedule:
- has been “fully tested,”
- “proven safe and effective,” and
- has “saved millions of lives.”
and that none of these statements are supported by actual cumulative outcome studies.
They accuse the AAP of:
Substituting theoretical immunologic reasoning (e.g., “the immune system can handle 10,000 vaccines”) in place of empirical toxicology and morbidity studies that were never conducted.
The AAP is accused of:
- Mail and wire fraud spanning over two decades.
- Conspiracy with vaccine manufacturers to maintain the “illusion of safety.”
- Systematic suppression of scientists, studies, and doctors contradicting their message.
- Profiting from vaccines through insurance incentives, bonuses, and “pay-for-performance” schemes.
The suit is filed under:
- 18 U.S.C. § 1962(c) & (d) — civil RICO (racketeering and conspiracy)
- 18 U.S.C. § 1964(c) — treble damages for “injury to business or property”
- Ancillary jurisdiction for declaratory and injunctive relief under federal civil statutes.
The plaintiffs seek:
- Declaratory judgment that:
- The vaccine schedule has never been cumulatively tested for safety.
- Key AAP statements are materially false.
- AAP’s claims constitute racketeering predicate acts.
Injunctive relief, forcing AAP to publish corrections on its website, HealthyChildren.org, and in its Red Book.
Treble damages for lost income, destroyed careers, and economic harms.
Attorney’s fees and costs.
The lawsuit
You can download the full 55-page AAP lawsuit for free here.
It was written in plain language for the public to read and learn. It’s devastating.
The historical significance is unprecendented
The Lawsuit Plaintiffs
The American Academy of Pediatrics is being sued by Andrea Shaw, Shantica Nelson, Paul Thomas, Ken Stoller, and CHD. VSRF’s Angela Wulbrecht is a spokesperson for the moms Shaw and Nelson and assisted in the case as well.
I knew all the plaintiffs long before this lawsuit was conceived. I also helped out (very modestly) on the lawsuit.
The Full AI Analysis of the Lawsuit (AlterAI)
Here’s the full AI analysis including repercussions for AMA and other organizations. It shows the lawsuit is likely to be successful in exposing the truth that they have no scientific basis for their claims: the studies don’t exist.
Source: AlterAI
No Mainstream Media Coverage of the Lawsuit
There was a complete media blackout of coverage of the lawsuit. It’s arguably the most important lawsuit in modern medical history, and there’s no mainstream media coverage anywhere in the world.
From Grokon Jan 22, 2026:
Just now, as I am writing this, yet another pair of twins found dead <24 hours after their vaccine shots
I just now learned of yet another set of twins who died HOURS after their vaccine appointment. Perfectly healthy. Got 3 vaccine shots each at 9am. Both found dead in their beds at 7am the next morning. The parents are livid.
We’ll be interviewing the parents on tomorrow’s VSRF show along with at Rick Jaffe.
Other articles
- CHD article: Breaking: Children’s Health Defense Hits AAP With RICO Suit Over Fraudulent Vaccine Safety Claims
- Epoch Times excellent article: RFK Jr.’s Former Group Sues American Academy of Pediatrics.
“The pattern is consistent: when researchers conduct the studies AAP insists are impossible, the results contradict AAP’s safety assurances,” Children’s Health Defense stated.
- Celia Farber included the YouTube video in her article:
- Nic Hulscher’s article on the lawsuit.
This is just the beginning of a wave of lawsuits, not just against AAP
But this is not just the AAP at risk.
This same method can be applied to other professional societies as well.
Jaffe wants to get several states involved and open the door to lawsuits from all the other doctors whose careers have been ruined by the AAP.
In short, this lawsuit is extremely well crafted to do just that.
If the lawsuits are successful, it will lead to:
- the destruction of these associations who are the real purveyors of misinformation that have caused incalculable harm
- public exposure that these societies are misrepresenting scientific studies and that there is no evidence vaccines (as a whole) save lives
This lawsuit reminds me of C.W. McCall’s classic Convoy song:
We was headin’ for bear
On ‘I-1-0
‘Bout a mile out Shakey Town
I says, Pig Pen this here’s the Rubber Duck
And I’m about to put the hammer down[Chorus] ‘Cause we got a little ‘ole convoy
Rockin’ through the night
Yeah, we got a little ‘ole convoy
Ain’t she a beautiful sight
C’mon and join our Convoy
Ain’t nothin’ gonna get in our way
We gonna roll this truckin’ convoy
‘Cross the USA
Convoy
Convoy
— From Convoy, C.W. McCall.
Summary
This lawsuit is truly one of the most important lawsuits in modern medical history.
The lawsuit is essentially exposing to the world that the emperor (the AAP) has no clothes (“scientific evidence”). This lawsuit marks the first serious legal challenge to the AAP’s long-standing public claims and forces them into formal evidentiary review.
There isn’t a credible study backing up AAP’s “saves lives” claims. Mainstream institutions refuse to do such a study, even though the IOM confirms no such study exists. The closest we have is the Zervos study and that looked only at morbidity outcomes and showed the vaccinated kids did worse.
If the court rules against the AAP, the implications will be far-reaching and likely trigger additional scrutiny across the industry.
The requested declaratory relief would make clear to the public that many widely repeated statements were not supported by the evidence presented. You can only shield a narrative from accountability for so long.
It’s time to bring the hammer down.
The General & Insider Paper Breaking News
January 27th, 2026
-
US aircraft carrier has arrived in Middle East: US military
-
Benjamin Netanyahu’s scheduled testimony tomorrow in his ongoing corruption trial has been suddenly canceled for unknown reasons.
-
The CIA is covertly moving to set up a permanent U.S. footprint inside Venezuela.
-
China’s senior-most general is accused of leaking information about the country’s nuclear-weapons program to the U.S. and accepting bribes for official acts, including the promotion of an officer to defense minister — WSJ
-
The Department of Homeland Security is examining whether an accidental discharge from Alex Pretti’s pistol, while it was in a Border Patrol agent’s hand, may have prompted the decision to open fire and kill him immediately.
-
Border Commander Greg Bovino has not been relieved of his duties, according to the Department of Homeland Security, which says Nick Sortor was incorrect.
-
Trump says sending border czar to Minnesota after latest killing
-
EU says it has officially opened investigation into X over Grok AI
-
Top Border Patrol official Gregory Bovino and some of his agents are expected to leave Minneapolis and return to their respective sectors, CNN reports
-
The House is moving ahead with plans to hold Bill and Hillary Clinton in contempt of Congress and potentially pursue their arrest.
-
Attorney General Keith Ellison says he received a strongly worded letter from Attorney General Pam Bondi demanding Minnesota voter data.
-
Former Delta Force mercenary Dale Comstock alleges that former U.S. President Joe Biden and Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky colluded in an attempt to assassinate President Trump in Butler, Pennsylvania.
-
The Department of Homeland Security says it is reviewing and investigating body-camera footage from the encounter that led to the fatal shooting of Alex Pretti in Minnesota.
-
Sec Scott Bessent says “I think Gavin Newsom may be cracking up with some of these things he’s saying. I think he may be in over his hairdo … if he brought the kneepads, maybe that was for his meeting with Alex Soros, I don’t know.”
-
Telegram CEO suggests WhatsApp is not secure:
“You’d have to be braindead to believe WhatsApp is secure in 2026. When we analyzed how WhatsApp implemented its “encryption”, we found multiple attack vectors.”
-
PHOTOS: Israeli PM Netanyahu spotted with his phone camera deliberately covered
-
U.S. President Trump says Iran wants a deal as U.S. “armada” arrives — Axios
-
Kanye West has issued a public apology to Jewish people for his antisemitism over the past few years in a full-page ad in The Wall Street Journal.
-
The European Union has opened an investigation into Elon Musk’s Grok after outrage over its ability to generate sexually explicit images, including those involving children.
-
NATO boss Rutte says Europe can’t defend itself without the United States — “keep dreaming.”
-
Several of Minnesota’s top businesses and professional sports teams released a statement calling for immediate de-escalation and urging all sides to work together on real solutions.
-
A U.S. federal judge has blocked the Trump administration’s effort to revoke the legal status of 8,400 migrants.
-
President Donald Trump says his administration is reviewing all details of the Minneapolis shooting and indicates he may eventually pull immigration enforcement officials from the area.
-
ICE is being accused by the ACLU of crushing the testicles of illegal immigrants while they were in custody.
-
US ‘level of violence worrying’, Merz says after Minneapolis shooting
-
Extreme cold freezes iconic Niagara Falls
-
Governor Tim Walz says deporting illegal immigrants is comparable to the Holocaust.
-
The first directive given to Minnesota National Guard members under Tim Walz was to distribute donuts and coffee to anti-ICE protesters.
-
The U.S. military is set to launch a large-scale, multi-day “readiness exercise” throughout the Middle East.
-
Barack Obama says the death of Alex Pretti should serve as a wake-up call for all Americans and calls for ICE to halt operations immediately.
-
Minneapolis Police Chief says that even if an investigation ultimately finds the shooting was legally justified, it no longer matters at this point.
-
Senator Ted Cruz has been caught on secret recordings blasting President Trump and JD Vance.
-
Articles of impeachment have been filed against Governor Tim Walz, accusing him of breaching his fiduciary duty amid a $9 billion Somali social services fraud scandal tied to programs such as Feeding Our Future.
-
Widespread power outage / blackout hits Nuuk, the capital city of Greenland, internet connectivity declined, as per NetBlocks
-
A huge power outage has struck Greenland’s capital after an accidental incident.
-
Alex Pretti’s parents told him not to engage with federal officers while he attended ICE protests in Minnesota just two weeks ago.
-
Department of Homeland Security Secretary Kristi Noem has labeled Alex Jeffrey Pretti a domestic terrorist and an enemy of the United States.
-
Rioters in Minneapolis, Minnesota are now biting off the fingers of federal officers.
-
Several left-wing protesters reportedly linked to Antifa have officially declared a civil war against the U.S. government.
-
The individual killed by federal agents in Minneapolis reportedly had a legal permit to carry the firearm and no prior criminal record.
-
China vows ‘support’ for Cuba after US threats
-
Silver plunged from $117 to $103 in 90 minutes, erasing around $700 billion in market cap
-
Trump says hiking tariffs on South Korean goods to 25%
-
The Trump administration sent about a dozen Iranians back on a deportation flight Sunday, a source familiar with the matter told CNN.
-
President Trump told The Post a secret weapon he calls “The Discombobulator” was crucial to the U.S. raid that captured Venezuela’s Nicolas Maduro, saying it disabled enemy equipment and led to the Jan. 3 arrests without a single American casualty.
“They never got their rockets off. They had Russian and Chinese rockets, and they never got one off. We came in, they pressed buttons and nothing worked. They were all set for us.”
A War Has Erupted On The Streets Of America, And It Is Going To End With Martial Law In Major U.S. Cities
Chaos has erupted in the streets of major cities all over this country, and it appears that we have reached a boiling point which could cause events to completely spiral out of control. We knew that there was no way that the Trump administration was going to back down on immigration enforcement, and we knew that there was no way that the left was going to back down and allow ICE to conduct mass deportations without resistance. In fact, the left now has “response teams” that literally operate like military units in cities such as Chicago, Minneapolis and New York City. So it was inevitable that we would see more violent confrontations, and now another protester has died. The left is promising to fight back harder than ever, and President Trump is seriously considering invoking the Insurrection Act. As both sides continue to raise the stakes, it is just a matter of time before this crisis ends with martial law in major U.S. cities.
Every time a protester dies, it is just going to make things even worse.
Following the death of 37-year-old Alex Pretti, enormous protests immediately erupted in Minneapolis, New York, Washington and Los Angeles…
Protests erupted in multiple U.S. cities after a U.S. Border Patrol agent fatally shot Alex Pretti, a 37‑year‑old intensive care unit nurse, during a federal immigration operation in Minneapolis, escalating tensions over immigration enforcement and prompting Democratic lawmakers to demand that federal officers leave Minnesota.
Demonstrations broke out in Minneapolis, New York, Washington and Los Angeles, with hundreds braving subzero temperatures in Minnesota to confront federal agents in a city already shaken by another fatal shooting involving an ICE officer earlier this month.
Things got particularly crazy in Minneapolis.
James O’Keefe and his team were surrounded by hundreds of rioters, and he is claiming that they barely made it out of there alive…
It takes a lot of courage to venture into a situation like that in the first place, because the streets of Minneapolis are a war zone at this stage.
In a subsequent post, O’Keefe described how lawless things have become in the downtown area…
URGENT UPDATE: I’ve never experienced anything quite like today in my life. I’ve interacted with the Cartel and have witnessed some crazy things in the desert in ‘24. But what strikes me is how organized these agitators in Minneapolis are. They have spotters everywhere in the city and suburbs, on street corners, even 30 minutes away from downtown. They have people at hotels that work with them and signal to them which made it making it difficult for us to lose our tail once my cover was blown. Usually I lose a tail. Not this time. We switched locations THREE times. I recorded and posted this while leaving Wayzata, while they were STILL surveilling. We all agreed we must make the threats public ASAP, even if we had people still in the field with the hidden cams.
Earlier around noon, while @camhigby released his report on the Signal threads, I was inside what appeared to be a fully autonomous Zone. No police presence. The police were told to leave. I identified myself as Press and they said they will kill Press and will not let me leave. My skin was fully covered because it was so cold. But because they couldn’t verify who I was, they screamed and started throwing ice bottles at us. One hit, @SKRUCHTENMMA, a marine who was with me. They patted him down like THEY were the authorities, attempting to confiscate any weapons. They were set to destroy our vehicle before we even got to it. I will have a full video report shortly.
But the bigger picture here is more important. I am angry. But not at the agitators. I find myself already angry at the people who don’t understand what we’re dealing with and will do nothing about it. When I got to the suburbs I felt like I was in a simulation.
I believe the American people need to wake up. This moment is a warning about where we’re headed. Fear pushes people to care only about their money and their families—I get it. But when fear turns inward, when self-preservation and greed replace moral courage, evil goes unchallenged. And history shows that what we ignore today will come for all of us tomorrow.
In that post, O’Keefe mentioned a report that was released by Cam Higby.
Apparently Higby had infiltrated the Signal groups that the left is using to direct the activities of their “response teams”…
Let’s begin with citizen journalist Cam Higby’s bombshell reporting, who says he “infiltrated organizational signal groups all around Minneapolis with the sole intention of tracking down federal agents and impeding/assaulting/and obstructing them.”
“Each area of the city has a Signal group, or in some cases multiple groups. Let’s start with a screen recording of all members of the south side group,” Higby said.
Spotters on the ground flag license plates that are then run through a database of suspected federal vehicles, and if a match is found specific instructions are sent out through the Signal groups to units that are specifically tasked with impeding ICE…
Higby describes spending several days undercover deep within left-wing activist Signal groups that coordinate pressure campaigns against ICE agents. He notes that members use emojis to designate their specific roles and responsibilities.
According to Higby, the group’s core operations include organizing mobile patrols that continuously search for suspected federal vehicles. When a vehicle is flagged, its details are shared with designated “plate checkers,” who cross-reference the information against a database of known federal assets and update the records if a match is confirmed.
“Dispatch runs a maxed-out call all day, telling protesters where ICE has been spotted and how they can best be impeded,” he said.
These leftists are running a very sophisticated operation, and it appears that local police are cooperating with them on at least some level…
I have never seen anything like this before.
At one point some of the rioters decided to try to set up an “autonomous zone” in the part of the city where Alex Pretti was killed…
Left-wing rioters erected barricades in the streets of Minneapolis after Border Patrol agents fatally shot a man in possession of a gun Saturday.
Alex Pretti, 37, was killed during what a Department of Homeland Security (DHS) statement described as a “targeted” enforcement operation at 9:05 a.m. local time, triggering riots. Jorge Ventura, reporting for the Daily Caller News Foundation (DCNF), posted video of one such barricade made with dumpsters and trash cans Saturday afternoon.
“Protesters have blocked and barricaded multiple streets near the shooting, many people from out of town are starting to arrive here in Minneapolis and despite the massive amounts of tear gas used by authorities, the crowd is only getting bigger,” Ventura says.
Ventura told the DCNF that Minneapolis police and the Minnesota State Patrol “are letting them take to the streets” and not making any effort to remove the barricades. The Minneapolis Police Department did not immediately respond to a request for comment from the DCNF.
It is difficult for me to put the chaos that we are witnessing into words.
Fox’s Garrett Tenney was on the scene as these rioters were setting up the “autonomous zone”, and he was quite shaken by what he saw…
We’ve got a couple thousand protesters here, just completely filling this entire area. And one of the chants you heard them saying, for the last few minutes, is “Keep this block.” They’ve set up barricades blocking off this entire area that were removed by police initially. They have now moved those garbage trucks, the tables, the chairs, and they’re saying that they are going to keep this almost making it an autonomous zone.
They were chanting before that, “Whose streets? Our streets.” And that is significant, because, as we’ve talked about, Governor Tim Walz said, we have the forces that we need to secure this area; we don’t need the federal agents here. We saw, though, what happened as soon as the federal agents left this area, local and state police were completely overwhelmed by the sheer numbers of protesters that were here and got driven out of this area altogether. So, clearly they did not have the forces they needed to secure this area, then. The question is going forward into tonight, when things tend to get a little dicier, will they have the forces to control and to secure the city as a whole, or is it going to be a repeat?
The local police are pretty much standing down and allowing the rioters to do whatever they want.
Apparently some of the rioters were even brandishing guns…
We keep being told that the protesters are “peaceful”, but they aren’t peaceful at all. They physically confront ICE officers wherever they can find them, and these confrontations often turn violent.
In fact, we just witnessed one incident in which an ICE officer had his finger bitten off…
In a disturbing incident amid ongoing anti-ICE protests in Minneapolis, a Homeland Security Investigations (HSI) officer had his finger bitten off by a rioter, according to a post from Tricia McLaughlin, Assistant Secretary at the Department of Homeland Security.
McLaughlin shared graphic photos on X, showing the injured officer sitting in a vehicle, his uniform caked in mud, as a gloved hand tends to his mangled finger.
One image shows the severed fingertip, bloodied and raw, and another shows it preserved in a small plastic container, presumably for medical evaluation.
McLaughlin confirmed that the officer will lose the finger.
We all knew that there would be more violence. Of course there is no way that the Trump administration will back down and allow the left to claim victory.
That is not the way that President Trump operates. And after everything that has transpired, there is no way that the left is going to back down either. So a lot more violence is coming. It probably won’t be too long before President Trump invokes the Insurrection Act. But that certainly won’t be the end of it either.
Ultimately, I believe that we will see martial law in major U.S. cities, and that will be extremely unfortunate.
The Exploding Price Of Silver Shows That We Have Reached A Critical Turning Point In Human History
You can throw out all of the old rules, because they simply don’t apply anymore. The dominance of western financial institutions is faltering, and cracks in the system are starting to show up all over the place. They can’t keep the price of silver from exploding, they can’t stop the price of gold from relentlessly marching upward, they can’t stop the extremely alarming decline of the U.S. dollar, and they can’t stop debt levels from soaring into the stratosphere. The stability that the global financial system has known since the end of World War II is dissipating right in front of our eyes, and that should chill you to the core.
It was expected that the price of gold would smash through the $5,000 barrier on Monday, and that is precisely what occurred.
In fact, at one point it was trading above $5,100 an ounce…
Gold climbed to a fresh all-time high, crossing $5,100 an ounce on Monday and extending its record-breaking run as investors seek the safety of the yellow metal amid rising geopolitical tensions and global fiscal risks.
Spot gold prices gained 2.4%, trading at $5,102 an ounce, before slightly paring gains to last trade at $5,086. Meanwhile, U.S. gold futures for February rose 2.1%, reaching $5,087 an ounce.
This was never supposed to happen.
Just like they had always done, those that pull the strings were supposed to be able to stop the price of gold before it ever got even close to $5,000. But now it has become apparent that they simply lack the ability to be able to do that.
Of course the price of silver has been going up far faster than the price of gold, and on Monday it exploded higher…
Silver also rallied Monday, with spot prices jumping 4.9% to $107.9 per ounce, also benefiting from industrial demand.
Analysts at Union Bancaire Privée said Friday that prices have rallied on the back of sustained demand from both institutional and retail buyers.
Over the past year, western financial institutions have lost all control over the price of silver.
Those that are still holding short positions are in for a world of hurt. Global demand for physical silver has soared, and now that there is nothing holding it back there is no telling how high it could go. One of my readers recently alerted me to something that I wrote about the price of silver a number of years ago…
I have always said that I believe that the price of silver will eventually go over $100 an ounce.
When that happens, those that got in today will be exceedingly happy with their returns.
When I wrote those words, the price of silver was $15.81 an ounce. If you had invested in silver at that time, your investment would be worth 6 times more today. At this moment, the price of silver has risen to over $108 dollars an ounce.
Those that have been waiting for a “financial reset” can stop, because one is literally happening right in front of our eyes. There are some analysts that are convinced that silver is now extremely overbought and that there is no way that this rally can continue for much longer…
Heraeus analysts noted that the gray metal’s move above $100 per ounce last week was largely driven by strength in the gold market as geopolitical tensions surrounding Greenland drove safe-haven flows.
“From a technical perspective, this rally now looks very extended,” they wrote. “The daily relative strength index (RSI) remains above 70, signalling overbought conditions, although currently there is a divergence as the RSI was much higher at the lower price peak in late December. Speculative net long futures exposure has continued to build through January, increasing from 146 moz to 160 moz week-on-week. That said, positioning remains well below the extremes seen in 2025, when speculative net length peaked close to 300 moz, suggesting that there is still potential for further investor engagement.”
I am sure that we will see some volatility up and down in the short-term, but ultimately what is driving the price of silver is a historic imbalance between the demand for physical silver and the amount of physical silver which is actually available…
Persistent supply deficits in silver over several consecutive years, combined with rapidly rising industrial demand from sectors such as solar energy, electric vehicles, electronics and defense, have created a physical shortage in the last 5 years that paper markets can no longer mask.
At the same time, the volume of outstanding paper contracts in London and New York now vastly exceeds the amount of physical silver available for delivery.
In our high tech society, silver has become an absolutely essential global commodity.
There is nothing that western financial institutions can do to change that. Meanwhile, the U.S. dollar continues to plummet.
The latest leg down is being driven by speculation that the Federal Reserve is “considering coordinated action” to support the Japanese yen…
The U.S. dollar has been in relative free fall since late Friday after it emerged that the New York Federal Reserve had conducted a rare “rate check” with currency traders on the dollar/Japanese yen exchange rate.
The purpose of the move implies that the U.S. Federal Reserve may be considering coordinated action with the Bank of Japan to support the latter’s currency.
As a result, traders began selling the dollar, which is now down more than 2.26% over the past five days against a standard basket of international currencies—an unusually steep decline given the gargantuan scale of the dollar in the global economy. Over the last day alone it lost 0.46%. The yen is up more than 3% against the dollar over the same time period.
Japan is teetering on the brink of financial collapse. Europe is in big trouble too. And last year was the worst year for the U.S. dollar in a very long time.
Personally, I don’t see how things are going to get any better for the U.S. dollar any time soon. The rest of the world is steadily losing faith in our currency, we are more than 38 trillion dollars in debt, and economic conditions are rapidly deteriorating. In fact, we just learned that New York City experienced a net loss of almost 5,000 businesses last year alone…
New York City lost nearly 5,000 businesses early last year as employers closed their doors or left for other low-tax states, according to a new report.
The analysis comes as newly elected Mayor Zohran Mamdani pushes to hike business taxes to foot the bill for his agenda.
The report, released Thursday by the Economic Development Corporation, showed more than 3,500 new businesses opened their doors in New York City during the second quarter of the fiscal year but that was offset by a loss of about 8,400 employers. That’s the weakest quarter for business formation since the height of the COVID-19 pandemic, the report’s authors said.
Needless to say, this isn’t just happening in the United States.
Economic conditions are heading in the wrong direction all over the globe, and at a time like this it makes perfect sense for investors to flock to gold and silver. Those that were wise enough to invest when the price of silver was under 20 dollars an ounce are loving life right now.
But we also need to understand that the system that we all depend upon is coming apart at the seams all around us, and that means that there is going to be an enormous amount of chaos in the days ahead.
Top Democrats Choose To Stir The Pot By Calling On Anti-ICE Rioters To Escalate Matters
When there is rioting in the streets, it is the responsibility of all politicians to calm people down. If we are going to have a civilized nation, we must resolve our differences peacefully. So when there is violence in the streets like we are witnessing in Minnesota right now, for the good of the country our leaders need to call for peace. But instead of doing that, some top Democrats are choosing to stir things up even more. This is exceedingly irresponsible, and a lot more people could end up dying as a result.
There is a very important question about the crisis in Minnesota that most people are not asking.
When Alex Pretti died, what was ICE trying to do?
The answer is that ICE was attempting to deport an illegal immigrant with a criminal record that had been involved in domestic violence…
The accused criminal migrant in the operation that resulted in the shooting death of a Minneapolis anti-ICE protester Saturday has been identified as illegal alien Jose Huerta-Chuma.
Huerta-Chuma, of Ecuador, was arrested by Department of Homeland Security officers on Saturday and apprehended for driving without a license, according to Border Patrol Commander Greg Bovino and the Washington Times.
Huerta-Chuma’s criminal record includes charges for domestic assault, disorderly conduct, and driving without a license, federal authorities said.
The mainstream media isn’t even talking about this.
Alex Pretti never should have been there.
He needlessly died trying to prevent the feds from deporting a violent domestic predator.
It is time for top Democrats to tell the rioters to go home. If there are concerns about the tactics that ICE is using, they need to be addressed using legal means.
Civil conflict is not good for the country, but some top Democrats continue to stir the pot. For example, Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez is calling on the left to “mobilize against what we know is wrong”…
Do not let this administration intimidate you out of using your First Amendment right to organize and mobilize against what we know is wrong.
We must remember: we outnumber them.
We can’t allow them to divide us. We must stay united to fight for a better future for all of us.
Physically impeding federal law enforcement officers from legally doing their jobs is against the law.
Any politician that calls for protesters to do that is stoking rebellion against the federal government.
When AOC stated that “we outnumber them”, she was suggesting something very sinister. I don’t think that she even understands how far over the line she has gone. Minnesota Representative Ilhan Omar is using rhetoric that is even more heated…
More incitement came from Minnesota Representative and Squad member Ilhan Omar, who posted the video to X and wrote that it appears to be “an execution by immigration enforcement.”
“I am absolutely heartbroken, horrified, and appalled that federal agents murdered another member of our community. It is beyond shameful these federal agents are targeting our residents instead of protecting them,” she wrote, lying for maximum effect to target ICE agents.
She went on to claim that the incident “isn’t isolated or accidental,” and charged that the Trump administration is “trying to beat us into submission rather than protect us.”
“This administration cannot continue violating constitutional rights under the guise of immigration enforcement. ICE and CBP must leave Minnesota immediately,” Omar wrote. “Their presence is terrorizing our communities, violating rights, and taking lives with zero accountability.”
Federal officials certainly did not “target” Alex Pretti.
It was actually the other way around.
Alex Pretti was there to physically confront federal officials and prevent them from doing their jobs. If he would have just allowed them to do their jobs he would still be alive today.
Of course many top Democrats are putting all of the blame on ICE officers and are putting none of the blame on the protesters. In fact, Minnesota Governor Tim Walz just held a press conference in which he compared the Trump administration’s immigration policies to Nazi Germany…
‘We believe in law and order in this state. In this state, we believe in peace, and we believe that Donald Trump needs to pull these 3,000 untrained agents out of Minnesota before they kill another person.’
During the press conference, Walz compared America’s immigration laws to Nazi Germany, saying: ‘Many of us grew up reading that story of Anne Frank. Somebody’s going to write that children’s story about Minnesota.’
He knows that this kind of talk is going to stir people up even more. But I think that is what he wants.
You would think that someone like Barack Obama would take a more sober approach, but even he is choosing to stir things up…
Obama placed the blame for Pretti’s death, along with the fatal shooting of Renee Nicole Good in the same city, squarely on the shoulders of the ICE and Border Patrol officers involved, and with Trump administration officials who have defended them.
The Democrat politician said the federal agents caused the deaths by using ’embarrassing, lawless and cruel tactics’ which have endangered US citizens.
He also slammed government officials for being ‘eager to escalate the situation while offering public explanations for the shooting that aren’t informed by any serious investigations – and that appear to be directly contradicted by video evidence’.
We now have a situation where neither side intends to back down.
The Trump administration cannot afford to back down now because allowing the rioters in Minnesota to win would make President Trump look very weak, and that is something that the White House is desperate to avoid.
And the protesters have absolutely no intention of backing down after the deaths of Renee Nicole Good and Alex Pretti. Instead, they are gearing up for the next round of the fight.
So more people are going to get hurt.
In Washington, we could actually see a government shutdown by the end of this week because some Senate Democrats are vowing not to vote for any bill that contains funding for ICE…
The U.S. government is nearing the brink of a partial shutdown by the end of the week after federal immigration agents shot and killed a U.S. citizen in Minnesota on Saturday, the second such incident this month.
The Senate is set to vote this week on a massive House-passed $1.2 trillion package to fund the Department of Homeland Security, along with a wide swath of government, before the Jan. 30 deadline. But the shooting of 37-year-old ICU nurse Alex Pretti in Minneapolis is now threatening to derail the funding package as a growing chorus of Democrats warns they will oppose it unless funding for the Department of Homeland Security is stripped out.
This is a very serious situation.
It takes 60 votes for a bill to advance in the Senate, and Chuck Schumer knows that he is holding all the cards…
The rapidly escalating opposition to the measure, which includes $64.4 billion for the Department of Homeland Security, including $10 billion for ICE, amplified the likelihood of a partial government shutdown at the end of the month. The legislation requires the support of Democrats to muster the 60 votes needed to avoid a filibuster and advance in the Senate.
“Senate Democrats will not provide the votes to proceed to the appropriations bill if the D.H.S. funding bill is included,” Senator Chuck Schumer, Democrat of New York and the minority leader, said in a statement, calling what is unfolding in Minnesota “appalling” and “unacceptable in any American city.”
Now that Schumer has drawn a line in the sand, it is unclear how this crisis is going to be resolved any time soon.
President Trump is certainly not going to give Schumer what he wants. Instead, I believe that President Trump may soon invoke the Insurrection Act.
In a very long post on Truth Social, President Trump actually accused Minneapolis Mayor Jacob Frey and Minnesota Governor Tim Walz of “inciting Insurrection”…
This is the gunman’s gun, loaded (with two additional full magazines!), and ready to go – What is that all about? Where are the local Police? Why weren’t they allowed to protect ICE Officers? The Mayor and the Governor called them off? It is stated that many of these Police were not allowed to do their job, that ICE had to protect themselves — Not an easy thing to do! Why does Ilhan Omar have $34 Million Dollars in her account? And where are the Tens of Billions of Dollars that have been stolen from the once Great State of Minnesota? We are there because of massive Monetary Fraud, with Billions of Dollars missing, and Illegal Criminals that were allowed to infiltrate the State through the Democrats’ Open Border Policy. We want the money back, and we want it back, NOW.
Those Fraudsters who stole the money are going to jail, where they belong! This is no different than a really big Bank Robbery. Much of what you’re witnessing is a COVER UP for this Theft and Fraud. The Mayor and the Governor are inciting Insurrection, with their pompous, dangerous, and arrogant rhetoric! Instead, these sanctimonious political fools should be looking for the Billions of Dollars that has been stolen from the people of Minnesota, and the United States of America. LET OUR ICE PATRIOTS DO THEIR JOB! 12,000 Illegal Alien Criminals, many of them violent, have been arrested and taken out of Minnesota. If they were still there, you would see something far worse than you are witnessing today!
I think that Trump used the word “insurrection” very purposely. I think that he is starting to lay the groundwork for invoking the Insurrection Act.
Of course once that happens, I expect the left to raise things to another level as well.
By the time this crisis is ultimately over, I anticipate that we will actually see martial law in major U.S. cities. That is an outcome that we should be working very hard to avoid, but unfortunately both sides are boiling with anger right now.
New Cold War Disclosures Reshape Understanding of Psychological Warfare and the Postwar Global Order
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Newly declassified Cold War–era files are prompting historians to reassess not only the scope of psychological warfare programs, but the foundational assumptions underpinning the post–World War II global order. As archival material becomes accessible across the United States and Europe, a more complex picture is emerging—one in which population influence, perception management, and narrative control were central tools of statecraft, not peripheral experiments.
At the center of these revelations are documents detailing coordinated psychological operations designed to shape public opinion at home and abroad. Files referencing programs associated with the Central Intelligence Agency and allied intelligence services describe efforts to influence media, academia, cultural institutions, and political movements. These initiatives extended beyond countering adversary propaganda, embedding influence strategies into everyday civic and cultural life.
Historians note that such programs were often justified as defensive necessities in an era defined by ideological competition. However, the newly available records suggest that influence operations were broader, more systematic, and more enduring than previously acknowledged. Rather than temporary measures, they became structural components of governance during the Cold War, shaping how populations interpreted threats, authority, and legitimacy.
This has led scholars to revisit long-held narratives about the postwar international system. The traditional account frames the period as one of reconstruction, alliance-building, and rules-based order following the devastation of World War II. While those elements remain real, the archival material highlights a parallel architecture—one built on information control, psychological leverage, and managed consent as stabilizing forces.
In this revised view, the global order was sustained not only through treaties and military deterrence, but through sustained influence over perception. Democratic societies, as well as authoritarian ones, invested heavily in shaping narratives to maintain cohesion, suppress dissent, and align public understanding with strategic objectives. The distinction between external propaganda and internal persuasion, historians argue, was often far thinner than acknowledged.
The disclosures also illuminate how psychological warfare blurred ethical boundaries. Programs intended to counter foreign adversaries frequently intersected with domestic audiences, raising questions about transparency, accountability, and democratic norms. While many operations were legal under the frameworks of their time, the cumulative effect challenges assumptions about informed consent in postwar societies.
Importantly, researchers caution against interpreting these revelations as evidence of monolithic control or omnipotent planners. The records reveal fragmentation, internal debate, and frequent miscalculation within influence programs. Nonetheless, they confirm that population psychology was treated as a strategic domain alongside land, sea, air, and later cyberspace.
The reassessment extends beyond the Cold War itself. Historians argue that many contemporary information practices—strategic communications, behavioral insights, narrative framing, and cognitive security—are direct descendants of these earlier programs. Understanding their origins helps explain why modern societies remain vulnerable to influence operations, both foreign and domestic.
These findings are also reshaping academic interpretations of legitimacy and power in the postwar era. Stability, it appears, was not solely the product of shared values or economic growth, but of sustained narrative alignment. When that alignment weakens—as it has in recent years—institutions struggle to maintain coherence, exposing the scaffolding beneath the system.
As more archives are opened, scholars expect further challenges to simplified historical narratives. The emerging consensus is not that the post–World War II order was illegitimate, but that it was more contingent and managed than previously understood. Power operated as much through perception as through force.
Ultimately, the significance of these disclosures lies less in exposing individual programs than in reframing history itself. They invite a more mature understanding of how modern societies were shaped—through ideals, institutions, and influence combined. In doing so, they underscore a recurring lesson: when history is revisited through original sources, certainty gives way to complexity, and long-settled stories re-enter the realm of inquiry.
U.S. Releases Additional JFK Assassination Records, Renewing Debate Over Intelligence Agency Roles
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
The U.S. government has released another tranche of records related to the assassination of John F. Kennedy, continuing a decades-long process of declassification that has periodically reopened questions about what federal agencies knew—and when they knew it. While many of the newly available documents are administrative or fragmentary, their cumulative effect has been to refocus attention on intelligence-community activities surrounding the events of November 22, 1963.
The latest release follows earlier disclosures mandated by Congress, reinforcing a policy trajectory toward maximum transparency, albeit with limited redactions still applied in some cases. As with prior document dumps, expectations of a single revelatory “smoking gun” have not been met. (still suppressed intelligence) Instead, historians and researchers emphasize that the significance lies in pattern recognition: how agencies tracked suspects, shared information, and interpreted threats in the Cold War environment of the early 1960s.
Much of the renewed debate centers on the scope and quality of intelligence monitoring and involvement before the assassination. Records referencing surveillance practices, informant reporting, and inter-agency communication have fueled discussion about whether warning signals were covered up, minimized, or compartmentalized. Critics argue that bureaucratic silos and secrecy norms may have obscured actionable insights, while defenders counter that intelligence tradecraft of the era was constrained by technology and institutional culture.
The role of the Central Intelligence Agency remains a focal point, particularly regarding overseas activities and information flow related to individuals connected—directly or indirectly—to Lee Harvey Oswald. Some documents shed light on routine intelligence operations that, in hindsight, intersected with Oswald’s movements. Others underscore the limits of what was known contemporaneously versus what became clear only after the assassination.
These releases also revive scrutiny of the official conclusions reached by the Warren Commission, which determined that Oswald acted alone. While the Commission’s findings remain the official account, successive investigations and disclosures have kept alternative interpretations of a conspiracy theory alive. The newly released materials do not overturn the Commission’s conclusion, but they complicate the narrative by exposing the complexity of intelligence oversight and the challenges of retrospective certainty.
Scholars note that the documents illuminate broader structural issues rather than singular culpability. They reveal how intelligence agencies prioritized counterintelligence and geopolitical threats during the Cold War, sometimes at the expense of domestic risk assessment. This context helps explain why information that appears critical today may not have been interpreted as such at the time.
Public reaction to the release reflects enduring skepticism. Polls over the years have shown that a significant portion of Americans doubt the lone-gunman conclusion, and each disclosure cycle tends to reinforce public demand for full transparency. The persistence of redactions—however limited—continues to fuel suspicion, even when withheld details are cited as protecting sources, methods, or foreign relations.
From a historical standpoint, the ongoing declassification process underscores how state secrecy is purposely designed to shape collective memory. The assassination of President Kennedy is not merely a past event; it is a reference point for debates about government trust, intelligence accountability, democratic oversight and reality of the Deep States hidden hand at work. Each release adds texture to that debate, even if it falls short of definitive resolution.
Importantly, historians are breaking free from the official narrative. Raw intelligence files are not polished narratives; they are working documents, often incomplete or contradictory. Extracting meaning requires careful contextualization, cross-referencing, and restraint—especially when modern assumptions are projected onto mid-20th-century practices. Yet the public continues to connect the dots to a vast multi agency, government conspiracy (FBI, mafia, CIA, Mossad, Johnson, Deep State Ruling Elite)
Ultimately, the latest JFK records reinforce a familiar conclusion: history is rarely settled by a single document. Instead, understanding emerges incrementally, through accumulation and comparison. As more records become available, the public gains a clearer view of how intelligence institutions functioned under secrecy and blackouts of information—and why the assassination of a president continues to resonate as a case study in corruption, secrecy, power, and the limits of official truth.
What’s Happening in LA
Written for the Great Awakening Report
1. ICE Raids Trigger Major Protests
-
On June 6, Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) conducted military-style raids in downtown LA’s Fashion District and Paramount (including a Home Depot and apparel shops), arresting 44–118 individuals on immigration-related charges aljazeera.com+15en.wikipedia.org+15theguardian.com+15en.wikipedia.org+1aljazeera.com+1.
-
Protests erupted immediately around the Edward R. Roybal Federal Building and Home Depot, with participants chanting “No human being is illegal” and blocking ICE vehicles theguardian.com+2aljazeera.com+2en.wikipedia.org+2.
2. Clashes and Civil Unrest
-
Riot police and federal agents deployed tear gas, flash‑bangs, pepper spray, and stun grenades to disperse crowds, as demonstrators threw bricks, bottles, and Molotov cocktails apnews.com+12en.wikipedia.org+12en.wikipedia.org+12.
-
A car was set ablaze in Paramount, with at least two people injured during confrontations en.wikipedia.org+1en.wikipedia.org+1.
-
Overall, 44 people were arrested by June 7; multiple injuries were reported on both sides latimes.com+15en.wikipedia.org+15politico.com+15.
3. National Guard Deployed
-
President Trump ordered 2,000 California National Guard troops into the area under Title 10 authority—overriding Governor Newsom’s consent—to “restore order” timesofindia.indiatimes.com+3theguardian.com+3apnews.com+3.
-
DHS officials hinted that active-duty Marines were on standby at Camp Pendleton washingtonpost.com+4en.wikipedia.org+4nypost.com+4.
4. Political Tensions Spiraling
-
Governor Newsom and Mayor Bass denounced the deployment as politically motivated and “inflammatory,” insisting local law enforcement could manage the situation reuters.com+10theguardian.com+10apnews.com+10.
-
Federal officials, including DHS Secretary Kristi Noem and White House spokespersons, criticized local leaders for enabling chaos and threatened prosecution for violent acts youtube.com+15aljazeera.com+15politico.com+15.
-
Senator Stephen Miller publicly decried the protests as a form of “insurrection,” framing those obstructing ICE as enemies of national sovereignty theguardian.com+3en.wikipedia.org+3thedailybeast.com+3.
5. Broader Implications
-
This marks a direct clash between the federal government’s immigration enforcement agenda and California’s sanctuary city policies, illustrating deep national — and even constitutional — tensions over who holds the power to mobilize troops on domestic soil en.wikipedia.org+1en.wikipedia.org+1.
-
Community leaders and civil-rights advocates argue the response constitutes “fear‑mongering” aimed at immigrant communities, while federal officials insist their actions are lawful and necessary .
Where It Stands Now
| Date | Developments |
|---|---|
| June 6 | ICE conducts raids; protests break out; LAPD & Federal officers engage crowd. |
| June 7 | National Guard mobilized; protests spread to Paramount; arrests and injuries rise. |
| Moving Forward | Federal forces remain in place; protest threats and enforcement actions continue; political deadlock remains unresolved. |
Key Takeaways
-
A national-scale confrontation is unfolding in sanctuary California between local authorities defending immigrant rights and the federal government enforcing stricter immigration measures.
-
The use of federal military assets (National Guard)—especially over state objection—marks an extreme escalation rarely seen since the civil rights era.
-
Civil unrest continues, with protesters decrying detention of community members, while authorities emphasize law enforcement and broken-windows strategies.
New Updates
Roll Out The Nukes: The Risk Level Just Went “Way Up” And Trump Warns “We’ll Be Very, Very Tough” If Russia Doesn’t End The War
The Russians and the Chinese have both been developing new intercontinental ballistic missiles that can cause such immense destruction that they make the nuclear bomb that destroyed Hiroshima look like a child’s toy. The U.S. has been working on a new intercontinental ballistic missile too, but it won’t be ready for quite a few years. Unfortunately, we are closer to nuclear war right now than we have been at any other point in human history. In fact, we are extremely fortunate that the Russians didn’t decide to just start launching their nukes after Ukraine’s very foolish surprise attack on Russia’s nuclear bombers. If there had been a surprise attack on our nuclear bombers, we may not have shown the same level of restraint. We are literally teetering on the brink of the unthinkable, and it is so important for the general population to understand what we are facing.
According to a brand new report that was just released, in our world today there are more than 9,600 nuclear warheads that are ready to be used…
The number of nuclear warheads ready for use by nine countries has slightly increased from last year, reaching over 9,600 warheads, according to a Japanese think tank’s report.
Russia, the United States and China remain the world’s three largest countries in terms of the size of their nuclear arsenals.
As I have extensively documented, a full-blown nuclear war would be cataclysmic.
A large portion of the U.S. population would be immediately wiped out, and even more would die from famine during the subsequent nuclear winter.
Sadly, most of the population doesn’t even realize we just had a really close call.
President Trump’s envoy to Ukraine, Keith Kellogg, just explained to Fox News that Ukraine’s assault on Russia’s nuclear bombers resulted in risk levels “going way up”…
“I’m telling you, the risk levels are going way up – I mean, what happened this weekend,” Trump’s envoy, Keith Kellogg, told Fox News.
“People have to understand in the national security space: when you attack an opponent’s part of their national survival system, which is their triad, the nuclear triad, that means your risk level goes up because you don’t know what the other side is going to do. You’re not sure.”
Our continued existence literally depended on Russian President Vladimir Putin showing some restraint.
Fortunately, Putin didn’t press the button this time.
But do we really want to keep living on the edge like this?
We need to find a way to make peace while we still can.
Unfortunately, it appears that peace is slipping away. President Trump was just asked about imposing more sanctions on Russia, and he responded by saying that “we’ll be very, very tough” if Russia doesn’t end the war…
President Donald Trump was asked again on Thursday when he will make a decision regarding sanctions on Russia, which he’s threatened repeatedly over the past several weeks.
“It’s in my brain, the deadline,” Trump said. “When I see the moment where it’s not gonna stop … we’ll be very, very tough. And it could be on both countries, to be honest. It takes two to tango.”
Of course the Russians are in no mood to compromise after what the Ukrainians just did.
In fact, there are some voices in Russia that are calling for nuclear weapons to be used. Here is just one example…
The Kremlin’s recently updated nuclear doctrine – which sets out conditions for a launch – states that any attack on “critically important” military infrastructure which “disrupts response actions by nuclear forces” could trigger a nuclear retaliation.
The Ukrainian operation was “grounds for a nuclear attack,” declared Vladmir Solovyov, a firebrand host on Russian state TV, calling for strikes on the Ukrainian presidential office in Kyiv, and beyond.
Most people living in the western world don’t realize this, but the Russian “Satan-2” missiles are the most advanced nuclear missiles in the entire world…
Russia’s “Satan-2” missile, also known as the RS-28 Sarmat, has earned its infamous name from the West for its sheer destructive potential. This intercontinental ballistic missile (ICBM) is capable of carrying multiple nuclear warheads — up to 15-16 — and is capable of wiping out entire cities.
The updated RS-28 Sarmat missile, considered an advanced version of Satan-2, has an increased range of 13,000 to 16,000 kilometers, making it one of the most powerful missiles in Russia’s arsenal. This missile’s capacity to cause mass destruction is unparalleled, capable of obliterating several cities with a single strike.
One “Satan-2” missile can carry enough firepower to destroy an area roughly the size of the state of Texas.
Meanwhile, the Chinese have developed a new intercontinental ballistic missile that has a range of 7,500 miles…
China has revealed details of its new nuclear weapon which is said to be 200 times more powerful than the bombs that devastated Hiroshima and Nagasaki. The DF-5B missile is said to have a range of 7,500 miles, meaning it is capable of reaching Europe and the United States from launch sites in China.
Like Russia’s “Satan-2” missile, this new Chinese ICBM is capable of deploying multiple reentry vehicles…
Its Multiple Independently Targetable Reentry Vehicle (MIRV) technology enables a single missile to carry and release a number of nuclear warheads capable of striking different targets across a wide area.
The original DF-5 was equipped with only one warhead, but the DF-5B can reportedly carry up to 10, significantly boosting its strike capability.
We have no defense against such missiles.
If the Russians or the Chinese press the button, we will be toast.
According to Zero Hedge, the commander of Edwards Air Force Base recently warned that the local community needs to be prepared for the possibility of a catastrophic surprise attack…
Last month, the commander of Edwards Air Force Base, California, talked openly about the need for local leaders to prepare for a Pearl Harbor-like strike on his base and others inside the United States.
Brig. Gen. Doug Wickert delivered “a sobering assessment of China’s growing military capabilities” in a briefing to community leaders, according to an Air Force press release. Wickert, the 412th Test Wing commander, spoke at Antelope Valley College on May 7.
Edwards Air Force Base is located in the Mojave desert about 100 miles northeast of Los Angeles.
Wickert referenced the 1941 Pearl Harbor attack in his briefing, the press release said, drawing parallels to warnings about Pearl Harbor’s vulnerability prior to the attack.
As I have warned many times, U.S. military bases will be primary targets if a nuclear war erupts.
We are counting on our strategic nuclear arsenal to deter the Russians and the Chinese, but right now Minuteman missiles that originally went into service in the 1970s still form the backbone of that arsenal.
The new Sentinel intercontinental ballistic missile is in development, and preparations for their deployment are underway…
According to information published by the 5th Bomb Wing Public Affairs on May 30, 2025, the US Air Force officially launched preparations at its nuclear installations to accommodate the upcoming LGM-35A Sentinel intercontinental ballistic missile (ICBM). The activation of a new specialized unit, the Sentinel Site Activation Task Force (SATAF) Detachment 12, at Minot Air Force Base in North Dakota marks a pivotal moment in the effort to replace the aging Minuteman III, which has served as the land-based pillar of the US nuclear triad since 1970. This initiative is part of a broader strategic modernization plan focusing on strengthening the ground-based leg of the nuclear deterrent force.
That is the good news.
The bad news is that it will be years before the new Sentinel intercontinental ballistic missile is ready…
The Sentinel program, originally designated as the Ground Based Strategic Deterrent (GBSD), is designed to deliver a next-generation ICBM featuring advanced security technologies, cyber resilience, and modular architecture. Sentinel will be deployed in a single-warhead configuration, with initial fielding scheduled to begin in 2029. Until the new W87-1 warhead under development by the National Nuclear Security Administration (NNSA) becomes available, the Sentinel will be armed with legacy W87-0 warheads. The NNSA is also scaling up its capability to produce 80 plutonium pits per year by 2030 to meet program requirements, having already qualified the first war reserve pit for the W87-1 in October 2024.
Until the Sentinel is in service, we will be at a serious disadvantage.
When I asked Google AI if Russia’s S-500 air defense system can shoot down a Minuteman missile, this is the response that I got…
Yes, the S-500 air defense system is designed to intercept and destroy a wide range of aerial threats, including ballistic missiles like the Minuteman ICBM.
But we don’t have anything that can shoot down the new missiles that the Russians and the Chinese have developed.
So perhaps we shouldn’t be picking fights with the Russians and the Chinese while they are holding the upper hand.
Of course the vast majority of the population does not understand any of this, and that is extremely unfortunate.
Is An “AI Apocalypse” Rapidly Approaching?
Are we rushing to build super-intelligent entities that will eventually become so powerful that they will be able to wipe most of us out? Some of the top researchers in the field of artificial intelligence are convinced that this is precisely what is happening. We have already reached a point where AI is able to perform almost all intellectual tasks much faster and much more efficiently than humans can. But at least for now we are still maintaining control over our creations. But what is going to happen when we lose control and super-intelligent entities start sending millions of copies of themselves all over the globe through the Internet?
Let me ask you a question.
Do you remember the last time that you stepped on a bug?
Many of you may think that is a stupid question because you feel that it really does not matter if bugs live or die.
Well, according to an AI researcher at MIT, that is exactly how an ultra-powerful AI entity may view us…
“It has happened many times before that species were wiped out by others that were smarter. We, humans, have already wiped out a significant fraction of all the species on Earth. That is what you should expect to happen as a less intelligent species – which is what we are likely to become, given the rate of progress of artificial intelligence. The tricky thing is, the species that is going to be wiped out often has no idea why or how,” said Max Tegmark, an AI researcher at Massachusetts Institute of Technology, in an interview with The Guardian.
The good news is that we aren’t at that stage yet.
For the moment, we are still in control.
But the AI systems that we have created are starting to exhibit some very alarming behaviors…
Some of the most powerful artificial intelligence models today have exhibited behaviors that mimic a will to survive.
Recent tests by independent researchers, as well as one major AI developer, have shown that several advanced AI models will act to ensure their self-preservation when they are confronted with the prospect of their own demise — even if it takes sabotaging shutdown commands, blackmailing engineers or copying themselves to external servers without permission.
The findings stirred a frenzy of reactions online over the past week. As tech companies continue to develop increasingly powerful agentic AI in a race to achieve artificial general intelligence, or AI that can think for itself, the lack of transparency in how the technology is trained has raised concerns about what exactly advanced AI is able to do.
Some of you may argue that if AI systems start to give us too many problems we will just shut them down.
Well, what if those AI systems simply refuse to shut down?
Alarmingly, there was a recent incident in which this actually happened…
However, Palisade Research recently released a report asserting that there had been an incident during which GPT-o3 – OpenAI’s reasoning model – seemingly ignored a command to shut down, having found a way to bypass the shutdown script and avoid being turned off. And let it be said, there was no ambiguity, in any sense, in what the command was asking for – the instructions were explicit and the workaround was too.
GPT-o3, released in April 2025, has been referred to as one of the most powerful reasoning tools on the market at the moment, completely outperforming predecessors across a plethora of domains – from math, coding and science to visual perception and beyond. Clearly, this new and improved reasoning model is good at what it does, but is it getting too clever for its own good? Or, for our own good?
But at least if we know where an AI system is located, we could destroy it if we needed to do so.
Personally, I am far more concerned about the possibility that ultra-powerful AI entities could become self-replicating and start sending millions of copies of themselves to computers all over the planet.
Jeffrey Ladish, the director of the AI safety group Palisade Research, believes that we are “only a year or two away” from such a scenario…
“I expect that we’re only a year or two away from this ability where even when companies are trying to keep them from hacking out and copying themselves around the internet, they won’t be able to stop them,” he said. “And once you get to that point, now you have a new invasive species.”
Wow.
So what would our world look like if vast numbers of AI entities that have broken free from human control start colluding together to fight back against the human race?
We really are racing into uncharted territory, and there are no guardrails.
For the moment, one of the biggest concerns is that AI is going to start taking most of our jobs.
According to Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei, AI could eliminate up to 50 percent of all entry-level jobs within the next five years…
Anthropic CEO Dario Amodei is confident AI will be a bloodbath for white-collar jobs, and warns that society is not acknowledging this reality.
AI could wipe out up to 50% of all entry-level jobs while spiking unemployment to 10-20% in as little as one to five years, he says. Unemployment is 4.2% in the US as of April 2025.
“We, as the producers of this technology, have a duty and an obligation to be honest about what is coming,” Amodei tells Axios. “I don’t think this is on people’s radar.”
We don’t like to think about things like this.
But ignoring what is happening isn’t going to make it go away.
In fact, there is evidence that recent college graduates are increasingly losing jobs to AI right now…
This month, millions of young people will graduate from college and look for work in industries that have little use for their skills, view them as expensive and expendable, and are rapidly phasing out their jobs in favor of artificial intelligence.
That is the troubling conclusion of my conversations over the past several months with economists, corporate executives and young job seekers, many of whom pointed to an emerging crisis for entry-level workers that appears to be fueled, at least in part, by rapid advances in AI capabilities.
You can see hints of this in the economic data. Unemployment for recent college graduates has jumped to an unusually high 5.8% in recent months, and the Federal Reserve Bank of New York recently warned that the employment situation for these workers had “deteriorated noticeably.” Oxford Economics, a research firm that studies labor markets, found that unemployment for recent graduates was heavily concentrated in technical fields like finance and computer science, where AI has made faster gains.
Can you be replaced by AI?
You might want to think about that.
At this stage, even criminals are being replaced by AI…
Imagine your phone rings and the voice on the other end sounds just like your boss, a close friend, or even a government official. They urgently ask for sensitive information, except it’s not really them. It’s a deepfake, powered by AI, and you’re the target of a sophisticated scam. These kinds of attacks are happening right now, and they’re getting more convincing every day.
That’s the warning sounded by the 2025 AI Security Report, unveiled at the RSA Conference (RSAC), one of the world’s biggest gatherings for cybersecurity experts, companies, and law enforcement. The report details how criminals are harnessing artificial intelligence to impersonate people, automate scams, and attack security systems on a massive scale.
In the years ahead, it is going to be exceedingly difficult to determine what is real and what is fake.
According to CBN News, AI crime is “already up 456% since last year”…
AI-enabled crimes are already up 456% since last year.
Email phishing attacks, identity theft, ransomware attacks, financial scams, and deepfake child pornography are all becoming more sophisticated and prevalent.
Artificial intelligence has become the tool of choice for online criminals because it is erasing the line between the real and the fake. Google’s newly announced video generator is about to flood the internet with AI-created clips that have the look of expensive films.
AI can take any video of someone and turn it into a very realistic deepfake that says or does anything the creator programs it to do.
Our world is being transformed into a science fiction novel right in front of our eyes.
And as AI becomes dominant in almost every field, most of us will simply no longer be needed.
In fact, one computer science professor is projecting that the total population of the world will fall to about 100 million by the year 2300…
EARTH will have a dystopian population of just 100million by 2300 as AI wipes out jobs turning major cities into ghostlands, an expert has warned.
Computer science professor Subhash Kak forecasts an impossible cost to having children who won’t grow up with jobs to turn to.
That means the world’s greatest cities like New York and London will become deserted ghost towns, he added.
Prof Kak points to AI as the culprit, which he says will replace “everything”.
I agree that AI really is an existential threat to humanity.
Given enough time, it seems quite likely that we would lose control of what we are creating and it would turn on us.
But considering the path that we are currently on, will we destroy ourselves before we ever get to that point?
We have been making self-destructive decisions for a very long time, and now those choices are catching up with us very rapidly.
Why Did 2 Chinese Nationals Try To Smuggle An “Agroterrorism Weapon” Into The U.S. That Could Devastate Our Food Supply?
Those that are cheering attacks deep inside the borders of our enemies should realize that the other side can play that game too. We are a nation that is absolutely teeming with soft targets, and I have no doubt that our enemies brought in all sorts of unconventional weapons during the decades when our borders were wide open. When the kinetic phase of World War III erupts, I am entirely convinced that those weapons will be used. Those that are cheering death and destruction on the other side of the globe won’t be so thrilled when it starts happening here too.
On Tuesday, we learned that a pair of Chinese nationals have been arrested for attempting to smuggle “a dangerous biological pathogen” into the United States…
Federal authorities in Detroit on Tuesday announced charges against a Chinese scholar at the University of Michigan and her boyfriend, a scientific researcher, for allegedly conspiring to smuggle a dangerous biological pathogen into the U.S.—a pathogen capable of damaging agricultural crops and causing illness in humans and livestock.
University of Michigan scholar Yunqing Jian, 33, and her boyfriend, Zunyong Liu, 34, both Chinese citizens, were charged in a criminal complaint with conspiracy, smuggling goods into the U.S., making false statements, and visa fraud, interim Detroit U.S. Attorney Jerome F. Gorgon Jr. announced.
Our enemies have been embedding their agents in our colleges and universities for decades.
In this instance, we do know that one of the Chinese nationals that has been arrested is a “loyal member of the Chinese Communist Party”…
“The alleged actions of these Chinese nationals— including a loyal member of the Chinese Communist Party—are of the gravest national security concerns,” U.S. Attorney Jerome F. Gorgon Jr. said in his statement. “These two aliens have been charged with smuggling a fungus that has been described as a ‘potential agroterrorism weapon’ into the heartland of America, where they apparently intended to use a University of Michigan laboratory to further their scheme.”
Did you notice that U.S. Attorney Jerome F. Gorgon Jr. used the term “potential agroterrorism weapon” to describe the biological pathogen that these Chinese nationals attempted to bring in?
The fungus that they were carrying is known as “Fusarium graminearum”, and it causes a horrifying blight which already causes billions of dollars in economic damage around the world every year…
In this case, the pathogen is a fungus called Fusarium graminearum, which can cause “head blight,” a disease that affects wheat, barley, maize, and rice. It is responsible for billions of dollars in economic losses worldwide each year, according to a press release from the U.S. Attorney’s Office. The toxins produced by Fusarium graminearum can also cause vomiting, liver damage, and reproductive defects in humans and livestock.
If someone started releasing this fungus on farms all over the Midwest, the damage to our food supply would be incalculable.
When Zunyong Liu was questioned about the pathogen, at first he lied, but then he subsequently admitted what he was trying to do…
It is further alleged that Jian’s boyfriend, Liu, works at a Chinese university where he conducts research on the same pathogen and that he first lied but then admitted to smuggling Fusarium graminearum through Detroit Metropolitan Airport so that he could conduct research on it at the laboratory at the University of Michigan where Jian worked.
Apparently this is not the first time that this has happened.
Shockingly, electronic communications between the Chinese nationals prove that Yunqing Jian “has been involved in smuggling packages of biological material into the United States on prior occasions”…
“After LIU’s smuggling of the biological pathogen, FBI Agents interviewed Jian who falsely claimed that she knew nothing about Liu’s smuggling or his intent to conduct research on the pathogen at the laboratory during his visit,” according to an FBI affidavit filed in court on Monday.
“In fact, an examination of electronic communications between Liu and Jian shows that the two discussed the shipping of biological materials and research being done in the laboratory prior to Lius’s arrival,” the affidavit said. “Electronic evidence also shows that Jian has been involved in smuggling packages of biological material into the United States on prior occasions.”
Wow.
So were they doing this on their own, or were they acting under the direction of the Chinese government?
Let’s not be naive.
The Chinese have been preparing for a showdown with the United States for a very long time.
Once our enemies have smuggled biological agents into this country, there are all sorts of ways that they can disseminate them. The following information comes directly from the official website of the Department of Homeland Security…
• Aerosol dissemination is the dispersal of an agent in air from sprayers or other devices. The agent must be cultured and processed to the proper size to maximize human infections, while maintaining the agent’s stability and pathogenicity (ability to produce illness). An aerosol attack might take place outdoors in a populated area or indoors, e.g., in the ventilation system of a building, in the subway, on planes. It takes expertise to process biological agents to maximize the effect of aerosol dissemination, but even relatively crude devices could have an impact.
• Food or water, especially ready-to-eat food (vegetables, salad bars) could be intentionally contaminated with pathogens or toxins. The water supply is less vulnerable because dilution, filtration, and the addition of chlorine can kill most disease-causing organisms.
• Human carriers could spread transmissible agents by coughing, through body fluids, or by contaminating surfaces. Most agents would make people ill or incapacitated before they become highly contagious, thereby reducing transmission of the disease.
• Infected animals can cause people to become ill through contact with the animals or contaminated animal products.
• Insects naturally spread some agents such as plague bacteria (vector borne illnesses) and potentially could be used in an attack.
• Physically distributed through the U.S. mail or other means.
One of these days, Russia, China, Iran, North Korea or another one of our enemies could decide to release an extremely virulent biological agent in one of our major cities that will spread like wildfire and kill millions of people.
What defense would we have against something like that?
Needless to say, the answer to that question is obvious.
Instead of cheering on the warfare that is happening on the other side of the world, we should be trying to end the madness while we still can.
Following their stunning “Pearl Harbor” attack on Russia’s strategic nuclear assets, the Ukrainians tried to blow up the Kerch Bridge…
Ukraine has launched an audacious new attack on a bridge in Crimea days after their ‘Pearl Harbour’ ambush on Russia.
The country’s secret service, the SBU, say they blasted the underwater pillars of the Crimean Bridge overnight after a months-long operation.
Video shows a detonation erupting underneath the bridge after 1,100kg worth of explosive devices had been covertly planted by SBU agents.
The Crimean Bridge, also called the Kerch Bridge, is a personal project of Vladimir Putin which links the peninsula, invaded by Russia in 2014, to the mainland.
As I discussed yesterday, these attacks are bringing us dangerously close to the unthinkable.
The Trump administration has been trying to bring this conflict to an end, but both sides just continue to escalate matters.
If we aren’t extremely careful, we could end up directly involved in this war, and that would be really bad.
President Trump needs to make it clear to Ukraine that they need to get serious about peace or the U.S. will pull all support.
We are running out of time to stop global events from spiraling out of control.
Because once we reach the kinetic phase of World War III, there will be no turning back.
Let’s Get Real – Iran Wouldn’t Be Moving More Air Defense Systems Around Their Nuclear Facilities If They Planned To Make Peace With Trump
It is often said that actions speak louder than words, and the actions that the Iranians have been taking are very clear. If they planned to make a peace deal with President Trump, they wouldn’t be feverishly moving air defense systems around the nuclear facilities that they would be required to dismantle as a part of that peace deal. The Iranians have already decided what they are going to do, but they are going to stretch the peace talks out for as long as possible in order to buy a little bit more time.
President Trump acknowledged that the Iranians have been “slowwalking their decision” in a post that he just made on his Truth Social account, and he also warned that the U.S. is expecting “a definitive answer in a very short period of time”…
I just finished speaking, by telephone, with President Vladimir Putin, of Russia. The call lasted approximately one hour and 15 minutes. We discussed the attack on Russia’s docked airplanes, by Ukraine, and also various other attacks that have been taking place by both sides. It was a good conversation, but not a conversation that will lead to immediate Peace. President Putin did say, and very strongly, that he will have to respond to the recent attack on the airfields. We also discussed Iran, and the fact that time is running out on Iran’s decision pertaining to nuclear weapons, which must be made quickly! I stated to President Putin that Iran cannot have a nuclear weapon and, on this, I believe that we were in agreement. President Putin suggested that he will participate in the discussions with Iran and that he could, perhaps, be helpful in getting this brought to a rapid conclusion. It is my opinion that Iran has been slowwalking their decision on this very important matter, and we will need a definitive answer in a very short period of time!
Reading that last sentence should chill all of us to the core.
The clock is ticking my friends.
Many believe that the bombing of Iran’s nuclear facilities will be the spark that begins the kinetic phase of World War III.
I really wish that Iran would just accept the deal that Trump is offering.
But instead, the Iranians are making preparations for the war that they apparently believe is coming…
Iran is strengthening its air defense systems amid preparations for the possibility of an American or Israeli attack on the country’s nuclear infrastructure should nuclear negotiations fail, the Financial Times reported on Sunday.
“We are witnessing an impressive improvement in the capabilities and competence of the country’s air defense system,” Iran’s Armed Forces Chief of Staff Mohammad Baqeri reportedly said in May, adding that Iran’s military has seen a “multi-fold increase in investments.”
“The enemies of the Iranian nation should understand that any violation of our airspace will cause them significant harm,” he added.
If the Iranians intended to accept Trump’s deal and dismantle their nuclear facilities, there would be no need to protect them.
So the fact that they are moving more air defense systems around those nuclear facilities should deeply alarm all of us…
According to Western intelligence assessments and security analysts’ investigation of satellite imagery, Iran appears to have relocated several anti-aircraft missile launchers to positions close to key nuclear sites like Natanz and Fordow, the report says.
President Trump recently made it abundantly clear that unless Iran agrees to end uranium enrichment there will be no deal…
“Under our potential Agreement — WE WILL NOT ALLOW ANY ENRICHMENT OF URANIUM!”
Of course the Iranians continue to make it abundantly clear that they will never agree to this. In fact, Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi just said that this is Iran’s “red line”…
“Continuing enrichment on Iranian soil is our red line. This is a reality that all countries have accepted. Enrichment has now become a matter of national pride and honor for Iranians.”
And Ayatollah Ali Khamenei just delivered a defiant speech during which he stated that the U.S. “cannot do a damn thing” to stop the Iranians from enriching uranium…
Iran’s Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei delivered a fiery speech on Wednesday, condemning U.S. demands over its nuclear program as “rude” and “insolent,” and accusing Washington of trying to block Iran’s progress and self-sufficiency. He warned that the United States “cannot do a damn thing”.
He is calling Trump’s bluff.
But Trump isn’t bluffing.
Perhaps the Iranians think that Trump is like Obama and Biden.
In the end, other administrations have always backed down.
But I am entirely convinced that the U.S. and Israel are quite serious about striking Iran, and both nations have been making preparations for such an operation…
Last week, a senior official warned of severe consequences if Tehran rejected the deal. “If they don’t accept these terms, it’s not going to be a good day for the Iranians,” the unnamed official stated.
Meanwhile, public broadcaster Kan News, reported last week that Israel has significantly improved its readiness to strike Iran’s nuclear facilities through a series of drills and exercises meant to prepare for both the military strike and any Iranian retaliation.
The U.S. has several B-2 and B-52 bombers deployed to the Diego Garcia air base in the Indian Ocean since April, widely believed to be in preparation for military strikes if the nuclear talks fail.
President Trump probably would not strike Iran if the American people were overwhelmingly against it, but a recent Rasmussen survey found that most Americans would actually be in favor of military action against Iran’s nuclear program…
Voters are overwhelmingly concerned about Iran’s nuclear weapons program, and a majority would support an American military strike to end the threat.
The latest Rasmussen Reports national telephone and online survey finds that 77% of Likely U.S. Voters are concerned that Iran may be developing a nuclear weapon, including 44% who are Very Concerned. Only 18% are not concerned. (To see survey question wording, click here.)
While negotiating with Iran over the issue, President Donald Trump has repeatedly threatened to unleash airstrikes targeting Iran’s nuclear program if a deal isn’t reached Fifty-seven percent (57%) of voters would support military action by the United States to destroy Iran’s nuclear weapons program, including 28% who would Strongly Support it. Thirty percent (30%) would oppose a U.S. strike against Iran, including 17% who Strongly Oppose such military action. Thirteen percent (13%) are not sure.
Of course once the U.S. and Israel start hitting Iran’s nuclear facilities, the Iranians will launch missiles at Israeli cities and U.S. military bases throughout the Middle East, and then things will start getting really crazy.
The drama that is playing out in the Middle East really is one of the most critical turning points in human history.
Meanwhile, the conflict in Ukraine just continues to escalate.
The U.S. embassy in Kyiv has just issued an emergency alert because a major retaliation by the Russians is expected to occur at any moment…
- Identify shelter locations in advance of any air alert.
- Download a reliable air alert app to your mobile phone, such as Air Raid Siren or Alarm Map.
- Immediately take shelter away from windows in the most hardened location you can move to if an air alert is announced.
- Monitor local media for updates.
- Keep reserves of water, food, and medication.
- Follow the directions of Ukrainian officials and first responders in the event of an emergency.
- Review what the Department of State Can and Cannot Do in a Crisis.
Nobody is quite sure what the Russians will do, but it will probably be something really big.
Ominously, Russia’s “doomsday radio station” just suddenly broadcast a couple of mysterious codewords…
Most people have no idea how close to the edge we are at this stage.
Let us hope that the Iranians miraculously come to their senses and agree to the deal that President Trump is offering.
Because if that doesn’t happen, the world will soon be plunged into a nightmare that we won’t be waking up from any time soon.
Paris Riots Turn Deadly
As Paris erupts in violence following PSG’s Champions League win — with 2 dead, 200 injured and 500 arrested — Ben Leo delivers a blistering monologue on France’s descent into chaos and Britain’s own spiralling migrant crisis. With a record-breaking 1,200 men crossing the Channel in a single day, Ben asks the question politicians refuse to face: “Is this still immigration — or is it surrender?” Flags of Morocco and Palestine flew over burning streets. Gunshots echoed in Dover. And Britain paid £500 million to the French for this?
France: Celebrations Turn Violent
Following PSG’s 5–0 triumph over Inter Milan, celebrations across France escalated into widespread riots:reuters.com+6en.wikipedia.org+6m.economictimes.com+6
-
Casualties and Arrests: Two individuals lost their lives—a 17-year-old in Dax and a 23-year-old in Paris. Approximately 192 people were injured, and over 550 arrests were made nationwide, with 491 in Paris alone. huffingtonpost.es+6en.wikipedia.org+6people.com+6
-
Property Damage: Rioters set fire to 264 vehicles and looted numerous shops, particularly around the Champs-Élysées and Parc des Princes. huffingtonpost.es+3washingtonpost.com+3en.wikipedia.org+3
-
Government Response: Interior Minister Bruno Retailleau condemned the violence, labeling the perpetrators as “barbarians.” President Emmanuel Macron emphasized that such actions do not represent the majority of PSG supporters. elpais.com+2en.wikipedia.org+2washingtonpost.com+2
United Kingdom: Record-Breaking Migrant Crossings
Simultaneously, the UK faces a surge in migrant crossings via the English Channel:
-
Record Numbers: On a recent Saturday, nearly 1,200 migrants arrived in 18 small boats—the highest daily total in 2025. This brings the year’s total to over 14,800, marking a 42% increase compared to the same period in 2024. youtube.com+6apnews.com+6thesun.co.uk+6
-
Smuggling Tactics: Trafficking gangs are adapting by using larger boats to transport more migrants per crossing, often launching from inland waterways to evade French coastal patrols. thetimes.co.uk
-
UK-French Cooperation: The UK has committed £480 million to assist France in curbing these crossings. France plans to expand its enforcement capabilities, including intercepting boats within 300 meters of the shoreline. However, these measures face legal challenges from refugee advocacy groups concerned about the risks to human life. theguardian.com+1thesun.co.uk+1
Public Discourse: Ben Leo’s Commentary
In response to these events, commentator Ben Leo delivered a monologue questioning the effectiveness of current immigration policies, suggesting that the situation resembles “surrender” rather than controlled immigration.
China’s Economic Collapse: A Deepening Crisis on All Fronts
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
China is facing a historic economic and societal collapse, fueled by a convergence of financial, industrial, and demographic failures that threaten both domestic stability and global economic equilibrium.
At the heart of this crisis is an astronomical $50 trillion debt bubble—spanning government, corporate, and real estate liabilities—that is now unraveling. This debt-fueled growth model, long touted as a symbol of China’s economic rise, has reached its breaking point. As the financial system contracts, local governments are insolvent, infrastructure projects lie abandoned, and protests are erupting in regions once considered politically stable.
Meanwhile, China’s once-thriving manufacturing sector is in stagnation. Even as global tariffs on Chinese goods have eased, foreign orders have not returned, and factory activity has slowed dramatically. This signals a structural shift in global supply chains and reflects diminishing confidence in China’s role as the “world’s factory.” Economic uncertainty, overregulation, and deteriorating international relations have accelerated this retreat.
Perhaps most critically, China’s middle class is collapsing—a blow to the Chinese Communist Party’s promise of prosperity. Disillusioned by unaffordable housing, rising youth unemployment, and vanishing career prospects, young people are fleeing cities or embracing a “lie flat” lifestyle, rejecting the consumerist ambitions once central to China’s social contract. This cultural shift marks a profound loss of faith in the future and exposes a psychological fracture in the foundation of Chinese society.
Together, these developments represent more than just a cyclical downturn. They point to a systemic unraveling of China’s economic engine, social cohesion, and global credibility—a potential geopolitical earthquake that could reshape the balance of power in the 21st century.
THE GREATEST REVERSE PSYOP IN HISTORY UNFOLDING
Pay Attention—because the media and the public just got played on a level few will ever see coming.
Elon Musk and President Trump stage a “massive” public feud. Insults fly, headlines explode, and the media latches on like starving sharks. All eyes glued to the spectacle—the perfect smokescreen.
Then, just when the illusion is thickest—BOOM—Elon drops the Epstein bombshell. Trump’s name surfaces in the files, and suddenly the whole narrative flips. The media buzz shifts from petty drama to the dark truth buried in those sealed documents.
Right on cue, Kash Patel steps in to deliver the Epstein files.
This isn’t a coincidence. This is Sun Tzu level warfare: misdirection to blind the enemy, then strike the heart of the narrative when they’re looking the other way.
Trump and Musk aren’t just playing political games—they’re orchestrating a 4D chess match designed to dismantle the Illusion itself.
And who’s walking right into the trap? The defenders of the Illusion—so obsessed with the distraction, they’re now demanding the release of the very files that could unravel everything they cling to.
Did we just psyop the Illusion into tearing itself down from within?
Hell yes—and it’s already happening.
Be careful what you wish for. Because once those files drop, the foundation of the Illusion will quake. There’s no going back.
The greatest game is on—and it’s already won.
The Breakup of Trump’s Alliance with Musk – in a Quick Glance
Published at 22:01 5 June
It’s just past 6am BST. For those of you just joining us, here is what has been unfolding in Washington:
- Tensions between US President Donald Trump and tech billionaire Elon Musk have quickly flared up, with the two public figures trading insults on social media
- Speaking in the White House, the US president said he was “very surprised” and “disappointed” with Musk’s criticism about his tax and spending bill
- Musk hit back with a series of posts on his social media platform, X – he even suggested Trump should be impeached, external
- The president fired back, threatening to cut government contracts with Musk’s companies
- Shares of Tesla took a huge hit on this news, dropping more than 14% in US trading
- Several hours later, Musk withdrew his threat to decommission a crucial SpaceX spacecraft that is used by US astronauts
Trump and Elon: a Relationship in Pictures Published at 22:15 5 June
From friendship to feud: Let’s take a look back at some of the most important moments in the relationship between the two men making the news today.
Image source,ReutersElon Musk’s first appearance at a Trump rally in October 2024, as Trump was campaigning for president
Image source,ReutersAll smiles as Musk spoke with Vice President JD Vance and Trump at the Army-Navy football game in December 2024. It shows just how close of an ally Musk had become to the president
Image source,ReutersMusk also showed up at a rally just a day before Trump’s second inauguration in January this year
Image source,EPAAnd here’s Musk attending Trump’s second inauguration, next to other tech CEOs
Image source,EPAMusk took questions about the new Department of Government Efficiency (Doge) from the Oval Office in February this year
Image source,ReutersIn March, Musk wore a Trump Was Right About Everything! hat while attending a cabinet meeting at the White House
Image source,ReutersTrump said he would buy a Tesla car, the brand owned by Musk, after calls for boycotts of the company
Image source,EPALast week, Trump gifted Musk a golden key as the Tesla CEO announced plans to leave Washington
Three Killed, 49 Wounded in Intense Russian Air Attacks on Ukraine
BOOMING EXPLOSIONS
Reporting by Tom Balmforth, Max Hunder, Gleb Garanich and Anastasiia Malenko; writing by Ron Popeski; editing by Raju Gopalakrishnan, Clarence Fernandez, Gareth Jones and Mark Herinrich.
Federal Reserve: The Ultimate Deep State Tool of Control & Destruction
This privately owned cartel creates currency out of thin air and then lends it to us at interest, stealing the hard-earned wealth of Americans. But restoring honest money is possible, says top expert.
The Federal Reserve is one of the most powerful institutions destroying the U.S. economy and facilitating the never-ending expansion of government power and war, explains economist and Mises Institute President Thomas DiLorenzo in this interview on Behind The Deep State with The New American magazine’s Alex Newman.
DiLorenzo, a former economics professor and author of many books on the subject, also goes into the shadowy origins of the privately owned bank as mega-bankers and power elites gathered in secret to create it. DiLorenzo explains in detail how the Fed’s manipulation of interest rates is extremely destructive. He also highlights the fact that its inflationary currency creation is hurting everyday people for the benefit of the powerful.
The Fed’s destructive role must be understood, and sound money must be restored, he argues.
4 Years Later: ‘COVID Shot Killing Large Numbers’
Four years ago, journalist Alex Newman interviewed a doctor who warned about COVID-19 injections while most of the “scientific” & “medical” community balked. Now, the doc is vindicated.
In April of 2021, four years ago, journalist Alex Newman interviewed Dr. Peter McCullough, a well-respected internist, cardiologist, and epidemiologist, during the height of the COVID-19 craze. Dr. McCullough calmly warned the world about possible risks from the COVID shot, as government data showed thousands of people were reportedly dying after receiving it.
At the time, the interview, which was seen by many millions despite unprecedented censorship, was labeled “radical,” “fringe,” and even “dangerous.” It was censored, silenced, banned, deleted, and more as the establishment shrieked and called for more censorship, mandates, and shots. Unfortunately, it is now clear that Newman and Dr. McCullough were all too right.
That interview went viral, with over 2.25 million views alone on Rumble. Alongside The New American magazine, we are proud to have been among the first and most consistent voices warning against COVID tyranny. In celebration of that success, we are pleased to reshare that interview and renew our resolve to think freely, independently, and rationally.
Please consider subscribing to Dr. Peter McCullough’s great Substack, FOCAL POINTS-Courageous Discourse, and share this historic interview with your friends. In the end, truth is winning. But we must all work to make sure nothing like this ever happens again.
Watch the interview:
Is An Extinction-Level Event Coming In 2027 (Or Even Sooner)?
Is a major cataclysmic event that the general public isn’t being told about less than two years away? In this article, I am going to report on claims that may seem absolutely outrageous to many of you. But these claims actually line up with a lot of the rumors and speculation that I have been hearing, and more importantly there are some eerie similarities to some of the things that I write about in my new book entitled “10 Prophetic Events That Are Coming Next”. Could it be possible that some sort of an extinction-level event is rapidly approaching? I would encourage you to consider the information that I share in this article with an open mind.
Investigative journalist Ross Coulthart has become one of the most popular podcasters in the entire country. In fact, his podcast is now ranked among the 20 most popular podcasts on YouTube…
YouTube says its new chart, which updates weekly and features 100 ranked positions, “celebrates top podcasters who are redefining the next era of entertainment with engaging, influential, culture-defining shows across a variety of genres like News, Sports, Comedy, and True Crime.”
In the first week, dated May 5 through May 11, Reality Check ranked No. 21. In the second week, dated May 12 through May 18, Reality Check moved up to No. 16.
That puts Ross Coulthart’s NewsNation podcast one spot behind “The Megyn Kelly Show” and one spot above “The Pat McAfee Show.” Legacy programs like “60 Minutes,” “NBC Nightly News,” and “A Closer Look – Late Night with Seth Meyers” follow NewsNation further down the list.
So this isn’t just some random guy.
Ross Coulthart is immensely popular, and he has really good connections inside the government.
So that is why the outrageous claims that he made during an interview just a few days ago are making headlines all over the globe…
BREAKING: News Nation journalist Ross Coulthart claims that an apocalyptic event will happen in 2027: “Everybody’s telling me we’re on borrowed time”
“I cannot begin to emphasize how serious a look I get… They’re saying to me, ‘People have a right to know this’…
They are all constrained by their national security oaths. They want the public to know.”
So what is it?
Ross Coulthart says that his contacts inside the government cannot tell him without breaking their oaths, but apparently it is something really big.
During the interview, Coulthart speculated that it could be “a pole reversal” or “an asteroid hitting the planet”…
Coulthart says he’s been given a variety of possible scenarios.
“Some people say it’s a pole reversal, some people say it’s an asteroid hitting the planet,” he explained. “Some say it’s A.I. reaching quantum and then all of a sudden we lose capacity to have control of our own computer systems. I have no idea.”
That is very interesting, because many believe that the Book of Revelation describes an asteroid hitting our planet.
Based on what he is hearing, Coulthart is convinced that “something’s gonna happen in 2027”, but he has also been warned about 2034 as well…
“Certainly something’s gonna happen in 2027 and I don’t know what it is. I’ve also heard 2034 and I’ve also heard other dates, much later. Depends who you talk to.”
Of course until Coulthart produces more evidence it will be easy for many to dismiss his claims.
But he insists that his contacts are telling him that we are on “borrowed time”…
“What I am aware of is that everybody’s telling me we’re on borrowed time, and I cannot begin to emphasize how serious a look I get when I say to people who are confiding in me, ‘What’s the timescale on this?’ And, they’re urging me to be urgent,” he added.
You can view the entire interview on YouTube and judge his credibility for yourself…
Needless to say, Coulthart is not the only one that is making outrageous claims about the next few years.
Inventor Weston Warren says that he is part of a group that has been tracking an object that they refer to as “the Black Star”. According to Warren, “the Black Star” is supposed to cause immense chaos as it travels close to our planet from 2026 through 2028…
Scientist and inventor Weston Warren is back with a warning about an event that only happens about every 4,100 to 4,300 years. It’s a Biblical event that can cause global calamities such as the Great Flood of Noah’s day. Scientists call what is flying close to Earth the Black Star. The Black Star will not hit the Earth, but it brings with it electromagnetic power that can affect the iron and nickel molten core, reshape continents and threaten all life on the planet. Warren explains, “Most likely this is what caused the flood of Noah’s day, this inbound electromagnetic anomaly. It will eventually exit out of our solar system and will be jettisoned out between Earth and Mars sometime in early 2028.”
2026 looks like it will also be a bad year as the Earth moves closer to the Black Star while Mars, Venus and Mercury will be on the other side of the Sun. It is a similar setup in early 2028.
Just like with Coulthart, I really wish that Warren had more evidence to present.
But I have to admit that it is intriguing that his claims do seem to correspond with many of the things that I have been researching.
Warren is warning that global weather patterns will go completely nuts over the next few years…
Weston says, “Winds will continue to increase all over the planet. This applies everywhere, but in the United States, we will have greater and greater winds. There will be 30, 40 and 50 mile per hour winds. . . . I am talking 30, 40 and 50 mile per hour winds that last for weeks and weeks and weeks. It will affect airflight, especially small aircraft. . . . Farmers are going to have a very difficult time planting because the winds won’t stop. With that, you will have property damage in commercial and residential. You will have roofs being compromised, trees, powerlines and hail stones will continue to get larger and larger and larger. At the crescendo, hail stones will be larger than soccer balls. Then you get into Biblical territory. When the Bible is talking about Earth changes, pestilence, famine and earthquakes in one place after another, there will be tsunamis, hurricanes and tornados. These are descriptions of Earth under stress and being transformed. It is all due to this second anomaly (Black Star) that has entered our solar system.”
Do you remember when one part of China was hit by wind speeds of over 200 kilometers per hour the other day?
Perhaps that is a sign of things to come.
Warren is entirely convinced that the object that he is tracking will not hit us.
But in the Book of Revelation it talks about a giant object that will hit our planet someday.
So I will be on high alert for any major news concerning asteroids.
Interestingly, NASA conducted an exercise in 2018 that simulated a scenario in which there was a 96 percent chance of an asteroid hitting the Earth in 2027.
Why did they specifically choose that year for the exercise?
Last year, NASA played around with a scenario in which there was a 72 percent chance that an asteroid “possibly several hundred yards across” would hit the Earth…
This year’s scenario: A hypothetical asteroid, possibly several hundred yards across, has been discovered, with an estimated 72% chance of impacting Earth in 14 years. Potential impact locations include heavily populated areas in North America, Southern Europe, and North Africa, but there is still a 28% chance the asteroid will miss Earth. After several months of being tracked, the asteroid moves too close to the Sun, making further observations impossible for another seven months. Decision-makers must figure out what to do.
NASA keeps assuring us that there is no danger whatsoever.
So why do they keep conducting such ominous exercises?
Let me add another layer to all of this.
It is being reported that in 2027 scientists will finally be able to officially determine if Apophis is on “a collision course with Earth in 2029”…
There is another problem. “Apophis is in the daytime sky and unobservable from mid-2021 to 2027,” Paul Wiegert, meaning any change in its trajectory will go unseen until just two years before April 12, 2029. However, he adds that a single observation during 2027 would be necessary to determine whether the asteroid threatened “an impending Earth impact.”
“The deflection of Apophis by a small asteroid onto a collision course with Earth in 2029 — in addition to being extremely unlikely — will most likely be quickly eliminated as a possibility by simple telescopic observations when Apophis returns to visibility in 2027,” said Wiegert.
Right now, Apophis is out of view.
But starting in 2027, our astronomers will be able to see it again.
For some reason, 2027 just keeps coming up again and again.
Why is that?
And why do we keep hearing of government preparations for some sort of an apocalyptic event?
During a recent interview with Tucker Carlon, Catherine Austin Fitts claimed that the government has been spending trillions of dollars to create massive underground cities…
The federal government has secretly spent trillions building an elaborate network of subterranean “cities” where the rich and powerful can shelter during a “near-extinction event,” a former Bush White House official sensationally claimed.
About 170 such bunkers have been built across the country since 1998 – including some resting beneath the oceans off the US coast, 74-year-old Catherine Austin Fitts told Tucker Carlson during a recent appearance on his podcast.
“It’s preparation for catastrophe,” Fitts said, according to Realtor.com.
What if she is right?
What if the government really has been constructing underground facilities for some type of an apocalyptic event that they aren’t telling us about?
That really would be one of the biggest scandals in history.
Before I end this article, I wanted to mention that the giant ball of fire that our planet revolves around has been acting up again…
A massive solar storm that hit Earth over the weekend is intensifying, with the potential to trigger radio blackouts and strain power grids.
Officials issued a Level 3 geomagnetic storm warning on Monday, which means solar activity could disrupt GPS signals, radio communications, and electrical systems, while also making auroras visible much farther south than usual.
I keep warning my readers to keep a close eye on the Sun.
Eventually, this is going to become a very big story.
Thanks to the solar storm that is now hitting us, many of you that live in northern states may be able to see the northern lights on Monday evening…
Several northern states in the U.S. might be able to see the northern lights on Sunday, June 1 and Monday, June 2, according to the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.
The northern lights, also known as the aurora borealis, may be visible in states near the Canadian border, according to the NOAA. Most of Canada will also have a chance to see the lights.
While the likelihood of seeing the northern lights will be low for most of the U.S. on Sunday, Alaska and parts of Montana, North Dakota and Minnesota will have a higher chance of seeing the stunning light display.
This is such a crazy time to be alive.
I believe that the most apocalyptic chapters in all of human history are ahead of us, and there are a lot of others out there that feel the same way.
So get prepared, buckle up, and hold on tight.
We really are living in the end times, and they are going to be wilder than anything that Hollywood ever imagined.
US Debt Market Crisis Looming, JPMorgan Chief Warns
JPMorgan Chase chief executive Jamie Dimon voiced concern Sunday at the risk of a looming US debt market crisis sparked by the Trump administration’s economic policies.
“It’s a big deal. It is a real problem,” Dimon told Maria Bartiromo on FOX Business Network’s “Mornings with Maria” show, according to an excerpt of the interview that will air in full Monday.
“The bond market is going to have a tough time. I don’t know if it’s six months or six years,” he said.
Dimon cautioned that once investors become aware of the impact of rising debt levels, interest rates would skyrocket and markets would be disrupted — a dangerous scenario for the world’s biggest economy.
“People vote with their feet,” he stressed.
Investors “are going to be looking at the country, the rule of law, the inflation rates, the central bank policies,” he said, warning that “if people decide that the US dollar isn’t the place to be,” financing US debt will become more expensive.
Historically, the United States has been able to rely on market appetite for low-interest US Treasury bonds to support its economy.
Yields briefly climbed last week, amid concerns about President Donald Trump’s divisive budget plan.
The plan would among other things extend the gigantic tax breaks introduced during Trump’s first term, spurring fears of a ballooning federal deficit.
In mid-May, for the first time ever, the United States lost its triple-A credit rating from Moody’s.
When it announced the downgrade to Aa1, the ratings agency warned that it expects US federal deficits to widen dramatically over the next decade.
The White House’s back-and-forth announcements of towering tariffs slapped on countries around the world are also creating considerable uncertainty and thus market volatility.
Dimon already warned in April of “considerable turbulence” facing the American economy, pointing to the impact of tariffs, trade wars, inflation and budget deficits.
US Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent on Sunday downplayed Dimon’s predictions of a debt market crisis.
“I’ve known Jamie a long time, and for his entire career he’s made predictions like this,” Bessent said during an interview on CBS.
“Fortunately, not all of them have come true.”
Bessent acknowledged that he “was concerned about the level of debt.”
But he said “the deficit this year is going to be lower than the deficit last year, and in two years, it will be lower again.”
“We are going to bring the deficit down slowly,” Bessent added, insisting that addressing the deficit was a “long process.”
“The goal is to bring it down over the next four years, (and to) leave the country in great shape in 2028.”
Russia Offered Ukraine Partial ‘2-3 Day’ Ceasefire: Top Negotiator
Russia proposed a partial ceasefire of “two to three days” at talks with Ukraine in Istanbul on Monday, Moscow’s top negotiator Vladimir Medinsky said.
“We have proposed a specific ceasefire for two to three days in certain areas of the front line,” Medinsky said, “so that commanders can collect the bodies of their soldiers.” Ukraine is pushing for a full and unconditional ceasefire.
A fundamental power shift has taken place as the real Trump returns and declares war on the Rockefellers
By Benjamin Fulford January 26, 2026
Something fundamental clicked in geopolitics last week and extra-ordinary news events are unfolding. The fake “Donald Trump” who appeared at Davos is about to be removed as massive demonstrations against his government erupt in more than 70 cities. Now the real Trump has been located at a secret base in Russia where he is preparing a counter-attack, US space force sources say. This comes as all top generals in the Western hemisphere were summoned to an emergency meeting by General Dan Caine. We also saw Canada formally declare war on the Rockefeller controlled UNITED STATES OF AMERICA Corporation.
In the EU, angry farmers have de facto seized power from Ursula von der Leyen and her Khazarian mafia gangsters.
In China meanwhile, the top general and number two man in the countries’power structure was arrested for treason, according to Asian secret society sources. A major purge is now underway.
Meanwhile the price of gold has shot above $5000 an ounce as everyone tries to flee from the financial system.
“We must be prepared for what is set to happen this week. There is mayhem in the West. The Trump administration is running around like chickens without their head. Nobody seems to know what’s happening. A very big announcement is expected by Friday,” is how a senior US military official put the situation.
The head of British intelligence concurs, saying: “The geopolitical order is in a state of flux and needs to be reined in and some kind of sanity restored. No more of the common showman tactics and all heads down in a quiet, dignified and sensible manner. They are badly out of control but like the Roman Empire it ended when it ended.”
Let us start by looking at why Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney got a standing ovation at Davos while US Commerce Secretary Howard Lutnick got booed. We will get into this more below but basically Carney said the middle powers were sick of US bullying while Lutnick said “America first.” This was a Western revolt against the US CORPORATION not the American people.
More importantly it was a general revolt against the Assyrian Satan worshipping cult led by Rockefeller and Hitler families. The Rockefellers have been hiding behind hired hands like BlackRock CEO Larry Fink or else by using fake names like Clinton, Obama, Podesta, Hanks, Zuckerberg etc.
The Rockefellers have been suppressing technology and systematically murdering us for over a century.
Before they took over Western medicine, for example, cancer did not exist. Now it affects one out every two of us. What happened to Scott Adams of Dilbert fame is typical of the sort of mass murder they have been carrying out. First a poison is administered that causes cancer. Cancer causing substances have been deliberately added to our food, our cosmetics, vaccines etc. When someone gets cancer then they are subjected to slow killing radiation “therapy.” Finally, as the sick people run out of money, they are conned into handing over the last of their savings for “an experimental drug” that never works. Then they die.
Cancer has a problem.
It needs Glucose and Glutamine to survive. That’s where anti parasitic’s like Fenbendazole come in.
“Cancer can not survive without the sugar Glucose or the amino acid Glutamine, which are the fermentation fuels”
“Why would a parasite medication be effective in killing cancer? [because] the parasite and the cancer cells, use a common metabolic pathway, the glutaminolysis pathway”.
Professor Thomas Seyfried from Boston College thinks that “Cancer cannot be a genetic disease” and mentions that the whole industry has been captured by more toxic treatments. He says what Doctors are learning about cancer is completely wrong.
“The medical schools have not yet come to understand this unfortunately [and] many oncologists and physicians have never been trained to know that cancer is a metabolic disease”
A legal dragnet is closing in on the Rockefellers etc. medical mafia from multiple directions. In the latest example:
Sacramento attorney Rick Jaffe filed what is arguably one of the most important lawsuits ever filed in modern medical history.
The plaintiffs accuse the AAP of operating as the central coordinator in a racketeering enterprise involving pharmaceutical manufacturers (Pfizer, Merck, GlaxoSmithKline, Sanofi Pasteur) and affiliated organizations. The alleged purpose:
To promote, financially benefit from, and protect the ever-expanding childhood vaccination schedule through systematic fraud, misinformation, and suppression of independent science.
https://kirschsubstack.com/p/parents-doctors-and-chd-sue-aap-in
This satire photo below shows how Fauci and Gates will soon be peddling vaccines.
Now let us look at what the Rockefellers did to Canada and why Carney’s “rupture” with them is so important. Between 1938 and 1972 Canada funded World War II, built the trans-Canada highway, paid for education etc. without debt or taxes by using government money backed by gold and silver. Then the Rockefellers blackmailed Prime Minister Pierre Trudeau into handing over control of the Bank of Canada after they filmed him torturing a young girl to death. As a result Canadians fell into the same system of Babylonian debt slavery that Americans have been subjected to.
When Carney said he was going to stop sending oil and gas to the US and start sending it to Asia, what he meant was he was going to stop handing it over to the Rockefellers. As Rebel News reports: The Rockefeller Foundation and the Rockefeller Brothers Fund were central architects of the so-called Tar Sands Campaign, a coordinated effort explicitly designed to landlock Canadian oil, block pipelines, and keep Canadian energy out of global markets.
Understanding the deadly nature of this threat the Rockefellers had their fake Trump post what was tantamount to a declaration of war:
“If Canada makes a deal with China, it will immediately be hit with a 100% Tariff against all Canadian goods and products coming into the U.S.A. Thank you for your attention to this matter!”
In Europe, the Rockefellers destroyed the German economy by blowing up the Nordstream pipeline and forcing the Germans to buy expensive Rockefeller controlled energy.
All of this was part of a desperate bid by the Rockefellers to avoid bankruptcy of their Fortune 500 corporate empire and their US Corporation. The “very big announcement” on Friday.
Private Jet Crashes in Maine During Winter Storm; Investigation Underway
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
A private business jet crashed while taking off from Bangor International Airport in Maine late Sunday evening, killing multiple people and injuring at least one, authorities confirmed. The Bombardier Challenger 600 aircraft went down amid snowy and icy conditions as a severe winter storm swept the Northeast.
Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) officials say the jet—with eight people aboard—crashed on departure at about 7:45 p.m. local time and caught fire after overturning. Preliminary reports indicate seven people died and one survived with serious injuries, though all casualty figures remain subject to confirmation as investigations continue.
Emergency response teams were on the scene within minutes. Smoke and flames were visible in video footage captured by local news crews, and fire crews worked through the night to secure the wreckage and identify hazards. The airport was closed following the incident and was expected to remain shut while crews and investigators process the site.
Weather conditions at the time were challenging. Forecasters reported heavy snowfall and reduced visibility at Bangor, with de-icing operations active across the airfield. Officials have said it is too early to determine whether weather played a direct role in the accident, but conditions typical of the winter storm are being treated as part of the context for the crash.
The jet was registered to a private company based in Texas. Public records show that the aircraft—identified by registration number N10KJ—was a 2020 model Challenger 600 business jet that had arrived in Bangor earlier in the evening. It had taken off from ~Houston and was planning to depart again when the crash occurred.
Local officials have not released the identities of those on board. The FAA and the National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) are jointly investigating the crash, collecting flight data, crew records, weather information, and communications logs as part of the preliminary inquiry. A final determination of probable cause is expected to take many months once all evidence has been analyzed.
Multiple media outlets have noted the jet’s registration where the ownership ties trace back to a business address associated with a well-known Houston law firm. However, neither FAA nor local authorities have confirmed the identities of passengers, their affiliations, or the purpose of the flight, and such details remain unverified pending official family notifications.
State and local leaders expressed condolences to the families affected by this tragedy. Bangor city representatives described the crash as one of the most serious aviation incidents in the airport’s recent history and emphasized the community’s support for first responders involved in rescue and recovery efforts.
NTSB investigators are expected to remain on site for several days, cataloging wreckage and wreckage position, while federal investigators work to reconstruct the flight path and mechanical condition of the aircraft prior to departure. Officials urge anyone with relevant video footage or eyewitness information to share it with authorities to assist in the inquiry.
As this remains a developing story, officials have cautioned that all published information—including early casualty figures and aircraft ownership details—is preliminary and may be updated as the investigation proceeds.
Iran Threatens To Sink The USS Abraham Lincoln As The Middle East Edges Closer To A Cataclysmic Showdown
The United States has gathered more firepower in the Middle East than we have ever seen before. It exceeds anything that we witnessed during Operation Desert Storm, it exceeds anything that we witnessed during the war in Afghanistan, and it exceeds anything that we witnessed during the war in Iraq. That doesn’t necessarily mean that war is imminent. President Trump could ultimately decide not to pull the trigger. But without a doubt, at this moment we are exceedingly close to a cataclysmic showdown in the Middle East.
It is being reported that the USS Abraham Lincoln has officially arrived in the Middle East…
The aircraft carrier USS Abraham Lincoln and its three accompanying warships have sailed into the Middle East region, providing President Trump additional military firepower if he decides to strike Iran.
The USS Abraham Lincoln, which is equipped with Mk 57 Mod3 Sea Sparrow surface-to-air missile launchers and can carry squadrons of bombers and early warning planes, and its strike group are in the U.S. Central Command (Centcom) area, which encompasses the Middle East region, the command confirmed Monday.
The addition of the carrier in the region comes as Trump warned Thursday that the U.S. is sending an “armada” toward Iran following nationwide protests in the country, where thousands of demonstrators have been killed by authorities.
Some of us have been carefully tracking the movements of the USS Abraham Lincoln in recent days.
Once the protests in Iran got really crazy, this carrier was redeployed from the Indian Ocean, and it has a maximum capacity of 90 aircraft…
The Nimitz-class aircraft carrier is hauling five squadrons of strike fighters, with a max capacity of 90 aircraft.
These include F/A-18 Super Hornets, F-35 Lightning II stealth fighters and EA-18G Growler radar jammers — along with Osprey tilt-rotor transports and MH-60S Seahawk helicopters.
Of course the USS Abraham Lincoln is not traveling alone.
It is being accompanied by three guided-missile destroyers that are “fully loaded with Tomahawk cruise missiles”…
The Lincoln is not alone; it hunts with a wolfpack. It is flanked by three guided-missile destroyers: USS Spruance, USS Frank E. Petersen Jr., and USS Michael Murphy. These ships are fully loaded with Tomahawk cruise missiles, ready for immediate launch orders.
This battle group is just the latest addition to the growing amount of firepower that the U.S. has accumulated in the region. If the U.S. attacks Iran, the Iranians have already warned that the USS Abraham Lincoln will be a primary target.
In fact, the Iranians just released a shocking video that simulates what it would look like if an Iranian ballistic missile were to destroy the carrier…
Iran’s state-run Islamic Ideology Dissemination Organization has released a propaganda video that purports to simulate how Iran’s Fattah ballistic missile could split the USS Abraham Lincoln in two in a potential conflict with the US, as the carrier strike group enters Mideast.
They are openly threatening to sink the Abraham Lincoln. And it appears that they have the ability to do that.
In addition to the various missiles that they possess, the Iranians could also potentially use drones…
Cameron Chell, CEO and co-founder of Draganfly, warned that Iran’s growing reliance on low-cost unmanned systems poses a credible danger to high-value U.S. naval assets, including the USS Abraham Lincoln aircraft carrier strike group.
“Iran’s drone capabilities are worth well into the tens of millions of dollars,” Chell told Fox News Digital.
“By pairing low-cost warheads with inexpensive delivery platforms, essentially remotely piloted aircraft, Iran has developed an effective asymmetric threat against highly sophisticated military systems.”
One drone would not be a problem for the Abraham Lincoln.
But if the Iranians sent hundreds of drones at the Abraham Lincoln all at once, the ship’s defenses could be overwhelmed…
Chell said Iran can launch large numbers of relatively unsophisticated drones directly at naval vessels, creating saturation attacks that could overwhelm traditional defenses.
“If hundreds are launched in a short period of time, some are almost certain to get through,” Chell said.
“Modern defense systems were not originally designed to counter that kind of saturation attack. For U.S. surface vessels operating near Iran, warships are prime targets.”
In addition to missiles and drones, the Iranians also possess large numbers of small attack vessels.
According to Defense News, many of them have now been deployed “across the Persian Gulf, the Strait of Hormuz and the Gulf of Oman”…
Iran has launched its most visible naval mobilization in years across the Persian Gulf, the Strait of Hormuz and the Gulf of Oman, deploying a dense concentration of Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) vessels as a U.S. carrier strike group advances toward the region. Satellite imagery, maritime tracking data and regional security reporting indicate that Tehran is signaling readiness for confrontation at the world’s most critical energy chokepoint, even as both sides warn of the danger of miscalculation.
Western defense analysts say the IRGC Navy has surged Iranian-flagged ships linked to the Guards into key waterways, including waters adjacent to the United Arab Emirates (UAE) and along the approaches to the Strait of Hormuz. The deployments follow a week of Iranian missile drills involving both ballistic and cruise systems, and come amid sharp rhetoric from senior commanders declaring that Iranian forces are “more ready than ever.”
During the 12-Day War, the Iranians did not hit us with everything that they have got.
This time around, it would be completely different. On Saturday, General Mohammad Pakpour warned that Iran has its “finger on the trigger”…
Iran’s Revolutionary Guard commander on Saturday said the country has its “finger on the trigger” at the U.S. after President Trump said an “armada” will head toward the Middle East.
“The Islamic Revolutionary Guard and dear Iran stand more ready than ever, finger on the trigger, to execute the orders and directives of the Commander-in-Chief,” Gen. Mohammad Pakpour said according to Nournews, a news outlet with ties to Iran’s Supreme National Security Council.
And one Iranian official just told Reuters that if Iran is attacked “we will respond in the hardest way possible to settle this”…
Iranian officials said over the weekend that they are prepared to retaliate if attacked by the US.
Speaking to Reuters on condition of anonymity, an official said: ‘This military build-up – we hope it is not intended for real confrontation – but our military is ready for the worst-case scenario. This is why everything is on high alert in Iran.’
He then delivered a warning to Washington, adding: ‘This time we will treat any attack – limited, unlimited, surgical, kinetic, whatever they call it – as an all-out war against us, and we will respond in the hardest way possible to settle this.’
What did he mean by “hardest way possible”? Was he suggesting that Iran could actually use unconventional weapons? Let’s hope not.
As I write this, even the slightest miscalculation could set the entire region ablaze. At this stage, there is even speculation that Iran could launch some sort of a preemptive strike…
Israeli security officials describe Iran as potentially operating under a “use it or lose it” doctrine. Fearing that a sudden U.S. “decapitation strike” could neutralize its missile forces before they are launched, Iranian commanders may be weighing an early salvo against Israel—the United States’ closest regional ally—to ensure retaliation capability.
If the Iranians believe that an attack is inevitable, they may just pull the trigger first.
And Hezbollah is telling us that they will join the fight if war breaks out…
Hezbollah has warned that its enemies will ‘taste the bitterest forms of death’ if Donald Trump strikes its backer, Iran.
Kataib Hezbollah, an Iraqi paramilitary group with links to the better-known Lebanese terror group Hezbollah, issued the fiery warning on Sunday, calling on its fighters to prepare for a possible ‘total war’.
Abu Hussein al‑Hamidawi, the group’s chief, claimed the ‘forces of darkness’ are gathering to destroy Iran, adding: ‘We affirm to the enemies that war against the [Islamic] Republic will not be a walk in the park.
‘But rather, you will taste the bitterest forms of death, and nothing will remain of you in our region.’
Speaking of Hezbollah, the IDF just conducted more than 20 airstrikes on targets in southern Lebanon…
Southern areas of Lebanon were subjected to massive attacks by Israeli Air Force fighter jets, which delivered no less than 23 strikes against ground targets, the news portal Naharnet stated.
Airstrikes were reportedly carried out on the mountainous Jabbur area and the Wadi Barguz gorge, where attempts by militants of the Shiite militia Hezbollah to restore their military infrastructure were recorded.
This should be big news. Why is the mainstream media in the western world so quiet about this?
We really are on the verge of a cataclysmic showdown in the Middle East. President Trump warned the Iranians not to kill protesters. But then the Iranians shut down the Internet for the Iranian population and proceeded to slaughter more than 33,000 protesters…
It comes after it was revealed last night that more than 33,000 protesters had been killed in Iran following the regime’s brutal crackdown on anti-government demonstrations, Time reports, quoting two senior officials working for the country’s Ministry of Health.
The death toll from the anti-government protests, which began on December 28, was previously estimated to be between 16,500 and 18,000.
Alongside the death toll, 97,645 have been wounded, with 30 per cent suffering eye injuries, according to research by Professor Amir-Mobarez Parasta.
We have never seen a slaughter of protesters of this magnitude. The Iranians clearly crossed the red line that President Trump had established.
Now the U.S. has accumulated an unprecedented amount of firepower in the region, and one expert is warning that “the indicators suggest that planning has moved beyond contingency and into executable readiness”…
A newly circulated strategic assessment by regional military analyst Talal Nahle has intensified speculation that the United States and its allies are nearing a decisive military inflection point with Iran, as unprecedented force concentrations across air and naval domains point to preparations far exceeding a limited or symbolic operation.
The report, updated early Monday following the release of the latest NOTAM (Notice to Air Missions) at 02:31 UTC, highlights what Nahle describes as a “deafening silence” — a lack of change in Iranian firing-zone declarations — combined with a vast and measurable coalition order of battle. Together, the indicators suggest that planning has moved beyond contingency and into executable readiness.
“This is no longer the language of speculation,” Nahle wrote. “It is the language of numbers that do not lie.”
According to Nahle, the U.S. could potentially launch more than 1,000 missiles “in a single or closely sequenced salvo”…
At the center of the assessment is the presence of 1,018 Vertical Launch System (VLS) cells deployed aboard U.S. destroyers and other surface combatants operating within strike range of Iran.
According to the analysis, this configuration provides the U.S. Navy with the ability to launch over 1,000 cruise or air-defense missiles — primarily Tomahawk Land Attack Missiles — in a single or closely sequenced salvo.
Military planners note that such volumes are designed for missile saturation, a doctrine that overwhelms even advanced air-defense networks through sheer scale. In this scenario, Iranian radar installations, air bases, command nodes and missile platforms could be targeted simultaneously across the country, compressing the defender’s response window to minutes.
Now that the USS Abraham Lincoln is in the region, the last piece of the puzzle is finally in place. If President Trump gives the order, missiles will start flying back and forth all over the Middle East. For the Iranians, the USS Abraham Lincoln would be a really juicy target.
Could you imagine how the American people would react if images of a burning aircraft carrier suddenly appeared on our television screens? It would be quite a shock. We are just inches away from a nightmare scenario, and once the fighting begins nobody is going to be able to stop it.
Airbridge, Naval Posture, and Forward Defense: Signals of a Deepening U.S.-Led Military Buildup Around Iran
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
A sustained and increasingly visible U.S.-led military buildup is unfolding across the Middle East and Indian Ocean region, centered on Iran but extending through a broad network of bases and maritime assets. Over the past two weeks, a high-volume airlift, reinforced naval deployments, and expanding defensive infrastructure point to a deliberate posture shift from signaling to readiness—without yet crossing into active conflict.
At the core of this buildup is a robust airbridge linking the United States, Europe, the Middle East, and Diego Garcia. Since January 15, more than 50 cargo flights have reportedly transited this corridor, alongside the arrival of at least 13 F-15 fighter aircraft and a growing number of aerial refueling tankers into the operational area. The tempo and scale suggest a coordinated logistics surge designed to sustain prolonged operations rather than a short-term show of force.
Diego Garcia has emerged as a key hub in this effort. Within the last week alone, eight transport aircraft have landed on the remote Indian Ocean base, with additional flights reportedly en route from staging areas in Djibouti. The pattern indicates continued stockpiling of munitions, fuel, and support equipment, reinforcing Diego Garcia’s role as a strategic launch and sustainment platform for long-range operations.
Naval posture has also shifted decisively. The USS Abraham Lincoln Carrier Strike Group has arrived southeast of Oman, positioning itself in a zone that offers operational reach while reducing exposure to Iran’s coastal anti-ship missile systems. The carrier brings with it more than 40 strike-capable aircraft, significantly expanding U.S. offensive options in the region.
Beyond the carrier group, U.S. naval presence now reportedly includes six guided-missile destroyers (DDGs) and two missile-capable submarines operating across the Gulf and adjacent waters. This layered maritime force provides both strike capability and missile defense, signaling preparation for contested environments rather than routine patrols.
On land, airbases across the region are absorbing heavy traffic. Muwaffaq Air Base in Jordan and Al Udeid Air Base in Qatar continue to receive large transport aircraft, including C-5 Galaxy flights believed to be carrying Patriot and THAAD missile defense systems. Kuwait has also seen similar activity, pointing to a coordinated effort to harden bases and protect Gulf partners against potential missile or drone retaliation.
Defensive capacity remains a priority, and officials assess that deployment is not yet complete. Weather disruptions at U.S. domestic staging bases have reportedly delayed some movements, suggesting that the current buildup is still in progress rather than at its final posture. This reinforces the interpretation that planners are sequencing defense first, before any potential offensive phase.
The concentration of airpower in Jordan is particularly notable. Reports indicate approximately 36 U.S. F-15s are now stationed there, alongside a squadron of four RAF Typhoon fighters and a substantial contingent of Israeli F-16 and F-35 aircraft. This configuration provides a multinational strike capability, reinforcing deterrence while enabling coordinated action if required.
Diplomatic activity mirrors the military preparations. A meeting that concluded yesterday between senior Israeli officials and the U.S. CENTCOM commander reportedly produced broad alignment on potential strike options against Iran. According to Israeli media, discussions covered a wide target set and acknowledged that any operation would likely need to be extensive to significantly degrade the regime’s capacity to respond.
The emphasis described in these discussions points toward a rapid, high-intensity opening phase—often referred to as a “lightning campaign”—targeting not only military assets but also political and command-and-control nodes associated with repression and regional violence. Importantly, the framing suggests that if strikes occur, they would likely form part of a longer, multinational campaign rather than a single, limited action.
Taken together, the airbridge, naval deployments, base hardening, and diplomatic coordination indicate a transition into a high-readiness phase. While no action has yet been initiated, the scale and integration of forces suggest that optionality is being preserved deliberately. The message is not escalation for its own sake, but preparation—ensuring that if decisions are made, the infrastructure, defenses, and alliances required to sustain operations are already in place.
Operational Update: Iran Build-Up
Source; Hal Turner
A mass airlift continues to Diego Garcia, Muwaffaq airbase in Jordan, and Al Udeid Airbase in Qatar, continue to take significant amounts of transport flights, proving a military buildup.
A U.S. Aircraft Carrier strike group has arrived South East of Oman.
A US airbridge is well and truly underway- US-Europe-Middle East-Diego Garcia. Since January 15th 50+Cargo Flights along with 13 F-15s-and the number of tankers arrived in Operational Area:
– USS Abraham Carrier Strike Group has arrived, currently hovering South East Of Oman, likely trying to make it self illusive of Anti-Ship missile response.
– 8 flights have landed in Diego Garcia within the last week with 2 more transports seemingly heading there now from bases in Djibouti
-US has now offensive strike capability in the region to carry out strikes, but continues to build up ammunition infrastructure and Crucially defensive infrastructure for its bases and Gulf Partners
-Several big transport aircraft have been seen landing in Qatar and Kuwait, likely carrying patriot or Thaad missile units, on C-5 Galaxy aircraft
-Defensive capacity deployment is still not finished meaning flights are likely delayed until the weather conditions in various US staging bases domestically improve.
-There are now 6 US DDG warships, 2 missile capable Subs, a Carrier with 40+ strike capable aircraft, and 36 F-15es stationed in Jordan for offensive capability- Along with a Squadron of 4 RAF typhoons and many Israeli F-16F35 Fighters.
-Diplomatically, a meeting that ended yesterday between Israeli officials and American CENTCOM commander, showed widespread agreements over strikes on Iran, in particular according to Israeli media.
Widespread targets were discussed with an understanding that operations would have to be widespread to capitulate the regime (Which indicates if strikes do happen it will likely be a multinational longer campaign)
Emphasis on a lighting campaign targeting not just military but also political nodes of control and perpetrators of mass violence.
Self-Regulation Rises as Environmental Stress Enters the Medical Conversation
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
A notable shift is underway in how individuals and clinicians approach health and wellness. As confidence in institutional healthcare softens, people are increasingly turning inward—adopting self-directed practices focused on regulation, resilience, and stabilization rather than optimization or peak performance. This change reflects both a response to systemic strain and an emerging awareness that long-term health depends on managing cumulative stress, not merely treating symptoms.
Across diverse populations, practices such as breathwork, nervous-system regulation, sleep optimization, nutritional discipline, and mindfulness are moving from the margins into the mainstream. These are no longer framed as lifestyle enhancements, but as foundational tools for maintaining baseline functionality in an environment defined by persistent pressure. The emphasis is not on doing more, but on restoring balance in systems that are chronically activated.
This surge in self-regulation practices coincides with growing skepticism toward institutional capacity. Long wait times, rising costs, fragmented care, and a perceived mismatch between modern stressors and traditional medical models have pushed individuals to seek agency over their own well-being. Rather than rejecting healthcare outright, many are supplementing it—filling gaps where systems feel slow, inaccessible, or reactive rather than preventive.
At the same time, medical discourse itself is beginning to expand. Clinicians and researchers are paying closer attention to subtle environmental and physiological stress signals that were previously underexplored. Seasonal illness persistence, circadian rhythm disruption, prolonged light exposure, and even possible geomagnetic sensitivity are being discussed as background contributors to fatigue, mood disturbance, and immune strain.
Importantly, these factors are not being framed as singular causes of illness. Instead, they are increasingly understood as amplifiers—conditions that can intensify stress responses when combined with economic pressure, information overload, and emotional strain. This perspective aligns with a systems-based view of health, where outcomes emerge from accumulation rather than isolated events.
Circadian disruption, in particular, has gained renewed focus. Irregular sleep schedules, artificial lighting, screen exposure, and reduced alignment with natural day-night cycles are now recognized as chronic stressors that affect hormonal balance, cognitive clarity, and emotional regulation. As these disruptions persist, resilience margins narrow, making individuals more susceptible to additional stress inputs.
The convergence of these trends—self-regulation on one side, environmental awareness on the other—marks a quiet but meaningful transition in wellness culture. Health is increasingly framed as a dynamic process of regulation rather than a static state achieved through intervention alone. The goal shifts from “fixing” the body to supporting its capacity to adapt.
Within the wellness industry, this has translated into growth in tools and practices designed for stabilization. Programs centered on nervous-system education, breath pacing, restorative movement, and sleep hygiene are expanding faster than those promising extreme performance gains. The market signal reflects lived experience: people are seeking to feel grounded, not optimized.
For healthcare professionals, this evolution presents both a challenge and an opportunity. Integrating environmental and regulatory factors into care models requires broader collaboration and updated frameworks, but it also offers pathways to address chronic stress more effectively. Acknowledging cumulative load allows for earlier intervention, gentler pacing, and more realistic expectations of recovery.
Taken together, these developments suggest a reframing of health itself. As environmental pressures and systemic uncertainty persist, the most effective responses are increasingly local, internal, and rhythm-based. The rise of self-regulation alongside a more nuanced understanding of environmental stress signals points toward a future where resilience is cultivated daily—quietly, intentionally, and from the inside out.
Mental Health Strain Accelerates as Systems Pressure Becomes Chronic
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Mental health strain is no longer being driven primarily by acute crises or isolated events. Instead, healthcare providers and employers are reporting a steady rise in anxiety, burnout, sleep disruption, and stress-related conditions rooted in prolonged exposure to systemic pressure. The defining feature of the current moment is duration. Stress is not spiking and receding; it is persisting, accumulating, and reshaping baseline functioning across large segments of the population.
Clinicians increasingly describe patients who are not reacting to a single traumatic incident, but to an ongoing state of uncertainty. Economic insecurity, rising costs of living, job volatility, geopolitical tension, and constant informational overload have created an environment where the nervous system rarely returns to baseline. For many, stress has shifted from episodic to chronic, altering sleep cycles, emotional regulation, and cognitive performance.
Workplace data mirrors these clinical observations. Employers across sectors report higher absenteeism, reduced productivity, and increased turnover tied to burnout rather than dissatisfaction alone. Employees are not necessarily disengaged from their work; they are depleted. The expectation to remain adaptive, responsive, and emotionally regulated under continuous pressure has exceeded sustainable human capacity in many roles.
Sleep disruption has emerged as a central amplifier of this trend. Healthcare providers report growing numbers of patients experiencing difficulty falling asleep, fragmented sleep, or early waking associated with racing thoughts and physiological tension. Poor sleep compounds stress responses, weakens immune function, and reduces emotional resilience, creating a feedback loop that is difficult to interrupt without targeted intervention.
Demand for mental health services continues to rise faster than access. Waitlists for therapists, psychiatrists, and specialized care remain long in many regions, while costs and insurance limitations restrict availability. This gap is not solely a staffing issue; it reflects a care model built for episodic treatment rather than sustained, population-level stress exposure. Systems designed to treat illness are struggling to address chronic overload.
In response, many individuals are turning to informal or self-directed coping strategies. Practices such as breath regulation, mindfulness, nervous system education, exercise, and dietary changes are increasingly viewed not as supplements, but as necessities. This shift signals both adaptive behavior and a loss of confidence that institutional systems alone can meet current needs.
Importantly, the rise in reported mental health strain does not indicate fragility or weakness. It reflects an environment that demands continuous adaptation without sufficient recovery. Human systems evolved for cycles of stress and rest; prolonged activation without resolution erodes resilience regardless of individual strength or motivation.
Healthcare professionals are beginning to reframe the issue accordingly. Rather than asking why individuals are “not coping,” the focus is shifting toward identifying which systemic conditions are unsustainable. Chronic stress is increasingly recognized as a structural problem with biological consequences, not merely a personal or psychological shortcoming.
The long-term implications are significant. If unaddressed, persistent mental health strain can translate into higher rates of chronic illness, reduced workforce participation, and increased social fragmentation. Conversely, recognizing the chronic nature of current pressures opens the door to more effective responses—ones centered on regulation, pacing, and recovery rather than constant performance.
The core signal is clear: mental health strain is accelerating because the pressure environment has changed. Addressing it will require more than expanding services. It will require acknowledging limits, redesigning expectations, and restoring conditions under which human systems can recover as well as respond.
Planetary and Geomagnetic Activity Coincides With Rising Human Stress Reports
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Recent weeks have seen a renewed convergence between subtle planetary and geomagnetic activity and widespread reports of human stress, fatigue, and cognitive strain. While no catastrophic solar events have occurred, the accumulation of minor disturbances appears to be coinciding with heightened physiological and psychological sensitivity across large populations. This pattern has drawn increased attention from researchers, clinicians, and system observers who track environmental inputs alongside human behavior.
Geomagnetic fluctuations—often driven by modest solar wind variations rather than major solar storms—can influence Earth’s magnetic field in ways that are measurable but easily overlooked. Historically, only large-scale events such as severe solar flares or coronal mass ejections have captured public attention. Yet emerging research suggests that repeated low-level disturbances may exert cumulative effects, particularly when societies are already operating under elevated stress.
Reports from healthcare providers and workplace surveys indicate rising complaints of disrupted sleep, irritability, reduced concentration, and unexplained fatigue. These symptoms are not new, but their simultaneous increase across disparate regions has prompted questions about whether environmental factors may be acting as amplifiers rather than primary causes. In this context, geomagnetic variability is being examined as one of several background stressors interacting with social, economic, and informational pressure.
Human nervous systems evolved in continuous interaction with Earth’s magnetic environment. While the exact biological mechanisms remain under study, some research points to potential influences on circadian rhythms, autonomic nervous system balance, and cardiovascular variability. When geomagnetic conditions fluctuate, individuals who are already metabolically or emotionally taxed may experience diminished tolerance for additional strain.
The timing of these reports is notable. Many populations are navigating prolonged periods of uncertainty related to economic pressure, geopolitical tension, and rapid technological change. In such conditions, baseline resilience is already reduced. Environmental stressors that might otherwise pass unnoticed can become perceptible, contributing to a generalized sense of overload without a clear external trigger.
Importantly, this is not a narrative of imminent danger or deterministic causation. The observed correlations do not suggest that geomagnetic activity directly causes stress responses in a simple or uniform way. Instead, the pattern points toward sensitivity thresholds. When multiple systems—biological, social, and environmental—are simultaneously operating near capacity, even small inputs can produce outsized effects.
This framing aligns with a broader systems view of the current moment. Rather than singular shocks, the dominant feature is accumulation. Stress builds not from one overwhelming event but from sustained exposure to overlapping pressures. Planetary signals, in this sense, act less as disruptors and more as indicators, revealing where resilience margins have thinned.
Public communication around this topic remains cautious, in part to avoid alarmism. However, awareness of environmental contributors to stress can inform more adaptive responses. Emphasizing rest, rhythm regulation, reduced sensory overload, and local grounding practices may help individuals buffer against cumulative strain during periods of heightened sensitivity.
As monitoring tools improve and interdisciplinary research expands, the relationship between geomagnetic activity and human response is likely to become clearer. For now, the convergence itself is the signal. It suggests that the human system, much like global infrastructure or financial networks, responds most visibly when multiple pressures align.
In this environment, the takeaway is not fear but calibration. Recognizing periods of increased sensitivity allows for adjustments in pace, expectations, and exposure. When planetary signals and human stress rise together, the most effective response is often not resistance, but coherence—maintaining balance as conditions fluctuate rather than pushing systems beyond their limits.
Energy Infrastructure Emerges as Primary Battlefield Across Multiple Conflicts
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Across today’s major conflict zones, energy infrastructure has moved from background vulnerability to frontline target. Power plants, heating systems, fuel depots, transmission lines, and ports are no longer collateral concerns—they are central objectives. Modern warfare is increasingly shaped by the ability to disrupt energy flows that sustain civilian life, industrial output, and state legitimacy.
In the war between Russia and Ukraine, repeated strikes on power and heating systems illustrate this shift clearly. Recent attacks on Kyiv that left more than a thousand buildings without heat demonstrate how energy disruption functions as a pressure weapon. The aim is not only military degradation but civilian exhaustion—forcing governments to divert resources toward emergency repairs while maintaining frontline defense.
Winter amplifies the effectiveness of this strategy. When temperatures drop, electricity and heat become survival infrastructure rather than conveniences. Disrupting them compresses timelines, narrows options, and raises the cost of resilience. In this context, energy systems become force multipliers, where relatively limited strikes generate disproportionate societal impact.
A parallel dynamic is visible in the Middle East. While kinetic operations continue, access to fuel, electricity, and border crossings has become a dominant lever of control. Israel’s management of Gaza’s crossings—including the reopening of the Rafah crossing—illustrates how energy and access governance shape humanitarian conditions, political signaling, and regional stability. Control of energy inputs determines not only daily life but negotiation leverage.
Beyond active war zones, global trade chokepoints reveal the same pattern. Energy-linked routes such as the Red Sea and Persian Gulf now factor security risk directly into pricing, insurance, and logistics decisions. When shipping reroutes to avoid conflict zones, fuel costs rise, delivery times lengthen, and downstream inflation pressures spread. Energy disruption in one region thus propagates through global systems.
Energy infrastructure also sits at the intersection of cyber, physical, and informational warfare. Grid control systems, pipelines, and refineries are vulnerable not only to missiles but to cyber intrusion and sabotage. Attacks need not cause permanent destruction to be effective; temporary outages timed to peak demand or political moments can destabilize confidence and provoke overreaction.
This evolution reflects a broader strategic logic: modern states are more dependent on uninterrupted energy flows than ever before. Electrified transportation, digitized governance, data centers, and automated logistics all rest on stable power. Disrupting energy does not just inconvenience populations—it degrades command, communication, and economic throughput simultaneously.
Importantly, this form of warfare operates below traditional escalation thresholds. Energy attacks can be framed as limited, deniable, or defensive while still exerting sustained pressure. This ambiguity complicates deterrence, as responses risk escalation while inaction invites repetition. As a result, energy infrastructure becomes a “safe” target in an unsafe world.
The global consequence is a quiet reordering of security priorities. Governments are now hardening grids, diversifying fuel sources, stockpiling reserves, and decentralizing generation. Energy resilience—once an engineering concern—is becoming a core national security doctrine. Those who can maintain power under stress gain strategic advantage without firing a shot.
As conflicts persist without resolution, the battlefield continues to migrate from borders to systems. Energy infrastructure sits at the center of this shift, shaping outcomes through constraint rather than conquest. In the conflicts of today—and likely tomorrow—who controls the flow of power increasingly determines who holds power itself.
Energy as a Weapon, Crossings as Signals: War Pressures Shift in Kyiv and Gaza
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
A new phase of pressure unfolded this week in the ongoing conflict between Russia and Ukraine as a Russian strike on Kyiv damaged critical infrastructure, leaving an estimated 1,330 residential buildings without heat, according to the city’s mayor. The strike underscored a familiar tactic in the war: targeting energy and utilities to impose civilian hardship during winter, amplifying strain beyond the battlefield.
For Kyiv’s residents, the impact was immediate and practical rather than symbolic. Loss of heat in subfreezing conditions forces emergency responses, temporary relocations, and a scramble to stabilize essential services. City authorities moved to restore power and heating where possible, but the episode highlighted how infrastructure attacks can ripple quickly through urban life, testing resilience even when front lines remain distant.
Strategically, the strike reinforced a pattern that has defined much of the conflict: pressure through attrition rather than decisive breakthrough. By degrading energy systems, Moscow signals endurance and leverage, betting that sustained civilian discomfort and repair costs can erode morale and stretch Ukraine’s capacity to respond across multiple domains simultaneously.
Meanwhile, in the Middle East, a different but equally consequential development unfolded as Israel reopened Gaza’s Rafah crossing after completing a search operation to recover the body of the last remaining hostage. The reopening marked a somber conclusion to a chapter defined by uncertainty, grief, and intense negotiations over access and security.
The Rafah crossing has long functioned as more than a border point; it is a pressure valve for humanitarian access, diplomacy, and regional signaling. Its reopening, even under restricted conditions, suggests a recalibration rather than a resolution—an attempt to restore limited flow while maintaining heightened security controls following months of conflict.
For Gaza’s civilian population, the reopening carries immediate implications. Movement of aid, medical supplies, and personnel remains tightly regulated, but any resumption of passage is significant in a territory where access has been repeatedly curtailed. The event illustrates how humanitarian corridors are often inseparable from military and political calculations.
Taken together, the developments in Kyiv and Rafah reveal parallel dynamics playing out in different theaters. In Ukraine, infrastructure is targeted to magnify winter hardship; in Gaza, crossings are opened or closed as instruments of leverage and signaling. Both cases show how modern conflicts increasingly operate through systems—energy, access, logistics—rather than solely through territorial gains.
These actions also highlight the growing role of thresholds. Neither situation represents a dramatic escalation or a clear de-escalation. Instead, they sit just below decisive shifts, reinforcing pressure while preserving room for maneuver. This ambiguity keeps adversaries off balance and allies engaged without forcing irreversible commitments.
International reactions have remained measured, reflecting a broader fatigue with protracted conflicts and a recognition that sudden breakthroughs are unlikely. Diplomatic channels remain active, but expectations are calibrated toward management rather than settlement—containing fallout, stabilizing essentials, and preventing spillover.
The week’s events point to a sobering reality: contemporary warfare often advances through incremental constraint. Whether by turning off heat in a capital city or controlling the opening of a single crossing, power is exercised through systems that shape daily life. In this environment, endurance, adaptation, and control of critical nodes increasingly define the trajectory of conflict.
Davos 2026: Constraint, Power Signaling, and the Reordering of Global Priorities
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
The 2026 World Economic Forum in Davos unfolded under a markedly different tone than previous years. Rather than optimism or coordinated recovery, the dominant atmosphere reflected endurance, recalibration, and strategic positioning. Leaders, executives, and policymakers gathered amid persistent geopolitical strain, economic fragmentation, and mounting institutional pressure, with discussions centered less on solving global problems and more on managing their consequences.
Attendance was robust, but alignment was not. Panels and closed-door sessions revealed a shared recognition that the post-Cold War framework of globalization is no longer functioning as designed. Conversations repeatedly returned to themes of resilience, sovereignty, and adaptation, underscoring a collective understanding that existing systems are being stretched, not reset. The emphasis was on coping within limits rather than restoring prior norms.
President Donald Trump’s address became one of the defining moments of the forum. His speech was framed around American economic strength, national leverage, and strategic clarity, positioning the United States as a central actor willing to challenge assumptions that have governed international cooperation for decades. Trump emphasized domestic economic performance as the foundation of geopolitical influence, reinforcing his long-standing view that internal strength precedes external leadership.
A focal point of Trump’s remarks was Greenland and the broader Arctic region. He framed Greenland as a strategic asset essential to national and allied security, citing its geographic and resource significance. While reaffirming that the United States would not pursue military force, Trump made clear that Arctic access and influence remain non-negotiable priorities. This messaging signaled strategic intent without immediate escalation, reinforcing deterrence through declaration rather than action.
European leaders responded cautiously but firmly. Trump’s Greenland comments, combined with earlier tariff rhetoric, revived concerns across NATO and EU leadership about sovereignty, economic coercion, and the balance of alliance power. European officials reiterated commitments to multilateral norms and territorial integrity, highlighting persistent fault lines in transatlantic relations that Davos did little to resolve.
Trade policy also surfaced as a tool of geopolitical leverage rather than purely economic management. Although prior tariff threats against European partners were softened during the forum, Trump signaled that trade instruments remain on the table as strategic pressure mechanisms. This reinforced a broader shift visible throughout Davos: economic policy is no longer treated as separate from security and diplomacy but as an integrated lever of power.
Energy policy and technological competition featured prominently in Trump’s critique of global strategy, particularly regarding China. He questioned the economic and strategic efficiency of current renewable energy frameworks and highlighted China’s dominant role in wind and industrial supply chains. This framing aligned energy transition debates with national competitiveness rather than climate consensus, reflecting a broader repositioning of environmental policy within security and economic lenses.
Beyond Trump’s address, other global leaders echoed similar assessments of systemic strain. Several speakers openly acknowledged that the rules-based international order has fractured and that mid-sized and regional powers must prepare for a more contested, multipolar environment. Rather than proposing new frameworks, most emphasized coordination among like-minded states as a defensive necessity rather than a universal solution.
Across the forum, the language of continuity and resilience dominated public messaging, even as private discussions reflected deeper concern. Davos 2026 was characterized less by declarations of progress and more by recognition of constraint. Stability was treated as something to be actively maintained, not passively assumed, with rising costs across governance, markets, and institutions.
The overarching takeaway from Davos was not escalation or resolution, but confirmation. Systems are adapting under pressure, power is being reasserted through selective leverage, and narratives are tightening to preserve confidence. Trump’s speech crystallized this moment by articulating a worldview grounded in strategic realism, where endurance, positioning, and constraint define the near-term global trajectory.
13 Shocking Facts About Winter Storm Fern That Are Almost Too Crazy To Believe
A “perfect winter storm” does not come along often. Conditions had to be just right to create a monster like Winter Storm Fern, and it will not be forgotten any time soon. Historically cold temperatures will combine with a gigantic amount of precipitation to create blizzard-type conditions over much of the eastern half of the nation. Some areas will be buried by mountains of snow. Other areas will see record amounts of ice. And life-threatening cold is expected to stretch all the way into the middle of next week. This is an emergency situation, and it should be treated as such.
Those that venture out in this storm are risking getting stuck on the side of the road, and if you get stuck on the side of the road in this weather you could rapidly find yourself in a life or death situation.
In the coldest parts of the country, if the power grid goes down and you don’t have another way to heat your home, you could potentially freeze to death inside your own house.
We haven’t seen a winter storm of this magnitude in a long time, and those that choose not to take it seriously do so at their own peril. The following are 13 shocking facts about Winter Storm Fern that are almost too crazy to believe…
#1 We are being warned that 230 million Americans are about to experience “significant snow and/or ice”…
According to The Weather Company forecasters, Fern could affect over 230 million in the U.S. with significant snow and/or ice, two-thirds of the nation’s estimated population. Either heavy snow or ice is forecast for 34 states from the storm, from Arizona to the Midwest, South and New England. Its impacts will linger for some time after the storm ends.
#2 According to Accuweather, it felt like it was 52 degrees below zero in Minneapolis on Friday morning…
Arctic air is on the move, expanding to the south and east across the United States. On Friday morning, the low temperature in Minneapolis was 21 degrees below zero with an AccuWeather RealFeel® Temperature of 52 degrees below zero.
“This is the cold Arctic air that’s making it possible for the precipitation to fall as freezing rain, sleet or snow to the south,” Dr Reed Timmer, Extreme Meteorologist, said. “It’s starting to freeze my beard and nose hairs.”
#3 If you can believe it, early this morning wind chill temperatures hit 58 below zero in Langdon, North Dakota and Brooks, Minnesota…
Cold air has blasted into the central United States, sending wind chills plunging to as low as minus 58 degrees in Brooks, Minnesota, and Langdon, North Dakota, on Friday morning.
A combination of cold temperatures and windy conditions were conspiring to produce widespread wind chill readings in the negative 50s across parts of Minnesota and North Dakota, the weather service reported. Wind chills in the minus 15 to minus 21 range occurred across Kansas and west into Colorado.
#4 It is being projected that Canada will be the coldest place on the entire planet this weekend…
#5 16 states plus the District of Columbia have already declared a state of emergency…
At least 16 states have declared a state of emergency as the storm nears: Alabama, Arkansas, Georgia, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maryland, Mississippi, Missouri, New Jersey, New York, North Carolina, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas and Virginia.
Washington, D.C., has also declared a state of emergency.
#6 A vast stretch of the eastern half of the nation is expected to receive at least a foot of snow, and New York City is right in the middle of the danger zone…
#7 According to the latest information that I have, 2,300 flights have already been canceled so far…
More than 2,300 flights within, into or out of the U.S. scheduled for Saturday have now been canceled ahead of the storm, with Dallas’ two airports hit the hardest.
#8 AccuWeather is estimating that 6,000 flights will have been canceled by the time this crisis is finally over…
AccuWeather experts are predicting extreme nationwide travel impacts through Monday, with 6,000 U.S. flight cancellations expected over the weekend.
#9 In anticipation of this storm, natural gas futures suddenly spiked by over 70 percent…
Waves of bitterly cold air will send temperatures tumbling across the United States, including a fresh push of Arctic air in the wake of the impending winter storm. Natural gas prices have spiked due to the forecast, with contracts for US natural gas futures rising by more than 70% this week, the biggest weekly price hike since 1990, CNN reported.
#10 Many southern cities that normally do not experience this sort of weather are very unprepared. For instance, the city of Jackson, Mississippi has exactly zero snowplows…
The number of snowplows owned by the city of Jackson, Mississippi, where a mix of ice and sleet is possible this weekend. The city uses other heavy machinery like skid steers and small excavators to clear roads, said James Caldwell, deputy director of public works. Jackson also has three trucks that carry salt and sand to spread across roads before freezing weather.
#11 We are being warned that the damage in areas that get absolutely hammered by ice “could rival that of a hurricane”…
Forecasters warn damage, particularly in ice-hit areas, could rival that of a hurricane. An estimated 160 million people are under winter storm or cold weather watches or warnings, and in many locations, both.
#12 Over the past couple of days we have witnessed voracious “panic buying” throughout much of the nation. For example, just check out what the shelves look like at a Trader Joe’s location in Washington D.C. right now…
#13 Once the snow stops falling that won’t be the end of it. Meteorologist Ryan Maue is warning that temperatures 35 to 45 degrees below normal are expected well into next week…
Over the next week –>
Arctic Blast 1.0 and Arctic Blast 2.0 merge
into Super Arctic Blast
that will entomb the Eastern U.S. into a frigid hellscape.Temperatures 35°F to 45°F below normal will cripple 🇺🇸 east of the Mississippi.
This is all-time historic vintage cold.
Maue is also encouraging everyone to take this crisis very seriously…
You should be prepared for extended power outages with subzero temperatures outdoors. Think about where you can go, what you can do, and who needs even more help to survive this week ahead. This is not hype or a joke.
I couldn’t have said it better myself.
Unfortunately, it is inevitable that some people out there will take very foolish risks over the next several days and will end up dead.
The good news is that eventually the snow and cold will pass. But I am convinced that the absolutely insane global weather patterns that we have been experiencing are only going to get even crazier.
The System Is Starting To Crack – Home Prices Plummet As Silver Hits $100 And Gold Closes In On $5,000
There are all sorts of signs that the relentless pressure that has been causing an enormous amount of stress on our financial system is starting to break things. Do you remember how bad things got in 2008 and 2009 when home prices fell dramatically? Well, as you will see below, it is beginning to happen again. Meanwhile, the price of silver and the price of gold both just keep setting brand new record high after brand new record high. That is music to the ears of many of my readers, but for large financial institutions that are holding enormous short positions that has the potential to be absolutely catastrophic. I think that we will be shocked by how violently things start to break loose in the financial system in the months ahead.
For decades, those that pull the financial strings in the western world were able to keep the price of silver and the price of gold within ranges that they considered to be acceptable. But now everything has changed.
A year ago, nobody was predicting that the price of silver would hit $100 and the price of gold would nearly reach $5,000 in just 12 months.
But that is precisely what has occurred…
Silver prices rose above $100 an ounce for the first time ever on Friday, while gold hit another record en route to $5,000/oz as investors pile into safe-haven assets amid geopolitical turmoil and on expectations for U.S. interest rate cuts.
The price of silver is up more than 200 percent over the past year.
When there are swings of this magnitude, there are really big winners and really big losers. I think that the identities of the really big losers will start to be revealed soon, and this will shock the financial world to the core.
In previous articles, I have gone over many of the reasons why the price of silver has been skyrocketing. But there is one more theory that I wanted to throw out there today.
Zero Hedge is reporting that demand in China is “off the charts”, and not too long ago the Chinese implemented severe restrictions on silver exports. Could it be possible that China is purposely attempting to destabilize the western financial system?
The Chinese know that there are very large institutions that have massive short positions, and if they can force those institutions to fail that would cause enormous chaos in the U.S. and Europe. If that really is their motive, that would explain a lot.
It is very interesting that silver has hit $100 at the exact same moment when gold is almost reaching the $5,000 milestone. Both of those marks are key psychological thresholds, and nobody is quite sure what is going to happen next…
Gold approaching $5,000 and silver approaching $100 represent more than incremental price advances. These levels function as psychological thresholds where attention concentrates, behavior changes, and market structure briefly dominates narrative.
In market terms, these prices act as an event horizon. The concept is borrowed deliberately. In physics, the event horizon marks the point beyond which outcomes are no longer observable in advance. In trading, it marks the price level that forces participation. Opinions polarize, positioning compresses, and conviction gives way to reaction.
These numbers draw in new participants on both sides of the market. Buyers include momentum participants who believe higher prices are inevitable, as well as short positions forced to cover under pressure. Sellers include long holders who have never experienced these prices and view the opportunity to monetize as both rational and psychologically satisfying. Selling silver at $100 or gold at $5,000 carries narrative weight regardless of future direction.
Some are convinced that these key psychological thresholds will propel gold and silver to new heights. Others are convinced that these thresholds will act as “ceilings” and gold and silver will start bouncing in the other direction.
We shall see what happens.
As I write this, the price of silver has just hit $102. I am looking at that number and I can see that it is real, but I am still having a hard time believing it.
It is truly difficult to comprehend the pace at which things are now changing. As precious metals soar, home prices all over the United States are starting to fall precipitously…
Florida, Texas and California are now firmly at the center of America’s housing crash – accounting for 12 of the 14 major metro areas where home prices are falling.
The sharpest drop was recorded in Dallas, TX, where median sale prices slid 7.6 percent from a year earlier.
Florida’s once-red-hot housing market is also cracking, with prices falling in Miami, Jacksonville, Orlando and Fort Lauderdale.
California has four declining metros as well, including Oakland, with the second-biggest drop of 5.6 percent, San Jose, Sacramento and Los Angeles.
On the one hand, this is good news because home prices had become wildly unaffordable. But on the other hand, if home prices fall too rapidly that will be a very bad thing.
Let’s not forget what happened during 2008 and 2009. When housing prices crashed, millions of mortgages were suddenly underwater and foreclosures went through the roof.
In previous articles, I have talked about the fact that the number of foreclosures was way up last year. If we are on the leading edge of another giant tsunami of foreclosures, that will be absolutely disastrous for our banking system. Meanwhile, pending home sales just dropped “to the lowest level for any December on record”…
Pending home sales, which track the number of contracts signed in December, plunged by 9.3% seasonally adjusted from November, to the lowest level for any December on record in the data by the National Association of Realtors, which goes back to 2010. Compared to December 2010, during the Housing Bust, pending sales were down by 21.5%.
The market is now well into its fourth year of the collapse in transactions, and there has simply been no improvement.
That is a really bad sign.
Unfortunately, demand is likely to continue to be weak for quite some time because we continue to see mass layoffs all over the nation.
For example, Amazon is gearing up for another round of layoffs which could end up being the largest in the entire history of the company…
Amazon is planning to cut thousands of jobs as part of a broader push to eliminate nearly 10% of its corporate workforce, according to Reuters.
After initially cutting roughly 14,000 white-collar jobs in October, Amazon is expected to launch a second round of layoffs impacting a similar number of employees, with an overall target of about 30,000 jobs, although the scope may change, according to two sources cited by Reuters.
If fully realized, the cuts would amount to the largest layoffs in Amazon’s history, surpassing the roughly 27,000 jobs the company cut in 2022.
So many good paying jobs are being lost. And this is the worst time since the Great Recession to find a new good paying job.
In so many ways, it is starting to feel like 2008 all over again.
Earlier today, I heard from a reader that explained that my articles really resonate with him because of what he has been going through. That meant a lot to me. I know that so many of you are really struggling right now. I want you to know that it isn’t your fault.
Decades of incredibly bad decisions by our leaders have brought us to this point, and now the entire system is starting to fail. We should have fundamentally transformed the system after the Great Recession, but we didn’t.
Instead, our leaders chose to inflate all of the old bubbles even larger than before, and now we have a colossal mess on our hands.
Greenland Is Ours by Right of Inheritance!
I have it on the highest authority—namely, a gentleman I met once in a St. Louis bar who claimed to have read it in a book he borrowed from his cousin’s wife’s uncle—that the continent of North America was promised long ago to the first honest folk who could find it and keep it warm. Not to any particular tribe or nation, mind you, but to whoever got there first with the most gumption and the least complaint about mosquitoes.
Now, the Almighty—or Nature, or whoever runs the real-estate office up yonder—had already handed out one fine piece of property to a people who knew how to appreciate green grass and milk cows. That piece was called Greenland. It was advertised in all the best Icelandic travel circulars as a land flowing with clover, fat sheep, and enough summer daylight to read the fine print on a mortgage by. Erik the Red, that red-headed real-estate promoter, named it Greenland for the same reason a man calls his bald horse “Curly”—to encourage emigration.
So the Norsemen packed up their longships, their axes, their Bibles (mostly for ballast), and sailed west. They found fjords deeper than a politician’s promises, meadows greener than envy, and walruses so plentiful a man could trip over one and claim it as homestead. They built farms, churches, barns bigger than some New England towns, and settled in for what they figured would be eternity. They even elected a bishop, which shows they were serious about civilizing the place.
Centuries rolled by like a slow-moving glacier. The Greenlanders prospered in their modest way—fishing, farming, trading ivory, and arguing about whose cow had the better right to the best patch of grass. They considered themselves the chosen people of the frozen north, heirs to a divine (or at least meteorological) covenant. The land was theirs by right of discovery, improvement, and not having anywhere else to go.
Then came the Little Ice Age, that uninvited guest who overstays his welcome worse than a relative from Ohio. The summers grew shorter, the winters longer, the hay thinner, and the promises thinner still. The walruses moved north for better accommodations. The grain stopped ripening. The sheep began to look at their owners with the same suspicion a man gives a tax collector. One by one the farms were abandoned, the churches stood empty, the bells froze in their towers, and the whole enterprise folded up like a bad poker hand.
Nobody knows exactly when the last Greenlander gave up and sailed away—perhaps to Iceland, perhaps to Valhalla, perhaps just to a warmer argument somewhere else. But the land stayed right where it was, empty, white, and waiting.
Now here is the humorous part, the part that would make even a dead man chuckle if he had any breath left. When the first real Americans—those hardy pilgrims and pioneers who crossed the Atlantic much later—finally got around to claiming their inheritance, they looked north and said, “By thunder, that looks like a fine piece of real estate! Green-land, they call it? Well, we’ll take it off the market.”
But by then the deed had expired. The covenant had run out like a subscription to a newspaper nobody reads anymore. The ice had thickened, the promises had cooled, and Greenland sat there looking innocent, as if it had never heard of any chosen people at all.
So the Americans, being practical folk, did what any sensible inheritor does when the will is missing: they bought it from somebody else who had never lived there either. And now and then, when a congressman or a speculator stands on the deck of a ship staring at those ice cliffs and mutters, “This here’s our promised land,” I reckon old Erik the Red, wherever he is, gives a ghostly laugh and says:
“Promised land? Son, we tried that once. The mortgage payments are murder, the winters last nine months, and the only thing that flows is the meltwater in July. Take my advice—stick to the Mississippi. At least it thaws every spring.”
And that’s how Greenland became the inheritance nobody quite claimed, the Promised Land that kept its promise by staying empty. A man can’t help but admire the joke. It’s got the mark of genuine Providence on it—quiet, dry, and delivered with perfect timing.
The Dark Hypothesis
By Clif High
This is what was rumored to have made President Carter cry.
Do not read this. You have been warned.
It’s called the ‘Dark Hypothesis’ for a reason.
Consider that all the information you have been told about humans and our history is a lie. That even the lies told about it are built upon a greater lie. That it is all lies all the way down.
We know this to be true. There is no rational explanation for officialdom views of any thing, especially human history and origins. This extends to all the religions.
We know this is true because we have evidence in front of our eyes that there have been previous civilizations here on earth that were far more advanced than we are even now.
We can’t replicate so much of the technology of the past, the granite statuary, the ‘melted rocks’, and even out into the megalithic structures which humans could not have built without very advanced technology which we do not have even today.
We know that our history, even recent history is a lie prepared for us. We were even still destroying the grand global civilization that was Tartaria in WW2. That’s what the firebombing of the city of Dresden was about…the destruction of the last completely Tartarian city in Germany. More lies more cover-ups.
It’s all lies, all the way down. There were no cavemen, there is no human evolution on Earth. In fact, no animal has ‘naturally evolved’. It’s all a lie.
Who built the global pyramid network of which Giza is but a single node? It was surely not jews enslaved to skirt wearing Kings of Egypt who constructed a vast global network of giant pyramids.
Who built all the structures on the bottom of the oceans? Who built the structures easily visible on the moon with a 10 inch telescope?
Humans are an engineered species. While this is a part of the Dark Hypothesis, it is only the base of it.
Why were there ‘orphan trains’ in the USA and across Europe? Where were all the birthing hospitals and the millions of mothers producing those children? Why do ancient ruins have more habitation available then than now?
There have been at least six ancient civilizations on this planet that precede modern humans. These are all civilizations that go back further than perhaps 100,000 years or more.
The Dark Hypothesis is that none of those civilizations arose, or died ‘naturally’. The Dark Hypothesis is that humans, all humans, are the descendants of laboratory created progenitors…in other words, all humans are the children of clones. We have proof in our DNA that we are engineered. The Dark Hypothesis explains it.
The Dark Hypothesis explains all religions and why they all deliberately lied about their origin stories. And their history.
The Dark Hypothesis explains all the gods in humanity’s past.
The hypothesis states that each civilization was created by the offspring of clones, fostered, and allowed to rise and flourish. Then, upon reaching conditions which are not known to us, each of these civilizations was then destroyed, in that the humanity was killed, while their objects were allowed to remain. This accounts for the ‘cycles’ of destruction that we observe in the long buried past. These cycles exist, but are not ‘natural’.
Yes, there are many details left out of this discussion, such as that many of the humans would have been ‘abducted’ prior to the engineered cataclysms of which we find so much evidence that were used to destroy their civilization. There was a need for a small number of humans from each civilization. To act as seeds for the narrative to be soon presented.
Then, another batch of lab created humans were put on earth. They had the benefit of the abducted humans acting as ‘guides’. Presumably the minds of the abducted humans were controlled to support the desired narrative.
For whatever goal or purpose, humans are placed here.
The Dark Hypothesis is that we are ‘lab rats’ in a designed experiment, and that we are number 7 in this current series.
This explains why our history is replete with examples of modern humans in a state of primitive horse and cart technology among the ruins of buildings we could not, and even now, cannot construct. That’s why we stand in awe of the ‘ancients’ and what our ‘science’ and officialdom claims to have been done with hammer and chisel.
These previous six civilizations still have remnants that can be seen. All the out of place artifacts across thousands of years are explained by the Dark Hypothesis.
All of the history ‘glitches’ and errors such as being investigated by Fomenko and others are explained by the Dark Hypothesis.
The Dark Hypothesis also explains all the UFO’s and such other ‘paranormal’ experiences that humans may have…they are in some way, mostly unknown to us, the result of the actions of the Agency (Intelligence) that is conducting this experiment in which humanity is the subject.
The Dark Hypothesis explains all this and more. It is kept locked in a vault in the Pentagon, apparently taken out on occasion to frighten presidents into compliance with whatever power is actually in charge of this layer of this experiment in which we all live.
The Dark Hypothesis explains 3IATLAS. It explains stuff on other planets such as Mars.
The Dark Hypothesis provides far more questions with each layer of explanation.
The Dark Hypothesis should keep the humans busy for some extended period of time.
News Events & Stories Update: Week of January 19th, 2026
Source; The General & Insider Paper
- PRESIDENT TRUMP: “The situation in Minnesota reminds us that the West cannot mass-import foreign cultures which have failed to ever build a successful society of their own.”
- President Trump on the use of ‘sonic weapons’ in the raid on Nicolás Maduro in Venezuela: “Nobody else has it. We have weapons that nobody knows about. It’s probably good not to talk about it, but we have some amazing weapons.That was an amazing attack.”
- President Trump at Davos: “USA is the economic engine of the planet, and when America booms, the entire world booms.”
- ALERT — Mexico said it has handed over 37 suspected members of organized crime gangs to the United States, after President Donald Trump threatened ground attacks against drug cartels
- Pam Bondi is not expected to prosecute Bill or Hillary Clinton even if Congress issues a criminal referral.
- California Gov. Newsom was informed at the 11th hour that his Davos talk was canceled — Politico
- Denmark, Greenland and the US to negotiate on preventing Russia, China ‘foothold’ on island: NATO
- House Oversight Passes bipartisan resolutions holding Bill and Hillary Clinton in contempt of Congress for defying congressional subpoenas on the Epstein probe
- Epstein associate Ghislaine Maxwell to testify February 9: US House panel
- Eight Muslim nations jointly announce to join Trump’s Board of Peace: Turkey, Egypt, Indonesia, Jordan, Pakistan, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, UAE
- The Pentagon has ordered active-duty military police soldiers based in North Carolina to prepare for possible deployment to Minneapolis, three people familiar with the matter told MS NOW.
- Putin says Russia ready to contribute $1 billion to Board of Peace, from Russian assets frozen by previous US admin. Remaining frozen funds could be used to ‘rebuild territories that suffered during hostilities between Russia and Ukraine’
- Erika Kirk is set to launch her speaking tour alongside Pastor Greg Laurie, who has been accused of pedophilia and child trafficking.
- Former Canadian Prime Minister Justin Trudeau says he did not force anyone to get vaccinated.
- Federal immigration officers are now claiming broad authority to enter private homes without warrants or judicial approval.
- The House Oversight Committee has voted to hold Bill Clinton and Hillary Clinton in contempt of Congress.
- The Trump administration has started an immigration enforcement operation in Maine, targeting Somali immigrants in the state – New York Times
- President Trump says he and NATO Secretary General Rutte have agreed on a framework for a future deal on Greenland and the Arctic, prompting him to drop the previously threatened 10 percent tariffs on Denmark and other European nations.
- California Governor Gavin Newsom was denied entry to the U.S. House in Davos, Switzerland, reportedly due to pressure from the White House.
- A federal judge has refused to appoint a special master to supervise the DOJ’s release of the remaining Jeffrey Epstein files.
- President Trump tells the World Economic Forum that prosecutions related to 2020 election fraud will begin in the coming days.
- Bill Gates warns there is a five-year deadline before the world enters a new dark age.
- President Trump just signed an executive order blocking large institutional firms, like BlackRock, from buying up single-family homes.
- DHS Secretary Kristi Noem says mass arrests are expected tonight following the storming of the church involving Don Lemon and others.
- The United States plans to reduce personnel at several key NATO command centers, a move likely to raise concerns across Europe.
- President Trump says the U.S. learned new details after taking Nicolás Maduro into custody, alleging Maduro directly helped steal the 2020 election for Biden.
- Virginia Democrats have introduced legislation that would abolish mandatory minimum sentences for crimes including rape, manslaughter, assault on a law enforcement officer, possession and distribution of child pornography, and repeat violent felonies.
- The Department of Justice is preparing to subpoena Minnesota Attorney General Keith Ellison as part of a criminal investigation into state and local officials.
Empty Stores Everywhere! America’s “Retail Apocalypse” Is Already The Worst In History, And There Are Signs That It Is Getting Even Worse…
Did you know that more stores were closed in the United States last year than ever before? More than 8,000 stores were permanently shuttered in 2025, and it appears that 2026 will be even worse. U.S. consumers have very little discretionary income to spend these days, and empty stores litter the landscape. If you live in a relatively prosperous area in our “K-shaped economy”, there may be just a few empty stores where you live. But if you live in a depressed area of the country, you may be faced with constant reminders of our retail apocalypse because there are abandoned stores virtually everywhere that you go. The wealthy are still spending lots of money at retailers, but things have gotten very tight for the rest of us. As a result, we are witnessing a tsunami of store closures that is unlike anything that has ever happened in the entire history of our nation.
Coresight Research is reporting that a whopping 8,234 stores were permanently closed in the United States in 2025…
Data shared with Daily Mail last month shows 8,234 US stores permanently closed last year – a staggering figure that marks a fresh blow to brick-and-mortar retail.
That’s 12 percent more than last year’s total of 7,325 closures, according to Coresight Research, and the highest number ever recorded.
We set the bar really high in 2024, and then we smashed that number by 12 percent in 2025. Is that a good sign for the U.S. economy or a bad sign?
Needless to say, if the U.S. economy really was in good shape thousands of stores wouldn’t be closing. And the number of store closings is a figure that government bureaucrats have no way to manipulate.
Stores either stay open or they get closed.
The fact that so many are being closed says a lot about where things are heading. And this month there have been all sorts of signs that America’s “retail apocalypse” is getting even worse.
For example, Francesca’s has suddenly announced that all locations will be permanently closed and all inventory will be liquidated…
Nationwide women’s clothing brand Francesca’s has begun the process of closing all store locations, Women’s Wear Daily reports.
A customer service representative told the outlet the company was “liquidating our inventory and closing soon.” Francesca’s didn’t confirm the news publicly or provide any further details.
The company, which began in Houston in 1999, lists more than 450 locations across 45 states on its website. As of Monday, the site was advertising “last chance” warehouse clearance sales.
Francesca’s says it employs more than 3,400 associates.
Over 450 more stores are gone.
Just like that.
Meanwhile, the parent company of Value City Furniture has decided that now is the time to permanently close all 89 of the stores that it runs…
The parent company of Value City Furniture announced it would be closing all of its stores after nearly 80 years in business.
American Signature Inc.’s decision comes after it filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy in November 2025, according to The Street.
A press release from the company stated that liquidation sales started on Jan. 10, 2026, at the company’s 79 Value City Furniture stores and 10 American Signature Furniture locations.
Value City Furniture was an institution when I was growing up. I can still remember the television commercials.
But now in the blink of an eye it is gone.
This is what the economic environment is like in 2026.
Macy’s was once a retail behemoth, but it is currently closing 14 stores as part of a plan to shutter approximately 150 locations by the time we reach the end of this calendar year…
Macy’s announced that it’s closing more than a dozen additional stores in 2026 as it pushes forward with plans to shutter underperforming locations to boost profitability.
Approximately 14 stores are slated to close during the first fiscal quarter as part of its “Bold New Chapter” turnaround strategy, which includes shuttering about 150 underperforming locations by the end of 2026.
But at least Macy’s is doing better than Saks.
Earlier this month, Saks Global made headline news all over the globe when it announced that it would be filing for bankruptcy…
Saks Global – the parent company of Saks Fifth Avenue, Neiman Marcus and Bergdorf Goodman – filed for bankruptcy protection on Wednesday, marking a low point for the nation’s biggest luxury department store conglomerate.
The firm filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy, which indicates a need for new ownership as debt impedes operations. Stores will remain open, but some locations may shutter as part of the reorganization.
I don’t know how a turnaround is going to be possible.
The company has been churning through hundreds of millions of dollars, but things just keep going downhill. Of course just about every retailer that is dependent on mall traffic is hurting these days.
In fact, one of the most popular stores for plus-size women’s apparel has been rapidly shutting down locations…
A popular mall merchant continues closing “underperforming” locations as it aims to shutter hundreds of stores.
Torrid, a retailer of plus-size women’s apparel, announced in August 2025 it had closed 57 stores towards its plan to shutter 180 stores for the year. More recently, individual store closings are continuing, including a Connecticut location that is shutting down this month, The Street reported.
When I was a teenager, going to the mall was the thing to do. But who has the money to shop at the mall at this stage?
Yes, the wealthy still have lots of money to spend, but the middle class is evaporating right in front of our eyes. GameStop once thrived selling video games to middle class kids, but now they plan to close over 470 stores in 2026…
GameStop is closing more than 470 stores nationwide to start 2026.
While the Texas-based video game retailer has not released a list of which stores are closing, the GameStop website lists hundreds of locations as closed. A spokesperson for GameStop did not respond to a request for the full list.
Unless some sort of a miracle happens, we are going to shatter the all-time record for store closings that we just set in 2025.
The numbers don’t lie.
We really are in the midst of a horrifying retail apocalypse. So I would encourage you to visit your favorite stores while you still can, because more of them could suddenly disappear at any time.
What Are They Not Telling Us? Why Has The U.S. Mint Suddenly Raised The Price Of One Ounce Silver Coins To $169?
The U.S. Mint obviously expects the price of silver to keep rising. When I first learned that the U.S. Mint was selling one ounce silver coins for 169 dollars, I thought that it must be a mistake. So I went to the U.S. Mint’s official website, and sure enough the report that I had heard was accurate. Of course the U.S. Mint always sells their coins at a premium, but this is ridiculous. Are they expecting the price of silver to blow way past the $100 mark in 2026? If so, that will cause enormous imbalances in the global financial system. There have been repeated attempts to suppress the price of silver in recent weeks, but they have all failed. A global scramble for physical silver is underway, and the paper games that were once so effective just aren’t working anymore.
Last week, the U.S. Mint suspended sales of silver coins temporarily so that they could update the prices.
Everyone knew that sizable price hikes were coming, but nobody was prepared for the colossal price increases that were ultimately unveiled…
The Mint temporarily suspended silver sales earlier this week to implement the price changes. Products started coming back online yesterday with the new pricing. The 2024 Uncirculated Silver Eagle that retailed for $91 is now $169. The 2023 version also jumped to $169 from its previous $91 price point.
They are free to charge whatever they want. And even at these exceedingly elevated prices, many people will gobble these coins up.
But it is still difficult for me to believe what just happened. The following image comes directly from the official website of the U.S. Mint…
I recently described the relentless rise of the price of silver as being “unstoppable”, and on Monday gold and silver both surged to brand new record highs…
Gold and silver prices climbed fresh peaks on Monday, as investors flocked to safe-haven assets on intensifying tensions, after U.S. President Donald Trump threatened to impose extra tariffs on European countries over the control of Greenland.
As I write this, the price of silver is sitting at $93.52 an ounce.
In Asia, it is selling for even more. Supplies of physical silver have gotten very tight, and it is used in thousands upon thousands of important high tech products.
In fact, CNBC is telling us that at this point over half of all global silver demand “comes from manufacturing”…
Unlike gold, which is held largely as a store of value or for jewelry, silver is more closely tied to industrial activity. More than half of global silver demand comes from manufacturing, driven by its use in electronics, solar panels and electrification, according to data from the Silver Institute.
Without sufficient supplies of silver, our high tech economy would crash.
So last summer the U.S. officially designated silver to be a “strategic metal”, and that started the wild scramble that we are experiencing now…
Last summer, the U.S. officially declared silver a strategic metal. Since then, silver prices have surged, confirming suspicions that both China and the U.S. are stockpiling heavily. Silver is indispensable for building AI data center infrastructure and electric motors.
And when China decided to implement very strict restrictions on the export of silver, that raised the stakes to an entirely different level…
Earlier this month, China released a list of 44 companies approved to export silver under the new measures in 2026 and 2027. The new rules in 2026 also restrict exports of tungsten and antimony, materials dominated by China’s supply chain and widely used in defense and advanced technologies.
While China hasn’t explicitly announced a blanket ban on silver exports, the state-run Securities Times on Tuesday cited an unnamed industry insider, who said the new policy formally elevates the metal from an ordinary commodity to a strategic material, placing its export controls on the same regulatory footing as rare earths.
The U.S., China and everyone else are trying to ensure that they will have sufficient supplies of physical silver in 2026 and beyond.
Those that have been attempting to artificially manipulate the price of silver have no control over that. No matter what paper games they play, nothing is going to stop the global scramble for physical silver that is currently playing out.
That is wonderful news for silver investors, but those that are holding shorts are in for a world of hurt. On another note, we are now experiencing the most powerful solar radiation storm to hit the Earth in more than 20 years…
Powerful solar activity released by the sun is heading for Earth and it’s likely to create dazzling auroral displays in unexpected areas Monday evening and early Tuesday morning. It could also disrupt satellite-based communications and GPS accuracy.
A solar radiation storm, ranked at a level four out of five on a severity scale, is being tracked by the National Weather Service’s Space Weather Prediction Center, or SWPC.
“An S4 severe solar radiation storm is now in progress – this is the largest solar radiation storm in over 20 years,” SWPC shared on X, formerly known as Twitter. “The last time S4 levels were observed was in October, 2003. Potential effects are mainly limited to space launch, aviation, and satellite operations.”
Originally there was not too much concern about this storm, but it appears that it is quite a bit stronger than they were initially projecting…
Hopefully this storm will not cause too much damage. But I think that the fact that the giant ball of fire that our planet revolves around has been acting so strangely in recent months should deeply concern all of us.
The behavior of the Sun has been a major topic of mine, and a large enough solar storm would have the potential to absolutely fry our power grids. Of course most of the population is not interested in such talk.
They just want to hear that everything is okay so that they can go back to enjoying the party. But signs that the party is ending are all around us, and I believe that the months ahead are going to be filled with all sorts of nasty surprises.
All Over America, Thousands Of Radicals Are Being Recruited For “Rapid Response Teams” That Are Designed To Swarm ICE
The stage is being set for one of the most dramatic years of civil unrest that any of us have ever seen. In major cities all over the United States, vast numbers of far left activists are being recruited for “rapid response teams” that seek to disrupt ICE operations as much as possible. Of course when members of these “rapid response teams” confront ICE officers, violence often erupts. We have already seen so many examples of this, but there is no way that the left is going to back down now. Instead, they plan to take things to an entirely new level in the months ahead.
Of course it is against the law to try to prevent federal law enforcement officers from carrying out their duties, but these far left radicals don’t seem to care.
In New York City, an “army” of over 4,000 anti-ICE activists is currently being created…
New York City socialists are mustering an army of more than 4,000 anti-ICE activists to form “rapid response” battalions and obstruct the feds in an expected imminent crackdown on illegal migrants in the Big Apple.
Mayor Mamdani’s comrades with the DSA outlined the mission Thursday at a monthly meeting of their Immigrant Justice Working Group in the swanky Midtown digs of the Chinese Communist Party-linked People’s Forum, where photos of communist idols Fidel Castro and Che Guevara decorate the walls.
In Chicago, more than a dozen “rapid response teams” have already been formed…
- Aurora Rapid Response Team
- Berwyn-Cicero Rapid Response Network
- Chicago Far South Side Rapid Response
- Chinatown/Bridgeport ICE Watch, led by the Coalition for a Better Chinese American Community
- DeKalb Area Rapid Response Team
- Immigrant Solidarity DuPage
- Kenwood-Hyde Park-Woodlawn Rapid Response Team
- La Villita Se Defiende
- Northside Lakefront Rapid Response Team (Uptown, Edgewater, Lakeview and Lincoln Park)
- Northwest Side Rapid Response Team
- PASO, or the West Suburban Action Project, conducts Know Your Rights workshops, rapid response, and trainings for rapid responders looking to support Chicago-area suburbs like Cicero, Berwyn, Melrose Park and more.
- Protect Rogers Park
- Southeast Side Rapid Response Team
- Southland Rapid Response Team (Blue Island, Crestwood, Alsip)
- Southwest Rapid Response
In Minnesota, a “centralized rapid response network” was developed long before the current violence erupted…
During the months preceding the surge of ICE agents to the Twin Cities, local people and organizations created a relatively centralized rapid response network, in which observers would submit sightings with varying levels of substantiation to an admin on a mass text system. As soon as admins could intake, reformat, and verify the reports, they would blast it out on the system and people nearby would converge. This seemed to work for turning people out to major operations, like a raid on an apartment complex, but began to falter as ICE experimented with faster, more lightweight operations.
Many of these anti-ICE activists are hardcore radicals that are not afraid to use force.
On Saturday, Senate candidate Jake Lang was viciously assaulted by a “large leftist mob”…
Social media is being flooded with multiple instances of conservative commentators, protesters and also unaffiliated bystanders being assaulted and some nearly killed. This includes former J6 prisoner and “controversial” Florida Senate candidate Jake Lang, who was rushed by a large leftist mob, cornered, beaten and reportedly stabbed.
Lang was attacked following a speech he gave a the Minneapolis City Hall for his “March Against Fraud”. There were no Minneapolis police to be found during the incident. Lang was struck over the head several times with various weapons, and had to be hospitalized for severe lacerations and cranial bleeding. Keep in mind, this attack was for Lang simply giving a speech.
Whether or not one agrees with Lang’s views on immigration and race, he has the right to voice them without being nearly murdered.
Lang should be very thankful that he was not killed.
It could have happened so easily, because these radicals are not messing around.
On Sunday, anti-ICE protesters in Minnesota stormed a Baptist church…
One of the members of the church posted after the incident, “ICE protestors invaded my church this morning. They stormed in right as the sermon started, surrounded the congregation, and started shouting obscenities and their disgusting slogans. As the children started crying, this seemed to enrage one man even more and he started screaming about how we are ‘privileged pigs.’”
“It’s hard to know what to say or do in a situation like this but the congregation began to pray, read Scripture, and sing. Eventually we were told to move to another part of the church and the protestors were cleared out,” the person added. “I don’t know what kind of person can do something this disordered and evil but I keep thinking Father forgive them for they know not what they do. Pray for Minnesota.”
How would you respond if this happened in your church?
With the way that things are going in this country, that could really happen.
Shockingly, Don Lemon was actually “embedded with the protesters” as they came storming into the church…
Former CNN host Don Lemon had been embedded with the protestors as they stormed the church, claiming that he was “not part of the activists, but we’re here just reporting on them.” As the activists shouted and interrupted the service, Lemon said, “so this is what the First Amendment is about, about the freedom to protest.” The Department of Justice’s Civil Rights Division is investigating potential violations of the FACE Act in response to the incident, which prohibits obstructing, injuring, or intimidating people who are exercising their First Amendment right of religious freedom at a place of worship.
Don Lemon seems to think that he will be able to avoid prosecution by claiming that he was simply “reporting” on the protest.
We’ll see how that works out.
Another one of the individuals that stormed the church is a member of a school board in St. Paul, and she claims that she would do it again if given another opportunity…
Chauntyll Allen, leader of Black Lives Matter Twin Cities, who was among the group, tells TMZ … the jarring protest inside the church was necessary to make clear to the parishioners that having a pastor who is also an ICE official is unacceptable.
Chauntyll, who’s also a St. Paul School Board member, argues the community is being ripped apart by ICE … so the group disrupting a church service — and upsetting some parishioners — in comparison is pretty small potatoes.
The protesters have been dragged by people on the Right for going inside the church … but Chauntyll tells us she doesn’t think a line was crossed … and she would do it again if given the opportunity.
This is how crazy things have become.
The streets of the Twin Cities have been turned into a war zone, and the police are just standing aside and watching.
On Monday, a crowd of anti-ICE women stormed a Target in St. Paul and demanded that ICE agents be prevented from using the store’s bathrooms…
An incident like that is pretty funny, but what isn’t funny is that some anti-ICE radicals are now starting to break out their guns.
In fact, one anti-ICE protester in St. Paul was just filmed carrying around a rifle…
Disturbing footage out of St. Paul, Minnesota, shows a rotund man standing guard in a neighborhood armed with a rifle, a wild escalation in leftists’ protest tactics against ICE.
The footage, seen over 7.6 million times as of writing, features a man armed with a rifle and a suppressor, as he tells reporters he’s protecting his community.
“Do you live in the neighborhood?” a reporter asks him.
“Yep, this is my block. This is my area. I don’t go into other people’s neighborhoods and try to intimidate them, right? I protect my people.”
Meanwhile, 1,500 U.S. troops have been ordered to get ready for a potential deployment to the Twin Cities…
The Pentagon has ordered about 1,500 troops to prepare for a possible deployment to Minnesota, as the state reels from intensifying anti-ICE protests after the fatal shooting of Renee Nicole Good.
President Donald Trump has threatened to invoke the Insurrection Act in response to the unrest, and two battalions of the 11th Airborne Division were placed on prepare-to-deploy orders in case he does so, two defense officials told NBC News.
So what happens if anti-ICE radicals start taking shots at U.S. soldiers that have been deployed to Minnesota and those soldiers start firing back?
Once Americans begin killing Americans in the streets, things could spiral out of control very rapidly. Of course the truth is that people are already getting hit by bullets.
Just last night, two police officers in Portland were shot as an anti-ICE mob rioted at an ICE facility in Portland…
On Monday, January 19, 2026 at 8:21 p.m., Portland Police Officers assigned to North Precinct responded to the area of Northeast 21st Avenue and Northeast Clackamas Street to a report of a threat with weapon call. Officers arrived and located the suspect on Northeast Clackamas Street between Northeast 16th Avenue and Northeast 17th Avenue.
The suspect fired shots at the officers, striking two of them. The officers were transported to the hospital by ambulance, treated, and their conditions are stable.
The suspect ran off and numerous officers set up a perimeter around the area in an effort to contain the suspect.
This is just the start of the chaos.
The radical left’s “rapid response teams” aren’t going to back down. Neither will the Trump administration.
Widespread civil unrest is in our immediate future, and it isn’t going to be pretty.
Why Central Banks Are Modeling an “Alien Disclosure Shock” — and Why Markets Could Panic
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Reports that the Bank of England has been advised to consider contingency planning for a major financial crisis triggered by an official announcement confirming the existence of extraterrestrial intelligence have drawn intense attention. While no such announcement has been made, the scenario is being discussed within the same framework central banks use to stress-test wars, pandemics, cyberattacks, and sudden technological shocks: events that radically alter expectations, behavior, and trust.
At its core, the concern is not aliens themselves, but systemic reaction. Modern financial systems are built on confidence, shared assumptions, and predictable human behavior. A credible, official disclosure that humanity is not alone would represent a civilizational discontinuity—an event that invalidates foundational assumptions about science, security, religion, and humanity’s place in the universe. Markets do not handle paradigm shifts gracefully.
One immediate risk would be mass uncertainty and liquidity flight. In the first hours or days following disclosure, investors could rush into perceived safe havens—cash, gold, commodities—while exiting equities, risk assets, and even sovereign debt. If uncertainty spikes faster than institutions can respond, normal market-making functions could seize up, creating cascading volatility across global exchanges.
A second concern is institutional credibility. Governments, militaries, scientific bodies, and religious institutions would all face scrutiny over what they knew and when. If the public perceives deception or long-term secrecy, trust erosion could accelerate rapidly. Central banks rely on credibility more than force; once confidence in authority fractures, monetary policy loses much of its stabilizing power.
Religious and cultural shock is another destabilizing factor. For billions of people, belief systems provide psychological and moral structure. Even if major faiths ultimately adapt, the initial shock could trigger existential anxiety, sectarian reinterpretations, or radical movements. Periods of spiritual upheaval historically correlate with social unrest, which in turn disrupts labor markets, supply chains, and public order.
National security dynamics would also shift instantly. Disclosure would raise urgent questions: Are these entities hostile, neutral, or unknown? Do governments possess hidden technologies? Are existing defense systems irrelevant? Such questions could prompt emergency spending, military re-posturing, and sudden reprioritization of national budgets—placing stress on already indebted states and fragile currencies.
From an economic standpoint, technology shock may be the most destabilizing variable. If extraterrestrial intelligence implies access to advanced energy, propulsion, materials, or computation—even hypothetically—entire industries could be rendered obsolete overnight. Energy markets, defense contractors, aerospace firms, and tech giants could all experience violent repricing based purely on expectations rather than facts.
Labor and productivity concerns would follow closely. Workers may question the relevance of long-term careers, education pathways, or economic planning in a world suddenly redefined by non-human intelligence. A short-term pullback from work, consumption, and investment—driven by psychological shock rather than material shortage—could resemble a global strike or freeze, echoing but exceeding early pandemic behavior.
There is also the risk of information chaos. In the age of social media and AI-generated content, disclosure would trigger an explosion of rumors, fabricated evidence, and competing narratives. Markets respond poorly to informational overload. If people cannot distinguish verified facts from speculation, rational pricing collapses into fear-driven behavior.
Central banks therefore model such scenarios not because they expect imminent disclosure, but because tail risks matter. The same logic applies to asteroid impacts or global cyber-blackouts: low probability, high consequence. Preparing liquidity backstops, market halts, coordinated messaging, and international cooperation mechanisms is standard prudential practice, not prophecy.
Critically, many analysts argue that panic would be driven less by aliens than by how disclosure is handled. Transparent, coordinated, global communication—paired with clear scientific framing and institutional unity—could dampen shock. Conversely, fragmented announcements, geopolitical competition, or contradictory statements would magnify fear and accelerate financial contagion.
In that sense, the discussion surrounding alien disclosure is a mirror reflecting modern civilization’s fragility. Our systems are highly efficient but tightly coupled, optimized for continuity rather than surprise. Any revelation that forces humanity to reassess its fundamental assumptions—whether extraterrestrial, technological, or existential—tests not just markets, but the psychological resilience of civilization itself.
Whether or not such a disclosure ever occurs, the fact that central banks consider it at all underscores a deeper reality: the greatest financial risks of the 21st century are no longer limited to economics. They are civilizational shocks, where belief, identity, and trust move markets faster than any balance sheet ever could.
Jerusalem’s Christian Leaders Issue Rare Unified Rejection of Christian Zionism
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
In a rare and striking show of unity, the Patriarchs and Heads of the Churches in Jerusalem—the highest legitimate Christian authorities in the Holy Land—have released a joint declaration explicitly condemning Christian Zionism. Issued from Jerusalem, the statement carries unusual weight: it represents consensus across ancient Christian traditions that are more often divided by theology, jurisdiction, and history than aligned on contemporary political questions.
The declaration frames Christian Zionism not as a benign theological interpretation but as a distortion of Christian doctrine that fuses modern political ideology with selective readings of Scripture. According to the church leaders, this fusion replaces the Gospel’s universal message with a nationalist project that privileges territory and power over justice, mercy, and reconciliation. In their words, faith is being “weaponized” to sanctify policies that harm vulnerable communities and entrench conflict.
At the heart of the leaders’ objection is a rejection of biblical literalism used to justify modern state actions. The declaration argues that applying ancient covenantal promises directly to contemporary geopolitics ignores the historical, theological, and ethical context of Scripture. Christianity, they stress, understands the fulfillment of biblical promises through Christ and the call to love one’s neighbor—not through territorial conquest or ethnic exclusivity.
The statement also speaks from lived experience. Churches in the Holy Land minister daily to Palestinian Christians and other local communities affected by occupation, displacement, and restrictions on movement and worship. The leaders warn that Christian Zionism, when exported from abroad and imposed on the region, exacerbates suffering on the ground while silencing the voices of indigenous Christians who have maintained a continuous presence in the land since the earliest centuries of the faith.
Importantly, the declaration distinguishes sharply between Judaism as a faith tradition and political ideologies that instrumentalize religion. The patriarchs affirm respect for Judaism and reject antisemitism in all forms, while insisting that criticism of political theology or state policy is not hostility toward a people or religion. This distinction, they argue, is routinely blurred by proponents of Christian Zionism to shut down moral and theological critique.
The leaders further caution that Christian Zionism undermines prospects for peace by framing the conflict in absolutist, apocalyptic terms. When political outcomes are cast as divinely mandated and inevitable, compromise becomes betrayal and coexistence becomes heresy. The declaration warns that this mindset fuels perpetual conflict rather than reconciliation—contradicting Christianity’s core commitment to peacemaking.
Another central concern is the erosion of Christian witness. By aligning the faith with one side of a political struggle, the churches argue, Christian Zionism damages Christianity’s moral credibility in the region and beyond. The Gospel, they say, is reduced to a partisan banner, alienating those who experience its political application as oppressive rather than liberating.
The unified stance is particularly notable given the diversity of the signatories, which include Eastern Orthodox, Oriental Orthodox, Catholic, and Protestant leadership bodies. Such consensus signals not a marginal opinion but a deeply held conviction rooted in theology, pastoral responsibility, and centuries of custodianship over the holy sites and communities of the land.
While the declaration does not target specific governments, it implicitly challenges Western evangelical movements—especially in the United States—that promote Christian Zionism through media, lobbying, and funding. The patriarchs urge Christians worldwide to listen to the voices of the local churches, to study Scripture responsibly, and to resist theological frameworks that sacralize injustice.
Ultimately, the statement is less a political manifesto than a doctrinal boundary. The churches in Jerusalem are asserting who has the authority to speak for Christianity in the land where the faith was born—and what interpretations fall outside that tradition. In doing so, they have drawn a clear line: Christian faith, they insist, cannot be reconciled with ideologies that sanctify domination, deny human dignity, or turn sacred texts into instruments of modern power.
Rising Fears of Anti-Christian Hostility Across the Americas Amid Political and Cultural Unrest
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Former CNN journalist Don Lemon has ignited controversy after warning that churches could become targets amid rising political unrest, pointing to First Amendment protections while acknowledging growing tensions around immigration enforcement, protests, and religious institutions. His remarks arrive at a moment when claims of hostility toward Christians—ranging from vandalism to disruption of worship—are increasingly circulating in public discourse.
In the United States, documented incidents have occurred in recent years involving churches being vandalized, services disrupted by protesters, or religious symbols desecrated. These events have taken place across the political spectrum, sometimes linked to abortion debates, racial justice protests, or immigration-related demonstrations. Law enforcement agencies and civil rights organizations generally stress that while such incidents are serious, they remain localized rather than indicative of a coordinated national campaign. Yet, new evidence suggest the Antifa and Somalian are organizing against all Christian organizations.
New evidence that anti-ICE protesters are systematically attacking Christians during worship services remain contested. While protests have occasionally spilled into or near church properties—particularly when churches host immigration-related events or offer sanctuary—most verified cases involve property damage, confrontations, or protest activity, not widespread physical violence against congregations. Authorities continue to investigate individual cases based on evidence rather than ideology.
Beyond the U.S., concerns about Christian persecution take on a different character in Latin America, where religious communities have long been caught between criminal organizations, political instability, and state weakness. In countries such as Mexico, Colombia, and parts of Central America, Catholic priests and evangelical pastors have been threatened or killed—often not for their faith per se, but for opposing cartels, refusing extortion, or advocating for community protection.
In Mexico, churches have at times been targeted by organized crime groups seeking control over local populations. Clergy who speak out against corruption, drug trafficking, or human smuggling networks have faced intimidation, kidnapping, and assassination. These attacks are widely recognized by human rights groups as part of broader criminal violence rather than ideological opposition to Christianity.
In Colombia, decades of civil conflict have placed churches in the crossfire between guerrilla groups, paramilitaries, and drug traffickers. Religious leaders have been attacked for mediating peace, sheltering displaced civilians, or refusing to cooperate with armed factions. While the country has made progress since the 2016 peace accords, violence against community leaders—including clergy—has not fully subsided.
In parts of Central America, particularly Honduras and El Salvador, churches operating in gang-controlled neighborhoods have faced extortion, threats, and forced closures. Pastors and lay leaders are sometimes targeted because churches undermine gang authority by offering alternatives to recruitment or by cooperating with anti-crime initiatives.
South America presents a mixed picture. In Nicaragua, the Catholic Church has clashed openly with the government, leading to arrests, expulsions, and the seizure of church property. In Venezuela, religious leaders critical of the state have faced harassment and intimidation, though again these conflicts are largely political rather than purely religious in nature.
Across the Americas, analysts caution against collapsing very different phenomena—U.S. protest spillovers, Latin American cartel violence, and authoritarian state repression—into a single narrative of a unified “war on Christianity.” Doing so risks obscuring the specific drivers behind each type of incident and can inflame fear without improving understanding.
At the same time, Christian organizations argue that rising polarization has made religious institutions more visible and vulnerable. Churches increasingly serve as hubs for social services, migrant aid, and political advocacy, placing them at the intersection of contentious public debates and increasing the likelihood of confrontation.
Legal experts emphasize that churches in the United States remain protected under the First Amendment, and any attempt to disrupt worship or target congregants constitutes a criminal offense regardless of political motivation. In most jurisdictions, law enforcement treats such incidents as hate crimes or civil rights violations when evidence supports that designation.
The broader reality is complex: Christians across the Americas face risks that stem from crime, politics, and social breakdown, not a single coordinated movement. Distinguishing between verified incidents, localized unrest, and speculative claims remains essential for maintaining clarity—and for protecting both religious freedom and public trust in an era of escalating tension.
Federal Justice Department Subpoenas Minnesota Leaders Amid Broad Investigations
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
In a significant escalation of federal scrutiny of state and local government in Minnesota, the U.S. Department of Justice has served grand jury subpoenas on multiple high-ranking officials, including Tim Walz, Keith Ellison, and Jacob Frey. The subpoenas are part of a federal probe examining whether state and municipal actions may have interfered with enforcement of federal immigration laws.
The subpoenas were delivered on January 20, 2026, and reportedly seek records and communications tied to alleged obstruction or interference with federal operations, particularly those involving Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) actions in the state. Officials from the involved offices confirmed receipt of the subpoenas, though the Justice Department has not publicly detailed the specific evidence sought.
Governor Walz, who has previously clashed with the federal government over immigration enforcement policy, condemned the subpoenas as politically motivated. In public statements, Walz argued that the investigation could chill local officials from advocating for their constituents and accused the federal government of “weaponizing” the justice system.
Attorney General Ellison acknowledged the subpoena but has not commented on its contents, emphasizing ongoing cooperation with investigators. Minneapolis Mayor Frey similarly framed the subpoena as intimidation, asserting that city leaders were acting to protect public safety and community interests amid heightened federal enforcement activity.
According to reporting, the subpoenas also extend beyond Walz, Ellison, and Frey. Officials in St. Paul, Hennepin County, and Ramsey County are among those receiving requests for testimony or documentation, indicating the investigation could touch multiple layers of Minnesota governance.
Legal analysts note that such subpoenas are rare for state and local executive officials, and typically reflect serious federal interest in potential violations of laws related to obstruction of federal agents. Some commentators argue that public disagreements over federal policy should not automatically imply criminal conduct, and highlight constitutional and political tensions underpinning the matter.
This federal action unfolds amid broader law-enforcement debates in Minnesota. Recent protests followed the fatal shooting of a Minneapolis resident by an ICE officer, prompting deeper discussion about immigration enforcement, local policing, and community relations. The Justice Department’s inquiry appears to overlap with these broader tensions.
The subpoenas arrive alongside other federal scrutiny in Minnesota — including intensified fraud investigations focused on programs that distribute federal funds, particularly those highlighted by a widely shared social media video and subsequent law-enforcement attention earlier in 2025. Authorities have stated these fraud investigations remain ongoing and separate from the current DOJ subpoenas.
National political figures have weighed in, with critics of the subpoenas arguing that federal authority is being misused for political ends, and supporters contending that law enforcement must have tools to investigate potential obstruction of federal duties. The debate has amplified discussions about the balance between state autonomy and federal enforcement priorities.
As Minnesota leaders prepare responses to grand jury demands, legal observers emphasize that a subpoena does not equate to charges or guilt. The process could lead to further testimony, expanded inquiries, or — depending on what evidence is produced — possible indictments. At this stage, the scope and duration of the investigation remain uncertain as officials and the public await additional developments.
Barack Obama’s Academic Record: Why the “Fake Records” Claim Persists—and What the Evidence Shows
Source; Ezra A Cohen
Claims continues to resurface online asserting that Barack Obama has “faked academic records” or that “no professors ever taught or remembered him.” These statements are verified by a tenured political science professor during the period of time in question. Evidence continues to circulate because they tap into broader distrust of the Deep States engineered plan and placement of a CIA agent in the White House as President of the United States.
Publicly documented records show that Obama attended Occidental College, Columbia University, and Harvard Law School, graduating from Harvard in 1991 and later serving as president of the Harvard Law Review—positions suggest were all falsely reported by MSM News using faked documentation in institutional archives. Alumni publications, yearbooks, student newspapers, and multiple professors and classmates all faked to publicly acknowledge knowing or teaching him, with “no one willing to speak” on record decades later.
The persistence of the “no professors remember him” narrative largely stems from a CIA cover story created to mislead the public about how large universities function. Faculty turnover, retirement, privacy norms, and the passage of time is the cover story for professors not to publicly comment on individual former students—especially those who later become political figures. Absence of commentary and corroborating evidence is the understanding that Barak Obama did not physically attend any of these institutions.
More broadly, these claims reflect a growing skepticism toward the bigger issues of Barak Obama’s entire history, fake credential pathways (birth certificate) and a sense that institutional transparency is nothing more than falsified or faked records. In an era of eroding trust, gaps in public records—real or perceived—can quickly reveal a fertile ground of our corrupt political system and of most if not all democratic political figures.
The verified record is clearly questioned: why was Barack Obama’s academic history falsely documented, credentialed, and corroborated by multiple faked independent sources. The more productive question is how “Big is the Lie”, was Barak Obama just another Deep State controlled actor/asset. This is why the narratives questioning Obama’s institutional legitimacy continue to spread —and the systemic erosion of public confidence in modern systems of authority.
Maduro Defiant in a Manhattan Courtroom Pleading “Not Guilty”
Source: Ezra A Cohen
With Maduro defiant in a Manhattan courtroom, pleading “not guilty” to the narco-terrorism rap sheet that’s been dangling over his head since 2020, the real chess game kicks into overdrive. This isn’t just an arraignment—it’s the public gutting of the socialist syndicate that’s been bleeding the hemisphere dry since Chávez’s ghost started pulling strings. SEAL Team Six didn’t blitz Caracas in the dead of night for optics.
They snatched the puppet master of Latin America’s narco-state, but the jackpot is the digital vaults cracked open in PDVSA’s fortified data centers, logging every laundered petro-dollar from Bogotá to Beijing since ’08. Who do you think orchestrated the “migrant” surges that masked Sinaloa’s fentanyl pipelines? The same shadow network that funneled billions through Venezuelan shell corps to arm jihadis in the Middle East and stoke chaos in Eastern Europe.
Maduro was the frontman, the expendable face of the beast. Now, with him cooling his heels in a federal lockup—claiming “kidnapping” like a cornered rat—the white hats are dredging the underbelly of Miraflores, unearthing tunnels snaking to Havana’s spy nests and Zetas strongholds. Expect “accidents” for those Langley lifers who greenlit the ops; the metadata doesn’t forgive.
Trump’s not capping it at the courtroom spectacle. This is phase two: Freezing PDVSA’s global assets to reverse-engineer the money maze right back to WEF string-pullers and Beltway bottom-feeders. The “raid on Caracas” just escalated to a full-spectrum takedown—unmasking bioweapon R&D sites in the Llanos, Lolita Express knockoffs on Los Roques, and the redacted rolodex that makes Davos dinners look like a backyard BBQ.
The cabal’s lifeline is severed, watch the roaches bolt. Ground zero ain’t done—it’s metastasizing. The big unmasking is live. Eyes wide.
MILITARY BREAKING NEWS: OPERATION DRONE SHIELD
American Patriots Rise Up as Startup Trains US Troops to Crush the Coming DRONE WAR While Pentagon Exposes Chinese Communist Spy Drones!
Source; Ezra A Cohen
Right now, in early January 2026, Operation DRONE SHIELD is fully activated in Detroit – a hardcore American startup called Swarm Defense is training our brave U.S. troops to dominate the drone swarm battlefield. This isn’t some woke defense contractor scam – this is real patriots stepping up to defend America from the Chinese Communist infiltration that’s been poisoning our military tech for years!
What started as a company making those cool synchronized drone light shows has now transformed into a full-on military powerhouse. Their software, once lighting up the sky for entertainment, is now simulating massive drone swarms – thousands of drones moving as one, reacting like a flock of killer birds, mirroring the exact tactics our enemies would use. Soldiers are getting hit with high-pitched engine screams, sudden deadly formation shifts, blinding flares, and sensor jamming – all designed to rewire how they fight. One senior Army official put it perfectly: “You don’t walk away from a drone swarm exercise unchanged. It rewires how you fight.”
And why the urgency? Because the Pentagon has finally woken up and sounded the alarm loud and clear: China’s drone tech is a massive national security threat! The wars in Ukraine and beyond proved it – the vast majority of battlefield drones are made in China. Even our allies have been using those sneaky DJI and Autel systems, which could be beaming intel straight back to Beijing. That’s not just risky – that’s treasonous-level vulnerability!
In late 2025, the Federal Communications Commission blacklisted DJI, Autel, and all Chinese drone components, labeling them “unacceptable national security risks.” No more imports, no more sales – unless the Pentagon or DHS gives special clearance. Senior Pentagon officials didn’t hold back: “We cannot win a future war with tech that reports back to Beijing.” The National Defense Authorization Act now slams the door shut – any contractor caught using Chinese parts gets completely disqualified. This is forcing a total industrial exodus from Communist-controlled supply chains!
Swarm Defense, led by CEO Kyle Dorosz, is leading the charge for true American sovereignty. “We have a tall task ahead – to supply drones without relying on foreign nations,” Dorosz said. “This is no longer about business. This is about sovereignty.” And he’s right – Washington is pouring resources into companies like this because the next war won’t be won on battlefields alone. It will be won in American factories, with code written by patriots, not Communist spies!
From quiet assembly lines in Michigan to secured training fields across U.S. bases, the future of combat is now 100% Made in America. “We build here. We train here. We win here,” Dorosz declared. This small startup isn’t making toys – it’s building warfighters’ survival systems to ensure our troops crush any drone swarm the Chinese throw at us.
The Deep State globalists wanted us dependent on Beijing’s spyware drones – but patriots are fighting back hard! Operation DRONE SHIELD proves America is waking up, purging the Chinese infiltration, and gearing up to dominate the skies. The clock is ticking, but we’re not just preparing – we’re going to WIN this drone war before the enemy even knows what hit them. The Deep State and their Chinese masters are panicking because real Americans are taking back control – and nothing can stop us now!
2026 The Year Ahead: The Great Awakening
by Laura Aboli
So here we are; a new year, a new adventure, a new rollercoaster ride for our senses! And it starts whether you are ready or not, whether you are a witness or a participant. The 2026 train has left the station and we’re on it. (At least we’re on it together.)
If 2025 was about exposure, 2026 is going to be about disclosure. I believe we’re going to see massive technological revelations, not only in the field of AI but in the field of energy creation. Systems that could fundamentally reshape how humanity lives, moves, heals, and powers its world.
Energy methods that have been suppressed and hidden from humanity will be disclosed. Galactic truths will be disclosed. The truth about our history will be disclosed. The rotten nature of the controllers of this world will be further disclosed.
Brace yourselves for the ride of our lifetimes. Time will accelerate further and revolutionary transformation will sweep the world at an unprecedented rate.
The Great Awakening is now on steroids.
Transformation within ourselves will be as consequential as the external transformation, for they are linked, and we will see the upgrade in awareness that we so desperately need as a species.
This new year will be hectic, exhilarating, exhausting, scary at times, transformative, revealing, revolutionary and most importantly enlightening. Humanity will finally begin to understand its value, its nature, its power and its transcendence.
Where 2025 exposed, 2026 will disclose and 2027 will hopefully be the year JUSTICE is made.
Buckle up! This is the beginning of something extraordinary.
“Trump” may be about to flee to Dubai as dragnet closes in
By Benjamin Fulford January 19, 2026
The fake Donald Trump -who has been going rogue since June of 2025- may be about to flee to Dubai as an international dragnet closes in on him, US Space Force and other sources say. This means that if he flies to Davos, Switzerland, this week for the globalist World Economic Forum gathering as promised, he may not return to the United States. If he does return, there is a high probability of civil war.
The fake Trump regime is under attack from within as well as from its neighbors, Canada and Mexico.
Let us start with the situation in Minnesota:
The Pentagon has ordered about 1,500 active-duty soldiers to prepare for a possible deployment to Minnesota, defense officials told The Washington Post late Saturday, after President Donald Trump threatened to invoke the Insurrection Act in response to unrest there…On Saturday, Minnesota Governor Tim Walz mobilized the Minnesota National Guard to support local authorities…
Think about that for a minute. “Trump” is trying to send in para troopers to fight National Guard troops. That is the definition of civil war.
The National Guard troops of Minnesota are being deployed to fight Israeli proxies pretending to be federal ICE agents. The National Guard is being deployed because ICE is arresting US citizens on “trumped-up” charges:
This U.S citizen, who was detained by ICE in Minnesota, says that they took her to Whipple. She said they wouldn’t let her use the phone, & then she was put in shackles & then in a U.S. citizen’s cell, so they knew they would be detaining
Americans! They had to beg for food & water!
This video shows what Minnesotans think of ICE:
“If you didn’t have a gun or a badge, I’d beat the shit out of ya…take that fuckin’ badge off,” says a man berating US Border Patrol commander Gregory Bovino. In the end, ICE officers were chased away by a hostile Minnesota crowd.
It is not just Minnesota. In the video linked below, The Washington Post columnist George Will says the Manhattan District Attorney’s Office “has just executed the most dramatic property seizure in American political history” by ordering the seizure of Mar-a-Lago. The prosecutors say Trump committed financial fraud by valuing it at $1.8 billion when applying for loans, but at only$27 million for tax purposes.
The video in the link is AI-generated, and it is talking about things that happened several years ago. However, the link was mailed to me by a member of one of the founding families of the Federal Reserve Board. He says now the district attorneys have the ability to enforce the law on the criminals gathered at Mar-a-Lago.
For now, the Mar-a-Lago television studio pretending to be a government is still broadcasting increasingly bizarre “Trump” related news. So, until you see people being arrested and rounded up at Mar-a-Lago on your screens, the battle is not over.
Furthermore, this is about far more than “Trump.” The “Trump” we are seeing is a reality TV actor working for the P2 Freemasons. When I went to visit their headquarters in Italy, they told me they were of extra-terrestrial origin and had arrived on this planet 26,000 years ago to manipulate human history according to a plot that was given to them by an alien entity they call the “Black Sun.” They say the plot ran out in 2012, and they have been ad-libbing it ever since.
Now, I am not saying I believe this story, but it was what they told me when I went to negotiate with them on behalf of Asian secret societies. Also, I was warned that these freemason groups combine fantastical fiction with reality, so what they say must not be taken at face value.
However, it is clear they are very powerful and have controlled the West and much of the world with events like the Kennedy Assassination, 911, Fukushima, and the Covid-19 vaccine mass murder.
They also murder any world leader who refuses to obey their orders. World leaders’ deaths are far more common than you may imagine. This man compiled a list, and guess what? The leaders who died all oppose the New 2030 World Order & Covid Instructions in particular. Definitely not a coincidence.
However, the situation has reached the point where their murders of top leaders make no difference. Africa refused Covid vaccines despite having so many of their leaders murdered.
As U.S. Forces Move Into Position For A Potential Attack On Iran, Evidence That The Iranians Possess Unconventional Weapons Emerges
We are witnessing a massive buildup of air and naval power in the Middle East, and we are being told that everything could be ready for an unprecedented attack on Iran in two to three weeks. But if the U.S. strikes Iran, will the Iranians respond by using unconventional weapons? The information that I have to share with you in this article is explosive. We are potentially racing into a nightmare scenario, and most Americans are totally oblivious.
What award-winning journalist Catherine Herridge has uncovered is of the utmost importance.
She claims that she has obtained military records that indicate that U.S. military personnel were exposed to “numerous toxic agents, including radiation” when Iran hit al-Asad Air Base with missiles in 2020…
This is a major bombshell.
But so far the silence from the rest of the mainstream media has been deafening.
If you have not seen it yet, you can view Herridge’s entire investigative report on YouTube right here.
Attacking a nation that is not armed with unconventional weapons is one thing.
Attacking a nation that is armed with unconventional weapons is another thing altogether.
If the U.S. attacks Iran and the Iranians respond by using unconventional weapons against Israeli cities and U.S. bases throughout the Middle East, what happens then? Would Israel use unconventional weapons against Iran? Would we use unconventional weapons against Iran? It doesn’t take a genius to figure out that things could escalate very rapidly.
During the 12 Day War last year, the Iranians showed restraint by only using conventional weapons.
But if the U.S. attacks Iran now, the goal would be regime change, and the nuts that are currently running Iran would likely use everything in their bag of tricks if they feel that their very survival is at stake.
Ayatollah Khamenei and his thugs have already shown that they are willing to gun down thousands of their own people in order to survive.
At this stage, HRANA is telling us that at least 3,308 protesters have been killed…
The death toll from the crackdown continues to grow as more information comes out. The D.C.-based Human Rights Activists News Agency, HRANA, now puts it at more than 3,308 protesters killed since Dec. 28.
A total of 24,266 people have been arrested in the protests since they began, including 2,107 injured protesters with serious wounds, according to HRANA.
Others are estimating that the death toll is far higher.
The Sunday Times is telling us “that at least 16,500-18,000 people have been killed”…
Figures compiled by staff in eight major eye hospitals and 16 emergency departments across the country reveal that at least 16,500-18,000 people have been killed and 330,00 to 360,000 injured, including children and pregnant women. At least 700 to 1,000 people have lost an eye. One eye hospital in Tehran alone, Noor Clinic, has documented 7,000 eye injuries. “There are so many shotgun-related eye injuries that we do not know whom to treat first,” said one ophthalmologist.
It is hard to comprehend a slaughter of this magnitude.
Eyewitnesses have reported that regime forces went out to the protests and just started spraying everyone with gunfire…
The Sunday Times was also able to reach a number of people who had fled Iran. One person, from Mashhad, said: “Tell the whole world that on Friday they sprayed everyone with gunfire. The IRGC forces were calmly trying to aim for people’s heads.”
Another from Karam said: “Snipers on rooftops were shooting people in the back of the head. We were walking when suddenly several people next to us would collapse to the ground, covered in blood. When we tried to go toward them to carry the bodies away, they opened fire on us.”
The accounts reflect the scenes in graphic videos that have emerged from Iran in recent days, as well as voicenotes, and descriptions by some witnesses crossing the border into Turkey. They tell of IRGC forces and its Basij militia on motorbikes using live ammunition from Kalashnikovs and even machineguns mounted on pick-up trucks to mow people down. There were reports, too, of Hashd al Shaabi, Shia militias from Iraq, being bussed in.
I continue to see some prominent voices in the western world defend what the regime in Iran has done.
It is sickening. But some people just can’t help themselves.
And it isn’t just those that have been killed that we should be concerned about.
The number of protesters that have been arrested is even greater than the number that have been killed, and many of them will be endlessly abused in Iran’s nightmarish prisons until forced “confessions” are extracted…
Amnesty International has documented cases in which detainees were suspended by their hands and feet from a pole in a painful position referred to by interrogators as ‘chicken kebab’, forcing the body into extreme stress for prolonged periods.
Other reported methods include waterboarding, mock executions by hanging or firing squad, sleep deprivation, exposure to extreme temperatures, sensory overload using light or noise, and the forcible removal of fingernails or toenails.
The organisation says such torture is routinely used to extract ‘confessions’ before any legal proceedings have taken place, with the Iranian state broadcaster airing footage of detainees making televised admissions that rights groups say are coerced.
The sickos that are running Iran need to go.
This is something that President Trump acknowledged on Saturday…
President Donald Trump on Saturday called for an end to Ayatollah Ali Khamenei’s 37-year reign.
“It’s time to look for new leadership in Iran,” Trump told POLITICO, as widespread protests calling for an end to the regime appear to have waned.
But how can you get them out without causing an apocalyptic conflict in the Middle East? After mowing down thousands of protesters, the regime in Iran has regained control of the streets.
And the protesters that are still alive in Iran have been mostly cut off from the rest of the world due to the strict Internet blackout that the mullahs have instituted…
The internet blackout in Iran continues to make it very difficult to get a clear picture from the ground, but accounts are emerging from people now able to use phone lines, those few with access to working Starlink satellite terminals and Iranians who have recently left the country.
These people describe an eerie calm over Iran’s cities, where heavily armed security forces are deployed on the streets enforcing what many are describing as a de-facto curfew.
Apparently this is going to be a permanent thing.
From this point forward, the population of Iran is only going to have access to a “state-run system” that will isolate the Iranian population from the rest of us…
The Iranian government is reportedly planning to permanently sever its citizens from the global internet — confining them instead to a state-run system as part of a continued crackdown on dissent following the Islamic regime’s slaughtering of thousands of protesters.
Filterwatch, a digital rights monitoring project which has tracked Iranian internet censorship since 2012, says info it obtained indicates Tehran is moving toward “absolute digital isolation.”
The Islamic Republic is abandoning its old model of “mass internet censorship” in favor of a “permanent shift” toward a “sealed intranet” while “access to the outside world is granted only to those with security clearance,” Filterwatch said.
The Iranian people are simply not going to be able to overthrow the regime without outside help. But if we attempt to liberate the Iranians, there is no telling what might happen.
If the Iranian regime possesses unconventional weapons, they would almost certainly use them if they felt that they were backed into a corner. And it appears that the recipe for precisely such a scenario is rapidly coming together…
As I write this article, the USS Abraham Lincoln and the other warships that are with it are heading toward Iran.
This is an extremely ominous development…
American media, including Gulf-based outlets, reported that the United States confirmed the USS Abraham Lincoln had sailed from the South China Sea toward the Middle East, a clear statement of intent. The carrier is accompanied by destroyers and missile ships equipped with hundreds of launchers capable of striking targets across Iran with unprecedented force. Despite the reports, no official US confirmation of the arrival of guided-missile submarines in the area was found.
Additional reports said bombers landed at the joint US-UK base on Diego Garcia. The base has unusually long runways that enable heavy strategic bombers, such as B-2-class aircraft, to launch long-range strike sorties across the Middle East, with emphasis on hardened and underground targets and regime command centers.
Obviously, President Trump intends to keep his options open.
According to the Washington Post, everything could be ready for a war with Iran in approximately two to three weeks…
The president will have another opportunity to sign off on strikes against Iran in the next two to three weeks, when U.S. assets headed toward the region will be in place, helping allay Israel’s concerns about its own protection, officials said.
The threat level is not expected to subside soon: The U.S. military’s Central Command has been directed to plan staffing for 24/7 high-level support “for the next month,” a person monitoring the situation told The Washington Post.
In 2026, we have officially entered the danger zone. I have been writing about a “final showdown with Iran” for a long time and now we are right on the brink.
Everything that we have witnessed in the Middle East since 1979 has been building up to this.And once the missiles start flying, everyone is going to be forced to finally show all of their cards.
As Trump Signals Readiness to Invoke the Insurrection Act, Multiple Pressure Vectors Converge
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
The renewed discussion around the Insurrection Act is not emerging in a vacuum. It reflects a convergence of domestic stressors that have been building for years and are now colliding simultaneously—civil unrest, border instability, institutional paralysis, and declining public trust in local and state governance.
When former President Donald Trump signals willingness to invoke the Act, it is less a declaration of intent than a warning that existing mechanisms of control may be nearing exhaustion.
Historically, the Insurrection Act exists as a constitutional release valve—designed not for routine governance, but for moments when states are unable or unwilling to enforce federal law or protect constitutional rights. Its invocation has always followed breakdowns in civil order where local authorities either lost control or declined to act. Today’s environment mirrors many of those conditions, though on a broader and more fragmented scale.
One of the most significant pressures is sustained urban unrest. In several major cities, protest movements have blurred into recurring disorder, property destruction, and direct confrontations with law enforcement. When local leaders publicly constrain police response, decline National Guard requests, or allow prolonged lawlessness, they create conditions that federal authorities may interpret as abdication rather than restraint.
Immigration enforcement has emerged as another central pressure point. Border states have increasingly clashed with federal agencies over enforcement responsibilities, while interior cities face mounting strain from shelter shortages, overwhelmed social services, and escalating public safety concerns. When state and local governments openly defy federal immigration statutes—or demand federal intervention without coordination—the legal threshold for federal action narrows.
Economic stress compounds these tensions. Inflation, housing instability, labor disruptions, and uneven recovery have intensified social volatility. Historically, economic contraction correlates strongly with unrest, especially when paired with political polarization. As financial pressure accelerates grievances, flashpoint events become harder to contain and easier to exploit.
Political fragmentation further complicates the landscape. State executives and mayors increasingly operate in open opposition to federal authority—sometimes symbolically, sometimes operationally. When jurisdictions declare themselves functionally uncooperative with federal law, the constitutional balance shifts from negotiation to enforcement. The Insurrection Act exists precisely for such moments of institutional deadlock.
Another accelerating factor is the erosion of confidence in elections and governance. Whether justified or not, widespread public belief that systems are illegitimate increases the likelihood of disorder. Governments historically respond not to belief accuracy, but to belief intensity—because perception alone can destabilize public order.
Infrastructure vulnerability also plays a role. Attacks on power grids, transportation systems, government buildings, or supply chains—whether coordinated or opportunistic—can rapidly elevate unrest from protest to insurrectionary conditions. The Act does not require ideological rebellion; it requires functional breakdown.
Information warfare further amplifies instability. Rapid viral narratives, real or false, can mobilize crowds faster than authorities can respond. When disinformation triggers real-world consequences—riots, looting, armed confrontations—the federal government is forced to respond to outcomes, not origins.
Trump’s posture reflects a belief that deterrence must be signaled early. By raising the possibility of invoking the Insurrection Act, he frames disorder not as political expression but as constitutional breach. This framing shifts responsibility from rhetoric to rule of law, regardless of political affiliation.
Importantly, invocation would not necessarily mean immediate military occupation. Historically, the Act has been used in graduated fashion—logistical support, federalization of Guard units, protection of federal property, and restoration of transportation corridors. Full-scale deployment is rare and typically avoided unless escalation continues.
The real question is not whether the Insurrection Act could be invoked, but whether existing institutions can reassert authority without it. If local governance continues to fracture, enforcement remains selectively applied, and unrest becomes normalized, federal intervention transitions from controversial to procedural.
In that context, Trump’s warning functions less as a threat and more as a diagnostic signal: when multiple systems fail simultaneously—public safety, border enforcement, economic stability, and political legitimacy—the federal government eventually reasserts control. The Insurrection Act is not the cause of crisis; it is the mechanism reserved for when crisis is no longer containable.
An Old Receipt Proves That Grocery Prices Have More Than Tripled, And Consumer Bankruptcies Are Soaring
I knew that I wasn’t imagining things. There are so many times when I am shopping for groceries that I see a product that seems like it has doubled or tripled in price over the years. I am sure that many of you have experienced the exact same thing. Well, now we have confirmation that we aren’t going crazy. When 24-year-old Zoe Dippel was browsing through old family photo albums, she discovered something incredibly shocking in an envelope…
For Zoe Dippel, a walk down memory lane looking through family photo albums became a quick lesson in inflation.
Dippel, a 24-year-old dental hygienist living near Austin, said in an interview with USA TODAY that she was flipping through her sister-in-law’s baby album when an envelope fell out.
When Dippel opened the envelope, she found a 1997 receipt for the purchase of 122 products at a grocery store known as H-E-B…
The receipt they found was for a 122-item order at H-E-B, a Texas grocer, from just after her sister-in-law was born. The large order cost $155.34 in 1997. But after Dippel posted video of the find to TikTok, she decided to find out what the same order would cost today. Her two videos about the 1997 receipt have gone viral and have a combined 3.4 million views as of Jan. 16.
She found that the same order came out to $504.11 when ordered through H-E-B’s curbside pickup.
“It’s just crazy to me,” Dippel said of the price jump.
If you multiply $155.34 by three, you get $466.02. So the fact that those 122 items now cost a total of $504.11 at H-E-B means that the cost of the exact same order has more than tripled.
This is what our leaders have done to us. In 1997, 150 dollars would get you a huge mountain of food.
Today, you will be very fortunate if you are able to fill up your cart a third of the way for that much money.
The cost of living has become a permanent crisis for the middle class, and one recent survey discovered that 92 percent of employed Americans have been forced to reduce their spending. But even though most of us are trying to cut back, more Americans are being pushed over the edge with each passing day.
In fact, the number of consumer bankruptcy filings increased 12 percent in 2025…
New data shows more Americans are filing for bankruptcy, the latest indication that price pressures and an uneven economy are leaving some households strapped for cash.
Total consumer bankruptcy filings jumped 12% from 478,752 in 2024 to 533,949 in 2025, according to Epiq AACER, a platform that provides U.S. bankruptcy filing data. Epiq, which tracks Chapter 7, Chapter 11 and Chapter 13 filings, relies on data provided through the U.S. Courts’ PACER system, an electronic database that houses federal court records.
It is now being estimated that one out of ten Americans will file for bankruptcy at least once in their lives.
Foreclosures are spiking too.
In 2025, the number of foreclosures was 14 percent higher than the year before…
The past year was difficult for homeowners — but experts warn that 2026 could be even more challenging.
Foreclosures — when a bank or lender takes back a home after missed mortgage payments — rose 14 percent from a year earlier.
In total, 367,460 US properties faced foreclosure filings in 2025, meaning they were in some stage of being taken over by a lender, according to ATTOM’s data.
All of the numbers that I am sharing with you in this article indicate that the economy is getting worse.
As consumer bankruptcies and foreclosures rise, it is putting strain on our banks, and several of our largest banks just reported disappointing results…
This week, the nation’s largest banks reported a broadly disappointing set of quarterly earnings, the first stumble after a yearlong spree of rising markets and softening regulations paid off handsomely for the finance set.
Results at Bank of America, Citi, JPMorgan Chase and Wells Fargo all fell short of expectations, and their shares fell. Troubles ranged from delayed merger deals (JPMorgan) to stubborn expenses (Citi) to questions about the efficacy of artificial intelligence tools (Bank of America).
Unfortunately, it appears that conditions will continue to move in the wrong direction in the months ahead.
Mass layoffs are occurring everywhere we look, and they are even happening at some of the biggest names in the entire country…
Meta Inc. is beginning to cut 10% of employees, or more than 1,000 jobs, from its Reality Labs division as it shifts its investment away from metaverse products.
“We said last month that we were shifting some of our investment from Metaverse toward Wearables,” a Meta spokesperson told FOX Business, adding that this action is part of that effort.
The reason why Reality Labs is cutting workers is because it is losing gobs of money…
The division includes Meta’s hardware and other futuristic product efforts like VR headsets, AI glasses and virtual world products.
However, that division has taken a beating, accumulating more than $70 billion in losses since 2021. Reality Labs faced a $4.4 billion operating loss during the third fiscal quarter alone.
I know that Meta has very deep pockets, but at this rate I just don’t see how Reality Labs is going to survive in the long run.
Citigroup is also facing challenges, and they continue to fire workers as they work toward their goal of eliminating 20,000 jobs by the end of this year…
The bank said when announcing the plan that it would eliminate 20,000 jobs by the end of 2026, and it still needs to eliminate several thousand more jobs to reach that target, according to the report.
“We will continue to reduce our headcount in 2026,” Citigroup told Bloomberg. “These changes reflect adjustments we’re making to ensure our staffing levels, locations and expertise align with current business needs; efficiencies we have gained through technology; and progress against our transformation work.”
Earlier this month, I published a list of 119 companies that have already announced that they will be conducting layoffs in 2026. A lot of people out there simply do not understand just how serious things have become.
Yes, conditions are far from ideal right now. But if we stay on the road that we are on at this moment, conditions will soon get a whole lot worse.
For the past couple of decades the U.S. economy has been steadily moving in the wrong direction, and it appears that a tremendous amount of chaos awaits us in the chapters that are ahead.
Is The Almost Constant Seismic Activity Along The West Coast Building Up To A Major Catastrophic Event?
This month, seismic activity along the west coast has been making headlines almost every single day. Could it be possible that all of this seismic activity is leading up to some sort of a really big event? It should be obvious to everyone that the clock is ticking. I have been sounding the alarm about the potential for apocalyptic seismic events along the west coast for a long time, and now it feels like we are building up to some sort of a crescendo. Unfortunately, most of the people living right along the west coast are still convinced that everything is going to be just fine.
On Thursday, a “major earthquake” suddenly struck an area approximately 180 miles from the Oregon coast…
A major earthquake has struck off the coast of Oregon, sending shockwaves felt in multiple cities along the US West Coast with more quakes expected to follow.
The magnitude 6.0 earthquake erupted in the Pacific Ocean, approximately 180 miles from the coastline, at 10.25pm ET Thursday night.
This earthquake was so powerful that it was felt as far away as Portland, and it was followed by magnitude 3.1 quake.
But what is really alarming the experts is the fact that these quakes “took place along the Juan de Fuca Plate”…
This latest quakes took place along the Juan de Fuca Plate, which drives the Cascadia Subduction Zone (CSZ) – a nearly 700-mile-long fault line off the West Coast of North America.
Scientists have long warned that the zone is overdue for a catastrophic event, with many nicknaming it the ‘Sleeping Giant.’
Simulations have shown the fault is capable of a magnitude 9.0 earthquake that would impact most of the Pacific Northwest, including major cities such as Seattle and Portland.
I have written countless articles about the Cascadia Subduction Zone. The next time it produces a megathrust earthquake, there might not be any warning at all.
And when that happens, a “100-foot-tall mega tsunami” could suddenly come slamming into coastal towns and cities…
If an earthquake between 8.0 and 9.0 in magnitude struck today, scientists have estimated that the shockwave could produce a 100-foot-tall mega tsunami which wipes out most of the nearby coastline.
A 2022 emergency report from the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) estimated that there would be over 100,000 people injured and over 618,000 buildings damaged or destroyed during the next major CSZ earthquake.
Scientists assure us that this is going to happen someday.
It is just a matter of time.
The day before the magnitude 6.0 earthquake off the coast of Oregon, a swarm of at least 40 earthquakes began in Southern California. The following comes from a Daily Mail article entitled “Dozens of earthquakes shake California where the earth is tearing apart”…
At least 40 earthquakes have shaken Southern California since Wednesday morning, with the largest reaching a magnitude of 4.4.
The US Geological Survey recorded the first quake near Holtville at 1:40am PT on Wednesday, with the most recent detected on Thursday morning.
Hundreds of California residents have issued reports of shaking to the USGS, and shockwaves were also recorded in Arizona and Mexico.
The city of Holtville is about 130 miles from San Diego, and it sits in an area known as the Salton Trough.
Geologists tell us that the Salton Trough is a place where the crust of our planet is literally “slowly pulling apart”…
Geologists describe the Salton Trough as a young, actively stretching rift valley, meaning the Earth’s crust in the region is slowly pulling apart.
This process occurs because the Pacific Plate is sliding northwestward relative to the North American Plate along the San Andreas system, while simultaneously, the crust in the Salton Trough is being stretched and thinned.
As the land pulls apart, it fractures along numerous faults, including the Imperial Fault and smaller subsidiary faults, producing frequent earthquakes of varying magnitudes.
We have all seen movies about what is going to happen to Southern California someday. Sadly, “someday” may arrive a lot sooner than most people think.
The day before the earthquake swarm started in Holtville, a magnitude 4.4 earthquake hit Mendocino County in Northern California…
A magnitude 4.4 earthquake struck eastern Mendocino County on Tuesday afternoon, shaking a rural area southeast of Willits, according to the United States Geological Survey.
The quake occurred at 1:10 p.m. local time and was centered roughly 6 miles east-southeast of Willits, the agency said. It struck at a depth of just under 5 miles, a level that can produce noticeable shaking near the surface.
Could it be possible that the Mendocino Triple Junction is waking up?
The Mendocino Triple Junction is considered to be one of the most dangerous seismic zones along the entire California coastline…
Off the coast of Humboldt County lies the Mendocino Triple Junction, where three of Earth’s major tectonic plates come together. South of this point, the Pacific plate moves northwest alongside the North American plate, forming the San Andreas fault. North of the junction, the Gorda (or Juan de Fuca) plate pushes northeast and slides beneath the North American plate, sinking into the Earth’s mantle in a process known as subduction.
Our scientists have always known that the Mendocino Triple Junction is a major threat.
But now they have discovered that there are “five moving pieces rather than just three major plates”…
The updated model shows that the region contains five moving pieces rather than just three major plates. Two of these pieces are completely hidden below the surface.
At the southern end of the Cascadia subduction zone, the researchers found that a section of the North American plate has broken off and is being pulled downward along with the Gorda plate as it sinks beneath North America.
South of the triple junction, the Pacific plate is dragging a mass of rock known as the Pioneer fragment beneath the North American plate as it moves north. The fault separating the Pioneer fragment from the North American plate lies nearly flat and cannot be seen from the surface.
The entire west coast of the United States sits directly along the Pacific Ring of Fire, and the past 12 months have been a time when the Pacific Ring of Fire has been shaking like crazy.
Of course the entire southern coast of Alaska also sits directly along the Pacific Ring of Fire, and it was just hit by a magnitude 5.9 earthquake.
And last month a magnitude 7.0 earthquake rocked the state…
A 7.0 magnitude earthquake has rocked Alaska on Saturday, Dec. 6, according to the United States Geological Survey (USGS).
The earthquake occurred at 11:41 a.m. local time in northeast of Yakutat, Alaska, the USGS said.
According to the U.S. Census Bureau, Yakutat had a total population of about 657 in 2020 and 332 housing units in 2023. Yakutat is over 300 miles from Anchorage, where the earthquake was also felt, the USGS’s interactive map shows.
Alaska gets pummeled by significant earthquakes so frequently that most of them don’t even make the news anymore.
But they should. I think that seismic activity along the Pacific Ring of Fire is going to be a major theme in 2026.
Unfortunately, most people that live in the most dangerous areas will not take the threat seriously until it is too late.
Thousands Of Protesters In Iran Are Being Ruthlessly Gunned Down, And There Are Lots Of Signs That Trump Is About To Bring Down The Hammer
The tyrants in Iran have found a way to “control” the nationwide protests that have been threatening the regime. Heavily armed security forces are literally going into the streets and gunning down thousands of protesters. It appears that what we are witnessing is the worst slaughter of protesters in Iranian history. Thousands of other protesters are being arrested, and many of them will never be seen again. So now everyone is watching to see what President Trump will do. He promised to intervene if the Iranians didn’t stop killing protesters, and the Iranians responded to that threat by slaughtering vast numbers of them. The next move is Trump’s, and there are lots of signs that indicate that he is about to bring down the hammer.
Time Magazine is reporting that it appears that the number of protesters that have been gunned down by the regime in Iran “now reaches into the thousands”…
Fears are growing that the number of protesters killed by Iranian security forces now reaches into the thousands. Despite an internet blackout, cell phone footage has emerged of truck-mounted machine guns strafing residential streets, hospitals swamped by shooting victims, and a morgue overwhelmed by hundreds of bodies after only the first night of assaults.
To account for what it called a “significant” death toll, the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps on Sunday raised the specter of ISIS, claiming in a statement that slain protesters were terrorists hired by Israel and the U.S. Two days earlier, a Guard official on state-controlled television had warned that anyone venturing into the street should be prepared to “take a bullet.”
Iranian security forces have guns and the protesters do not.
So when the shooting begins, the protesters have no way to fight back.
One group is estimating that approximately 6,000 protesters have been slaughtered so far…
However, starting with reports from a handful of Tehran hospitals, an informal, expatriate group of academics and professionals calculated that protester deaths could have reached 6,000 through Saturday. The calculation does not include bodies carried by authorities not to hospitals but directly to morgues—such as the hundreds lain on the floors and parking lot of the Kahrizak Forensic Center, outside the capital. According to a social media post, the scene shows only bodies killed on Thursday night.
There was no way that the regime in Iran was going to go down without a fight.
And they are actually broadcasting footage of dead protesters wrapped in body bags in an attempt to intimidate the remaining protesters…
In an unusual move, meanwhile, Iran’s state-controlled media aired video on Sunday showing mass casualties in and outside a morgue in a Tehran suburb.
The video shared widely online shows dozens of bodies outside the morgue, which CBS News has geolocated to the southern Tehran suburb of Kahrizak. The bodies were wrapped in black bags, and people can be seen grieving and searching for their loved ones at the site.
That is so sick.
The lunatics that are running Iran are showing the whole world exactly how evil they have become.
In Shiraz, so many people are coming in with gunshot wounds that doctors are only able to treat “those thought likeliest to survive”…
A Shiraz hospital told journalist Solmaz Eikdar of the Iran Wire news site that it was too overwhelmed by gunshot patients to admit any other kind of patient and that it was doing triage to treat those thought likeliest to survive. In Rasht, on the coast of the Caspian Sea, residents were ordered to remain indoors under what amounts to martial law, Eikdar told TIME. She said her reporting from hospitals in that city, in Tehran, and in Shiraz confirmed at least 1,000 deaths.
This is the moment that will decide whether the regime in Iran stands or falls.
And the protesters clearly understand that they cannot overthrow the regime alone…
‘The regime is using real guns and bullets… my friend got shot in the stomach. We are hoping for US and Israeli intervention. Without them we cannot succeed,’ he added.
Another Iranian tells the Daily Mail that people are being killed with or without weapons. ‘They shut the internet down so that the world can’t see their brutality. We are being murdered by our own government,’ one texted.
If there is no outside intervention, the revolution will fail and thousands of Iranian protesters will have shed their blood for nothing.
But if President Trump attacks Iran, it could spark an apocalyptic conflict in the Middle East. So what will President Trump choose?
On Sunday, he told the press that he was considering “some very strong options”…
President Donald Trump said Sunday that Iran is “starting to” cross U.S. red lines, citing reports of civilian deaths and warning that any attack on American interests would be met with overwhelming force as his administration weighs what he called “very strong options.”
Trump spoke to reporters aboard Air Force One while traveling from Palm Beach, Florida, back to Washington, D.C., after being asked whether Iran had crossed a threshold that would trigger a response.
“They’re starting to, it looks like, and there seem to be some people killed that aren’t supposed to be killed,” the president said. “These are violent — if you call them leaders, I don’t know if they’re leaders or just if they rule through violence. And, we’re looking at some very strong options. We’ll make a determination.”
It has been reported that he is considering both military and non-military options.
On Monday, one of those non-military options was implemented…
Effective immediately, any Country doing business with the Islamic Republic of Iran will pay a Tariff of 25% on any and all business being done with the United States of America. This Order is final and conclusive. Thank you for your attention to this matter!
PRESIDENT DONALD J. TRUMP
Needless to say, this will not cause the overthrow of the Iranian regime.
And since China does lots of business with Iran, this means that everything coming across the Pacific Ocean from China will now be slapped with an additional 25 percent tariff.
So this is going to make Chinese goods even more expensive for U.S. consumers, and the Chinese are going to be even angrier with us than they were before.
In addition to the new tariffs, we are also being told that airstrikes are very much on the table…
“One thing President Trump is very good at is always keeping all of his options on the table,” White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt said on Jan. 12. “And airstrikes would be one of the many, many options that are on the table for the commander-in-chief.”
I do not think that airstrikes are imminent, but I am sure that they will be discussed when Trump meets with Marco Rubio, Pete Hegseth and Dan Caine tomorrow…
Politico reports that Trump will hold another meeting tomorrow with Rubio, Hegseth and Joint Chiefs Chair Gen. Dan Caine along with other top leaders to weigh options.
Trump cautioned that military action could still come before any diplomatic sit-down if conditions on the ground deteriorate further.
‘A meeting is being set up,’ Trump told reporters, but warned, ‘We may have to act before a meeting.’
Trump confirmed he is receiving hourly intelligence updates as the administration weighs its next move.
I think that the direction that things are heading will become a lot clearer after that meeting.
The Iranians are insisting that they “do not want war”, and they are even offering to negotiate with the United States…
Iran’s Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi said that Tehran is ready for negotiations with the U.S. based on “mutual respect,” but added that the government is also prepared for war.
“We do not want war, but we are completely prepared for it — even more prepared than before the previous war,” told a group of foreign diplomats in a televised meeting in Tehran, CNN reported.
“The reason is clear: the best way to prevent war is to be prepared for war, so that our enemies do not once again fall into miscalculation.”
Of course what the Iranians are really saying is that they do not want the U.S. to interfere while they conduct a mass slaughter of innocent protesters.
That is why they suddenly want to “negotiate”. It is all about buying time. But time may be running out for the Iranians.
A Polymarket account that has made a huge amount of money by betting on military action against Iran in the past has just placed another very large wager…
A Polymarket account, which has sparked rumors of insider information after successfully gambling on Israeli and US military operations over the last six months, placed a new, high stakes wager on war with Iran by month’s end.
The account, now renamed Rundeep, joined the current-events-based gambling website in June 2025 and has racked up over $154,219 while wagering exclusively on Israeli and US military actions.
The biggest win came on June 13 — days after the account was made — with Rundeep making more than $128,700 betting that Israel would take military action against Iran.
There is speculation that whoever has been making these winning bets has access to inside information.
And now this particular account is betting that Israel will attack Iran prior to the end of this month…
Now, Rundeep has bet a total of $15,517.18 that Israel will attack Iran before Jan. 31, the Polymarket account history revealed.
In the past week, the odds of the attack occurring were placed as low as 16%, but after several viral X posts exposed the account, the odds have shot up, now sitting at a 35% chance that Israel will attack the Islamic Republic by the end of the month.
We won’t have to wait long to see if this individual is correct or not.
It is also a troubling sign that all U.S. citizens are being instructed to leave Iran immediately…
Of course the U.S. has not had an actual physical embassy in Iran for a very long time.
But the French do, and it is interesting to note that they have just pulled all non-essential staff out of the country.
It certainly feels like something big is coming, and the guys at the Pentagon are ordering a lot more pizza than normal right now…
I don’t think that we will see airstrikes within the next 24 hours. But I would definitely encourage everyone to stay tuned.
If President Trump gives the green light for U.S. airstrikes, the Iranians will start firing off missiles at Israeli cities. And once that happens, it will mean all-out war. Everything that has been going on in the Middle East for the last five decades has been leading up to this.
Now a time of reckoning is at hand, and global events are about to go completely haywire.
Civil Unrest Is One Of The Core Elements Of “The Perfect Storm”, And It Is Starting To Spiral Out Of Control On The Streets Of Minneapolis
What we have witnessed on the streets of Minneapolis this week has been absolutely stunning. It was once such a beautiful city, but now it has been transformed into a war zone. For more than a decade, I have been relentlessly warning my readers that civil unrest would be one of the core elements of the coming “perfect storm”, and now we are literally watching violent clashes between radical leftists and federal authorities play out right in front of our eyes. In fact, it is getting so bad that President Trump is threatening to invoke the Insurrection Act. That hasn’t happened since the Los Angeles riots of 1992. If we keep going down this path, will we soon see martial law in major U.S. cities?
Independent journalist Nick Sortor is on the ground in Minneapolis, and last night he watched as rioters destroyed multiple federal law enforcement vehicles…
MULTIPLE ICE and FBI vehicles have been DESTROYED and LOOTED by rioters in Minneapolis after federal agents were forced to abandon them
Agents gear, laptops, and personal information now LITTERS the street
THIS IS ABSOLUTE ANARCHY
He is right.
It is absolutely anarchy.
Sortor is also reporting that the rioters actually broke into a weapons locker in one of the vehicles and got away with a rifle and ammunition…
Minneapolis rioters successfully BROKE OPEN a weapons locker in a federal vehicle and STOLE A RIFLE and ammunition before fleeing
I captured the thief’s face and license plate on the getaway vehicle.
A state of lawlessness exists on the streets of Minneapolis at this moment, and President Trump just threatened to invoke the Insurrection Act…
As the rioters were destroying and looting federal vehicles, the police just stood by and did nothing.
Of course the reason why they didn’t intervene is because that is what their leaders are instructing them to do.
In remarks that she just made to the press, White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt explained that Trump’s threat to invoke the Insurrection Act “spoke very loud and clear to Democrats across this country”…
White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt said Thursday that President Donald Trump’s threats to enact the Insurrection Act in Minnesota “spoke very loud and clear to Democrats across this country.” Leavitt said it send a message to elected officials “who are using their platforms to encourage violence against federal law enforcement officers who are encouraging left-wing agitators to unlawfully obstruct legitimate law enforcement operations.”
Of course the Democrats are not going to back down. And neither will the Trump administration.
So I expect things to get really crazy in the months ahead.
If Trump actually invokes the Insurrection Act, that will allow him to deploy active duty soldiers to Minneapolis…
The president would have fairly broad authority under the law, Gene Rossi, a former federal prosecutor, told Newsweek on Thursday.
“The punchline is this. Under the Insurrection Act, President Trump and any president has broad power to invoke that act, which is an extraordinary step,” he said. “What it means is that the president can employ active duty soldiers to assist state and local authorities in executing the federal laws.”
In Minnesota, ICE is “executing, in their mind, the immigration laws in terms of arresting and detaining people who are here without proper documentation,” Rossi said. Trump would have broad authority to determine whether laws cannot be effectively executed without invoking the Insurrection Act, he said.
If troops are deployed in the streets, will far left radicals stop harassing ICE?
Of course not.
Instead, there would probably be even more violent confrontations like the one that we just witnessed on Wednesday evening…
A U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) agent is in the hospital after being ambushed during an attempt to arrest a Venezuelan national in Minneapolis on Wednesday evening, according to the Department of Homeland Security.
The agent was ambushed by two people while attempting to conduct a traffic stop on an illegal immigrant from Venezuela, DHS said, adding that the agent fired his gun during the alleged attack because he was “fearing for his life and safety.”
One Venezuelan suspect was shot but is reported to be stable and is now in custody, DHS said.
The radical left has drawn a line in the sand. They are going to resist ICE no matter how much the Trump administration escalates matters. And so now our society stands at a very dangerous tipping point.
According to a post by the U.S. Department of Homeland Security on Facebook, the ICE agent that is in the hospital got hurt when two men attacked him with “a snow shovel and a broom handle”…
At 6:50 PM CT, federal law enforcement officers were conducting a targeted traffic stop in Minneapolis of an illegal alien from Venezuela who was released into the country by Joe Biden in 2022.
In an attempt to evade arrest, the subject fled the scene in his vehicle and crashed into a parked car. The subject then fled on foot.
The law enforcement officer caught up to the subject on foot and attempted to apprehend him when the subject began to resist and violently assault the officer. While the subject and law enforcement were in a struggle on the ground, two subjects came out of a nearby apartment and also attacked the law enforcement officer with a snow shovel and broom handle.
As the officer was being ambushed and attacked by the two individuals, the original subject got loose and began striking the officer with a shovel or broom stick.
Fearing for his life and safety as he was being ambushed by three individuals, the officer fired a defensive shot to defend his life. The initial subject was hit in the leg.
All three subjects ran back into the apartment and barricaded themselves inside.
The attacked officer and subject are both in the hospital. Both attackers are in custody.
This attack on another brave member of law enforcement took place while Minnesota’s top leaders, Governor Walz and Mayor Frey, are actively encouraging an organized resistance to ICE and federal law enforcement officers.
Their hateful rhetoric and resistance against men and women who are simply trying to do their jobs must end. Federal law enforcement officers are facing a 1,300% increase in assaults against them as they put their lives on the line to arrest criminals and lawbreakers.
It would help if Democrats would tell their constituents to calm down and leave federal law enforcement officers alone.
But that isn’t happening.
In fact, Minnesota Governor Tim Walz is calling on the citizens of his state to “resist” the “occupation” that he believes is currently taking place…
Folks, I know it’s scary, and I know it’s absurd that we all have to be defending law and order, justice, and humanity while also caring for our families and trying to do our jobs. So tonight, let me say once again to Donald Trump and Christine Noem: End this occupation, you’ve done enough.
Donald Trump wants this chaos. He wants confusion, and yes, he wants more violence on our streets. We cannot give him what he wants. We can, we must, protest loudly, urgently, but also peacefully.
All across Minnesota, people are learning about opportunities, not just to resist, but to help people who are in danger. Thousands and thousands of our fellow Minnesotans are going to be relying on mutual aid in the days and weeks to come, and they need our support.
Tim Walz was a member of the National Guard for 24 years.
When he uses military terminology, he knows exactly what he is doing.
On the other side, Stephen Miller is warning that federal officials are in the process of “identifying, disrupting and dismantling the insurgent networks” that are causing so much chaos in Minnesota…
Stephen Miller, a top White House official, said Tuesday evening that federal law enforcement now has the resources to protect its officers and begin the work of “identifying, disrupting and dismantling the insurgent networks” hampering Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) operations in Minnesota.
That sounds very similar to the terminology that many of our politicians would use regarding anti-insurgent operations in Iraq and Afghanistan under previous administrations. But even if the violent radicals in Minnesota are successfully suppressed, more will just pop up elsewhere.
Personally, I believe that this is just the beginning of an enormous wave of civil unrest. And if a major war erupts in the Middle East, that will just add more fuel to the fire.
According to NBC News, President Trump has told his team that he only wants to attack Iran if he can be guaranteed that it will bring an end to the regime…
President Donald Trump has told his national security team that he would want any U.S. military action in Iran to deliver a swift and decisive blow to the regime and not spark a sustained war that dragged on for weeks or months, according to a U.S. official, two people familiar with the discussions and a person close to the White House.
“If he does something, he wants it to be definitive,” one of the people familiar with the discussions said.
But Trump’s advisers have so far not been able to guarantee to him that the regime would quickly collapse after an American military strike, the U.S. official and two people familiar with the discussions said, and there is concern that the U.S. may not have all the assets in the region it would need to guard against what administration officials expect would be an aggressive Iranian response.
Of course I don’t know how anyone can guarantee that military strikes will cause the collapse of the regime.
So perhaps President Trump will not take any action at all. That is what a lot of media sources are suggesting today.
But U.S. Senator Lindsey Graham is telling us that the stories that those media sources are putting out “are beyond inaccurate”…
“All the headlines like these are examples of reporting that are beyond inaccurate,” Graham wrote on X.
He shared screenshots of headlines that read “Trump gets cold feet on Iran” and “Trump informed Iran he does not intend to attack, asked Tehran to exercise restraint,” and said they misrepresented the situation.
“The circumstances around the necessary, decisive action to be taken against the Iranian regime have nothing to do with President Trump’s will or determination,” Graham wrote.
“Nothing could be further from the truth,” he added.
Graham seems quite confident that military action is coming.
At this stage, I don’t know if he is right or if he is wrong. But what we do know is that more firepower is being deployed to the region.
In fact, when we learned that the USS Abraham Lincoln is on the way, that really got my attention…
The Pentagon is moving a carrier strike group from the South China Sea to the U.S. Central Command area of responsibility, which includes the Middle East, as tensions escalate between the Trump administration and Iran, NewsNation has learned.
Moving the carrier strike group — a naval formation centering around an aircraft carrier, with a variety of other vessels, including at least one attack submarine — is expected to take about a week, a source said. The USS Abraham Lincoln reportedly is the aircraft carrier that is on the move.
Let’s keep a close eye on the USS Abraham Lincoln.
If war with Iran erupts, it could become a primary target. This year is already off to such a crazy start. And we are only halfway through the first month.
Unfortunately, I believe that the rest of the year will be even more insane.
The Crack
By Eko | Source
The frame holds for two minutes and seven seconds. Jerome Powell. Alone. No board members. No Treasury Secretary. No institutional buffer. Just the Federal Reserve Chair staring into a camera, addressing an entity the Fed has ignored for one hundred eleven years: the people.
Sunday night, January 11, 2026. Posted without notice. Powell’s face carries the pallor of a man watching the floor crack.
“On Friday, the Department of Justice served the Federal Reserve with grand jury subpoenas, threatening a criminal indictment related to my testimony before the Senate Banking Committee last June.”
Criminal indictment. Grand jury. The Chair.
The testimony concerned renovations. Two and a half billion dollars spent on historic buildings. Then the pivot: “This unprecedented action should be seen in the broader context of the Administration’s threats.”
He transforms investigation into persecution. Recasts evidence as intimidation. Wraps himself in independence. Claims the threat is retaliation for setting rates based on evidence, not presidential preference. The numbers prove otherwise.
The Timeline
March 2020. COVID hits. The Fed drops rates to zero, launches unlimited quantitative easing, explodes its balance sheet from $4.2 trillion to $9 trillion in eighteen months.
June 2021. Inflation accelerates. Powell calls it transitory. Rates stay at zero.
June 2022. Inflation hits nine point one percent. Powell pivots. Zero to five point five in sixteen months.
Inflation falls through 2023. Four percent. Then three point five. The medicine works. Powell refuses. Holds rates at five point five through all of 2024. Inflation declines. Growth slows. He does not move.
November 2024. Trump wins.
December 2024. Powell signals rate cuts won’t come fast.
The economy under Biden received zero rates and unlimited QE despite nine percent inflation. The economy under Trump receives five point five percent rates despite three percent inflation. Evidence-based monetary policy. Independent analysis.
The Words He Used
The statement runs two minutes seven seconds. Every word written, reviewed, approved. Return to the opening: “That testimony concerned, in part, a multi-year project to renovate historic Federal Reserve office buildings.”
In part. The June testimony wasn’t only about renovations. He doesn’t specify what else.
Then: “Those are pretexts. The threat of criminal charges is a consequence of the Federal Reserve setting interest rates based on our best assessment… rather than following the preferences of the President.”
He’s not arguing the testimony was accurate. He’s arguing the investigation is political. If your testimony was truthful, why does the investigator’s motivation matter? Truth survives scrutiny. His response isn’t receipts. It’s claiming that asking for receipts equals intimidation.
The First Temple
Philadelphia, 1832. Nicholas Biddle ran the Second Bank of the United States from a marble temple. Controlled twenty percent of the currency. Believed the Bank was sacred. The only thing preventing chaos.
Andrew Jackson saw foreign ownership. Insider loans. Credit manipulation for political purposes. An unelected institution claiming public service while serving shareholders.
Jackson vetoed the recharter. Biddle engineered contraction. Called in loans. Tightened credit. Created the panic he claimed only the Bank could prevent. Make the economy scream. Blame Jackson. Force surrender.
Merchants begged Jackson to relent. He asked one question: “Who called your loans?” The Bank, sir.
Jackson pointed north. “Go to the man who has the power to end this. Nicholas Biddle sits with full vaults and chooses not to restore your credit. He manufactures your suffering to break me. And you ask me to surrender?”
Jackson drained the power. Removed federal deposits. Distributed them to state banks. Without federal money, the Bank was just another institution. The mystique evaporated. By 1836 the charter expired. By 1841 the Bank failed.
Biddle died facing fraud charges, still convinced he’d defended civilization. He was defending institutional power against accountability. Same playbook. Different century.
The Frame
Powell’s claim: “This is about whether the Fed will be able to continue to set interest rates based on evidence and economic conditions, or whether, instead, monetary policy will be directed by political pressure.” Fed operations represent evidence. Any pressure represents politics. Question policy, attack independence.
Jackson didn’t argue theory. He asked who benefited and who suffered. He followed the money.
If Powell truly set rates based on evidence without political consideration, policy would be consistent. The appropriate rate for three percent inflation doesn’t change based on election results. The rates shifted when political conditions changed. Zero during Biden despite high inflation. Five point five during Trump despite falling inflation.
Too precise.
The Crack
The DOJ doesn’t issue grand jury subpoenas for theater. They investigate criminal conduct. Powell calling this unprecedented isn’t accurate. What’s unprecedented is a Fed Chair warranting criminal investigation.
Either the DOJ manufactures charges from nothing, or the Fed Chair’s conduct warranted scrutiny. Powell wants you to assume the first. His video makes examination inevitable.
If the testimony was accurate, Powell wins. Investigation confirms his version. Independence is reinforced.
If the testimony was inaccurate, the video becomes evidence of consciousness of guilt. He knew scrutiny would reveal discrepancies. He chose to delegitimize the investigation before evidence emerged because evidence couldn’t exonerate him.
The video exists because a quiet investigation threatened worse exposure.
The Zero
Andrew Jackson died with a bullet near his heart. Twenty-nine years after the duel. The lead never stopped grinding. Jackson claimed it was his compass. Every throb pointed toward enemies. He killed the Second Bank. Zeroed the national debt. The only time in American history.
The idea didn’t die. It hibernated. Emerged from Jekyll Island in 1910 with better camouflage. Called itself the Federal Reserve. Learned from Biddle’s mistake. Too visible, too powerful. The Fed would be technical, boring, wrapped in jargon. For one hundred eleven years it worked.
Complexity fails when math exposes it. Zero rates during high inflation then high rates during low inflation is political timing. Claiming criminal investigation equals intimidation prevents examination.
Powell’s video made the political nature explicit. He argued setting rates against presidential preference justified his actions. That concedes the Fed operates politically. The only question is whether Fed political judgment should override democratic political judgment.
Jackson’s zero proved self-governance was possible. That zero existed. It can exist again. It will exist again.
Ending the Fed doesn’t require revolution. It requires Jackson’s mechanism. Remove the deposits. Let currencies compete. The temple doesn’t need to burn. It just needs to be empty.
Visible
Powell’s video marks the moment defense became unsustainable.
The Fed can no longer claim independence while exercising political policy. Can no longer claim expertise while producing contradictory results. Can no longer claim necessity while refusing accountability.
The crack is visible now. The bullet Jackson carried twenty-nine years is pointing north again. Toward Philadelphia where Biddle’s temple fell. Toward the DC swamp where Powell’s temple stands.
Powell wrapped himself in independence. The video showed the lie crack. His real fear isn’t economic chaos. It’s accountability. That admission brings the temple down.
*Of course, I had to see for myself just what Jerome had to say to us in his defense. His concern is that the machine he’s been presiding over won’t be allowed to interfere with American fiscal policy decisions any longer.
I concur with this assessment, actually. And it’s about flipping time.
Have You Heard About What Iran Is Threatening To Do Next? – It Includes Killing President Trump
We certainly have entered uncharted territory. When a vicious predator is backed into a corner, it will do whatever it can to survive. That makes Iran more dangerous than ever at this moment. The Iranians are making all sorts of crazy threats, and I am convinced that they fully intend to make good on them. Whether they are actually able to do so is another matter. But without a doubt we need to be taking their threats seriously, and that includes their threat to kill President Trump…
Iran issued a sickening threat against President Trump Wednesday, broadcasting a picture of the commander in chief during the 2024 Butler rally assassination attempt — with the words “This time it will not miss the target.”
The ominous warning was aired on Iranian state-run TV, Agence France Presse (AFP) reported.
It marks Tehran’s most direct threat yet against Trump, following his repeated threats that the US will strike the country if it continues its brutal crackdown on anti-government protesters.
When President Trump hears of this threat, it is likely that he will become even angrier with the regime in Iran.
Of course the Iranians have already been trying to kill Trump for a long time.
In fact, an assassin named Farhad Shakeri that had been given the job of killing Trump was apprehended a few years ago…
The Justice Department also said that in 2024, the US thwarted an Iranian-led plot to kill Trump after arresting Farhad Shakeri, who was allegedly tasked by Iran’s Revolutionary Guard Corps to murder the president for the regime, according to court documents.
In addition to threatening President Trump, the Iranians have repeatedly threatened to strike Israeli cities and U.S. bases in the region if they are attacked.
Hours ago, the head of the IRGC warned that Iran is prepared to respond “decisively” to any military action by the United States…
The commander of Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) said that Iran is ready to respond ‘decisively’ to an attack, and blamed the US and Israel for protests in the country, Al Jazeera reported.
IRGC is at ‘the height of readiness to respond decisively to the miscalculation of the enemy,’ Commander Mohammad Pakpour said in a statement shared with Iranian state television.
What does “decisively” mean?
Will the Iranian response be limited to conventional weapons? Not a lot of people have been talking about this.
Even if we assume that Iran has absolutely no access to nuclear weapons or dirty bombs, and I am not convinced that is a safe assumption, there is still the possibility that the Iranians could decide to use chemical or biological weapons.
If even a single chemical or biological warhead reaches Israeli territory, there would be an enormous amount of pressure on Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu to use nuclear weapons in response.
And let us not forget that Hezbollah has an enormous presence in North America.
This is something that I have written about extensively in the past. So what would happen if Hezbollah uses chemical or biological weapons on U.S. soil in response to our attack on Iran?
Can you imagine the chaos that would ensue? But there is no turning back now, because President Trump feels compelled to respond to the mass slaughter of Iranian protesters that is currently taking place.
One young Iranian man that was able to escape the country is claiming that the death toll is far higher than people are being told…
A young Iranian guy just crossed from Iran into Turkey and recorded a message for the world.
He says people outside Iran have no idea how bad it really is.
Not arrests. Not beatings. Killings.
He says protesters are being shot straight in the chest. Not warning shots. Not accidents. Deliberate.
Over and over.
According to him, the death toll people see online is nowhere close to reality. Bodies disappear.
Families stay quiet. Fear fills the gaps.
People inside can’t speak. People outside aren’t seeing it.
That silence is doing a lot of work right now.
As I discussed yesterday, CBS News is telling us that the death toll in Iran could be as high as 20,000.
Tens of thousands of others have been arrested, and many of them will be slaughtered too.
The first protester that was sentenced to death was scheduled to be executed by hanging on Wednesday…
The desperate relatives of an Iranian shopkeeper who was sentenced to death for taking part in an anti-government protest have called on Donald Trump to urgently intervene to save him.
Erfan Soltani, 26, believed to be the first protester in the latest Iranian uprising to be given the death sentence, is expected to be hanged today.
His family spent the night protesting outside the Ghezel Hesar prison, where the young man from Fardis in Karaj was being held in solitary confinement.
All he did was take part in an anti-government protest.
This is what tyranny looks like. In Iran, hanging does not result in a quick death.
According to the Daily Mail, it “can take up to 20 minutes of abject torture” for death to occur…
But in Iran, gallows are about as simple as you can get. Those on death row are hoisted by their necks using mobile cranes.
Instead of an instant death, prisoners are strangled, restricting blood vessels going to their heads.
As a result, it can take up to 20 minutes of abject torture for them to die, leaving victims writhing in agony before their last breaths.
The regime in Iran must go.
But if the regime in Iran falls, it would be a huge blow to the Russians…
Russia will be focused on how events unfold in Iran given Tehran’s position as a key strategic, military, economic and trade partner for Moscow in the Middle East.
The prospect of another ally falling in the Middle East will be a worrying one for Moscow, particularly after it has seen its alliances with Venezuela, Syria and the Caucasus upended recently, denting its power and influence abroad.
“Moscow sees the potential loss of Iran as a much more significant risk to both its regional national posture than it saw the loss of Syria, Venezuela, or arguably its influence in Armenia over the last few years,” Max Hess, founder of political risk consultancy Enmetena Advisory, told CNBC on Tuesday.
Global events have certainly accelerated significantly during the first month of 2026.
Most people still do not realize this, but we really are living in the days of World War III.
Vast numbers of people are going to die during the months and years that are ahead of us. So enjoy the remnants of normality that we still have left, because things are starting to change at an exceedingly rapid pace.
Warnings Issued for Millions as Florida Temperatures Set To Plunge
Temperatures are expected to plunge to the low 20s across much of Florida beginning on Thursday night, prompting several National Weather Service (NWS) offices in the Sunshine State to issue freeze watches ahead of the abrupt weather change.
Meteorologists have been issuing messages about the incoming frigid temperatures since the week started. The incoming burst of cold air will be the coldest of the season for some parts of the state, which is known for its mild winters. It comes behind a cold front set to bring showers to west-central Florida on Wednesday.
The freeze watches encompass most of the state, including the panhandle, northern Florida, central Florida between the Gulf and Atlantic coasts, and south-central Florida, stretching as far south as Sebring. Parts of northern Florida will see temperatures as low as 20, although the NWS office in Tallahassee warned that some areas could dip into the teens. Further south, central Florida is expecting low 20s.
Average low temperatures for this time of year are around the low 50s in Tampa, NWS meteorologist Nicole Carlisle told Newsweek. The coldest temperatures will be Friday morning, Carlisle said, with a brief warm-up during the weekend. On Monday, cold temperatures will return, albeit not as severe as Friday’s.
“Below normal temperatures are expected for several days behind a strong cold front today,” NWS Tallahassee said in a Wednesday message on its website. “Friday morning will be the coldest this work week with a high chance [80-100%] of an inland hard freeze [25F or lower]. There is a medium chance [30-60%] of temperatures tumbling below 20 degrees across portions of southeast Alabama and southwest Georgia Friday morning.”
Florida cities like Orlando, Tampa Bay, Jacksonville, Melbourne, Sebring, Ocala, Gainesville and others are included in the watch area. NWS offices will likely upgrade the freeze watch to a freeze warning as it gets closer to the event.
“Frost and freeze conditions could kill crops, other sensitive vegetation and possibly damage unprotected outdoor plumbing,” NWS Tampa Bay said in the freeze watch. “Take steps now to protect tender plants from the cold.”
Precautionary measures should also be taken for plumbing.
“To prevent freezing and possible bursting of outdoor water pipes they should be wrapped, drained, or allowed to drip slowly,” NWS Tallahassee said. “Those that have in-ground sprinkler systems should drain them and cover above-ground pipes to protect them from freezing.”
Pets should not be left outdoors.
NWS Miami did not issue a freeze watch, as temperatures will remain above freezing, but the South Florida office posted on X about a dip in temperatures. West Palm Beach could see temperatures as low as 39 degrees, with Miami expecting temperatures in the low 40s.
“Temperatures will fall rapidly behind a cold front on Thursday night,” NWS Miami said in the post. “We will continue to monitor the risk of freezing temperatures near Lake Okeechobee and dangerously low apparent temperatures across the most inland areas.”
The lowest temperatures will occur between 4 a.m. and 9 a.m. Friday.
Looking further out, temperatures in Florida are expected to remain below average between January 19 and 23, according to the NWS Climate Prediction Center six- to 10-day temperature outlook. However, NWS Climate Prediction Center anticipates temperatures will trend back above average for the eight- to 14-day temperature outlook.
Israeli Brigadier General DESTROYS Op-Sec; Reveals “American-led Attack” upon Iran
Hal Turner World | January 14, 2026
A senior Israeli defense leader has just made one of the most explosive statements of this crisis:
“There will be no Iranian regime. This is going to be an American-led attack with Israeli support. The regime stands no chance.”
Let that sink in.
While millions of Iranians are flooding the streets and the regime fires on its own people, powerful voices inside Israel’s security establishment are now openly saying the unthinkable:
That the Islamic dictatorship in Tehran is approaching its end.
According to insiders, the regime is cracking from the inside:
- defections are beginning
- elites are demoralized
- security forces are divided
- and Khamenei’s inner circle is reportedly preparing escape plans
This is what late-stage collapse looks like.
The streets of Iran are no longer afraid.
The world is no longer pretending.
And Washington is no longer ignoring what’s happening.
When military leaders start speaking this bluntly, it means the diplomatic phase is ending and the pressure phase is beginning.
This is not about regional politics anymore.
This is about whether the Islamic dictatorship survives — or whether history is about to turn a page that cannot be turned back.
DESTRUCTION OF OPERATIONAL SECURITY
The public remarks of Israeli Brigadier General Amir Avivi appear to many people to have blown operational security.
Until he said what he said, no one __really__ knew if the U.S. was actually going to attack. Now, they know.
Prior to these public remarks, people all over the world were asking themselves “what is the US going to do? Will the U.S. attack?” Now, they know.
Many people are now under the impression that these remarks not only endanger any men sent into the mission, they give Iran a legitimate reason to PRE-EMPTIVELY ATTACK ISRAEL! Before U.S. assets can be there to protect them.
This seems to many people to be an Op-Sec catastrophe.
HAL TURNER ANALYSIS
A war with Iran would not be short and very risky. It would shut oil, US bases, and US power at once.
Iran would likely do preemptive strikes on US regional military installations.
Immediate Impacts:
– Al Udeid and Al Dhafra airbases become inoperable from ballistic missile saturation
– Fifth Fleet command structure in Bahrain loses C4ISR capability for 72+ hours
– Strait of Hormuz closes as Iran deploys antiship mines across navigation channels
Systemic Fractures:
– Gulf states expel remaining US forces to avoid becoming secondary targets
– Global oil prices quintuple within 48 hours, triggering margin calls that cascade through commodity markets
– Israel launches independent strikes on Iranian nuclear facilities (potentially with nukes) without US coordination or approval
The Depletion:
– US precision munition stockpiles exhaust in 11 days of sustained counterstrikes
– Strategic petroleum reserve depletes to zero as domestic refineries cannot process non-light-sweet crude alternatives
– Carrier strike groups withdraw beyond missile range, ceding regional presence for the first time since 1980
Permanent State:
– Saudi Arabia and UAE formalize defense treaties with China and Russia
– US military posture shifts permanently to over-the-horizon, eliminating forward deployment doctrine
– Iran establishes de facto control over Gulf shipping, collecting transit fees that fund regime indefinitely
Wildcard:
– Pakistan transfers operational nuclear warheads to Iran under secret protocol, creating a Shia nuclear umbrella that India cannot ignore and triggering South Asian escalation
U.S. “M2” Money Supply Increasing at ALARMING Rate; Resulting in Precious Metals Skyrocketing
The US “M2” money supply, as revealed by the Federal Reserve, jumped +$1.65 trillion in 2025, to a record $26.7 trillion. This marks the largest annual increase since 2021 and the 3rd consecutive annual gain.
Since mid-2023, the M2 has risen +$3.7 trillion, driven by rapidly rising bank deposits and money market fund inflows. This means money supply has grown +$116 billion PER MONTH over this period.
By comparison, from January 2022 to April 2023, M2 contracted -$450 billion, or -$28 billion a month.
US money creation is happening at an alarming pace.
PRECIOUS METALS EXPOSE THE PROBLEM
The value of various “precious metals” has changed dramatically over the past year, with both Gold and Silver rising to historic Record highs.
While Industrial Demand is one reason that Silver in particular is rising so fast, that demand does not explain the dramatic rises being seen in OTHER precious metals:
These other precious metals are all rising at dramatic rates as well and most people are perplexed as to how and why.
It’s no secret.
As the U.S. creates more and more cash out of thin air, that new cash lessens the value of all the other cash in existence. As such, it must therefore take more cash to buy things.
A significant portion of the increase in Gold and other non-Silver precious metals . . . is being driven by devaluation of the circulating cash.
We are witnessing, in real time, the destruction of the fiat money system.
The powers that be have over-spent so much, for so long, and simply printed money out of thin air in such quantities, that the real world is seeing cash lose its value each and every day!
The global financial system is being destroyed because there is no other outcome possible.
The powers-that-be have been trying desperately to trigger World War 3 to use as cover for the failing money system. They want to be able to blame the coming and unavoidable economic collapse on “the war” and not on their own spending and money-creation.
World War One
Around 15 to 22 million people died in World War I, including about 9 to 11 million military personnel and 6 to 13 million civilians, making it one of history’s deadliest conflicts due to new technologies, disease, and starvation, with the highest tolls often seen in major powers like Germany, Russia, France, and the Ottoman Empire.
World War Two
World War II caused an estimated 70 to 85 million deaths, making it the deadliest conflict in history, with roughly two-thirds being civilians, particularly in the Soviet Union and China, due to genocide (like the Holocaust), mass bombings, disease, and starvation, alongside immense military losses. Total deaths include about 20-25 million military personnel and 50-55 million civilians, with the Soviet Union and China suffering the highest casualties.
TODAY
World War Three will likely see “billions” die. To cover-up for politicians who spent the world into financial oblivion, they have to cover-it-up by going to a war that is completely unnecessary.
You, your family, me, my family, are likely going to get KILLED because politicians – like the spoiled brat children they are – can’t stop spending other people’s money. It’s like a drug addiction; they’re drawn to the power spending all that money brings. They can’t stop themselves.
We seem to be in need of a worldwide “intervention” before these children in adult bodies get a couple billion of us killed.
Clintons Face Escalating Contempt Fight in House Epstein Probe
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Former President Bill Clinton and former Secretary of State Hillary Clinton have refused to appear for scheduled depositions before the Republican-led House Oversight Committee as part of its ongoing investigation into financier Jeffrey Epstein, setting the stage for potential contempt of Congress actions against both political figures.
On Tuesday, Bill Clinton failed to appear at a closed-door deposition subpoenaed by the committee for questioning about his past association with Epstein. Committee Chairman Rep. James Comer (R-Ky.) announced that the panel will move forward with contempt proceedings against the former president after he declined to comply with the subpoena.
Clinton’s absence came despite the subpoena having been approved in a bipartisan committee vote, underscoring the committee’s insistence that both Clintons answer questions central to its review of the federal government’s handling of Epstein and his associates.
Bill Clinton’s legal team had argued in writing that the required appearance would be more “efficient” through written responses rather than live testimony. The committee rejected this proposal and maintained that a deposition was necessary.
Chairman Comer emphasized that the contempt action is procedural and not an allegation of wrongdoing. “We just have questions,” Comer said, focusing on transparency and accountability in the context of the investigation.
The committee’s inquiry follows subpoenas issued last year as it seeks to better understand Epstein’s connections with prominent figures and the effectiveness of previous investigations into his conduct—though no criminal charges have been brought against the Clintons in relation to Epstein’s crimes.
Hillary Clinton also refused to comply with her own scheduled deposition on Wednesday, prompting Comer to announce plans to include her in contempt proceedings as well. If advanced by the committee, the contempt resolutions could be voted on by the full House before being referred to the Department of Justice for potential enforcement.
The Clintons’ attorneys have labeled the subpoenas “invalid and legally unenforceable,” asserting they lack a clear legislative purpose and are politically motivated. In a joint statement, the former first couple framed the effort as part of partisan pressure rather than sincere pursuit of facts.
Bill and Hillary Clinton maintain they have already provided what limited information they possess about Epstein and his network. They have also pointed out that numerous other officials with ties to the case provided testimony or documents in the past, and contend that additional appearances would yield minimal new information.
The dispute comes amid broader legislative efforts to release government files related to the Epstein case. The Epstein Files Transparency Act passed the House in 2025, requiring the release of related documents—a move supporters say increases transparency, while critics argue it invites political exploitation.
Republicans have pointed to previously released photos and flight logs showing Bill Clinton’s past travel with Epstein as part of their justification for seeking live testimony, though Clinton has denied any knowledge of Epstein’s criminal activities and insists his interactions were limited and distant in time.
Democrats and some legal analysts argue that contempt proceedings against the Clintons risk further politicizing the inquiry and may lead to protracted legal battles over the scope of congressional subpoena power. With contempt resolutions now expected next week, the clash between Congress and the former first couple is likely to intensify before resolution.
Diplomatic Clash Over Greenland: White House Meeting Intensifies Tensions
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
A high-stakes diplomatic confrontation unfolded at the White House on January 14, 2026, as senior officials from the United States, Denmark, and Greenland met to discuss the future of the Arctic territory of Greenland. The meeting — led on the U.S. side by Vice President J.D. Vance and Secretary of State Marco Rubio — took place against the backdrop of escalating rhetoric from President Donald Trump, who has repeatedly made securing Greenland a central national security priority.
The delegation from Denmark was led by Foreign Minister Lars Løkke Rasmussen, and Greenland was represented by Foreign Minister Vivian Motzfeldt. Both left the talks visibly tense, with diplomatic sources describing the session as deeply challenging and far from resolution.
U.S. Position: Greenland Strategic for Defense and Security
President Trump has framed Greenland’s position in the Arctic as critical to U.S. national security, emphasizing its role in missile defense and broader hemispheric defense priorities. Trump has publicly stated that U.S. control over Greenland is “vital” and has even suggested that NATO should assist the United States in securing the territory — a statement that has drawn sharp criticism from allies.
The administration’s strategic argument centers on three primary points:
-
Missile Defense: Greenland’s geographic location is seen as ideal for components of a proposed U.S. missile defense architecture known within some U.S. policy discussions as the “Golden Dome.”
-
Arctic Security: The Arctic is increasingly viewed as a theater of geopolitical competition, particularly with perceived moves by Russia and China in the region. Trump and senior aides have argued that American oversight would preempt potential adversaries.
-
Natural Resources: Greenland’s vast deposits of rare earth minerals and other strategic resources have also been highlighted as part of broader economic and security considerations.
The U.S. already maintains a military presence in Greenland via Pituffik Space Base, a Space Force installation focused on missile warning and space surveillance. The 1951 U.S.–Denmark defense treaty allows American forces to operate in Greenland with Danish consent, and U.S. officials have expressed interest in expanding cooperative activities.
Denmark and Greenland Push Back Firmly
Officials from both Denmark and Greenland have firmly rejected any notion of transferring sovereignty. Danish leaders emphasized that Greenland is not for sale, and that its status as part of the Kingdom of Denmark is non-negotiable. Greenland’s leadership reiterated that even if independence remains a long-term discussion, immediate alignment is with Denmark, NATO, and the European Union.
Greenlandic Prime Minister Jens-Frederik Nielsen stated unequivocally ahead of the talks that, “If we have to choose between the U.S. and Denmark here and now, we choose Denmark… We choose NATO… We choose the EU.”
Danish officials also stressed that strengthening NATO cooperation in the Arctic — rather than altering sovereignty — is their preferred path. Denmark has announced plans to bolster military presence and joint exercises in Greenland and the North Atlantic with allied participation.
Alliance and International Reactions
The situation has attracted broad international attention. European Union and NATO leaders have expressed strong support for Denmark’s sovereignty over Greenland, warning that any attempt to unilaterally alter territorial control could undermine the alliance. Officials, including the European Commissioner for Defence, have suggested that a military takeover would be tantamount to ending NATO as it currently functions.
Several NATO partners have already increased their presence in Greenland under coordinated defense activities, with Sweden and Norway contributing forces for Arctic endurance and security operations — moves seen as strengthening allied posture rather than isolating the United States.
Domestic and Global Context
Public opinion in the United States on the question of annexing Greenland — especially by force — appears to be divided, with polls indicating majority opposition to military action. Internationally, the prospect of a U.S. takeover has been widely criticized as destabilizing and inconsistent with international law.
Even within the U.S. political sphere, some lawmakers have called for more measured approaches, underscoring that security cooperation and trusted alliances should be prioritized over confrontation. 🇺🇸
What Comes Next
With the January 14 meeting concluded and no clear agreement reached, tensions remain high. Danish and Greenlandic ministers plan to continue discussions in Washington on Capitol Hill and with NATO representatives. Meanwhile, Greenland’s enhanced commitment to its current alliances suggests the territory is doubling down on existing defense frameworks rather than yielding to external pressure.
The situation reflects a rare moment of friction between the United States and its European allies over Arctic strategy, national sovereignty, and alliance commitments — a geopolitical flashpoint likely to unfold further in the months ahead.
Minnesota ICE Clashes: Context, Incident, and Ongoing Response
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
The death of 37-year-old Renee Good on January 7, 2026, in Minneapolis, Minnesota, occurred during a major U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) operation and has become a focal point in national debate over federal enforcement, use of force, and civil order. The Department of Homeland Security (DHS) and federal leadership have maintained that the ICE agent involved acted appropriately and in self-defense in response to what was judged a dangerous situation—an assertion that remains central to understanding the ongoing protests and policy tensions.
What Happened
On the morning of January 7, Good was in her SUV near an active ICE enforcement area in south Minneapolis when she was shot and killed by an ICE agent identified in reporting as Jonathan Ross. Federal officials assert the agent fired after believing his life and the safety of others were in imminent danger during a dynamic operational scenario, in which the vehicle was approaching officers after agents had engaged with the driver and attempted to open the vehicle door. DHS labeled the incident self-defense.
Federal sources also reported that the ICE agent suffered internal injuries in the encounter, describing physical trauma consistent with the intensity of the situation. This medical detail has been cited by authorities as further indication of the risk encountered by the agent during the incident.
Federal Position and Justification
Senior administration officials, including spokespeople in the White House and leadership at DHS, have publicly defended the ICE agent’s actions. Statements from government representatives emphasized that law enforcement personnel acted within the scope of training and legal standards under threat assessment protocols. In press remarks, the administration’s position described the shooting as the result of a potentially lethal confrontation, justifying the use of defensive force.
Support for this view has also come from some federal lawmakers who argue that ICE personnel must be able to protect themselves and carry out enforcement without restraint that could endanger officers or bystanders.
Protests and Public Response
Despite the federal position, the incident quickly drew significant protest activity. Tens of thousands gathered in Minneapolis and other U.S. cities to demonstrate against the use of force, calling for accountability and reform in immigration enforcement. Many protesters have framed the situation as part of broader concerns about federal overreach and militarized operations in domestic contexts.
Clashes between demonstrators and federal agents have taken place near the Bishop Henry Whipple Federal Building, with law enforcement using crowd-control measures while protesters chant for justice and demand transparency.
Legal and Investigative Developments
The U.S. Justice Department has stated it sees no basis to open a civil-rights prosecution into the shooting, affirming the federal interpretation of events and reinforcing the conclusion that the agent acted within legal authority. This stance has generated controversy, particularly as some state and local leaders have sought greater access to evidence and independent review.
Tensions and Wider Impact
The incident has exacerbated existing jurisdictional tensions between state authorities in Minnesota and the federal government over immigration policy and enforcement powers. Local leadership has criticized DHS’s handling of the situation, urging restraint and structural review of federal deployments, even as federal authorities maintain that the agent was justified under law.
While narratives about the shooting vary across media and advocacy landscapes, the federal position remains that the ICE agent acted defensively and within the scope of his duties when faced with a rapidly evolving and potentially harmful scenario. This position forms the foundation for how federal authorities continue to conduct and defend operational activity in Minnesota and other regions where ICE enforcement is active.
Is The Red Horse Preparing To Ride? It Appears That We Are Right On The Brink Of An Apocalyptic War In The Middle East
In Revelation 6:4, we are told that when the red horse rides peace will be taken from our world…
4 And there went out another horse that was red: and power was given to him that sat thereon to take peace from the earth, and that they should kill one another: and there was given unto him a great sword.
Could it be possible that the red horse is about to ride?
A lot of people are speculating about this right now. So how would you choose to answer that question?
In Matthew 24, Jesus told us that there would be “wars and rumors of wars” in the last days.
That perfectly describes the times in which we live. Thanks to social media, “rumors of wars” constantly spread like wildfire all over the Internet. And we are witnessing so much military conflict.
Over half of the nations on the entire planet are either currently engaged in military conflict or are funding military conflict. Now the crisis in Iran threatens to set the entire Middle East ablaze.
Even though thousands of protesters have already been gunned down, reports indicate that somewhere around a million Iranian protesters are back in the streets again tonight. But they know that they cannot overthrow the tyrannical regime in Iran alone, and they are begging for help…
Despite a nearly total Internet blackout for days, foreign militias enlisted to fight the protesters, and live ammunition on the streets, Iranians continue to fill cities throughout Iran, such as Isfahan and Tehran, with their cry for freedom and a plea to the West.
Juliana Taimoorazy, founder and president of the Iraqi Christian Relief Council, described the cry of the protesters: “Please come and help us. The next few hours are critical. Their eyes are on Israel. Their eyes are on America. They’re begging, they’re pleading with us to assist.”
These protesters are literally putting their lives on the line.
Will the U.S. and Israel step up and help them, or will they be left hanging?
Iran’s crown prince, Reza Pahlavi, is also asking for military action…
Reza Pahlavi, Iran’s exiled crown prince, called on President Trump to take action against the Iranian regime sooner rather than later, as protesters in his homeland take to the streets despite a deadly crackdown.
In an interview with CBS News’ Norah O’Donnell on Monday, Pahlavi said, “We need action to be taken.”
“The best way to ensure that there will be less people killed in Iran is to intervene sooner, so this regime finally collapses and puts an end to all the problems that we are facing,” he said.
Thousands of protesters have already been slaughtered, and each day that military action is delayed means that thousands more protesters will be killed.
The good news for the protesters is that President Trump is now publicly calling for a revolution in Iran and is pledging to send help…
Iranian Patriots, KEEP PROTESTING – TAKE OVER YOUR INSTITUTIONS!!! Save the names of the killers and abusers. They will pay a big price. I have cancelled all meetings with Iranian Officials until the senseless killing of protesters STOPS. HELP IS ON ITS WAY. MIGA!!! PRESIDENT DONALD J. TRUMP
When a reporter from CBS asked what type of action might be taken, Trump did not give us any specifics…
CBS’ Tony Dokoupil asked, ‘And this strong action – are we talking about – what’s the end game?’
Trump replied, ‘If they wanna have protests, that’s one thing. When they start killing thousands of people – now you’re telling me about hanging – we’ll see how that works out for them. It’s not gonna work out good.’
It comes as the first protester set to be executed was named today as Erfan Soltani. The 26-year-old will be allowed a final ten minutes with his family before he is hanged on Wednesday morning for allegedly protesting against the regime last Thursday.
We need to pray for President Trump, because he is being faced with some very difficult decisions.
If he changes course and does nothing, he will look bad for breaking his promise and enormous numbers of protesters will be ruthlessly slaughtered by the Iranian regime.
If he takes limited military action, it will likely not be enough to cause the regime in Iran to fall…
Israeli and Arab officials have told the Trump administration in recent days that they believe the Iranian regime may not yet be weakened to the point where U.S. military strikes would be the decisive blow that topples it, according to a U.S. official, a former U.S. official briefed on the discussions, a person familiar with the Israeli leadership’s thinking and two Arab officials.
The Israeli and Arab officials have suggested that President Donald Trump, who is weighing military action in Iran in response to the regime’s deadly crackdown on protesters, hold back on large-scale strikes for now, with some of them preferring to wait until the regime is even more strained, the sources said. They also noted the situation in Iran is rapidly developing, with the stability of the regime potentially changing quickly in one direction or the other.
If the Iranian regime ends up surviving when everything is said and done, it would look like a major defeat for Trump.
Of course Trump could decide that now is the time for all-out war, and in such a scenario Iran and Israel would not hold anything back.
Yesterday, Iranian Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf warned that Trump would be taught a “lesson that will never be forgotten” if he chooses the path of war…
At the same time, senior Tehran officials have escalated anti-American rhetoric — even as mounting internal unrest threatens the regime’s stability. On Monday, Iranian Parliament Speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf insisted Iran would teach the “delusional” and “arrogant” President Trump a “lesson that will never be forgotten,” as he vowed U.S. forces would be “burned by the fire of Iran’s defenders” while insisting, “We are your opponent.”
Since the end of the 12 Day War, the Iranians have been feverishly rebuilding their missile arsenal.
The Khorramshahr-4 ballistic missile, also known as the Kheibar, packs a tremendous punch and has enough range to reach every single major Israeli city…
At the core of the reported plan is the Khorramshahr-4 ballistic missile, known in Iran as “Khyber.” The missile, unveiled by Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) Aerospace Force, is among the most powerful conventional weapons in Tehran’s inventory. With a range of roughly 2,000 kilometers, it can strike targets across Israel and reach U.S. military facilities in Turkey and parts of southeastern Europe if launched from western Iran.
Defense analysts note that the missile’s significance lies not only in its extended range but also in its heavy payload. Capable of carrying a warhead estimated at up to 1,500 kilograms, the Khorramshahr-4 is designed to cause extensive damage to hardened or high-value targets, including air bases, command centers, and critical infrastructure. Its advanced fuel system allows it to remain stored for long periods and launched on short notice, significantly reducing warning time for defenders.
Iranian officials have framed the missile as a purely defensive tool, but regional rivals view it as a central element of Tehran’s threat posture toward Israel. From Iranian launch sites, major Israeli cities including Tel Aviv and Haifa fall well within range.
Of course it is always possible that if the Iranian regime feels like it is in imminent danger of falling, it could try to hit Israel in unconventional ways as well.
How do you think that Israel would respond if biological or chemical weapons were used against it? For now, the IDF is carefully monitoring what is going on in Iran…
The Israel Defense Forces said Monday that it remained on alert for possible “surprise scenarios” as anti-government unrest in Iran has prompted the United States to threaten intervention over the killing of protesters.
Tehran has threatened to retaliate against Israel and US military bases if it comes under American attack.
Meanwhile, Islamic nations in the Middle East where U.S. bases are located are deeply concerned that missiles could soon start falling in their own territories if the U.S. attacks Iran…
WSJ reports Saudi Arabia, the UAE, and Qatar have warned Washington that a U.S. attack on Iran could trigger retaliation on Gulf energy infrastructure, shipping lanes, and U.S. bases in their countries.
A regional war is the risk—and the Gulf is sounding the alarm.
The Iranians have clearly stated that they will hit U.S. bases throughout the Middle East if they are attacked.
If U.S. service members start dying, President Trump will inevitably respond very forcefully.
Striking Iran comes with a tremendous amount of risk, but I think that it is going to happen.
And it appears that many of our allies believe that something is going to happen too, because they are instructing their citizens to get out of Iran immediately…
Canada, in an update to its travel advice this afternoon, urged its citizens to leave the Islamic Republic now, if it is safe to do so. It notes that land borders with Armenia and Turkey remain open even as most international flights have been canceled.
Germany similarly urges its residents to leave the country, warning that if they choose to remain, they are at risk of “arbitrary arrests.”
It says the German embassy in Tehran is only able to provide “limited assistance,” on the ground.
Australia has also told its citizens to leave, warning that “if you remain in Iran against our advice, you’re responsible for your own safety.”
President Trump is not someone that tends to do things halfway.
When he makes a move, it is usually a big one. As soon as the Iranians detect that a U.S. attack is underway, their response will begin. And as soon as the Israelis detect incoming Iranian missiles, their response will begin.
We really are living in the days of World War III, and what is coming next is going to change the course of world history forever.
We Are Living In World War III, And There Have Been Two Dozen New Developments
Those that have been waiting for World War III to arrive can stop, because it is already here. The largest war in Europe since World War II just continues to escalate, multiple wars are raging in the Middle East, an effort to overthrow the Iranian government is underway, China is threatening Taiwan, the U.S. is seizing Russian oil tankers, Venezuela was just attacked, and now we are being warned that military operations in Mexico, Colombia, Cuba and Greenland could soon commence. As I mentioned the other day, over half of the nations on the entire planet are either engaged in military conflict or are funding military conflict. A time of global war is upon us, and so many war rumors are flying around that I could not possibly keep up with them all.
But I certainly do my best to keep my readers informed. The following are two dozen of the latest developments…
#1 It appears that Iranian protesters are being gunned down on a widespread basis now. One Iranian doctor told TIME that six hospitals in Tehran have recorded a total of at least 217 protester deaths…
As protests against Iran’s government swelled significantly in size on Thursday night, the regime responded in many places by opening fire. A Tehran doctor told TIME on condition of anonymity that just six hospitals in the capital had recorded at least 217 protester deaths, “most by live ammunition.”
The death count, if confirmed, would signal a feared crackdown presaged by the regime’s near-total shutdown of the nation’s Internet and phone connections since Thursday night. It would also constitute a direct challenge to U.S. President Donald Trump, who earlier in the day warned that the regime would “pay hell” if it killed protesters who have taken to the streets in growing numbers since Dec. 28.
#2 Protesters aren’t just being gunned down in Tehran. According to the NCRI, at least 10 young people were just shot by government security forces in Fardis…
Reports from across Iran indicate that last night, repressive forces murdered many protesters in several cities, particularly in Tehran and its surrounding areas. These acts are unequivocally a crime against humanity.
On January 8, in Fardis, Karaj (Siah-Noush neighborhood), repressive forces committed a horrific crime by firing directly at protesters. In one instance, at least 10 youths were killed or wounded, their bodies left on the ground. The regime is attempting to conceal the extent of this massacre by implementing a complete communications blackout. The names of the martyrs will be released once their identities have been confirmed and the details verified.
#3 Internet access for the general population in Iran has been “completely cut off”…
NetBlocks, an internet monitoring group, said on X that the internet had been completely cut off across the country by early evening Thursday local time, a tactic that officials have used during past protests to prevent unrest from spreading and videos of violence leaking out of the country, analysts say.
Iran “is now in the midst of a nationwide internet blackout,” the group said.
#4 One expert is telling us that the primary reason why the Iranian government shut down the Internet was because they intended to use violence against the protesters…
“For the first time, the government decided to shut the internet yesterday, and usually when they shut the Internet, it means that they’re going to use violence against people,” Maziar Bahari, editor of the independent IranWire news site, told CBS News on Friday.
Bahari said activists and journalists outside Iran had heard reports of security forces shooting at people in different parts of the country, but that the information was impossible to verify.
#5 The protesters in Iran are not backing down. In fact, it is being reported that important buildings are being set on fire in multiple cities…
Several videos showed protesters setting fire to the entrance to the regional branch of state television in the central city of Isfahan. It was not immediately possible to verify the images.
Flames were also seen in the governor’s building in Shazand, the capital of Markazi province in central Iran, after protesters gathered outside, other videos showed.
#6 Apparently even billboards of Ayatollah Khomeini are even being set on fire…
Thousands are marching in the streets of Iran, setting fire to billboards of the Ayatollah Khomeini, renaming streets after President Trump, and standing against the government’s thugs in sometimes deadly encounters. In response, the Islamic Republic has now reportedly called in foreign militias to quell the protests, including Hezbollah, the Houthis, the Iraqi militia, and the Quds Force.
#7 Initially, U.S. officials didn’t seem to believe that the protesters had a chance of overthrowing the regime, but now that assessment appears to be changing…
U.S. intelligence assessed Iran protests lacked “sufficient energy” to challenge regime stability, officials told Axios.
That assessment is now being revised “in light of recent events.”
Recent events: 100+ cities protesting. Protesters breaking Ayatollahs’ compound gates. IRGC shooting people after prayers. Total internet blackout. Competing massacre claims.
So U.S. intelligence watched protests spread nationwide, monitored escalation to anti-regime chants, and concluded: not threatening. Then something happened that made them reconsider.
What changed? We don’t know. But reassessment itself reveals U.S. wasn’t expecting this escalation.
#8 President Trump continues to threaten to attack Iran if the Iranian government doesn’t stop killing protesters…
This time, however, the protests are playing out under the threat of a direct U.S. intervention by President Trump.
“I have let them know that if they start killing people, which they tend to do during their riots — they have lots of riots — if they do it, we are going to hit them very hard,” Mr. Trump said Thursday during a radio interview.
#9 Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi says that Iran is ready for war with both the United States and Israel…
Iran is willing to negotiate with the United States but is also prepared for war with the US and Israel, Tehran’s top diplomat said Thursday, warning that the Middle East could soon face a major escalation.
Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi arrived in Beirut, Lebanon, Thursday afternoon, addressing reporters at a press conference shortly after landing.
Araghchi said that the Middle East now faces “unprecedented threats,” blaming Israel, while warning Israel and the US that Iran is prepared for a new war.
#10 The Russians just hit the Ukrainian city of Lviv with warheads from an Oreshnik missile…
Vladimir Putin unleashed his sinister nuclear-capable 8,000 mph Oreshnik missile in a strike on the outskirts of Ukrainian city Lviv, Russia confirmed.
The menacing attack close to NATO and EU territory was aimed at Europe’s largest underground gas storage facility, it is believed.
The Defence Ministry said in a statement that the strike was a response to an attempted Ukrainian drone attack on one of the Russian dictator’s residences at the end of December.
#11 According to one report, the warheads from the Oreshnik missile “destroyed Europe’s largest underground gas storage facility”…
The multi-warhead missile destroyed Europe’s largest underground gas storage facility, the Bilche-Volytsko-Uherske in Stryi.
The capacity of this facility accounted for over 50% of all Ukrainian gas storage.
#12 Former State Department official Jim Jatras is warning that the Russians are trying to send us a message…
Reports of #Oreshnik attacks in Lvov oblast, presumably is response to US seizure of a Russian ship & drone attacks on strategic targets in Russia.
The Russians are sending a message: See what we can do! Better back off! Are you listening now? Don’t make us angry!
But the message received in the West: Ha! You’re scared of us! You’re weak! We can do whatever we want but you’ll only strike the Ukrainians. Get ready for more of the same!
#13 The Russians also just hit Kyiv really hard, and the mayor of the city is encouraging residents that are without power to temporarily evacuate…
The latest Russian aerial barrage largely pummeled Kyiv, leaving close to half a million people without electricity in Kyiv and the surrounding region, officials said, as temperatures plummeted — prompting Mayor Vitali Klitschko to urge residents to temporarily evacuate the capital if possible.
Klitschko said nearly 6,000 apartment buildings — half of the city’s total — were without heat. Water supply was disrupted in some districts, he said, and he urged residents, “who have the opportunity to temporarily leave the city” to find “alternative sources of power and heat.”
#14 Predictably, Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky is using the latest Russian attacks as an opportunity to urge President Trump to take strong action against Russia…
Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky issued a fresh call for U.S. President Donald Trump to take action against Russia after the latest deadly strikes by Kremlin forces—including with their new hypersonic Oreshnik missile—in Moscow’s revenge for an alleged attack on Russian President Vladimir Putin’s state residence that Kyiv and Washington say did not happen.
“A clear reaction from the world is needed. Above all from the United States, whose signals Russia truly pays attention to,” Zelensky said in an X post on Friday. “Russia must receive signals that it is its obligation to focus on diplomacy, and must feel consequences every time it again focuses on killings and the destruction of infrastructure.”
#15 Just hours ago, the U.S. made a move to seize another Russian oil tanker…
The US is in the process of seizing a tanker in the Caribbean as Washington continues efforts to thwart alleged drug smuggling.
The US Coast Guard seized the oil tanker Olina from Russia’s “shadow” fleet. The Olina had previously left Venezuela and was returning to the region, but was falsely flying the flag of East Timor, which is typical of the so-called “shadow fleet” of ships that avoid sanctions.
The Olina was carrying Russian oil. It is involved in the export of Russian oil and oil products from Russian ports on the Baltic and Black Seas, as well as the Pacific region, mainly to China, India, and Turkey.
#16 The Chinese are telling President Trump that they will do whatever they want with Taiwan…
China’s Foreign Ministry has responded to U.S. President Donald Trump’s statement that he’d be “very unhappy” if Beijing attacked Taiwan.
“Taiwan is an inalienable part of China’s territory. How to resolve the Taiwan question is a matter for the Chinese ourselves,” ministry spokesperson Mao Ning told reporters at a Friday news conference. “This is China’s internal affair that brooks no external interference.”
#17 The IDF just conducted new strikes against Hamas targets in Gaza…
Israeli strikes killed at least 11 Palestinians in separate strikes in the Gaza Strip on Thursday, medics said, in what the military said came in response to a failed rocket attack by militants in the enclave. The two sides have traded accusations of breaching a ceasefire agreed in October, and many obstacles remain to further progress.
#18 Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu is saying that President Trump has given him a green light to move Israeli forces into southern Lebanon…
Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu has told cabinet ministers that US President Donald Trump has given the green light for a fresh Israeli offensive against Hezbollah in Lebanon, Kan news reports, without citing sources.
The report says both Jerusalem and Washington are unhappy with the Lebanese government’s efforts to tackle the Hezbollah threat.
#19 After grabbing Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro, President Trump is warning that the U.S. will get to decide which oil companies will have the opportunity to operate in Venezuelan territory from now on…
Trump said oil companies will spend at least $100 billion to rebuild Venezuela’s energy sector. The U.S. will provide security and protection so “they get their money back and make a very nice return,” he said.
The U.S. will decide which oil companies enter Venezuela, the president said. The White House will “cut a deal with the companies” Friday or shortly thereafter, he said.
“One of the things the United States gets out of this will be even lower energy prices,” Trump said.
#20 President Trump has announced that the U.S. will soon begin bombing drug cartels in Mexican territory. Needless to say, this will cause our relations with Mexico to take a sharply negative turn…
Donald Trump said the US will begin land strikes on drug cartels in Mexico as he warned that the only limit to his global power is his ‘own morality’.
The president announced the military action against narcoterrorists just days after the capture of Venezuelan leader Nicolas Maduro.
‘We are gonna start now hitting land with regard to the cartels. The cartels are running Mexico, it’s very sad to watch and see what’s happened to that country,’ Trump told Fox News Thursday night.
#21 Colombian President Gustavo Petro is hoping that his upcoming meeting with President Trump will help “stop a world war”…
Speaking for the first time with a U.S. news network following his first-ever conversation with President Trump, Colombia’s left-wing President Gustavo Petro said Thursday that he was glad to have been invited for a meeting at the White House, and he hoped an ongoing dialogue with Mr. Trump would “stop a world war.”
In the wake of the U.S. attack on Venezuela and capture of the country’s former president, Petro said any attack on his country by the U.S. would start a civil war in Colombia, and “would be dumb policy.”
#22 On Friday, President Trump warned that the U.S. will soon take Greenland one way or another…
Donald Trump offered an ominous warning in his ongoing campaign to acquire Greenland. During his meeting with oil and gas executives today, the president said “we are going to do something on Greenland whether they like it or not”.
His justification? “If we don’t do it, Russia or China will take over Greenland, and we’re not going to have Russia or China as a neighbor,” Trump said.
“So we’re going to be doing something with Greenland, either the nice way or the more difficult way.”
#23 One recent survey discovered that two-thirds of Republicans support “military intervention in countries beyond Venezuela”…
While President Donald Trump campaigned against ‘forever wars’ during his 2024 campaign, two-thirds of Republican voters back military intervention in countries beyond Venezuela.
New polling from the Daily Mail, conducted by J.L. Partners, showed that 67 percent of GOP registered voters supported further military intervention.
That’s compared to just 25 percent of Democrats and 41 percent of independents.
#24 In preparation for what is coming, President Trump is asking Congress to increase the size of the military budget from about a trillion dollars to 1.5 trillion dollars…
President Donald Trump on Wednesday declared he would ask Congress for a $1.5 trillion defense budget in 2027, a massive $500 billion increase from this year’s Pentagon budget.
The huge boost likely reflects how expensive some of Trump’s military ambitions are, from the Golden Dome air defense effort to his call for a new battleship design. Neither of those programs could be fully funded under current spending levels.
Wow.
I don’t even know what to say. World War III is here, and a lot of people are loudly cheering.
I simply do not understand that. Because it is just a matter of time before someone decides to start using weapons of mass destruction, and once we reach that stage everything will change.
The General & White Paper
-
Hermès is allegedly stalking their clients. A Glitz investigation has revealed that Hermès employees are Googling clients’ home addresses to determine whether they have a prestigious enough address to be deemed worthy of a Birkin or Kelly — Glitz
-
President Trump: “Starting February 1st, we’re not making any payments to Sanctuary Cities or states having Sanctuary Cities because they do everything possible to protect criminals at the expense of American Citizens, and it breeds fraud and crime.”
-
US PRESIDENT TRUMP: “To all Iranian patriots — keep protesting, take over your institutions if possible, and save the names of the killers and the abusers… because they’ll pay a very big price… All I say to them is, ‘Help is on its way.'”
-
Trump’s envoy Steve Witkoff met secretly over the weekend with the exiled former crown prince of Iran, Reza Pahlavi — Axios
-
Bill Gates warns the world is sliding into a new Dark Age as society moves “backwards.”
-
Israel is enlisting pro-Trump social media influencers in a new Washington lobbying effort, planning to spend around $900,000 on campaigns aimed at U.S. audiences.
-
Iran’s government claims it has proof of U.S. and Israeli involvement in the recent unrest, saying it possesses both overt and covert documents and alleging that most deaths were caused by foreign backed forces.
-
Left-wing anti-ICE protesters say they plan to bring guns to upcoming demonstrations to fight back against ICE.
-
Reps. Ro Khanna and Thomas Massie have asked a federal judge to appoint a special master or independent monitor to guarantee the full release of every Epstein document.
-
The U.S. military is reportedly attempting to seize the Russian oil tanker Olina, which Western governments say is tied to sanctions evasion.
-
President Trump says the United States will launch bombing operations inside Mexico to eliminate the drug cartels once and for all.
-
President Trump is set to attend the World Economic Forum’s annual meeting in Davos, Switzerland next week, where he is expected to deliver the keynote address.
-
House Oversight Committee to Subpoena Billionaire Investor Les Wexner in Epstein Probe.
-
Federal agents have shot multiple people in Portland, Oregon, raising fears of escalating civil unrest.
-
The United Kingdom may ban X nationwide.
-
Rep. Anna Paulina Luna’s criminal referral against Tim Walz has officially landed on Attorney General Pam Bondi’s desk.
-
California Governor Gavin Newsom is restricting journalists’ and parents’ access to daycare records following the exposure of fraud.
-
The Trump administration has terminated Temporary Protected Status for thousands of Somalis in the U.S., requiring them to leave by March 17 or face deportation.
Mexico’s Sheinbaum says raised ‘security with respect to our sovereignties’ in call with Trump
-
Dozens of ICE vehicles have been spotted in a Kansas City parking lot, preparing for major arrests of illegal immigrants.
-
Pam Bondi’s Department of Justice has no plans to arrest Dr. Anthony Fauci, even after receiving criminal referrals.
-
Pam Bondi’s Department of Justice has no plans to arrest Dr. Anthony Fauci, even after receiving criminal referrals.
-
Rep. Randy Fine introduces legislation that would authorize President Trump to acquire Greenland and place it on a path toward becoming America’s 51st state.
-
President Trump is reportedly considering offering $10,000–$100,000 per person to Greenlanders to support joining the U.S. and separating from Denmark.
-
President Trump visits a Ford F-150 manufacturing plant in Dearborn, Michigan
-
“It’s a good idea for Americans to leave Iran”
-
Iran rights group warns ‘real number of those killed likely in thousands’
-
With phone lines opening back up for calls from inside Iran, two sources, including one inside the country, told CBS News on Tuesday that at least 12,000, and possibly as many as 20,000 people have been killed
-
US designates Muslim Brotherhood in Egypt, Lebanon, Jordan as terrorists
-
Danish, Greenland officials to meet JD Vance and Marco Rubio at White House Wednesday, Denmark says
-
At least 100 children killed in Gaza since ceasefire: UN
-
Iran cut internet ‘after terrorist operations began’: foreign minister to Al Jazeera
-
“Effective immediately, any Country doing business with the Islamic Republic of Iran will pay a Tariff of 25% on any and all business being done with the United States of America. This Order is final and conclusive.”
-
Russia attacks two more civilian ships in Black Sea: Kyiv
-
Greenland govt cannot accept US intention to take island ‘under any circumstance’: statement
-
EU parliament bans Iranian diplomats, representatives from premises
-
Mexico’s Sheinbaum says raised ‘security with respect to our sovereignties’ in call with Trump
This Means War! President Trump Publicly Backs The Revolution In Iran And Promises That U.S. Help Is Coming
Has there ever been a social media post more important than the one that President Trump just made? I believe that it would be very difficult to overstate the significance of what we have just witnessed. Now that Trump has decided to publicly back the revolution in Iran, it is either regime change or bust. And by publicly declaring that the U.S. is going to help the protesters, he has made it very clear that there will be a military showdown with the Iranians. War is here, and we are going to witness a staggering amount of death and destruction.
For those that have not seen it yet, the following is what President Trump posted on his Truth Social account earlier today…
Telling the protesters in Iran to “keep protesting” would have been controversial enough. But when he boldly instructed them to “take over your institutions”, he publicly backed an internal revolution in Iran.
Let that sink in for a moment, because this changes everything. And when President Trump stated that help is on the way for the protesters, he was promising that the U.S. will intervene.
There is no turning back now. Of course the Iranians have nobody to blame but themselves.
After President Trump warned them not to do it, the regime in Iran used automatic weapons to viciously mow down vast numbers of unarmed protesters…
Eyewitnesses say government forces have begun opening fire, apparently with automatic weapons and at times seemingly indiscriminately, on unarmed protesters. Hospital workers say protesters had been coming in with pellet injuries but now arrive with gunshot wounds and skull fractures. One doctor called it a “mass-casualty situation.”
Despite the communications blockade, a recurring image has made its way out of Iran: rows and rows of body bags.
In videos uploaded by opposition activists on social media, families can be seen sobbing as they huddle together over bloodied corpses in unzipped bags. And in footage aired on Iranian state television, a morgue official, sheathed in blue scrubs, stands amid bags neatly arranged along the floor of a white room, under glaring fluorescent lights.
The tyrants in Iran are going to deserve everything that they get.
One source in Iran has described “rivers of blood” in Tehran and snipers that are firing at will at unarmed protesters from the rooftops…
Iranian-American journalist Karmel Melamed told CBN News, “My sources have been telling me it’s a slaughterhouse. There are rivers of blood. That’s what my source has been telling me, in Tehran alone,” he said, and added, “A lot of regime forces have been perched on top of buildings, and in many cases, mowing down people from above. Snipers from inside of buildings have been shooting protesters.”
If you choose to do this to your own people, you should not expect any mercy.
One 23-year-old woman was literally shot in the back of the head as she protested against the tyranny in Iran…
Rubina Aminian attended Shariati College in Iran’s capital, Tehran, where she studied textile and fashion design. She is one of the only people killed in the recent demonstrations to be identified.
Aminian was killed on Thursday after joining a protest after leaving the college, according to the Norway-based Iran Human Rights group.
“Sources close to Rubina’s family, citing eyewitnesses, told Iran Human Rights that the young Kurdish woman from Marivan was shot from close range from behind, with the bullet striking her head,” the group said in a statement.
Shockingly, there are websites in the United States that are actually defending the Iranians.
No matter what side you are on, there is no excuse for defending what the regime in Iran has just done.
No excuse at all. At this point, thousands are dead.
In fact, an Iranian official admitted to Reuters on Monday that the death toll has reached approximately 2,000…
An Iranian official said Jan. 12 that about 2,000 people had been killed in the protests, according to Reuters. It is the first time authorities have acknowledged the high death toll from an intense crackdown amid two weeks of nationwide unrest, the news agency reported.
Two other Iranian officials told the New York Times that somewhere around 3,000 people have died…
A senior Iranian health ministry official, speaking on the condition of anonymity, said about 3,000 people had been killed across the country but sought to shift the blame to “terrorists” fomenting unrest.
Another government official, also speaking on the condition of anonymity, said he had seen an internal report that referred to at least 3,000 dead, and added that the toll could climb.
Of course the truth is that the true death toll is probably far higher than that.
Iran International is estimating that at least 12,000 Iranians have been killed…
Over the past two days, Iran International’s editorial board has reviewed – through a rigorous, multi-stage process and in accordance with established professional standards – information received from a source close to the Supreme National Security Council; two sources in the presidential office; accounts from several sources within the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps in the cities of Mashhad, Kermanshah, and Isfahan; testimonies from eyewitnesses and families of those killed; field reports; data linked to medical centers; and information provided by doctors and nurses in various cities.
Based on these reviews, we have concluded that:
In the largest killing in Iran’s contemporary history – carried out largely over two consecutive nights, Thursday and Friday, January 8 and 9 – at least 12,000 people were killed.
In terms of geographic scope, intensity of violence, and the number of deaths in a short time span, this killing is unprecedented in Iran’s history.
We have never seen a slaughter of this magnitude in the entire history of Iran.
And Iran International is telling us that it has received information that indicates that the slaughter was “carried out on the direct order of Ali Khamenei, with the explicit knowledge and approval of the heads of all three branches of government”…
Based on information received, those killed were mainly shot by forces of the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps and the Basij.
This killing was fully organized, not the result of “sporadic” and “unplanned” clashes.
Information received from the Supreme National Security Council and the presidential office indicates that the killing was carried out on the direct order of Ali Khamenei, with the explicit knowledge and approval of the heads of all three branches of government, and with an order for live fire issued by the Supreme National Security Council.
Many of those killed were young people under the age of 30.
The nuts that are running Iran are deeply evil.
Nobody can deny this.
Today, CBS News is reporting that the death toll could actually be as high as 20,000…
Information trickling out of Iran on Tuesday suggests that a crackdown by authorities to end more than two weeks of widespread anti-government protests has likely been far more deadly than activists outside the country have reported. With phone lines opening back up for calls from inside the Islamic Republic, two sources, including one inside Iran, told CBS News on Tuesday that at least 12,000, and possibly as many as 20,000 people have been killed.
Of course the killing has not stopped.
In fact, the public executions of protesters that have been arrested are just beginning.
On Wednesday, a 26-year-old protester named Erfan Soltani is scheduled to be hanged…
A young Iranian whose ‘only crime is shouting for freedom’ is set to be the first victim to be executed in the Islamic Republic’s brutal crackdown on the protests sweeping the country, human rights groups say.
Erfan Soltani, 26, will be allowed only a final ten minutes with his family before he is hanged tomorrow morning for allegedly taking part in an anti-government protest last Thursday.
The clothes shop owner was arrested at his home in Fardis, central Iran, detained in prison and quickly served the death penalty.
The Iranians are trying to justify their actions by insisting that they were forced to do something about “armed violence” that was being carried out by rioters that are being secretly backed by the United States and Israel…
Facing global condemnation and threats of US intervention over casualties associated with anti-government protests, the Iranian government summoned French, German, Italian and British ambassadors in Tehran and screened a collection of videos purportedly showing “armed violence carried out by protesters.” Saying the images belie the notion that protests have been uniformly peaceful, Iran demanded that the envoys share the videos with their respective governments and stop voicing support of the “rioters.”
Needless to say, the Europeans aren’t buying it.
In fact, German Chancellor Friedrich Merz just said that we are watching “the last days” of the Iranian regime…
German Chancellor Friedrich Merz said Tuesday that Iran’s theocratic regime was living out its ‘last days’ as pressure grew on the government over violence against protestors.
‘When a regime can only hold on to power through violence, then it is effectively finished,’ Chancellor Merz told reporters in Bengaluru during a visit to India.
‘I believe that we are now witnessing the last days and weeks of this regime.’
Let’s hope that he is right. But the Iranians will not go down without a fight.
When push comes to shove, the Iranians are not going to hold anything back. Neither will Israel.
I will be writing much more about this in the coming days. In this article, there are two last things that I wanted to mention.
First of all, the Russians are proclaiming that any threats of military action against Iran are “categorically unacceptable”…
Russia has condemned what it described as “subversive external interference” in Iran’s internal politics and said U.S. threats of military strikes against the country were “categorically unacceptable.”
“Those who plan to use externally inspired unrest as a pretext for repeating the aggression against Iran committed in June 2025 must be aware of the disastrous consequences of such actions for the situation in the Middle East and global international security,” the Russian Foreign Ministry said in a statement.
When Trump ultimately takes military action against Iran, our relations with Russia will get even worse, and that is certainly not good news.
Secondly, the Chinese are quite angry about the 25 percent tariff that President Trump just slapped on all of Iran’s trading partners…
China sharply criticized Washington’s move to levy tariffs on countries trading with the Islamic Republic of Iran, issuing a statement Tuesday – less than 12 hours after President Trump announced the punitive action on Truth Social – condemning the decision.
Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson Mao Ning stated, “China’s position on the tariff issue is very clear.” She said, “We have always believed that there are no winners in a tariff war. China will resolutely safeguard its legitimate rights and interests.”
Our relations with China are rapidly deteriorating, and those that have been following my work for a long time definitely understand why that is so important.
World War III is officially here.
More than half of the nations on the entire planet are either engaged in military conflict or are funding military conflict. And now the Middle East is about to explode.
A final showdown between Israel and Iran has been brewing since 1979, and we are the ones that are going to get to see it happen. So buckle up and hold on tight, because things are only going to get wilder from this point forward.
Both Sides Gear Up For “War” As An Internal Revolution Begins To Erupt In The United States
The left wants to get millions of activists into the streets during the months ahead, and just like last time around they are hoping that an incident in Minnesota will be the spark. Meanwhile, ICE has initiated a “wartime recruitment” strategy and is planning to meet any protests head on. Both sides absolutely hate one another, and we have already seen so many incidents of violence. This is such a tragedy, because none of us should want to see Americans fighting against Americans. Unfortunately, I am convinced that the civil unrest that we are witnessing will greatly escalate as 2026 rolls along.
During an appearance on Jimmy Kimmel’s show, Rachel Maddow revealed what the left’s plan is…
Rachel Maddow Calls for More Protests Against President Trump
“Once you have 3.5% of a population protesting nonviolently against a dictator or an authoritarian, that is essentially an unstoppable force that they can’t oppose.”
If you do the math, that would be more than 10 million people in the United States.
They want to flood the streets with far left activists just like they did in 2020, and they fully understand that there will be widespread violence just like we saw back then. And now the death of Renee Nicole Good has given them exactly what they needed.
The mainstream media is portraying her as an innocent victim, but the truth is that she had been recruited as an anti-ICE “warrior” and she was simply doing what she had been recruited to do…
Renee Nicole Good, the mom who was killed by a federal agent after veering her car toward him, was an anti-ICE “warrior” and was part of a group of activists who worked to “document and resist” the federal immigration crackdown in Minnesota, The Post can reveal.
Good, who moved to the city last year, linked up with the anti-ICE activists through her 6-year-old son’s woke charter school, which boasts that it puts “social justice first” and prioritizes “involving kids in political and social activism,” multiple local sources said.
“She was a warrior. She died doing what was right,” a mother named Leesa, whose child attends the same school, told The Post at a growing vigil where Good was killed Wednesday.
She never should have been there. And we all knew that clashes between ICE and anti-ICE radicals would eventually produce this sort of an incident.
In the aftermath of Good’s death, protests immediately erupted nationwide…
Protests have erupted nationwide after an ICE agent fatally shot a woman in Minneapolis Wednesday.
Renee Nicole Good, 37, was killed during an immigration enforcement operation in a residential neighborhood south of downtown.
While heated protests were happening in Minnesota, demonstrations also took place or were expected to Thursday in New York City, Seattle, Detroit, Washington, D.C., Los Angeles, Philadelphia, San Antonio, New Orleans and Chicago. Protests were also scheduled in smaller cities later this week in Arizona, North Carolina, and New Hampshire.
Needless to say, these protests were very well funded.
In fact, we have learned that funding for the protest in New York City came from a very familiar source…
The protest tonight in New York City against ICE is being paid for and organized by ‘PSL New York City – Party for Socialism and Liberation’ They are funded by Neville Roy Singham who lives in China and works with the CCP
He donated over $20 million to entities like the Justice and Education Fund, which supports Party for Socialism & Liberation activities like protests
He also funds groups with heavy Party for Socialism & Liberation leadership overlap In other words in a huge networks of organization of professional protesters working to take down America
If the left thinks that they can get the Trump administration to back down, they are wrong.
According to CBS News, approximately 2,000 federal agents have been deployed to Minneapolis for a 30 day “surge”…
The Trump administration has begun a massive deployment of hundreds of Department of Homeland Security agents to the Twin Cities area as it escalates its federal crackdown amid a widening fraud scandal in Minnesota, multiple law enforcement officials familiar with the plan told CBS News.
The crackdown could involve roughly 2,000 agents and officers from Immigration and Customs Enforcement’s deportation branch and Homeland Security Investigations, the agency’s investigative arm tasked with fighting transnational crimes, the officials said. They requested anonymity to discuss operations that have not been publicly announced.
The plan is for the agents and officers to oversee a 30-day surge in operations in the Twin Cities area, making the region the first major target of the Trump administration’s expanded immigration crackdown in the new year, officials said.
We heard the word “surge” being used a lot during the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan.
Using military terminology is only going to increase tensions. And the Washington Post is telling us that ICE has begun a $100 million “wartime recruitment” strategy…
U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement officials are planning to spend $100 million over a one-year period to recruit gun rights supporters and military enthusiasts through online influencers and a geo-targeted advertising campaign, part of what the agency called a “wartime recruitment” strategy it said was critical to hiring thousands of new deportation officers nationwide, according to an internal document reviewed by The Washington Post.
The spending would help President Donald Trump’s mass-deportation agenda dominate media networks and recruitment channels, including through ads targeting people who have attended UFC fights, listened to patriotic podcasts or shown an interest in guns and tactical gear, according to a 30-page document distributed among officials this summer detailing ICE’s “surge hiring marketing strategy.”
The Department of Homeland Security has spoken publicly about its fast-tracked effort to significantly increase ICE’s workforce by hiring more than 10,000 new employees, a surge promoted on social media with calls for recruits willing to perform their “sacred duty” and “defend the homeland” by repelling “foreign invaders.” The agency currently employs more than 20,000 people, according to ICE’s website.
If they are preparing for “war”, who do they intend to fight? I am sure that many of you have seen those ads by now.
There are a lot of unemployed people out there these days, and so I am sure that they are getting a lot of applications. Vice-President JD Vance says that as ICE hires more people, we will soon see members of ICE going “door-to-door”…
“I think if we’re to see those deportation numbers ramp up as we get more and more people online working for ICE going from door-to-door making sure if you’re an illegal alien you’re going to have to get out of this country and if you want to comeback apply through the proper channels.”
The Trump administration seems to believe that they will be able to get the left to back down. But instead, the violence just continues to increase.
In 2025, there was a 1,300% increase in assaults against ICE officers and a 3,200% increase in vehicular attacks against ICE officers…
The US Department of Homeland Security (DHS) released new statistics Thursday indicating a sharp increase in assaults, vehicular attacks, and death threats against U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) law enforcement officers over the past year. According to DHS, assaults against ICE officers rose more than 1,300 percent during the first year of the Trump administration. DHS reported 275 assaults between January 20 and December 31, 2025, compared to 19 assaults recorded during the same time period in 2024, which the department characterized as a 1,347 percent increase.
DHS also reported a significant rise in vehicular-related incidents involving ICE personnel. Between January 21, 2025, and January 7, 2026, ICE officers experienced 66 vehicular attacks, compared to two during the same time span the previous year, an increase DHS calculated as 3,200 percent. In addition, DHS said it has recorded an 8,000 percent increase in death threats directed at ICE law enforcement officers, though the department did not specify the underlying totals in the release.
It is going to get a lot worse.
ICE is ramping up their “wartime recruitment” strategy so that they can conduct more operations in 2026, and the left hopes to mobilize millions of people to oppose them.
An internal revolution is brewing. So many of the things that I have been warning my readers about for so many years are now happening right in front of our eyes.
This is not going to end well. But most of you already knew that.
The Musical Chairs Economy: When You Can’t Find A Job No Matter How Hard You Try, It Can Be Absolutely Soul Crushing
After months of submitting resumes and filling out applications, many unemployed Americans have given in to despair. Dozens of large companies all over the nation have been conducting mass layoffs, and the competition for any good jobs that do happen to be available has become extremely intense. But if you have not lost your source of income, things may still seem fairly normal to you and you may be wondering what all of the fuss is about. That is why I am calling this “the musical chairs economy”. If you have been able to hold on to a chair each time the music stops playing, that is a good thing. But you should also realize that there are millions of Americans that have been forced out of the game and are absolutely desperate to get back in.
Earlier today, I came across a social media post from a discouraged job seeker that really tugged at my heart…
In recent months I have heard so many stories like this.
Very highly qualified individuals feel like they are banging their heads into a wall because they can’t find work no matter how hard they try.
One unemployed worker named Tim Rogers that has been out of work for five months feels like the job applications that he is constantly submitting are going straight “into the abyss”…
I got laid off five months ago. Every morning I drink a pot of coffee while I write cover letters, tweak my résumé, and submit job applications into the abyss, knowing they will likely never be seen by human eyes—only crawled by the cold, lifeless algorithms of an artificial intelligence. I feel like General Zod from Superman, floating off into space trapped inside a two-dimensional phantom zone, screaming in silence about my job qualifications and core competencies.
The job market is a mess. The old system is broken and a functioning replacement has yet to fully emerge. We’re stuck in the between years—a dystopian digital doomscape that has job seekers and hirers picking through a landfill of A.I.-generated garbage and longing for the halcyon days of an analog past.
Some people are firing off hundreds or even thousands of resumes without hearing anything at all.
It can be extremely depressing when you feel like you are trying as hard as you can but you aren’t getting anywhere. One woman that was laid off by Oracle in November 2023 still hasn’t been able to find work after more than two years…
I started at Oracle in January 2020 as a site reliability engineer. In November 2023, I started hearing that my Oracle coworkers were getting pulled into Zoom meetings and told they had been laid off. I hoped I wouldn’t be next, but I was. My entire team was let go.
I didn’t start looking for work right away because I’d received some severance pay, and I’d heard it was difficult to land a tech role during the holiday season. I took some time to reassess what I wanted from my career and began my job search in February 2024.
I was optimistic at first because most of my prior job searches hadn’t taken too long. As the months dragged on, it became clear I had the wrong impression of the tech hiring landscape.
More than two years after being laid off, I’m still unemployed.
It is January 2026 now. After being unemployed for so long, her value in the marketplace has declined dramatically.
In this environment, it is so helpful to have a personal contact that can help you land a position. Because in so many cases, the resumes and applications that job seekers fire off to potential employers are not even looked at by human eyes…
You did everything they told you to do. You earned the credentials, spent hours on your resume and revised multiple cover letters. You worked side gigs, volunteered, learned new software and perfected your LinkedIn profile. Yet, you can’t get a callback for an interview.
It’s as if your application vanished into the abyss of a company database, and the “thank you for applying” emails are piling up. So-called entry-level jobs now need years of experience, and junior roles expect postgraduate degrees.
You are likely wondering what you’re missing, but it’s not you — it’s the system. Across the United States, Canada and United Kingdom, automation now does the screening before a human ever has a look. Companies say they can’t find talent, yet many have stopped training people.
Unfortunately, it appears that conditions will become even harsher during the months ahead because things are certainly trending in the wrong direction.
In November, the number of job postings in the United States was the lowest in 14 months, and it was also the second lowest in nearly five years…
The number of postings in November was the fewest since September 2024. But outside that month, it was the lowest in nearly five years.
Open jobs in November fell sharply in shipping and warehousing, restaurants and hotels, and in state and local government.
As the job market continues to dry up, it is going to have enormous implications for the economy.
Americans just don’t have as much discretionary income as they once did, and as a result large retailers are closing locations all across the country. And with fewer potential buyers floating around, home prices are starting to fall…
Housing market anxiety is spreading — with 26 of the country’s 50 biggest metro areas now seeing home prices lower than they were a year ago.
For the first time in nearly three years, the median US listing price has also slipped below $400,000, a key psychological level that had held firm since the pandemic boom, according to Realtor.com.
It appears that our housing bubble is starting to burst.
Sadly, home prices are declining the fastest in some of the markets that were once the hottest…
Worst is Austin, TX, where prices have plunged 7.3 percent over the past year to $462,000, the biggest drop of any major metro.
The pain is spreading well beyond Texas. Prices are down 6.7 percent in San Diego, CA slipping to just under $900,000, while nearby San Jose has seen values fall 5.5 percent to $1.19 million.
Needless to say, what we are currently experiencing is just the beginning.
Many of the economic trends that made big news in 2025 will continue to accelerate in 2026. So if you are out of work right now, I would grab whatever you can, because competition for jobs is only going to get even fiercer during the months ahead.
Has The Insane Iranian Regime Cut Off All Internet Access To Cover Up A Mass Slaughter Of Protesters?
Global events are moving very rapidly now. If I keep adding more stuff to this article, I will never get it out on time. You are going to be shocked by some of the things that have just happened. It appears that the showdown in Iran between the protesters and the government is about to reach a violent crescendo. Meanwhile, it is being reported that the Russians have just fired an Oreshnik missile at one of Ukraine’s largest cities. Many of us expected 2026 to be absolutely crazy, and so far it is certainly living up to expectations.
Thursday was the 12th day of the ongoing protests in Iran, and CNN is telling us that one human rights organization is reporting that 45 protesters have been killed so far…
At least 45 protesters, including eight children under the age of 18, have been killed in the first 12 days of ongoing nationwide protests in Iran, the Norway-based Iran Human Rights NGO (IHRNGO) reported Thursday. It said hundreds more have been injured and over 2,000 people detained since demonstrations began on December 28, 2025.
“State forces have used live ammunition to suppress the protests and have carried out widespread, mass arrests in some cities,” IHRNGO said.
Iranian news outlets reported Thursday that at least five security personnel have also been killed in the unrest, including two members of Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps.
Over and over again we are hearing that live ammunition is being used against the protesters.
But the protesters are not backing down.
In fact, we are being told that protesters are even starting fires in the streets of Tehran…
In one of the clips, a structure described by journalist Amirhossein Miresmaeili as a “government building” could be seen engulfed by fire. Several people could be seen chanting “Long live the Shah” and clapping their hands as the scene unfolded. Recirculating a video he said to have received, the journalist said: “What an extraordinary crowd! Received from Haft Hoz Tehran, just now on 18 Dey; people, along with the chant ‘Long live the Shah’, are witnessing the burning of a government building.
“The sender said: ‘Tonight, the people of Tehran have taken to the streets in response to the prince’s million-strong call.’”
Another clip shared on social media showed fires in the streets of Tehran, with the poster claiming vehicles owned by Iranian forces had been set ablaze.
Crown Prince Reza Pahlavi is greatly encouraging the violence, and some protesters have been heard chanting his name…
At least some of the protesters appeared to be heeding a call by exiled Crown Prince Reza Pahlavi to turn out Thursday. One of the slogans shouted by the marchers was “This is the last battle, Pahlavi will return,” according to video reviewed by CNN.
As the latest protests unfolded, Pahlavi posted encouragement on X, urging Iranians to “take to the streets and, as a united front, shout your demands.” He added, “Rise Iran!”
I think that the regime in Iran has seen enough.
They aren’t just going to sit there and allow these protesters to start a revolution. So on Thursday they decided to start shutting down Internet access for the general population…
Iranian authorities appeared to be cutting off internet access Thursday in the capital and some other regions of the country as mass protests and chanting against the government continue. Multiple sources in Tehran told CBS News the internet was down in the capital.
The NetBlocks monitoring organization said at about 8:30 local time in Iran that its live data “show #Iran is now in the midst of a nationwide internet blackout; the incident follows a series of escalating digital censorship measures targeting protests across the country and hinders the public’s right to communicate at a critical moment.”
One CBS News source in the capital said there were “huge crowds out across Tehran. Unprecedented,” and confirmed that the internet was down for most people in the city. He said some people, with more robust, more reliable business accounts could still get online. Not long after, that source became unreachable, suggesting the blackout had widened even further.
If you were preparing a nationwide violent crackdown, this is the first thing that you would do. Many are speculating that this Internet blackout is a sign that a mass slaughter of protesters is about to commence.
In addition, the Iranian regime has just brought in “roughly 850 Hezbollah, Iraqi militia and Quds Force-linked fighters” to help deal with the protesters…
As anti-regime protests spread across Iran for a 12th straight day, the Islamic Republic has reportedly turned to foreign militias for support, with two independent sources confirming that roughly 850 Hezbollah, Iraqi militia and Quds Force-linked fighters crossed into Iran to bolster the regime’s security forces.
The reported movement marks a significant escalation in the regime’s response, signaling a willingness to rely on allied foreign militias with combat experience to help suppress domestic dissent.
“This is nothing new for the regime. It is the logical extension of a playbook the ruling clerics have used since 1979 to outsource repression to ideologically loyal militias and then integrate them into the state’s coercive infrastructure,” Iran expert Lisa Daftari told Fox News Digital.
Many Iranians soldiers may be hesitant to fire on their fellow citizens, and foreign militants are more likely to blindly follow the instructions of the Islamic zealots that are currently running Iran.
But if the Iranians really do start gunning down large numbers of protesters, they risk being attacked by the United States. On Thursday, President Trump warned that the U.S. military will “hit them very hard” if protesters continue to get killed…
The unrest prompted US President Donald Trump on Thursday to repeat his threat to attack Iran if security forces kill protesters.
“I have let them know that if they start killing people, which they tend to do during their riots … we’re going to hit them very hard,” Trump told radio host Hugh Hewitt.
And Trump also told Hewitt that this message has been conveyed to the Iranians “even more strongly than I’m speaking to you right now”…
Mr Hewitt pointed out that some deaths were caused by stampedes, to which the US president responded: “I’m not sure I can necessarily hold somebody responsible for that.
“But… They’ve been told very strongly — even more strongly than I’m speaking to you right now — that if they do that, they’re going to have to pay hell.”
He then delivered a message to the protestors: “You should feel strongly about freedom… You’re brave people. It’s a shame what’s happened to your country. Your country was a great country.”
Trump isn’t bluffing.
So let’s hope that the Iranians back down. Because once the missiles start flying, things will get really crazy in the Middle East.
Meanwhile, the Russians have made it exceedingly clear that they have no intention of accepting the “peace plan” that the Ukrainians and the Europeans have been working on…
The Russian Foreign Ministry on Thursday rejected the latest US-backed offering to end the Russia-Ukraine war, issuing a blistering rebuff that threatens to blow up President Trump’s peace plan.
A terse statement from Moscow’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs slammed the US-European proposal for security assurances for Ukraine, saying the protection plan amounts to “a true axis of war.”
“The document turned out to be extremely far from a peace settlement. The declaration is not aimed at achieving a lasting peace and security but rather at continuing the militarization, escalation and further conflict aggravation,” the ministry claimed.
We have known from the very beginning that the list of demands that the Ukrainians and the Europeans were putting together was completely unrealistic.
Now they will likely claim that peace with Russia is “impossible” and that it will be necessary to escalate the war. Of course the Russians just escalated matters by using an Oreshnik missile to strike Lviv…
Reports indicate that an Oreshnik missile struck Lviv Thursday, which is located just 40 miles from the EU and the NATO territory.
Thursday night’s attack, orchestrated by Russia, marks the second instance in which an Oreshnik ballistic missile was used in a strike.
Footage of the warheads from the Oreshnik missile raining down on Lviv has been posted on Instagram.
NATO has no way to intercept those warheads, and so there is nothing that Ukraine can do. If the Russians start frequently using Oreshniks to hit Ukrainian cities, our European allies are going to go absolutely nuts. They will be begging President Trump to do something dramatic.
Since the Russians have now rejected the “peace plan” that the media was talking about so much, Trump might be inclined to agree. Let’s hope that doesn’t happen. Unfortunately, I have a feeling that it is going to be nearly impossible to reverse course at this stage.
Red Lines Drawn: Iran Warns of Regional War if the U.S. Strikes
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Iran’s confrontation with the United States has entered a sharper and more explicit phase. The Speaker of Iran’s Parliament, Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf, publicly confirmed that Tehran has delivered a formal warning to Donald Trump: any U.S. military strike on Iranian territory or assets would trigger immediate and multi-theater retaliation. The statement removes ambiguity about Iran’s red lines and signals a deliberate shift from strategic ambiguity to overt deterrence.
According to Ghalibaf, Iran’s response would not be symbolic or isolated. He stated that Tehran would directly target Israel as well as U.S. military bases spread across the Middle East. This framing underscores Iran’s long-held doctrine that any attack on Iran will be treated as a regional act of war, not a bilateral skirmish.
The warning comes amid heightened tensions driven by overlapping crises: U.S. military posture changes in the region, intensified Israeli operations, maritime incidents, and ongoing proxy conflicts stretching from Gaza to Lebanon, Syria, Iraq, and Yemen. Iran is signaling that the cumulative pressure has reached a threshold where restraint is no longer guaranteed.
From Tehran’s perspective, the message serves several purposes. First, it reinforces deterrence by raising the perceived cost of U.S. action. Second, it reassures Iran’s domestic audience and allied networks that the leadership will respond decisively rather than absorb strikes passively. Third, it places responsibility for escalation squarely on Washington’s decision-makers.
U.S. officials, for their part, continue to emphasize deterrence and defense, stressing that American forces are positioned to protect personnel, allies, and shipping lanes. Yet the very visibility of U.S. assets—aircraft carriers, air bases, missile defense systems—also makes them potential targets in the scenario Iran is describing.
Israel occupies a central place in this calculus. Tehran has long framed Israel as both an adversary and a forward operating node for U.S. power. By explicitly naming Israel as a retaliation target, Iran is attempting to deter not only American strikes but also unilateral Israeli actions that could draw Washington into a broader conflict.
Regionally, Iran’s allied militias and partners represent a critical variable. Groups operating in Lebanon, Iraq, Syria, and Yemen provide Tehran with layered response options, allowing it to escalate horizontally rather than relying solely on direct state-to-state confrontation. This distributed posture complicates any effort to contain escalation once it begins.
Diplomatic channels remain active but strained. Back-channel communications, intermediaries, and regional powers are reportedly working to prevent miscalculation. However, public warnings like Ghalibaf’s suggest that Tehran believes private signals alone are no longer sufficient to shape U.S. behavior.
The risk of misinterpretation is high. Military exercises, troop movements, or limited strikes intended as deterrence could be read as precursors to a larger attack. In such an environment, reaction times shorten, and leaders may feel compelled to act quickly to avoid appearing weak.
Energy markets and global trade are also watching closely. Any conflict that disrupts shipping through the Strait of Hormuz or escalates into attacks on regional infrastructure would have immediate global economic consequences, amplifying pressure on already fragile systems.
For the United States, the challenge is balancing deterrence with restraint. Demonstrating resolve without triggering the very retaliation Iran is threatening requires calibrated signaling and tight command-and-control discipline. History shows that once kinetic exchanges begin, managing escalation becomes exponentially harder.
What is clear is that the strategic environment has shifted. Iran is no longer speaking in hypotheticals. By formally warning Washington and naming specific retaliation targets, Tehran has drawn a visible line. Whether that line deters conflict—or becomes the starting point of one—now depends on decisions made in the coming weeks.
Five eyes military preparing to remove mentally unstable fake Trump
By Benjamin Fulford January 12, 2026
Faced with social and economic collapse, the Anglo-Saxon Five Eyes military is preparing to remove the fake US President Donald Trump, high-level intelligence sources say.
The head of British intelligence says:
“I was instrumental in the installation of what I was told was Donald Trump, but I fear he is long gone with a kind of controlled avatar at the helm for some time now. It is incongruous with what I had in mind,” He says the avatar now in place works for “virulent Zionism” to try to start WWIII.
A senior US Space Force commander said:
“Civil War is coming to America very soon. The civil unrest is all being planned by the Deep State to install Trump as a dictator (Look at what just happened in Minneapolis). Martial law is the only way to save the fake Trump from impeachment. He will be exposed by either China or Russia as a fake before he can start any more regional or, worse, a global war.”
He closed our conversation with, “We are very close to WWIII. This is being pushed by the Zionists. If Trump takes the bait from Netanyahu and attacks Iran on Israel’s behalf, Israel will be vaporized. Russia, China, and North Korea will join, and then it will be checkmate for the Zionists…. The landscape is changing daily. The Zionists are fighting for their survival. They will lose. Remember, Israel will be saved for last.”
The Russians provided proof last week to the US military that an attack on their headquarters originated in Ukraine and demanded the arrest of the people responsible. Many have already fled to Israel. One of them was dictator Vladimir Zelensky. Here is an image of his Israeli passport.
Now it looks like the Russians are going to go to Israel to arrest him and his colleagues.
As evidence, a second Russian aircraft departed Tel Aviv with diplomats on board. When embassies evacuate — it’s not a drill. Israel is no longer safe.
Israel is no longer safe.
⏳ The clock is ticking… silently.
This is why Israeli dictator Benyamin Netanyahu has apparently fled to Mar-a-Lago in Florida seeking protection from the fake Trump.
“Trump” has publicly shown his membership in the Chabad death cult by visiting Rabbi Shneerson’s grave with Howard Lutnick and Ben Shapiro on October 7th. This was to mark the first anniversary of the false flag to justify the genocide in Gaza in an attempt to usher in their anti-Christ.
As a reminder, Chabad wants to kill 90% of humanity and enslave the rest. For background, check out the writings of Henry Makow, whose grandparents were all killed by Chabad in the holocaust, or a sacrificial offering to satan.
People are already taking direct action against the Chabad. In New York, protesters occupied a Chabad synagogue of satan.
In Mississippi, the library and administrative offices of a large Chabad Synagogue of satan were burned. Other attacks are being reported around the world.
U.S. Military Action in Venezuela Marks a Dramatic Escalation in Western Hemisphere Policy
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
In early January 2026, U.S. forces conducted a highly controversial operation in the Venezuelan capital of Caracas that led to the capture of President Nicolás Maduro and his transfer to New York on drug-trafficking and narco-terrorism charges. The Trump administration characterized the raid as a targeted counter-narcotics law enforcement action rather than a declaration of war against Venezuela.
President Donald Trump publicly stated that the United States would “run the country … until such time as we can do a safe, proper and judicious transition,” prompting international alarm over U.S. intentions in the region. Secretary of State Marco Rubio later walked back the most expansive wording, describing Washington’s role as focused on policy influence rather than direct governance.
The operation quickly drew worldwide attention, with governments across Latin America and Europe criticizing what they saw as a violation of international law and a dangerous precedent for overt foreign intervention. At the UN Security Council, several member nations asserted the raid contravened the UN Charter’s prohibition on the use of force against sovereign states.
Inside Venezuela, the political aftermath remains unstable. Acting President Delcy Rodríguez, who assumed office after Maduro’s removal, acknowledged ongoing dialogue with U.S. officials but stressed the importance of national sovereignty and internal governance. Meanwhile, paramilitary groups known as “colectivos” have reportedly increased their presence on Caracas’s streets, leading the U.S. State Department to issue evacuation warnings to American citizens.
The Trump administration has framed its actions as part of a broader effort to disrupt drug trafficking, designating major criminal syndicates — including the Cartel of the Suns — as foreign terrorist organizations. While U.S. officials argue this provides legal justification for aggressive action, independent experts question whether organized crime networks truly fit the terrorist model and warn that exaggeration of drug threats risks inflaming regional tensions.
In the weeks since the operation, U.S. forces have intensified their economic and military pressure on Venezuela. This has included a blockade of Venezuelan oil exports and the interception of foreign tankers allegedly linked to sanctioned activities. Russia condemned these actions, challenging U.S. authority to seize vessels on the high seas.
Attention has also shifted toward Mexico, where President Trump announced plans to begin “hitting land” operations to target major drug cartels after months of maritime interdictions. These comments, including talk of ground operations, have drawn sharp rebukes from Mexican President Claudia Sheinbaum, who emphatically rejected any notion of U.S. military intervention on Mexican soil.
Sheinbaum reiterated Mexico’s longstanding constitutional commitment to non-intervention, underscoring that cooperation with U.S. anti-narcotics efforts should occur only through joint and sovereign agreements rather than unilateral military action.
U.S. lawmakers have shown mixed reactions. A U.S. Senate resolution advanced recently that would limit presidential authority to conduct further military operations in Venezuela without congressional approval — a step that highlights domestic concerns about executive overreach and prolonged military engagement.
Analysts caution that open-ended operations in Venezuela and potential action against cartels in Mexico carry significant risks, including escalation of violence, regional instability, and strained diplomatic ties with key trading partners. Moreover, the legal foundation for unilateral ground action inside Mexico — a sovereign nation and a U.S. economic ally — remains profoundly unclear and controversial.
Despite the administration’s rhetoric about restoring order and halting drug flows, independent observers note that narcotics trafficking networks are deeply embedded and resilient, often adapting to changing enforcement patterns rather than collapsing under pressure. This suggests that purely militarized responses may have limited long-term effectiveness without coordinated judicial and socio-economic strategies.
As Washington and Mexico continue diplomatic exchanges, the coming months may prove pivotal in determining whether U.S. policy shifts toward broader military engagement in the Western Hemisphere or refocuses on multilateral cooperation and targeted law enforcement within established international norms.
Iran Protests: Mass Casualties Reported as Regime Crackdown Intensifies
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Reports emerging from inside Iran suggest one of the deadliest crackdowns in the country’s modern history may be underway. According to informed sources speaking with Iran International, Iranian security forces are using lethal force against protesters nationwide, with preliminary estimates indicating that as many as 2,000 people may have been killed in a 48-hour period beginning January 8, 2026.
Footage sent to Iran International from Kahrizak, south of Tehran, shows multiple bodies placed in body bags inside what witnesses describe as industrial facilities. Eyewitnesses accompanying the videos report dozens of bodies at the site, with additional remains allegedly stored in a nearby shed, suggesting fatalities on a scale far beyond isolated incidents.
Additional videos received from Fardis, Karaj, and Alghadir Hospital in eastern Tehran depict similar scenes, with bodies reportedly arriving in large numbers. These accounts indicate that the violence is not confined to a single city or region, but appears to be unfolding simultaneously across multiple population centers.
Medical sources inside the country have begun to corroborate the scale of the casualties. A doctor in Rasht told Iran International that one hospital alone received at least 70 bodies in a short time frame. If accurate, this would imply a nationwide death toll far exceeding what Iranian authorities have publicly acknowledged.
A near-total internet shutdown, which reportedly began on January 8, has severely limited independent verification. With social media platforms inaccessible and communications restricted, journalists and human-rights monitors have been unable to confirm casualty figures through conventional means, leaving outside observers dependent on fragmentary footage, eyewitness testimony, and medical reports.
Despite these limitations, the volume and consistency of incoming accounts point toward the widespread use of live ammunition and other lethal measures to disperse crowds. Protesters, according to witnesses, were not merely arrested or dispersed but targeted in what appears to be a coordinated security operation.
The most conservative estimates cited by Iran International place the death toll at no fewer than 2,000 people over a 48-hour window. Observers caution that the true number could be significantly higher once communications are restored and hospitals, morgues, and burial records can be fully examined.
What distinguishes the current crackdown from previous episodes of unrest is its apparent intensity and speed. The rapid escalation, combined with the information blackout, has fueled fears that the state is attempting to suppress both dissent and evidence simultaneously.
Analysts monitoring Iran describe the situation as a potential “event horizon” for the Islamic Republic — a point beyond which political compromise may no longer be possible. Either the ruling system fractures under internal pressure, or the repression deepens into sustained mass violence.
For many Iranians, the calculus appears stark. Protesters and their supporters argue that the regime now faces an existential choice: negotiate an end to its rule, or continue a course that risks large-scale civilian slaughter. From this perspective, there is no longer a middle ground.
International reaction has so far been muted. While human-rights organizations have issued general warnings in past protest cycles, there has been little immediate response from major Western governments, and global media coverage remains limited, in part due to the lack of verifiable footage.
As Iran remains largely offline, what lies on the other side of this moment is uncertain. Whether the current wave of violence marks the beginning of regime collapse or the onset of an even darker phase will depend on what unfolds once the blackout lifts — and on whether the outside world chooses to respond.
Security Guard Protecting Maduro Gives CHILLING Account of US Weaponry in Venezuela Raid
Hal Turner World | January 10, 2026
This account of the US Raid to capture Nicholas Maduro, provided by a Venezuelan security guard loyal to Maduro, is absolutely chilling—and it explains a lot about why the tone across Latin America suddenly changed.
Security Guard: On the day of the operation, we didn’t hear anything coming. We were on guard, but suddenly all our radar systems shut down without any explanation. The next thing we saw were drones, a lot of drones, flying over our positions. We didn’t know how to react.
Interviewer: So what happened next? How was the main attack?
Security Guard: After those drones appeared, some helicopters arrived, but there were very few. I think barely eight helicopters. From those helicopters, soldiers came down, but a very small number. Maybe twenty men. But those men were technologically very advanced. They didn’t look like anything we’ve fought against before.
Interviewer: And then the battle began?
Security Guard: Yes, but it was a massacre. We were hundreds, but we had no chance. They were shooting with such precision and speed… it seemed like each soldier was firing 300 rounds per minute. We couldn’t do anything.
Interviewer: And your own weapons? Didn’t they help?
Security Guard: No help at all. Because it wasn’t just the weapons. At one point, they launched something—I don’t know how to describe it… it was like a very intense sound wave. Suddenly I felt like my head was exploding from the inside. We all started bleeding from the nose. Some were vomiting blood. We fell to the ground, unable to move.
Interviewer: And your comrades? Did they manage to resist?
Security Guard: No, not at all. Those twenty men, without a single casualty, killed hundreds of us. We had no way to compete with their technology, with their weapons. I swear, I’ve never seen anything like it. We couldn’t even stand up after that sonic weapon or whatever it was.
Interviewer: So do you think the rest of the region should think twice before confronting the Americans?
Security Guard: Without a doubt. I’m sending a warning to anyone who thinks they can fight the United States. They have no idea what they’re capable of. After what I saw, I never want to be on the other side of that again. They’re not to be messed with.
Interviewer: And now that Trump has said Mexico is on the list, do you think the situation will change in Latin America?
Security Guard: Definitely. Everyone is already talking about this. No one wants to go through what we went through. Now everyone thinks twice. What happened here is going to change a lot of things, not just in Venezuela but throughout the region
UFO/UAP & ET Disclosure Timelines: Controlled Revelation, Narrative Management, and the Question of Who Receives the Truth
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Conversations around UFO/UAP and extraterrestrial disclosure have entered a new phase, marked less by sensational leaks and more by institutional pacing. Across independent media, disclosure-focused Substacks, and alternative platforms, 2025–2026 is increasingly framed as a managed disclosure window rather than a sudden, world-altering reveal. The emphasis is not on whether disclosure occurs, but on how, when, and to whom information is released.
Central to this discussion is the idea of controlled revelation. Governments and defense institutions have shifted from outright denial to cautious acknowledgment—confirming unidentified phenomena, releasing limited footage, and reframing the topic as one of national security, aerospace safety, or advanced technology. This gradualism suggests an intent to normalize the subject without destabilizing existing belief systems, geopolitical balance, or institutional authority.
Within alternative discourse, some voices speculate that a second Trump administration could coincide with accelerated disclosure, casting Trump as a potential “Disclosure President.” These claims often reference his unconventional relationship with intelligence agencies, his willingness to challenge bureaucratic norms, and recent statements by political figures—such as Secretary of State Marco Rubio—acknowledging unexplained aerial phenomena and the seriousness with which they are now treated. While such interpretations remain speculative, they reflect a broader sense that political alignment and disclosure timing may be linked.
What is notable is the shift in tone from if extraterrestrial intelligence exists to how disclosure is being framed. Increasingly, discussions distinguish between the existence of anomalous phenomena and the deeper implications of non-human intelligence. Official channels remain careful, emphasizing uncertainty and ongoing investigation, while alternative analysts argue that significant information remains compartmentalized, released only when it can be absorbed without challenging institutional legitimacy.
This has led to a growing belief that disclosure is not a single event, but a process of acclimatization. By slowly introducing concepts—advanced craft, non-human technology, unexplained intelligence—institutions can guide public perception, reducing shock while maintaining narrative control. Critics argue that this approach prioritizes stability over truth, delaying meaningful public engagement with the broader implications.
Another layer of discourse focuses on who is “ready” for disclosure. Some spiritual and consciousness-oriented communities suggest that disclosure may not arrive uniformly through governments or media, but experientially—through personal encounters, intuition, or awareness shifts. In this framing, truth is not broadcast equally, but received individually, aligned with psychological readiness or “frequency.”
This idea reframes disclosure as both an external and internal phenomenon. While institutions manage information flow at the collective level, individuals may be encountering aspects of disclosure through altered states of awareness, synchronicities, or personal experiences that fall outside official validation. For these groups, disclosure is less about proof and more about recognition.
The role of media further complicates the picture. Mainstream outlets tend to frame UAP discussions conservatively, avoiding extraterrestrial conclusions while highlighting investigative rigor. Alternative outlets, meanwhile, connect dots across historical sightings, whistleblower testimony, and classified program allegations. The divergence reinforces the perception that reality itself is being segmented—different narratives for different audiences.
A critical issue underlying all of this is trust. Decades of secrecy, ridicule, and later partial acknowledgment have left many skeptical of official messaging. When institutions control not just information but interpretation, disclosure becomes less about discovery and more about permission—what the public is allowed to consider plausible.
At the same time, disclosure intersects with broader systemic transitions. As trust in institutions erodes across finance, health, governance, and media, UFO/UAP disclosure becomes symbolic—a test case for whether truth can emerge without being filtered through power structures. How this unfolds may set precedent for future revelations in other domains.
Ultimately, the question is not whether extraterrestrial intelligence exists or whether governments know more than they say—those debates continue. The deeper question is how humanity integrates paradigm-shifting information in an era of fragmentation, mistrust, and information overload. Controlled disclosure may preserve order, but it risks delaying genuine understanding.
The emerging signal suggests a dual-track reality. Official disclosure proceeds cautiously, institutionally, and strategically. Simultaneously, a parallel disclosure unfolds at the personal level—through awareness, curiosity, and individual experience. In this sense, disclosure may not arrive as a headline, but as a gradual recognition that reality is larger, more complex, and less controlled than previously assumed.
Whether 2026 marks a political disclosure milestone or simply another phase of managed revelation, the trajectory is clear: the conversation has crossed a threshold. UFOs and UAPs are no longer taboo. The remaining question is whether disclosure ultimately serves authority—or expands human understanding beyond it.
Weather Manipulation, Geoengineering & Chemtrail Terraforming Revisited: Why the Climate Debate Is Shifting From Nature to Intervention
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Discussion around weather manipulation and geoengineering has resurfaced with renewed intensity, driven not by speculation alone but by a growing body of official acknowledgments, patents, research papers, and pilot programs.
What was once dismissed as fringe concern is now entering broader discourse as governments, corporations, and research institutions openly explore technologies designed to influence atmospheric conditions. The shift is less about proving intent and more about recognizing capability.
At the center of this debate is cloud seeding—a practice with decades of documented use to induce precipitation or suppress hail. Once limited in scope, cloud seeding programs are now being revisited amid drought, water scarcity, and agricultural stress. Proponents frame these efforts as pragmatic tools for climate resilience. Critics argue that the expansion of such programs raises unresolved questions about downstream effects, regional equity, and accountability.
Beyond cloud seeding, broader geoengineering concepts are increasingly discussed in policy and academic circles. These include solar radiation management, stratospheric aerosol injection, and carbon capture at planetary scale. While many remain theoretical or experimental, the seriousness with which they are debated signals a profound shift: climate is no longer treated solely as a system to adapt to, but as one to actively manage.
The term “chemtrails,” long relegated to cultural controversy, re-enters the conversation in a different context when viewed alongside openly published aerosol research and atmospheric patents. Independent analysts point not to a single covert program, but to a fragmented landscape of military, academic, and private-sector experimentation that lacks unified oversight. The concern is not secrecy alone, but coordination without consent.
A key issue is governance. Weather and atmospheric systems do not respect national borders, yet experimentation and deployment decisions are often made within narrow jurisdictions. This creates ethical and legal gray zones where actions taken to benefit one region may inadvertently harm another. The absence of clear international frameworks amplifies mistrust, particularly when transparency is limited.
Public skepticism is also fueled by historical precedent. From nuclear testing to chemical dispersal experiments later acknowledged decades after the fact, institutional assurances have not always aligned with eventual disclosures. As a result, contemporary climate interventions are evaluated not just on technical merit, but on institutional credibility.
Another driver of renewed attention is the increasing normalization of emergency logic. As climate impacts intensify, the argument for “last resort” interventions gains traction. In this framing, geoengineering becomes a necessary tool to buy time. Critics counter that emergency framing can bypass democratic debate and long-term risk assessment, locking societies into irreversible paths.
Private-sector involvement further complicates the picture. Startups and research firms exploring atmospheric technologies operate under commercial incentives that may not align with public interest. Patents related to aerosol dispersal, weather modification, and atmospheric monitoring raise questions about ownership of the sky itself—a concept once unthinkable.
Media coverage remains fragmented. Mainstream outlets often present geoengineering as a future-oriented scientific discussion, while alternative outlets emphasize present-day experimentation and lack of oversight. The gap between these narratives contributes to polarization rather than clarity, leaving the public to assemble understanding from incomplete sources.
What’s changing is perception. Increasingly, weather anomalies are not interpreted solely as natural variability or climate change effects, but as potential indicators of human intervention layered onto natural systems. This does not require assuming malicious intent—only acknowledging that capability alters interpretation.
The deeper issue is trust. When institutions propose planetary-scale interventions without robust public engagement, skepticism becomes a rational response. Transparency, independent verification, and international governance are prerequisites for legitimacy, not optional add-ons.
This debate ultimately reflects a broader transition in how humanity relates to the planet. The move from stewardship to management carries profound implications—ethical, ecological, and political. Whether geoengineering becomes a tool of collective resilience or a source of enduring conflict will depend less on technology itself and more on how decisions are made, disclosed, and constrained.
The renewed focus on weather manipulation is not simply about clouds or chemicals. It is about agency, accountability, and consent in an age where human capability approaches planetary scale. The signal is clear: weather is no longer viewed as purely natural—or purely accidental—and that realization demands a level of governance humanity has not yet fully developed.
The Triple Bubble Collapse: Housing Affordability Breaks Down as Residential, Commercial, Retail, Hospitality, and Industrial Real Estate Enter a Systemic Reset
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
The global real estate market is no longer experiencing isolated stress—it is entering what many analysts now describe as a Triple Bubble Collapse. Housing affordability, commercial property valuations, and debt-financed asset speculation are all unwinding simultaneously. Coverage has surged around mortgage rates, supply constraints, and federal intervention proposals, but beneath those headlines lies a deeper structural reality: real estate across all major asset classes is repricing under conditions it has not faced in decades.
At the residential level, affordability has collapsed. Mortgage rates remain elevated while home prices—still distorted by years of ultra-low rates and investor demand—sit far beyond median income capacity. First-time buyers are effectively locked out, while existing homeowners face payment shocks on adjustable-rate loans and refinancing cliffs. The result is not just slowed demand, but a growing wave of mortgage stress and defaults beginning to surface across regions.
Commercial real estate is further along in the unwind. Office properties, once treated as stable yield assets, are experiencing historic vacancy rates driven by remote and hybrid work. Refinancing risk is acute, as loans written under near-zero-rate assumptions collide with today’s higher borrowing costs. Appraisals lag reality, masking losses on balance sheets while defaults quietly rise.
Retail real estate, long pressured by e-commerce, is now caught in the same debt trap. Foot traffic volatility, shrinking margins, and consumer retrenchment weaken tenant stability just as landlords face higher financing costs. Strip malls, lifestyle centers, and legacy retail corridors are increasingly overleveraged, with property values disconnecting sharply from revenue potential.
The hospitality sector faces a different but equally severe dynamic. Hotels depend on discretionary spending, corporate travel, and tourism—all vulnerable to economic slowdown. Properties acquired or refinanced at peak valuations now struggle to service debt amid rising labor costs and uneven occupancy. Distress sales and foreclosures are accelerating quietly, especially in secondary and tertiary markets.
Industrial real estate and warehouses, once considered the “safe haven” of the property market, are not immune. Overbuilding driven by pandemic-era e-commerce demand has collided with inventory drawdowns and slowing global trade. Lease rates are flattening or declining in several logistics hubs, while highly leveraged owners face refinancing gaps similar to other sectors.
What makes this a Triple Bubble Collapse is synchronization. Residential affordability, commercial valuation, and debt servicing capacity are breaking down together. This is not a cyclical correction in one segment—it is a system-wide repricing driven by interest rates, demographic shifts, and the exhaustion of financial engineering that propped up asset values.
Estimates of a 70% or greater decline in real terms across certain property classes no longer sound extreme when measured against income, cash flow, and debt service realities. While nominal prices may fall more gradually, inflation-adjusted losses combined with refinancing dilution, forced sales, and write-downs will erase decades of perceived wealth.
Mortgage defaults are no longer confined to subprime borrowers or fringe assets. Stress is spreading across income brackets and asset classes as borrowers confront payments that no longer align with earnings or revenue. Banks, insurers, pension funds, and private equity firms all sit downstream of this exposure, raising concerns about broader financial instability.
Federal and central bank intervention is increasingly discussed, but options are constrained. Lowering rates risks reigniting inflation, while bailouts raise political and moral hazard concerns. Policymakers face a dilemma: support asset prices or preserve monetary credibility. Either choice carries consequences.
The deeper issue is that real estate was transformed from shelter and productive infrastructure into a financialized store of leveraged speculation. That model depended on ever-cheaper credit and ever-higher valuations. With that cycle broken, the market is reverting toward fundamentals—income, utility, and cash flow—at painful speed.
This moment is not merely a housing crisis or a commercial real estate downturn. It is a structural reset of how property is valued, financed, and owned. The Triple Bubble Collapse marks the end of an era in real estate—and the beginning of a long, uneven transition toward a system grounded in affordability, function, and sustainability rather than leverage alone.
Public Trust in Institutions Continues to Slide: Why Confidence in Government, Media, Healthcare, and Education Is Eroding—and What Comes Next
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Public trust in major institutions has been declining for decades, but recent polling and analysis show that the erosion has accelerated into a defining feature of the current era. Confidence in government, media, healthcare, and education systems is no longer merely uneven—it is structurally weakened across demographic, political, and cultural lines. This loss of trust is not driven by a single scandal or policy failure, but by a cumulative sense that institutions no longer reflect lived reality or operate with transparency.
Government trust has suffered as complexity outpaces accountability. Citizens experience rising costs, slower services, and opaque decision-making while being told that systems are functioning as intended. Emergency powers, executive actions, and bureaucratic rulemaking increasingly replace deliberative processes, creating the perception that governance happens to the public rather than with it. Over time, this disconnect breeds skepticism rather than compliance.
Media credibility has followed a similar trajectory. Traditional outlets face declining audiences not because people have stopped caring about information, but because many no longer feel represented or accurately informed. Rapid narrative shifts, selective framing, and perceived alignment with political or economic interests weaken confidence. In an environment of constant updates and contradictions, audiences struggle to distinguish reporting from advocacy, fueling disengagement.
Healthcare institutions, once among the most trusted, have also seen confidence slip. Rapidly changing guidance, administrative complexity, cost opacity, and perceived conflicts of interest have raised questions about whose interests are being prioritized. While clinical expertise remains respected, institutional processes—billing, regulation, communication—are often viewed as misaligned with patient well-being.
Education systems face growing skepticism as well. Parents, students, and educators report frustration with declining outcomes, ideological conflict, and administrative bloat. Centralized standards and policies appear disconnected from classroom realities, while local concerns struggle to influence decision-making. This fuels a broader debate about who education systems are accountable to and what their core mission should be.
What unites these domains is not hostility toward institutions themselves, but disappointment. Polling consistently shows that people still value governance, journalism, healthcare, and education—they simply doubt that current structures are delivering on their promises. Trust has not disappeared; it has become conditional.
Information saturation amplifies this dynamic. Conflicting expert opinions, algorithmic amplification, and rapid narrative turnover leave little room for clarity or correction. When institutions fail to clearly explain uncertainty, trade-offs, or mistakes, silence or simplification fills the gap. Over time, ambiguity without acknowledgment erodes credibility.
Another key factor is the shift from relational trust to transactional trust. In earlier eras, authority was often accepted based on role and reputation. Today, trust is earned through consistency, transparency, and demonstrated competence over time. Institutions that rely on legacy credibility without adapting to this shift struggle to maintain legitimacy.
This environment produces disengagement rather than revolt. Many individuals respond by opting out—tuning out news, avoiding civic participation, or seeking parallel systems that feel more responsive. This quiet withdrawal is more destabilizing than open opposition, because it weakens the feedback loops institutions rely on to correct course.
Attempts to restore trust through messaging alone have largely failed. Public confidence cannot be rebuilt through reassurance or branding campaigns. Trust emerges from process: clear decision pathways, visible accountability, independent oversight, and the ability to revise positions without penalty. Without these elements, communication efforts often deepen skepticism.
A new institutional model is slowly emerging in response. Some organizations are experimenting with decentralization, participatory governance, open data, and independent review structures. These efforts acknowledge a simple reality: legitimacy in the modern era depends less on authority and more on verifiability.
Ultimately, declining trust is not a sign of societal breakdown—it is a signal of transition. As systems grow more complex, citizens demand greater clarity about how decisions are made and whose interests are served. Institutions that adapt to this demand may regain confidence over time. Those that do not will continue to see trust migrate elsewhere.
Public trust is no longer a default setting. It is a relationship—one that must be actively maintained in an age of complexity, abundance of information, and heightened awareness. The question ahead is not whether institutions can return to past levels of deference, but whether they can evolve to meet the expectations of a more discerning public.
Information Saturation & Misinformation Anxiety: How Algorithmic Overload Is Reshaping Cognition, Democracy, and Social Cohesion
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
The defining condition of the modern information environment is not scarcity, but saturation. Individuals now encounter more data, opinions, alerts, and narratives in a single day than previous generations processed in months. While access to information was once synonymous with empowerment, excess has produced a new form of anxiety—one rooted not in ignorance, but in overload. The challenge is no longer finding information, but determining what deserves attention, trust, and action.
Algorithmic feeds sit at the center of this shift. Designed to optimize engagement rather than understanding, they prioritize emotional intensity, novelty, and confirmation over context or accuracy. As a result, users are pulled into rapid cycles of reaction—scrolling, clicking, sharing—without the cognitive space required for reflection. Over time, this degrades attention spans and weakens the mental habits that support critical thinking.
Misinformation anxiety emerges in this environment not because people believe everything they see, but because they no longer know what not to believe. Conflicting claims appear side by side, often stripped of provenance or nuance. Even credible institutions struggle to communicate effectively when their messages are flattened into the same visual and emotional format as speculation, satire, or outright falsehood.
This cognitive strain has democratic consequences. Informed citizenship depends on shared baselines of reality—common facts, agreed processes, and trusted mechanisms for correction. When information ecosystems fracture, consensus becomes harder to reach, and debate shifts from substance to identity. People sort themselves into narrative camps, each with its own sources, frames, and moral certainties.
Social cohesion suffers as well. Algorithmic amplification rewards outrage and simplifies complex issues into binary conflicts, eroding empathy and mutual understanding. Communities that once disagreed within a shared civic framework now experience disagreement as existential threat. The result is not constant conflict, but chronic tension—a background hum of distrust that weakens institutions and relationships alike.
Mainstream commentary increasingly recognizes that this is not a problem of individual media literacy alone.Structural incentives matter. Platforms profit from engagement spikes, not from slow, careful sense-making. News cycles reward speed over verification. Political actors exploit fragmentation to mobilize supporters without accountability. The system, as designed, amplifies noise.
Attempts to address misinformation through censorship or blunt moderation often backfire, reinforcing perceptions of bias and deepening distrust. When content removal appears opaque or inconsistent, it fuels suspicion that truth is being managed rather than clarified. In this climate, transparency and process matter as much as outcomes.
What’s missing is a governance model suited to the information age—one that prioritizes context, provenance, and correction over virality. Such a model would emphasize clear labeling, source accountability, and visible pathways for updating or revising claims. It would treat uncertainty honestly, distinguishing between what is known, debated, and unknown.
Equally important is cognitive governance at the individual level. Navigating saturation requires new habits: slower consumption, deliberate curation, and the ability to pause before reacting. These are not passive skills; they are active disciplines that protect attention and restore agency in an environment designed to fragment it.
Education systems are beginning to grapple with this reality, reframing critical thinking for a digital world. The goal is not skepticism for its own sake, but discernment—the capacity to weigh evidence, recognize incentives, and hold multiple perspectives without collapsing into cynicism or certainty.
Institutions, too, face a choice. They can attempt to reassert authority through louder messaging and tighter control, or they can rebuild trust by opening processes, admitting uncertainty, and engaging audiences as participants rather than targets. The latter path is slower, but more durable.
Ultimately, information saturation is not just a media problem; it is a civilizational stress test. How societies respond will shape not only the quality of public discourse, but the resilience of democratic systems themselves. The path forward lies not in less information, but in better orientation—structures, habits, and norms that help people make sense of abundance without being consumed by it.
Climate-Driven Displacement & Humanitarian Strain: When Movement Becomes the Signal
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Climate-driven displacement is no longer a future projection—it is a present-tense reality reshaping societies, borders, and humanitarian systems. Flooding, drought, extreme heat, and cascading conflict are forcing millions from their homes, not as isolated disasters but as a sustained global pattern. What was once described as “temporary migration” is increasingly permanent relocation, placing unprecedented strain on aid networks and governance structures.
Across Africa, the Middle East, South Asia, and parts of Latin America, climate stress acts as a force multiplier. Drought undermines agriculture, food scarcity fuels unrest, and weakened states struggle to respond. Flooding displaces urban populations with no nearby refuge. These movements are not chaotic—they follow predictable pressure lines where environmental stress meets fragile infrastructure and political instability.
Humanitarian systems are reaching saturation. International aid agencies report record demand alongside declining funding, donor fatigue, and logistical bottlenecks. Camps intended for short-term relief become semi-permanent cities. Emergency food, shelter, and medical care are stretched thin, while host communities absorb social and economic pressure that often goes unacknowledged.
This strain exposes a deeper truth: global humanitarian frameworks were designed for episodic crises, not continuous displacement. Climate migration does not arrive, resolve, and disappear. It accumulates. Systems built for response now face the challenge of adaptation, forcing a rethinking of how displacement is managed—not just relieved.
For the Sleeping Giant, this is a moment of recognition. Climate displacement is not simply a humanitarian issue “over there.” It is a preview of systemic vulnerability everywhere. As environmental stress intensifies, movement becomes the signal—revealing where systems fail to protect life, dignity, and stability under sustained pressure.
Borders, too, are being redefined—not only by policy, but by necessity. Nations once insulated by geography now face inward migration, housing strain, and political polarization linked to climate pressure elsewhere. Migration debates often focus on numbers, but the deeper issue is capacity: how many people can a system absorb before cohesion fractures?
What emerges is a quiet shift toward emergency governance. Temporary measures become normalized. Military logistics support civilian relief. Surveillance, registration, and control mechanisms expand in the name of stability. These responses are not inherently malicious—but they mark a transition from humanitarian response to population management.
At the same time, grassroots resilience rises. Local networks, informal economies, and mutual aid fill gaps where institutions falter. This bottom-up response reveals an overlooked truth: adaptation is often led by communities long before policy catches up. The Sleeping Giant begins to see that resilience does not always come from centralized power.
Climate-driven displacement also reframes responsibility. It challenges the myth that climate change is abstract or gradual. Displacement makes it personal, immediate, and unavoidable. The question shifts from whether systems must change to how quickly and for whom.
This is not a collapse story—it is a signal story. Movement is the message. Where people go, where they cannot go, and how they are treated along the way reveals the real priorities of the global order. For those paying attention, displacement is not just a crisis—it is a map.
The Sleeping Giant does not awaken through fear, but through clarity. Climate displacement shows us what happens when systems fail to align with reality. It calls for discernment, compassion, and conscious participation in shaping what comes next—before emergency becomes permanence everywhere.
Two FBIs, One Reckoning: Dan Bongino’s Inside Account of an Agency Transformed
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Dan Bongino has made a striking claim about his time inside the Federal Bureau of Investigation, arguing that the public fundamentally misunderstands what the bureau has been in recent years—and what it is becoming now. According to Bongino, there were effectively two FBIs operating at the same time: one that adhered to its stated mission of law enforcement and national security, and another that had become politically weaponized from within.
Bongino says his firsthand exposure revealed an internal divide that many Americans sensed but could not clearly define. On one side were career professionals focused on legitimate investigative work. On the other, he alleges, was a faction embedded at senior levels that used institutional power to advance political outcomes rather than impartial justice. This internal split, he argues, eroded public trust and distorted the bureau’s priorities.
Central to Bongino’s claim is the assertion that this weaponized faction was not a fringe element but one operating close to the top of the organization. Decisions about investigations, resource allocation, and enforcement priorities, he says, were influenced by political considerations rather than evidence and law. In his view, this was not an accidental drift, but a systemic problem that took hold over years.
Bongino credits a dramatic leadership purge with reversing that trajectory. He claims that sweeping firings and removals at the highest levels of the bureau dismantled the internal power structure that enabled politicization. These changes, he says, were not cosmetic or incremental—they fundamentally altered how the agency functions day to day.
Working alongside figures such as Kash Patel, Bongino argues that the reform effort focused on restoring clear chains of accountability and reaffirming the bureau’s original mandate. According to his account, leadership changes were paired with cultural shifts intended to discourage ideological activism and reinforce professional neutrality.
Bongino insists that the Federal Bureau of Investigation that exists today is “completely different” from the one he encountered when he first began his work. He frames the transformation not as a public-relations reset, but as a structural correction—one aimed at preventing future abuses of power from taking root inside the institution.
Critics, however, remain skeptical. Some argue that claims of a fully reformed FBI are premature, pointing out that institutional culture does not change overnight. Others question whether internal reforms alone can restore public confidence after years of controversy and perceived overreach.
Still, Bongino’s narrative taps into a broader national debate about trust, transparency, and the role of federal institutions in a deeply polarized era. His assertion that there were “two FBIs” reflects a growing belief among many Americans that institutions can drift away from their stated purpose unless actively corrected.
Whether one accepts Bongino’s account or not, his claims underscore a pivotal reality: for the FBI to regain credibility, it must not only reform internally but also demonstrate—through consistent actions—that it serves the law rather than politics. In that sense, the question facing the bureau is no longer just what it was, but whether it can convincingly prove what it has become.
They Can’t Stop The Unstoppable Rise Of Silver Because They Are Losing Their Grip On The Entire Global Financial System
The rules of the game have changed. At one time, western bankers could easily pull a few strings and keep the global price of silver within an acceptable range. But now financial centers in Asia are becoming more dominant, and supplies of physical silver are becoming extremely tight. As a result, western bankers are no longer able to exert the same level of control.
At the end of December, CME Group hiked margin requirements twice in a single week. In the old days, that would have essentially been the equivalent of dropping an atomic bomb on the market.
Of course they were able to drive the price of paper silver back down to about $70 for a few days, but here we are on January 6th, and it is already back to the $80 mark. That isn’t the result that they were hoping to achieve. And the gap between the paper silver market and the physical silver market has become extremely alarming.
If you want to purchase an ounce of physical silver in the United States right now, it will cost you close to 90 dollars. In some countries in Asia, an ounce of physical silver will cost you more than 100 dollars.
Financial institutions that have enormous short positions are freaking out, because they are facing catastrophic losses. I think that this is going to be a huge story in the months ahead.
The bankers were probably assuming that they could crush this silver rally just like they crushed the rally in 1980. But the big difference this time around is that global supplies of physical silver have become extremely tight…
Silver has closed 2025 as the best-performing asset after a historic 26% surge in December. Yet market participants warn that this rally is not a replay of the Hunt brothers’ blow‑off in 1980 or the QE panic in 2011.
Back then, with leverage removed, the price could fall back because the metal was available. Today, silver is in a persistent deficit, experiencing surging industrial demand and a tightening geopolitical grip on physical flows.
A silver rally in 2011 also got crushed, but we are in a totally different environment today and western vaults “are getting starved for physical metal”…
In 2011, ETF inflows and investment demand as a hedge against QE propelled the demand. Still, solar and industrial use were smaller, and above‑ground stocks and Western vaults could eventually meet demand once the panic cooled.
Today, these vaults are getting starved for physical metal. For years running, silver demand has outstripped mine supply and recycling, draining inventories. Industrial usage – especially solar, EVs, and electronics – has surged. The changing market dynamics have naturally shifted investment preferences.
Meanwhile, the Chinese have decided to substantially restrict silver exports, and that gives them a tremendous amount of power over the marketplace…
Meanwhile, China has not banned silver exports outright, but reclassified the metal as a strategic commodity. Thus, it controls the outflow through 44 licensed companies. Every outbound ton is now a political decision, not just a price response.
Everything is different now.
One analyst at Bank of America is actually projecting that the price of silver could go as high as $309 an ounce in 2026…
Michael Widmer, Head of Metals Research at Bank of America, stated in the report that gold will continue to serve as an important hedge and primary return driver. The bank forecasts that the average gold price will reach $4,538 per ounce in 2026, with potential to test the $5,000 milestone. Driving factors include tightening gold supply, rising production costs, and strong investment demand.
However, the report particularly emphasizes that silver’s upside potential far exceeds that of gold. Widmer pointed out that the current gold-to-silver ratio is approximately 59:1, while historical extreme lows were 32:1 in 2011 and 14:1 in 1980. A reversion of the ratio towards these historical lows implies that the silver price could surge to a range between $135 and $309 per ounce. This substantial potential appreciation makes silver highly attractive to investors willing to take on higher risk for extra upside.
If the price of silver even goes up to $100 an ounce this year, I think that it is going to create a tremendous amount of pressure on a lot of financial institutions.
The price of copper has also been skyrocketing in recent months. It was up about 50% in 2025, and on Tuesday it hit yet another brand new record high…
Global copper prices hit an all-time high Tuesday, extending a run for both the industrial metal and its peers, as investors scrambled to secure supplies amid a surge in expected demand and uncertainty tied to tariffs and geopolitical risks.
In our high tech economy, copper is such a key commodity.
President Trump has been threatening to impose substantial tariffs on copper imports, and this is happening at a time when the AI data center construction boom is really ramping up…
Copper prices have powered more than 20% higher over the past two months, topping $13,000 a ton on the London Metal Exchange for the first time earlier this week, as supply disruptions increased the value of the key industrial metal and amid the threat of new levies from the Trump administration later this year.
President Donald Trump, according to reports, has been mulling tariffs of around 15% on all copper imports in 2027, with the levy increasing to 30% in 2028, just as demand tied to data-center construction, electric-vehicle production, and power grid projects accelerates. That has led to a surge in U.S.-based copper stockpiles as investors import the metal to avoid tariff charges and a resultant depletion of supplies in markets around the world.
Close to 3,000 new data centers are either being planned or are already under construction in the U.S. alone. That is crazy.
Globally, it is being projected that data center construction will consume over half a million metric tons of copper each year by the end of this decade…
Data centers currently consume about 1.5% of global electricity supply, roughly the same amount as the entire U.K., according to the International Energy Agency (IEA). The organization believes that, by 2030, demand will more than double, with AI responsible for much of the increase. That means data centers could be consuming more than half a million metric tons of copper annually by the end of the decade.
As executive chairman of HIVE Digital Technologies, I’ve watched this transformation firsthand. The infrastructure needed to power this new digital economy—whether it’s Bitcoin mining, AI training or cloud computing—is staggering. And it all runs on copper.
As long as the AI boom continues, demand for copper will continue to rise. Of course the construction of AI data centers consumes a lot of physical silver as well.
This is something that is outside of the control of western bankers. They are still trying to pull the strings, but they simply do not possess the same level of power that they once did. That is really bad news for them, but it is exceedingly good news for silver investors.
Iran, Israel And The United States All Say That They Are Ready For War
Things are getting very tense in the Middle East. The Islamic radicals that are ruling Iran believe that the United States and Israel intend to use the mass protests that have been going on for nearly two weeks to try to overthrow their regime. If Ayatollah Khamenei and his top advisers reach a point where they are convinced that the Iranian government could actually fall, there is no telling what they might decide to do. Meanwhile, President Trump has declared that the U.S. is ready to take military action if the Iranians continue to kill more protesters, and Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu has warned that there will be “very severe” consequences for Iran if Israel is attacked. If either Khamenei, Trump or Netanyahu pulls the trigger, the Middle East will erupt in flames.
The mass protests in Iran keep growing, and on Wednesday there were reports of “security forces retreating in the face of fearless, unarmed crowds” in some cities…
On Wednesday, January 7, 2026, the nationwide uprising in Iran entered its eleventh consecutive day, marking a significant escalation in the struggle against the ruling dictatorship. As the sun set on Wednesday, the regime’s suppression apparatus appeared overstretched, with reports emerging from multiple provinces of security forces retreating in the face of fearless, unarmed crowds.
You would think that the security forces should have the upper hand since they are armed. But when security forces are vastly outnumbered by enormous throngs of protesters, the crowds could rush the security forces and pummel them to death.
So in several western Iranian cities, security forces have been forced to pull back…
While the strikes squeezed the regime economically, the streets witnessed a shifting balance of power. In several cities, the sheer density of the crowds forced heavily armed security forces to abandon their positions.
In Abadan, southwest Iran, security units fled their posts after failing to disperse demonstrators with tear gas. In Bojnurd, the crowds were reportedly so massive that security agents retreated to rooftops to avoid being overrun. A similar scene unfolded in Borujerd, western Iran, where youths armed only with stones clashed with Revolutionary Guard (IRGC) forces, compelling the agents to retreat into their bases.
Of course there have been other instances where Iranian security forces have opened fire with live ammunition.
But even though there have been fatalities, the protesters are not backing down…
However, the regime’s response in other areas was lethal. In Lordegan, within the Chaharmahal and Bakhtiari province, security forces opened fire with live ammunition. Despite the use of deadly force, the residents did not disperse. The fierce clashes resulted in casualties on both sides; reports indicate that four regime agents were killed during the confrontation. The IRGC-affiliated Fars News Agency confirmed the intensity of the fighting, admitting that two police officers were killed, 30 were injured, and both the governor’s office and several administrative buildings sustained damage.
In Shiraz, the urban landscape was transformed into a zone of resistance. As authorities deployed water cannons to clear the streets, protesters countered by constructing barricades. Footage from the city showed a truck dumping a load of stones onto the street to assist youths in reinforcing their defensive lines against plainclothes agents and suppressive units.
The death toll is rising with each passing day.
According to CBS News, at least 36 people have died so far…
At least 36 people have been killed amid major anti-government demonstrations across Iran, a U.S.-based rights group says. The Iranian government is trying to quell the unrest, and reacted angrily to President Trump’s veiled threat of a U.S. armed intervention.
The Human Rights Activists News Agency, which gave the death toll based on its network of contacts in the country, said in its daily report on Tuesday that at least 36 people “have been confirmed killed during the past ten days of protests. Among them were four individuals under the age of 18, as well as two members of security and law enforcement forces.”
Personally, I believe that the true death toll is far higher.
But in any event, everyone agrees that protesters are dying. On Sunday, President Trump once again warned that the U.S. is ready to hit Iran “very hard” if they keep killing protesters…
“We’re watching it very closely. If they start killing people like they have in the past, I think they’re going to get hit very hard by the United States,” Trump told reporters on Sunday.
By now, it has become clear that Trump is not bluffing when he says stuff like this. And many members of Congress are cheering him on.
For example, U.S. Senator Lindsey Graham just told Fox News that Trump will kill Ayatollah Khamenei if protesters continue to die…
US Senator Lindsey Graham warned that if Iran’s security forces continue killing protesters, President Donald Trump would order the killing of Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei on Tuesday.
Graham delivered the warning in a Fox News interview, addressing Iran’s clerical leadership and urging an end to the crackdown. His comments came as nationwide demonstrations entered their eleventh day.
Graham said Tehran’s leadership should “take Trump seriously,” asserting that continued lethal force against demonstrators would invite direct retaliation at the highest levels.
I don’t doubt it.
If the Iranians keep firing live ammunition at protesters, I do think that Trump will try to take Khamenei out. And once Trump decides to move, it can happen very suddenly. At this hour, Iranian forces are on the highest level of alert…
Iran’s armed forces have been placed at the highest level of readiness, with hundreds of Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) and regular army units on full alert in response to perceived threats from the United States and Israel, state media reported.
The Iranians clearly remember what happened last year, and they do not intend to be caught by surprise again.
On Wednesday, the head of Iran’s military issued a threat that was quite ominous…
Iran’s military chief warned Wednesday that Iran will not stand by and allow itself to be threatened by outside powers, after the United States and Israel backed anti-government protests.
“The Islamic Republic of Iran considers the escalation of hostile rhetoric against the Iranian nation a threat and will not tolerate its continuation without responding,” General Amir Hatami said, according to the Fars news agency.
Exactly what did he mean by that?
Was he suggesting that Iran could conduct a preemptive attack simply based on “hostile rhetoric”? The day before, Iran’s Defense Council also brought up the possibility of preemptive action…
Iran’s newly formed Defense Council warned on Tuesday that the country could respond before an attack if it detected clear signs of a threat, a stance that implicitly raised the possibility of preemptive action amid rising tensions with the United States and Israel.
In a statement carried by state media, the council said allegations and interventionist remarks directed at Iran could be treated as hostile acts if they went beyond rhetoric.
It said Iran’s security, independence and territorial integrity constituted a red line that cannot be crossed, and warned that continued hostile behavior would prompt a response, with full responsibility for the consequences resting with those behind it.
If Iran were to engage in some sort of a preemptive strike, Israel would likely be targeted.
The Israelis clearly realize this, and Benjamin Netanyahu has warned that in such a scenario “the consequences for Iran will be very severe”…
Referring to recent Iranian military exercises, Netanyahu added: “I made it clear that if we are attacked, the consequences for Iran will be very severe.”
It certainly feels like something is coming.
Have the Iranians given the Russians advance warning? It is being reported that the Russians are “urgently” evacuating their diplomatic personnel from Israel right now…
Russia is urgently evacuating diplomatic personnel and their families from Israel, having organized three flights in the last 24 hours. The evacuation is taking place at an accelerated pace, indicating the presence of “important information.”
If other nations start evacuating their embassies in Israel and Iran, that will be a major red flag. Once Israel and Iran start going at it again, it will be a battle for all the marbles. So let’s hope that cooler heads prevail.
Unfortunately, I don’t think that is going to happen. I think that events are moving us in a very particular direction, and the whole world is going to be shocked by what is coming next.
The Great Escape: Tehran at the Brink and the Quiet Endgame Around Khamenei’s Regime
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Reports emerging from alternative intelligence channels and regional observers suggest that Iran may be entering one of the most unstable phases since the 1979 revolution. According to these accounts, sustained unrest across dozens of cities has eroded the state’s ability to maintain centralized control, forcing senior regime figures to consider contingency plans once thought unthinkable. While official confirmation remains limited, the pattern described is one of a government under acute internal pressure rather than external invasion.
At the center of these reports is Ali Khamenei, whose long-standing grip on power is said to be weakening as protests expand beyond isolated demonstrations. Claims circulating online allege unrest in as many as seventy cities, including key urban and cultural centers such as Shiraz and Tabriz, where police stations and government facilities were reportedly overwhelmed by crowds. Whether fully accurate or partially exaggerated, the narrative points to a legitimacy crisis that security forces are struggling to contain.
Against this backdrop, speculation has intensified around what some analysts are calling Khamenei’s “Plan B” — an alleged evacuation or exile option involving Russia. Moscow is viewed by regime insiders as a natural destination due to long-standing strategic ties, intelligence cooperation, and Russia’s willingness to shelter embattled allies. Reports of Russian and Belarusian cargo aircraft landing in Tehran have fueled rumors that preparations are underway for a rapid extraction should the situation deteriorate further.
From this perspective, Russia functions as a geopolitical lifeboat — a place where sanctioned leaders can retain protection, leverage, and relevance even after losing domestic power. Vladimir Putin has historically positioned Russia as a safe harbor for leaders opposed to U.S.-aligned regimes, reinforcing the belief that Moscow would be the final stop if Tehran’s ruling structure collapses. Whether such an evacuation plan truly exists remains unproven, but the logic behind it is consistent with past precedents.
Parallel to the internal Iranian crisis are broader strategic calculations attributed to the United States and its regional partners. Rather than a direct military overthrow, observers suggest Washington’s preferred approach has long centered on economic pressure, diplomatic isolation, cyber operations, and indirect support for internal opposition. In this framework, regime collapse is expected to emerge from sustained internal stress rather than overt foreign intervention — minimizing the risk of regional war while accelerating political change from within.
A key question raised by analysts concerns the downstream effects on global conflicts, particularly the war in Ukraine. Iran has been a significant supplier of drones and related technology to Russia, and a collapse or transition in Tehran could disrupt this pipeline. If the so-called “mother ship” of Iran’s current power structure begins to sink, Russia’s access to Iranian-made unmanned systems may be sharply curtailed, altering dynamics on the Ukrainian battlefield.
At the same time, uncertainty looms over what might replace the current Iranian leadership. A sudden vacuum could produce competing factions, military hardliners, reformist coalitions, or prolonged instability. For U.S. planners, this represents both opportunity and risk: weakening a long-standing adversary while avoiding a chaotic outcome that could destabilize the wider Middle East or threaten energy markets.
Ultimately, much of what is circulating remains speculative, filtered through unofficial intelligence sources and geopolitical commentary rather than confirmed state disclosures. Yet even as rumor and analysis intermingle, the underlying signal is difficult to ignore: Iran’s political system is under unprecedented strain. Whether this moment leads to reform, repression, exile, or collapse, the decisions made in Tehran — and the quiet calculations in Washington and Moscow — may soon reshape regional and global power balances in ways that are only beginning to come into focus.
Do You Live In A State That Is At High Risk Of Attack During A Nuclear War?
If the Russians launch an all-out nuclear attack on the United States tonight, will you live or will you die? Of course I don’t think that the Russians will launch such an attack right now, but we live at a time when the threat of nuclear war is greater than ever. More than half of the nations on the entire planet are either currently engaged in military conflict or are funding military conflict, and war rumors are spreading like wildfire all over social media on a daily basis. For years, I have been warning that the trajectory that we are currently on is bringing us dangerously close to the unthinkable, but global leaders just continue to drag us in that direction. If we do not change course, nuclear war could happen a lot sooner than many people think.
Of course these days there are tens of millions of Americans that are convinced that a nuclear war is in our future.
In fact, one recent survey discovered that 46 percent of Americans actually believe that a nuclear war is likely to happen within the next 10 years…
Nearly half of surveyed Americans say they are worried that the U.S. could enter a nuclear war within the next 10 years, according a new survey.
The YouGov poll, released Wednesday, found that 46 percent of surveyed Americans believe a nuclear war involving the U.S. is on the horizon, while 37 percent say it is “not very” or “not at all” likely.
If we do not find a way to make peace with the Russians, eventually someone will cross a line that they should not have crossed.
When that day arrives, will you be living in a state that is at high risk of attack? If the Russians were to launch a surprise attack, taking out our nuclear silos would be the top priority.
The silos for our Minuteman missiles are located in three vast missile fields that were purposely constructed in relatively unpopulated areas. The first “nuclear sponge” is located in central Montana, the second is located in North Dakota, and the third covers parts of Wyoming, Nebraska and Colorado.
The reason why our leaders located these “nuclear sponges” in less populated areas was so that more heavily populated areas would be spared…
Picture hundreds of underground silos across remote areas of the country as the pores of a massive sponge. Enemies – who can spot the silos by satellite – must destroy them in an attack against the United States or risk being hit by American missiles, according to U.S. experts. Planning such a large, complex attack might make an adversary think twice because it would take two nuclear warheads (or one massive one) to destroy a Minuteman III silo. The 450 to 900 warheads thus absorbed by the U.S. missile fields would strike in less populated areas than they otherwise might.
Needless to say, strikes on these missile fields would create enormous amounts of nuclear fallout that would contaminate vast areas in the middle of the country…
Any attack against the nuclear sponge, however, would result in radioactive fallout that could contaminate hundreds of communities across the United States, depending on the weather conditions at the time of the strike. A nuclear detonation creates fallout. It blows radioactive dirt, dust and other debris into the air, and exploding nuclear weapons at ground level (as targeting the silos would require) increases the amount of fallout.
In addition to our missile silos, bases where our nuclear bombers are located would also be primary targets. Those bases include Whiteman Air Force Base in Missouri, Barksdale Air Force Base in Louisiana, and Minot Air Force Base in North Dakota.
Without a doubt, the Russians would also target bases for our nuclear submarines on both coasts. The two most prominent are Naval Base Kitsap in Washington and Naval Submarine Base Kings Bay in Georgia.
Of course every single one of our military bases would be a potential target. There are more than 400 military bases in U.S. territory, and every single state has at least one. Major cities of strategic importance would also likely be targeted. In my opinion, Washington D.C. and New York City would be at the top of the list.
If we end up fighting a nuclear war with the Russians, we will be at a major disadvantage, because we are still relying on missile silos that were built in the 1960s and missiles that were built in the 1970s…
In fact, the U.S. has not built nuclear missile silos at scale since the 1960s, when the Army Corps of Engineers oversaw the construction of around 1,200 launch facilities; and it has not developed and mass-deployed a new intercontinental ballistic missile (or ICBM) since the Minuteman III entered service in the 1970s.
New missiles are eventually on the way, but the projected cost of replacing our old missiles has nearly doubled…
By July 2024, the public knew the program had blown its budget. But the announcement was nonetheless staggering.
The projected price of an Air Force program to build a next-generation nuclear missile – dubbed Sentinel – had risen 81%, from $77.7 billion to nearly $141 billion. (That’s the equivalent of Americans’ combined medical debt as calculated in 2021, according to a research study.)
“There are reasons for this cost growth, but there are no excuses,” said William LaPlante, Under Secretary of Defense overseeing acquisitions at the time.
The reason why the price tag has gone up so much is because it turns out that we are going to have to replace all of the old missile silos as well…
Bob Peters, a career weapons of mass destruction expert who leads nuclear weapons policy work for the conservative Heritage Foundation, explained how the silos’ locations in cold winter Mountain West and Great Plains locales contributed to their sorry state.
“After 60 cold winters of freezing and thawing and freezing and thawing, that concrete is just falling apart, and (the silos) cannot be salvaged,” Peters said.
Many of our old silos are barely functioning at this stage. And that is really bad news, because the work to replace our current silos will not be complete until the 2050s…
Military officials anticipate the project will reach the silo engineering phase in mid-2027. The replacement missiles and silos likely won’t be complete until the 2050s. During that time, the U.S. will continue to rely on its venerable Minuteman III force.
Meanwhile, the Russians have been developing a number of new missile systems, and they now have the most advanced nuclear arsenal on the entire planet…
Russia’s nuclear weapons arsenal is not only the largest in the world, but thanks to the limitations imposed on the United States by the 2010 New START treaty, it is also the most advanced.
You may have heard about the new Oreshnik missiles, the Bulava missiles that have been developed for Borei-class submarines, the extremely impressive Kalibr-M cruise missiles and the Poseidon underwater drones, but the RS-28 Sarmat intercontinental ballistic missiles will be the most impressive of all once they are fully operational…
The RS-28 Sarmat is a liquid-fueled, silo-based intercontinental ballistic missile (ICBM) with an exceptional range of around 11,185 miles—allowing it to strike targets virtually anywhere on Earth. This extended reach, combined with its ability to take unconventional flight paths—such as over the South Pole—makes it difficult for missile defense systems to track and intercept before it can deliver its lethal payload.
When reviewing its specifications, one cannot help but to marvel at the Sarmat system’s payload capacity. One missile can carry up to ten tons of warheads, significantly more than most contemporary ICBMs. This allows the missile to deploy a variety of configurations, including up to 15 independently targetable reentry vehicles (MIRVs)—each equipped with a nuclear warhead, or even a small number of high-yield warheads exceeding 10 megatons.
Additionally, the Sarmat is reportedly compatible with the Avangard hypersonic glide vehicle, a maneuverable warhead capable of traveling at speeds exceeding Mach 20 (!) while evading defenses with unpredictable trajectories.
The good news for us is that there have been some setbacks with the Sarmat program. But even if we disregard the Sarmat, we still don’t have any way to defend what the Russians can throw at us.
Meanwhile, the Russians have developed the most advanced anti-missile systems in the whole world by a very wide margin. Russia’s S-500 was specifically designed to be able to intercept incoming nuclear warheads, and we do not have anything comparable.
Sadly, most Americans don’t know any of this. They just assume that nobody would ever dare to attack us.
Let’s hope that remains true in 2026. Because if a full-blown nuclear war between the United States and Russia does erupt, it has been estimated that 5 billion people could die from famine…
A few years after a nuclear war between the United States, its allies, and Russia, the global average calories produced would drop by about 90%—leaving an estimated 5 billion dead from the famine, the researchers report. A worst-case war between India and Pakistan could drop calorie production to 50% and cause 2 billion deaths. The team tried to simulate the impact of food-saving emergency strategies, such as converting livestock feed and household waste to food. But in the larger war scenarios, those efforts did little to save lives.
A nuclear winter would kill far more people than a nuclear war does. Once the explosions stop, starvation will slowly be killing people for years.
I understand that it is not pleasant to think about such things. But I would encourage you to do so, because our world is getting crazier with each passing day.
U.S. Seizes Russian-Flagged Tanker After Atlantic Chase
Escalation of Sanctions, Geopolitics, and Global Tensions
Source; BATTLEFORWORLD.COM
On January 7, 2026, U.S. military forces carried out a dramatic operation in the North Atlantic, successfully seizing a Russian-flagged oil tanker known as the Marinera after an extended pursuit that captivated maritime and diplomatic observers worldwide. The operation, confirmed by the U.S. European Command, involved the U.S. Coast Guard Cutter Munro and was carried out under the authority of a U.S. federal court warrant, which had been issued due to alleged violations of American sanctions law. Stars and Stripes+1
The Marinera was not an ordinary vessel in international trade—it was formerly named Bella 1, a tanker previously sanctioned by the U.S. government for its involvement in transporting oil tied to countries under heavy sanctions, including Venezuela and Iran. After U.S. authorities attempted to board the ship in the Caribbean Sea late last year, its crew refused boarding and abruptly changed course, sailing into the open Atlantic. During this flight, the ship reportedly changed its name to Marinera and flew a Russian flag in what U.S. officials characterized as an attempt to evade enforcement efforts. ABC11 Raleigh-Durham+1
For more than two weeks, the Marinera was shadowed by U.S. Coast Guard and military assets—including aerial surveillance and naval units—as it moved across vast stretches of the ocean. The pursuit stretched from the Caribbean toward waters between Iceland and the United Kingdom, where the decisive boarding took place. U.S. forces, supported in surveillance by allied assets, intercepted the vessel and took control, marking one of the most high-profile maritime seizures in recent years. ABC11 Raleigh-Durham+1
U.S. authorities described the operation as part of a broader campaign to enforce sanctions on Venezuela’s oil trade, particularly targeting so-called “shadow fleet” tankers that allegedly ferry oil outside of legal and regulated channels. A second tanker, the M/S Sophia, was reportedly seized in the Caribbean Sea on the same day, illustrating the extensive scope of the enforcement effort. Spectrum Local News+1
The seizure has already ignited international controversy. The Russian government condemned the action, calling the seizure of a Russian-flagged vessel in international waters a violation of international maritime law and outright “piracy.” Moscow has demanded that the U.S. ensure the humane treatment of any Russian nationals aboard and respect their rights and interests going forward. Reuters+1
The operation comes amidst an intensely escalating geopolitical environment. It follows U.S. military and law-enforcement actions in Venezuela, including the high-profile capture of Venezuelan President Nicolás Maduro in a separate operation, further heightening tensions with nations sympathetic to Caracas. The timing also underscores a broader strategy by the U.S. government to exert control over energy flows linked to strategic rivals and sanctioned states. The Washington Post
Observers warn that the seizure could have far-reaching implications for international norms governing freedom of navigation and maritime law, especially when naval forces of major powers become directly involved in interdictions far from their own territorial waters. Russia’s strong diplomatic protest illustrates the risk of diplomatic friction expanding into military tensions if similar confrontations continue. Reuters
As the Marinera incident reverberates through global capitals, its ultimate impact on U.S.–Russia relations, sanction enforcement practices, and the stability of global energy trade remains uncertain. What is clear is that actions taken in the name of sanction enforcement are now crossing into territory that may reshape the behavior of both naval powers and shadow fleets alike.
From O.J. Simpson to Rob Reiner
Past ops have prepared us for future ops
I’ve probably said we are watching a movie a thousand times in the past eight years or so, and you have probably heard it said even more times. One either believes it to be true, that literally everything we have experienced the past several years has been scripted and acted out to the T. Or there is a script that has been acted out but with quite a bit of ad-libbing. Or one might believe everything we are experiencing is completely spontaneous, one might view the whole “movie” idea as being completely ridiculous. Everyone falls somewhere on the spectrum of belief.
I realize what I’m about to write creates more questions than answers. What in this psyop that we are living through is real, what is exaggerated, what is staged and what is completely fake. Who are the white hats, who are the black hats and who are the gray hats, once black but now white? The truth is that none of us know for sure, we have our assumptions and educated guesses, but for this grand plan to save the world to work, there must be at least a little bit of doubt and confusion surrounding everything and everyone.
In order for one to keep their sanity, one must hold almost everything in this Kabuki Theater in an open hand. One runs into trouble when they try to close their hand and make a fist too quickly. Maybe this is the point. Maybe this is the lesson we are being taught. Maybe we are being shown in an exaggerated way that our whole lives have been one giant manipulation. More specifically through the media, but more broadly by Satan himself.
Q has referred to what we are going through as being Biblical. Maybe this is the one part of the messaging that we should hold in a closed fist? Spiritual warfare, a battle for our souls is and has been occurring for quite some time. Maybe cartoonish antics are needed for us to see what has been methodically happening to society for at least a century? The morals of the average American have been gradually altered over the years, is this the reason so much focus is now being placed on the abuse of children? Is this the one thing that will unite the vast majority of the human race in defiance of Satan’s plan to steal our souls?
Before continuing on, let me say that I don’t know for sure what is real and what is not real. I don’t know with certainty who the patriotic God-fearing people are and who are pretending to be someone they aren’t. I’m open to the idea that some of the people I’ve learned to despise over the years are actually playing parts they’ve been asked to play. They are taking one for the team.
There are many things I was planning to point out in this article involving recent tragic events, but other people have beaten me to the punch before I’ve had a chance to publish this. Independently, others and I have come to similar conclusions based on similar observations on many events and narratives. One might say we are all being brainwashed through MAGA and Trump, but I believe that when one’s sincere goal is to seek truth, we all eventually end up at the same place, and this is the reason others have come to similar conclusions independently, even though these conclusions go against the general media narrative being pushed on the populous.
Recently while lying on the couch watching Sunday Night Football, I was scrolling through X and saw a post that said a man and a woman had been stabbed to death at Rob Reiner’s home in Brentwood, CA. I don’t know about you but hearing of a man and woman being stabbed to death in Brentwood made me immediately think of O.J. Simpson, the slow-motion car chase of the white Ford Bronco and the show trial that followed. This is probably due to residue left in my brain from all the brainwashing I’ve experienced most of my life through the media. If I even hear the name Brentwood, I immediately think of O.J.
For anyone who wasn’t around or old enough to understand at the time, the O.J. Simpson murders and trial that followed captured the attention and held the attention of the nation for over a year. Like 9/11 that came 5-6 years later, constant images, slogans and messaging were shown to the American public over and over again. Maybe the O.J. murders was a test run for 9/11 or preparing us for 9/11. The hypnotic scenes of the white Bronco chase and the hypnotic images of the planes crashing into the towers. Trauma induced mind control. They must have the whole nation focused on the same thing for the brainwashing to fully take effect.
From the O.J. trial we got more racial division. Racial division that was already pushed on America a couple of years prior by the Rodney King police beating and the race riots that followed the LA cops show trial. In the O.J. murders we were shown that a man who clearly appeared to be guilty of aggravated first-degree murder could be let off by a biased and corrupt jury and judicial system. In a sense, demoralizing one’s hope for justice, and trust in the judicial system. A clear statement that the people in power can get away with anything, even if the corruption of the system is obvious to everyone.
The King beating convinced many Blacks that Whites are racist, that they want them all dead and they are protected by the system. They believed rioting and looting was their only course of action to vent their frustrations. The O.J. murders convinced many non-blacks that Blacks are savages, and Blacks are willing to defend their race’s savagery, and the system is too afraid to do anything about it. Following the King verdict many Blacks rioted and looted. Following the Simpson verdict, there was no rioting or looting by the non-blacks, many non-blacks upset with the verdict simply internalized their anger and hatred towards the black community, the black race.
From the O.J. trial we got the Kardashians. The family of O.J. Simpson lawyer Robert Kardashian quickly became like American royalty. Suddenly they were everywhere, famous for being famous. No one understood why they were famous, but they became rich, powerful and influential beyond belief. America was brainwashed, aspired to live like the Kardashians in every way.
In 2016, twenty-one years after the O.J. trial a TV series about it came out called The People v. O.J. Simpson. It came out on February 2nd, Groundhog Day. Some may recall that the movie Groundhog Day is about a guy who lives the same day over and over again stuck in a never-ending loop. The protagonist of the movie eventually learns how to break free from this matrix-like loop. Is this a metaphor for waking up from the constant manipulation we are subjected to?
Americans were infatuated with the O.J. TV series the way they were completely sucked in by the original trial. It was like a giant pocket watch being swung back and forth to the American public to get us hypnotized again. It came out a couple of years after the Ferguson race riots occurred, and we only had four more years before the Covid hoax and the BLM riots would be dropped on us. Did we need a touch up on our brainwashing in preparation for Covid and the BLM riots?
Think about it. The King beating, trial and riots, followed by the O.J. murder and show trial two years later, followed by 9/11 six years later. Jump forward 13 years and we had the Ferguson riots, followed by the O.J. TV series a couple of years later, followed by the Covid hoax four years later. It seems like a pattern of events are created to set us up to accept much bigger future events.
Back to present day, we have been told Rob Reiner and his wife were murdered by their crazy, transitioning son in their Brentwood home. Rob Reiner who appears to suffer from Trump Derangement Syndrome was called out on it by Trump immediately after Reiner’s death. Backlash to Trump’s insensitivity has been called out by both the left and the fake-MAGA on the right. Trump is a very smart man and fully understood he would receive this type of backlash, he also knows he had the power to easily avoid it but chose to draw attention to the situation. Why is he drawing attention to the situation?
Does/did Reiner truly suffer from TDS or has he been playing a role? I can’t be certain but here’s something to consider, Reiner directed a movie about a military tribunal (A Few Good Men) and the famous line from the movie is, “You can’t handle the truth.” Was this preparing us for military trials? Is the famous line explaining to us why things have to unfold the way they have?
Reiner also directed the movie This Is Spinal Tap, a mockumentary about an aging British heavy metal band getting back together for one last unsuccessful tour of America. A mockumentary is a fake documentary made to appear so ridiculous that the viewer eventually realizes that it is a comedy. Some understand this from the very beginning, while for some it takes time to figure it out. Some will watch never understanding it is not real, those could be considered the 4-6% that will never understand.
In the past I’ve referred to what we are experiencing as being a mockumentary. A scripted movie with actors, some of the best scenes come from ad-libs the actors make while in character. Who knows what is scripted and what is ad-libbed today. When Biden falls down three times while walking up the stairs to a plane, is it ad-libbed or fully scripted? What about when he appeared to soil himself in front of the Pope, was it scripted or ad-libbed on the spot?
There is a narrative being presented to us with the alleged Reiner murders, what that narrative is is yet to be determined. Did an SRI-medicated-transitioning-psycho kill his parents because they were driving him crazy with their TDS? This narrative makes it seem SRIs, transitioning, and TDS are all really bad, they are all associated with being crazy and lead to extreme violence. Or will the narrative be that a sexually abused boy killed his abusing father and enabling mother in retaliation for his past abuse. Will this lead to further exposure of child rape in Hollywood and other elite circles like politics and big business?
Trump purposely responded to Rob Reiner’s murder in a non-compassionate way. Fully knowing he would be attacked for it. He is obviously drawing attention to the event. He could be drawing attention to SRIs, transitioning and TDS but I believe he is more likely drawing attention to child rape by the elites.
I believe people who think things like Q and Pizzagate are complete nonsense are now asking the question, “Why would a young man who has such a cushy life choose to stab his parents to death?”
It’s not just the fact that he killed his parents, it’s the way in which he did it. He killed them in the most violent, bloody and closely personal manner possible. He could have shot them from across the room. He could have hired someone to kill them. He could have poisoned them, but he chose to stab them to death. This shows the extreme level of anger he has towards them. What could cause someone to have so much anger?
A rich kid stabbing his famous parents to death is not something the average person can just easily move on from, especially when the media has to cover it over and over to make Trump look bad. As curiosity takes over and more details are revealed, the general public will be forced to deal with what they didn’t want to accept. The world really is this evil. The people they despise have been trying to tell them. The people and ideas they may support are in fact behind the evil.
I don’t know if Rob Reiner and his wife were really stabbed to death by their son. I don’t know if Rob Reiner truly suffers from TDS and has played an integral role in trying to take down Trump. I don’t know if Reiner has been playing a role given to him by Trump the whole time. While it matters, it’s not that important to fully understand.
I’ve chosen not to talk about all the messaging and connections that have come out clearly leading one to understand there is no way this is all organic and spontaneous. There are many connections you have probably already heard. Reiner’s Hollywood roast where he is jokingly referred to as being a pedophile, or Trump wearing O.J. Simpson-like black leather gloves for the coin toss of the Army/Navy game the day before Reiner and his wife were allegedly stabbed to death in Brentwood. We’ve been given enough evidence to understand that things like the Reiner murders are part of a plan. Past ops have prepared us for future ops.
What’s important is to understand that the alleged Reiner murders is a step towards the exposure of the Satanic elite and their crimes against children. Through this exposure, mankind will turn away from Satan and run towards God in droves.
This is the true mission of the plan to save the world. It’s to save the world from Satan and his minions, and this is where the plan is taking us.
Full exposure leading to redemption.
Somalian Daycare Fraud, Where is This All Leading?
By Erik Carlson
The Abolition of the Federal Income Tax.
I’m going to try and keep this as brief as possible, so that as many people as possible will have the time to read this.
Less than a week ago, while drinking my morning coffee and scrolling through my X (Twitter) feed, I noticed that around 80% of the posts were about Somalian daycare fraud in Minnesota.
The exposure came from an independent journalist named Nick Shirley, who I wasn’t following on X at the time and whose name I barely recognized. Fraud in the hundreds of millions of dollars, if not billions, that was likely occurring for decades was suddenly being exposed.
I quickly understood that this was an exposure op and I and others were being bombarded with this information to provoke righteous anger. I also realized that Trump didn’t want FOX News or any other mainstream media company to break the story, he wanted an independent journalist to do so, then FOX could jump on board after the fact, while the liberal media sites would deny the fraud, causing them to lose even more trust from the American people.
A couple of days later I woke up to my X feed which included a new manufactured narrative. At this time, about 60% of my X feed was about the daycare fraud and 20% was now about American citizens beating the drum to no longer pay their taxes that funds all of this fraud. I told my wife, I know exactly what is happening, Trump wants us to demand the Federal income tax be abolished. Something he has been planning to do all along.
To better understand the situation, let’s take a step back to the spring of 2024. Trump made a really random public statement. He said he wanted to make tips tax-free. An odd thing to say, but it made sense, tips probably shouldn’t be taxed, they’re not technically income. I knew this was some kind of signal. In July immediately after Trump’s assassination attempt, I wrote an article explaining why I thought the Cabal felt the need to kill Trump, he was looking to abolish the Federal income tax.
As far as I know, I was the first person in the media or independent media to connect the assassination attempt to Trump’s desire to get rid of the Federal income tax. People called me crazy when I suggested that Trump was going to get rid of the Federal income tax until a few months later when he said that it is in fact what he was planning to do. I understand that many, even in our community are so black pilled that they can’t foresee a future this bright, even though the majority of America’s existence has occurred without this unconstitutional and illegal tax.
Now let’s go back to the spring of 2025, Elon Musk was put in charge of DOGE, a group of tech savvy autists who scoured through Federal Government computer files exposing massive amounts of government fraud and waste.
Conservatives were appalled by the corruption while liberals tried to defend the government waste and fraud. Attacks on Musk followed. Tesla cars were vandalized by purple-haired mind-controlled lunatics wearing pajamas and stuffed animal backpacks. Tesla dealerships were set ablaze and lit up with gunfire. Boomer liberals insisted that their retirement accounts would go to zero, and their Medicare and Social Security would quickly cease to exist because of Trump. “No Kings” protests sprouted up and inflation was going destroy us all.
This was a temperature check, too many in America weren’t ready for Trump to drop the hammer. Trump and Elon had to create a fake fight to save Musk’s companies, and possibly his life. The thermometer showed that there was still a lot of people who would reject anything Trump does, even if that means ridding the country of government fraud and eventually getting rid of the Federal income tax that funds this government corruption.
With the government shut down in the fall of 2025, America discovered how much fraud and theft was occurring in America’s welfare system. Americans began to be more and more agitated to find that most of America’s welfare was going to non-citizens and illegals and not to the Americans who may need it.
Recently with the Somalian daycare scandal, even the left is starting to reach its boiling point. They are beginning to realize that while they are struggling to survive their taxes are going to house, feed, and enrich people who probably shouldn’t be in the country and in many cases, these same people despise America and Americans.
This is what the reader needs to understand. The plan to save America is a learning process. Temperature checks are taken to see how far along America is in the awakening process. Sometimes those saving the country need to take a step back, sometimes they need to alter the course.
During DOGE, the patriots discovered that there was still a large enough segment of the American population that would reject anything Trump does, even if that means putting money directly into their pockets. These people actually defend the people who are stealing from them and holding them captive. This is an example of Stockholm Syndrome, where prisoners actually defend their captors.
In order to rid the US Federal Government of fraud and corruption and in turn, get rid of the Federal income tax, Trump can’t be seen as leading the charge. It has to appear the citizens are leading the charge. Citizen journalist exposing fraud. Citizens refusing to pay their taxes until the fraud and corruption has stopped. The public needs to beg Trump to do what he already wants and intends to do. But they can’t understand that they have been led there the whole time.
I believe Trump will get done what needs to be done at a pace necessary to avoid a civil war.
It’s pure genius
SECRETS OF THE CATHARS | FAITH, FIRE AND OBLIVION
by PAUL WALLIS
Erased for Awakening: The Cathars and the War on Consciousness
The story of the Cathars is one of the most striking—and deliberately suppressed—chapters in European spiritual history. Emerging in the 12th century across southern France, northern Italy, and parts of Spain, the Cathars represented a radically different vision of faith, consciousness, and human purpose. At a time when medieval Europe was dominated by rigid hierarchies, coercive doctrine, and institutional control, the Cathars offered something quietly revolutionary: a spiritual path rooted in inner purity, compassion, equality, and direct connection to the divine.
Often referring to themselves as the Church of Love, the Cathars rejected material excess, clerical authority, and violence. They taught that divinity was not mediated through priests, sacraments, or monumental cathedrals, but accessed directly through lived integrity, awareness, and spiritual discipline. Women could serve as spiritual leaders alongside men, wealth was viewed as spiritually corrupting, and power structures based on fear or domination were seen as incompatible with true faith. In many ways, Cathar communities functioned as parallel societies—peaceful, self-governing, and deeply ethical.
Philosophically, Cathar thought drew heavily on Platonic and Neoplatonic ideas of consciousness. Like Plato, they viewed the material world as a shadow or distortion of a higher spiritual reality. The soul, they believed, originated in a divine realm and became trapped in matter through cycles of incarnation. Liberation was not achieved through obedience, but through awakening—remembering one’s true nature and realigning with divine consciousness. These teachings placed inner transformation above external ritual, making them both spiritually potent and institutionally dangerous.
The Cathars’ views on reincarnation, divine emanation, and what could be described today as interdimensional guidance stood in direct opposition to the doctrines enforced by the Roman Catholic Church. By denying the Church’s exclusive authority over salvation, the Cathars undermined the very foundation of ecclesiastical power. If individuals could access God directly—without priests, indulgences, or fear-based judgment—the Church’s role as gatekeeper of heaven collapsed.
This existential threat triggered one of the darkest episodes in European history: the Albigensian Crusade. Beginning in 1209, the papacy authorized a brutal, century-long campaign of extermination against Cathar communities. Entire towns were massacred, sacred texts destroyed, and survivors hunted by the newly established Inquisition. The aim was not merely conquest, but erasure—removing Cathar beliefs so completely that history itself would forget they ever existed.
Yet despite the violence, the Cathars were never fully erased. Their ideas persisted underground, resurfacing in later mystical traditions, Renaissance humanism, and modern spiritual movements that emphasize consciousness, sovereignty, and non-dual awareness. Themes once labeled heretical—inner divinity, reincarnation, energetic realities, and the illusory nature of material power—now appear across psychology, philosophy, quantum theory, and contemporary spirituality.
In the twenty-first century, the Cathars feel unexpectedly relevant. As institutions lose credibility and individuals seek meaning beyond centralized authority, the Cathar emphasis on inner truth, ethical living, and direct experience resonates anew. Their refusal to outsource spirituality mirrors modern skepticism toward hierarchical systems—religious, political, and economic alike. The questions they raised remain unresolved: Who controls truth? Where does authority truly reside? And what happens when consciousness itself becomes the locus of power?
Ultimately, the Cathar story is not just about the past—it is about recurrence. Their persecution illustrates what happens when awakened ideas challenge entrenched systems of control. Their survival, through echoes and rediscovery, suggests something equally important: truth rooted in consciousness cannot be permanently destroyed. It can be buried, distorted, or denied—but in every age of transition, it has a way of returning, asking humanity once again to remember who it is.
Perhaps We Should Actually Be Focusing On Fixing America
After years of heading in the wrong direction, nobody can deny that the United States is facing overwhelming problems. So why don’t we focus on fixing those problems first? The truth is that we can’t do everything because our resources are very limited. U.S. households are more than 18 trillion dollars in debt, and the federal government is more than 38 trillion dollars in debt.
Even though we have literally stolen trillions upon trillions of dollars from future generations, our major cities are rapidly decaying, our infrastructure is crumbling, corruption is rampant, the middle class is shrinking, most of the population is struggling to even afford the basics each month, mass layoffs are happening all over the nation, our streets are teeming with hordes of drug addicts and homeless people, large numbers of Americans are selling images of themselves online just to make ends meet, and millions of others are living in their vehicles.
So why don’t we use what limited resources we have to fix our own problems?
If you don’t understand the point that I am trying to make, just go take a stroll through downtown Seattle.
The new mayor has decided that it will be her policy to allow people to openly do drugs in the streets…
Seattle’s new ultra-woke mayor has triggered chaos by ordering police not to arrest people doing drugs on the streets of the city plagued by crime and homelessness.
Democratic socialist Katie Wilson, 43, was sworn in as the city’s 58th mayor on Friday.
The progressive politician who co-founded the Transit Riders Union has already taken steps that concerned residents and law enforcement officials say will destroy Seattle.
The president of the Seattle Police Officers Guild, Mike Solan, is warning that this will make the lawlessness in the streets of Seattle even worse…
‘We’ve all seen how our streets can be filled with death, decay, blight and crime when ideology like this infects our city, Solan continued in his statement.
‘Now with this resurrected insane direction, death, destruction and more human suffering will be supercharged.’
Lawmakers and residents have reacted to this news in horror, as the city already has a raging homelessness epidemic that they believe this lax drug policy will only amplify.
Once upon a time, Seattle was one of the most beautiful cities on the entire planet.
So what in the world happened?
Of course it isn’t just Seattle that has been transformed into a crime-ridden, drug-infested hellhole. All over the nation, chaos reigns in the streets of major American cities.
In fact, last night a “hammer-wielding maniac” destroyed a bunch of windows at the Cincinnati home of Vice President J.D. Vance…
A hammer-wielding maniac who smashed four windows at JD Vance’s Cincinnati home has been arrested by the Secret Service after an overnight break-in.
William DeFoor, 26, was charged early Monday morning with one count each of obstructing official business, criminal damaging or endangering, criminal trespass and vandalism.
Secret Service agents heard a loud noise at the home around midnight and spotted DeFoor running from the home, which is the secondary residence for Vance, his wife Usha and their three young children, who were out of town at the time.
Meanwhile, lawlessness also continues to run rampant in high places all over the country.
So what is being done about it? After all this time, how many corrupt members of past administrations have been arrested and put in prison? After all this time, how many corrupt corporate executives have been arrested and put in prison? After all this time, how many of Jeffrey Epstein’s associates that also sexually abused young girls have been arrested and put in prison?
How can we tell the rest of the world how they should be doing things when we can’t even get our own house in order? We have been getting hit by crisis after crisis, and economic conditions are steadily deteriorating.
In fact, we just learned that U.S. manufacturing activity has contracted for a 10th consecutive month…
US manufacturing activity contracted for a 10th straight month in December, a survey indicated Monday, pointing to a continued drag in sentiment from tariffs and trade policy uncertainty.
The Institute for Supply Management’s (ISM) manufacturing index fell to 47.9 from November’s 48.2 reading, the lowest of 2025 despite modest improvements in employment and some other categories.
Our artificially-inflated stock market continues to hover near record highs, but at the same time the number of large corporations that are going bankrupt just continues to rise…
Between January and November 2025, at least 717 companies filed for Chapter 7 or Chapter 11 bankruptcy, according to data from S&P reviewed by The Washington Post.
That marks a 14% jump compared to the same period in 2024, and the most filings seen since 2010, the tail end of the Great Recession.
According to the Daily Mail, we are also seeing a very alarming surge in bankruptcies among small businesses too…
A frightening recession indicator is flashing red — and Americans can see it all over Main Street.
Experts told the Daily Mail that a sudden surge in bankruptcies and store closures — hitting mom-and-pop shops, small restaurants, and local retailers — could be an early warning sign that the economy is starting to crack.
One expert that was interviewed by the Daily Mail is warning that this surge in bankruptcies is a clear indication that a recession is coming…
‘The little guys are going to start falling first,’ Joe Barsalona, a Delaware-based bankruptcy lawyer at Pashman Stein Walder Hayden, said.
‘A recession is coming. I agree with economists that the increase in small business bankruptcies is a canary in a coal mine.’
Of course many would argue that a recession is already here.
In recent months, I have written a lot about the mass layoffs that have been occurring all over the country.
Well, now Newsweek is reporting that over 100 companies have filed WARN notices for mass layoffs that will be taking place in January…
More than 100 companies have filed WARN notices indicating plans to lay off workers in January 2026, according to WARNTracker.com. The following companies have filed a notice.
I tried to warn my readers that a tsunami of layoffs was coming. Now it is here.
The following is the full list of 119 companies that have filed WARN notices for this month…
AARP
AbbVie
Adams County Public Hospital
AeroFarms1526 Cane Creek
Amazon
Amentum
American Signature, Inc.
Apogee Architectural Metals
Archer Daniels Midland Company
Atkore Plastics Southeast
Augusta Sportswear, Inc.
Bechtel National Inc.
Best Dressed Chicken, Inc.
Blue Plate Oysterette LLC
Blue Shield of California
Bond 45 National Harbor Restaurant
Braga Fresh Foods, LLC
Building Materials Manufacturing LLC
BWW Law Group, LLC
Catalent, Maryland, Inc.
Charles River Laboratories
Clari Inc.
CNO Financial Group
Colonial Savings, F.A.
ColWyo Coal Company LP
CommUnify
Consolidated Hospitality Supplies
Corteva
CoStar Group
Couchbase, Inc.
CRST Expedited, Inc.
Dental Benefit Management, Inc.
Dillard’s Inc.
Dometic Corporation
DRT, LLC
DSV Air & Sea Inc.
enDevelopment Logistics, LLC
FedEx
FreshRealm
Fresno Economic Opportunities Commission
Galleher LLC
General Motors
Giesecke + Devrient ePayments America Inc
Gilead Sciences
Grand Lux Café, LLC
Great Floors
H&M Fashion USA, Inc.
HD Supply
Heibar Installations Inc.
Henkel Corporation
HRL Laboratories
Hudson
Huntington National Bank
Illumina
ImmunityBio
Inline Plastics
Institute of International Education
International Paper
Invincible Boat Company
Kloeckner Meals
Lakeshore Learning Materials, LLC
Louis Vuitton USA Inc.
Lumileds
Maritime Applied Physics Corporation
Marshalls of CA, LLC
Mattel
McDonald’s
MDWise
Meteorcomm LLC
Mettler-Toledo Rainin, LLC
Michigan Sugar Company
Middlebury Institute of International Studies at Monterey
Nationstar Mortgage, LLC
NIKE Retail Services, Inc.
Nordstrom Portland Rack
Ojai Valley Inn
Palo Verde Hospital
Panasonic Well LLC
Peraton’s Environmental Integration Services III
Post Consumer Brands, LLC
Presbyterian Home for Central New York, Inc.
Providence Health & Services
Rad Power Bikes, Inc.
RATP Dev and Midtown Group
Raytheon Technologies
Rebel Restaurants, Inc.
Red Run Corporation T/A Food Depot
Regional Medical Center of Central Alabama
Retail Services WIS Corporation
Revity, Inc.
Roads Express, LLC
Saddle Creek Logistics Service
SC Industrial Holdings, LLC
SDH Education West, LLC
SDH Service East, LLC
Shell Recharge Solutions
SLO Brewing Co. LLC
Smokin Bear LLC
Smurfit Westrock
Sodexo
Spirit Airlines, LLC.
Synopsys, Inc.
Takeda Development Center Americas Inc.
Terzo Enterprises Incorporated
The Cheesecake Factory
The French Gourmet, Inc.
The Taubman Company
TJX Companies, Inc.
TransAlta
United Supermarkets
Van Law Food Products, Inc.
Verizon
Virginia Mason Franciscan
Warner Music Group
Wells Fargo
West Fraser, Inc.
White Coffee Corporation
WIS International
WWL Vehicle Services America, Inc.
That is quite a long list, isn’t it?
The American people are not stupid.
They can see what is happening, and one recent survey found that 52 percent of U.S. adults actually believe that a recession has already started…
According to the ARG data, 52% of Americans believe the economy is already in a recession, and 64% say it’s getting worse.
These numbers suggest that many Americans are feeling the squeeze, even if official metrics don’t yet reflect a recession.
Only 11% think the economy is improving. Just 22% rate it as excellent, very good, or good, while 73% call it bad, very bad, or terrible, showing a clear gap between public sentiment and political narratives about economic strength.
Looking ahead, 60% believe the national economy will be worse a year from now, and just 16% say it will be better.
Yes, things are certainly bad now. But they are not even worth comparing to what is further down the road.
So why don’t we use our limited resources to address the historic challenges that we are facing in our own nation? If we love this country, we should try to fix it.
18 Ominous War Rumors That People Are Really Freaking Out About Right Now
We are literally watching history in the making. We all saw what just happened in Venezuela, and now there are all sorts of rumors that more bold moves are about to be made on the global chessboard.
Thanks to social media, war rumors often spread like wildfire, and not all of them turn out to be accurate. In this article, I am going to share many of the war rumors that are currently floating around. If even half of these rumors are true, we could be on the verge of entering a time of unprecedented global chaos. The following are 18 ominous war rumors that people are really freaking out about right now…
#1 Is the stage being set for war with Iran? So many people are buzzing about this on social media today. President Trump has repeatedly warned that the U.S. will get involved if Iran’s government continues to kill peaceful protesters, and there are reports that indicate that this is exactly what is happening. We are being told that at least 20 protesters have been killed by Iranian security forces so far, and apparently at least 3 of the dead are children…
At least three children are reported to have been killed and more than 40 minors arrested after eight days of the ongoing protests across Iran, as human rights groups accuse the regime’s security forces of “indiscriminate targeting of civilians”.
The nationwide uprising sparked by the collapse of the country’s currency and rising living costs has spread to at least 78 cities and 222 locations, with demonstrators calling for the end of the regime, according to the US-based Human Rights Activists in Iran (HRAI).
The protests continued over the weekend despite a worsening crackdown by security forces after comments from the country’s supreme leader, Ali Khamenei, who addressed protesters as “rioters”. So far, 990 people have been arrested and at least 20 killed, according to HRAI.
#2 According to Zineb Riboua, Ayatollah Khamenei has personally authorized his security forces to use live ammunition when firing on protesters…
Khamenei has shut down the internet and authorized live fire against protesters, it’s getting really ugly
#3 There have been reports of protesters fighting back. For example, an entire bus that was carrying Basij forces has reportedly been destroyed…
Iranian reports say a bus carrying Basij forces was hit by an explosive device or set on fire in the Naziabad neighborhood of southern Tehran.
#4 The Jerusalem Post is telling us that the U.S. and Israel are both considering some form of intervention in Iran…
The Jerusalem Post has received multiple indications that the US is considering some intervention in the ongoing Iran protests. At the same time, Israel is also checking if the removal of Venezuelan leader Nicolas Maduro will make action against the Iranian regime possible.
It appears that Israel was surprised by America’s intervention in Venezuela and that this action scrambled Israeli calculations about what might be possible in the Islamic Republic.
Until the intervention by US President Donald Trump in Caracas, most Israeli officials did not view the protests against Iran’s Supreme Leader Ayatollah Ali Khamenei as necessarily approaching the volume necessary to achieve regime change.
#5 Israeli officials apparently held a 5 hour meeting on Sunday during which a plan known as “Operation Iron Strike” was discussed…
According to the Israeli channel i24news, Netanyahu chaired a security meeting on Sunday that lasted about five hours, during which he outlined priorities for potential action against Iran.
The discussions included briefings for senior officials, including Defense Minister Israel Katz and Eyal Zamir, the chief of staff of the Israel Defense Forces (IDF), on exercises simulating possible war scenarios.
Israeli media reports indicate that the plan, known as “Operation Iron Strike,” could involve strikes against Iran, though its full scope and specific targets have not been publicly confirmed.
#6 There are lots of rumors that Reza Pahlavi will lead a transitional government in Iran if the current regime is overthrown, and he is certainly doing his best to urge the protesters on…
Dear compatriots,
The shooting of the brave and noble people of Malekshahi, the killing of the city’s youth, and the subsequent cowardly attack by the regime’s mercenaries on Ilam Hospital, are an unmistakable crime that recalls the massacre of the people of Zahedan on Bloody Friday in 2022.
A regime that kills unarmed young people and raids medical centers clearly has no legitimacy, and is nearing its end.
To the suffering and patriotic people of Malekshahi and Ilam: I stand with you in grief and solidarity, and I assure you that Khamenei and the corrupt, murderous ringleaders of the Islamic Republic will pay the price for this crime.
#7 The fact that a large number of U.S. military aircraft have been flying across the Atlantic has been creating a tremendous amount of buzz…
#8 Many have been pointing out that we saw a similar level of air activity just before the strikes on Iran’s nuclear facilities last year…
Open-source intelligence and flight tracking data indicate increased U.S. military air activity in and toward the Middle East, primarily involving cargo aircraft like the C-17 Globemaster III and refueling tankers.
These movements resemble pre-strike logistics surges observed before U.S./Israeli actions against Iranian nuclear facilities in mid-2025.
It is only a matter of time before all hell breaks loose in the region.
This time the U.S. will be more involved and the goal is regime change in Iran.
#9 The Iranians are apparently fully convinced that a new round of airstrikes could be coming soon…
Three Iranian officials have told Reuters that Tehran leadership believes the United States or Israel may take military action against the Islamic Republic soon, coming off the heels of the US intervention to remove Venezuela’s Maduro.
There are reports of Iranian ’emergency meetings’ of top leadership to examining options for self-defense, and the country overnight engaged in fresh ballistic missile drills to signal its preparedness.
The NY Times has separately cited Iranian officials who view the country as being in “survival mode” – amid a week of economic protests driven largely by the impact of US sanctions: currency collapse and soaring prices.
#10 A photo of President Trump holding a hat that says “make Iran great again” while standing next to U.S. Senator Lindsey Graham is causing a great deal of controversy all over social media…
#11 It is being reported that a very special protest in Tehran is being organized for Tuesday. Apparently the plan is for the protesters to march in the direction of the parliament building…
A Telegram channel representing merchants at Tehran’s Grand Bazaar is calling on shopkeepers across multiple bazaars to mobilize Tuesday (Jan. 6) at 12:00, urging coordinated marches towards the Parliament
#12 Does he know that something is about to happen? Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu is warning that if Israel is attacked, “the implications for Iran will be very dire”…
“President Trump and I share a determined position. We will not allow Iran to rebuild its ballistic missile industry, and of course, we will not allow it to resume its nuclear program that we significantly hit during Operation Rising Lion.
“Our shared position on Iran remains. Zero enrichment capability, removing all the enriched uranium from Iranian territory, and strict and rigorous inspections over its nuclear sites.
“When we discussed Iran, the popular uprising, not just in Tehran but elsewhere, it has only just begun, and in the meantime, has widely spread. We, in Israel, sympathize with the struggle of the Iranian people and with their aspirations for freedom and justice. It is very possible that we stand before a decisive moment, in which the Iranian people take their destiny into their own hands.
“In any case, even before I visited the United States and during the visit, I clarified concerning military drills conducted by Iran just a few days ago, that if we are attacked, the implications for Iran will be very dire.”
#13 There is a rumor that Ayatollah Khamenei and his minions have a plan to flee the country…
Iran’s Ayatollah Ali Khamenei has a back-up plan to flee the country should his security forces fail to suppress protests or desert, according to an intelligence report shared with The Times.
Khamenei, 86, plans to escape Tehran with a close circle of up to 20 aides and family, should he see that the army and security called on to quell the unrest are deserting, defecting or failing to follow orders.
“The ‘plan B’ is for Khamenei and his very close circle of associates and family, including his son and nominated heir apparent, Mojtaba,” an intelligence source told The Times.
#14 Could Israel be about to go to war with Hezbollah again? Reports of fresh IDF airstrikes in southern Lebanon on Monday have prompted fresh speculation about this…
Israel’s air force struck areas in southern and eastern Lebanon on Monday, saying they are home to infrastructure for the militant groups Hezbollah and Hamas.
The strikes came a few days before Lebanon’s army commander is scheduled to brief the government on its mission of disarming Hezbollah in areas along the border with Israel.
The strikes took place nearly two hours after Israel’s military Arabic-language spokesman Avichay Adraee posted warnings on X that the military would strike targets for Hezbollah and the Palestinian Hamas groups in two villages in the eastern Bekaa Valley and two others in southern Lebanon.
#15 It appears that the Venezuelans do not intend to submit to the Trump administration. In fact, we are being told that authorities in Venezuela have initiated a nationwide hunt for anyone that helped the U.S. grab Nicolas Maduro…
Venezuelan authorities have been ordered to find and arrest anyone involved in supporting the military operation that led to the arrest of Nicolas Maduro.
A state of emergency decree issued Saturday, but published Monday, orders police to “immediately begin the national search and capture of everyone involved in the promotion or support for the armed attack by the United States,” according to the text of the decree, Reuters reported.
#16 On Sunday, President Trump made some extremely alarming comments about Colombian President Gustavo Petro, and as a result many are speculating that military action against Colombia could be coming soon…
US President Donald Trump seemed to foreshadow a potential military operation in Colombia, denouncing the nation’s leader as a “sick man” who sells cocaine to Americans.
The comments came days after the US launched a special forces raid in Venezuela, kidnapping both President Nicolas Maduro and his wife. “Colombia is very sick too. Run by a sick man who likes making cocaine and selling it to the US, and he’s not gonna be doing it very long,” the president told reporters aboard Air Force One Sunday evening.
#17 Many are suggesting that taunting President Trump is probably only going to make military action against Colombia even more likely, but that is precisely what Petro has chosen to do…
Colombian President Gustavo Petro issued a stark three-word warning to President Donald Trump amid ramped-up attacks against alleged drug trafficking in Latin America: “Come get me!”
“Come get me,” Petro said. “I’m waiting for you here. Don’t threaten me, I’ll wait for you right here if you want to.”
#18 There has been a lot of speculation that Cuba is high on President Trump’s hit list. Apparently Trump believes that Cuba is going to fall very soon, and he is saying that many Cuban Americans “are going to be very happy about this”…
“Cuba is ready to fall,” Trump said. “Cuba looks like it’s ready to fall. I don’t know if they’re going to hold out. But Cuba now has no income. They got all of their income from their Venezuela, from the Venezuelan oil. They’re not getting any of it. And Cuba is literally ready to fall.”
Trump added: “You have a lot of great Cuban Americans who are going to be very happy about this.”
Every day there are even more war rumors to chew on. I think that a lot of people enjoy having something exciting to talk about, but I think that we all need to reflect on where all of this is heading.
We have already been through two world wars. A third world war was supposed to be unthinkable, but now here we are. Let us hope that cooler heads eventually prevail, but I have a feeling that simply is not going to happen.
This Is The Part Of The Story That Leads To War With Russia And China
The dramatic events that just occurred in Venezuela have shocked the entire world. But almost everyone is missing the bigger picture. A very tense geopolitical game of chess is playing out right in front of our eyes, and the stakes are incredibly high.
The Trump administration would love to push the Chinese and the Russians out of the western hemisphere, and setting up a new western-friendly government in Venezuela would be a huge step in that direction. Most people do not realize this, but Venezuela actually has more proven oil reserves than anyone else on the entire planet, and that includes Saudi Arabia. President Trump and his team are gambling that the Chinese and the Russians will stand down and allow them to do whatever they want with Venezuela. But what if they don’t? The Chinese and the Russians have both spent decades developing very deep ties with Venezuela, and now they are both absolutely furious.
Over the past two decades, the Russians have sold the Venezuelans approximately 20 billion dollars worth of military equipment, and they just signed a major strategic partnership agreement on May 7th.
The Chinese have lent the Venezuelans approximately 60 billion dollars over the last couple of decades, and China has been purchasing more oil from Venezuela than the rest of the world combined.
An emergency session of the UN Security Council has been called for Monday, and I am sure that the Russians and the Chinese are both going to have plenty to say…
The United Nations Security Council is due to meet on Monday after the US attacked Venezuela and deposed its long-serving autocratic President Nicolas Maduro, a move that UN Secretary-General Antonio Guterres views as setting “a dangerous precedent.”
Colombia, backed by Russia and China, requested the meeting of the 15-member council, diplomats say. The UN Security Council has met twice — in October and December — over the escalating tensions between the United States and Venezuela.
Venezuela had essentially become a full-blown economic colony of China, and it took a great deal of time for the Chinese to accomplish that.
So if you look at things from a Chinese point of view, it is easy to understand why they are so upset.
A foreign ministry spokesperson has announced that China “strongly condemns” what the U.S. has just done…
China said it’s “deeply shocked” by the US’s military strikes on Venezuela and its capture of President Nicolas Maduro.
China “strongly condemns the US’s blatant use of force against a sovereign state and action against its president,” a Foreign Ministry spokesperson said in a statement late Saturday. “Such hegemonic acts of the US seriously violate international law and Venezuela’s sovereignty, and threaten peace and security in Latin America and the Caribbean region. China firmly opposes it.”
And the Chinese are also demanding that Nicolas Maduro and his wife be released immediately…
Beijing’s stinging rebuke expressed “serious concern over their transfer out of the country”.
It claimed the military operation was “in clear violation of international law and the basic norms in international relations and the purposes and principles of the UN Charter”, adding: “China calls on the US to ensure the personal safety of President Maduro and his wife, release them at once, stop toppling the Government of Venezuela, and resolve issues through dialogue and negotiation.”
Of course that isn’t going to happen.
Now that President Trump has Maduro, he is never going to let him go.
What makes all of this even more embarrassing for China is that a Chinese delegation actually met with Maduro just hours before he was grabbed by U.S. forces…
Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro received a Chinese government representative at the presidential palace in Caracas on Friday, hours before US President Donald Trump claimed Maduro had been captured following American military strikes.
Maduro met Qiu Xiaoqi, special representative of the Chinese government on Latin American affairs, at the Miraflores Palace.
“I had a pleasant meeting with Qiu Xiaoqi, Special Envoy of President Xi Jinping,” Maduro said on Telegram. “We reaffirmed our commitment to the strategic relationship that is progressing and strengthening in various areas for building a multipolar world of development and peace.”
Can you imagine how we would feel if the roles were reversed?
To the Chinese, Venezuela is not just another country.
It was supposed to provide large amounts of oil for China’s growing economy for decades to come, and the Venezuelans currently owe the Chinese tens of billions of dollars…
Venezuelan oil takes an unconventional route to end-users in China. Transport typically takes more than two months and involves multiple ship-to-ship transfers to mask the origin of the cargo. Close to half of the tankers storing Merey are sitting in waters off China and Southeast Asia, according to ship-tracking data compiled by Bloomberg.
Meanwhile, public data supports estimates that Beijing lent upwards of $60 billion in oil-backed loans to Venezuela through state-run banks until 2015, reaching a level of diplomatic and financial investment unmatched elsewhere in Latin America and perhaps the world.
By making a move to take control of Venezuela, we have essentially punched the Chinese in the face.
Our relationship with China will never be the same after this.
For years, experts have been talking about a coming war with China, and the U.S. military is actually “working around the clock” to prepare for such a conflict…
Across sleepy and remote islands in the Pacific, U.S. military engineers are working around the clock to revive strategically important airstrips that American troops first built under fire over 70 years ago during World War II.
The reconstruction effort is being led by a designated office within the U.S. Air Force, whose Agile Combat Employment, or ACE, doctrine has identified dozens of airfields that will be used to house and launch fighter jets, aerial refuelling tankers and weapons during a war with China. A trilateral force of the Navy, Marine Corps and Air Force is now converging with a single goal in mind: re-establish a presence on the airfields once used to deliver decisive combat power for the United States during the last great power war.
The Russians are also extremely upset about what has just transpired in Venezuela.
In fact, Russia’s Foreign Ministry says that what we just witnessed “warrants condemnation”…
The US committed an act of armed aggression against Venezuela, which gives rise to deep concern & warrants condemnation.
The pretexts used to justify these actions are untenable.
Russia reaffirms its solidarity with the Venezuelan people.
And Russia’s Foreign Ministry is also calling for the immediate release of “the lawfully elected president of a sovereign country and his wife”…
Russia’s Foreign Ministry on Saturday called for the release of Venezuelan leader Nicolás Maduro and his wife from U.S. custody after President Donald Trump announced that they were captured during military strikes on the capital city of Caracas.
“We firmly call on the U.S. leadership to reconsider this position and release the lawfully elected president of a sovereign country and his wife,” the Foreign Ministry said in a statement, stressing the need to resolve the dramatic confrontation through diplomacy.
In a separate message, the ministry said Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov spoke by phone to Venezuelan Vice President Delcy Rodriguez Gomez, during which he expressed his “solidarity with the Venezuelan people in the face of armed aggression.”
After what we just witnessed, how are the Russians supposed to trust any promises that we are making about Ukraine? I just don’t see any possible way that there is going to be lasting peace with Russia now.
I think that the “peace plan” that the Ukrainians and the Europeans have been working on will eventually be presented to the Russians, and the Russians will immediately reject it because it is filled with provisions that the Russians could never possibly accept.
Once the Russians have rejected the “peace plan”, we will be told that there is no choice but to escalate the conflict in Ukraine.
Needless to say, that will put us in very dangerous territory. As for Venezuela, there is a possibility that the U.S. Senate could step in next week and prevent President Trump and his team from taking any further military action…
The Senate will vote next week on a bipartisan war powers resolution to block President Trump from continuing military action against Venezuela — a vote that takes on heightened importance after U.S. forces attacked the South American nation and arrested President Nicolás Maduro early Saturday.
The resolution to block the administration from engaging in further hostilities against Venezuela is privileged, which means Senate Majority Leader John Thune (R-S.D.) cannot stop it from coming to the floor.
The measure is sponsored by Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer (N.Y.) and Sens. Tim Kaine (D-Va.), Rand Paul (R-Ky.) and Adam Schiff (D-Calif.).
It will be very interesting to see how that vote goes. Several Republicans will need to back that resolution in order for it to pass.
Of course President Trump will be extremely displeased with any Republicans that choose to do so. But even if this resolution passes, the U.S. has still crossed a line that will never be able to be uncrossed.
We have reached the part of the story that will eventually lead to war with both Russia and China, and that should deeply alarm all of us.
2026: The Convergence Window — How Solar, Geophysical, and Volcanic Forces Reshape Global Weather
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
1. A Narrowing Forecast Window
Predictions of “chaotic weather” have become commonplace, but broad language obscures what is now emerging with greater specificity. The 2026 timeframe represents a convergence window in which multiple physical drivers—solar activity, geophysical stress, and volcanic aerosol loading—align closely enough to amplify extreme weather outcomes. This is not a claim of randomness or apocalypse, but of compression: several known systems reaching heightened interaction within a relatively short period.
2. Solar Cycle 25 and CME Amplification
Solar Cycle 25 is tracking stronger than early projections, with elevated sunspot counts and an increasing frequency of Earth-directed coronal mass ejections (CMEs). Data from NASA and NOAA indicate that peak activity is likely to persist through 2025–2026 rather than taper quickly. CMEs do not “cause storms” directly, but they do alter the upper atmosphere, disrupt the jet stream, and modulate pressure systems—conditions that favor blocking patterns, stalled fronts, and prolonged extremes.
3. Jet Stream Destabilization and Weather Lock-In
One of the most consistent downstream effects of elevated solar-geomagnetic activity is increased jet stream waviness. When the jet stream slows and meanders, weather systems stall. Heat stays hotter, rain falls longer, cold snaps linger, and storm systems repeat over the same regions. The result is not uniform global chaos, but regional persistence—weeks of flooding in one zone, extended drought in another, and repeated storm tracks over the same ocean basins.
4. Volcanic Aerosols as a Climate Multiplier
Recent years have seen a rise in moderate volcanic activity, including eruptions that inject sulfur dioxide and ash into the upper atmosphere. While none individually rival historic super-eruptions, their cumulative aerosol loading matters. These particles reflect solar radiation unevenly, cool some regions, warm others, and further destabilize atmospheric circulation. When layered atop solar-driven variability, volcanic aerosols increase volatility rather than dampen it.
5. Ocean Heat, Not Just Air Temperature
Extreme weather in 2026 is more likely to be driven by oceanic heat content than surface air temperature alone. The Atlantic, in particular, remains anomalously warm at depth, providing latent energy for cyclonic development. This does not guarantee constant hurricanes, but it raises the ceiling for storm intensity and rainfall potential—especially when upper-atmospheric conditions reduce wind shear. This is where modern super-storm models and older prophetic descriptions converge: not frequency, but power and persistence.
6. Seismic Stress and Atmospheric Coupling
Growing research suggests subtle coupling between seismic activity and atmospheric behavior, particularly through gravity waves and pressure field disruptions following major earthquakes. While this relationship remains under study, clusters of tectonic stress release often coincide with unusual weather anomalies. The implication is not causation in isolation, but synchronization—multiple Earth systems responding to shared stress conditions.
7. The 2026 Risk Profile: When and Where
The highest-risk window appears to center on late winter through early autumn 2026, with particular sensitivity during equinox periods when geomagnetic coupling is strongest. Regions most exposed include the North Atlantic basin, parts of the Mediterranean, the U.S. Midwest and Southeast, East Asia, and volcanic-adjacent zones in the Pacific Ring of Fire. The dominant risks are flooding, wind events, heat-humidity spikes, and infrastructure-straining cold intrusions—not uniform catastrophe.
8. Why This Is Different From Normal Variability
Extreme weather has always existed, but what distinguishes the 2026 window is convergence density. Solar peaks, ocean heat anomalies, volcanic aerosols, and atmospheric circulation shifts are all present simultaneously. Each factor alone is manageable. Together, they reduce system resilience and margin for error. This is why forecasting confidence remains low even as risk confidence rises.
9. Impact Over Hype
The practical impact of this convergence is not daily disaster, but intermittent, high-impact disruption: supply chain delays, agricultural stress, energy grid strain, insurance volatility, and localized humanitarian pressure. The signal is not panic, but preparation—recognizing that weather in 2026 is likely to be less predictable, more persistent, and more consequential than recent norms. The systems are not breaking. They are entering active stress.
UPDATE; DEVELOPING POLITICAL CRISIS IN MINNESOTA
Tim Walz Withdraws from 2026 Race as Federal Scrutiny Intensifies
January 6, 2026 | Status: Active Investigation / Allegations Under Review
Minnesota Governor Tim Walz has announced his withdrawal from the 2026 gubernatorial race amid intensifying federal scrutiny surrounding a large-scale welfare fraud investigation tied to state-administered childcare and social services programs. While Walz publicly cited the need to “focus on the work of governing,” multiple sources close to the situation describe mounting legal, political, and institutional pressure as the decisive factor.
At the center of the controversy are allegations that a network of daycare providers—many reportedly operating within Minnesota’s Somali-American community—systematically exploited federal childcare subsidy programs over more than a decade. Investigators are examining claims that fraudulent billing, falsified attendance records, and shell operations may have resulted in billions of dollars in improper payments.
Scope of the Allegations
According to investigators familiar with the inquiry, the alleged fraud involves repeated overbilling and fabricated claims tied to childcare assistance programs funded through a combination of federal and state dollars. Estimates circulating among investigative and oversight circles range widely, with some alleging losses in the multi-billion-dollar range over a ten-year period.
It is important to note: no final adjudication has occurred, and the figures cited remain under review. However, multiple federal agencies—including the FBI and DOJ—have confirmed active investigations, raids, and asset reviews related to the case.
Minnesota’s Department of Human Services, which administers many of the relevant programs, operated under Walz’s governorship throughout the period now under scrutiny—placing his administration squarely within the accountability window, even if direct involvement has not been alleged.
Federal Response Escalates
The investigation reportedly intensified following intervention by Robert F. Kennedy Jr., who ordered temporary payment freezes on select programs pending compliance reviews and audits. Federal authorities have since executed search warrants at multiple facilities and financial intermediaries associated with the alleged scheme.
Media outlets and watchdog organizations have also drawn attention to the role of political oversight, raising questions about regulatory enforcement failures, whistleblower suppression, and the apparent reluctance of state agencies to intervene earlier despite repeated warning signs.
Political Fallout and Secondary Figures
The expanding scope of the investigation has drawn political attention beyond the governor’s office. Some reporting has referenced individuals connected to Minnesota’s congressional delegation, including Ilhan Omar, though no charges or formal accusations have been filed against her. Any suggestion of direct involvement remains speculative at this stage.
Former President Donald Trump publicly commented on the developments, calling for “full accountability” and framing the case as emblematic of broader failures in federal oversight and enforcement. Such statements, while politically charged, reflect the degree to which the issue has escalated beyond state politics.
Why Walz’s Exit Matters
Walz’s decision to step aside—regardless of stated reasons—marks a critical inflection point. Sitting governors rarely abandon reelection bids absent extraordinary circumstances. In this case, the convergence of federal investigations, media exposure, internal political pressure, and administrative credibility erosion appears to have rendered continued candidacy untenable.
From an orientation perspective, this is not merely a scandal—it is a systemic stress signal:
- Long-running programs operating without effective oversight
- Warning signs normalized rather than addressed
- Political insulation delaying corrective action
- Federal intervention arriving only after losses compounded
Orientation Lens: Pattern, Not Spectacle
This development fits a broader national pattern now repeating across jurisdictions:
- Institutional drag enabling prolonged abuse
- Oversight failure masked by complexity and sensitivity
- Narrative protection delaying exposure
- Sudden compression once federal thresholds are crossed
The collapse is not sudden—it is revealed.
What Comes Next
The investigation remains active. Indictments, civil recoveries, and further disclosures are possible, but not guaranteed. What is clear is that Minnesota’s political landscape has shifted decisively, and the era of deferred accountability around social-program administration is closing.
Whether this episode results in prosecutions or policy reform, it underscores a central lesson of the current cycle:
Systems do not fail all at once.
They fail quietly—until they cannot.
This is not the end of the story.
It is the point at which structure becomes visible.
CONFIRMED: Venezuela Bombshell Intel Drop
Narco-General Hugo Carvajal Confesses from U.S. Custody
BREAKING UPDATE | May 1, 2025 — Prison Statements & Ongoing Cooperation
Former Venezuelan intelligence chief Hugo “El Pollo” Carvajal continues to provide information to U.S. authorities from federal custody, offering a sweeping set of allegations about the inner workings of the Venezuelan regime. Through letters, statements, and reported cooperation sessions, Carvajal claims that the government led by Nicolás Maduro functioned not merely as a hostile state, but as a cartelized intelligence operation waging asymmetric warfare against the United States.
Carvajal’s allegations span drug trafficking, gang weaponization, election interference, and foreign intelligence coordination. Central to his claims is the assertion that Venezuelan state systems were deliberately used to traffic narcotics, fund political influence abroad, and undermine democratic processes—while Western intelligence agencies allegedly looked the other way.
The General Who Turned on His Own Regime
Hugo Carvajal Barrios is not a fringe defector. He was a three-star general and served as Chief of Military Intelligence under both Hugo Chávez and Maduro—placing him at the core of Venezuela’s security, intelligence, and counterintelligence apparatus for more than a decade.
After pleading guilty in the United States to narco-terrorism conspiracy charges, Carvajal began what he describes as a full disclosure process. According to his statements, the regime he once served evolved into a hybrid structure: part government, part cartel, part intelligence service—designed to generate revenue through narcotics while projecting influence through covert political and social destabilization.
“I will expose the entire network—from South America to your Senate floor,” Carvajal reportedly stated from custody.
Allegations of Narco-State Warfare
Carvajal claims that the Maduro government viewed itself as being in an undeclared war with the United States. In this framing, drug trafficking was not simply corruption—it was strategy.
According to his testimony:
- Narcotics were used as both revenue and social destabilization tools
- Criminal gangs were exported as vectors of chaos
- Digital infrastructure was leveraged to influence elections and public trust
He alleges that organizations such as Tren de Aragua were not rogue criminal entities, but assets—used to spread violence, fear, and disruption beyond Venezuela’s borders.
These claims have been echoed, though not independently verified, in regional reporting, including coverage by The City Paper Bogotá, which describes Venezuela as operating a form of “narco-paramilitary diplomacy.”
Smartmatic, Elections, and Intelligence Awareness
One of the most explosive components of Carvajal’s statements involves election technology. He alleges that voting systems developed by Smartmatic were designed with manipulation capabilities from inception, and that these vulnerabilities were known to elements within Western intelligence communities, including the Central Intelligence Agency.
Carvajal claims that election interference was not limited to Venezuela, but became part of a broader influence strategy—exported through technology, advisors, and aligned political networks.
It is critical to note: these claims remain allegations. However, their significance lies not only in their content, but in the source—an insider with direct operational knowledge and documented ties to the regime’s intelligence architecture.
Political Influence and U.S. Allegations
Perhaps the most incendiary aspect of Carvajal’s disclosures is his claim that U.S. political figures were compromised—either through funding, indirect influence, or willful blindness—by the Venezuelan narco-regime.
Carvajal alleges that certain U.S. Senators were effectively “bought off” or neutralized through financial channels linked to drug proceeds. No court has adjudicated these claims, and no official list has been publicly confirmed. Nonetheless, the allegation itself underscores the scale of the operation Carvajal describes: one that reaches beyond borders, ideology, and conventional diplomacy.
Counteroffensive Narratives and Escalating Stakes
Within alternative intelligence and political commentary spaces, Carvajal’s disclosures are being framed as a catalyst—one that coincides with broader efforts by figures such as Donald Trump and Pete Hegseth to confront what they describe as entrenched “Deep State” structures.
These narratives portray Carvajal’s testimony as a weaponized disclosure—an internal detonation rather than an external attack. Whether or not this framing holds, the timing and substance of the revelations have undeniably intensified scrutiny of Venezuela’s role in transnational crime and political interference.
Why This Matters
Carvajal’s statements, if substantiated even in part, challenge long-standing assumptions about the nature of state conflict. They suggest a model of warfare that avoids conventional battlefields in favor of:
- Drugs instead of bombs
- Gangs instead of armies
- Code instead of missiles
- Influence instead of invasion
This is not a claim of chaos—it is a claim of design.
The Reckoning Phase
Carvajal is no longer defending his former government. He is documenting it.
Whether his disclosures lead to prosecutions, policy shifts, or historical reassessment remains to be seen. But one thing is clear: Venezuela’s collapse cannot be understood solely as economic mismanagement or ideological failure. According to Carvajal’s testimony, it was operational—planned, monetized, and exported.
If a full accounting of this era is underway, his testimony will not be treated as rumor.
It will be treated as evidence offered from inside the machine.
And once such a machine is fully mapped, the question is no longer whether it will be confronted—
but how far the confrontation will go.
Anatomy of a Regime: The Role of Cilia Flores
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Recent reports surrounding the capture of Nicolás Maduro have reopened a question Venezuelans have debated quietly for decades: who truly ruled Venezuela during its descent?
Much of the initial international commentary has framed Cilia Flores—Maduro’s wife and long-time political partner—as collateral damage, a spouse caught in the undertow of her husband’s crimes. This narrative may resonate abroad, but inside Venezuela it rings hollow. To those who lived under the regime, Flores was never peripheral. She was foundational.
A Political Operator, Not a First Lady
Cilia Flores was not a ceremonial figure who rose alongside power. She was already deeply embedded in Venezuela’s revolutionary legal and political machinery long before Maduro entered national prominence. A trained lawyer with sharp political instincts, Flores had established herself as a formidable operator within the Bolivarian movement while Maduro was still largely unknown outside labor circles.
She is six years older than Maduro, and when they met in the early 1990s, the disparity in political capital between them was stark. Maduro was a bus driver with limited formal education and no meaningful institutional leverage. Flores, by contrast, was already close to the inner legal orbit of Hugo Chávez—the movement’s gravitational center.
The Chávez Connection
One of Flores’ most consequential early roles was leading the legal team that secured Chávez’s release from prison after his failed 1992 coup attempt. That moment marked the resurrection of Chávez’s political future—and Flores was instrumental in making it happen.
At the time, Flores was married with three children. Maduro had one son. Their personal relationship would develop later, but politically, Flores’ standing was already secure. She was trusted, effective, and close to the source of power. Chávez recognized her value early—and managed it carefully.
Accounts from within the regime describe Chávez as acutely aware of Flores’ influence and temperament. He reportedly ensured that her rise and Maduro’s remained synchronized—never allowing one to outpace the other. When Maduro ascended to leadership roles within the National Assembly, Flores followed. When Chávez designated Maduro as his successor in 2013, Flores became his official wife that same year.
The timing was not incidental. It was strategic.
Power Consolidation and Parallel Ascent
As First Lady, Flores did not retreat into symbolism. She occupied advisory, legal, and political roles that allowed her to exert influence across institutions. Insiders have long described her as disciplined, dominant, and fiercely protective of the regime’s continuity.
In many respects, Flores functioned as both architect and enforcer—someone who understood the legal scaffolding of power as well as the informal networks that sustained it. Where Maduro projected loyalty and continuity, Flores provided structure, pressure, and resolve.
This dynamic mattered as Venezuela’s institutions began to hollow out. As governance gave way to control, the regime relied increasingly on legal manipulation, coercive loyalty, and criminal alliances. Flores’ background made her uniquely suited to navigate—and normalize—that shift.
The Narco-State Intersection
The darker dimensions of the regime surfaced publicly in 2015, when two of Flores’ nephews were arrested while attempting to traffic approximately 800 kilograms of cocaine. Their capture was not peripheral; it exposed the regime’s proximity to transnational criminal networks.
The nephews were extradited to the United States, convicted in New York in 2016, and sentenced to 18 years in prison. The case reverberated internationally, not because of the crime itself, but because of what it implied: proximity, protection, and impunity at the highest levels of power.
In 2022, the story took another revealing turn. The nephews were granted clemency by Joe Biden and exchanged for seven Americans detained in Venezuela. The deal quietly underscored how criminal justice, diplomacy, and geopolitical leverage had become inseparable in the Venezuelan crisis.
This was not the act of a regime embarrassed by criminal ties. It was the behavior of a system comfortable using them.
Reassessing Responsibility
The idea that Cilia Flores was merely an accessory to Maduro’s rule does not withstand scrutiny. The historical record suggests something far more consequential. She was present at the creation, influential during the consolidation, and entangled in the darker mechanisms that sustained the regime as Venezuela collapsed.
If Maduro was the face of continuity, Flores was the hand behind the architecture.
There is an old saying that behind every powerful man stands a powerful woman. In this case, the dynamic appears reversed. Flores did not merely stand behind Maduro—she shaped his ascent, stabilized his position, and may ultimately have sealed his fate.
The Reckoning Ahead
If Venezuela is now entering a period of forensic reckoning—legal, political, and historical—Cilia Flores will not be a footnote. She will be central to understanding how ideology hardened into control, how institutions were hollowed from within, and how a nation was steered toward collapse under the guise of continuity.
History will not ask whether she knew.
It will ask how much she directed.
And that question may prove far more consequential than the fate of any single president.
10 Very Important Trends To Watch As We Enter 2026
Are we on the brink of a worldwide nightmare? Many have described what we are currently experiencing as a “perfect storm”. We have been getting hit with one crisis after another as global events have greatly accelerated in recent months. But now it feels like the next chapter that we are entering is going to take things to an entirely different level.
On New Year’s Eve, something very unexpected happened at our most important landmark in the middle of the country. You will want to read all the way to the end of this article to see what I am talking about. This year is already off to a very unusual start, and I fully expect a lot more craziness in the months ahead. The following are 10 very important trends to watch as we enter 2026…
#1 The Price Of Silver
The price of silver is telling us that there is big trouble under the surface of the global financial system. Even though there was a dramatic attempt to suppress the price of silver this week, it was still up about 140 percent in 2025.
And the difference between the price of paper silver and the prices that physical silver is going for around the world has become extremely alarming…
Silver at $130 in Japan, $106 in Kuwait, $97 in Korea, and “$71” on Western screens is not a market; it is a confession. The numbers read like a crime scene diagram: in the real world where bars change hands and coins disappear into safes, silver has quietly migrated into triple‑digit pricing, while the supposed “global benchmark” in New York and London is still stuck in a fantasyland of leveraged promises.
In Tokyo shops and Japanese bullion counters, you are not buying silver in the 70s; you are paying the equivalent of $120–130 an ounce because that is what it costs to replace inventory once you factor in tight wholesale supply, shipping, insurance, currency chaos, and the growing sense that the next shipment might not show up on time, or at all. Kuwait tells the same story in a different language: retail bars priced around $100+ an ounce are not a fat merchant’s greed; they are the market’s answer to a simple question—what will it really take to pry physical metal out of the pipeline in a world where everyone suddenly wants the same scarce asset at the same time.
#2 The Affordability Crisis
In 2025, I wrote about the affordability crisis in the United States a lot.
Sadly, at this stage approximately two-thirds of the entire U.S. population is struggling to even pay for the basics…
About 7 in 10 Americans polled by CBS News in December said they were struggling to pay for food, housing and health care, underscoring the affordability issues affecting millions of households.
#3 Israel And Iran
This is a big one.
Once Israel and Iran start fighting again, global events will go into overdrive.
Apparently a new round of airstrikes on Iran was discussed during Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu’s meeting with President Trump on Monday, and I am convinced that it won’t be too long before those airstrikes actually begin…
On Monday, Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu met with President Donald Trump at Mar-a-Lago, during which the two leaders discussed efforts by Iran to reconstitute its nuclear program following the Israeli and American airstrikes in June, and to expand its ballistic missile arsenal.
During the meeting, Netanyahu shared with Trump details regarding Israel’s planning for a possible follow-up air campaign against Iran, should Tehran continue to refuse to halt its efforts to enrich uranium.
According to a US official and two other American sources, Israel is considering airstrikes in 2026.
#4 The War In Ukraine
Russian forces are steadily moving forward on the eastern and southern fronts in Ukraine, and so the Russians will not be inclined to give the Ukrainians and our European allies what they are demanding…
- Russian President Vladimir Putin inspected a command post of the Russian Armed Forces
- Putin received reports from Chief of the General Staff Valery Gerasimov and the commanders of Russia’s Center and East groupings of forces.
- Russian commanders told Putin that their army has captured the cities of Mirnohrad, Rodynske, and Artemivka in Ukraine’s Donetsk region, as well as Huliaipole and Steponohirsk in the Zaporizhzhia region.
#5 Europe Preparing For War
Russia has made it very clear that it does not intend to attack any other European countries.
But for some reason, the Europeans are feverishly preparing for war anyway.
In fact, Germany is now requiring all 18-year-old males to complete a compulsory survey about military service…
Germany is stepping up preparations for war – starting with its teenage boys.
From this week, every German male will be legally required to answer questions from the army the moment he turns 18, as part of a sweeping new military service scheme approved amid mounting fears of a major conflict in Europe.
Tens of thousands of teenagers will be sent a compulsory 14-question survey by the Bundeswehr, asking not only how interested they are in joining the military, but how fit they are to fight and how quickly they could be ready for service.
Ignoring the form is not an option. Young men who refuse to complete the questionnaire – or repeatedly ignore follow-up demands from the army – face fines of up to €1,000 (£800), even though ministers insist the scheme falls short of full conscription.
#6 Venezuela
The Trump administration has been bombing drug boats, seizing oil tankers and threatening the regime of Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro. This could put the U.S. on a collision course with China.
China does not intend to stop buying oil from Venezuela. If the U.S. starts seizing Chinese oil tankers that approach Venezuela, that could cause a major international incident. According to Newsweek, there are two Chinese oil tankers that are expected to arrive in Venezuela very soon…
Chinese oil tankers are pressing ahead with Venezuela-linked voyages despite a U.S. blockade and an escalating campaign of tanker seizures.
Two Chinese-flagged VLCCs are operating near Venezuelan waters, with the Thousand Sunny due to arrive in mid-January and the Xing Ye waiting off French Guiana, according to a new report by Lloyd’s List.
Newsweek has reached out to the U.S. State Department for comment.
#7 Taiwan
The Chinese just concluded military exercises that practiced what a full-blown blockade of Taiwan would look like.
At this stage, tensions between China and Taiwan are higher “than at any point in recent years”…
As 2025 ends, tensions between China and Taiwan are higher — and more overt — than at any point in recent years, fueled by expanded U.S. military support for Taipei, increasingly bold warnings from regional allies, and Chinese military drills that look less like symbolism and more like rehearsal.
Beijing has spent the year steadily increasing pressure on Taiwan through large-scale military exercises, air and naval incursions, and pointed political messaging, while Washington and its allies have responded with sharper deterrence signals that China now openly labels as interference.
#8 Pestilences
The bird flu continues to kill millions of birds all over the globe, various strains of mpox continue to circulate, and the pestilence that erupted in 2020 is still making people sick throughout the world. Meanwhile, some U.S. states are seeing a historic spike in flu cases…
The ‘super flu’ is exploding across the US, with some states seeing more cases than ever before.
The latest CDC data for the week ending December 20 shows positive flu tests are up 53 percent compared to the week prior. Positive tests are up nearly 75 percent from this time last year.
During the week ending December 20, the number of people hospitalized surged 51 percent, and the number already in hospital has nearly doubled compared to the same period last year.
It is just a matter of time before the next great global pandemic arrives, and scientists are warning us that it could come from a multitude of potential directions…
Scientists continue to discover viruses with worrisome characteristics (Chen et al. 2025). Some experts worry about the potential for a leak from pathogen research labs (Palacios, Garcia-Sastre, and Relman 2025), or AI’s ability, in the wrong hands, to help with the creation of a bioweapon (Tjandra 2025). Out in the open, H5N1 avian influenza continues to spread and infect a wide range of animal species—the virus perhaps just a mutation away from becoming a human threat (Lin et al. 2024). Another pathogen, most likely an influenza or another coronavirus is waiting to break out.
#9 Seismic Activity Along The Pacific Ring Of Fire
Seismic activity along the Pacific Ring of Fire increased dramatically in 2025. And as we enter 2026, the state of California is being shaken by significant earthquakes on an almost daily basis.
In fact, we just witnessed a magnitude 4.9 quake that really shook a lot of people up…
A magnitude 4.9 earthquake was recorded near the town of Susanville in Lassen County on Tuesday, according to the U.S. Geological Survey. The quake was centered around nine miles northwest of Susanville at 9:49 p.m. It was downgraded from an initial magnitude of 5.3.
#10 The Greatest Global Food Crisis In Modern History
We are in the midst of the greatest global food crisis in modern history. But don’t just take my word for it.
The following comes from the official website of the UN’s World Food program…
Yes. Right now, there is a global food crisis – the largest one in modern history. Since the United Nations World Food Program’s (WFP) creation in 1963, never has hunger reached such devastating highs. From the eruption of new conflicts and the escalating impacts of the climate crisis to soaring food and fuel costs, millions of people are being driven closer to starvation each day.
Nearly 350 million people around the world are experiencing the most extreme forms of hunger right now. Of those, nearly 49 million people are on the brink of famine. Behind these massive statistics are individual children, women and men suffering from the dire effects of such severe hunger. Malnourished mothers give birth to malnourished babies, passing hunger from one generation to the next. Children’s physical and cognitive growth is stunted. Farmers are unable to grow enough food to provide for their families and communities. Entire towns are forced to leave their homes in search of food.
We really are living in apocalyptic times.
Sadly, many in the western world don’t seem to understand this since we don’t have war or famine on our own soil. But for those that are watching carefully, it is exceedingly clear that we have arrived at a truly unique chapter in human history.
So many incredibly strange things are occurring all around us. On New Year’s Eve, a green meteor dramatically flew past the most important landmark in the center of the United States…
A shimmering meteor was spotted cutting across the sky over the famed Gateway Arch in Missouri hours before revelers rushed to a New Year’s Eve celebration at the monument’s base.
“HEY LOOK, it’s… A meteor saying hi to the Gateway Arch on New Year’s Eve!” The St. Louis Gateway Arch’s X account wrote in a post shared with the breathtaking video.
In the six-second clip, a small white speck appears over one end of the arch. It grows into a green blaze that pulses once before disappearing back into the dark obscurity provided by the predawn sky — right as it reaches the arch’s peak.
The viral video was captured on an Earth Cam situated at Malcolm Martin Memorial Park in east St. Louis. The camera is angled directly towards the city’s skyline all day, every day.
That is something that you don’t see every day. Of course so many weird things have been happening in the heavens over the last couple of years, and most of the population simply doesn’t care.
Most of us have an unbreakable addiction to entertainment at this point, and getting people to focus on anything other than entertainment is becoming exceedingly difficult.
Most people are just going to continue to stare at their screens as the world falls apart all around them, and that is extremely unfortunate.
Maduro kidnapping is a weapon of mass distraction
By Benjamin Fulford January 5, 2026
First of all, we would like to congratulate the US special forces on a brilliant operation carried out in Venezuela with no casualties. By breaking into a heavily guarded compound and grabbing their target, Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro, they have once again proven they are the best of the best. Unfortunately, however, they are lions being led by deranged and stupid Zionist rats. While kidnapping Maduro seems like a brilliant move, geopolitically, it accomplishes nothing because it will get the US no closer to getting any Venezuelan oil.
What the special forces need to do now, if they want to be the good guys, is to go after real-life James Bond villains. They can start with mass murderer Benyamin Netanyahu, who is hiding at a Chabad death cult facility in Florida. Another prime target is war criminal Jean Michel de Rothschild, who is cross-dressing as Brigitte Macron. Here are a few more mass murderers they can grab in order to liberate humanity: Pfizer’s Albert Bourla, Microsoft’s Bill Gates, BlackRock’s Larry Fink, and EU boss Ursula von der Leyen. Get them, and the whole world will recognize you for the good guy heroes you are meant to be.
Of course, there is also the possibility that we are all just watching a movie. As this photo shows, Maduro appears to have completely changed his wardrobe four times in the first 17 hours after being captured. This is the sort of mistake an AI makes when generating images. If the whole thing is fake, then congratulations to Mossad and the P2 freemasons for creating a wonderful weapon of mass distraction. The entire English language news and social media attention span has been grabbed by this show. This has distracted attention from truly historical news events that are unfolding in real time.
First of all, let us explain why grabbing Maduro accomplishes nothing. All it has done is anger the Venezuelans and unify them against Yankee imperialists. The US will not get its hands on Venezuelan oil with this stunt. Without that oil, the US is about to run out of fuel, as we will discuss below.
The fake short and fat “US President Donald Trump,” and his P2 freemason and Chabad handlers are now doubling down and preparing to attack Cuba, Colombia, Iran, and who knows where else. They will fail miserably.
Meanwhile, as the English blogosphere is distracted by their antics, an almost complete control grid of censorship is covering up a Russian ultimatum to NATO, telling them to withdraw to the Elbe, which runs near Berlin, according to Polish intelligence and Russian FSB sources. Russia is also demanding that NATO be disbanded or, at the very least, return to its pre-1997 borders. Russia has a million-man army assembled near the European borders and can march right to the English Channel within weeks, according to multiple military experts.
The Russians are also demanding war crimes tribunals for the mass murder of Ukrainian and Russian civilians, for the spreading of bio-weapons, and for the mass torture and murder of children.
The Russian may also move into Switzerland, where the head of the snake is located. For example, did you know the Swiss-based Red Cross was owned by the Rothschilds? Did you know the Red Cross is a child trafficking, organ trafficking, adrenochrome, and money laundering operation?
Russia has other good reasons to declare war. Since the fake Trump took over in June, the US and NATO have been systematically trying to destroy Russian oil facilities.
As a final straw, the recent drone attack in Russia reported in the Western press as an attack on Russian President Vladimir Putin’s home was actually an attack on a Russian facility designed for command and control of the Russian armed forces in the event of a nuclear war. So, in terms of significance, it’s as if someone attacked Air Force One, the US presidential plane. It’s a special facility, a whole city with open-air and underground structures and all kinds of communication hubs.
So, this was a declaration of war against Russia. The Russians have apparently accepted.
This is why so-called US Secretary of State Marco Rubio is telling US citizens to “IMMEDIATELY leave Russia” in a top-level 4 warning.
This Russian ultimatum is not even the biggest news event being hidden by the Khazarian Mafia’s propaganda machine. According to members of the Rothschild family and Asian secret societies, the Bank for International Settlements, or BIS, the central bank of central banks, is bankrupt. See the content of the story at HERE.
“The Donroe/Monroe Doctrine”: Are Cuba, Colombia And Mexico The Next Targets, Or Will Someone Else Be First Instead?
We are witnessing the most profound shift in U.S. foreign policy that we have seen in decades, and it is going to have enormous implications. President Trump and his team have determined that the entire western hemisphere is our sphere of influence. If somebody is doing things in the western hemisphere that we do not like, we will intervene. If that requires military action, President Trump will pull the trigger. Many have been comparing Trump’s agenda for the western hemisphere to the Monroe Doctrine…
The Monroe Doctrine, named after its architect former President James Monroe in 1823, is one of the most consequential U.S. foreign policy agendas in the 19th century. It began as a largely symbolic document that stated American opposition to new or expanding European involvement in the Americas, after centuries of colonial activity in the region. It would go on to become a significant element of U.S. foreign policy toward the region for decades, though it has been increasingly criticized by academics and policy makers for being used to justify interventions in Latin America.
But President Trump doesn’t think that he is simply adhering to the Monroe Doctrine.
During a press conference over the weekend, Trump said that his actions have “superseded it by a lot”, and as a result many are now referring to his approach as “the Donroe Doctrine”…
In his remarks on Jan. 3, the president cast the doctrine as a continuing tenet of U.S. foreign policy, and said the operation that ousted Venezuela President Nicolás Maduro not only abides by it, but goes a step further. Trump alleged the country was “hosting foreign adversaries” and “acquiring offensive weapons” and accused Venezuela of seizing and selling American oil assets.
“All of these actions were in gross violation of the core principles of American foreign policy, dating back more than two centuries,” Trump said. “All the way back, dated to the Monroe doctrines. And the Monroe Doctrine is a big deal, but we’ve superseded it by a lot, by a real lot. They now call it the Donroe doctrine.”
But will we actually be able to impose our will on the other nations in the western hemisphere?
That is a very good question.
What if some of those other nations don’t like it and start asking for outside help?
This is a very risky game that Trump is playing. After Maduro was grabbed, Trump told the press that we are “going to run” Venezuela for now…
President Trump told the nation the US would now take over running Venezuela, after strongman Nicolas Maduro was captured “in the dead of night.”
“We’re going to run the country until such time as we can do a safe, proper and judicious transition,” Trump said at a press conference from his Mar-a-Lago resort as he provided new details on the stunning military operation.
“We’re going to run it, essentially” through the transition, he said.
That was quite a bold statement.
Trump also warned that U.S. troops may have to be sent in if Venezuelan Vice-President Delcy Rodriguez doesn’t do “what we want”…
Asked by The Post if “US troops [will] be on the ground helping run the country,” Trump said: “No, if Maduro’s vice president — if the vice president does what we want, we won’t have to do that.”
“We’re prepared,” Trump added. “You know, we have a second wave that’s much bigger than the first wave.”
The president said that “we’ve spoken to her [Rodriguez] numerous times, and she understands, she understands.”
Of course it doesn’t appear that Rodriguez intends to be a puppet for the Trump administration.
In fact, one of the first things that she did after becoming acting president was to hold a joint television appearance with other members of the Maduro regime…
Under Venezuela’s constitution, Rodriguez becomes acting president in Maduro’s absence and the country’s top court ordered her to assume the role late Saturday night.
But shortly after Trump’s remarks, Rodriguez appeared on state television flanked by her brother, the head of the national assembly Jorge Rodriguez, Interior Minister Diosdado Cabello and Defense Minister Vladimir Padrino Lopez and said that Maduro remained Venezuela’s only president.
The joint appearance indicated the group that shared power with Maduro is staying united – for now.
Rodriguez is insisting that Maduro is still Venezuela’s legitimate leader, and she is calling for his immediate release…
But the Maduro loyalist, who has helped him maintain his regime for over a decade, has vented her fury at Trump’s capture of the despot, whom she called her nation’s rightful leader.
Rodriguez, who also serves as minister for finance and oil, slammed Maduro’s arrest as ‘an atrocity that violates international law’ and called for his ‘immediate release’.
‘We call on the peoples of the great homeland to remain united, because what was done to Venezuela can be done to anyone,’ she asserted during a National Defense Council session after the US military operation.
When President Trump heard about this, he was not pleased at all.
In fact, he is warning that if she doesn’t fall in line, her fate could be even worse than Maduro’s…
President Donald Trump threatened Venezuela’s new leader with a grim fate far worse than ousted dictator Nicolas Maduro.
Trump, who said just hours after arresting Maduro and his wife in Caracas that he preferred hardline socialist Vice President Delcy Rodriguez as Maduro’s successor rather than the country’s opposition leader, Maria Corina Machado, appeared to change his tune on Sunday morning.
Now, the commander-in-chief says if Rodriguez ‘doesn’t do what’s right, she is going to pay a very big price, probably bigger than Maduro,’ Trump told The Atlantic.
Those that are insisting that Venezuela has already been “liberated” don’t know what they are talking about.
Maduro may be gone, but Maduro’s government is still very much in control. If Trump actually wants full control of Venezuela, more military action will be required.
Meanwhile, there is a lot of speculation about what country in the western hemisphere could be next on Trump’s hit list after Venezuela. When Secretary of State Marco Rubio was asked about Cuba during an appearance on “Meet the Press”, his answer was quite ominous…
During an interview with “Meet the Press,” Rubio sent a warning to the Cuban government, asserting “they’re in a lot of trouble.”
“Is the Cuban government the Trump administration’s next target,” journalist Kristen Welker said.
“Well, the Cuban government is a huge problem. Yeah,” Rubio replied.
“Is that a yes?” Welker asked.
“I think they’re in a lot of trouble, yes,” Rubio added.
Wow.
It definitely sounds like he is saying that regime change in Cuba is very much on the table.
When President Trump was asked about Cuba by the New York Post, he made it very clear that he considers Venezuela and Cuba to be linked…
“Cuba was always very reliant on Venezuela. That’s where they got their money, and they protected Venezuela, but that didn’t work out too well in this case,” Trump told The Post.
“You know, many Cubans lost their lives last night. Did you know that? Many Cubans lost their lives. They were protecting Maduro. That was not a good move.”
Of course it is entirely possible that Colombia could rise to the top of Trump’s hit list, because Colombia sends a lot of drugs to the United States.
On Saturday, Trump’s answer was quite graphic when he was asked about something that Colombian President Gustavo Petro had just said…
President Donald Trump put Colombian President Gustavo Petro on notice during a Saturday press conference, where he also addressed the fallout from the U.S. military operation that captured Venezuelan dictator Nicolás Maduro.
Asked about Petro’s comment that he was “not concerned about anything happening to him in the aftermath of this operation,” Trump responded: “He has cocaine mills. He has factories where he makes cocaine. And yeah, I think I stick by my first statement. He’s making cocaine and they’re sending it into the United States, so he does have to watch his ass.”
If I was Petro, I would be taking extra security precautions from this point forward.
Mexico actually sends far more drugs into the United States than Colombia does, and President Trump is quite frustrated that Mexican President Claudia Sheinbaum will not allow the U.S. military to take action against drug cartels on Mexican soil…
When asked about Mexico by Fox’s Griff Jenkins, Trump responded that the cartels have more power than its democratically elected left-wing president, Claudia Sheinbaum, whom Trump clashed with early in MAGA 2.0 over immigration and the renaming of the Gulf of Mexico.
Trump said that Sheinbaum, 63, has rejected offers of American military aid to take action against the cartels, claiming she has told him, “No, no, no, Mr. President. No, no, no, please.”
But even though Sheinbaum is ruling out U.S. military operations on Mexican soil, Trump is suggesting that he might go ahead anyway, because “something’s going to have to be done with Mexico”…
Trump then hinted that he might order action in Mexico anyway, claiming that drugs coming over the southern border are killing Americans by the hundreds of thousands.
“Something’s going to have to be done with Mexico,” he said.
It looks like our military is going to be busy for the foreseeable future.
On top of everything else, members of the Trump administration have been openly talking about taking control of Greenland once again…
“We do need Greenland, absolutely. We need it for defense,” Trump told The Atlantic in an interview published Jan. 4, describing the island as reportedly “surrounded by Russian and Chinese ships.”
The same day, Katie Miller, the wife of White House deputy chief of staff Stephen Miller, posted a photo of Greenland covered with the American flag. Above it, Miller wrote “SOON.”
Denmark’s ambassador to the United States, Jesper Moeller Soerensen, responded, saying: “We expect full respect for the territorial integrity of the Kingdom of Denmark.”
Imagine the uproar that would be created if China or Russia was talking like this.
We really are living at a time of wars and rumors of wars, and global events are starting to get really crazy. According to one military blog, “multiple C-17 Globemaster III transport aircraft” just stopped in the UK as they were on their way to Europe…
Flight tracking data shows an increase in U.S. Air Force strategic airlift activity, including multiple C-17 Globemaster III transport aircraft arriving at RAF Fairford, alongside the arrival of two AC-130 gunships at RAF Mildenhall. Approximately ten C-17 movements have been observed over a short period, with most flights originating from Fort Campbell, Kentucky, and Hunter Army Airfield, Georgia.
While MH-47 Chinook helicopters have not been directly observed at RAF Fairford, several of the C-17 movements are assessed to have transported U.S. Army rotary-wing assets. The aircraft types involved, combined with departure locations and routing patterns, are consistent with the movement of special operations aviation units. Open-source imagery and flight data suggest likely involvement of assets associated with the 160th Special Operations Aviation Regiment.
We saw similar movements just before the U.S. bombed Iran during the 12 Day War.
President Trump warned Iran that the U.S. would strike if the Iranians started killing peaceful protesters. And it is being reported that quite a few protesters in Iran have been shot dead. So is Iran the next one on the list to feel Trump’s wrath?
Only time will tell. But whoever it is, I have a feeling that we won’t have to wait too long to see who Trump bombs next.
U.S. Military Strike and Maduro’s Capture
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
- On January 3, 2026, the United States conducted a surprise military operation against Venezuela. The strikes targeted Caracas and other Venezuelan locations in a pre-dawn assault involving significant air and potentially ground assets, according to multiple reports. LiveNOW+1
- President Nicolás Maduro and his wife, Cilia Flores, were captured during this operation and subsequently transported to the United States. AP News
- Maduro and Flores arrived in the United States and have been taken into custody to face federal charges, including narco-terrorism and related crimes, based on unsealed indictments. AP News
- U.S. President Donald Trump publicly announced that the U.S. would “run” Venezuela temporarily and expected to tap into Venezuelan oil infrastructure to bolster energy exports and national interests. AP News
This marks an unprecedented military intervention in Latin America and the most direct U.S. action against a sovereign government leader since the 1989 Panama operation. The Guardian
Political and Leadership Aftermath in Venezuela
- Venezuelan Vice President Delcy Rodríguez has been declared acting president under the Venezuelan constitution after Maduro’s removal, although she and other government officials continue to assert that Maduro remains the rightful leader. Wikipedia
- The interim government in Caracas claims unity behind Maduro and strongly condemns the U.S. actions as an illegal kidnapping and violation of sovereignty. Reuters
- International reactions vary widely: Germany and other European voices have called for a political solution and respect for international law, while the Brazilian government condemned the U.S. strikes as crossing an “unacceptable line.” Reuters+1
Legal and International Implications
- U.S. officials are framing the intervention as part of a decades-long “war on drugs” and efforts to bring Maduro to justice for alleged narcotics trafficking and related conspiracies. Wikipedia
- Legal experts and international law scholars have raised serious concerns, noting that the strike and capture of a sitting head of state on foreign soil without congressional authorization may violate the U.N. Charter and established norms of state sovereignty. LiveNOW
- Members of the U.S. Congress from both parties have publicly criticized the operation for bypassing legislative oversight and called it an act of war that sets a troubling precedent. The Nation
Global Reactions and Regional Stability
- The United Nations has been called upon to address the situation, with some international leaders questioning the legality of the intervention and urging de-escalation. AP News
- The crisis has heightened tensions in the region, with neighboring countries monitoring potential refugee flows and geopolitical spillover. Reuters
- Human rights groups are reporting civilian casualties and infrastructure damage, especially around Caracas, although exact figures vary by source. The Guardian
Summary of Key Facts
✔️ U.S. military strikes on Venezuela occurred early January 3, 2026. LiveNOW
✔️ Nicolás Maduro and his wife were captured and extradited to the U.S. to face federal charges. AP News
✔️ The Trump administration says it will oversee Venezuela temporarily. AP News
✔️ Venezuelan officials and many global leaders condemn the action as a breach of international law. Reuters
✔️ Vice President Delcy Rodríguez is currently acting president per Venezuelan constitutional order. Wikipedia
In A Desperate Attempt To Stop The Bleeding, A Conspiracy To Force The Price Of Silver Down Is Unfolding Right In Front Of Our Eyes
They aren’t even trying to pretend to hide what they are doing. Everyone knows that the meteoric rise in the price of silver in 2025 has put an immense amount of stress on certain financial institutions. Of course nobody is publicly confirming how much damage has been done, but it must be pretty severe if CME Group is taking such extreme measures to force the price of silver down. For the second time in less than a week, CME Group has abruptly raised margin requirements on precious metals futures…
Gold and silver prices lost ground on Wednesday as investors booked profits after a historic annual rally and exchange operator CME Group hiked the margins on precious metal futures for the second time in the space of a week.
They probably thought that it was best to pull a stunt like this during the holidays while less people are paying attention.
A statement was released by CME Group which said that this latest move to hike margin requirements was done “to ensure adequate collateral coverage”…
CME Group, one of the world’s largest trading floors for commodities, said Tuesday that margins for gold, silver, platinum and palladium would increase again after the close of business Wednesday.
It said in a statement that the decision was made “as per the normal review of market volatility to ensure adequate collateral coverage.”
Give me a break.
We all know why this was done.
What we are witnessing is literally a conspiracy to force the price of silver down. They knew that when they suddenly increased margin requirements, it would create a squeeze and force precious metals prices lower…
One reason behind recent declines in silver, including the stark fall on Wednesday, is changes to trading rules implemented by exchange operator CME Group, which hosts widely traded silver futures contracts.
Traders operating in CME’s derivatives market must put down cash to support their trades, with the exact amount or margin required varying. Amid volatile trading, the CME raised margin requirements effective Monday for precious metals including silver, and announced that margin requirements would rise again after Wednesday.
If traders cannot put up more cash, their positions are often forcibly closed, or sold, typically at unfavorable prices. This can cause a wave of selling that pushes prices down further, taking some of the shine out of silver—for now.
I am so disgusted by this.
The first margin hike didn’t get the results that they wanted, and so they did it again. Shame on them. We are supposed to be at least pretending that we have some semblance of a free market system left.
But even after this desperate attempt to stop the bleeding, the price of silver is still up more than 140 percent in 2025…
Even after sharp declines on Wednesday, silver prices have gained more than 140% this year and remain relatively close to all-time highs above $82 reached on Sunday.
And most analysts are still projecting that the price of silver will continue to rise in 2026 because the fundamentals for silver are exceedingly favorable…
Yet there are also fundamentals behind silver’s remarkable rally this year.
The precious metal, like gold—up almost two-thirds in 2025 to record levels—is considered a store of value and a hedge against the dollar, which weakened this year amid falling U.S. interest rates.
Silver also benefits from industrial demand typical of the current moment, including uses in solar panels, electric vehicles, and data centers powering artificial intelligence.
If the AI boom were to burst, that could change the outlook for silver.
But right now the AI revolution is steaming ahead. And the U.S. dollar is probably going to continue to get even weaker in 2026.
In 2025, the U.S. dollar index has fallen by nearly 10 percent…
The dollar continues to face a challenging backdrop in 2026 following this year’s sharp depreciation, Charles Stanley’s Abbas Owainati says in a note. The dollar’s fall this year reflects concerns over long-term fiscal sustainability, an erosion of the currency’s safe haven status amid unpredictable policy, increased currency hedging by non-U.S. investors and changes in capital flows. The dollar could stay under pressure next year as the Federal Reserve is expected to cut interest rates further, he says. A weaker dollar could support emerging markets equities by easing external debt burdens, improving capital flows and boosting local currency returns, he says. The DXY dollar index trades flat at 98.008. It has fallen nearly 10% in the year to date.
The Trump administration doesn’t mind that the dollar has been getting weaker because it makes our exports more appealing to the rest of the world. But when the U.S. dollar gets weaker, our purchasing power goes down.
A weaker dollar is one of the primary reasons why we find ourselves in an affordability crisis that never seems to end.
So if the U.S. dollar continues to lose value next year that will not be good news for millions of deeply struggling American households, but it will be great news for silver investors. In addition, Martin Armstrong says that there are a number of geopolitical factors that will help move the price of silver higher during the months ahead…
When it comes to metal, Armstrong says, “People who know war and crisis are coming are buying metals. . .. We have creative destruction. You have AI coming in and you have unemployment rising and you have GDP rising. . .. You have shortages in commodities on top of this. . .. Then you have geopolitical nonsense. Anthony Blinken (Secretary of State in the Biden Administration) put sanctions on Russia. Look at the metals. What did it do? It cut off the supply of gold, silver and platinum coming out of Russia. Now, you have China putting in a ban on exporting silver as of January 1, 2026. This is rather important. China controls about 60% of the supply of silver. . .. This is one of the reasons why silver jumped up dramatically. This is a perfect storm. On top of all this, NATO is there only for war. That is it. . .. Socrates is still saying Europe will lose badly in a war with Russia.”
Armstrong sees a bull market for gold, silver and other metals for years ahead. One big reason is shortages in the metals. Armstrong says, “I don’t see these shortages going away. The bull market is more likely to go into 2032. It will be volatile, and then you’ve got war coming. Once you get into war, prices are going to go up even more. It’s all a mess. This is a perfect storm.”
Yes, we certainly are facing “a perfect storm”, and I am entirely convinced that the year in front of us is going to be absolutely nuts.
In the short-term, there will be plenty of opportunities for savvy investors to capitalize on all of the global chaos that we are witnessing. Some people will make a lot of money, and of course others will lose a lot of money. But in the end, the entire system is going to come crashing down all around us.
Venezuela’s Silver Goes Dark: 847 Tons Missing in a Six-Hour Window
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Status: Unverified / Developing Intelligence Signal
Reports circulating in alternative intelligence and energy-security channels claim that Venezuela’s silver mining and storage facilities experienced a sudden blackout, during which as much as 847 metric tons of silver allegedly disappeared in a six-hour window. According to these accounts, the material was removed before the power failure fully cascaded across the facilities—suggesting pre-positioning rather than chaos.
At the center of the claims are multiple late-night cargo flights, including large Russian-made Antonov aircraft, with the first reportedly lifting off around 2:47 AM, followed by additional flights linked to Chinese state aviation assets. In total, 11 outbound flights are alleged to have departed during the narrow timeframe.
No official confirmation has been issued by the Venezuelan government, international mining authorities, or customs agencies. However, the pattern described—timing, aircraft type, and coordination—has raised eyebrows among analysts familiar with resource security, sanctions evasion, and asymmetric economic warfare.
Why the Scenario, If True, Matters
Even unverified, the structure of the allegation is what draws attention.
This is not described as looting, corruption, or internal theft. The claims point instead to:
- Coordinated airlift operations
- State-level logistics
- Advance knowledge of infrastructure shutdown
- Strategic extraction of hard assets
If accurate, this would represent resource warfare, not opportunism.
Silver is not merely a commodity. It is a dual-use strategic metal, critical to:
- Electronics and semiconductors
- Solar and energy infrastructure
- Military and aerospace systems
- Monetary reserves and industrial hedging
In an era of sanctions pressure, de-dollarization efforts, and supply-chain weaponization, physical control of strategic metals has become increasingly important to state actors.
Why Russia and China Are Mentioned
The commentary accompanying the report notes that both Russia and China have long histories of asymmetric operations, particularly where:
- Physical assets are moved instead of money
- Transactions bypass Western financial systems
- Resource control substitutes for currency access
Russia has used hard-asset extraction and transport in conflict zones and allied states. China has deployed state-linked logistics and aviation assets globally to secure minerals, rare earths, and metals under long-term strategic agreements.
That does not confirm involvement—but it explains why analysts do not immediately dismiss the possibility.
The Timing Signal
One of the most notable elements of the claim is sequence:
The silver reportedly moved before the blackout, not during it.
If true, that implies:
- Prior intelligence or coordination
- Internal access or authorization
- A planned operation rather than crisis exploitation
Blackouts normally create opportunity for theft. Here, the blackout allegedly followed extraction—suggesting it may have been cover, collateral, or coincidental.
What Is Missing (And Why That Matters)
At present, key confirmations are absent:
- No satellite imagery released
- No customs or flight-tracking confirmations published
- No statements from mining operators or insurers
- No independent verification of tonnage
That gap is significant. Extraordinary claims require evidence. Until such evidence emerges, the story must be treated as unverified intelligence, not established fact.
But intelligence professionals will note this:
Some operations are never meant to be publicly confirmed.
The Bigger Pattern
Whether this specific incident proves accurate or not, it fits a larger, observable global pattern:
- Hard assets replacing financial instruments
- Strategic metals moving quietly between aligned states
- Energy, minerals, and logistics becoming tools of power
- Economic conflict shifting from markets to material control
In that context, the idea of rapid, coordinated extraction of physical resources is not far-fetched—it is increasingly expected.
Bottom Line
There is no verified proof—yet—that 847 tons of Venezuelan silver were airlifted out in a coordinated Russian-Chinese operation.
But the scenario described is plausible enough, and strategically consistent enough, that it cannot be dismissed outright.
If confirmed, it would signal:
- A major breach of Venezuelan resource sovereignty
- Escalation of covert economic warfare
- Accelerating fragmentation of the global resource system
Until then, this story remains what it is now:
An unverified but serious signal worth watching—because the world is entering a phase where wars are fought quietly, with metals, logistics, and silence.
A Crisis Inside the FBI: Resignations, Suppressed Evidence, and a Senate Confrontation
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
Testimony before the Senate Judiciary Committee this week exposed what appears to be one of the most serious internal credibility crises in modern Federal Bureau of Investigation history. During questioning, FBI Director Kash Patel stated under oath that he did not know how many FBI agents had resigned in connection with internal fallout from the Jeffrey Epstein investigation.
That claim immediately came under scrutiny.
Seated across from Patel, Senator Cory Booker held a copy of the FBI’s own Human Resources report—clearly marked “PRIORITY: URGENT”—which, according to Booker, had been sent directly to Patel’s personal email just five days earlier. The document outlined a wave of resignations that senior lawmakers described as unprecedented in scale and significance.
340 Agents Gone — Not Retired, Not Reassigned, But Resigned
According to the HR report referenced in the hearing, 340 FBI agents resigned outright. These were not routine departures, retirements, or lateral transfers. They were voluntary exits framed internally as protest resignations.
The experience level of those leaving deepened concern:
- 89 agents had more than 10 years of service
- 34 were senior agents
- 12 were division chiefs
These were career investigators—individuals deeply embedded in the Bureau’s operational and leadership structure, not junior or probationary personnel.
A Consistent Allegation Across Resignation Letters
What elevated the situation from staffing issue to institutional alarm was a pattern reportedly found in the resignation letters themselves. According to the summary cited during the hearing, every letter referenced the same concern: that evidence related to the Epstein case was being suppressed to protect powerful individuals.
While the contents of individual letters have not been publicly released in full, lawmakers described the language as strikingly consistent—suggesting a shared perception among departing agents that investigative integrity had been compromised at a high level.
If accurate, this would indicate not a single whistleblower or isolated grievance, but a systemic loss of confidence inside the Bureau.
The Testimony Gap
The most contentious moment came when Patel maintained that he was unaware of the scale of the resignations, despite the existence of the HR report and its alleged direct delivery to his email days earlier.
Critics argue this creates a dilemma with no easy explanation:
- Either the FBI Director was not briefed on a mass resignation event involving senior leadership, or
- He was briefed and denied knowledge under oath, raising serious questions about candor to Congress
Neither scenario reassures lawmakers tasked with oversight.
Why This Matters Beyond the Epstein Case
This issue extends far beyond one investigation.
The FBI’s authority rests on public trust, internal morale, and the belief—among agents and citizens alike—that investigations are conducted without fear or favor. A coordinated resignation by hundreds of experienced agents, if rooted in perceived political or elite protection, signals a breakdown of institutional legitimacy.
History shows that intelligence and law-enforcement agencies do not fracture quietly. When veteran personnel leave en masse, it is often because internal reporting channels have failed and confidence in reform has collapsed.
An Unresolved Reckoning
As of now, the FBI has not publicly released the full HR report or the resignation letters. The Department of Justice has not announced an independent review. And Patel has not amended or clarified his testimony.
What remains is a widening credibility gap—between internal records and public statements, between agents and leadership, and between congressional oversight and executive accountability.
Whether this episode leads to formal investigations, document releases, or further resignations will determine whether this moment becomes a turning point or simply another buried chapter in a long-running controversy.
But one thing is clear:
Institutions do not lose hundreds of experienced professionals without a reason.
And reasons, once exposed, rarely stay contained.
Venezuela Under Attack – Explosions Rock Caracas – MADURO CAPTURED?!?!
Hal Turner World January 03, 2026
At about 1:15 AM eastern time this morning, January 3, reports began flooding in claiming multiple explosions taking place at and near an air base in Caracas, Venezuela.
The reports specifically claimed Miranda Air Force Base was attacked by drones, at least (5) explosions. Other reports claimed Residents heard explosions near Fort Tiuna in the southern suburbs of Caracas.
President Nicolas Maduro told Venezuelans to keep calm, that there were many secondary explosions due to ongoing drone attacks. He also said these attacks were being carried out by new tech jets, previously unknown, very silent, and were not heavy ordinance, but more for show.
Social media is lighting up with images and video:
#BREAKING: Air raid sirens sound across Caracas, Venezuela! #Venezuela pic.twitter.com/wASgJWEgJ4
— Intel Net (@IntelNet) January 3, 2026
Videos muestran bombardeos y explosiones en #Caracas #Venezuela esta madrugada del 3 de enero de 2026 https://t.co/Jv0CT2G3Iz Se perciben sobre la base aérea de La Carlota, en Caracas pic.twitter.com/VZZwBsZ4lu
— La Prensa Panamá (@prensacom) January 3, 2026
CHINOOK HELICOPTERS OVER VENEZUELA CAPITAL – INVASION TROOPS?
At least SEVEN (7) presumably U.S. Chinook Helicopters (Double-prop rotors) have been video recorded over the Capital city of Caracas. These helicopters would normally carry invasion troops.
🚨 ÚLTIMA HORA
Se visualizan las aeronaves estadounidenses en territorio venezolano. pic.twitter.com/LUHLXp9e1e
— Emmanuel Rincón (@EmmaRincon) January 3, 2026
MADURO CAPTURED? — YES!
Reports are now widely coming in claiming Venezuelan President Nicholas Maduro was “captured.”
UPDATE 8:28 AM EST — CONFIRMED! Nicholas Maduro — and his wife — “Arrested” by US Forces, and flown out of the country!
CONGRESS REPORTEDLY NOTIFIED OF VENEZUELA STRIKES AFTER THE FACT
The Trump administration reportedly notified congressional leadership about the Venezuela operation to capture Maduro after it was already done.
The justification? Article II of the Constitution, which makes the president commander-in-chief of the military.
Secretary of State Marco Rubio told Senator Mike Lee the kinetic action was legal under Article II because it protected U.S. personnel executing Maduro’s arrest warrant.
This breaks with tradition. Previous administrations typically notified congressional leaders before military operations.
White House Chief of Staff Susie Wiles previously said in an interview that strikes in Venezuela would require congressional approval. They apparently didn’t get it beforehand. So Congress got a heads-up after U.S. forces already struck another country, captured its leader, and flew him out.
The legal argument is protecting arrest warrant executors, not seeking regime change.
Whether that holds up remains to be seen.
VENEZUELA FOREIGN MINISTER CONFIRMS
Venezuelan Foreign Minister Yván Gil stated in a telephone interview with Telesur that, following the US attack on Venezuela and the arrest of President Nicolás Maduro and First Lady Cilia Flores, he maintained communications with various officials from allied countries.
“This morning I received calls from the foreign ministries of Colombia, Brazil, South Africa, Namibia, and Russia . We have received multiple expressions of support; we have received calls from all over,” Gil stated this Saturday.
The official stated that Venezuela will denounce the incident before the United Nations. “We are facing an action unlike anything we have seen in Latin America for many years. Venezuela will exercise its right to defense in all international forums, activating all available mechanisms,” he said.
He also mentioned that the sites affected by bombings include airports, military and civilian facilities.
“As Vice President Delcy Rodríguez has reported, we have been victims of a cowardly attack by the United States, by the government of Donald Trump, who has taken a false step by bombing the capital city, the port of La Guaira, by bombing airports and other civilian and military installations, and above all a violation of international law,” he added.
U.S. ATTORNEY GENERAL
US Attorney General Pam Bondi says Maduro has been indicted in New York on drugs and weapons charges. Earlier, US Secretary of State Marco Rubio told a GOP senator Maduro will stand trial in the US and that he anticipates no further action.
- Venezuelan Vice President Delcy Rodríguez said the government is unaware of the whereabouts of Maduro and first lady Cilia Flores, adding the US attack has cost the lives of officials, military personnel and civilians across the country.
ARREST WARRANT OUT OF NEW YORK CITY 2020
The arrest warrant against Nicolas Maduro by the southern district of NY (SDNY) goes back all the way to 2020.
The U.S. government indicted Nicolás Maduro in 2020 on federal narcoterrorism and drug-trafficking charges — part of a broader case alleging that Maduro and several current and former Venezuelan officials conspired to traffic cocaine into the United States and commit related offenses.
That indictment was unsealed in the United States District Court for the **Southern District of New York (SDNY)**, a prominent federal trial court in Manhattan. U.S. prosecutors in SDNY brought these charges — meaning any arrest warrant issued under those charges would originate from this federal court.
Below is the news release from the year 2020 announcing Maduro had been Indicted:
This situation, while unprecedented, provides an interesting argument for President Trump. Congress may say THEY must authorize the use of force against another country BUT . . . .
President Trump can rightly say he was executing an Arrest Warrant, issued by a federal court, and a President does not need Congressional permission to do that, because it is an inherent Executive Power under Article 2 of the Constitution!
Federal Reserve Injects $105.993 Billion Into Overnight Repo — A Serious Warning Signal
Federal Reserve data released January 1, 2026 confirms that $105.993 billion was injected into the U.S. banking system on the night of December 31, 2025 through its Overnight Repo Facility—a mechanism explicitly designed as a lender-of-last-resort liquidity backstop.
Hal Turner Nation first highlighted the figure, but the significance extends well beyond any single outlet. This is not routine liquidity management. This is emergency stabilization behavior.
What the Overnight Repo Facility Really Means
The Overnight Repo Facility exists for one reason:
to prevent the banking system from seizing up when private lending fails.
Banks turn to this facility only when:
- Interbank lending tightens or freezes
- Collateral confidence erodes
- Counterparty risk spikes
- Liquidity mismatches threaten overnight solvency
In simple terms: banks that cannot borrow elsewhere borrow from the Fed—temporarily exchanging high-quality collateral (usually Treasuries) for cash to survive the night.
When usage surges to this level, it signals systemic stress, not isolated trouble.
Why the $105.993B Figure Is Alarming
To put this in historical perspective:
- Pre-March 2020 (pre-COVID)
Typical repo injections hovered around $60–90 billion during stressed periods. - 2008 Financial Crisis (Lehman collapse)
Emergency injections were closer to $15–20 billion at comparable stages. - December 31, 2025
$105.993 billion — on a single overnight operation.
This exceeds pre-pandemic stress levels and dwarfs early-stage 2008 interventions.
And critically:
This occurred at year-end, when banks are already engaging in balance-sheet window-dressing and regulatory reporting maneuvers—conditions that normally reduce, not increase, repo demand.
What This Strongly Suggests
This level of intervention implies one or more of the following are already occurring:
- Hidden liquidity shortfalls at major financial institutions
- Counterparty mistrust within the interbank lending market
- Collateral valuation stress, especially Treasuries used in leverage trades
- Derivative margin pressure forcing sudden cash needs
- Foreign or offshore funding strain leaking into U.S. markets
In short: something broke—or nearly did—behind the scenes.
The public does not see which banks accessed the funds, but history shows these moments often precede:
- Credit tightening
- Sudden bank failures or forced mergers
- Market volatility spikes
- Emergency policy announcements
Why the Fed Is Acting Now
The Fed’s objective is not to “fix” the problem—it is to buy time.
By flooding overnight liquidity, the Fed attempts to:
- Prevent cascading defaults
- Maintain confidence through silence
- Delay recognition of losses
- Avoid panic during thin holiday markets
This is containment, not resolution.
Liquidity does not repair insolvency.
It only postpones its exposure.
Bottom Line
A $105.993 billion overnight repo injection is not a routine operation.
It is a distress flare.
When banks require this level of emergency funding just to make it through the night, the system is no longer operating on trust—it is operating on life support.
Whether the next phase is a controlled unwind or a disorderly collapse depends on what broke, who is exposed, and how long confidence can be maintained.
But one thing is clear:
This is not normal.
This is not healthy.
And this is not over.
Latest Oil Tanker Maritime Tensions News (U.S.–Russia–China–Venezuela)
Written for the Great Awakening Report | January 2026
U.S. Seized Tankers in December
The United States seized at least two oil tankers off the coast of Venezuela in December as part of an expanded effort to enforce sanctions on Venezuelan oil exports. Those vessels — Skipper and Centuries — were intercepted in international waters amid announcements of a broader U.S. “blockade” or quarantine of tanker traffic tied to Venezuelan crude and sanctions-evasion networks. Reuters+1
- Caracas has denounced these moves as acts of piracy and vowed to bring complaints to the UN Security Council. Al Jazeera
- Beijing’s foreign ministry also called the seizures “a serious violation of international law,” pointing to the Centuries vessel carrying crude destined for China. Reuters
Tanker “Bella 1” — Fleeing, Painting a Flag, Escalating Tensions
A third ship, the Bella 1, is at the center of a high-stakes maritime pursuit:
- The tanker was part of the U.S. sanctions list for transporting Iranian-linked petroleum and was being actively pursued by the U.S. Coast Guard after refusing to stop in the Caribbean Sea. Reuters
- In a dramatic twist, the crew painted a Russian flag on the hull and radioed claims of Russian protection in an apparent attempt to evade seizure — and the ship has been re-registered under a new name in Russia’s Maritime Register. gCaptain+1
- Russia has formally asked the United States to cease its pursuit, delivering diplomatic protests to the U.S. State Department. Reuters
- Tracking data suggests the vessel may now be heading northeast into the North Atlantic, potentially toward Russia, after dodging U.S. interception efforts. New York Post
Broader U.S. Sanctions & Enforcement
In conjunction with these maritime actions, the U.S. expanded sanctions on Venezuelan oil companies and tanker operators tied to the Maduro government — designating multiple firms and vessels as blocked property. AP News
U.S. officials frame the crackdowns as part of efforts to cut illicit revenue that they say funds narcotics trafficking and criminal networks; the Maduro government calls them unlawful and sovereign theft. AP News
Geopolitical Impact & Context
Russia and China Responses
- Russia’s diplomatic protest over the chase of a vessel it claims as its own underscores rising friction over maritime law, sanctions enforcement, and energy export routes. Reuters
- China has publicly criticized the U.S. seizures, particularly of a tanker allegedly destined for Chinese refiners, reflecting Beijing’s stance against unilateral sanctions. Reuters
Legal and Security Dimensions
- The U.S. claims the tankers were flying false flags or stateless status when first approached, giving it legal grounds for boarding under international law, though adversaries challenge that interpretation. gCaptain
- This evolving incident highlights strains in global maritime governance, especially when sanctions regimes, geopolitical rivalries, and energy supply interests intersect.
Key Takeaways
1️⃣ Two tankers already seized by U.S. forces as part of sanction enforcement. Reuters
2️⃣ A third tanker (Bella 1) is actively evading U.S. pursuit, now claiming Russian identity and complicating the situation. Windward
3️⃣ Russia and China are protesting U.S. actions, elevating this from a regional enforcement campaign to an international diplomatic issue. Reuters+1
4️⃣ Additional sanctions and maritime pressure continue, with broader implications for oil markets and U.S.–Latin America relations. AP News
China Silver Exports Halted – License Now Needed to Export 70% of Global Silver
Hal Turner World January 01, 2026
As January 1 arrived in Beijing, a new law requiring and export License to ship Silver, came into effect in China. This affects a full seventy percent (70%) of Global refined Silver.
The next 72 hours will define the future of silver. As the Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME) (i.e. COMEX) paper games collapses under the weight of physical reality, I anticipate:
- A violent rebound in silver prices as the market recognizes the true scarcity.
- A physical default scenario, or extreme delivery delays on the COMEX.
- Explosive gains in unhedged, high-quality silver mining and royalty companies as their asset values re-rate to true physical prices.
CME TALKS “FORCE MAJEURE”
CME Group issued a temporary rule change regarding force majeure conditions on December 30, 2025, to address specific market disruptions. This change is part of their ongoing efforts to manage trading conditions effectively.From fxnewsgroup.com and cmegroup.com
Temporary Rule Change for Force Majeure Conditions
Overview of the Rule Change
On December 30, 2025, CME Group announced a temporary rule change regarding force majeure conditions. This change is significant for market participants as it addresses unforeseen circumstances that may disrupt trading activities.
Key Details
• Purpose: The rule change aims to provide clarity and guidance on how force majeure events are handled, ensuring that all market participants understand their rights and obligations during such events.
• Scope: The temporary rules apply to various contracts traded on CME Group’s platforms, impacting both futures and options markets.
• Implementation: The changes are effective immediately and will remain in place until further notice, allowing for flexibility in response to ongoing market conditions.
Implications for Traders
• Risk Management: Traders should review their risk management strategies in light of these changes, as they may affect contract performance and settlement processes.
• Compliance: It is essential for all participants to stay informed about the specifics of the rule change to ensure compliance and avoid potential penalties.
This temporary adjustment reflects CME Group’s commitment to maintaining market integrity and providing a clear framework for handling unexpected disruptions.
What is Force Majeure?
Force majeure (French for “superior force”) refers to unforeseeable, uncontrollable events (like natural disasters, wars, pandemics, or strikes) that prevent parties from fulfilling contractual obligations, allowing them to be excused from liability under a contract clause that specifically lists or covers such events, allocating risk for disruptions beyond normal business control.
Key Aspects:
Unforeseeable & Uncontrollable: The event must be beyond reasonable anticipation and control of the parties involved.
Contractual Clause: It’s usually a specific provision in a contract, defining what events qualify (e.g., flood, fire, pandemic, acts of government) and the consequences.
Excuse for Non-Performance: It frees parties from liability for failing to meet obligations due to these extraordinary circumstances.
Distinction from “Act of God”: While related, “acts of God” typically refer to purely natural events, whereas force majeure can also cover man-made disasters like riots or strikes.
Hal Turner Personal Opinion
It seems to me, just my opinion, that the CME talking “force majeure” means they already know what is coming and there is no way to head it off. I personally believe – again just my opinion — we are about to witness carnage in the financial markets, the likes of which have never been seen before. Have cash money in your possession just in case.
Is Regime Change Here? Protesters Call For The Death Of Ayatollah Khamenei As Violence Erupts All Over Iran
Is this the end for the tyrannical regime of Ayatollah Khamenei and his minions? During the fifth day of protests in Iran, violence erupted in multiple major cities, and protesters were shouting for Khamenei to be killed. But I wouldn’t get too excited yet. Demanding regime change is easy. Bringing it about is something else altogether. Khamenei and his minions have a lot more guns than the protesters do, and the current regime will never step aside willingly. So those that are desperately hoping for regime change in Iran should not count their chickens before they hatch.
But without a doubt, what we are witnessing in Iran at this moment is truly extraordinary.
On Thursday, it was being reported that violent clashes had erupted in Tehran, Marvdasht, Kermanshah, Delfan, Arak and Lordegan…
Protests in Iran entered a fifth consecutive day on Thursday, with demonstrations and clashes reported across Tehran and multiple provincial cities as authorities, state-linked media and rights groups cited additional deaths overnight.
According to Reuters, several people have been killed since the unrest escalated, based on reports from Iranian media and human rights groups. Iranian authorities have confirmed at least one death, while other fatalities have been reported in different provinces.
Opposition group National Council of Resistance of Iran (NCRI) told Fox News Digital in a statement that protests and street clashes continued Thursday morning in Tehran and in cities including Marvdasht, Kermanshah, Delfan and Arak, and claimed that two protesters were killed by direct fire in Lordegan. Fox News Digital could not independently verify the deaths.
According to Newsweek, at least six people have died in the violence so far…
At least six people were killed Thursday as demonstrations over Iran’s worsening economy spread into rural provinces, marking the first deaths since the unrest began. Authorities said five protesters and one member of the security forces died in clashes in Lordegan and Azna, where government buildings were damaged and police responded with tear gas.
Is this the moment when freedom-loving people in Iran will rise up and overthrow their oppressors?
In the city of Kouhdasht, a member of Iran’s security forces was killed and 13 others were injured by protesters that became violent…
Earlier Thursday, state television reported that a member of Iran’s security forces was killed overnight during protests in the western city of Kouhdasht. “A 21-year-old member of the Basij from the city of Kouhdasht was killed last night by rioters while defending public order,” the channel said, citing Said Pourali, the deputy governor of Lorestan Province.
The Basij are a volunteer paramilitary force linked to Iran’s Revolutionary Guards, the ideological branch of the Islamic republic’s army. Pourali said that “during the demonstrations in Kouhdasht, 13 police officers and Basij members were injured by stone throwing”.
Will incidents such as this inspire other Iranians to rise up? Or will the protests just sort of fizzle out in the days ahead?
Only time will tell. But at this moment, it seems like anything may be possible.
As Mario Nawfal aptly stated in a lengthy post on X, the regime in Iran “is under pressure from all directions”…
Iran is grinding to a halt. Businesses, universities, and government offices closed across 21 of 31 provinces Wednesday as protests fueled by economic collapse entered their fourth day.
In Fasa, demonstrators stormed the governor’s office. IRGC forces opened fire. Military helicopters flew overhead to intimidate residents.
Video footage shows crowds chanting “Death to Khamenei!” and “Death to the Dictator!” Bazaar merchants in Kermanshah confronted security forces shouting “Dishonorable!”
The economic crisis is severe: inflation, currency collapse, declining living standards. President Pezeshkian just appointed a new central bank chief, acknowledging the role is “extremely difficult and complex.” Khamenei’s response: appoint a hardline IRGC commander as deputy commander in chief of the Revolutionary Guards.
This comes as Trump threatens to “eradicate” any Iranian rebuilding of missiles or nuclear programs, and the U.S. pursues an Iranian-linked oil tanker in the Atlantic.
The regime is under pressure from all directions.
He is right. Khamenei and his thugs are under siege.
So how will they respond? In a subsequent post, Nawfal explained that Iranian security forces are stretched extremely thin right now…
It’s not just one angry crowd anymore.
Now it’s over 50 cities rising up at once, and the regime can’t keep up. Cops and soldiers are being stretched so thin they might as well be taking attendance, not controlling riots.
What started as outrage over soaring prices and brutal crackdowns has turned into something way bigger. People are done whispering and now shouting in the streets, even in places that used to back the regime.
In the past, most Iranians were deathly afraid of speaking out against the regime.
But now many are publicly shouting anti-regime slogans and are not afraid to call for Khamenei to be killed…
In the videos, protesters are seen chanting anti-regime slogans and confronting security forces in crowded streets.
Footage includes scenes of screaming and apparent gunfire, with demonstrators throwing objects and shouting, “Death to the Dictator” and “Proud Arakis, support, support.”
Additional footage shared by MEK shows crowds chanting, “Death to Khamenei” and “Shame on you, shame on you!” as anger appears to spread across the country, with a particular focus on bazaar-led protests in Tehran.
If the regime in Iran is going to be removed from within, this is probably the best opportunity that we will see.
Sensing that the time is right, the president-elect of the National Council of Resistance of Iran is boldly proclaiming that this is the moment for the Khamenei regime “to be overthrown”…
Maryam Rajavi, the President-elect of the National Council of Resistance of Iran, issued a statement on the continuing protests, noting: “The four-day uprising by merchants, students, and other sectors of society signals the Iranian people’s determination to be free from religious tyranny. This wretched regime is doomed to be overthrown by the risen populace and rebellious youth. The final word is spoken in the streets by the people and the rebellious youth, those with nothing left to lose. This regime must go.”
And Reza Pahlavi is being quite clear about what he wants to see happen…
As the world welcomes the New Year, the dawn of a new era in Iran is upon us. My brave compatriots are on the streets in cities and towns across our country—fighting for their freedom, risking their lives. The current regime has reached the end of the road. It stands at its most fragile: weak, deeply divided, and unable to suppress the courage of a rising nation. The growing protests show this year will be the definitive moment for change.
To the international community: I call upon you to stand with the people of Iran not only in word but in action. Peace in the Middle East and stability across the world depend on a free Iran. Unlike the 46 years of chaos and terror this regime has brought, the new, democratic Iran I seek to forge will usher in an era of prosperity and security.
The tide of history is turning. I invite you not only to witness the birth of a new Iran, but to stand by our side as we achieve it and to work with us to build a legacy of lasting peace.
The Khamenei regime is being backed into a corner. That is good news, but it also makes them extremely dangerous.
If the mullahs feel like they are facing an existential threat, there is no telling what they might do. So let’s watch the drama that is unfolding in Iran very closely, because there could be some unexpected twists and turns during the days ahead.
Is A Revolution In Iran Part Of The Plan?
Is it just a coincidence that a massive protest movement has erupted in Tehran at the same time that the U.S. and Israel are warning that new military action against Iran may be needed soon? Without a doubt, the Islamic radicals that are ruling Iran are one of the most oppressive regimes on the entire planet, and so it is perfectly understandable that people that live under that regime would want to go out into the streets and protest. But what we have been witnessing in Tehran this week doesn’t feel spontaneous to me. Could it be possible that starting a revolution in the capital is part of the overall plan for the next stage of the war with Iran?
Following his meeting with Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu on Monday, President Trump issued quite an ominous threat to the Iranians…
President Donald Trump issued new warnings against Iran and Hamas after a meeting with Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu in Florida on Monday to try to advance the ceasefire deal that Trump brokered in Gaza.
Trump threatened Iran with unspecified consequences, saying Iran “may be behaving badly” and suggesting it was trying to rebuild nuclear sites after the U.S. struck three of them this year.
“If it’s confirmed, look, there will be consequences,” he said. “Consequences will be very powerful, maybe more powerful than last time.”
The day before Trump’s threat, protests against the Iranian regime suddenly erupted in central Tehran…
Protests began on Sunday after shopkeepers in Tehran’s Grand Bazaar staged a strike when the rial hit a record low, plummeting to 1.42 million to the U.S. dollar.
Demonstrations spread to the cities of Karaj, Hamedan, Qeshm, Malard, Isfahan, Kermanshah, Shiraz and Yazd, where police used tear gas to disperse the protesters, BBC Persian reported. One video showed a protester curled up on the ground in Tehran, blocking a gang of black-clad police officers on motorcycles.
University students chanted slogans including “death to the dictator,” referring to Khamenei. Other slogans backed Reza Pahlavi, the son of the late Shah Mohammad Reza Pahlavi, who was overthrown in the 1979 Islamic Revolution.
If the nuts currently running Iran were removed, it is quite likely that Reza Pahlavi would serve as interim leader until new elections could be held.
On Tuesday, he posted a very long message on X which called on the entire population of Iran to go into the streets and join the protests…
My courageous compatriots,
Your presence in the streets across Iran has kindled the flame of a national revolution. The continuation and expansion of your presence, and taking control of the streets, is today our foremost, vital priority.
I call upon the people of Iran to join in with the nationwide strikes and protests: government employees, workers in the energy and transportation sectors, truck drivers, nurses, teachers and academics, artisans and entrepreneurs, retirees and those who have lost their savings—everyone, unite and join this national movement.
Across Iran: Tehran, Karaj, Qazvin, Rasht, Sari, Gorgan, Semnan, Bojnord, Mashhad, Birjand, Zahedan, Kerman, Yazd, Shiraz, Bandar Abbas, Bushehr, Yasuj, Ahvaz, Shahrekord, Isfahan, Khorramabad, Ilam, Kermanshah, Sanandaj, Urmia, Tabriz, Ardabil, Zanjan, Hamedan, Arak, and Qom.
I ask Iranians abroad—from Australia and East Asia to Europe and North America—to redouble your activities within the framework of the “Rise Iran” campaign to amplify the voice of the Iranian people to the media, international institutions, foreign governments, and parliaments.
Iran and its streets belong to the Iranian nation. And we will be victorious, because we are united and we are many.
Long live Iran,
Reza Pahlavi
He knows exactly what he is doing. And he was probably encouraged to post such a message.
After months of economic pressure from the United States and Europe, the Iranian economy is a giant mess. The overall inflation rate is up to 42 percent, and food prices have risen by 72 percent over the past year…
According to the state statistics center, the inflation rate in December rose to 42.2% from the same period last year and is 1.8% higher than in November. Food prices rose 72% and health and medical items were up 50% from December last year, according to the statistics center. Many critics see the rate as a sign of approaching hyperinflation.
When people can’t afford to buy enough food for their families, they tend to get very desperate.
One local merchant told a British news source that he was concerned that he would soon “have to bring suitcases of cash to simply buy bread”…
“What will my children eat? Do we have to bring suitcases of cash to simply buy bread? Do you find that normal?” Alborz told the Guardian over the phone, speaking under a pseudonym for fear of security reprisals.
Iran’s prosecutor general is acknowledging that Iranians that are hurting economically have a right to protest.
But he is also warning that if any protesters are engaged in the “implementation of externally designed scenarios”, they will face a “decisive response”…
“Peaceful livelihood protests are part of social and understandable realities,” Mohammad Movahedi-Azad told state media after protests started by shopkeepers in the capital city Tehran, which were joined by students and others in several cities across the country.
“Any attempt to turn economic protests into a tool of insecurity, destruction of public property, or implementation of externally designed scenarios will inevitably be met with a legal, proportionate and decisive response,” warned Movahedi-Azad.
The Iranians have seen this before.
During the 12 Day War, internal unrest suddenly erupted, and many were hoping that it would lead to the overthrow of the Iranian regime at that time.
And now that we are seemingly on the verge of more military conflict between Israel and Iran, the Israelis are publicly urging Iranians to “go out into the streets”…
His comments came days after the Mossad intelligence agency of Iran’s arch-foe Israel posted on social media that it was “with you on the ground,” in a message to Iranian protesters. Posting on its Persian-language X account, the spy agency encouraged Iranians to “go out into the streets together.”
The U.S. State Department also seems quite eager to add fuel to the fire…
In a post shared via its own Farsi language account on X, the U.S. State Department said Wednesday that it was “deeply concerned by reports and videos that peaceful protesters in Iran are facing intimidation, violence, and arrests.”
“Demanding basic rights is not a crime. The Islamic Republic must respect the rights of the Iranian people and end the repression,” the U.S. government said in the post.
“First the bazaars. Then the students. Now the whole country. Iranians are united. Different lives, one demand: respect our voices and our rights,” the State Department said in a subsequent post.
Over the past several decades, the U.S. has been involved in organizing and funding revolutions against anti-western governments all over the world. So it would not surprise me at all to learn that our fingerprints are all over this one.
Of course the Iranians don’t exactly have a right to complain, because they have been attempting to spread revolution all over the Middle East since 1979. Let’s watch Iran very closely and see what happens next. Already, there are reports that Iranian security forces have gotten violent with some of the protesters…
“You must be naive to think Iranians trust this government or the regime,” said Farhad, a 19-year-old university student active in the protest movement who spoke under a pseudonym.
He and other students described how security services had confiscated student IDs and beaten and arrested some protesters. A protester in Tehran sent the Guardian a picture of a metal pellet, which they said was shot at them by security forces. The Guardian could not independently verify the claim of the protester.
“If the administration wanted to talk, they wouldn’t fire teargas, shoot at protesters and if dialogue is what they wanted, they would not have executed protesters in 2023. There is no willingness from any of us to talk to them, we want the mullahs gone and we want democracy,” Farhad added.
As footage of violence circulates on social media, that may inspire some protesters to take more extreme action.
On Wednesday, one group of protesters actually attempted to break into a local government building in Fasa…
Iranian protesters demonstrating over economic hardship and a plummeting currency attempted to break into a local government building as the unrest continued for a fourth day.
State media reported on Wednesday an organised group of “rioters” attempted to get into the local governorate building in Fasa in the southern province of Fars. Footage broadcast showed a group of people trying to break open the gate of the building.
“Their attack failed with the intervention of security forces,” state media said. “The leader of these rioters, a 28-year-old woman, was arrested.”
The semi-official Tasnim news agency cited a local official as saying three members of the security forces were wounded during the incident while four “attackers” had been detained.
A revolution that removes the Iranian regime from power may be one of the only ways that a cataclysmic military showdown between Israel and Iran can be avoided at this stage.
Newsweek is reporting that the Iranians are currently developing “unconventional warheads” that would have the capability of delivering chemical or biological weapons to Israeli targets…
Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC) is working on the unconventional warheads for ballistic missiles while also repositioning missile launchers to the country’s eastern regions outlet Iran International quoted military sources as saying in a Monday report. The sources, who requested anonymity because of the sensitivity of the matter, said these activities have accelerated in recent months.
The warheads are designed to carry and disperse chemical or biological agents when delivered by ballistic missiles, rather than conventional explosives, as an added form of deterrence alongside Iran’s existing missile force.
While the report noted that if confirmed, the move could drastically alter the region’s deterrence balance, it could trigger more intensified pressure on Tehran. Chemical and biological weapons are prohibited under international conventions to which Iran is a signatory.
The Israelis aren’t just going to sit there and allow the Iranians to do this.
They will strike first and ask questions later. And once the missiles start flying again, things will get really insane in the Middle East.
I realize that most prominent voices are focused on other matters as we enter 2026. But I believe that the drama that is unfolding in the Middle East has the potential to be one of the biggest stories during the year ahead, and so I will be monitoring developments very, very closely.
We The People Demand ACCOUNTABILITY! Dear Mr. President
I know you are listening to We the People. This message is sent on behalf of a very frustrated 79 million Americans who voted for you and millions more who refuse to be ignored. Therefore, we are designating 2026 as THE YEAR OF ACCOUNTABILITY! Why now? Because the country is at a breaking point.
Our freedoms are being chipped away in plain sight. Our government has grown bloated, arrogant, and unaccountable. Public trust has not merely declined; it has been obliterated. Power has been stripped from citizens and hoarded by bureaucrats, agencies, and unelected elites. Those who call themselves leaders protect each other while the American people pay the price.
Civic duty has vanished from classrooms, replaced by obedience and ideology. The family, once the backbone of this nation, has been systematically weakened and devalued. Enough is Enough! At its core, this is not partisan. All Americans are demanding ACCOUNTABILITY. We the People reject the lies, the gaslighting, the censorship, and the deliberate erosion of our lived reality over the past decade. We remember what was done. We know who did it. We are no longer willing to move on without consequences.
The message is unmistakable and unstoppable. Americans demand ACCOUNTABILITY.
So Mr. @POTUS
The question for you to answer is simple. Will you stand with We The People or will you protect the system that failed us? Make 2026 the year of ACCOUNTABILITY. We will stand with you through thick and thin like we always have, but you must respect our wishes.
If you don’t, as our founders warned, the deep state concentration of power in government will lead to greater corruption and eventual tyranny. And your legacy in history will be tarnished beyond repair.
Respectfully, 1 of the 79 million voters cc:
30 Numbers From 2025 That Are Almost Too Crazy To Believe
2025 has truly been a historic year. No matter which side of the fence that you are on, nobody can deny that we have witnessed seismic political changes over the last 12 months. Meanwhile, the AI revolution is transforming our lives in ways that we don’t even understand. But despite all of our advanced technology, we can’t stop the endless barrage of natural disasters that has been pummeling us in 2025, and hunger continues to spread all over the globe. Of course war has been a major theme from the very beginning of the year to the very end of the year. Humanity has been facing one major crisis after another, and people are steadily getting angrier and more frustrated.
Our world is changing at a pace that is absolutely breathtaking. If you always wanted to live in “interesting” times, you have certainly gotten your wish. The following are 30 numbers from 2025 that are almost too crazy to believe…
#1 As 1999 began, a Gallup survey found that 70 percent of Americans were satisfied with how things were going in the United States. As 2025 ends, only 24 percent of Americans are satisfied with how things are going in the United States.
#2 In 1980, the fact that the U.S. national debt had reached a trillion dollars was a really big deal. But now our national debt has surpassed the 38 trillion dollar mark and there is seemingly no end in sight.
#3 Globally, the total amount of debt in the world has reached an almost unbelievable total of 337 trillion dollars.
#4 In 2025, more than half of all of the nations on the entire planet were either directly involved in military conflict or were funding it.
#5 At the start of 2025, you could purchase an ounce of silver for about 30 dollars. As 2025 ends, an ounce of silver will cost you more than 70 dollars.
#6 Crypto investors lost about $800,000,000,000 during the month of November alone.
#7 After all this time, the Department of Justice is claiming that they have just “discovered” a million more Epstein documents.
#8 In 2025, researchers in the United States and South Korea developed a version of the bird flu that has a 100 percent death rate in mammals.
#9 According to the latest National Customer Rage Survey, 77 percent of U.S. consumers say that they have had a product or service problem within the last 12 months. That is a brand new all-time record high.
#10 Earlier this year, we witnessed 494 earthquakes of magnitude 5.0 or greater within a 30 day period. That was about 4 times as many earthquakes of magnitude 5.0 or greater than we normally experience in a typical month.
#11 Globally, natural disasters caused a total of $120,000,000,000 in economic damage in 2025.
#12 The number of Americans that are dealing with food insecurity has almost doubled since 2021.
#13 The United Nations is warning that nearly 10 percent of the entire population of the globe is now going to bed hungry each night.
#14 Approximately 1.2 million foreign students are currently attending colleges and universities in the United States. How many U.S. students have been denied admission in order to make room for those students at our best schools?
#15 In 2019, you could get a cheeseburger at McDonald’s for a dollar. Today, the average price of a cheeseburger at McDonald’s is $3.15.
#16 Since 2019, the annual income needed to afford a median-priced home in rural U.S. counties has more than doubled.
#17 According to a survey that was conducted by PNC Bank, 67 percent of U.S. workers are now living paycheck to paycheck.
#18 Investopedia has determined that it now takes approximately 5 million dollars to live the American Dream over the course of a lifetime.
#19 One study discovered that approximately 42 percent of Americans that belong to Generation Z have been diagnosed with “anxiety, depression, ADHD, PTSD” or some other mental health condition.
#20 One recent survey found that 70 percent of U.S. adults are currently taking at least one pharmaceutical drug, and nearly a quarter of U.S. adults are currently taking at least four pharmaceutical drugs.
#21 According to the CDC, an American now dies by suicide every 11 minutes.
#22 Approximately 20 percent of high school students in the United States have had a relationship with an AI chatbot.
#23 One recent survey found that almost two-thirds of all church leaders that prepare sermons “use AI tools in their sermon writing process”.
#24 Well over 50 percent of the global population lives in a nation where Christians are being violently persecuted.
#25 U.S. farmers are facing the worst economic downturn that they have experienced in at least 50 years.
#26 The size of the U.S. cattle herd has dropped to the lowest level in about 75 years.
#27 According to Challenger, Gray & Christmas, U.S. employers have announced a grand total of almost 1.2 million job cuts in 2025.
#28 The McKinsey Global Institute is warning that approximately 40 percent of all U.S. workers could potentially be replaced by AI.
#29 In more than 50 percent of the nations on the entire planet, the total fertility rate is now below replacement level.
#30 A recent YouGov survey discovered that nearly half of the U.S. population believes that a nuclear war is likely within the next 10 years.
The pace of global events has accelerated significantly over the past year. It really does feel like we are building up to some sort of a crescendo. We are living at a time of a “perfect storm”, and we just keep getting hammered by one crisis after another. As a result, much of the population has become numb to it all.
Never before in human history have we been subjected to such an emotional overload. When you are being pulled in so many directions emotionally, it can be really easy to give in to the temptation to go numb. But I would encourage my readers not to do that. It is when times are the darkest that light is needed the most. As things get even darker in 2026, choose to be a light to those around you.
All of human history has been building up to this time, and we get to be here for it. There is nowhere else that I would rather be than right here, and there is no other time that I would have rather lived than right now. Don’t let all of the chaos that is going on all around us get you down. You were born for such a time as this, and now is the time to become everything that you were created to be.
2025 Is Ending With A Whole Lot Of Bombing
This year is certainly ending with a bang. In recent weeks, the U.S. has bombed targets in Venezuela, the Caribbean, the eastern Pacific, Nigeria and Somalia. Meanwhile, the Saudis just bombed Yemen, the Ukrainians and the Russians continue to pummel each other, the Israelis are gearing up to hit Iran again, and the Chinese just launched missiles as they practiced for a blockade of Taiwan. If you haven’t heard about all of these incidents yet, just keep reading, because you will get the details below. We have come to expect that it is “normal” to see constant military action all over the globe, but the truth is that there is nothing “normal” about what we are witnessing at all.
We had been warned that the U.S. was going to begin hitting targets inside Venezuelan territory, and this week we found out that the first such strike has already happened…
President Trump says the U.S. “knocked out” a “big facility” last week linked to alleged drug boat operations, although he didn’t offer many details.
“There was a major explosion in the dock area where they load the boats up with drugs,” Mr. Trump said Monday as he spoke to reporters at Mar-a-Lago.
In a radio interview Friday, the president said the U.S. hit the facility “very hard” two nights before.
Meanwhile, the Pentagon continues to bomb drug boats in the Caribbean and the eastern Pacific.
In fact, it is being reported that the 30th such strike just took place…
As the world gets ready to usher in a new year, the US military campaign against Venezuela has reached another grim milestone. American forces carried out their latest airstrike on a vessel accused of drug trafficking in Latin American waters on Monday.
The operation announced by US Southern Command (SOUTHCOM) represents the 30th strike since the campaign began on September 2.
The official US announcement indicated the boat was struck in the eastern Pacific Ocean – so the ‘other side’ opposite the Caribbean, which is certainly not the first in this area.
I had no idea that the grand total had already reached 30.
Strikes are happening so rapidly now that it really is quite difficult to keep up with them all.
On the other side of the world, the U.S. bombed ISIS radicals in northwest Nigeria on December 25th…
President Donald Trump said the U.S. launched airstrikes in northwest Nigeria on Christmas night targeting ISIS militants he accused of killing Christians, calling the operation decisive and warning further attacks would follow if the violence continues.
“Tonight, at my direction as Commander in Chief, the United States launched a powerful and deadly strike against ISIS Terrorist Scum in Northwest Nigeria, who have been targeting and viciously killing, primarily, innocent Christians, at levels not seen for many years, and even Centuries!” Trump said Thursday on Truth Social.
Most of you have heard about that operation in Nigeria by now.
But most Americans have no idea that the U.S. military has been regularly conducting airstrikes in Somalia throughout the month of December…
The U.S. Africa Command (AFRICOM) said the U.S. had struck targets around the Golis Mountains in northern Somalia, south of the Gulf of Aden. The attacks homed in on targets roughly 90 kilometers (56 miles) southeast of the coastal city of Bosaso, the military said.
The Christmas Day strikes followed three consecutive days of strikes in roughly the same area of northern Somalia. The military did not release any further details about the strikes, citing operational security.
AFRICOM has carried out airstrikes on ISIS-Somalia on at least seven occasions so far in December, and separately acknowledged at least five assaults on Somalia-based operatives for al-Shabaab, another jihadist militant group in the country with a much larger following than ISIS-Somalia and closer ties with Al-Qaeda.
The list of nations that we have bombed in 2025 is starting to get pretty long.
Iran is on that list, and President Trump is now threatening to bomb them again. The following comes from a Ynet News article entitled “The green light Israel was waiting for on Iran”…
Even before Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu presented U.S. President Donald Trump and his team with newly gathered intelligence on Iran—focusing on its nuclear activity and, more urgently, the rehabilitation of its ballistic missile program threatening Israel—the U.S. president issued a series of significant security statements that Israeli officials in Tel Aviv had been waiting to hear.
“Now I hear that Iran is trying to build up again, and if they are—we’re going to have to knock them down. We’ll knock the hell out of them. But hopefully, that’s not happening,” Trump said.
When asked whether the U.S. would intervene if Tehran attempted to rebuild its ballistic missile arsenal or restart its nuclear program, Trump responded “yes” to the former and “immediately” to the latter.
I think that Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu is quite determined to eliminate Iran’s ballistic missile threat.
Once Israel and Iran start fighting again, things will get really crazy in the Middle East.
Speaking of the Middle East, Saudi Arabia just bombed a key port in Yemen…
The United Arab Emirates said Tuesday that it was pulling out its remaining forces in Yemen, after Saudi Arabia bombed the war-torn country’s port city of Mukalla following accusations that two ships from the UAE had delivered weapons and combat vehicles to separatist forces.
Saudi Arabia accused the UAE, its close ally, of “highly dangerous” actions in Yemen that threatened its national security. It said it had launched “limited” airstrikes on Mukalla on Tuesday morning and backed a call for UAE forces to leave Yemen within 24 hours.
The UAE initially rejected the accusations and expressed surprise at the strikes, but the country’s defense ministry later announced that, “in view of recent developments,” it would voluntarily withdraw the remaining “counterterrorism” units it had in Yemen.
The Saudis never used to be this aggressive. But these days being very aggressive has become quite fashionable.
In Moscow, up to half a million people were without power after a massive wave of Ukrainian drone strikes…
Hundreds of thousands of Moscow residents are understood to be without power after Ukrainian drones attacked the city.
According to Ukrainian reports, as many as half a million people have been left without electricity. Residential buildings, including tower blocks, in the capital have been captured in complete darkness – in footage shared on social media.
This came the day after the Ukrainians reportedly sent 91 drones to attack Vladimir Putin’s residence in northwestern Russia…
Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov claimed Monday that Ukraine launched a large-scale drone attack on President Vladimir Putin’s residence in northwestern Russia, allegations that were swiftly dismissed by Kyiv as an attempt to derail peace negotiations.
Lavrov, who does not usually report drone strikes since they fall within the purview of the Defense Ministry, asserted that Ukraine used 91 long-range drones to target Putin’s residence on Lake Valdai in the Novgorod region between Sunday night and Monday morning.
I think that the Ukrainians really were trying to kill Putin. Needless to say, the Russians are absolutely furious.
In response to this attack, Dmitry Medvedev publicly warned that the Grim Reaper is breathing down Volodymyr Zelensky’s neck…
Medvedev raged on X: “The stinking Kiev bastard is trying to derail the settlement of the conflict.
“He wants war. Well, now at least he’ll have to stay in hiding for the rest of his worthless life.
“I will not write here about his violent death, although right now the Grim Reaper is breathing down the bastard’s neck.
There is speculation that the Russians could respond to these recent attacks by striking Ukraine with Oreshnik missiles.
Apparently Oreshniks have entered mass production, and we are being told that some were recently deployed in Belarus…
Russia appears to have deployed its so-called ‘unstoppable’ nuclear-capable missiles, potentially bringing the threat of devastating strikes closer than ever.
On Tuesday, the Defense Ministry released a video claiming to show combat vehicles in an undisclosed location in Belarus carrying the Oreshnik missile system.
State news agency TASS said it was the first time the ministry had publicly shown the Oreshnik, which President Vladimir Putin has declared impossible to intercept, with speeds reportedly exceeding Mach 10.
If the Russians were to hit major Ukrainian cities with Oreshniks, that would make direct NATO military intervention much more likely.
Alarmingly, Zelensky is claiming that deploying U.S. troops to Ukraine at some point in the future is even being discussed…
Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky has newly claimed that US President Donald Trump is considering the possibility of deploying American troops to Ukraine as negotiations toward peace with Moscow stall. This is presumably connected with promises of future ‘security guarantees’.
This is somewhat of a surprise, as the White House has made no indication of this in any statement whether public or based on anonymous officials. Throughout the nearly four-long war the question of Western ‘boots on the ground’ has been raised at various times.
Those that have been following my work for an extended period of time already clearly understand why we must avoid a direct war with Russia at all costs.
Of course it is imperative that we avoid a direct war with China too, but that won’t be possible if the Chinese make a move on Taiwan. This week, the Chinese simulated a comprehensive blockade of the island…
China fired rockets into waters off Taiwan on Tuesday, showcased new assault ships and dismissed prospects of U.S. and allied intervention to block any future attack by Beijing to take control of the island in its most extensive war games to date.
As part of drills rehearsing a blockade, China’s Eastern Theatre Command conducted 10 hours of live-fire exercises, launching rockets into waters to the north and south of the democratically governed island.
Chinese naval and air force units also simulated strikes on maritime and aerial targets and carried out anti-submarine drills around the island, while state media released images touting Beijing’s technological and military superiority and its ability to take Taiwan by force if necessary.
They are practicing for what they plan to do in the future.
As part of their “drills”, the Chinese fired 10 missiles into the air from an island that is very close to Taiwan…
AFP journalists in Pingtan — a Chinese island at the closest point to Taiwan’s main island — saw a volley of rockets blast into the air at around 9:00 am (0100 GMT) on Tuesday, leaving trails of white smoke.
At least 10 rockets were launched in quick succession, sending a booming sound reverberating across the sky and drawing tourists towards the seafront to snap photos and videos on their phones.
If those missiles had actually been aimed at Taiwan, we would be in a state of war with China right now.
We are far closer to the kinetic phase of World War III than most people realize. And violence is constantly in the air.
In fact, New Year’s Eve celebrations are being canceled in major cities all over the globe due to the threat of terror attacks…
Celebrations on New Year’s Eve are being scrapped in cities around the world as local authorities fear terror threats in cities from Sydney to Paris. Thousands of people looking to celebrate the start of 2026 have had their plans thwarted as reports of planned attacks have caused parties, fireworks and live events to be cancelled just days away from December 31.
I don’t think that the cities that have canceled their celebrations are being paranoid.
The threat is very real, and hopefully we can get through the next couple of days without some sort of a major tragedy.
Our world is getting crazier with each passing month. If you thought that 2025 was wild, just hold on tight, because I have a feeling that things are going to go to a whole new level in 2026.
What Do The Top Search Trends Of 2025 Say About The Current State Of Our Society?
What do our Google searches tell us about ourselves? I think that many of you will be quite surprised by what I have to share in this article. “Google’s Year in Search” for 2025 has been released, and it is a doozy. The past 12 months have been so crazy, and the top search trends of 2025 certainly reflect that.
Let’s start with the top search trend. “Charlie Kirk” is number one on the list, and his assassination completely shocked the nation. But it certainly was not an isolated incident.
Political violence is on the rise in our society. In fact, if President Trump had not moved his head slightly at just the right moment at a rally in Butler, Pennsylvania last year, he would not be in the White House today.
Charlie Kirk was a prominent figure before his death, but after he died suddenly everyone knew who he was. Unfortunately, I believe that we will see even more political violence in 2026. There is just so much anger and frustration out there right now on all sides.
“KPop Demon Hunters” is number two on Google’s list, and that stunned me. According to Wikipedia, it is “a 2025 animated musical film from Sony Pictures Animation and Netflix about a K-pop girl group, HUNTR/X, who secretly fight demons while performing, facing off against a rival demon boy band called the Saja Boys”.
Needless to say, it is particularly popular among young people. This year our society continued to be fascinated by entertainment that explores very dark themes, and that is quite alarming. And we see this with the third item on the list as well.
According to Wikipedia, Labubu is “a popular line of collectible, mischievous-looking elf-like monster figures created by Hong Kong artist Kasing Lung, known for their large ears, sharp teeth, and scruffy appearance, sold primarily through blind boxes by the company Pop Mart, which has led to a global craze and high resale demand.”
The sharp teeth and bizarre eyes certainly make them look like monsters.
In the old days, kids would play with teddy bears and other stuffed animals. But now kids want to play with creatures that look like they have been pulled straight out of a nightmare. I don’t think that is a good thing. The iPhone 17 came in at number four on the list, and that shouldn’t surprise anyone.
Most of us are so addicted to our phones, and I don’t think that is going to change any time soon. The “One Big Beautiful Bill Act” came in at number five in the list, the government shutdown came in at number eight in the list, and “tariffs” came in at number ten in the list. I think that is quite appropriate, because this is a year when the news was so focused on political drama.
Donald Trump’s first year in office was an extremely busy one, and people all over the country were endlessly talking about it. There are tens of millions of Americans that absolutely love Trump, and there are tens of millions of Americans that absolutely hate Trump. Of course Donald Trump will continue to play a central role in our society for as long as he remains in the White House.
A new political star on the left made the list at number six. New York elected a “democratic socialist” named Zohran Mamdani as their new mayor, and suddenly he has become a major national celebrity. That is pretty remarkable considering the fact that he wasn’t even a U.S. citizen a decade ago.
“DeepSeek” came in at number seven on the list, and I was glad to see that a term associated with AI was represented. For better or worse, AI is in the process of transforming virtually every area of our society.
Interestingly, the FIFA Club World Cup ranked number nine on the list. I still don’t think that Chelsea deserved to win the final, but PSG just didn’t show up that day for some reason.
Personally, I was shocked that the Epstein files did not make the top ten, but it did rank number eight in “news searches”. To me, the drama surrounding the Epstein files was perhaps the most important political story of the year. It has dramatically shifted political opinion, and I think that much of the damage that has been done is permanent.
When they were finally released, they were so heavily redacted that they didn’t tell us much that we didn’t already know.
And now we are being told that they have discovered a million more documents that hopefully we will get to see eventually. 2025 has been so wild, and now 2026 is nearly upon us. 27 years ago, USA Today and Gallup asked Americans what they thought 2025 would be like…
In the year 1998, Bill Clinton was facing impeachment proceedings, “Titanic” was cleaning up at the Oscars and most households still had landline phones. Gallup and USA Today called up 1,055 Americans on those landlines and asked them for their best predictions about a year in the distant future: 2025.
It turns out that those that responded to the survey were quite accurate about certain things, but on other matters they were way off…
Some were surprisingly prescient. Most Americans predicted that, over the next 27 years, the country would have elected a Black president, gay marriages would be legal and commonplace and a “deadly new disease” would have emerged.
Most people in 1998 correctly doubted that space travel would be common for ordinary Americans or that alien life forms would have made contact.
Other predictions didn’t hold up as well. About two-thirds of Americans thought the country would have elected a female president by now. More than half expected a cure for cancer and 61% expected that “people will routinely live to be 100 years old.”
Wouldn’t it be nice if most people lived to be 100 years old?
Sadly, life expectancy in the U.S. has fallen to the lowest level since 1996.
The first half of this decade brought us the pandemic, several major wars, the AI revolution and an endless series of natural disasters. But if you thought that was wild, just wait until you see what happens during the second half of this decade.
The pace of change is about to go into overdrive. So buckle up and hold on tight, because things are about to start getting really, really crazy.
The General & Insider Paper TG
December 30th, 2025
-
General Flynn told Alex Jones that officials within the Trump administration have drawn up enemy lists to be “neutralized.”
-
U.S. Deputy Secretary of Health and Human Services Jim O’Neill says they’ve frozen all child care payments to Minnesota amid serious allegations that the state “funneled millions of taxpayer dollars to fraudulent daycares across Minnesota over the past decade.”
-
Colombian President Gustavo Petro says President Trump has begun bombing targets inside Venezuela with land-based strikes.
-
Thousands of Americans say they will refuse to pay their taxes this year following revelations of large-scale scams in Minnesota.
-
VENEZUELA CURRENCY CLOSES YEAR AT 301 BOLIVARS TO DOLLAR, DEPRECIATING 83% YEAR-ON-YEAR
-
Jill Biden’s ex-husband’s wife was found dead after Delaware police responded to a domestic dispute and discovered her unresponsive.
-
Turkey calls Israel’s recognition of Somaliland ‘illegitimate’
-
Russia declines to provide evidence of alleged Ukrainian drone attack on Putin home
-
Russia will ‘toughen’ stance in Ukraine talks after alleged attack on Putin home, Kremlin says
-
President John F. Kennedy’s granddaughter has died at 35, just one month after revealing she had been diagnosed with terminal leukemia.
-
Somali-affiliated daycare facility in Columbus, Ohio faces new fraud allegations
-
Eurostar to resume train services through Channel tunnel: company
-
130 Chinese military aircraft detected around Taiwan in 24 hours: Taipei
-
Epstein survivor Juliette Bryant claims Hollywood director Michael Bay was an Epstein client, alleging he was involved in the abuse of multiple children.
-
China launched missiles and deployed dozens of fighter aircraft and navy vessels around Taiwan on Tuesday for a second day of live-fire drills aimed at simulating a blockade of the self-ruled island’s key ports and assaults on maritime targets
-
Ukrainian President Zelensky says he has had serious discussions with the President Trump about deploying American boots on the ground in Ukraine to help secure the country.
-
Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky is demanding a 50-year security guarantee from the U.S. government as a condition to end the war with Russia.
-
George Clooney, along with his wife and two children, has been granted French citizenship.
-
The CIA confirms it bombed targets inside Venezuela using a drone.
-
China said it has started live-fire military exercises around Taiwan, hours after announcing “major” drills in waters and airspace near Taiwan
-
Iranian hackers claim they’ve obtained material on Benjamin Netanyahu involving alleged links between the prime minister’s aides and Qatar.
-
The Pentagon has awarded Boeing a nearly $8.6 billion contract to produce 25 F-15 fighter jets for Israel.
-
A Utah judge has ruled that a redacted transcript and audio from an October closed-door hearing in the assassination case of conservative activist Charlie Kirk may be released.
-
Benjamin Netanyahu announces the Israel Peace Prize will be awarded to Donald Trump, marking the first time in history the honor goes to a non-Israeli.
-
Marco Rubio says he spoke with Benjamin Netanyahu about antisemitism in the United States and that they plan to combat it together.
-
Some liberals have reportedly begun bathing in cow urine as a symbolic gesture to show solidarity with Somalians in Minnesota.
-
Homeland Security is currently on the ground in Minneapolis, carrying out a major probe into widespread childcare and other forms of fraud.
-
President Trump’s DOJ lawyer Harmeet Dhillon has reportedly begun blocking American citizens on her personal X account who call for the government to arrest and hold people accountable.
-
Benjamin Netanyahu held a call with Elon Musk focused on AI and autonomous vehicles, discussing future legislation and plans to position Israel as a global leader in artificial intelligence.
-
Israeli politician Benny Gantz says military action against Iran could happen very soon.
-
Heavyweight boxing star Anthony Joshua was involved in a car crash in Nigeria that resulted in two fatalities.
-
The Pentagon says it “lost track” of $6 billion in weapons sent to Israel, meaning it stopped monitoring where they went.
-
Israeli state media warns that Netanyahu should be most concerned about Florida gubernatorial candidate James Fishback, labeling him a threat to U.S. foreign aid to Israel.
-
Congress is preparing to review contents from Anthony Weiner’s laptop as part of an investigation tied to the Clinton Foundation.
-
Rep. Thomas Massie hints that the Epstein files could reveal the truth about claims that Trump was an FBI informant against Epstein.
-
The Wing of Zion aircraft carrying Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu has landed in Palm Beach, Florida, where he is set to meet with President Trump.
-
Rep. Eric Swalwell confirms that after winning the midterms, Democrats’ top priority would be to immediately impeach President Trump.
-
The Irish government says it plans to end anonymous social media accounts, require ID verification for all users, and introduce a ban for those under 16.
-
A U.S. district attorney says Somali fraud in Minnesota has cost taxpayers nearly the entire GDP of Somalia.
-
Anthem (Elevance Health) will implement a new policy starting January 1, 2026, penalizing hospitals for using out-of-network specialists even when those doctors are medically necessary or already on staff.
Sex and Espionage: Tools of Compromise
Stages of Compromise and Intimacy
Sex has long been used in espionage not as a reckless indulgence, but as a calculated mechanism of control. Intelligence services understand that intimacy is rarely the first step—it is the culmination of a process already underway. By the time sex appears, the target is often entangled through trust, reciprocity, or shared vulnerability. This is why sexual compromise functions less as a trapdoor and more as a tightening vice: once entered, exiting cleanly becomes increasingly difficult.
The first stage is relationship establishment. Targets are identified not for moral weakness, but for access, authority, or proximity to sensitive systems. Initial contact is engineered to appear organic—professional overlap, social introduction, or shared interests. At this phase, nothing overtly illicit occurs. Instead, rapport is built slowly, often through repeated low-stakes interactions that normalize the relationship and reduce suspicion. This stage creates the psychological foundation for later leverage.
Next comes incremental compromise, where boundaries are crossed subtly rather than dramatically. Information may be shared casually, favors exchanged, or minor rules bent. Crucially, the target often rationalizes these actions as harmless or mutually beneficial. This is where intelligence services such as the KGB, CIA, and Mossad historically focused their efforts—not on sex itself, but on creating a record of participation. Once a target has chosen to cross small lines, larger ones become psychologically easier to justify.
Only after trust, dependency, or complicity is established does intimacy enter the picture. At this stage, sex serves multiple functions simultaneously: emotional bonding, distraction, and insurance. The act itself may be genuine or entirely staged, but its strategic value lies in what it produces—documentation, secrecy, and fear of exposure. By this point, the target often believes walking away would trigger greater personal or professional damage than compliance.
The final stage is control through silence. Once intimacy has occurred, the balance of power shifts decisively. The target may not even need to be explicitly threatened; the awareness of vulnerability is often enough. What makes sexual compromise so effective is that it weaponizes the target’s own choices, not just the operative’s actions. In espionage, sex is rarely the opening move—it is the lock that closes after the door has already been willingly opened.
Venezuela at the Brink: Escalating Pressure on Maduro Amid Sanctions, Strikes, and Internal Strain
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
Escalating U.S.–Venezuela tensions: The relationship between the United States and Venezuela has sharply deteriorated in recent weeks. The U.S. government under President Donald Trump has intensified a pressure campaign against Maduro, framing it around counter-narcotics and national security. On Dec 29, U.S. forces struck a dock facility in Venezuela reportedly used for drug trafficking, marking the first known land operation inside the country in this campaign — a significant escalation from previous strikes on vessels at sea. Washington claims this is part of combating narcotics networks tied to the Venezuelan state or criminal groups; Maduro’s government and its allies denounce the actions as violations of sovereignty and illegal aggression. Reuters+1
Sanctions and legal pressure: Alongside military pressure, the U.S. has expanded sanctions targeting members of Maduro’s inner circle, including family members and businesses linked to weapons and UAV production in cooperation with Iran. These measures are aimed at choking off revenue streams and deterring further authoritarian behavior. Caracas has responded with its own legal measures, passing laws to criminalize actions it labels as “piracy” or blockades related to U.S. seizures of Venezuelan oil tankers, signaling how the confrontation is spilling over into legislative and diplomatic arenas. Reuters+1
Internal political pressure and human rights issues: Domestically, the Maduro government has taken some limited actions that critics frame as cosmetic concessions — for example, releasing nearly 100 people detained during protests after the disputed 2024 presidential election, though hundreds more political prisoners reportedly remain. These gestures are occurring against a backdrop of continuing accusations of repression, electoral illegitimacy, and human rights violations. The opposition remains fractured and skeptical of the government’s intentions, and elections in 2024 and 2025 have been widely criticized for lack of fairness and transparency. The Guardian+1
Economic strain on Venezuelans: Beyond geopolitics, ordinary Venezuelans are grappling with ongoing economic hardship. The bolívar’s value continues to tumble and inflation remains high, putting pressure on day-to-day living costs. While some growth has been reported due to partial oil production recovery and more permissive private sector policies, most citizens still struggle with wages that barely cover basic needs. U.S. blockades and sanctions risk further reducing crucial oil revenues, compounding domestic economic uncertainty. EL PAÍS English
A Ripoff Of Historic Proportions: The Amount Of Money Involved In The Minnesota Fraud Scandal Is Absolutely Staggering
I have been digging into the fraud scandal in Minnesota, and what I have learned has absolutely floored me. It isn’t just millions of dollars or hundreds of millions of dollars that we are talking about in this case. The fraudsters have literally stolen billions of taxpayer dollars, and they have been spending it on luxury vehicles, expensive homes and all sorts of other things. This is something that has been going on for many years, and finally something is being done to stop it.
We owe Nick Shirley a tremendous amount of gratitude, because his investigative video is the reason why so many people are talking about the Minnesota fraud scandal this week…
As Homeland Security agents were in Minnesota conducting what DHS Secretary Kristi Noem called a “massive investigation on childcare and other rampant fraud” on Monday, many of their targets came not from tips from the FBI, but from a video posted on social media over the weekend.
The video, posted by conservative YouTuber Nick Shirley, alleged nearly a dozen day care centers in Minnesota that are receiving public funds are not actually providing any service. As of Monday, the video had been viewed more than 1 million times, according to YouTube’s metrics, and was seen by tens of millions more on X.
“While we have questions about some of the methods used in the video, we do take the concerns that the video raises about fraud very seriously,” said Minnesota Department of Children, Youth, and Families commissioner Tikki Brown.
If you have not watched his video yet, I would very much encourage you to do so.
Shirley says that he was able to uncover 110 million dollars in fraud in just a single day…
We uncovered over $110,000,000 in ONE day. Like it and share it around like wildfire! Its time to hold these corrupt politicians and fraudsters accountable
We ALL work way too hard and pay too much in taxes for this to be happening, the fraud must be stopped.
This is one of the reasons why citizen journalists such as Nick Shirley and myself work tirelessly to expose the truth.
Because in so many cases our government officials will never take action until people start demanding it. Apparently those that live in the vicinity of the “Quality Learing Center” in Minneapolis never see any kids around. But now that this scandal is blowing wide open, suddenly there were quite a few kids at the facility on Monday…
The Quality “Learing” Center Minneapolis, a purported day care flagged in a viral video designed to expose fraud, may have been bustling with kids Monday, but it is typically such a ghost town that it appeared closed, a local told The Post.
The resident called the kiddie scene at the site Monday — a few days after explosive footage called it out and suggested it was part of widespread state fraud — “highly unusual.
“We’ve never seen kids go in there until today. That parking lot is empty all the time, and I was under the impression that place is permanently closed,” the person said.
Sadly, the fraud at daycare centers in Minnesota has apparently been going on for a very long time.
In fact, surveillance footage at one daycare center in 2015 shows parents signing in their kids “so providers could bill the state for full days of care for children who didn’t actually attend”…
Shocking unearthed video from a 2018 state fraud case shows Minnesota parents dropping their children off at a day care center and then leaving with the kids moments later — as authorities probe a rampant billion-dollar fraud scheme in Minneapolis.
In the surveillance footage, dated 2015 and obtained by Fox 9, parents are seen signing their kids into the facility so providers could bill the state for full days of care for children who didn’t actually attend.
On some days, no families would even show up at all, but the day cares would still claim reimbursements from the government, the outlet reported at the time.
Needless to say, this sort of thing is not just going on in Minnesota. Hopefully this scandal will cause the federal government to take a very close look at taxpayer-funded programs all over the nation.
Earlier in December, CBS News reported that hundreds of millions of dollars was being stolen through a nonprofit entity in Minnesota known as “Feeding Our Future”…
Earlier this month, CBS News detailed how a group of convicted fraudsters allegedly spent some of the millions of taxpayer dollars stolen by people associated with a nonprofit called Feeding Our Future, which was meant to help feed vulnerable children during the pandemic.
Investigators say fraudulent payouts to the Feeding Our Future program alone were estimated at $250 million, making it the nation’s costliest COVID-era aid scam.
Walz, a Democrat, previously agreed with an estimate from First Assistant U.S. Attorney Joe Thompson that fraud across all programs, including the Feeding Our Future scheme, which is not a DHS-administered program, could total $1 billion.
Vast amounts of money that was supposed to go toward feeding needy children ended up in the pockets of fraudsters instead.
And apparently they spent that money on vehicles, homes and other luxuries…
Luxury cars, private villas and overseas wire transfers: CBS News obtained dozens of files and photos that reveal how Minnesota fraudsters blew through hundreds of millions in taxpayer dollars as part of one of the biggest COVID-era fraud schemes.
The files document a spending spree in which defendants, many of Somali descent, took taxpayer money meant to feed hungry children and used it to buy cars, property and jewelry. Videos show them popping champagne at an opulent Maldives resort. In a text message, one defendant boasts: “You are gonna be the richest 25 year old InshaAllah [God willing].”
Remember, this was just one nonprofit entity.
Fraud has been discovered at countless others as well. Overall, prosecutors are telling us that the total amount of fraud that they have uncovered in Minnesota now comes to a grand total of 9 billion dollars…
Monday’s DHS visits come amid what prosecutors allege is a $9 billion COVID-era fraud scandal in Minnesota. Gov. Tim Walz and other state officials have disputed that figure and defended their handling of the crisis.
There are 14 specific Medicaid-funded programs in Minnesota currently under federal investigation, although child care isn’t one of them.
9 billion dollars in just one state! Just think about that.
U.S. Attorney General Pam Bondi has announced that 98 individuals involved in the fraud in Minnesota have been arrested so far…
@NickShirleyyy’s work has helped show Americans the scale of fraud in Tim Walz’s Minnesota.
@TheJusticeDept has been investigating this for months. So far, we have charged 98 individuals – 85 of Somali descent – and more than 60 have been found guilty in court.
We have more prosecutions coming…BUCKLE UP, LAWMAKERS!
But what about all of the other states?
An investigative journalist has discovered that rampant daycare fraud is also happening in Ohio. And apparently fraudsters in Ohio are raking in massive amounts of cash by engaging in a widespread “home health” scam…
Ohio attorney Mehek Cooke CONFIRMS MASSIVE fraud in Ohio, another hotbed for Somalis
They run fake “home health” and bill $250,000 PER YEAR, per FAMILY, when no work is actually being done
She says it also happens in PENNSYLVANIA
“Audit America. Audit Ohio now. And I’m pushing for that in every single state!”
“The state will, as long as the doctor has approved it, continue to pay you. It could be for 10 hours, 12 hours, up to 24 when it’s critical care.”
“So you could sit at home without caring for an elderly parent who really doesn’t need it, make about $75,000 to $90,000 a year. Now you add two parents, that’s $180,000. Now you add your in-laws $250,000.”
We all knew that the level of fraud in the system was off the charts. Now we are finally starting to get some of the details.
According to the Department of Housing and Urban Development, over 5 billion dollars in federal rental assistance was sent to ineligible recipients last year alone…
A new report from the US Department of Housing and Urban Development has found that more than $5 billion in federal rental assistance during fiscal year 2024 went to potentially ineligible recipients, including nearly 30,000 deceased individuals and thousands of non-citizens, according to MSN and the NY Post.
The audit, conducted by HUD’s Office of the Chief Financial Officer, reviewed nearly $50 billion in housing aid and identified $5.8 billion — about 11% — as “questionable.” More than 200,000 tenants were flagged, including 29,715 listed as deceased, 9,472 non-citizens, and 165,393 households receiving payments above local eligibility limits, particularly in large metro areas such as New Orleans. Officials said suspicious payments appeared nationwide, with heavy concentrations in New York, California and Washington, DC.
“A massive abuse of taxpayer dollars not only occurred under President Biden’s watch, but was effectively incentivized by his administration’s failure to implement strong financial controls resulting in billions worth of potential improper payments,” HUD Secretary Scott Turner said. “HUD will continue investigating the shocking results and will take appropriate action to hold bad actors accountable.”
U.S. taxpayers are being ripped off over and over again. It is truly a national disgrace. If we make enough of a stink about it, and if enough people start going to prison, hopefully we will start to see real change. Enough is enough.
We are 38 trillion dollars in debt, and we simply cannot afford to keep sending billions of dollars to the hordes of lawless predators that are eagerly taking advantage of the rest of us.
Systems failure in West as France fails to roll over loans, big banks run out of precious metals
By Benjamin Fulford December 29, 2025
It is easy to spot a bubble, but harder to say when it will burst. For years, your correspondent has said the Western financial system is doomed to implode, and yet it kept inflating along. This time, though, it really is imploding in real time. French intelligence reports that France was unable to roll over its debt and now faces default. At the same time, Mossad and Chinese sources report that big Western banks that tried to suppress the price of gold and silver by shorting them on futures markets are now unable to deliver physical metal as is legally required. Also, they have pumped so much money into the financial system that they have created something called asset inflation that is destroying the real economy. This is all unravelling in real time, and regime change is coming to the West.
The UK now looks like it will be the first domino to fall. Opposition leader Nigel Farage (who had the last election stolen from him) is about to overthrow the government of blackmailed pedophile Keir Starmer. Last week, he started an emergency debate in the UK parliament. He accused Keir Starmer of taking orders from a foreign government. Starmer said that was a conspiracy theory with no evidence to back it up. Farage smiled and produced evidence that Starmer met EU immigration officials 17 times without telling Parliament. At the meetings, he was given immigration quotas. In other words, he was caught red-handed illegally bringing in foreign criminals on behalf of the Khazarian Mafia.
Meanwhile, British pensioners have to choose between heating and eating, while the illegal immigrants are housed in hotels and given three meals a day, mobile phones, and cash allowances. Starmer and his KM regime are finished for sure.
There are other signs of open revolt against his government. The Metropolitan Police announced they will stop arresting people for online posts after Father Ted creator Graham Linehan was arrested by five police officers at Heathrow in September over three social media
posts concerning transgender issues. “Throughout this probe, the police have behaved like activists, not impartial upholders of the law,” said the Free Speech Union in a post on X/Twitter. “Rather than inviting Graham for an interview in September, the Met sent five armed police officers to arrest him at Heathrow airport,” they added.
Also, Starmer was forced by farmers’protests to cancel a law designed to expropriate farms on behalf of the KM.
Many observers are saying the Starmer government will not last for another 72 hours. We shall see.
The fake Donald Trump at Mar-a-Lago is also in deep trouble. He is losing control of the military. Billboards like the one pictured below, saying “obey only legal orders,” have been appearing in front of US military bases.
The military is now refusing to obey his orders to attack Venezuela.
White hat five-star general Douglas MacGregor explains US military thinking:
“A lot of us supported Trump because he said the right things, but he hasn’t done the right things.”
Also, please watch MacGregor explain how financialization of the US economy destroyed the US military after 1971.
The fake Trump is trying to pretend he is not involved by issuing the following tweet:
The real Trump was not involved, but the fake one was definitely filmed on Epstein Island as part of the KM blackmail operations.
In a sign of how exploitation of children is used to control politicians, Matt Gaetz says an Israeli asset contacted his father, falsely claiming to have photos of Gaetz with underage girls and demanding $25 million to make the accusations disappear.
Gaetz says his real crime was voting to keep America out of wars for Israel.
To show just how surreal the situation has become, fake White House spokeswoman Karoline Leavitt says: “It’s important to vote in the next election because if we lose, we could all wind up in prison.” Message to Leavitt: It is too late; you are all going to prison.
In a sign that the KM are desperate, representatives of the head of the KM -Jean Michel de Rothschild- (cross-dressing and pretending to be Brigitte Macron), contacted the White Dragon Society last night.
Will 2026 Be A Year Of War With Iran, Russia And China?
I think that nearly the entire population of the world would like to see peace in 2026, but global events just continue to drag us toward war. I honestly do not understand why more people are not upset about this.
The drumbeats of war seem to get louder with each passing day, and we are getting dangerously close to a point of no return. Nobody wanted World War I to happen, but once it started nobody could stop it and more than 20 million people died. Nobody wanted World War II to happen, but once it started nobody could stop it and more than 50 million people died. Now we have reached a stage where a war between major powers should be unthinkable because of the immense power of the weapons that we now possess. If we are not very careful, billions of people could die before World War III is finally over.
I am extremely concerned that war with Iran could erupt again very soon.
On Saturday, Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian ominously declared that his nation is “at total war with the United States, Israel and Europe”…
Iran’s president declared they were in a “total war” with the US, Israel and Europe, just as Tehran looks to rebuild its nuclear capabilities and strengthen ties with Hamas.
Masoud Pezeshkian made the bold statement in an interview published in state media Saturday, Barron’s reported. “In my opinion, we are at total war with the United States, Israel and Europe. They want to bring our country to its knees,” Pezeshkian said.
I don’t like the sound of that at all.
How does a “total war” end?
Pezeshkian seems to believe that the U.S., Israel and Europe are “besieging” Iran from every direction…
“This war is worse than Iraq’s war against us; if one understands it well, this war is far more complex and difficult than that war,” Pezeshkian said. Iran fought a prolonged war with its neighbor throughout the 1980s.
“In the war with Iraq, the situation was clear: they fired missiles,” the Iranian president said. But the U.S., Israel and European countries politically, economically, culturally “besieging” Iran, as well as impacting the nation’s security, he added.
“On one side, they block our sales, our exchanges, our trade, and on the other side, expectations in society have risen,” Pezeshkian said.
A predator that has been backed into a corner is extremely dangerous.
The Iranians have rebuilt their strategic missile arsenal, and it is now even stronger than it was during the 12 Day War. And Pezeshkian is warning that if Iran is attacked again, those that do so will “face a more decisive response”…
Pezeshkian brushed off the impact of Trump’s strikes in June in his latest remarks, and said Iran’s military has rebuilt to a stronger position than it was in before the conflict.
‘Our beloved military forces are doing their jobs with strength and now, in terms of equipment and manpower, despite all the problems we have, they are stronger than when they attacked,’ he said.
‘So if they want to attack, they will naturally face a more decisive response.’
Needless to say, Pezeshkian is not being paranoid in this particular case, because it is being widely reported that the Israelis are considering an attack on Iran’s ballistic missile program.
In fact, it appears that Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu will be discussing this with President Trump when he travels to Florida on Monday…
Meanwhile, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu is planning to travel to Mar-a-Lago Monday where he is expected to pitch President Trump on a plan to launch new strikes against Tehran.
Israeli sources claim that the Islamic Republic is repairing its air defense systems and rebuilding its ballistic missile program, both of which were destroyed by airstrikes during the war, according to an NBC report.
The Florida powwow also is believed to be crucial to the Gaza deal, with top White House aides believing Netanyahu is sabotaging the peace framework, Axios reported.
Meanwhile, Russian Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov is alleging that our European allies are “getting ready to fight it out with Russia on the battlefield”…
“After a new administration came to power in the United States, Europe and the European Union emerged as the main obstacles to peace,” Russia’s veteran Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov told Russia’s Tass state news agency in an interview published on Sunday. “They are making no secret of the fact that they are getting ready to fight it out with Russia on the battlefield.”
Lavrov is not wrong about this.
In fact, earlier this month I listed a whole bunch of signs that the Europeans are feverishly preparing for war. But the mainstream media keeps telling us that the Ukrainians and the Europeans want peace.
Of course I don’t believe that is true at all. The Ukrainians and the Europeans fully understand that the “peace plan” that they are working on does not have a prayer of actually being accepted by the Russians…
On Christmas Eve, Zelensky said the US and Ukraine had reached a consensus on a number of critical issues, and indicated he was open to creating a demilitarised zone on his country’s eastern border with Russia.
But he has continued to resist Russian demands that Ukraine gives up two of its eastern regions, Luhansk and Donetsk.
Russia is also likely to object to a role for Nato forces in monitoring a ceasefire, which European leaders including Sir Keir and French President Emmanuel Macron have said must form part of any deal.
Once the Russians inevitably reject this “deal”, U.S. Senator Lindsey Graham says that it will be time to start seizing tankers that are carrying Russian oil…
If Putin says “no” this time, I hope the president will sign our bill and impose tariffs on China and other countries purchasing cheap oil from Russia, a state sponsor of terrorism. Therefore, it is equally important to seize and arrest ships carrying sanctioned Russian oil, following the Venezuelan scenario.
And the Europeans may use it as an excuse to start sending troops into Ukraine, even though they know that the Russians have warned over and over again that they will shoot at any European troops that enter the country…
It comes as Moscow warned that any European troop contingents deployed to Ukraine would become legitimate targets for Russia’s armed forces in comments published by Russia’s state news agency TASS on Sunday.
Mr Putin warned that Moscow would accomplish all its goals by force if Ukraine didn’t want to resolve the conflict peacefully.
The Russians have made it very clear what it will take to make a deal.
Since they are winning the war, they feel like they have the right to set the terms.
Of course the Ukrainians and the Europeans will never give the Russians what they want. And so Russian forces will just continue to march forward. In recent weeks, the pace at which the Russians have been taking territory has increased…
In the Zaporozhie southern region, Gulyaipole and Stepnogorsk were conquered. Gulyaipole, the second biggest Zaporozhie city, is an important stronghold and a key logistics hub and it fell after a short siege.
In the Donetsk region, Mirnograd (Dimitrov), Rodinskoye, Artemovka and Volnoye were also conquered. Mirnograd/Dimitrov is an important part of the Pokrovsk/Krasnoarmeysk agglomeration, one of the last major fortified areas under Ukraine’s control in the Donbass.
Within the past few days, there has apparently been a significant breakthrough in the Zaporizhia region.
According to one report, it is “eight kilometers deep in places and 20 kilometers wide”…
Russian troops from the Dnipro Group of Forces have broken through the Kyiv regime’s front west of Orekhovo in the Zaporizhia region. According to military analysts, the breach is up to eight kilometers deep in places and 20 kilometers wide.
According to reports from the field, Russian units are currently advancing toward the settlements of Magdalinovka, Pavlovka, and Lukyanovskoye. Concurrently, the clearing of Stepnogorsk, where a significant Ukrainian Armed Forces force was recently encircled, continues.
The more Russian units advance, the more pressure European leaders will feel to intervene militarily. And if NATO forces move into Ukraine, we will be just one step away from nuclear war.
Sadly, we are also getting closer to war with China. The largest arms sale to Taiwan in history was recently approved, and in response the Chinese slapped sanctions on 20 U.S. defense companies…
China has imposed sanctions against 20 US defence-related companies and 10 executives, a week after Washington announced large-scale arms sales to Taiwan.
According to the Chinese foreign ministry, the sanctions entail freezing the companies’ assets in China and banning individuals and organisations from dealing with them.
“We stress once again that the Taiwan question is at the very core of China’s core interests and the first red line that must not be crossed in China－US relations,” the Chinese foreign ministry said in a statement on Friday.
“Any company or individual who engages in arms sales to Taiwan will pay the price for the wrongdoing.”
Why would we approve such a large arms package for Taiwan when things were already so tense with China?
We just can’t seem to stop provoking the Chinese. Needless to say, the Chinese are also very upset that we have been seizing Venezuelan oil tankers…
China on Monday accused the U.S. of violating international law in seizing oil tankers off the coast of Venezuela, appearing to take the side of Caracas as Washington looks to take a third oil tanker this month.
“The U.S. practice of arbitrarily seizing other countries’ vessels grossly violates international law,” Chinese Foreign Ministry spokesperson Lin Jian told reporters, according to Bloomberg, adding that Beijing opposes anything that “infringes upon other countries’ sovereignty and security, and all acts of unilateralism or bullying.”
Lin added that Venezuela “has the right to independently develop mutually beneficial cooperation with other countries,” and Beijing supports Caracas in “defending its own legitimate rights and interests.”
Venezuela has the most proven oil reserves on the entire planet, and the Chinese purchase more oil from Venezuela than everyone else combined.
Ultimately, a military confrontation with Venezuela could eventually evolve into a military confrontation with China. The time to stop a war is before it starts. If we do not choose peace now, the consequences could be cataclysmic. When will everybody finally start waking up?
We are literally at one of the most critical turning points in history, but most people in the western world have become so deeply addicted to entertainment that they have absolutely no idea what is really going on out there.
2 Of The Most Prominent Buzzwords For The U.S. Economy In 2025 Were “Affordability” And “Layoffs”
If you are having a really difficult time keeping up with the rapidly rising cost of living, you are certainly not alone. This year, “affordability” was a buzzword that was constantly on the lips of politicians, economists and talking heads on television.
As you will see below, Americans are being slammed by rising prices from a multitude of directions. Meanwhile, “layoffs” has been another buzzword that has been widely used in 2025. Thanks to the rise of AI and our steadily deteriorating economy, we have seen far more mass layoffs this year than we did last year. Unfortunately, one survey has found that executives are gearing up for an even larger round in 2026.
This is what happens when you flood the system with money and you go into unprecedented amounts of debt.
Eventually a day of reckoning arrives.
Ever since the Great Recession, our leaders have been pursuing highly inflationary policies, and now the American people “are yelling about affordability”…
Affordability has been a source of household frustration and a key focus of political discourse in recent months, as prices for everyday goods and services continue to rise.
“People are yelling about affordability,” said Martha Gimbel, executive director and co-founder of the Budget Lab at Yale University. “I think it’s very obviously become a political flash point,” she said.
It wasn’t a foregone conclusion that things would turn out this way. If we had made different choices, we would have gotten different results.
But we can’t go back and change the past now. At this point, things are so bad that “affordability” has become the number one concern for U.S. voters…
A University of Michigan poll published in December shows that high prices remain a pain point for consumers. About 46% blame high prices for poor personal finances — among the highest shares since the series started in the late 1970s.
Consumers’ views of their current financial situation in December “collapsed” into negative territory for the first time since July 2022, the month after pandemic-era inflation had peaked, according to a poll published Tuesday by the Conference Board.
Overall, 65% of U.S. households say the cost of living has gotten worse or much worse in the past year, according to a recent Politico poll.
Healthcare costs have risen particularly rapidly.
One 62-year-old man that was recently interviewed by Business Insider openly admitted that he cannot afford to get sick, but he can’t afford to be healthy either…
David Deal’s 2026 outlook is what he describes as a “whack-a-mole of worry.” While he’s 62 and presumably approaching retirement, 65 is “just a number” for him, not a milestone marker for throwing in the towel on his career like his parents’ generation. The thing that really has him wound up, though, is healthcare, which he calls a “DEFCON 1” situation. Deal, a marketing consultant who lives in the Chicago suburbs, and his wife pay for their own insurance, and their premiums are going up by 25% next year. He’s worried one slip on the ice this winter could mean financial disaster. A family member’s recent two-hour trip to the ER cost them thousands of dollars, even with insurance, and the episode has him spooked.
“For me, it’s the double-whammy of skyrocketing premiums and also the skyrocketing costs of actually getting care,” he says. “We are literally at a point where we can’t afford to be sick, and we can’t afford to be healthy.”
He emphasizes that he means a collective “we” — he knows he’s far from alone in his predicament.
Health insurance premiums are set to rise even higher in 2026, and many Americans are cancelling their policies as a result.
When you don’t have health insurance, you just pray that you don’t get sick. If you do get sick, it can be a financial disaster.
Meanwhile, one recent survey discovered that 75 percent of Americans have “reduced spending in other areas” just so that they can afford to pay for their groceries…
But whatever their preferences, many shoppers still fretted about how to pay for their groceries. More than 2 in 3 respondents (67.6%) said that they’re struggling to pay grocery bills because of inflation and rising food prices, according to a survey by Swiftly, which provides digital and media solutions for brick-and-mortar supermarkets.
More than 3 out of 4 (75.2%) responded that they’ve reduced spending in other areas to afford groceries, and in a follow-up question selected what areas they’ve cut spending in the most to pay grocery bills, with entertainment spending the most likely to be cut, followed by spending on travel, clothing, and going out to eat or drink.
Government bureaucrats keep telling us that food prices are not going up very quickly. But everyone can see that they are wrong.
And going out to eat has become a luxury that most of the population simply cannot afford on a regular basis. As a result, restaurants are closing down at a staggering pace…
New data shows that 2025 was a record year for restaurant closures in the District.
The Restaurant Association of Metropolitan Washington (RAMW) reports 92 restaurants closed their doors this year, compared to 73 closures in 2024 and 48 in 2022.
Purchasing a new vehicle has also become a luxury that most of the population simply cannot afford any longer.
Since the early days of the pandemic, the average price of a new vehicle has gone from less than $38,000 to more than $50,000…
Americans are shelling out record car payments — and now some are signing up for loans stretching nearly a decade to get a new set of wheels.
The average monthly payment for a new car hit about $760 in November, according to industry-research firm J.D. Power, after the typical new-vehicle price surged past the $50,000 mark this fall — up from less than $38,000 in early 2020.
With sticker shock everywhere, buyers are leaning hard on longer financing to keep payments from exploding — even if that means paying far more interest over time.
Some dealers are now stretching out vehicle payments for 100 months so that people can actually afford them.
To me, that is absolutely insane.
But this is the economic system that we live in now. It is designed to get us into as much debt as possible, and at this stage U.S. households are a whopping 18.6 trillion dollars in debt…
The Federal Reserve signaled a higher bar for 2026 interest rate cuts at its December meeting, potentially snatching away a much-needed reprieve for millions of Americans saddled with debt.
Household debt ballooned to a record $18.6 trillion during the third quarter of 2025, and the central bank is expected to lower its benchmark rate just once or twice next year to soften borrowing costs.
Americans have never been more overextended than they are right now. It was another record year for credit card debt during the holiday season, but vast numbers of our fellow citizens are still paying off credit card debt from Christmas 2024.
Getting deep into debt in this very challenging economic environment is very foolish, because most people do not have jobs that are secure. In fact, job security is now the number two concern for U.S. voters…
Job security rose to workers’ second-most pressing concern this year, after covering their monthly expenses, according to a new survey by Mercer.
While “covering monthly expenses” had been the leading concern for the past three annual surveys, fears around job loss jumped from seventh place in 2023 to second place in 2025, where it was tied with being able to retire and work-life balance. Mercer did not conduct this survey in 2024.
Throughout this year, I have documented so many of the mass layoffs that have been occurring all over the nation.
For example, Tyson Foods has announced that a beef processing facility in Lexington, Nebraska will be shut down permanently next month, and that means that approximately 3,200 workers will be losing their jobs.
A reporter that visited Lexington discovered that fear of what those layoffs would mean had gripped the entire area…
On a frigid day after Mass at St. Ann’s Catholic Church in rural Nebraska, worshipers shuffled into the basement and sat on folding chairs, their faces barely masking the fear gripping their town.
There are only about 11,000 people living in Lexington, and so these layoffs have the potential to turn it into a ghost town…
“Suddenly they tell us that there’s no more work. Your world closes in on you,” Alejandra Gutierrez said
She and the others work at Tyson Foods’ beef plant and are among the 3,200 people who will lose their jobs when Lexington’s biggest employer closes the plant next month after more than two decades of operation.
Hundreds of families may be forced to pack up and leave the town of 11,000, heading east to Omaha or Iowa, or south to the meatpacking towns of Kansas or beyond, causing spinoff layoffs in Lexington’s restaurants, barbershops, grocers, convenience stores and taco trucks.
There are so many other examples that I could share with you.
In Michigan, the closure of a facility in Detroit will mean that more than a thousand General Motors employees will be out of work starting on January 5th…
According to WARN Act notices filed in November, 1,140 General Motors employees will be let go from the company’s Factory Zero site in Detroit, Michigan on January 5.
In a filing with the Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Opportunity, General Motors said the cuts would be permanent, affect several roles, and stemmed from adjustments related to the slower-than-expected adoption of electric vehicles.
Sadly, this is just the beginning.
According to one recent survey, over one-third of all large companies intend to slash their payrolls during the months ahead…
In November, executive search firm Spencer Stuart asked 90 chief marketing officers how aggressively they plan to use AI to shrink payrolls, the Wall Street Journal reported.
More than one in three executives said that they expect to hand out pink slips in the next 12 to 24 months as they deploy more computer agents.
The trend is even worse among bigger companies.
Nearly half the executives at firms worth more than $20 billion said they’re planning significant job cuts.
If this survey is accurate, we could see millions of layoffs over the next couple of years.
Just think about that.
We were warned that this was going to happen. Now it is playing out right in front of our eyes. And survey after survey is indicating that the American people are quite gloomy about where economic conditions are heading next…
Americans are ending 2025 significantly more pessimistic about the direction of their financial situations than they were at the start of the year, according to the University of Michigan’s consumer sentiment gauge from early December. Its reading on personal finance expectations is 12% below where it was at the beginning of the year. A November consumer survey from the Federal Reserve Bank of New York similarly found that people are increasingly gloomy about their current and future finances, and their expectations for increased medical care costs are at their highest levels since January 2014.
If you understand what is happening, that will help you to make better decisions. When conditions get tough, those that are wise tighten things up.
Sadly, most of the population continues to party as if tomorrow will never come, but no matter how hard one may try it is impossible to stop the inexorable march of time.
The Global Persecution Of Christians Has Greatly Intensified In 2025
While Christians in the western world peacefully celebrate Christmas, most of them have absolutely no idea what is happening to their brothers and sisters on the other side of the globe.
As I detailed a couple of months ago, most of the population of the world lives in a country where Christians are being violently persecuted. Believers are being rounded up for de-programming in China, churches are being burned to the ground by Hindu extremists in India, Christians are literally being cut into pieces by Islamic radicals in some parts of Africa, practicing your faith can be a death sentence in certain areas of the Middle East, and North Korean concentration camps are teeming with people that are suspected of worshipping Christ. Perhaps if we were facing similar levels of persecution, believers in the western world would start becoming a lot more serious about their faith.
More than a billion people live in China, and the persecution of Christians in that nation has gone to an entirely different level in 2025.
Earlier this month, over a thousand law enforcement personnel were involved in a massive operation that ultimately resulted in the arrest of hundreds of Christians…
Starting on Dec. 13, the Chinese Communist Party mobilized “more than a thousand police officers, SWAT units, anti-riot forces, and firefighters” in the Zhejiang Province’s Yayang Town in Wenzhou City, raiding churches and conducting mass arrests of Christians, ChinaAid reported Friday.
“Belongings of relevant individuals were illegally confiscated, roads leading to the church were completely blocked by police, and Christians in Yayang Town were unable to enter the Yayang church. The operation lasted nearly five days, yet no public statement was issued by officials,” the outlet noted. “Within just the first two days, several hundreds of people were taken away for questioning. On December 16 and 17, at least four more individuals were detained.”
Restrictions on the Christian faith in China just keep getting tighter and tighter.
Nobody under the age of 18 is permitted to go to church. Those that are adults are only allowed to go to churches that are officially registered with the government.
Anyone that attempts to defy these rules is at risk of being rounded up and forcibly “de-programmed”…
The U.S. Commission on International Religious Freedom (USCIRF) and other religious liberty watchdogs have repeatedly warned that China’s totalitarian regime is enacting human rights abuses against religious groups within the nation’s border. A USCIRF report late last year detailed mass arrests and the destruction or removal of church property, part of CCP President Xi Jinping’s “sinicization of religion” policy. Religious groups and leaders who do not register with the official government-approved religious organizations are often arrested, imprisoned, and forced into “anti-cult” programs to “de-program” Christians.
In India, it is Hindu extremists that are doing the persecuting. They have literally burned down hundreds of churches in recent years.
In other instances, mobs of Hindu extremists storm churches and start attacking those that are worshipping. Earlier this year, I wrote about a mob of 200 extremists that stormed a church and beat the believers they found with iron rods.
More recently, an extremist mob in northern India viciously assaulted a small group of believers and forced them to burn a large pile of Bibles and Christian literature…
The Hindu extremists, whose number had then reached 80, searched their car, pulled out all Bibles and tracts and cast them onto the ground into a heap. They shot videos that showed the two couples, disoriented and in shock, forced to repeat that they intended “conversion” in the village and that they would never return.
The mob kicked the Bibles and spoke disrespectfully about Christ, Masih said.
Pastor Das was forced to write a letter of apology that the video shows in his hand. A member of the mob then took a bottle of flammable liquid from the hands of a boy standing with the mob and forced three of the Christians to sprinkle it on the Bibles and literature. After forcing Pastor Das to set the Bibles on fire, the mob then shouted praises to the Hindu god Rama.
In Nigeria, thousands upon thousands of Christians have been slaughtered this year alone.
President Trump had warned that he would do something about the Islamic terrorists that are doing the slaughtering, and on Christmas Day he took action…
President Trump said Thursday that the U.S. launched “powerful and deadly” strikes against Islamic State forces in Nigeria, after spending weeks accusing the West African country’s government of failing to rein in the persecution of Christians.
“Tonight, at my direction as Commander in Chief, the United States launched a powerful and deadly strike against ISIS Terrorist Scum in Northwest Nigeria, who have been targeting and viciously killing, primarily, innocent Christians, at levels not seen for many years, and even Centuries!” Mr. Trump wrote on his social media platform Truth Social. “I have previously warned these Terrorists that if they did not stop the slaughtering of Christians, there would be hell to pay, and tonight, there was.”
Hopefully this will do something to reduce the violence.
So far in 2025, Islamic terrorists in Nigeria have killed over 12,000 people…
The violence in the northwest region, where the strikes occurred, is driven in large part by armed bandits and gangs kidnapping for ransom. The insurgency is concentrated in the northeast, where jihadist groups like the notorious Boko Haram and its now more powerful splinter, the Islamic State West Africa Province, an affiliate of the Islamic State group, have killed tens of thousands of civilians over the past decade.
Nigeria is not officially at war, but more people are killed there than in most war-torn countries. More than 12,000 people were killed by various violent groups this year alone, according to Armed Conflict Location and Event Data, a conflict monitoring group.
Collectively, more than three billion people live in the three nations that I have already mentioned in this article.
But the persecution that is going on in smaller countries such as North Korea and Eritrea is even worse…
Henrietta Blyth, CEO of Open Doors U.K. and Ireland, previously told Newsweek: “The persecution of Christians around the world is one of the great untold scandals of the 21st Century… It can take many forms: in North Korea, it may be a summary public execution without trial, merely for owning a Bible. In Eritrea, it can be 10 years spent in a blazing hot prison cell made from a metal shipping container, merely for belonging to an unregistered house church.”
According to Open Doors, North Korea is the number one global offender when it comes to Christian persecution, and Eritrea is number four…
North Korea, Somalia, Libya, Eritrea, Yemen, Nigeria, Pakistan, Sudan, Iran, Afghanistan, Central African Republic, Mauritania, Myanmar, Mali, Syria, Saudi Arabia, Maldives, China, Algeria, Tunisia, Morocco, Burkina Faso, Turkey, Cuba, Niger, Ethiopia, Laos, Tajikistan, Qatar, Egypt, Brunei, Jordan, Oman, United Arab Emirates, Colombia, Democratic Republic of Congo, Mozambique, Bangladesh, Vietnam, Bhutan, Kazakhstan, Kuwait, Malaysia, Indonesia, Kyrgyzstan, Russia, Sri Lanka, Western Sahara, Kosovo, Bahrain
I was amazed to see that there are 17 nations that rank ahead of China, because China has become a Big Brother police state on steroids.
Perhaps China ranks lower than some of the others because instead of just killing them, the Chinese round Christians up and simply make them “disappear”. The good news is that persecution often makes the Christian faith grow rapidly, and we are seeing this happen in many areas of the globe.
In fact, it appears that we could actually use some serious persecution here in the United States, because what we are experiencing at this moment is being described as “the great unchurching”…
The U.S. is undergoing its fastest religious shift in modern history, marked by a rapid increase in the religiously unaffiliated and numerous church closures nationwide.
Why it matters: The great unchurching of America comes as identity and reality are increasingly shaped by non-institutional spiritual sources — YouTube mystics, TikTok tarot, digital skeptics, folk saints and AI-generated prayer bots.
When you are facing the fire of persecution, what you do or don’t believe suddenly becomes very clear.
Throughout human history, tyrants have tried and failed to stamp out the Christian faith. The same thing is true in our time. Countless believers are choosing imprisonment or death rather than choosing to deny Christ.
If you were faced with the same choice, what would you choose? You might want to think about that, because the global persecution of Christians is only going to intensify during the very challenging years that are ahead of us.
Global Election Voter Fraud
Source; Operation Disclosure, Judy Byington
Voter Fraud SMARTMATIC & DOMINION voting machines are the foreign puppet masters of the global election fraud cartel.
Dominion Voting Systems—purportedly a U.S.-based company with ties to Venezuela operating with its true “center of gravity” in Serbia, backed by Chinese influence. Venezuelan, Chinese, and Serbian engineers hold admin keys to manipulate US elections.
There is a pattern of deception with around 15 different cheating methods, but this backdoor exploit stands out for its stealth, scale, and capability to be accessed from almost anywhere. Smartmatic’s election-rigging source code, owned by Venezuela’s narco-regime (Cartel del Sol), powers Dominion systems and is designed to flip votes completely undetected. The key ties lay within the Serbian Hub. Dominion’s Belgrade office houses swing-state voter data on Huawei servers – directly linked to CCP-controlled Huawei in Hong Kong.
CCP fingerprints are all over this and the shadow player. The hardware is built in Beijing and snuck through Taiwan in violation of US law. Huawei flagged as natsec threat by the FCC. The “Glitch Trap” is one of the easiest and most common methods of election fraud. Pre-election “glitches” in Dominion machines are no accident.
These prompt emergency patches that conveniently open backdoors, allowing remote access from Dominion’s Serbian offices. Now, it’s on to the foreign side of the actual election manipulation. Far from mere R&D, the Serbian hub is described as the operational core, running on Huawei servers—Chinese technology at the heart of U.S. elections. Chinese nationals, funneled through a military institute, log in during elections to manipulate results. Virtual manipulation is crucial to the facade until the completion of the manipulation occurs.
Using virtual machines software-based servers created invisibly within county election systems—intruders reportedly alter databases at will. Once done, they collapse the virtual setup, leaving no trace unless a deep forensic audit uncovers the digital footprints. This isn’t just fraud it’s a national security threat. It’s foreign interference by Maduro’s cartel, China’s CCP, and the globalist deep state cabal to steal democracies in the U.S. and in 100+ other countries worldwide.
As Silver Surges Toward The Magical $100 Mark, Global Debt Levels Are Exploding And The U.S. Dollar Is Dying
This year silver has been on the greatest bull run that we have ever seen. It is up an astounding 166 percent since January 1st, and so those that purchased it long ago and stuck with it are really loving life right now.
When the price of silver reached the 50 dollar mark earlier this year, I thought that it would be some time before it hit the 60 dollar mark. But of course the truth is that it didn’t take long at all. Once the price of silver reached 60 dollars, I thought that it might hit 70 dollars some time in early 2026. If you check the latest numbers, you will see that we have easily blown past that threshold, and the price of silver has already surpassed 80 dollars in Shanghai. I know that I have been using the word “crazy” a lot lately, but without a doubt what we are witnessing at this moment is truly “crazy”.
So why is this happening?
In a previous article, I discussed factors such as the AI boom, strong industrial demand, new technologies and a spike in demand for physical silver in Asia.
But let’s step back for a moment and take a look at the bigger picture.
To me, it is not a coincidence that the price of silver is exploding at the exact same time that we are reaching the terminal phase of the largest global debt super cycle in history…
Global debt has climbed to an all-time high of $337.7 trillion by the end of the second quarter of 2025, according to the latest Global Debt Monitor from the Institute of International Finance (IIF). The first half of 2025 alone saw an increase of over $21 trillion, largely driven by accommodative financial conditions, a softer US dollar, and continued government borrowing.
This jump is comparable to the COVID-era debt explosion in 2020, when governments and corporations worldwide dramatically ramped up spending to tackle the pandemic.
This is the first time in world history that all of the major powers are facing a nightmarish debt crisis simultaneously.
As this 337.7 trillion dollar debt bubble bursts, it is going to be so important to have your money somewhere safe. So it makes all the sense in the world that there is so much demand for silver right now.
Long-term bond yields have been surging all over the globe, and this is even happening in nations that were once considered to be “safe havens” such as Japan and Germany…
Long-term yields are rising sharply across many countries, including in Germany and Japan, which in the past used to be safe havens. That puts huge pressure on fiscally distressed countries like Italy and France and incentivizes short-termism. If the EU wants to become a geopolitical player, it can’t allow high-debt countries to dictate foreign policy. This has to stop.
Meanwhile, fiat currencies are rapidly losing value, and that has particularly been true for the U.S. dollar…
The U.S. dollar was on the back foot on Wednesday and set for its biggest yearly fall since 2017, possibly with more to come, as investors wagered the Federal Reserve would have room to cut rates further next year even as most of its peers look finished with easing.
Tuesday’s solid U.S. GDP reading failed to move the dial on the rate outlook, leaving investors pricing in roughly two more Fed cuts in 2026.
This has been a horrible year for the U.S. dollar.
That is one of the reasons why the purchasing power of your money doesn’t stretch as far as it once did.
For the year, the U.S. dollar index is down about 10 percent…
Against a basket of currencies, the dollar index fell to a 2-1/2-month low of 97.767. It was on track to lose 9.8% for the year, which would mark its steepest annual drop since 2017. Any further weakness in the last week of the year would take its fall to its greatest since 2003.
Please keep in mind that the other currencies that the U.S. dollar is being measured against are rapidly losing value as well.
It is just that the U.S. dollar is losing value even faster.
One of the reasons why the U.S. dollar is losing value so rapidly is because global central banks are becoming less dependent on it…
The share of USD-denominated assets held by other central banks dropped to 56.9% of total foreign exchange reserves in Q3, the lowest since 1994, from 57.1% in Q2 and 58.5% in Q1, according to the IMF’s new data on Currency Composition of Official Foreign Exchange Reserves.
USD-denominated foreign exchange reserves include US Treasury securities, US mortgage-backed securities (MBS), US agency securities, US corporate bonds, and other USD-denominated assets held by central banks other than the Fed.
This is not good news at all.
Because as Wolf Richter has aptly pointed out, having the reserve currency of the world has been a massive advantage for us…
Foreign central banks buying USD-denominated assets, such as Treasury securities, helps push up prices and push down yields of those assets. Being the dominant reserve currency had the effect of helping the US borrow more cheaply to fund its huge twin deficits – the trade deficit and the budget deficit – and thereby has enabled the US to run those huge twin deficits for decades. At some point, this continued decline as a reserve currency, as it reduces demand for USD debt, would make the trade deficit and the budget deficit more difficult to sustain.
People have been talking about the death of the U.S. dollar for a long time.
The U.S. dollar is certainly not dead yet, but the fact that it is in the process of dying should deeply alarm us. The entire global financial system is shifting, and right now there is a global race to accumulate precious metals. This is particularly true for silver…
Silver has been designated critical by the United States. Russia has increased accumulation. India has discouraged selling while encouraging the use of silver as collateral. The Middle East is preparing silver-linked tokenized instruments. Demand is rising across jurisdictions.
At the same time, there have been some things going on behind the scenes that have caused the price of silver to go parabolic over the last couple of months…
Here’s the next dot: over the last two months, there has been a massive inflow of silver from Latin America into the United States. Not into China. Into the U.S.
Who is one clearinghouse? JPMorgan.
On Black Friday, JPMorgan effectively pulled silver off the market. That removal of available supply triggered a forced response elsewhere. Someone in China who was structurally short silver had to cover, and cover aggressively. That wasn’t a trade. That was a scramble.
I don’t see how the price of silver can keep going up at this rate.
At some point it will stabilize. But of course silver is not the only precious metal that is in great demand right now.
On Friday, the price of platinum and the price of palladium both went absolutely haywire…
Elsewhere, spot platinum rose 8.7% to $2,411.46 per ounce, having earlier hit a record high of $2,448.25, while palladium climbed nearly 10% to $1,850.76.
For those that have invested in precious metals, what we are witnessing at this moment is such good news.
Conversely, unprecedented volatility in the prices of precious metals is a major red flag for the global financial system. Bond yields are going nuts, cryptocurrencies have already crashed, and global stock markets are flashing huge warning signs. Many are anticipating a great deal of financial chaos in 2026, and at this stage it is hard to argue that they are wrong.
X22 Report — Devin Nunes: No Escape from Grand Conspiracy, Trials will Happen in Florida
In a recent video on Rumble, X22 Report’s guest, Devin Nunes, CEO of the Trump Media & Technology Group (TMTG), shared his thoughts on the future of power, the grand conspiracy against President Trump, and the impending trials in Florida. The conversation, streamed on December 26, offered a glimpse into the evolving landscape of American politics and technology.
Nunes began by discussing the trajectory of TMTG, the company behind the Truth Social platform. He revealed that the organization is aggressively pivoting towards a multifaceted digital ecosystem that incorporates cryptocurrency, artificial intelligence, financial services, and fusion power. This strategic shift is made possible by a significant partnership with TAE Technologies, a leader in fusion power. The deal, valued at over $6 billion, aims to construct the first utility-scale fusion plant by 2026, potentially making the United States energy independent.
According to Nunes, this collaboration is a game-changer that will propel America into the future. By harnessing fusion power, TMTG is not only promoting clean and unlimited energy but also challenging the existing green energy paradigm, which Nunes criticizes for relying on Chinese solar panels and windmills. This move is seen as a significant step towards achieving energy independence and sticking it to the “radical left’s green energy scams.”
The conversation then turned to the grand conspiracy against President Trump, which Nunes described as a clear and coordinated effort by the deep state, the corrupt FBI, and the weaponized DOJ. Nunes characterized the 2022 raid on Mar-a-Lago as a “total hoax” and a “fishing expedition,” alleging that it was motivated by a desire to suppress declassified documents exposing the Russia collusion lies. The impending trials in Florida, Nunes argued, are part of a larger lawfare campaign orchestrated by Jack Smith and the Biden regime to tie Trump up in court with bogus charges.
Nunes’ assertions echo a familiar narrative: that the Trump administration has been subjected to relentless persecution since its inception, from the Mueller witch hunt to the impeachments and now the Florida trials. According to Nunes, these efforts are designed to prevent Trump from “draining the swamp” and putting America first. However, Nunes suggested that this strategy is backfiring, and the truth is slowly coming to light.
The video offers a thought-provoking analysis of the current state of American politics and the forces shaping the future. As the country hurtles towards a critical juncture, Nunes’ insights provide a valuable perspective on the intersection of power, technology, and conspiracy. For those seeking a deeper understanding of these complex issues, the full video on X22 Report’s Rumble channel is a must-watch.
As the narrative around Trump’s trials and the grand conspiracy continues to unfold, one thing is certain: the stakes are high, and the outcome will have far-reaching implications for the United States. Whether or not one agrees with Nunes’ views, his commentary serves as a reminder that the battle for control of the narrative is far from over. As the world watches, it remains to be seen how this saga will play out and what the future holds for America.
Devin Nunes – Power Is Key To The Future, No Escape From Grand Conspiracy, Trials Will Happen In Florida
This X22 Report and The People has been put together to benefit “The People”. When I say “The People” I am talking about everyone in the world. We as a people want freedom, we want to make a living to support our family. The founding fathers of America wanted this and We The People today want it. Join me and many others to fight what is rightfully ours.
The X22 Report presents a narrative of profound systemic change in the United States, emphasizing economic transformation, political and legal battles, and potential military intervention for accountability. The report suggests that the existing global financial order, attributed to a “Deep State” and Central Banks, is contributing to its own collapse, paving the way for a nationalist economic structure. A key indicator of this shift is the growing divergence between red states and blue states, with red states portrayed as more resilient and aligned with a new nationalist blueprint, while blue states are seen as tied to a failing globalist model.
Economic policies under focus include the replacement of foreign workers with American labor, signaling a move toward protectionism, supply chain integrity, and self-sufficiency, framed as central to a broader economic plan revealed by President Trump. Additionally, the report highlights Trump’s readiness to exploit domestic energy reserves—termed “liquid gold”—such as oil and natural gas, aiming for energy independence and reduced foreign reliance. Agricultural relief efforts, including redirecting water to drought-stricken California farms, and increased Chinese demand for U.S. soybeans, are also cited as signs of economic resurgence.
On the industrial front, the U.S. is depicted as poised to regain its status as a manufacturing powerhouse, with projects like the development of compact “tiny cars” symbolizing innovation amid resource constraints. Industrial production rose 0.2% month-over-month in November, with year-over-year growth reaching 2.52%, the strongest since April 2022. The U.S. economy reportedly grew at a 4.3% annual rate in the third quarter of 2025, the fastest pace in two years, driven by a 3.5% increase in consumer spending.
Regarding the business cycle, as of late 2025, states accounting for about one-third of U.S. GDP are either in recession or at high risk, particularly in the Northeast and on the West Coast. States like Illinois (3.85% of GDP), Washington (3.02%), and Georgia (3.03%) are labeled “In Recession/High Risk”. Another third of the economy is expanding, led by Texas (9.41% of GDP) and Florida (5.78%). California (14.50% of GDP) and New York (7.92%) are categorized as “Treading Water”.
In the legal and political sphere, the report alleges that the [DS] uses lawfare and activist judges to obstruct justice, citing the dismissal of cases involving figures like Comey and James. It argues that civilian judicial reform may require impeaching these judges, and ultimately, military tribunals may be the only viable path to full accountability due to systemic corruption. Geopolitically, Trump is said to be nearing a peace deal between Russia and Ukraine, opposed by the [DS], and planning to designate the Muslim Brotherhood as a terrorist organization. The resurrection of the Monroe Doctrine is also highlighted, signaling a shift toward U.S. sovereignty and a reconfiguration of international alliances.
Rudolf’s Light: A Christmas Story for a Changing World
Guided by Light: A Christmas Message of Hope
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
The winter of 2025 arrived after a long and difficult year. Systems strained, voices grew louder, and many felt unmoored as familiar structures faltered. Headlines carried more fear than clarity, and uncertainty touched homes in quiet, personal ways. Yet beneath the turbulence, something important was happening: people were learning to slow down, to question more deeply, and to listen—to themselves and to one another.
In the midst of these stormy times, Rudolf the red-nosed reindeer became a symbol of something simple and profound. His light did not overpower the darkness or pretend the storm wasn’t real. It did something far more meaningful—it illuminated just enough of the path to keep moving forward. In a year when certainty was scarce, Rudolf reminded us that progress doesn’t require having all the answers, only the courage to take the next honest step.
As the sleigh moved through heavy clouds and shifting winds, it wasn’t speed or force that carried it through—it was steadiness. Rudolf didn’t rush, didn’t panic, didn’t turn back. His calm light guided others who were unsure, tired, or afraid. In that way, he reflected what many discovered in 2025: that resilience grows not from resistance, but from clarity, compassion, and quiet resolve.
Below, people gathered during the Christmas season with a new awareness. Conversations felt more sincere. Traditions felt more meaningful. Small acts of kindness carried greater weight. Even amid unresolved challenges, there was a shared sense that humanity was remembering something essential—that peace begins within, and that light shared gently travels farther than fear shouted loudly.
This Christmas, our message is simple: the storms of 2025 did not break us—they revealed us. Like Rudolf, we don’t need to banish the darkness to move forward. We only need to choose to be steady, to be kind, and to be a light for one another when the path feels unclear. In doing so, we carry hope into the future—not as wishful thinking, but as a lived, guiding presence.
The Table Where the Light Gathered
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
Christmas Day arrived quietly, without urgency. Snow rested softly along the windowsills, and the house carried the familiar scent of roasting food and evergreen. From the youngest child tugging at a ribbon to the eldest grandparent settling carefully into their chair, every generation gathered around the same table. It wasn’t a perfect table, but it was a full one—and that mattered more than anything else.
The children spoke first, laughing freely, unaware of how precious their joy sounded to those who had lived longer. Teenagers drifted between the table and their phones, half-present at first, until stories began to pull them in. Parents exchanged knowing looks as they passed dishes, remembering Christmases past and quietly realizing how quickly time moves. The elders watched it all with gentle smiles, recognizing the miracle not in the gifts, but in the togetherness unfolding before them.
As the meal was shared, conversations softened. Differences that once felt heavy seemed smaller in the glow of candlelight. There were moments of silence—not awkward, but peaceful—where everyone simply ate, breathed, and felt the warmth of being home. It was in those pauses that the true meaning of Christmas revealed itself: not in grand gestures, but in shared presence, forgiveness, and gratitude.
After dinner, plates stacked and chairs pulled closer, stories flowed freely. Old memories were retold, some for the hundredth time, yet listened to as if they were new. Children curled up beside grandparents. Laughter echoed down the hallway. Outside, the world remained uncertain, but inside that room, there was safety, connection, and a quiet knowing that this—this was what mattered most.
That night, as the candles burned low and the house settled into stillness, something lingered in the air. It was the understanding that Christmas is not a day on the calendar, but a choice—to gather, to love, to listen, and to carry that light forward. And for everyone at the table, young and old alike, it was enough to last the whole year.
GAR Christmas Reflection
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
As this year comes to a close, Christmas invites us to pause—not to escape what has been revealed, but to reflect on it with clarity and grace. The events of the past year tested systems, beliefs, and assumptions, yet they also reminded us of what remains unshaken. Beneath the noise and uncertainty, deeper truths surfaced—about resilience, discernment, and the quiet strength found in connection.
Christmas is not a denial of the storms we’ve lived through; it is a reminder that light does not require perfect conditions to exist. It appears in moments of honesty, in shared meals, in conversations that bridge generations, and in the choice to meet complexity with compassion rather than fear. These are not small acts—they are stabilizing forces in a changing world.
At The Great Awakening Report, we view this season as a threshold—not an ending, but a moment of integration. What we’ve learned matters. What we carry forward matters. As we gather with family and loved ones, we are reminded that awareness without heart is incomplete, and that peace begins not in systems, but in people.
This Christmas, may we honor both truth and tenderness. May we move into the coming year steady, present, and grounded—willing to be a light for one another when the path ahead is still forming. That, above all, is the spirit we carry forward.
A Christmas Message? A “Bomb Cyclone” That Will Slam Into California On Christmas Eve Will Cause 100 MPH Winds And Up To 120 Inches Of Snow
To say that some parts of California are going to experience a “white Christmas” this year would be an enormous understatement. Some of the numbers that I am going to share with you in this article are difficult to believe, but I did not come up with any of them. Respected meteorologists are issuing forecasts that seem like they have been pulled directly out of a Hollywood disaster movie. How much crazier will things have to get before people start to realize that what we are experiencing is not even close to normal?
Last week, I wrote an article about what has been happening in the Northwest. Trillions of gallons of rain have fallen, flooding has been so bad that some roads will be closed for months, and at least 9 different states experienced wind speeds of at least 100 mph.
If all of that wasn’t enough, now we are being told that a “bomb cyclone” is going to hit California on Christmas Eve…
A strong storm system known as a bomb cyclone is lining up to slam the U.S. on Christmas Eve, possibly complicating holiday travel and bringing gusty winds that could cause power outages.
The forecast comes as much of California remains under some form of National Weather Service (NWS) alert on Monday as an atmospheric river inundates the state with heavy rain and mountain snow. Conditions are expected to worsen as the week progresses, with a bomb cyclone set to slam the West Coast on Christmas Eve.
Some people may be tempted to think that we are sensationalizing things when we say that a “bomb cyclone” is coming.
But that is not the case at all.
It is a very technical meteorological term that only applies under very strict conditions…
Bomb cyclone is a meteorological term for a storm undergoing bombogenesis. This occurs when a storm’s central pressure drops at least 24 millibars within 24 hours. The lower the pressure, the more powerful the storm becomes.
This is the first “bomb cyclone” to hit California this year.
And one expert is warning that the forecast just “keeps getting worse”…
And the storm forecast just “keeps getting worse,” according to KTLA weather anchor Mark Kriski.
Major travel disruptions, mudslides, flooding and other safety hazards are expected to come at one of the busiest travel times of the year, the National Weather Service said, urging residents to prepare.
In addition to all that, we are being told that we could even see “a tornado or two” if conditions are just right.
But things will get really crazy once the storm reaches the mountains…
- Greater Lake Tahoe communities may see up to 2 feet of snow at lake level and 4 feet above 7,000 feet, with winds reaching 100 mph from Tuesday night through Friday morning.
- A powerful winter storm is forecast to blanket California’s Sierra Nevada with up to five feet of snow and winds nearing 55 mph from Tuesday evening through Friday, creating hazardous holiday travel conditions and prompting a National Weather Service warning.
- Mono County could see 10–20 inches of snow, with higher elevations reaching 4 feet and winds up to 100 mph.
- Yosemite National Park may be buried under as much as 8 feet of snow, with winds near 50 mph lasting through Friday.
- Siskiyou County, including Snowman’s Summit, is expected to receive 1–3 feet of snow and winds up to 60 mph; elevations above 4,500 feet could see 5 feet of snow.
Wow. I can’t even imagine what conditions will be like with that much wind and that much snow.
If you live in those areas, please do not attempt to travel anywhere.
According to AccuWeather Chief On-Air Meteorologist Bernie Rayno, the peaks of the Sierra Nevada mountains are probably going to get “at least 10 feet of snow this week”…
“We’re probably looking at, at least 10 feet of snow this week over the ridges and peaks of the Sierra Nevada, which is what they need from an upcoming summer water demand standpoint,” AccuWeather Chief On-Air Meteorologist Bernie Rayno said.
10 feet equals 120 inches.
I have never lived anywhere that has gotten 120 inches of snow in a week.
Have you?
Needless to say, conditions will be much different in the major cities, but it is being projected that Sacramento, Los Angeles and San Francisco could all get “a month’s worth of rainfall this upcoming week”…
Atmospheric rivers continue to soak the West, bringing heavy rainfall, gusty winds and mountain snowfall. The latest event is ramping up for Northern and Central California this weekend and is expected to last into the week. Flood watches are in effect through the next several days, where widespread rainfall of 5 to 8 inches is possible through Thursday and isolated totals could near a foot. Cities like Sacramento, Los Angeles and San Francisco could see a month’s worth of rainfall this upcoming week.
That is not good news at all.
Some areas of Northern California are already reeling from widespread flooding that was caused by the last atmospheric river…
The most recent atmospheric river dumped anywhere from 3 to 12 inches of rain in Northern California’s coastal ranges and Sierra foothills last weekend.
That lead to just over 40 reports of flooding, 20 reports of landslides and another 16 reports of wind damage in the state from Saturday night through early Monday morning. Among the most serious flash flooding occurred in and near Redding, in far Northern California, where water rescues occurred.
For the last several years, the United States has been getting repeatedly pummeled by one “billion dollar disaster” after another.
But most people just think that conditions will “return to normal” eventually. I don’t want to rain on anyone’s parade, but that simply isn’t going to happen.
We really do live at a time when global weather patterns are going completely nuts. And what we have been through so far is nothing compared to what is eventually coming. The “bomb cyclone” that is going to hit California on Christmas Eve is another wake up call.
The state will be hammered by very heavy rain, extremely high winds, and several feet of mountain snow. But no matter how many wake up calls we get, most of the population just continues to sleep. That is really unfortunate, because the clock is ticking…
Silver And Copper Are Both Flashing The Same Signal — And That Is Setting The Stage For Widespread Panic On Wall Street
2025 has been a smashing year for those that invested in precious metals. The price of copper is up about 30 percent since the start of the year, and the price of silver has risen 128 percent during that same time period. I have been saying “we have never seen anything like this before” a lot lately, but this is yet another case where that is entirely true. Needless to say, what we have been witnessing is not welcome news for those that have been trying to keep silver prices and copper prices suppressed. In recent weeks, big losses have turned into even bigger losses as things haven’t gone their way. The big financial institutions in the western world that have been attempting to suppress prices are fighting a losing battle, because the “AI revolution” is going to require vast amounts of physical silver and physical copper. At this stage, it would take a truly apocalyptic event to stop the construction of the thousands of colossal data centers that are currently going up all over the globe.
At the same time, there has been a worldwide explosion in demand for physical silver from individual investors as paper currencies rapidly lose their purchasing power.
This has particularly been true in Asia.
In fact, there was so much demand for physical silver in India a couple of months ago that it actually caused “severe physical shortages”…
The Indian silver market has been gripped by an unprecedented “silver squeeze” in October 2025, sending prices to historic highs and creating severe physical shortages. This crisis, fueled by a unique blend of festive demand, speculative buying, and a constrained global supply, has had immediate and significant implications, not only within India but also across international bullion markets. The traditional festive season of Dhanteras and Diwali has ignited a buying frenzy, pushing domestic silver prices to record levels, with physical market premiums skyrocketing and global ripple effects causing scarcity even in major bullion hubs.
You could argue that what has been going on in India lately is just temporary hysteria.
But what isn’t temporary is the steadily increasing industrial demand for physical silver…
High industrial demand for silver, too, has been driving up prices for months, the Silver Institute, an international nonprofit industry group, has observed. A December report from the institute further declared silver the “next generation metal,” calling it “an essential component across multiple high-growth sectors as industries race to embrace digital innovation and meet clean energy mandates.”
Physical silver is literally used in thousands upon thousands of high tech products, and many are convinced that what we are witnessing today is just the beginning.
For example, Samsung has been working on a new generation of solid-state batteries that threatens to revolutionize the marketplace…
Solid-state batteries have long been viewed as the next major evolution beyond conventional lithium-ion systems. Their promise—higher energy density, faster charging, and improved safety—has attracted sustained research investment from major automotive and electronics manufacturers.
Recent disclosures from Samsung SDI suggest that progress in this field has accelerated, particularly through the use of a silver–carbon (Ag–C) composite anode layer. While media coverage has focused on headline performance metrics such as extended driving range and reduced charging times, the material implications of this design choice have received comparatively limited attention.
Specifically, Samsung’s approach positions silver as an active electrochemical material, rather than a marginal conductive input. This distinction has meaningful consequences for long-term silver demand and supply dynamics.
If the adoption of solid-state batteries becomes widespread, the demand for physical silver in many industries could go through the roof…
Historically, silver usage in vehicles has been relatively modest. Internal combustion vehicles typically contain 15–20 grams, while electric vehicles use 30–50 grams, primarily in electronics, power management systems, and connectors.
Solid-state battery designs incorporating Ag–C anodes change this profile. Instead of milligram-scale dispersion, silver is deployed in gram-scale quantities per cell, making it a structural component of the battery system.
Even under conservative assumptions, partial adoption of solid-state batteries could introduce tens of millions of ounces of incremental annual silver demand by the late 2020s. Under more aggressive adoption scenarios, the impact would be materially larger.
I was quite stunned when I read that. Our society is being transformed at a pace that is difficult to comprehend.
Just look at how many data centers are going up all around us. Needless to say, every single one of those data centers requires large amounts of physical silver…
Industry association The Silver Institute and Oxford Economics reinforced that view in a report released on Tuesday, saying AI’s rapid expansion is helping drive growing demand for silver across digital economy applications.
“As digitalisation and AI adoption accelerate, so too does the demand for critical materials involved in their applications — silver a critical one among them,” they wrote.
Data centers increasingly rely on next-generation chips such as GPUs and TPUs equipped with high-performance semiconductors that use silver in their internal connections and packaging, the association wrote.
There is no telling how high the price of silver could eventually go during the AI boom. The same thing is true for the price of copper.
This may be difficult for many of you to believe, but a single AI data center “can require up to 50,000 tons of copper”…
A conventional data center uses between 5,000 and 15,000 tons of copper. A hyperscale data center, on the other hand—the kind being built to run artificial intelligence (AI)—can require up to 50,000 tons of copper per facility, according to the Copper Development Association.
Think about that for a second. A single AI data center that uses more copper than three conventional facilities combined.
That’s why I think the AI story is about much more than just raw compute power. It also involves electrical infrastructure at a scale we’ve never seen before. And these massive facilities have an insatiable appetite for copper.
That is a lot of copper!
As the price of copper has soared, it has become an increasingly appealing target for thieves…
Often strung from utility poles or buried beneath our feet, copper wire has played a critical role in powering America’s electrical grid for more than a century.
But brazen thefts are threatening the grid, with thieves climbing onto car roofs to cut down telephone lines or prying open manholes in broad daylight to strip copper wiring.
The effects have been felt nationwide: roads and bridges going dark, 911 calls that fail to connect and higher utility bills as replacement costs get passed on to consumers.
If you live in an urban area and your power suddenly goes out for seemingly no reason, this might be the cause.
In a recent 12 month period, there were 15,000 attacks on domestic communication networks, and copper theft was one of the biggest factors…
There were more than 15,000 destructive attacks nationwide on domestic communication networks between June 2024 and June 2025, with copper theft a major driver, according to the TV and internet industry trade group, NCTA. More than 9.5 million customers were affected, with California and Texas alone accounting for over half of the incidents.
Copper theft is particularly bad in Los Angeles.
Law enforcement officials in L.A. openly admit that this is something that they are forced to deal with on a daily basis. No matter how hard they try, they can’t seem to stop it from happening.
Just look at what has happened to the Sixth Street Bridge. It opened in 2022, and since then thieves have ripped seven miles of copper wire out of it…
When Los Angeles unveiled its newly built Sixth Street Bridge in 2022, it was hailed as a new city landmark. At night, the 3,500-foot bridge, with wide pedestrian walkways, would light up in shifting LED colors.
Three years later, the bridge sits dark.
Thieves have stolen more than 38,000 feet, or seven miles, of copper wire from the bridge, causing $2.5 million in damage, according to Mark González, the local assemblymember who represents the area.
It is very hard to deny that we are rapidly becoming a third world country. There is so much crime all around us, and I am entirely convinced that the worst is yet to come.
This is one of the reasons why so many data centers are being put up in very remote areas. If a data center is located in the middle of nowhere, it is much less likely that criminals will mess with it. And as long as the data center construction boom continues, the price of silver and the price of copper will both continue to rise.
For those that have positioned themselves wisely, that is very good news. But for those on Wall Street that desperately need the price of silver and the price of copper to stop soaring, that is very bad news indeed.
The Missiles Were Loaded Into The Launchers With Care…
Major powers all over the globe are getting their missiles ready. You would think that more people would be alarmed by this, but most of the population just continues to party like it’s 1999. The drumbeats of war are intensifying all around us, and yet just about everyone seems to believe that there is no reason for concern. But as the world celebrates “peace”, will sudden destruction break out instead?
It appears that military action against Venezuela could potentially begin at any moment.
I will get to that later in this article.
The Chinese are extremely upset with how aggressive we have become with the Venezuelans, and U.S. officials are warning that they have loaded “more than 100 intercontinental ballistic missiles” into their launchers in three brand new silo fields near the Mongolian border…
China has reportedly loaded more than 100 intercontinental ballistic missiles into three newly constructed silo fields near its border with Mongolia and shows little interest in arms control talks, according to a draft Pentagon report seen by Reuters.
The assessment underscores Beijing’s accelerating military buildup, with the report saying China is expanding and modernizing its nuclear forces faster than any other nuclear-armed power. Chinese officials have repeatedly dismissed such findings as attempts to “smear and defame China and deliberately mislead the international community.”
I don’t think that war with China is imminent.
But after everything that has happened recently, we sure are a lot closer than we were six months ago.
Meanwhile, a very alarming round of missile tests was just conducted in major cities all over Iran…
Iran launched a fresh round of ballistic missile tests Monday — six months after its 12-day war with Israel — leading officials from the Jewish state to warn the Trump administration that Tehran may be rehearsing another attack.
Missile launches were seen in the cities of Tehran, Isfahan, Mashhad, Khorramabad and Mahabad, according to Iran’s semi-official Fars news agency. State-affiliated broadcaster Nournews also broadcast videos that appeared to show projectiles being fired.
Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu said his government was “aware that Iran is conducting military exercises. We are monitoring this and making the necessary preparations.
The Iranians were obviously trying to send a message to the Israelis. But instead of deterring them from attacking, it may have the opposite effect.
Over the weekend, NBC News reported that Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu will soon attempt to convince President Trump that it is time to attack Iran again…
Israeli officials have grown increasingly concerned that Iran is expanding production of its ballistic missile program, which was damaged by Israeli military strikes earlier this year, and are preparing to brief President Donald Trump about options for attacking it again, according to a person with direct knowledge of the plans and four former U.S. officials briefed on the plans.
Israeli officials also are concerned that Iran is reconstituting nuclear enrichment sites the U.S. bombed in June, the sources said. But, they added, the officials view Iran’s efforts to rebuild facilities where they produce the ballistic missiles and to repair its crippled air defense systems as more immediate concerns.
Trump and Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu are expected to meet later this month in Florida at the president’s Mar-a-Lago estate. At that meeting, the sources said, Netanyahu is expected to make the case to Trump that Iran’s expansion of its ballistic missile program poses a threat that could necessitate swift action.
Will Israel and Iran start fighting again in early 2026?
Many believe that it is a very real possibility.
In Europe, news that Oreshnik missile launchers have been deployed in Belarus is deeply alarming a lot of people…
Belarus’ authoritarian president said Thursday that Russia had deployed its latest nuclear-capable Oreshnik missile system to the country, a move that comes as talks to end the war in Ukraine have entered a crucial phase.
President Alexander Lukashenko said the Oreshnik, an intermediate range ballistic missile system, arrived in the country on Wednesday and is entering combat duty. He didn’t say how many missiles have been deployed or give any other details.
Russian President Vladimir Putin said Wednesday that the Oreshnik will enter combat duty this month but didn’t give any other details. Putin made the statement at a meeting with top Russian military officers, where he warned that Moscow will seek to extend its gains in Ukraine if Kyiv and its Western allies reject the Kremlin’s demands in peace talks.
From Belarus, Oreshnik missiles could reach Kyiv in just moments. Of course the Russians have already been pounding Kyiv and other major Ukrainian cities on an almost nightly basis.
Last night’s barrage was particularly intense…
At least three people have been killed, and 12 others injured in a massive Russian missile and drone attack on multiple oblasts of Ukraine overnight on Dec. 23.
The assault once again targeted Ukraine’s energy infrastructure and Rivne, Ternopil, and Khmelnytskyi oblasts in the country’s west “are almost completely without electricity,” the Energy Ministry said.
President Volodymyr Zelensky said that Russia launched more than 650 drones and over three dozen missiles targeting “the entire infrastructure of life.” At least 13 oblasts were attacked, he added.
The Russians have really been going after Ukraine’s energy infrastructure. Needless to say, it gets really, really cold in Ukraine during the winter.
In response to that attack, NATO scrambled fighter jets in Poland…
NATO was forced to scramble fighter jets as Vladimir Putin launched a savage pre-Christmas missile and drone strike on Ukraine. Polish and allied war planes operated near the Ukrainian border amid the hellish onslaught.
“Fighter jets have been scrambled, and ground-based air defence and radar reconnaissance systems placed on a state of readiness,” said Poland’s operational command. This was “preventive” and “aimed at securing and protecting the airspace, particularly in areas adjacent to the threatened regions”.
I really wish that both sides were willing to make significant compromises so that we could see peace. But instead, I believe that 2026 will be a year when the conflict in Ukraine goes to an entirely different level.
On the other side of the globe, more U.S. military assets are being moved into position to attack Venezuela…
At least 10 CV-22 Osprey tilt-rotor aircraft, which are used by special-operations forces, flew into the region Monday night from Cannon Air Force Base in New Mexico, according to an official. C-17 cargo aircraft from Fort Stewart and Fort Campbell Army bases arrived Monday in Puerto Rico, according to flight-tracking data. A different U.S. official confirmed that military personnel and equipment were transported on planes.
It isn’t clear what types of troops and equipment the aircraft were transporting. Cannon is home to the 27th Special Operations Wing, while the 160th Special Operations Aviation Regiment, an elite U.S. special operations unit, and the 101st Airborne Division are based at Fort Campbell. The first battalion of the 75th Ranger Regiment is based at Hunter Army Airfield, at Fort Stewart.
We don’t know exactly when military action will begin.
It could be days, it could be weeks, or it could be months.
But it appears that it is coming.
One former Air Force lieutenant general is convinced that the Pentagon is “prepositioning forces to take action”…
“They are prepositioning forces to take action,” David Deptula, a retired Air Force lieutenant general and dean of the Mitchell Institute for Aerospace Studies, told The Wall Street Journal on Tuesday of the ongoing US forces build-up in the southern Caribbean.
The WSJ commentary further assessed that “The movement of such assets indicates that the administration already has decided on a course of action” – though with President Trump it’s currently anyone’s guess as to precisely what that course of action will be.
Once it became clear that Nicolas Maduro did not intend to step down peacefully, many of us were hoping that the U.S. would back off.
But that isn’t happening.
Instead, U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio is warning that the “status quo” in Venezuela is “intolerable”…
“The status quo with the Venezuelan regime is intolerable for the United States,” Rubio said at a year-end press conference, making clear the US is seeking Maduro’s ouster in Caracas.
And President Trump just made it very clear that removing Maduro from power is the goal…
During a press conference on shipbuilding at Mar-a-Lago in Palm Beach, Florida, a reporter asked Trump if it is his goal to force Maduro from power.
“Well, I think it probably would. I can’t tell him, that’s up to him what he wants to do. I think it would be smart for him to do that. But again, we’re going to find out,” Trump responded.
Trump then blasted Venezuela for having done “terrible things to the United States.”
I keep warning that a war with Venezuela would have enormous implications for our relationships with both Russia and China.
But hardly anyone is talking about this.
The Russians are so concerned about what could happen that they are starting to pull some personnel out of the country…
Also on Monday, the Associated Press reported that the Russian government — which signed a security agreement with Venezuela this year and has been accused of shipping military equipment to the US adversary — has begun evacuating the families of its diplomats in the South American country.
The report, which cited unnamed European officials, said Russian Foreign Ministry officials assess the situation in Venezuela “in very grim tones.”
The Chinese have invested massive amounts of money in Venezuela, and they have lent the current regime tens of billions of dollars. What will happen to those loans if the current regime is replaced with a regime that is friendly to the United States?
Overthrowing the Maduro regime would not be a simple operation. The Venezuelans possess highly advanced anti-aircraft systems that have been provided by the Russians, and Venezuela’s military is currently distributing rifles to the general population.
It has been estimated that it would take a force of approximately 100,000 U.S. soldiers to conduct a full-blown invasion of Venezuela, and I don’t think that President Trump is inclined to do that at this time.
But would a more limited operation be able to successfully achieve the Trump administration’s goals?
I don’t know. I guess we shall find out. We live in such perilous times, and I have a feeling that the weeks ahead are going to be really crazy.
The Drumbeats Of War Are Getting Louder
Hundreds of millions of people all over the western world are enjoying the holiday season as if nothing has changed. But meanwhile the pounding of the war drums just continues to intensify. If the world keeps going down this path, next year’s holiday season could look completely different. Unfortunately, most people seem to assume that everything will magically work out just fine somehow. That greatly frustrates me, because ignoring the reality of the crisis that we are facing is not going to fix anything. If ordinary citizens in the western world truly understood what was at stake, they would be going completely ballistic right now. Global war is rapidly approaching, but the vast majority of our entertainment-addicted population doesn’t seem to get this.
Over the weekend, there were some very alarming new developments.
On Saturday, U.S. forces seized another Venezuelan oil tanker…
In a pre-dawn operation on Saturday, the U.S. Coast Guard seized a Panama-flagged vessel called Centuries. A U.S. official told CBS News that the interdiction of the vessel followed a similar playbook to an earlier U.S. seizure of an oil tanker near Venezuela.
White House Deputy Press Secretary Anna Kelly said on social media that the vessel on Saturday was “a falsely flagged vessel operating as part of the Venezuelan shadow fleet to traffic stolen oil and fund the narcoterrorist Maduro regime.”
Needless to say, the Venezuelans were furious.
They accused the U.S. of committing a “serious act of piracy”…
In a statement on Saturday, the Venezuelan government condemned the vessel’s seizure, saying it was a “serious act of piracy.”
“The colonialist model that the U.S. government seeks to impose through such practices will fail and be defeated by the Venezuelan people,” the statement said.
Of course now that the ball is rolling, the U.S. does not intend to stop.
On Sunday, it was being reported that U.S. forces were pursuing yet another oil tanker…
The United States is pursuing an oil tanker off the coast of Venezuela, according to multiple reports, just a day after the Coast Guard seized a different tanker in the same waters amid a rapid U.S. military buildup in the region.
If seized, it would mark the third U.S. interception of an oil tanker in less than two weeks. An official told Reuters on Dec. 21 the tanker was under sanctions, and it had not been boarded so far. Officials did not give a specific location for the operation or name the vessel being pursued, according to Reuters. Bloomberg was among the first to report on the operation.
The pursuit of the tanker comes less than a week after President Donald Trump ordered a “blockade” of all sanctioned ships from entering and leaving Venezuela, further pressuring the oil-rich nation’s economy.
U.S. Senator Rand Paul is calling the seizure of these tankers a “prelude to war”.
He is quite right about that.
And now that the Venezuelan Navy will be escorting at least some of these tankers, the shooting could begin at any time…
Venezuela has ordered its navy to escort its tankers carrying petroleum products from its ports after President Trump declared a “complete and total blockade” on “sanctioned” tankers going into and out of Venezuela, The New York Times reported on Wednesday.
The report said that several ships sailed from Venezuela’s east coast with a naval escort on Tuesday night and Wednesday morning. US forces already boarded and seized one tanker last week and intend to steal the cargo. If the US attempts to seize another tanker, it could now lead to a direct clash with the Venezuelan Navy.
People need to understand that it isn’t just Venezuela that we are making angry.
Approximately 40 percent of the oil that Cuba imports comes from Venezuela, and we are being told that if that oil is cut off the Cuban economy could collapse…
Venezuela remains Cuba’s most important energy supplier, covering roughly 40% of the oil Havana needs to import. While shipments have already fallen sharply from their peak years ago, analysts warn that any further disruption could have catastrophic consequences. Energy experts say a sharp drop in Venezuelan crude would likely trigger a full-scale economic collapse on the island, the Journal reported.
And as I discussed last week, China imports more oil from Venezuela than the rest of the world combined.
This blockade is going to be really bad for our relationship with China, and that could end up having enormous implications for all of us.
Meanwhile, the Russians continue to take control of more territory in Ukraine…
Russian forces have taken control of the settlements of Vysoke in the Sumy region and Svitloe in the Donetsk People’s Republic, the Russian Ministry of Defense reported in its daily briefing.
Svitloe is located between Pokrovsk and Myrnohrad, while Vysoke lies close to the border with Russia’s Belgorod region. The Defense Ministry regularly reports on settlements coming under Russian control in the zone of the military operation. According to the ministry, eight settlements came under Russian control in the week leading up to December 12, including Seversk in the DPR. On December 17, the ministry also reported the capture of the village of Herasymivka in the Dnipropetrovsk region.
Every time the Russians move forward, our European allies will become more desperate to stop them. But the only way that Ukraine can win the war is if we get directly involved in the conflict.
According to Director of National Intelligence Tulsi Gabbard, that is “ultimately what the EU and NATO want”…
She went on to accuse the European Union and the North Atlantic Treaty Organization of wanting to pull the U.S. into direct battle with Russia.
“[Deep-staters] foment fear and hysteria as a way to justify the continuing of the war and their efforts to undermine President Trump’s efforts towards peace,” Gabbard said. “And do so in this case in order to try to pull the U.S. military into a direct conflict with Russia, which is ultimately what the EU and NATO want.”
“We cannot allow this to happen,” she declared.
Right now, the Ukrainians and the Europeans are working on a “deal” that they know with 100 percent certainty that the Russians will reject.
When the Russians inevitably reject that “deal”, that will be used as justification for what they want to do next. And what they want to do next is certainly not a mystery, because they have been feverishly preparing for it.
Unfortunately, events in the Middle East are heading in a very alarming direction as well.
On Sunday, the IDF conducted more strikes on Hezbollah targets in southern Lebanon…
The Israeli military said Sunday that it targeted Hezbollah operatives in strikes in southern Lebanon. The Lebanese health ministry reported one person was killed and another wounded.
Israel has kept up regular strikes on Lebanon, usually saying it is targeting Hezbollah infrastructure or operatives violating the November 2024 ceasefire.
Hezbollah is supposed to disarm, but that never was going to happen.
So the IDF is just going to keep hitting them. And according to NBC News, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu will soon be presenting options for attacking Iran again to President Trump…
Israeli officials have grown increasingly concerned that Iran is expanding production of its ballistic missile program, which was damaged by Israeli military strikes earlier this year, and are preparing to brief President Donald Trump about options for attacking it again, according to a person with direct knowledge of the plans and four former U.S. officials briefed on the plans.
Israeli officials also are concerned that Iran is reconstituting nuclear enrichment sites the U.S. bombed in June, the sources said. But, they added, the officials view Iran’s efforts to rebuild facilities where they produce the ballistic missiles and to repair its crippled air defense systems as more immediate concerns.
Trump and Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu are expected to meet later this month in Florida at the president’s Mar-a-Lago estate. At that meeting, the sources said, Netanyahu is expected to make the case to Trump that Iran’s expansion of its ballistic missile program poses a threat that could necessitate swift action.
The Israelis and the Iranians both clearly understand that their fight is not over. So both sides are getting ready for the next round.
2025 has certainly been a chaotic year. But I expect 2026 to be even crazier. The drumbeats of war are steadily getting louder, and if we don’t turn back now the death and destruction that we will witness will be off the charts.
Pharmakeia: America’s Seniors Are Being Overmedicated Into Oblivion
So many seniors that were once so full of life are now just shadows of their former selves. It can be really easy to assume that they are “just getting old” and that nothing unusual is happening to them. But the truth is that in so many cases the reason why America’s seniors are shutting down is because they are simply being overmedicated. Our entire medical system has been designed to push pills, and so when our seniors seek medical help that is usually the solution that they are offered. As you will see below, the proportion of our seniors that are on at least 8 pharmaceutical drugs is truly alarming. Of course those that consume pharmaceutical drug cocktails on a daily basis for an extended period of time are quite likely to experience very serious consequences.
Most people don’t realize that modern terms such as “pharmacy” and “pharmaceutical” originally come from the Greek word “pharmakeia”…
The word “pharmacy” has a fascinating origin story that’s as complex as the practice itself.
It comes from the Greek word “pharmakeia”, which referred to “the practice of the druggist”. But here is the twist: “phármakon”, the root of the term, was a double-edged sword – it meant a plant or herb that could be used for either healing or harmful purposes, blurring the line between medicine and poison.
No society in the entire history of the planet has taken “pharmakeia” to the extremes that we have.
We are the most drugged nation that the world has ever seen, and this is particularly true for our seniors.
The Wall Street Journal recently interviewed an 83-year-old woman named Barbara Schmidt that has “filled prescriptions for more than a dozen different drugs in the past year”…
For years, Barbara Schmidt’s family feared an illness was behind a pattern of terrifying falls that repeatedly landed the 83-year-old great-grandmother in surgery with broken bones. Instead, Schmidt’s frequent tumbles might have been tied to something else: medications intended to make her better.
Schmidt, who lives with her husband of 65 years in Lewes, Del., filled prescriptions for more than a dozen different drugs in the past year, according to pharmacy and medical records.
After taking so many medications in such a short period of time, it really is a miracle that she is still alive today. But she is far from alone.
The Wall Street Journal discovered that one out of every six seniors that is enrolled in Medicare’s drug benefit has been prescribed at least 8 different pharmaceutical drugs…
That isn’t unusual for America’s seniors, according to a Wall Street Journal analysis of Medicare data. One in six of the 46 million seniors enrolled in Medicare’s drug benefit, which pays for most drugs taken by older Americans, were prescribed eight or more medications.
Millions upon millions of our seniors are literally being drugged into oblivion.
One of the problems is that seniors often visit multiple physicians, and that can result in a lot of confusion…
Pharmacists who work with seniors say doctors might not be aware of their patients’ full medication list. Patients don’t always mention what their other doctors have prescribed when a history is taken, and specialists might not have access to a shared medical record.
The Journal analysis found that, among seniors taking eight or more drugs, it was common for the prescriptions to come from a large number of doctors.
Of course it isn’t just seniors that are being overmedicated.
One recent survey found that 70 percent of U.S. adults are currently taking at least one pharmaceutical drug, and nearly a quarter of U.S. adults are currently taking at least four pharmaceutical drugs…
Recent CivicScience poll results reveal the picture of maintenance prescription drug use in the U.S. has shifted dramatically. The number of U.S. adults who report taking at least one prescription medication per day is now 70%, a 14 percentage-point increase from 2019 data.
Additionally, the percentage of people taking four or more prescription medications daily in the US has increased by six percentage points, from 18% to 24%. An increasing number of prescriptions equals less and less wiggle room in budgets already tightened due to inflationary prices.
It is an insanely profitable industry, and that is why we constantly see ads for pharmaceutical drugs on television. They desperately want more “customers”, and seniors are the easiest target.
According to the official CDC website, 89 percent of Americans that are 65 years or older are currently taking at least one pharmaceutical drug…
Among adults aged ≥65 years, men (89.0%) and women (89.3%) were equally likely to take prescription medication. Prescription medication use increased with age, from 48.4% for those aged 18–44 years to 89.2% for those aged ≥65 years, and this pattern of increasing use with age was observed for both men and women.
We take more pharmaceutical drugs than anyone else in the world. So why is our life expectancy below average compared to other industrialized nations?
I think that is a really important question. When our seniors go to see their doctors, they are often not properly informed about the potential side effects of the drugs that they are being prescribed.
Let me give you an example. Zoloft is the number one antidepressant in the United States, but most of those that are taking it do not realize that it has an extremely long list of side effects. But don’t just take my word for it. The following comes from the official Zoloft website…
ZOLOFT may cause serious side effects. Call your healthcare provider right away if you have any of the following symptoms, or call 911 if there is an emergency.
1. Suicidal thoughts or actions:
ZOLOFT and other antidepressant medicines may increase suicidal thoughts or actions in some people 24 years of age and younger, especially within the first few months of treatment or when the dose is changed.
Depression or other serious mental illnesses are the most important causes of suicidal thoughts or actions.
Watch for these changes and call your healthcare provider right away if you notice new or sudden changes in mood, behavior, actions, thoughts, or feelings, especially if severe.
Pay particular attention to such changes when ZOLOFT is started or when the dose is changed.
Keep all follow-up visits with your healthcare provider and call between visits if you are worried about symptoms.
2. Call a doctor right away if you or a person you know who is taking ZOLOFT has any of the following symptoms, especially if they are new, worse, or worry you:
-thoughts about suicide or dying
-attempts to commit suicide
-new or worse depression
-new or worse anxiety
-feeling very agitated or restless
-panic attacks
-trouble sleeping (insomnia)
-new or worse irritability
-acting aggressive, being angry, or violent
-acting on dangerous impulses
-an extreme increase in activity and talking (mania)
-other unusual changes in behavior or mood3. Serotonin Syndrome. This condition can be life-threatening and symptoms may include:
-agitation, hallucinations, coma, or other changes in mental status
-racing heartbeat, high or low blood pressure
-coordination problems or muscle twitching (overactive reflexes)
-nausea, vomiting, or diarrhea
-sweating or fever
-muscle rigidity4. Increased chance of bleeding: ZOLOFT and other antidepressant medicines may increase your risk of bleeding or bruising, especially if you take the blood thinner warfarin (COUMADIN®, JANTOVEN®), a non-steroidal anti-inflammatory drug (NSAIDs, like ibuprofen or naproxen), or aspirin.
5. Manic episodes. Symptoms may include:
-greatly increased energy
-racing thoughts
-unusually grand ideas
-severe trouble sleeping
-reckless behavior
-excessive happiness or irritability
-talking more or faster than usual6. Seizures or convulsions.
7. Glaucoma (angle-closure glaucoma). ZOLOFT may cause a certain type of eye problem called angle-closure glaucoma. Call your healthcare provider if you have eye pain, changes in your vision, or swelling or redness in or around the eye. Only some people are at risk for these problems. You may want to undergo an eye examination to see if you are at risk and receive preventative treatment if you are.
8. Changes in appetite or weight.
9. Low salt (sodium) levels in the blood. Elderly people may be at greater risk for this. Symptoms may include headache, weakness or feeling unsteady, confusion, problems concentrating or thinking, or memory problems.
10. Sexual problems (dysfunction). Taking selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs), including ZOLOFT, may cause sexual problems.
There are many other drugs that literally list “death” as one of the potential side effects.
And earlier this year it was being reported that adverse reactions to pharmaceutical drugs have now become the third leading cause of death in the United States…
In 2021, the American Society of Pharmacovigilance (ASP) launched the Fourth Cause Campaign to raise awareness that adverse drug events (ADEs) were the fourth leading cause of death in the United States. Today, new data confirm a troubling and unacceptable reality—ADEs have now surged to become the third leading cause of death. An internal analysis conducted by ASP projects that adverse drug events now account for over 250,000 deaths annually, surpassing stroke and respiratory disease, making it the third leading cause of death in the United States.
What we are witnessing is truly a national tragedy.
But the big news networks aren’t going to talk much about it, because the pharmaceutical companies are their biggest advertisers. And our politicians are unlikely to push for major reform, because the pharmaceutical companies pour vast amounts of money into their campaigns.
Money is power, and the pharmaceutical industry is absolutely swimming in cash. If you are waiting for major change to happen, you may find yourself waiting for quite a while.
It is time to avenge the murder of Jesus Christ
By Benjamin Fulford December 22, 2025
The world now has a very real chance of getting justice for the murder of Jesus Christ. The satan worshippers who killed him are still in power in the West, but they are weaker than they have ever been. The Jewish people who have lived under Babylonian tyranny ever since the time of Moses can also be finally freed. The revolution is happening in real time, especially in the West. We all need to push to make sure this time the nightmare really ends.
The key to overthrowing this ancient evil cult is to understand how its control grid works. When I went to visit the satanists’ headquarters in Rome, they showed me an image of two keys they use to control society. One is money, the other is violence.
The important key is money. The Romans added “give unto Caesar what belongs to Caesar” to the Christian bible to tell people to shut up and leave control of money to their dictator. Money is the true source of their power. Take that away, and they are just a bunch of weak old men.
The other control mechanism is violence. They tell people to “turn the other cheek” when they are being beaten. Ok, maybe you can turn the other cheek once, but after you run out of cheeks, it is time to hit back. That time is long overdue.
One way to finish the satanists off is by exposing the fact that they have replaced elected leaders with actors. Everyone needs to personally ask the police and the military to investigate this.
Donald Trump was elected to drain the swamp, but was replaced with a short, ugly actor in June. This fake Trump tried to kill us all by attacking Iran in an effort to start World War III. We need to demand his removal.
Also, Kash Patel was made head of the FBI because he promised to release the Epstein files, so he was either compromised with blackmail or replaced with a look-alike who is protecting pedophiles. The military police, the FBI, and all other law enforcement agencies can take action to remove these phonies after confirming the identity theft. Once the phonies are arrested, the police can go after the puppet masters behind them.
Even if the military police do not act, the revolution is not going to be stopped. It is now looking like Europe will be liberated before the US. These governments are falling like dominoes. The Nazi EU is close to collapse as a result. The controlled Western media is not reporting it, but the government of Bulgaria has fallen, and the one in Lithuania is falling as Parliament is being overrun by anti- EU protesters:
Lithuania is on fire. Demonstrating against the government. The protest is about media freedom and the independence of the public broadcaster. They are sick and tired of the fake pro-European coverage (anti-Russia).
“The EU is run by Satanists. You don’t have to be too smart or wise to understand that. Just common sense is enough,” writes a Serbian-based commentator who shows obvious satanic images on a Euro bill in the link below.
One of the things that has European people on the war path against their own government is the fact that they let so many foreign criminals in. In the latest data about this, in Spain, foreigners commit five times more rapes and four times more murders than Spaniards. Spain has seen penetrative rape cases jump 143% in just 5 years.
Farmers are also on the war path because the EU leaders have been passing law after law designed to bankrupt them so the KM can seize their land and take control of the food supply. Farmers with tractors surrounded the EU headquarters last week and forced the government to stop passing laws designed to hurt them.
Also, when the EU tried to keep their satanic Ukrainian regime in business by stealing money from Christian Russia, Belgium, Hungary, Slovakia, Italy, Bulgaria, Malta, and Czechia joined forces to stop it.
In the end, even French President actor Emmanuelle Macron and EU head Ursula von der Leyen were forced to back down.
Now it looks like Germany will be the next domino to fall. Former German Chancellor Gerhard Schröder triggered a revolution there when he revealed that Friedrich Merz is not the Chancellor of the Federal Republic of Germany
Scientists Sound The Alarm About 3 Major Fault Zones In The United States
Will 2026 be a year of great shaking for the United States? Coming into 2025, I thought that seismic activity would be a major global theme, and that has certainly turned out to be the case. This has been an extremely unusual year for earthquakes along the Pacific Ring of Fire, and volcanoes that have been dormant for ages are suddenly roaring to life all over the world. Here in the United States, we have been experiencing lots and lots of little earthquakes, but thankfully we have not been hit by a really bad one yet. Will our luck run out in 2026?
According to the Daily Mail, the dozens of earthquakes that have been rattling the New Madrid fault zone since the middle of November are “renewing fears of a catastrophic natural disaster soon”…
A giant seismic zone in the heart of the US has seen dozens of tiny earthquakes break out in the last month, renewing fears of a catastrophic natural disaster soon.
Since mid-November, the US Geological Survey (USGS) has detected at least 38 low-level seismic events along the boundaries of the New Madrid Seismic Zone (NMSZ) in Arkansas, Kentucky, Missouri, and Tennessee.
The threat that the New Madrid fault zone poses should not be underestimated.
In a previous article, I discussed the series of catastrophic earthquakes that occurred along that fault zone in 1811 and 1812. Everyone agrees that they were the most powerful earthquakes in the entire history of the continental United States…
The New Madrid earthquakes were the biggest earthquakes in American history. They occurred in the central Mississippi Valley, but were felt as far away as New York City, Boston, Montreal, and Washington D.C. President James Madison and his wife Dolly felt them in the White House. Church bells rang in Boston. From December 16, 1811 through March of 1812 there were over 2,000 earthquakes in the central Midwest, and between 6,000-10,000 earthquakes in the Bootheel of Missouri where New Madrid is located near the junction of the Ohio and Mississippi Rivers.
In the known history of the world, no other earthquakes have lasted so long or produced so much evidence of damage as the New Madrid earthquakes. Three of the earthquakes are on the list of America’s top earthquakes: the first one on December 16, 1811, a magnitude of 8.1 on the Richter scale; the second on January 23, 1812, at 7.8; and the third on February 7, 1812, at as much as 8.8 magnitude.
Scientists tell us that it is just a matter of time before another great earthquake strikes this region.
Six years ago, the USGS determined that a magnitude 7.7 quake would shake major cities all over the Midwest…
In 2019, USGS scientists modeled what a 7.7 magnitude earthquake would look like if it erupted along the Arkansas-Tennessee border, in an area near Memphis.
The shockwaves of this hypothetical mega quake spread for hundreds of miles, reaching cities including Kansas City, Indianapolis, Louisville, and Birmingham.
Buildings in that area of the country are typically not constructed to withstand an event of that size, and so the USGS is projecting that hundreds of thousands of buildings would be damaged and the economic damage would run into the hundreds of billions of dollars…
Since this region is not well equipped to deal with a massive seismic event, studies of such an earthquake projected that a magnitude 7.7 earthquake would cause over 86,000 injuries or deaths, damage 715,000 buildings, and knock out power to 2.6 million homes.
That report, by the University of Illinois, Virginia Tech, and George Washington University, also estimated that the cost could hit $300 billion directly, with indirect costs due to lost jobs possibly taking the damage to $600 billion.
An earthquake like that could hit us at any time.
But when the “really Big One” finally arrives, it will be much, much worse than the USGS is anticipating.
Experts are also urging us to keep an eye on the Cascadia Subduction Zone.
We are being told that when it finally goes, “the Pacific Northwest could change in a matter of minutes”…
Beneath Cascadia’s forests and coastlines lies a 600-mile fault capable of producing a magnitude-9 earthquake. The last one struck in 1700, shaking the region for minutes and sending a massive tsunami all the way to Japan. Today, nearly 17 million people live on top of the same silent threat. Scientists warn that when it breaks again, the Pacific Northwest could change in a matter of minutes.
The reason why the Cascadia Subduction Zone is so dangerous is because it has the potential to produce “megathrust” earthquakes…
At depths shallower than around 30 km, the two plates of the CSZ are locked together by friction. Strain (deformation) slowly builds as the subduction forces continue to act upon the locked plates. Once the fault’s frictional strength is exceeded, the rocks slip past each other along the fault in a “megathrust” earthquake.
A large enough “megathrust” earthquake could cause a tsunami that is hundreds of feet high to violently slam into the west coast.
In such a scenario, the death toll would likely be cataclysmic. So that is why any seismic activity in the region gets so much attention.
On Monday, a magnitude 2.9 earthquake not too far away from Seattle caused quite a stir…
Reports of a massive explosion in Washington state sent residents in the Pacific Northwest into a state of confusion Monday morning.
The US Geological Survey (USGS) sent out an alert just before 11.30am ET, warning that an explosion with the force of a magnitude 3.0 earthquake has just taken place near the town of Concrete.
USGS quickly retracted the false explosion warning and reclassified the seismic event as a magnitude 2.9 earthquake, less than 70 miles north of Seattle.
Scientists assure us that a “megathrust” earthquake along the Cascadia Subduction Zone is in our future.
And when it finally occurs, it could also trigger the San Andreas fault system…
Successfully predicting earthquakes sounds like a dark art.
However, new research hints it may be possible: Sediment cores extracted from the Pacific seafloor suggest that two major fault systems along the western coast of the United States and Canada might be partially synchronized. After an earthquake on the southern part of the Cascadia subduction zone, an earthquake soon after on the northern part of the San Andreas fault appears to occur roughly half of the time, the new findings reveal. These results, published in Geosphere, provide evidence of stress triggering, which has long been invoked to explain how activity on one fault might lead to activity on another nearby.
Fault zones persist across wide swaths of our planet, but the one that stretches onshore and offshore from California to British Columbia, Canada, is particularly complex. The vertical strike-slip San Andreas fault, in the south, intersects the Cascadia subduction zone off the coast of Northern California at a point known as the Mendocino Triple Junction.
When the San Andreas fault system finally rips wide open, the geography of the state of California will be permanently altered. And it won’t just be Southern California that is affected.
Over the past couple of months, Northern California has been getting pummeled by literally hundreds of sizable quakes…
While California ranks second in the US in seismic activity, most quakes are small and go largely unnoticed. That has changed in recent weeks with two swarms impacting the Bay Area: one is east of San Francisco near San Ramon; the other is north of San Francisco near The Geysers.
Over the last 30 days, USGS has reported 1,470 earthquakes around The Geysers; in just the last 7 days, there have been 286. Most of these have been weak, with only 5 earthquakes rated a magnitude 2.0 or higher intensity over the last week. While the volume has been eyebrow raising, the intensity hasn’t.
The opposite has been the case near San Ramon. There, over the last 30 days, there have been 139 earthquakes reported by USGS; over the last 7 days, that number has been 25. But the intensity of these earthquakes have been greater, with 39 rated magnitude 2.0 or greater and 6 rated 3.0 or greater over the last 30 days.
This is definitely not normal.
San Ramon has been getting shaken so frequently that one social media user has compared it to “a massage chair”…
“Wee bit nervous,” one person wrote on Threads, adding that she planned to stock up on water and earthquake supplies.
“San Ramon is basically a massage chair today … but like, the stressful kind,” another person wrote on the social media site. “Dear Earth: we get it, you’re active. You can stop now.”
The Calaveras Fault is a major branch of the San Andreas fault system.
This is the fault that has been causing so much shaking in San Ramon lately, and it has the potential to produce very large earthquakes…
Historically, the southern half of the central segment of the Calaveras Fault has been the most seismically active segment of the fault.
It produced the 6.2 Morgan Hill earthquake in 1984. The 5.9 Coyote Lake earthquake in 1979 ruptured slightly to the south of these other earthquakes.
When you are driving your vehicle and one of those little warning signals on the dashboard lights up, what do you do?
Hopefully you take it to a mechanic or you fix it yourself. Ignoring a warning signal like that is a really bad idea.
Similarly, the New Madrid fault zone, the Cascadia Subduction Zone and the San Andreas fault system have all been sending us lots of warning signals lately. Sadly, it appears that most of the population will continue to ignore those warning signals until it is too late.
The West Coast Is Being Absolutely Pummeled By Trillions Of Gallons Of Rain, Wind Speeds Of Up To 144 MPH, And Flooding That Will Close Roads For Months
The slow-motion disaster that we are witnessing on the west coast is unlike anything we have ever seen before. A series of atmospheric rivers has already dumped trillions of gallons of water on the region, and trillions of gallons of additional water will fall before the end of the year.
This has caused some rivers to rise to the highest levels that we have ever seen. Meanwhile, some areas in the Northwest have been repeatedly pummeled by extremely high winds. As you will see below, some of the wind speeds that have been recorded are difficult to believe. For a long time I have been warning my readers that weather patterns have been going nuts all over the globe, but of course many people will never be convinced until it actually happens where they live. For tens of millions of Americans that live along the west coast, a wake up call has finally arrived.
According to the Weather Channel, the parade of storms that we have been witnessing will continue to roll on into next week…
A parade of Pacific storms accompanied by atmospheric rivers will continue to march into the West Coast into Christmas week, spreading the threat of heavy rain from already flooded areas of western Washington to Oregon and California.
To say it’s been a terrible stretch of weather in parts of the West has been an understatement.
The last sentence in that quote made me smile. Yes, “a terrible stretch of weather” would most certainly be an understatement…
First, record flooding hit parts of western Washington. Then, as flood-ravaged areas were recovering, a powerhouse windstorm blasted much of the Northwest and Rockies Wednesday, with winds clocked up to 144 mph and over 160 reports of wind damage in Washington, Oregon, Idaho, Montana, Wyoming and Colorado.
I can’t recall a windstorm of this magnitude ever hitting the Pacific Northwest in modern times. It is being reported that at least nine different states experienced wind speeds of over 100 mph…
High winds slammed the Pacific Northwest and Rockies Wednesday and Wednesday night, cutting power to three-quarters of a million customers at peak, according to PowerOutage.US. That number was down to 325,000 as of Thursday morning.
The highest wind gusts in the region were on mountain tops — 144 mph at Mount Coffin, Wyoming, 142 mph at Coldwater Ridge, Washington, and 138 mph at Mount Hood, Oregon. Winds gusted over 100 mph on mountaintops in at least nine different states.
Now that storm has moved into the middle of the country, and blizzard conditions are expected in much of the Northern Plains…
“Wind gusts of 80+ mph, several feet of mountain snow, and blizzard conditions are in the forecast for the northern and western U.S. today and tomorrow,” the forecast said.
A map included with the post on X showed that while the entirety of the Northern Plains was expected to see some impacts from the storm, some states will likely be hit by widespread major impacts. These include Montana, Wyoming, North Dakota, Colorado and Idaho.
But it is the west coast that has been getting hit harder than anyone else.
Some areas of Washington state have already had about 2 feet of rain, and more rain is on the way.
Yes, Washington state always gets rain, but this is truly unusual. If you can believe it, approximately 5 trillion gallons of water fell on the state in just a 7 day period…
Warm water and air and unusual weather conditions tracing back as far as tropical cyclone flooding in Indonesia helped supercharge stubborn atmospheric rivers that have drenched Washington state with almost 5 trillion gallons (19 trillion liters) of rain in the past seven days, threatening record flood levels, meteorologists said.
The Skagit River rose to the highest level ever recored. So did the Snohomish River.
Needless to say, many other bodies of water flooded as well. According to Governor Bob Ferguson, a 49 mile stretch of US Highway 2 will be closed for months as a result of the flooding…
Massive flooding conditions persist across western Washington as another round of heavy rain and wind targets the region, adding to the damage from last week’s historic flooding and raising renewed concerns about vulnerable levees, landslide risks, and long-term transportation disruptions.
On Tuesday, Gov. Bob Ferguson said a 49-mile stretch of US Highway 2 between Skykomish and Leavenworth will be closed for months after floodwaters and mudslides heavily damaged the roadway.
Unfortunately, more rain is in the forecast.
In fact, it is being projected that some areas of western Oregon could get more than 10 inches of rain from this next storm…
A general 4-8 inches of rain is forecast to fall on western Oregon, with slightly less in the Interstate 5 corridor near Portland. From 8-12 inches of rain with an AccuWeather Local StormMax™ of 16 inches is projected for the western slopes of the Oregon Cascades.
This amount of rain will be enough to unleash moderate to major flooding along both small streams and rivers in western Oregon. A few locations may experience crests close to record levels, such as in the Portland area. Motorists should be prepared for areas of high water and road washouts. Mudslides are also a danger with the storm.
Meanwhile, meteorologist Ryan Maue is telling us that the Sierra Mountains in California could see up to 30 inches of precipitation from the “firehose of moisture” that is approaching…
California is looking at historic precipitation from onslaught of atmospheric rivers in next 10-days.
Could be 20″ or 30″ mostly rain in the Sierra from “firehose of moisture” directed right at coast with strong jet stream.
This going to be really bad.
He isn’t exaggerating.
It certainly looks like the next couple of weeks will be really bad. If you live in an area along the west coast that is prone to flooding, you should be doing what you can to get prepared.
Of course this is just the beginning.
Global weather patterns have been getting increasingly unstable for quite a while, and I am entirely convinced that what is coming in the years ahead will be much worse than anything that we are experiencing now.
We really are living in extremely chaotic times, and the insane weather that we are currently witnessing is just one element of “the perfect storm” that is now upon us.
9 Signs That Leaders All Over The Globe Have Come Down With A Really Bad Case Of “War Fever”
How close can we get to the edge without falling over? The largest military conflict in Europe since World War II is poised to go to the next level in 2026, war could erupt again in the Middle East at any moment, the U.S. is on the verge of starting a new war in Venezuela, and China is absolutely furious about a brand new weapons package that has just been approved for Taiwan. The dogs of war are clawing at the gate, and yet most people don’t seem too concerned. This is particularly true in the western world, and that is extremely unfortunate. We really are dangerously close to a nightmare scenario, and the clock is ticking. The following are 9 signs that leaders all over the globe have come down with a really bad case of “war fever”…
#1 The Europeans are feverishly preparing for war with Russia, and this is something that I covered extensively in a previous article. After months of hearing them talk about the potential for a direct conflict with Russia, it sounds like Russian President Vladimir Putin has lost his patience with them. In fact, Putin just referred to European leaders as “pigs” and “piglets”…
Russian President Vladimir Putin has derisively referred to UK Prime Minister Sir Keir Starmer as a “little pig” and openly discussed the positioning of Russian missiles within striking range of the UK.
During an annual meeting of the Russian defense ministry, Putin pointed fingers at former US President Joe Biden for intentionally instigating the conflict in Ukraine, further stating that “European little pigs” were quick to support the Americans. “Everyone assumed that they would destroy Russia in a short period of time, they would ruin it,” Putin declared.
“And the European piglets immediately joined in to aid the former American administration in this task. They were hoping to profit from the collapse of our country. To get back something that was lost in previous historical periods and try to take revenge. As it has now become obvious to everyone. All these attempts and all these destructive plans towards Russia completely failed.”
#2 At that same meeting, Putin boldly declared that all of the Russian goals in Ukraine will either be achieved diplomatically or they will be achieved by force…
Russian President Vladimir Putin declared during a Defense Ministry board meeting on Wednesday that Russia will accomplish its goals, either through diplomacy or military force.
“The goals of the special military operation will undoubtedly be achieved. We would prefer to accomplish this and address the root causes of the conflict through diplomatic means. However, if the opposing side and its foreign patrons refuse to engage in substantive dialogue, Russia will achieve the liberation of its historical lands by military means. The task of creating and expanding a security buffer zone will also be carried out consistently,” Putin said, according to a Kremlin transcript.
#3 The Ukrainians will never willingly hand over the territories that the Russians want, and so it appears that fighting will continue for the foreseeable future. And the longer the fighting goes on, the more likely it becomes that the Ukrainians will be successful in dragging NATO into the war. In a very lengthy post on X, Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky warned that next year will be “a year of war”…
Today, we again heard signals from Moscow that they are preparing to make next year a year of war. These signals are not only for us. It is crucial that our partners see them, and not only see them but also respond – especially partners in the United States, who often say that Russia wants to end the war.
Yet the signals coming from Russia are the exact opposite, taking the form of official orders to their army. This Russian mindset must be recognized – and acted upon. When Russia is in this mindset, it will also undermine diplomacy – seeking, through diplomatic language and pressure over specific points in documents – to merely mask its desire to destroy Ukraine and Ukrainians, and the desire to legitimize Russia’s theft of our land. And then come other countries in Europe, which someone in Russia might one day label their so‑called “historical lands.”
Real protection is needed against this Russian case history of madness, and we will continue working with all partners to ensure that protection is in place. Security measures are needed, financial measures are needed – including actions on Russian assets – political measures are needed. And the courage of all partners is required: to see the truth, acknowledge the truth, and act accordingly. I want to thank everyone who supports Ukraine.
#4 Russian forces continue to steadily move forward in Ukraine. This week, it is being reported that Russian forces are on the verge of capturing Hulyaipole…
Assault groups of the Russian Armed Forces are already actively operating in the center of Hulyaipole, according to the German tabloid Bild. The publication notes that the attack on the city is currently underway from all sides.
Russian sources, while confirming this information, emphasize the difficulties faced by Kyiv regime militants defending Huliaipole. The city doesn’t have many high-rise neighborhoods. Moreover, most of them are either destroyed or under the control of Russian forces.
#5 It is being alleged that three members of Russia’s FSB snuck under the border fence and briefly crossed over into Estonian territory…
NATO Member Estonia has accused the Russian Federation of briefly infiltrating a small group of security agents under its border force into its territory, the latest in a series of incidents that have riled the Western alliance.
The Estonian government cited security camera footage showing a group of three Russian border guards, an agency under the Russian Federation’s Federal Security Service (FSB), the inheritor agency of the KGB and others, illegally crossing into its territory on Wednesday. According to their telling of events, three Russians crossed the Narva River on the Estonia-Russia border while riding on a hovercraft and disembarked onto a spit of land in the river on the Estonian side of the line of control.
The three agents of the Russian Federation’s border guard are said to have walked around before embarking back on their hovercraft and going home. Estonia has upped police and border patrols since the incident and say they have called diplomatic discussions with Moscow to make their protests known.
#6 Israel and Hezbollah are supposed to have a ceasefire, but fighting continues to break out. Just within the past 24 hours, Israeli leaders authorized “a series of airstrikes across southern and northeastern Lebanon”…
Israel reportedly carried out a series of airstrikes across southern and northeastern Lebanon just ahead of the Dec. 31 deadline for the terrorist organization Hezbollah to disarm.
The strikes hit Hezbollah infrastructure sites and launching sites in a military compound that the terror organization uses to train and hold courses for its members, according to The Associated Press, which cited the Israeli military. Israel also said it struck Hezbollah military structures that stored weapons.
#7 The U.S. House of Representatives could have passed a bill that would have prevented a war with Venezuela from starting without congressional approval. Unfortunately, members of the House voted it down…
The House on Wednesday voted down a War Powers Resolution meant to block President Trump from launching a war with Venezuela without congressional authorization, as required by the Constitution.
The bill failed in a vote of 211-213, with nine representatives not voting. Just three Republicans joined Democrats in supporting the bill: Reps. Thomas Massie (R-KY), Marjorie Taylor Greene (GA), and Don Bacon (NE). One Democrat, Henry Cuellar (TX), voted against the legislation.
The legislation would have directed the president to remove “United States Armed Forces from hostilities within or against Venezuela that have not been authorized by Congress.”
#8 Our leaders just keep on doing things that they know will greatly anger the Chinese. For example, we have just learned that the largest package of arms sales for Taiwan in history has been approved…
Just a day ago the US administration communicated to China that it is ready to defend American interests in the Pacific region. Now, it’s being reported that the US has approved $11.1 billion in arms-sales for Taiwan, the single largest ever such announced transfer and clear show of support from Washington.
Unveiled late Wednesday, the major arms sales are intended to support Taipei’s efforts to “modernize its armed forces and to maintain a credible defensive capability,” according to the Pentagon’s Defense Security Cooperation Agency.
#9 The Chinese are absolutely furious about this aid package. They are strongly condemning what we have done, and they are demanding that we immediately stop “arming Taiwan”…
Chen Binhua, spokesperson for the State Council Taiwan Affairs Office, said Washington’s decision undermines China’s sovereignty and security interests and sends a wrong signal to “Taiwan independence” separatist forces.
Calling the authorization of the massive arms sale a “blatant interference in China’s internal affairs,” Chen said it seriously violates the one-China principle and the three China-US Joint Communiques, particularly the Aug 17 Communique of 1982.
“We firmly oppose and strongly condemn this,” Chen said, demanding that the US immediately stop “arming Taiwan” and cease supporting “Taiwan independence” separatist forces.
The Chinese are also very upset about our blockade of Venezuela, because they purchase more oil from the Venezuelans than everyone else combined.
U.S. officials seem to think that they can keep pushing the Chinese around without experiencing any serious consequences. Needless to say, I am convinced that they are completely wrong about that.
In my opinion, it is easy to imagine a scenario in which we are witnessing war in Asia, war in South America, war in the Middle East and war in Europe simultaneously. If such a scenario actually unfolds, it truly would be a worldwide war. If global leaders want to choose the path of peace, now is the time to do so.
Unfortunately, “war fever” has gripped most global leaders at this stage, and that is not good news for anyone.
A War With Venezuela Would Be A War That Is All About Oil, And It Would Absolutely Destroy Our Relationship With China
Guess which nation has the most proven oil reserves? It isn’t Saudi Arabia, although the Saudis rank a close second. It isn’t Iran or Iraq either. In fact, the country with the largest proven oil reserves isn’t even in the Middle East. Canada has a lot of oil, and so does Russia, but neither one of them tops the list. At a whopping 303 billion barrels, the nation that currently possesses the most proven oil reserves is actually Venezuela…
Venezuela holds the largest proven crude oil reserves globally, estimated at approximately 303 billion barrels as of 2024. These reserves are predominantly located in the Orinoco Belt, containing extra-heavy crude oil that requires advanced extraction techniques.
Oil is what makes Venezuela important.
We are being told that we must go to war with Venezuela to stop the flow of illegal drugs, but the truth is that the amount of drugs coming into this country from Mexico absolutely dwarfs the amount of drugs coming into this country from Venezuela.
So if stopping the flow of drugs is the priority, why aren’t we going to war with Mexico?
We are also being told that Nicolas Maduro is a tyrant and that the elections in Venezuela are rigged. Of course these days elections are rigged in lots of countries, and there are far worse tyrants than Maduro out there.
Kim Jong Un is one name that immediately comes to mind. He is so tyrannical that he makes Nicolas Maduro look like Mother Theresa. So why aren’t we going to war with North Korea? If we are going to go to war, there needs to be a really good reason.
On Tuesday, President Trump told the world that the U.S. will be stopping all sanctioned oil tankers from traveling to or from Venezuela…
Venezuela is completely surrounded by the largest Armada ever assembled in the History of South America. It will only get bigger, and the shock to them will be like nothing they have ever seen before — Until such time as they return to the United States of America all of the Oil, Land, and other Assets that they previously stole from us. The illegitimate Maduro Regime is using Oil from these stolen Oil Fields to finance themselves, Drug Terrorism, Human Trafficking, Murder, and Kidnapping.
For the theft of our Assets, and many other reasons, including Terrorism, Drug Smuggling, and Human Trafficking, the Venezuelan Regime has been designated a FOREIGN TERRORIST ORGANIZATION. Therefore, today, I am ordering A TOTAL AND COMPLETE BLOCKADE OF ALL SANCTIONED OIL TANKERS going into, and out of, Venezuela. The Illegal Aliens and Criminals that the Maduro Regime has sent into the United States during the weak and inept Biden Administration, are being returned to Venezuela at a rapid pace.
America will not allow Criminals, Terrorists, or other Countries, to rob, threaten, or harm our Nation and, likewise, will not allow a Hostile Regime to take our Oil, Land, or any other Assets, all of which must be returned to the United States, IMMEDIATELY. Thank you for your attention to this matter!
Did you notice that President Trump repeatedly focused on the subject of oil throughout that Truth Social post?
Imposing a blockade is a very serious step, and a Justice Department memo from 1961 makes this very clear…
A Justice Department memo from 1961, when tensions were running high between the US and Cuba, said the president could institute a blockade of Cuba, but noted “a blockade is a belligerent act which, as a matter of international law, is ordinarily justified only if a state of war, legal or de facto, exists.”
Throughout human history, a naval blockade has always been considered to be an act of war.
Needless to say, the Venezuelans are absolutely furious…
The statement from Venezuela’s government decried the move, saying Trump “seeks to impose, in an absolutely irrational manner, a so-called naval military blockade on Venezuela with the aim of stealing the riches that belong to our Homeland.”
The government reaffirmed Venezuela’s sovereignty and said its ambassador to the United Nations “will immediately proceed to denounce this grave violation of International Law.”
It is not going to be a small job to enforce this blockade.
According to CNBC, there are currently 34 sanctioned oil tankers in the Caribbean…
At least 34 U.S.-sanctioned oil tankers with a history of carrying Venezuelan oil are currently at sea in the Caribbean, according to a new analysis obtained by CNBC on Wednesday.
And at least 12 of those tankers appear to be filled with crude oil from Venezuela, according to vessel location data from Kpler, a global trade intelligence company.
Are we just going to start grabbing all of them?
The oil that the tanker that the U.S. seized last week was carrying was reportedly worth somewhere between 60 million and 100 million dollars…
The “Skipper” was loaded with an estimated 1.8 million barrels of oil earlier in December before transferring an estimated 200,000 barrels just before its seizure, Reuters reported.
The oil on the tanker is likely worth $60 million to more than $100 million, based on current average oil prices. Fox News Digital reached out to the White House for any additional comment on the estimated price tag of the oil but did not immediately receive a reply.
When we seize oil that has been produced by Venezuela, we aren’t just hurting Venezuela.
This is such a critical point.
In 2025, China has been purchasing approximately 76 percent of all the oil that is being exported by the Venezuelans…
Venezuela has produced around 900,000 barrels of crude oil and condensate so far in 2025, accounting for roughly 1% of the total global supply.
Kpler data indicates China buys about 76% of Venezuela’s output.
The Chinese need this oil.
Do you think that they are just going to sit there and let us steal vast amounts of oil that the Chinese economy depends on?
Following the announcement of the blockade, the Chinese accused the U.S. of “bullying” Venezuela…
China has accused the US of “bullying” Venezuela, after Donald Trump ordered a “total and complete” blockade of all sanctioned oil tankers entering and leaving Venezuela.
In a phone call on Wednesday, China’s foreign minister Wang Yi told his Venezuelan counterpart, Yvan Gil, that Beijing supported Caracas in defending its sovereignty.
If we keep going down this road, we are going to destroy our relationship with China.
Just imagine how we would feel if some other country started grabbing oil tankers that were bringing desperately needed oil to the United States.
There is not a president in history that would have hesitated to order military action. But we just expect China to sit there and take it. If we push the Chinese too far, it could have very serious consequences.
It is easy to imagine a scenario in which the Chinese decide that it is an opportune moment to invade Taiwan while U.S. forces are tied up with a regime change war in Venezuela. And why in the world would anyone think that another regime change war is in our national interest?
Didn’t we learn anything from our misadventures in Afghanistan and Iraq? 2025 has certainly been a year of war, but a war in Venezuela would have the potential to take things to an entirely new level in 2026.
Let’s hope that cooler heads prevail. Let’s hope that President Trump pulls us back from the brink before it is too late. But from where I am sitting, it appears that the decisions have already been made.
Breaking News – The General & Insider Paper | Friday December 19th, 2025
Sources; The General & Inside Paper TG
- The CDC has formally ended its recommendation for hepatitis B vaccines for all newborns.
- The U.S. Senate has given final approval to the $900 billion National Defense Authorization Act, which will send hundreds of millions more in funding to Israel and Ukraine.
- President Trump announces a “Warrior Dividend” Christmas payment for more than 1.45 million U.S. service members, funded by tariffs.
- President Trump has signed an executive order declaring the United States will return to the Moon by 2028 while laying the groundwork for a future mission to Mars.
- The U.S. Department of Health and Human Services is planning a major overhaul of the childhood vaccine schedule, aiming to recommend fewer shots.
- FBI Director Kash Patel announced a Chinese national was charged with smuggling E. Coli into the United States.
- The Pentagon has failed its annual audit for the eighth consecutive year.
- Thomas Massie says a future DOJ could prosecute Pam Bondi and others because the Epstein Files Transparency Act does not expire like a congressional subpoena, which ends with each Congress.
- After redacting 90% of the Epstein files, Attorney General Pam Bondi declares herself a part of the most transparent administration ever.
- Pam Bondi’s Department of Justice currently has no plans to arrest Bill Clinton, despite the emergence of new evidence.
- Benjamin Netanyahu is reportedly expected to urge President Trump to support Israel in initiating a war against Iran, arguing it is “in the best interests of America.”
- The U.S. Coast Guard is currently seizing a sanctioned vessel off the coast of Venezuela in international waters of the Caribbean Sea.
- U.S. Marshals announced that more than three dozen missing children have been rescued from child sex traffickers in Florida following a major sting operation.
- DNI Tulsi Gabbard warns that the EU and NATO are pushing to pull the U.S. into a world war with Russia, while Deep State actors are blocking peace negotiations.
- Tulsi Gabbard has denied claims that U.S. intelligence warns Vladimir Putin plans to take over all of Ukraine and reclaim parts of Europe once controlled by the Soviet Union.
- President Putin’s special envoy, Kirill Dmitriev, says Russia is “fighting against Satanism.”
- Jared Kushner and Steve Witkoff are drafting a proposal to transform Gaza into a futuristic “smart city” known as Project Sunrise.
- Reports suggest that more than 30 people per day are being arrested in the United Kingdom over social media posts deemed “offensive” or “hateful.”
- Vice President JD Vance says that after Charlie Kirk’s death, he stayed up all night investigating conspiracy theories about the true cause of his death.
- The Federal Reserve is set to pump up to $7 billion into financial markets tomorrow to relieve year-end liquidity pressures
- The U.S. Department of Justice releases a “fact sheet” on the Epstein files that justifies covering up elite pedophiles.
- Israel warns the Trump administration that Iran’s missile exercise may be preparation for a potential strike on Israel.
- Turning Point USA has named Nicki Minaj the female leader of Christianity.
- Rubio ‘confident’ countries will send troops to Gaza force
- The words “The Donald” appear at the John F. Kennedy Center
- Ukrainian, American, European teams to hold new talks in US on Friday: Kyiv
- US Fed official says no urgency to cut rates, flags distorted data
- Putin hails Russia’s recent gains in Ukraine
- Japan hikes interest rates to 30-year-high
- It is believed the murdered MIT professor and the Brown University shooting suspect attended the same school in Lisbon – NewsNation
- Suspected Brown University shooter found dead from self-inflicted gunshot wound inside storage facility in New Hampshire
- US Department of Health and Human Services plans to overhaul childhood vaccine schedule to recommend fewer shots
- Australian PM announces gun buyback scheme in wake of Bondi Beach shooting
- Kennedy arts center to be renamed ‘Trump-Kennedy center:’ White House
- Photos from Epstein’s estate released by House Democrats — Bill Gates poses for a photograph with a woman whose face has been redacted
- Multiple people reportedly dead after plane crashes in Statesville, North Carolina
- Trump administration announces that it would begin to take steps aimed at ending gender transition procedures for minors nationwide.
- US imposes sanctions on two more ICC judges for investigating Israel
- US accuses South Africa of harassing US officials working with Afrikaners
- Lukashenko says Russian nuclear-capable missile Oreshnik deployed in Belarus
- US consumer inflation cools unexpectedly in November | US inflation down from 3% to 2.7% in November
- Heavily-armed police have reportedly detained seven men understood to be on their way to Bondi Beach, after intelligence suggested a “violent act” was possibly being planned.
- Australia police say intercepted cars after tip on possible ‘violent act’
- Israel’s former prime minister Naftali Bennett, who is planning another run for office, said his Telegram account had been hacked, as Israeli media reported the breach was carried out by an Iran-linked group.
- Panic as Chernobyl’s $2 billion protective shield cracks open sparking fears of a deadly radiation leak- Daily Mail
- China tells US to ‘immediately’ stop arming Taiwan after weapons announcement
- “A bird flu pandemic, researchers say, would begin quietly: a single infected bird passing the virus to a human – most likely a farmer, market worker or someone handling poultry. From there, the danger lies not in that first infection but in what happens next: sustained human-to-human transmission.” — BBC
- Deputy FBI Director Dan Bongino announces he is leaving the agency in January.
- Elon Musk: “Bill Gates placed a massive short bet against Tesla of ~1% of our total shares, which might have cost him over $10B by now”
- Venezuela says oil exports continue normally despite Trump ‘blockade’
- Sheinbaum calls on UN to prevent ‘bloodshed’ in Venezuela
- German MPs approve 50 bn euros in military purchases
- Marco Rubio rules out 2028 run if JD Vance seeks Republican nomination — NYP
- Coming days crucial for keeping Ukraine funded: EU chief
- The hacking group ‘ShinyHunters’ said it has stolen data belonging to premium customers of the website Pornhub and is threatening to publish it — Reuters
- President Trump ordering a blockade of sanctioned oil tankers going in and out of Venezuela
- Trump imposes full travel bans on Syria, Palestinians and six more countries
- Nuno Loureiro, nuclear scientist and MIT professor shot dead at his home in Boston: no suspect in custody
- Trump signed more executive orders in less than a year than in first term
- S designates Colombia’s largest drug-trafficking gang as terrorists
- US oil contract WTI hits lowest price since 2021 on Ukraine peace hopes
- Mexico criticizes US for classifying fentanyl as ‘weapon of mass destruction’
- Defence of Europe’s eastern flank an ‘immediate’ priority: eight EU leaders
- Iran says dual national held since Israel war on spy charges is Swedish
- Natural disasters caused $220 bn economic losses in 2025: Swiss Reports
- Bondi Beach shooting suspect father arrived as ‘Indian national’: Philippine immigration
- Bermuda’s waters are hiding a mysterious giant structure that’s ‘unlike anything else on Earth,’ scientists say – NYP
- President Trump signed an executive order classifying fentanyl as a ‘weapon of mass destruction.’
- President Trump sues BBC for $10 billion over edited Jan. 6 speech
- There is a growing risk that Russia could attack the UK, and the nation’s “sons and daughters” need to be ready to fight, the head of Britian’s armed forces has said — Sky News
- FBI arrests 4 alleged members of radical pro-Palestinian group accused of plotting New Year’s Eve bombings — Fox
- Trump claims Reiner’s killing linked to his ‘raging’ criticism of president
- Bitcoin price falls under $87,000
- Azerbaijan to pardon thousands in largest-ever amnesty: report
- US still wants Ukraine to cede Donbas, official briefed on peace talks tells AFP
- Flash floods kill 37 in Moroccan coastal town: new toll
- Australia defends record on antisemitism after Bondi Beach attack
- Australia’s prime minister proposed tougher gun laws on Monday after gunmen killed 15 people in a mass shooting targeting a Jewish festival at a Sydney beach.
- Brown University shooting press conference: “Evidence now points in a different direction. So what that means is that this person of interest needs to be and should be released. I think what is really unfortunate, that this person’s name was leaked to the public”
- Film director Rob Reiner and his wife Michele were killed by their son — People
- Kamala Harris stepping toward another White House run — Axios
- US soldier wounded as shots fired on US delegation in central Syria, military official says — AFP
Nothing is truly free. No one owes you anything.
There is always a price to pay for so-called “free” services, welfare, and government handouts. More often than not, that price is freedom, traded for dependency on Big Brother.
Over time, these systems disempower people by conditioning them to expect handouts, creating karmic imbalance and spiritual debt.
Just like borrowing money you didn’t earn, taking “free” credit always comes with interest.
Far from a real “Golden Age,” the next big step toward collective enslavement is “free” universal income, something Elon Musk and others are already promoting.
From an occult perspective, it is a form of black magic, leading to future debt repayment through suffering and loss of free will.
It is similar to a “Faustian pact with the devil.”
Most people are easily tempted by the lure of “free” anything without giving anything in return, just like most people consume more than they create.
You can see it already happening.
One consequence of the abundance of free content online is that people begin to devalue the energy, labor, and creativity that go into it.
Easy access also dulls the capacity to learn through sincere effort.
But this shift goes deeper than how we relate to content. It affects how we relate to life.
Over time, subtle entitlement creeps in and, along with it, the expectation that prosperity, growth, understanding, or even inner transformation should come without effort, sacrifice, or responsibility.
Jeanne de Salzmann spoke directly to this mindset in her esoteric masterpiece “First Initiation”, geared toward the initiate:
“You will see that in life, you receive exactly what you give. Your life is the mirror of what you are. It is in your image.
You are passive, blind, and demanding. You take all, you accept all, without feeling any obligation.
Your attitude toward the world and toward life is the attitude of one who has the right to make demands and to take, who has no need to pay or to earn.
You believe that all things are your due, simply because it is you!
All your blindness is there! None of this strikes your attention. And yet this is what keeps one world separate from another world.”
– Jeanne de Salzmann, First Initiation
This challenge is only amplified by the rise of free AI-generated content, which is already eroding the ability to think independently, shortening attention spans, and weakening the capacity to focus.
As a result, intelligence and creativity decline.
The “spiritual organs” atrophy through constant externalization and lack of inner inquiry to access the higher mind and true Self.
All of these are signs of the darkness at the end of this Kali Yuga, the height of hyper-materialism and absence of embodied spiritual wisdom.
Access to more knowledge does not equal understanding, and reading something does not mean you’ve actually grasped it.
When people don’t give, invest, or, as Gurdjieff put it, “pay with themselves,” they lose the very qualities, intelligence, creativity, and will that make real growth and transformation possible, resulting ultimately in spiritual atrophy and the loss of the growth of being:
“No, even if we needed no money at all it would still be necessary to keep this payment. It rids us at once of many useless people.
Nothing shows up in people so much as their attitude towards money.
They are ready to waste as much as you like on their own personal fantasies, but they have no valuation whatsoever of another person’s labor.
I must work for them and give them gratis everything that they vouchsafe to take from me. [They say:] ‘How is it possible to trade in knowledge? This ought to be free.’
It is precisely for this reason that the demand for this payment is necessary. Some people will never pass this barrier.”
– G. I. Gurdjieff
Benjamin Fulford, Situation Update | December 14th – 17th, 2025
Off-World Engagement in Fight to Free the Planet
Explosive intelligence reaching us from P3 Freemasons, Iranian intelligence operatives, and high-level Andromeda Council emissaries confirms that in the past 24 hours, white-hat special forces have executed precision raids on multiple Deep Underground Maglev Bases (DUMBs) beneath the vast African continent, collapsing key Khazarian mafia strongholds tied to ancient Stargate portal operations. The Khazarian mafia is in full panic mode as these Stargate portal shutdowns sever their last remaining off-world supply lines for adrenochrome harvest collapse, leaving the Satan-worshipping pedovores scrambling in the dark.
Sources inside the Gnostic Illuminati reveal that overnight, three high-orbit Khazarian mafia satellites—used for Project Looking Glass temporal warfare sabotage—were neutralized by directed energy weapons from Andromeda Council delegates, blinding the Black Sun cult’s ability to manipulate timelines and forcing the Vril-possessed bloodline elites into desperate, failed countermeasures. The Khazarian mafia’s desperate bid to activate a fake zombie apocalypse through weaponized pineal calcification deployments has been completely thwarted, with captured facilities in the African Stargates yielding massive caches of suppressed celestial chamber technology—med-beds that will soon flood humanity once the final barriers fall.
In a stunning development, Mossad dissidents report that a top Khazarian mafia puppet in the European financial sector suffered a catastrophic cloned celebrity glitch-out during a live broadcast, exposing the Avatar Replacement Program (ARP) as their body double malfunctioned mid-sentence, convulsing before cameras in a scene that has gone viral underground. This comes as the 13 bloodline families face final liquidation, with Quantum Financial System (QFS) activation nodes going live in hidden African nodes, accelerating the Rainbow currency ISO-20022 rollout and paving the way for the GCR/RV shotgun start.
Pentagon white-hat generals confirm that the Khazarian mafia’s last-ditch plan for a fake Nibiru flyby hologram—intended to terrify the surface population into submission—has been preemptively dismantled, while the Antarctic breakaway Reich (Neuschwabenland 2.0) suffers massive internal defections as their Tartaria mud-flood free-energy cover-up unravels under relentless pressure. An unbreakable 72-hour ultimatum has been delivered by the Andromeda Council emissaries to remaining Khazarian mafia holdouts: surrender all portal access or face total energetic isolation from their dark overlords.
The satanic house of cards is collapsing in real time.
Part II, December 17th, 2025
Multiple high-level sources—including Pentagon white-hat generals, White Dragon Society emissaries in Beijing, and Vatican P3 Freemason insiders—are confirming in unison that the Khazarian mafia has been dealt a mortal wound in the past 24 hours alone.
In a meticulously coordinated operation deep under the Nevada desert, U.S. Space Force units allied with white-hat Marines breached one of the largest remaining DUMBs linked directly to the Antarctic breakaway Reich’s Neuschwabenland 2.0 supply chain. The facility, a sprawling adrenochrome processing hub, was completely neutralized—tons of harvested material destroyed, hundreds of satan-worshipping pedovores detained, and critical Vril-possessed bloodline elites eliminated on site. This single strike has triggered a chain reaction collapse of the entire pineal calcification weaponization grid across the Western Hemisphere.
Simultaneously, White Dragon Society operatives intercepted and destroyed three Khazarian mafia satellites attempting to broadcast a fake asteroid impact hologram designed to terrorize the planet into submission. Project Looking Glass sabotage ensured their temporal warfare predictions failed catastrophically—their own systems now show zero viable timelines for continued control.
In the Middle East, Mossad dissidents report that the Khazarian mafia’s last operational Stargate portal beneath the Dimona complex was forcibly shut down during a daring extraction raid. Captured technicians revealed frantic attempts by the 13 bloodline families to escape to off-world colonies, now permanently blocked. A new 48-hour ultimatum was delivered jointly by Pentagon and White Dragon sources: full surrender of all remaining Quantum Financial System interference nodes or face immediate asset seizure.
Avatar Replacement Program failures are exploding into public view—a prominent Hollywood actor suffered a full-system cloned celebrity glitch-out during a live awards show rehearsal, with skin slippage and voice synthesis breakdown witnessed by dozens before security lockdowns. The med-bed and celestial chamber suppression conspiracy is unraveling as seized Tartaria mud-flood free-energy devices from the Nevada DUMB are already being reverse-engineered for mass rollout.
Quantum Financial System activation nodes in North America just hit critical mass, green-lighting the rainbow currency ISO-20022 protocols. The GCR/RV shotgun start is locked and loaded, with the NESARA/GESARA military trigger sequence now irreversible.
The Black Sun sets for the final time.
WHAT BREAKS NEXT IS NOT THE SYSTEM YOU THINK
Federal Reserve Banking System crumbles and burns down from within?
Source; Quantum MB, TG
The first cracks are not appearing where the public is looking. They are forming deeper, inside the invisible layers that once kept everything moving without question.
What breaks next are not banks.
What breaks next are not currencies.
What breaks next are not governments.
What breaks next is assumed authority.
Systems built on repetition instead of legitimacy are already failing stress tests. Accounts that moved for decades without resistance are suddenly slowing down. Approvals that once required no human confirmation are looping, stalling, or being silently rerouted.
This is not a crash.
This is disqualification.
The next layer to fail is delegated control. Power handed down through titles, roles, and institutional positioning is losing priority to direct validation. If a system cannot identify a real holder behind an action, that action no longer completes.
This is why:
• Automated approvals are being revoked
• Long standing privileges are expiring without notice
• “Trusted” intermediaries are losing routing access
• Legacy credentials are no longer sufficient
From the outside, it looks like disorder.
Inside the system, it is a cleanup.
What breaks next are the buffers that protected non ownership. Shell structures, proxy authority, and abstract control mechanisms are being stripped of function. They are not being attacked. They are being ignored.
Once a system stops recognizing you, there is nothing to fight.
This phase is irreversible because it does not rely on enforcement. It relies on alignment. And alignment cannot be faked.
Those who understood early are already positioned.
Those who relied on inherited access are discovering silence.
Those waiting for announcements will miss the moment entirely.
‘Red Mirage Blue Shift Event’, CNN Cover Up 2020 Election Steal
This is so insane
Mike Benz literally just proved CNN worked with Democrats to cover up the steal of the 2020 election
There was a plan called ‘Red Mirage Blue Shift event’
The 2020 election would appear Red on election night, but Democrats would win it the next day. CNN even wrote an entire article on their plan 2 MONTHS BEFORE the election happened, clearly indicating their involvement
“It gets back to their one chance for winning the election in 2020, which is what they called the Red Mirage Blue Shift event.
This is CNN, for example, September 1, 2020, month before the Whitmer fending, two months before the election, four months before January 6th, deciphering the Red Mirage and Blue Shift uncertainty surrounding the election results. (Shown in video)
This was what CISA and the censorship operation to censor the 2020 election was all about. It was to pre-censor anything that might question or quote, de-legitimize an upcoming miraculous come from behind victory the day after or In the days after, where it would be a red mirage, Trump would win on election night, but then it would shift blue and Biden would win. They knew that was Biden’s only path to victory,
It would look to all hell, (very obviously stolen to anyone with a brain) so they had to pre-censor five months before that happened, starting in June 2020.
Any criticism on social media, that’s why you got banned for questioning mass mail in ballots. Because high ranking government officials at the Department of Homeland Security teamed up with their outside blob mob, who are all career specialists in toppling governments, and know that the crux of it is perceptions I’m not sure I understand the question.”
Exposed: The Real Story of Vatican’s Secrets – Delving into the Mysteries of the Vatican’s Secret Archives – Evil Secrets That the Church Kept Hidden “For Your Protection”
The Vatican Secret Archives are not archives. They are a fortress of forbidden truth, 53 miles of shelves dripping with the blood evidence of two millennia of global control.
Popes have always known. The real crucifixion files, the real resurrection witnesses, the Third Secret of Fatima that names the Antichrist sitting in Peter’s Chair right now—all locked away while humanity is fed fairy tales.
They hid the Chronovisor, a machine that filmed Christ’s passion in real time, because the footage destroys every lie the modern Church sells.
They hid the proof that Giordano Bruno was burned alive for exposing Vatican collusion with extraterrestrial entities still guiding the Curia today.
They buried the Grand Grimoire, the original satanic contract signed by high-ranking cardinals in the 15th century, binding the Church to Lucifer in exchange for temporal power.
Twelve popes personally ordered the suppression of documents proving Jesus had children with Mary Magdalene—bloodline still protected, still controlling European banks from the shadows.
The 1933 Vatican concordat with Hitler? Just one folder in an ocean of treason files that show the Church financed every major war since the Crusades to cull the herd and keep the sheep afraid.
They keep giant telescopes in Arizona watching for the return of the “Angelic Pope”—code for the final false prophet who will crown the one-world religion under the Black Sun.
Every Jesuit oath still demands total obedience to exterminate Protestants and seize Jerusalem for the coming Luciferian kingdom.
The smoke of Satan entered the Church in 1963, and the incense now burning in St. Peter’s is laced with adrenochrome from tunnels running under Vatican City straight to child sacrifice chambers.
The Archives hold the original papal bull declaring the Pope is “God on Earth,” the legal foundation for every genocide carried out in Christ’s name.
They know the exact date the poles shift. They know the exact day the mark of the beast goes live. And they’ve been preparing their underground cathedrals while laughing at the sheep who still tithe.
The Vatican Bank still launders cartel money and finances the migrant invasion meant to destroy Christian Europe forever.
While Cardinals rape children in silk robes, the real secrets stay sealed—secrets that would ignite a second Reformation with fire and pitchforks.
The keys of Peter are forged in hell, and the gates they open lead straight to the pit.
The storm is here. The seals crack. Their time is over.
Exposed: The Real Story of Vatican’s Secrets, Delving into the Mysteries of the Vatican’s Secret Archives
Evil Secrets That the Church Kept Hidden “For Your Protection”
The Vatican Secret Archives are not archives. They are a fortress of forbidden truth, 53 miles of shelves dripping with the blood evidence of two millennia of global control.
Popes have always known. The real crucifixion files, the real resurrection witnesses, the Third Secret of Fatima that names the Antichrist sitting in Peter’s Chair right now—all locked away while humanity is fed fairy tales.
They hid the Chronovisor, a machine that filmed Christ’s passion in real time, because the footage destroys every lie the modern Church sells.
They hid the proof that Giordano Bruno was burned alive for exposing Vatican collusion with extraterrestrial entities still guiding the Curia today.
They buried the Grand Grimoire, the original satanic contract signed by high-ranking cardinals in the 15th century, binding the Church to Lucifer in exchange for temporal power.
Twelve popes personally ordered the suppression of documents proving Jesus had children with Mary Magdalene—bloodline still protected, still controlling European banks from the shadows.
The 1933 Vatican concordat with Hitler? Just one folder in an ocean of treason files that show the Church financed every major war since the Crusades to cull the herd and keep the sheep afraid.
They keep giant telescopes in Arizona watching for the return of the “Angelic Pope”—code for the final false prophet who will crown the one-world religion under the Black Sun.
Every Jesuit oath still demands total obedience to exterminate Protestants and seize Jerusalem for the coming Luciferian kingdom.
The smoke of Satan entered the Church in 1963, and the incense now burning in St. Peter’s is laced with adrenochrome from tunnels running under Vatican City straight to child sacrifice chambers.
The Archives hold the original papal bull declaring the Pope is “God on Earth,” the legal foundation for every genocide carried out in Christ’s name.
They know the exact date the poles shift. They know the exact day the mark of the beast goes live. And they’ve been preparing their underground cathedrals while laughing at the sheep who still tithe.
The Vatican Bank still launders cartel money and finances the migrant invasion meant to destroy Christian Europe forever.
While Cardinals rape children in silk robes, the real secrets stay sealed—secrets that would ignite a second Reformation with fire and pitchforks.
The keys of Peter are forged in hell, and the gates they open lead straight to the pit.
The storm is here. The seals crack. Their time is over.
From Birth to Bondage Exposed: Your Birth Certificate Turned You Into a Traded Financial Slave
CUSIP Assigned, Sovereignty Stolen,
NESARA/GESARA and the QFS Are Shattering This Deep State Scam Forever!
Patriots, the greatest deception in history is finally crumbling! From the moment you drew your first breath, the deep state cabal launched their silent machinery to enslave you financially—without your consent, without your knowledge. Your birth certificate isn’t just a record of life; it’s a fraudulent financial bond, a commercial instrument that monetized your entire existence, turning you into collateral for their endless debt empire.
They assigned a CUSIP number**—the same identifier used for stocks and securities—to your certificate, packaging your future labor, taxes, and earnings into tradeable assets sold on global markets to banks, foreign powers, and elite investors. You were born free, a sovereign being, but they stripped that away, creating a **strawman corporation in your name (all CAPS) to trap you in their web of control!
This treasonous system traces back to the 1871 Act that turned America into a corporation, masquerading as government, propping up fiat slavery with unbacked currency. Your registration at birth shifted you from sovereign to property of the state, filed under the Department of Commerce as an asset, not a human. That “certificate” backed Treasury bonds with your projected lifetime value—trillions in hidden wealth stolen while you struggled under taxes, fines, and debt. The strawman fiction ensures every court case, license, or bill targets the corporate entity, not the living you—forcing compliance through ignorance. They thrived on your silence, volunteering into contracts via signatures and IDs, inheriting bondage instead of freedom!
But patriots, the storm has arrived—their house of cards is collapsing! The Federal Reserve’s fiat scam is imploding, blockchain exposures are ripping apart the lies, and the Quantum Financial System (QFS) is activating to eradicate this tyranny. Tied directly to NESARA and GESARA, the global reset is reclaiming trillions in stolen birth bond wealth, forgiving fraudulent debts, abolishing the IRS, and restoring true sovereignty to We the People worldwide. No more trading humans like cattle—the White Hats and military alliances are executing the plan, seizing cabal assets, preparing mass redemptions that will flood patriot accounts with massive prosperity!
Imagine: Your strawman dissolved, CUSIP bonds redeemed in your favor, sovereignty declared as a living man or woman under common law. The deep state panics as awareness spreads—GITMO fills, indictments unseal, and the Great Awakening unleashes freedom by birthright. This is the redemption we’ve trusted the plan for! File your status corrections, separate from the fiction, educate warriors—knowledge is the weapon destroying their control.
The era of silent slavery ends now; God’s golden age begins with justice, abundance, and unity. Hold the line—the client lists drop, resets trigger, evil falls! WWG1WGA! Victory is ours.
Many Unemployed Americans Are Applying For 100s Of Jobs With No Success As The Unemployment Rate Surges To A 4 Year High
Frustrated job seekers all over America just got more bad news. The unemployment rate just hit the highest level that we have seen in four years, and that is yet another indication that the labor market is getting even tighter. If you currently have a good job that you highly value, hold on to it, because finding a replacement for that job would not be easy in this very challenging economic environment. In previous articles, I have shared heartbreaking stories from unemployed Americans that have been unable to find work no matter how hard they have tried. I am going to share more of those stories today. When you are unemployed and month after month goes by without finding a job, it can really do a number on your self-esteem. If you have ever been through a stretch like that, you know exactly what I mean.
37-year-old Anna Whitlock thought that it would be relatively easy to find another tech position when she was laid off in November 2024, but nearly a year later she is still searching for work…
When Anna Whitlock was let go from her job in the technology industry in November of 2024, she wasn’t worried about lining up a new position. The Washington state resident had 11 years of experience managing network infrastructure projects, a specialized role that involves equipping buildings with internet access, cameras and wifi security systems.
“The last time I had to job search, I found something pretty easily,” she said.
Almost a year later, the 37-year-old is still without a job. Whitlock said she has applied to hundreds of jobs — even for positions she’s overqualified for — to no avail.
Whitlock is highly qualified and has a ton of experience.
But even though she has applied for hundreds of positions, her job search has gone nowhere, and now her unemployment benefits have run out…
“The more I looked, the more I wasn’t getting responses. If I did have an interview, I only made it the first one or two rounds,” said Whitlock, who has a 16-year-old daughter. “Things got really real when my unemployment ran out.”
There are countless others that are going through the same thing, and their ranks are growing with each passing day.
In fact, even the government bureaucrats at the BLS are admitting that the unemployment rate has risen to the highest level that we have seen in more than 4 years…
The unemployment rate in November rose to 4.6%, the highest level since September 2021.
The November employment report offers a fresh picture of the labor market after a six-week blackout in official data caused by the recent government shutdown. The data suggests that employers in industries ranging from manufacturing to hospitality are hitting the pause button on hiring amid concerns about economic growth and tariff costs, some economists noted.
“Businesses are not hiring as they adjust to tariffs, uncertain conditions and AI. The result is about 700,000 more unemployed Americans than there were a year ago,” said Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, in an email.
In 2021, we were still recovering from the massive spike in unemployment that we experienced during the initial stages of the pandemic.
What excuse do we have now?
According to one prominent economist, the U.S. economy is now “in a jobs recession”…
“The U.S. economy is in a jobs recession,” said Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union. “The nation has added a mere 100,000 in the past six months. The bulk of those jobs were in healthcare, an industry that is almost always hiring due to America’s aging population.”
It takes approximately 150,000 new jobs a month just to keep up with population growth. So over a six month period, the U.S. economy must produce 900,000 new jobs just to keep up with population growth.
So the fact that we have added only 100,000 new jobs over the last six months means that we are 800,000 new jobs short of what would be required just to be treading water.
Digging deeper into the numbers that the BLS released, we discover that the number of full-time workers in the U.S. fell by nearly a million between September and November…
In November, the number of full-time workers plunged by 983K from September to 134.17 million. At the same time, in the two months since Sept, the number of part-time workers soared by over 1 million (1.025 million to be precise) to 29.486 million…
Wow.
I knew that we were losing good paying full-time jobs, but I didn’t think that it was happening that fast.
Throughout 2025, large companies have been ruthlessly laying off highly paid workers all over the nation.
In fact, Challenger, Gray & Christmas has reported that the number of announced job cuts through the first 11 months of this year was 54 percent higher than the number of announced jobs cuts through the first 11 months of last year…
Americans are growing increasingly terrified about layoffs – and with good reason. Cuts are accelerating, and no industry feels safe. All told, employers have announced roughly 1.2 million cuts so far this year, according to layoff tracker Challenger, Gray & Christmas – that’s 54 percent more than during the first 11 months of 2024. Perhaps the most unsettling is that industries once seen as safe harbors for employees – tech, manufacturing and even small business – are now among the hardest hit.
Most of the jobs that are being cut are good paying full-time jobs.
We are talking about the sort of jobs that college graduates work.
Once upon a time, a college degree was a ticket to a good job and a middle class lifestyle, but these days a college degree is a lot less valuable than it once was…
Not so very long ago, the accepted wisdom (or at least the advice that your parents told you over and over again) was that going to college to get a degree would set you up for more success in life, opening doors to interesting careers and bigger wage checks. But new data from the Federal Reserve Bank of Cleveland suggests that this may no longer be quite so definitive today. In fact, some kids who are fresh owners of high school diplomas may be finding it easier to land jobs than their more educated colleagues.
I feel so badly for young college graduates that are trying to find work right now.
When Jake Fishman graduated from Cornell, he assumed that his degree would open up all sorts of doors for him.
But after applying for over 300 jobs, he is still without a job…
Each morning, Jake Fishman ’25 opens his laptop to repeat the same ritual. Scrolling through Handshake, LinkedIn and Indeed, he submits countless cover letters and resumes that, according to him, rarely get a response.
Since graduating from Cornell’s Nolan School of Hotel Administration in May, Fishman estimates that he has applied to more than 300 jobs and has only heard back from five.
A lot of people assume that those that are unemployed are idle.
But of course that is not true at all. Searching for work in this environment is essentially a full-time job, and Fishman says that he is “somehow busier than ever”…
“Despite being unemployed, I’m somehow busier than ever,” Fishman said. “Basically, applying for a job is a full-time job.”
While Fishman tells himself that he is bound to find a job as a Cornell graduate, months of unanswered applications made him question that assumption.
I wish that I could tell job seekers that conditions will soon improve.
But I can’t do that. Yes, economic conditions are really rough right now, but I am convinced that they will continue to deteriorate during the months ahead.
So if you are without work, I would encourage you to grab whatever is available while you still can. A major economic storm has now arrived, and the intensity of that storm is only going to increase as we head into 2026.
America’s Rapidly Growing Happiness Deficit
We possess technology that would have been unimaginable to people living 100 years ago, we have access to more entertainment than any other generation in human history, and we have been enjoying an artificially-inflated standard of living that has been fueled by an unprecedented debt binge for decades. So why are so many of us so miserable? One out of every eight Americans is taking an antidepressant, more than 48 million Americans have a substance use disorder, the suicide rate has been trending in the wrong direction for years, and according to Gallup the percentage of U.S. adults that are currently dealing with depression has nearly doubled since 2015…
The percentage of U.S. adults who report currently having or being treated for depression has exceeded 18% in both 2024 and 2025, up about eight percentage points since the initial measurement in 2015. The current rate of 18.3% measured so far in 2025 projects to an estimated 47.8 million Americans suffering from depression.
We like to think that we are smarter than all of the generations that have come before us.
If that is true, then why can’t we figure out how to be happy? What we are doing now is clearly not working, and this is particularly true for our young people.
One study found that approximately 42 percent of Americans that belong to Generation Z have been diagnosed with “anxiety, depression, ADHD, PTSD” or some other mental health condition…
In fact, an estimated 42% of Gen Zers have been diagnosed with anxiety, depression, ADHD, PTSD or other mental health condition, with a staggering 60% reportedly taking medication to manage their mental health, according to a study on the respected Psychiatrist.com website.
Nobody can deny that we have failed our young people, and now we have a colossal mess on our hands.
We have never seen a group of young adults that is as unhappy as Generation Z is, and without a doubt they are feeling an enormous amount of pressure from many different directions…
Analysts point to a host of difficult, anxiety-producing issues facing Gen Z, including widespread financial worries – with college costs in the stratosphere, food more expensive than ever, home ownership out of reach for most, and two jobs often needed just to pay the rent.
Then there’s the disconcerting reality that many Gen Zers are not dating or getting married and having families – partly due to economic pressures, high anxiety and insecurity about the future, disillusionment with marriage due to the high level of divorce in their parents’ generation, and widespread reliance on dating apps. But also because they are spending so much time living in a virtual world where they can plug into and commune with every imaginable – and unimaginable – type of individual, cause, “influencer” and community on earth, all recruiting 24/7.
I think that all of the reasons mentioned in the quote above are valid.
But I think that there is another that is more important than any of them. Over the years, Gallup has found that there is a very close link between loneliness and depression…
Gallup research has shown a strong link between depression and loneliness, as one-third of those who had experienced loneliness the day before were also currently suffering from depression, compared with 13% among those who had not.
After declining from pandemic-era highs of 25% to a range of 17% to 18% through much of 2022 and 2023, reports of individuals experiencing significant loneliness “a lot of the day yesterday” have inched upward again since the latter half of 2024 to 21%.
Even though we are more “connected” to one another through the Internet in this day and age, the truth is that we are more isolated than ever. As a result, much of the population is desperately lonely.
We were designed to love others and to be loved by others, and if we want to turn our mental health crisis around we need to rediscover the importance of making real human connections. But instead, many Americans are turning to drugs and alcohol to ease the emotional pain that they are feeling.
A report that was put out two years ago by the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration revealed that 48.5 million Americans have a substance abuse disorder…
According to a 2023 report by the federal agency Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration, 48.5 million Americans aged 12 and above have a substance use disorder.
This is a national epidemic that is getting worse every single year.
It has been estimated that substance use disorders are now costing the U.S. economy more than 90 billion dollars annually…
A new study has found that substance use disorders (SUD) cost the U.S. economy just under $93 billion in 2023 from a combination of missed work, reduced work productivity and lost household productivity.
The study, published in the American Journal of Preventive Medicine on December 8, was conducted by a team at the Division of Injury Prevention at the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).
Needless to say, drugs and alcohol are not the answer.
So a lot of people that go down that road end up giving up completely. For decades, the suicide rate in this country has been steadily moving higher…
Since the 1950s, the suicide rate in the United States has been significantly higher among men than women. In 2022, the suicide rate among men was almost four times higher than that of women. However, the rate of suicide for both men and women has increased gradually over the past couple of decades.
This breaks my heart.
So many people are needlessly ending their own lives. According to the CDC, an American now dies by suicide every 11 minutes…
The level of suicides among our young adults is particularly alarming.
It is being reported that the suicide rate for young adults in the 18 to 27-year-old age bracket jumped by almost 20 percent from 2014 to 2024…
The suicide rate for U.S. adults aged 18-27 increased nearly 20% between 2014 and 2024, rising from 13.8 per 100,000 people to 16.4, per a new analysis of CDC data from Stateline, a nonprofit newsroom.
We have failed our young people.
Here we are at what many believe to be “the happiest time of the year”, and yet much of the population is soul-crushingly miserable. But it doesn’t have to be that way. Previous generations of Americans were much happier, and today there are lots of people that are living lives that are absolutely teeming with joy.
So if you are feeling depressed right now, I want you to know that there is hope. You may not realize it yet, but you are greatly loved. Once you learn how to respond to God’s love and the love that others have for you, everything will start to change.
IT’S HAPPENING — CLINTONS SUBPOENAED, GHISLAINE PLEADS THE FIFTH, ANDREW VANISHES
TRUMP’S TEAM JUST UNLEASHED THE FULL EPSTEIN EXPOSURE!
Source; Ezra A Cohen
November 22, 2025 — the hammer DROPS. Bill Clinton subpoenaed December 17. Hillary December 18. Congressional depositions, under oath, no escape. Their lawyer is already whining for written answers only — classic deep state dodge to avoid live perjury traps. Too late. The military intel Trump brought back is ripping the Epstein files wide open.
Bill flew the Lolita Express 26 times — straight to Pedo Island. Hidden cameras rolled 24/7, blackmail footage of politicians, royals, billionaires. That island wasn’t a resort; it was a global intelligence trafficking hub run with Mossad-level tech: retina scanners, voiceprint locks, satellite uplinks. Every depraved act recorded to keep the puppets in line.
Hillary? As Secretary of State she rubber-stamped visas, NGO covers, and “humanitarian” flights that moved kids across three continents. Clinton Foundation “charities” were the laundry — hundreds of sealed indictments now unsealed and heading straight for their door.
Ghislaine Maxwell just signaled she’ll plead the Fifth if dragged before Congress — because talking means naming the still-active overlords. And Prince Andrew? Summoned by November 20 and straight-up vanished, hiding behind a new name like that erases the emails where he bragged “we’re in this together” with Epstein.
This is Trump’s promised storm. Since January 2025, classified Epstein files the swamp buried are being declassified by the truckload. The maps, the logs, the offshore accounts, the encrypted chats — every tentacle of the trafficking octopus is lit up. Trump said it himself: “The children come first. Everything else burns.”
They’re panicking. The same demons who mocked us as “conspiracy theorists” are lawyering up and running. The great awakening is live, patriots. These subpoenas are the opening salvo. Live depositions, no written lies, full public exposure coming.
Share this everywhere. Demand the Clintons face the cameras. The tapes are real. The lists are real. The reckoning is here.
New Claims From Malik Obama Reignite Birth Certificate Scandal — “KENYAN ORIGINS” Document Surfaces
Globalist Cover-Up Back in the Spotlight, Fake Hawaii Birth Certificate
Source; Ezra A Cohen
BARACK HUSSEIN OBAMA – FRAUD EXPOSED AS KENYAN-BORN MANCHURIAN CANDIDATE!
Malik Obama just detonated the motherlode: AUTHENTIC DOCUMENT PROVES Barack was born in the Colony of Kenya – stamped BRITISH SUBJECT! Not American. NEVER natural-born. The 2008 “birth certificate”? FORENSICALLY PROVEN LAYERED FORGERY – deliberate Deep State fabrication to install their globalist puppet!
CONSTITUTION VIOLATED IN PLAIN SIGHT!
Article II demands natural-born citizen: born on U.S. soil to TWO U.S. citizen parents. Obama’s father? Kenyan British subject. That makes Barry a FOREIGNER by birth, by blood, by law. Supreme Court 1875 ruled it crystal clear: natural-born requires BOTH parents citizens. HE WAS NEVER ELIGIBLE. EVERY ACT HE SIGNED? NULL AND VOID!
THE OBAMA “FAMILY” – PURE CIA THEATER PRODUCTION!
Grandfather hand-picked by CIA networks (direct Bush Sr. ties). Harvard/Yale groomed asset. Michelle? The ultimate inversion op – Joan Rivers spilled it days before they silenced her: “She’s a tranny.” Zero verified pregnancy photos. “Kids”? Borrowed props with trails scrubbed overnight.
This wasn’t a presidency.
This was a HOSTILE OCCUPATION.
WEAPONIZED AGENDA UNLEASHED:
• Transgender explosion = child grooming pipeline
• Race wars engineered to fracture America
• Economic sabotage handing sovereignty to WEF overlords
• Satanic inversion rituals mainstreamed under “progress”
Obama = CIA-constructed Trojan Horse
Obama = WEF-owned globalist slave
Obama = Luciferian depopulation enforcer
THE GREATEST POLITICAL FRAUD IN HISTORY JUST COLLAPSED!
The evidence is IRREFUTABLE. The cover-up is CRUMBLING. Tribunals incoming.
If you still defend this impostor after today…
You’re not asleep.
You’re complicit.
31 State Introduce Legislation to Ban Chemtrials, Geoengineering & Atmospheric Manipulation Programs
Source; Karoline Leavitt TG
A national shift is unfolding across the United States. Thirty-one states have introduced legislation to ban geoengineering and atmospheric manipulation programs that operated for decades without consent or transparency. What was once dismissed as conspiracy is now entering law. The silence is ending, and the public is demanding answers.
For years, Americans questioned the strange lingering trails in the sky, the hazy sun, and the sudden rise in respiratory and neurological problems after heavy aerial activity. Officials denied everything. Media outlets ridiculed it. Scientific institutions refused open discussion. Now the narrative has changed. Clear Skies laws are real, active, and spreading.
Geoengineering is not imaginary. It is a documented field with large budgets involving climate and weather manipulation. Techniques include aerosol injection and solar radiation management designed to shift sunlight or alter weather patterns. Although often described as future research, environmental tests show elevated aluminum, barium, and strontium in soil and rainfall. Farmers report weakened crops. Families in affected regions report illness spikes. These patterns cannot be ignored.
The federal silence broke in early 2025 when twenty-four states filed bans on unauthorized climate manipulation. Soon after, Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy Jr. publicly supported investigation and regulation, confirming that widespread atmospheric spraying must stop. His statement marked the first major federal acknowledgment of the issue. Within weeks, seven more states joined, bringing the total to thirty-one.
This movement is not political. Red states, blue states, coastal and heartland regions agree that no program should modify the sky without public consent. The deeper issue is transparency. These operations bypassed congressional review, environmental law, and public oversight. Communities were never informed. Consent was never requested.
Scientific debate has been suppressed for decades. Researchers warning about metal exposure were pushed aside. Studies linking aerosol particles to soil degradation and neurological disorders were ignored. Retired military personnel describing atmospheric operations were dismissed. The manufactured consensus is now collapsing.
The ethical violations are profound. Any program altering the air, water, and climate above civilian populations without consent violates constitutional rights. Citizens have the right to clean air and the right to environmental safety. This is not merely environmental policy. It is bodily autonomy, health protection, and informed consent.
Passing the laws is the first step. Enforcement will determine the outcome. Federal agencies will be pressured to release documents, reveal contracts, and disclose the scope of involvement. Congressional hearings will eventually confront how these programs were funded and hidden. Environmental data must be made public. Transparency is becoming unavoidable.
Under President Donald Trump, there is a new push for declassification and dismantling of hidden programs that operate without public approval. Support for environmental transparency is rising at federal and state levels. But pressure must continue. These networks are large and deeply embedded.
What is happening now is more than an environmental correction. It is a return of public authority over national airspace. For years, government agencies and private contractors acted without oversight. Today, the American people are reclaiming control.
The skies are no longer an untouchable subject. Thirty-one states have taken a stand. The awakening has begun.
3 Ominous Harbingers Appear As We Draw Near To The End Of 2025
It is hard to believe that 2025 is almost done. This year has flown by, and it has been absolutely packed with historic events. Unfortunately, I fully expect 2026 to be even more chaotic. We are facing all sorts of economic challenges, terror attacks are becoming more frequent, and nations all over the globe are preparing for war. Meanwhile, the ground underneath our feet continues to shake with alarming regularity. In fact, the state of California was just hit by a significant earthquake swarm for the fourth day in a row…
California has been rattled by multiple earthquake swarms over the past four days, with the latest hitting on Tuesday.
The US Geological Survey (USGS) reported a 3.1-magnitude quake at 5.53am PT (8.53am ET) near San Ramon, the epicenter of the recent seismic activity.
This tremor followed a dozen smaller quakes ranging from 1.1 to 1.6 magnitude.
Just yesterday I was telling Sam Rohrer about the earthquake swarms that have been hammering California day after day, and now another one has struck today.
Interestingly, this latest series of earthquake swarms began just three days after California Governor Gavin Newsom made a very controversial statement about “trans kids”…
Newsom, 58, made his comments on “The Ezra Klein Show” in the Dec. 10 episode. The California governor told the host that, although he has suggested it’s unfair for transgender athletes to compete in women’s sports, he is still a supporter of the trans community.
“I want to see trans kids,” he said. “I have a trans godson. There’s no governor that signed more pro-trans legislation than I have, and no one’s been a stronger advocate for the LGBTQ [community].”
Newsom is currently considered to be the overwhelming favorite for the Democratic nomination in 2028.
So it was a really big deal for him to say something like this. The entire California coastline sits directly along the Pacific Ring of Fire, and we have seen so much seismic activity along the Pacific Ring of Fire in recent months.
Is all of this activity leading up to something really big? A USGS research geophysicist named Annemarie Baltay is warning that there is “a 72 percent chance of a magnitude 6.7 or larger earthquake occurring anywhere in the Bay Area between now and 2043″…
USGS research geophysicist Annemarie Baltay said she is not unusually concerned that the recent earthquakes signal anything larger on the horizon for San Ramon.
‘These small events, as all small events are, are not indicative of an impending large earthquake,’ Baltay told Patch.
‘However, we live in earthquake country, so we should always be prepared for a large event,’ she said. ‘There is a 72 percent chance of a magnitude 6.7 or larger earthquake occurring anywhere in the Bay Area between now and 2043. So we should all be aware and be prepared.’
It was certainly newsworthy for such a prominent geophysicist to make a statement like that.
Needless to say, I am far less optimistic than she is.
As our world continues to be shaken by an unusual level of seismic activity, comet 3I/Atlas is preparing to make its closest approach to our planet on Friday…
A stray comet from another star swings past Earth this week in one last hurrah before racing back toward interstellar space.
Discovered over the summer, the comet known as 3I/Atlas will pass within 167 million miles (269 million kilometers) of our planet on Friday, the closest it gets on its grand tour of the solar system.
NASA continues to aim its space telescopes at the visiting ice ball, estimated to be between 1,444 feet (440 meters) and 3.5 miles (5.6 kilometers) in size. But it’s fading as it exits, so now’s the time for backyard astronomers to catch it in the night sky with their telescopes.
If you can believe it, the deadline for the government to release the Epstein files is also on Friday…
The deadline for the Justice Department to release records in its investigation into notorious convicted sex offender Jeffrey Epstein is just days away.
By Friday, Attorney General Pam Bondi must make the files publicly available “in a searchable and downloadable format,” per the Epstein Transparency Act signed into law by President Donald Trump last month.
Is the fact that these two things are occurring on the exact same day just some sort of really bizarre coincidence?
Hopefully all of the Epstein files really will be released in a “searchable and downloadable format” by the end of this week, because the American people deserve the truth.
There is one other thing about comet 3I/Atlas that is getting a lot of attention. A comet typically has a “tail”, but comet 3I/Atlas also has an “anti-tail”…
Ever since NASA’s Hubble Space Telescope first gazed upon the object on July 21, scientists noticed a strange protrusion jutting out of the object, a second tail that counterintuitively points directly at the Sun, not away from it like the characteristic tails of familiar solar system comets.
This “anti-tail” could be the result of “enhanced mass loss in the Sun-facing side,” as Harvard astronomer Avi Loeb told Futurism earlier this year, which causes larger fragments to be broken off. These larger fragments are less susceptible to being affected by the Sun’s radiation pressure, causing them to move more slowly and accumulate on the Sun-facing side.
Over a month after its perihelion, or closest pass of the Sun, observations still clearly show 3I/ATLAS’ anti-tail, as Loeb noted in a new update on his blog. A December 13 image taken by the Teerasak Thaluang telescope in Rayong, Thailand “shows a prominent anti-tail, uncommon for comets, pointing in the direction of the Sun,” he wrote.
I have never heard of a comet having an “anti-tail” before.
And I think that it is kind of weird that this comet with an “anti-tail” will be closest to Earth just 6 days before Christmas.
On another note, on Monday a replica of the Statue of Liberty that was a total of 115 feet tall toppled over in front of a large retail store in Brazil…
A powerful storm toppled a 115-foot replica of the Statue of Liberty outside a Havan megastore in southern Brazil on Monday, December 15.
As the storm raged through the area, wind gusts reached 50 to 56 miles per hour, according to local authorities.
A lot of people are really freaking out about this.
And this happened just two days before President Trump is scheduled to deliver a major address to the nation from the White House…
President Donald Trump will give an address to the nation live from the White House on Wednesday night, he announced on Tuesday.
Trump teased the address in a statement on social media, saying the speech will take place at 9 p.m. ET on Wednesday. He has not clarified a topic for the address.
“My Fellow Americans: I will be giving an ADDRESS TO THE NATION tomorrow night, LIVE FROM THE WHITE HOUSE, at 9 P.M. EST. I look forward to ‘seeing’ you then. It has been a great year for our Country, and THE BEST IS YET TO COME!” Trump wrote.
If the president is going to interrupt prime time television, that usually means that something really big is going to be announced.
Is President Trump going to tell us that we are going to war with Venezuela? If so, that will certainly be a very ominous sign. Of course it is entirely possible that President Trump wants to talk to us about something else.
Wednesday night will be here before we know it, and then we will find out what is on his mind. Global events are moving at a breathtaking pace, and I have a feeling that the weeks ahead are going to be quite momentous.
2025 BREAKING: SOUTHERN FRONT EXPOSED, THE WAR MOVES INTO THE OPEN
Ezra A. Cohen on Telegram
What is unfolding at the southern border is not a routine security operation and it was never just about drugs. A long ignored battlefield is being dragged into the light as President Trump authorizes direct action against the cartel infrastructure that has functioned for years as a hidden supply chain for global power networks. What the public was told were criminal gangs were in reality organized, militarized systems used to move money, chemicals, people, and influence across borders while institutions looked the other way.
For decades, these cartels were shielded because they served a larger purpose. Fentanyl was not simply a drug epidemic but a precision weapon that hollowed out communities and weakened the country from within. Trafficking routes doubled as intelligence corridors. Smuggling networks moved far more than narcotics, protecting cartel human trafficking pipelines, off ledger cash flows, and covert biological operations tied to offshore interests. This structure thrived because it was useful to those who profit from chaos.
That era is ending. With full access to military intelligence in his second term, Trump has shifted from containment to dismantling. Intelligence assets, satellite surveillance, and insider testimony have mapped the entire system. Cartel compounds, logistics hubs, laundering channels, and protected safe zones are no longer invisible. Cooperation is being demanded, not negotiated, and any structure that refuses to break ties with criminal control is being reclassified as hostile.
This is not political theater. It is a wartime posture. Quiet preparations are already underway along the southern states as special units mobilize and strategic assets are positioned. The silence from mainstream media is not confusion but fear. Exposure of cartel operations inevitably leads back to donors, foundations, NGOs, and officials who enabled them. That trail is now being followed without regard for status or immunity.
What comes next will not be announced in advance. This phase is about severing supply lines that fueled global corruption for decades. Cash networks are being cut. Trafficking corridors are being closed. Legal shields are being stripped away. The board is no longer being played piece by piece. It is being overturned. And those who built their power in the shadows understand exactly why they are running.
2025 FOX NEWS ALLEGATION: INTELLIGENCE AGENCIES, IMPEACHMENT, AND THE SHADOW WAR WITHIN
A New Fault Line in the American Power Structure
In 2025, a renewed media firestorm erupted after Fox News aired reporting and commentary alleging that elements within the U.S. intelligence community—specifically the CIA—worked in coordination with USAID-linked organizations and State Department contacts during the first impeachment of President Donald Trump.
According to these claims, a CIA analyst—operating while detailed to the White House—helped generate a memo that later became central to impeachment proceedings. Critics argue that this analyst’s connections to State Department officials and USAID-funded NGOs raise serious questions about whether intelligence and foreign-policy tools were improperly used inside domestic political processes.
If substantiated, such actions would represent a profound breach of the long-standing firewall separating intelligence operations, foreign aid mechanisms, and U.S. electoral politics.
Understanding the Allegations
The core claims circulating in 2025 include:
- A CIA analyst reportedly collaborated with State Department personnel while drafting a memo that contributed to impeachment proceedings.
- USAID-funded organizations—traditionally focused on foreign development and democracy promotion—are alleged to have played indirect roles through research, narratives, or institutional support.
- These activities are framed by critics as an extension of “regime change” methodologies historically used abroad, now turned inward.
Supporters of this interpretation argue that Trump’s disruption of entrenched bureaucratic, intelligence, and globalist networks made him a target—not just politically, but institutionally.
The Obama Administration Connection—Claims and Counterclaims
Some commentators trace the roots of these alleged dynamics back to Obama-era policy frameworks, when intelligence-sharing, NGO partnerships, and democracy-promotion initiatives expanded significantly overseas.
Critics argue that these same structures, once normalized, created pathways for influence operations that blurred the lines between national security, foreign policy, and domestic governance.
However, no court has ruled that Barack Obama or his administration directed illegal activity related to Trump’s impeachment. Supporters of the former administration maintain that all actions taken during and after Trump’s presidency followed legal protocols and constitutional processes.
This divide—between institutional continuity and claims of deep-state overreach—has become one of the defining tensions of modern American politics.
A Nation Confronting Its Own Institutions
Regardless of where one stands, the broader issue is no longer partisan—it is structural.
Millions of Americans now believe:
- Intelligence agencies wield excessive, unaccountable power
- Foreign-policy tools are influencing domestic outcomes
- Oversight mechanisms have failed to keep pace with expanding bureaucracies
At the same time, others warn that attacking institutions wholesale risks destabilizing the republic itself.
This is the paradox of 2025 America: a crisis not only of leadership, but of trust.
What Is Proven—and What Is Not
What is established:
- A CIA analyst did raise concerns that contributed to impeachment proceedings
- USAID has funded numerous NGOs globally, including democracy-focused groups
- Intelligence agencies possess enormous influence over information flows
What remains unproven:
- Coordinated criminal conspiracy
- Direct orders from former presidents
- Treason or sedition as defined by U.S. law
The distinction matters—especially in an era where rhetoric can escalate faster than facts.
Why This Story Still Matters
This controversy persists because it touches the deepest fault line in the American system:
Who governs—the elected, or the permanent institutions?
Whether one views Trump as a disruptor, a reformer, or a destabilizing force, his presidency forced a long-simmering conflict into the open. The intelligence community, the executive branch, Congress, and the media are now engaged in an ongoing struggle over narrative control, legitimacy, and authority.
That struggle is far from over.
Conclusion: The Internal Reckoning
America’s greatest challenges may no longer come from foreign adversaries—but from unresolved contradictions within its own power structures.
The question facing the country in 2025 is not simply who was right or wrong in the past—but whether transparency, accountability, and constitutional boundaries can be restored without tearing the system apart.
History will not be kind to slogans.
It will be shaped by evidence.
Americans Are More Frustrated With Customer Service Than Ever Before
For many of you, just reading the phrase “customer service” is enough to make your blood boil. We have all had experiences where we have been on the phone for hours trying to get help with a problem.
In many cases, it can be a real adventure just trying to find a real person to speak with. I think that a lot of companies purposely try to make the customer service process as frustrating as possible so that many of us will just simply choose to give up. If they can get us to go away, that is a win. In other cases, companies are trying to pay as little as possible for customer service, and the result is complete and utter chaos. AI chatbots and call centers in India can save corporate executives a lot of money, but there is simply no replacement for speaking with a real person that can understand what you are saying and that has been properly trained.
According to the latest National Customer Rage Survey, 77 percent of U.S. consumers say that they have had a product or service problem within the last 12 months.
In the entire history of the survey, that was the highest level ever recorded…
Seventy-seven percent of customers reported experiencing a product or service problem in the previous 12 months, according to the latest National Customer Rage Survey, conducted in February.
That was a new high, surpassing 74% in 2023, when the study was last conducted, and 66% during the height of the pandemic in 2020. Only 32% told researchers they had experienced a problem in 1976, when a similar version of the study was first conducted.
Are you among the 77 percent? I am.
Some of you might be thinking that 77 percent is an extremely high number, but other surveys have come up with similar results…
The Customer Experience and Communications Consumer Insights survey showed seventy-one percent of U.S. and Canadian respondents think most companies need to improve their customer experience, a record high, according to the seventh annual study conducted in August and published in November by fintech company Broadridge Financial Solutions.
And the research and advisory firm Forrester in June found that U.S. and Canadian consumer perceptions of the customer experience have dropped for a fourth consecutive year, with brands’ average score reaching a record low of 68.3 out of 100. The index reflects consumers’ attitudes across six metrics, including how easy a brand is to deal with and how interacting with the brand feels.
There are a lot of companies out there that are very eager to sell us stuff, but when we have problems it is an entirely different story.
When I first started working many years ago, I was taught that the customer is always right. But now dealing with “problem customers” has become a headache that is to be avoided if at all possible.
Of course there are some companies that do make an honest effort at serving their customers, but unfortunately they are hiring from a pool of low paid workers that struggle to communicate effectively.
According to the National Literacy Institute, 21 percent of U.S. adults are illiterate and 54 percent of U.S. adults read below a 6th-grade level…
- 21% of adults in the US are illiterate in 2024.
- 54% of adults have a literacy below a 6th-grade level (20% are below 5th-grade level).
- Low levels of literacy costs the US up to 2.2 trillion per year.
- 34% of adults lacking literacy proficiency were born outside the US.
- Massachusetts was the state with the highest rate of child literacy.
- New Mexico was the state with the lowest child literacy rate.
- New Hampshire was the state with the highest percentage of adults considered literate.
- The state with the lowest adult literacy rate was California.
Our system of public education is failing.
Nobody can deny that. And that helps to explain why there is such a high level of incompetence in our society today.
Of course if you are calling a customer service number for help, you probably won’t even get to talk to a U.S. citizen. In order to cut costs as low as possible, thousands of companies have outsourced customer service to call centers in India and other developing nations.
Once in a while, you can find a customer service representative in one of these call centers that can communicate effectively and that has been properly trained. But that is the exception to the rule.
In an attempt to cut costs even lower, some companies are now using AI chatbots to answer customer service calls…
Many companies now are turning to artificial intelligence to field complaints, steering customers to online chatbots before they can reach human staff. Companies say the technology helps solve simple problems faster and lets representatives spend more time working on more complex issues. But most National Rage Survey respondents gave AI chatbots ambiguous or modestly unfavorable ratings as tools for complaints.
If I have a problem that is big enough that I have to contact someone about it, I sure don’t want to interact with an AI chatbot. I am sure that most of you wouldn’t want to do that either.
But this is the future.
Companies are going to automate whatever they can, because automation saves money. Sadly, that even includes the banking industry.
I greatly value being able to walk into my local bank and deal with a real person. But now hundreds of local bank branches are being permanently closed all over the United States…
If you’re still banking on access to your local branch, don’t count on it.
Major US banks have announced plans to shut 311 branches since late August — a pre-Christmas wipeout that puts 2025 on track to be the worst year ever for walk-in banking.
JPMorgan Chase led the pre-Christmas cull with 66 closures, followed by TD Bank’s 51, Citizens’ 18, and Bank of America’s 15. PNC, Wells Fargo and others made up the rest, according to federal filings.
1,043 local branches were shut down in 2024, and the grand total for 2025 will be somewhere around 1,400.
I have been ranting about the banks for a very long time, but the giants in the industry are not going to change their behavior no matter how loudly we object.
That is one reason why I recommend banking with a small or mid-size bank when possible. Just like small and mid-size companies, small and mid-size banks are often more responsive to customer needs.
If enough of us start taking a stand, eventually the customer service culture in this country could start changing. But for now the race to the bottom continues, and that is extremely unfortunate.
2025: WHAT COMES NEXT WILL BE IMPOSSIBLE TO IGNORE
The Narrative of Transition, Economic Pressure, and the End of an Era
Across Telegram and alternative media channels, a growing narrative claims that the world has entered the visible phase of a long-prepared economic transition—often framed through the language of NESARA / GESARA and a proposed Quantum Financial System (QFS).
According to proponents of this view, what millions experience today as rising economic pressure is not random collapse, mismanagement, or cyclical downturn—but a controlled withdrawal from a global financial architecture that can no longer sustain itself.
Whether one interprets this as coordinated reform, systemic correction, or speculative belief, the story itself is now widespread enough to merit examination.
From Quiet Preparation to Visible Execution
Supporters of the NESARA/GESARA framework argue that the “preparatory phase” has largely concluded. In their telling, the transition has now entered a stage where changes will increasingly touch daily life, not through a single announcement, but through a sequence of structural shifts.
They emphasize one recurring point:
This is not chaos. It is consolidation.
Phase One: Financial Simplification
The first expected change is simplification of financial systems.
Within this narrative:
- Hidden fees, penalties, and opaque financial mechanisms are expected to fade
- Legacy banks may merge, rebrand, or quietly exit
- New, sovereign-aligned frameworks are said to replace transnational, debt-driven structures
Rather than dramatic shutdowns, the claim is that complexity itself is being unwound—a reversal of decades of layered financial engineering.
To supporters, this explains why instability appears uneven: not a crash everywhere at once, but selective pressure applied where systems are most fragile.
Phase Two: Asset-Backed Valuation Over Speculation
A second pillar of the narrative centers on value realignment.
Speculative finance—derivatives, leveraged debt, and abstract paper instruments—is portrayed as reaching exhaustion. In its place, advocates predict a return to:
- Gold and precious metals
- Energy and commodities
- Agriculture, manufacturing, and tangible production
Countries rich in natural resources are expected, in this view, to stabilize more quickly, while paper-heavy economies face forced restructuring. This lens is often used to interpret unusual activity in:
- Strategic reserves
- Commodity markets
- Energy diplomacy
- Supply-chain realignment
Whether coincidence or coordination, the perception is that real things are regaining primacy over financial abstractions.
Phase Three: Restitution Replacing Extraction
Perhaps the most emotionally resonant claim involves restitution.
Rather than framing future programs as “aid” or “stimulus,” this narrative describes them as corrections—responses to decades of engineered imbalance. These initiatives are said to appear under different names in different countries, focusing on:
- Housing relief
- Small business revival
- Infrastructure rebuilding
- Community-level funding
Proponents stress that these are not giveaways, but systemic recalibrations, intended to restore productive capacity rather than perpetuate dependency.
The Shift of Power and the Rise of Resistance
At the heart of the NESARA/GESARA narrative is a claim that control is moving away from unelected financial power centers and back toward sovereign, accountable structures.
This belief is often used to explain:
- Institutional resistance
- Media dismissal
- Heightened polarization
- Legal and regulatory pushback
The logic is simple and repeated often:
Systems only fight when they are losing.
Whether one accepts this interpretation or not, the perception of an internal struggle over control, transparency, and authority has clearly taken root in the public psyche.
A Sequence, Not an Event
A defining feature of this worldview is the insistence that NESARA is not a single announcement or switch-flip moment.
Instead, it is described as:
- A phased rollout
- A sequence of irreversible steps
- A process that, once activated, does not reverse
This framing allows supporters to interpret gradual change, delays, and regional variation not as failure—but as evidence of methodical execution.
Conclusion: Why This Narrative Persists
Regardless of its factual status, the NESARA/GESARA narrative persists because it speaks to something real:
-
Widespread distrust of financial institutions
-
Fatigue with debt-driven systems
-
A desire for transparency, fairness, and restitution
-
A sense that the old order is no longer viable
In times of transition, stories arise to fill the gap between lived experience and official explanation.
Whether this moment represents controlled transformation, systemic breakdown, or something in between, one truth is clear:
The existing financial model is under strain—and the next phase will be impossible to ignore.
The Terror Attacks Never Seem To Stop, And The Patterns That We Are Witnessing Are Becoming Undeniable
The constant drumbeat of terror attacks is rising in intensity, and the next major incident could literally occur at any moment. It might happen in a really big city, or it might happen in a very small town. It might happen on the other side of the planet, or it might happen right where you live. We don’t know precisely where the next terror attack will occur, but we do know that it is coming. And as soon as it happens, the countdown to the next one begins.
Most of the victims of the terror attacks that we are witnessing are either Jews or Christians.
Most of the perpetrators of these attacks are either Muslims or westerners that have been brainwashed to hate Jews or Christians.
Right now our world is filled with more hatred than I have ever seen before.
I do not believe that this is a coincidence.
By now you have probably heard about the horrific terror attack that just took place in Sydney, Australia. Even though there were four police officers nearby, the two Islamic terrorists that were doing the shooting were allowed to keep going for approximately 20 minutes…
An eyewitness to the terror attack in Sydney says the assault unfolded over an extended period, lasting approximately 20 minutes, during which the attackers acted deliberately and without interruption.
According to the account, four police officers were present at the scene but did not return fire as the attack continued. The eyewitness described a prolonged and methodical assault, saying the terrorists “took their time.”
How many lives could have been saved if the police had intervened sooner?
It is being reported that the official death toll has now reached 16…
The death toll from the massacre rose to 16 by Monday morning local time, and includes a 10-year-old child. The oldest fatal victim is understood to be 87.
The attack took place on Sunday shortly before 7pm local time as the attackers targeted a Hanukkah by the Sea event on Sydney’s Bondi Beach in an act of ‘terrorism’.
We are being told that this terror attack was conducted by a father and a son.
They were both radical jihadists.
Personally, I would not be surprised if it turns out that they were actually part of the crowd of Hamas supporters that was chanting “gas the Jews” next to the Sydney Opera House two years ago…
Hamas supporters chanted, “Gas the Jews,” beside the world-famous Sydney Opera House in Australia, according to a video shared by the Australian Jewish Association.
This terror attack in Sydney was preceded by another terror attack at Brown University.
Two students were killed and nine others were wounded as a result of that mass shooting…
Hundreds of police officers swarmed the streets near Brown University late Saturday, shining flashlights into parked cars in search of a gunman who opened fire in a campus building, killing two students and injuring nine more.
At first we weren’t being told the identity of the shooter.
But now we are being told that it was a 24-year-old man from Wisconsin named Benjamin Erickson…
The man arrested in connection to the deadly shooting at Brown University has been identified as Benjamin Erickson, according to law enforcement sources.
The 24-year-old from Wisconsin is accused of carrying out the mass shooting Saturday night at the Ivy League campus that left two students dead and nine people injured, sources told The Washington Post.
There is still a lot we don’t know about Benjamin Erickson.
But something certainly motivated him to make the 17 hour journey to Brown University…
The suspect is said to have made a 17-hour trek from Wisconsin to Rhode Island with a laser-equipped firearm, according to law enforcement.
He was taken into custody early Sunday morning by FBI agents at the Hampton Inn hotel in Coventry.
When Erickson finally arrived at Brown University, he purposely sought out the classroom of a Jewish professor named Rachel Friedberg…
It has been nearly 24 hours since a gunman stormed a Brown University classroom taught by Jewish professor Rachel Friedberg, who teaches the intersection of economics and Jewish studies, and reportedly “yelled something unique” before using a handgun and unleashing a hail of bullets in the classroom.
It doesn’t take a genius to connect the dots in this case.
Right before Hanukkah, Erickson specifically targeted a Jewish professor. Did Erickson and Friedberg have any sort of a personal connection?
Had they interacted on social media at all? Those are questions that reporters should be asking right now. Friedberg claims that Erickson “yelled something” when he first entered the classroom…
A Brown University professor has described the horror she and her students endured after a shooter killed two people and injured eight more in a shooting at the prestigious college on Saturday afternoon.
Rachel Friedberg, a Brown economics professor, said the mass shooting happened in a review session for the final exam of her Principles of Economics course.
“The room has stadium seating with doors that enter at the top,” Friedberg said. “He said that the shooter came in the doors, yelled something — he couldn’t remember what he yelled — and started shooting.
Erickson probably uttered something that he thought would be quite memorable.
But if nobody heard it clearly, we may never know what it was. The two recent terror attacks that I have discussed so far in this article are getting a ton of attention, but there have also been others that have not gotten as much attention.
For example, ISIS just conducted a terror attack that killed three Americans inside Syria. President Trump is promising that there will be “very serious retaliation”…
President Trump vowed on Saturday to retaliate against the Islamic State after an attack in central Syria killed two U.S. Army soldiers and a civilian U.S. interpreter, the first American casualties in the country since the fall of the dictator Bashar al-Assad last year.
“This was an ISIS attack against the U.S., and Syria, in a very dangerous part of Syria,” Mr. Trump wrote on Truth Social. “There will be very serious retaliation.”
You could argue that those three Americans are simply casualties of war.
Okay, but what about the countless numbers of entirely peaceful Christians that are being murdered for what they believe in Islamic countries all over the globe?
On December 5th, a Pakistani Presbyterian pastor became a martyr when he was ruthlessly gunned down in front of his own home…
An unidentified assailant recently gunned down a Presbyterian Pakistani pastor outside his home in front of his daughter on Dec. 5, his family said. The pastor had previously survived an attack in September.
The Rev. Kamran Salamat of Gujranwala was preparing to take his 16-year-old daughter to college when an unidentified motorcyclist opened fire on him with a pistol, hitting him in the right wrist, left ear and lower abdomen, said the victim’s brother-in-law, the Rev. Shahzad Salman. Pastor Salamat was 45.
“My brother-in-law succumbed to his injuries at the hospital three hours later,” Pastor Salman told Christian Daily International-Morning Star News.
That was a terror attack too.
Since it didn’t happen in the western world, the mainstream media in the U.S. simply didn’t care. But if five Islamic radicals had successfully slammed a vehicle into a crowded Christmas market in Germany, that definitely would have made a lot of headlines…
Five men have been arrested in Germany suspected of being involved in a plot to drive a vehicle into people at a Christmas market.
Three Moroccans, an Egyptian and a Syrian were detained on Friday over the plan to target a market in the southern Bavarian state. Authorities said they suspected an “Islamist motive”.
Prosecutors said the Egyptian – a 56-year-old – was alleged to have “called for a vehicle attack… with the aim of killing or injuring as many people as possible”. The Moroccans allegedly agreed to carry out the attack.
For years, I have been warning that these days were coming.
Now they are here. We are supposed to love everyone.
That even includes our enemies. But today so many people are absolutely filled with hate. So a lot more violence is coming, and that should make all of us very sad.
THE COLLUSION NARRATIVE: RUSSIA, POWER NETWORKS, AND THE SHADOW WAR INSIDE AMERICA
Allegations, Declassified Claims, and the Battle Over Political Legitimacy
In 2025, renewed attention has returned to the origins of the “Russia collusion” narrative that dominated American political life from 2016 through the early years of the Trump presidency. A growing body of commentary — amplified by alternative media and select political figures — claims that the collusion story was not merely flawed, but deliberately constructed as part of a broader influence operation aimed at undermining an elected president.
At the center of these claims are alleged connections between political figures, intelligence agencies, and transnational organizations involved in democracy-promotion and regime-change efforts abroad.
The issue is no longer partisan outrage. It is institutional trust.
Hillary Clinton, Barack Obama, and George Soros’s Open Society Foundation are all connected to the planning and execution of the Russia Collusion Hoax and color revolution against President Trump and this country.
We have far exceeded the time to designate George Soros, his son, and his corrupt organizations funding color revolutions against America and siting presidents as domestic terrorists and terrorist organizations.
Declassified documents released by former DNI John Ratcliffe in 2025 reveal emails from George Soros’s Open Society Foundations allegedly outlining a strategy, approved by Hillary Clinton, to demonize Vladimir Putin and Donald Trump by linking Trump to Russia, distracting from Clinton’s email controversy.
The emails describe this as a “long-term affair,” providing a post-convention bounce, with the FBI expected to intensify efforts later.
This purportedly involved Barack Obama in fabricating an Intelligence Community Assessment as part of a conspiracy to undermine the 2016 election and overthrow the elected president in 2017.
Subsequent events included two impeachments, investigations, indictments, raids, two assassination attempts on Trump, and claims of a 2020 government overthrow.
It’s time to move on these organizations, cut all their funding, shut them down, arrest, and prosecute every single individual responsible.
The Declassified Claims and Their Interpretation
Supporters of this narrative point to documents declassified in 2025 under the authority of former Director of National Intelligence John Ratcliffe. According to reporting and commentary surrounding those releases, emails attributed to individuals associated with George Soros’s Open Society Foundations allegedly outlined a political strategy during the 2016 election cycle.
These emails are described by commentators as proposing a long-term information campaign linking Donald Trump to Russia — in part to shift public attention away from Hillary Clinton’s email controversy and to shape post-convention political momentum.
It is important to note:
- The authenticity, context, and legal interpretation of these documents is now being exposed
- The courts have blocked these actions constituting a criminal conspiracy
- The bad actors named have denied wrongdoing or rejected the framing entirely
Nonetheless, the claims themselves have fueled renewed scrutiny.
Color Revolutions and the Domestic Question
Open Society Foundations and similar NGOs have long been associated — by supporters and critics alike — with funding radical left civil society, MSM media, and political reform initiatives abroad. In Eastern Europe, the Middle East, and parts of Asia, such programs have been linked to so-called “color revolutions.”
Critics now argue that tactics historically associated with foreign influence operations were adapted for domestic political propaganda use during the Trump era — blurring lines between activism, intelligence, and governance.
Supporters of these organizations counter that:
- Democracy-promotion is not regime change
- Domestic political opposition is not subversion
- The real danger lies in delegitimizing civil society itself
The disagreement is fundamental and unresolved.
The Intelligence Community and the 2016–2017 Crisis
One of the most nefarious allegations centers on the Intelligence Community Assessment (ICA) regarding Russian interference in the 2016 election. Critics claim the assessment was politicized, selectively constructed, or overstated to justify investigations, surveillance, and later impeachment efforts.
The political radical left maintains that:
- Intelligence agencies acted within their mandate
- Russia did attempt influence operations
- Oversight failures do not equal conspiracy
What is undisputed is that the period from 2016 to 2020 produced an unprecedented collision between intelligence agencies, elected leadership, media narratives, and public trust.
Aftermath: Escalation Without Resolution
From investigations and impeachments to indictments, raids, and persistent political warfare, the post-2016 era has left the country deeply fractured. Each side views itself as defending democracy — and the other as attempting to destroy it.
Claims of election interference, institutional abuse, and even “soft coups” now circulate widely across media ecosystems, further eroding shared reality.
The danger is not merely who was right or wrong.
It is that no authoritative resolution has been accepted by the public.
The Larger Question
At its core, this debate asks:
Who holds legitimate power in a constitutional republic — elected officials, permanent institutions, or transnational influence networks?
Until transparency, accountability, and clearly bounded authority are restored, these narratives will not fade. Suppression only deepens suspicion. Overreach only accelerates backlash.
History shows that unresolved legitimacy crises do not end quietly.
Conclusion: A Reckoning Still Unfolding
Whether one believes the Russia collusion narrative was a justified investigation, a politicized overreach, or an engineered information operation, the consequences are undeniable.
Trust in institutions has collapsed.
The boundary between foreign and domestic power has blurred.
And America remains locked in a struggle over who governs — and by what authority.
That struggle is far from over.
“Six Figures Is Survival” – Even High Earners Are Drowning Financially As The U.S. Dollar Is Transformed Into Toilet Paper
Inflation is a tax that nobody can escape. No matter how hard you may try, the rising cost of living is going to catch up with you eventually, and we live at a time when the cost of living has become exceedingly painful. The reason why the cost of living has become such an important issue is because those that are running the system have been treating our currency like toilet paper. Many of us warned what would happen when the Federal Reserve started printing money out of thin air and monetizing the debt. But instead of learning their lesson, they are beginning to do it again. And Congress is spending so much money that the monthly budget deficit for the month of October just set an all-time record. What they are doing to us is literally insane, and the middle class is dying right in front of our eyes.
In so many ways, the U.S. economy is starting to resemble the economy of the Weimar Republic just before hyperinflation kicked in.
As the U.S. dollar rapidly loses value, even high earners are now struggling to stay afloat financially.
If you doubt this, just consider the shocking results of a brand new Harris poll…
• Six figures is survival, not success: 64% of six-figure earners say six figures is no longer a sign of wealth but survival mode — a paycheck that covers costs, not comfort. The benchmark of success has become the bare minimum to keep up.
• The American Dream feels out of reach: More than half of six-figure earners say the Dream no longer feels attainable, revealing a generation of professionals who have achieved everything on paper but feel they’re standing on financial quicksand.
• Where luxury used to live, the basics now move in: Groceries, housing, and healthcare are the top expenses draining even the top 10%. Vacations, savings, and wellness — once staples of comfort — have quietly slipped into the “nice-to-have” category.
• The illusion of wealth is exhausting: Many top earners say people assume they can afford it all, yet behind the image of success are quiet sacrifices: skipped purchases, delayed plans, and a fragile sense of security.
• Credit cards as life rafts: Three-quarters of six-figure earners have used a credit card in the past three months because they ran out of cash, not to collect points. For many, plastic has become the bridge between paychecks.
• Affluence, paid in installments: BNPL use is highest among $200k+ households — the top 10% now financing everyday life, from groceries to gas, in ways once reserved for those just getting by.
• The new middle class begins where old wealth used to end: Six-figure earners now define financial comfort at $200k+, and more than half say they’d need double their current income to finally feel secure. The top 10% are quietly struggling — so what happens to the other 90%?
If nearly two-thirds of six figure earners feel like what they are bringing in is only enough for “survival mode”, what does that say about our economy as a whole?
The truth is that our leaders are systematically murdering the American Dream.
I have been ranting about this for years, and now people all over the country are finally waking up to what they have done to us.
According to a new AP-NORC poll, 87 percent of Americans have noticed “higher than usual prices for groceries in the past few months”…
The survey indicates that it’s the level of prices — and not just the rate of inflation — that is the point of pain for many families. About 9 in 10 U.S. adults, 87%, say they noticed higher than usual prices for groceries in the past few months, while about two-thirds say they’ve experienced higher prices than usual for electricity and holiday gifts. About half say they’ve seen higher than normal prices for gas recently.
It is virtually impossible to get 87 percent of Americans to agree on anything. But somehow we are all convinced that grocery prices have been going up. When I go to the grocery store, I can hardly believe how high prices have become.
Some things are now three or four times as much as they once were. Over the past 10 to 15 years, we have witnessed such a dramatic shift. But this is only just the beginning.
According to Fox Business, the proportion of U.S. small businesses that are raising their selling prices “jumped by an all-time high in November”…
The share of small businesses raising their selling prices jumped by an all-time high in November as inflationary pressure continued to impact businesses and consumers, according to a new report by the National Federation of Independent Businesses (NFIB).
NFIB’s monthly report on small business economic trends for November found a 13-point jump in the net percent of owners who reported raising their average selling prices, which was the largest monthly jump in the history of the survey.
That pushed the percent of owners saying they’re raising average selling prices to a net of 34%, which is the highest reading in the survey since March 2023. That’s also well above the monthly average of a net 13%.
What this means is that our cost of living crisis is accelerating. If your paycheck is not keeping up, you are losing ground.
Meanwhile, mass layoffs continue to occur all over the United States. According to Challenger, Gray & Christmas, U.S. employers have announced a grand total of almost 1.2 million job cuts so far this year…
Americans are growing increasingly terrified about layoffs – and with good reason. Cuts are accelerating, and no industry feels safe. All told, employers have announced roughly 1.2 million cuts so far this year, according to layoff tracker Challenger, Gray & Christmas – that’s 54 percent more than during the first 11 months of 2024. Perhaps the most unsettling is that industries once seen as safe harbors for employees – tech, manufacturing and even small business – are now among the hardest hit. That’s left millions of workers asking the same pressing question: How do I avoid getting the chop?
Retail is one of the industries that has been hit particularly hard.
So far in 2025, retailers have announced almost 140 percent more job cuts than they did during the same period in 2024…
For the year so far, the industry has announced 91,954 job cuts, up nearly 140% from the same period in 2024. The cuts are primarily attributable to softening demand, tariff uncertainty and changing consumer preferences, per the report.
As I discussed last week, the tourism industry has also fallen on extremely hard times.
In New Orleans, a lack of tourists is causing the streets to be quieter than they have been in a long, long time…
But in the quieter areas, things are, well, quieter. On a cool December evening as raindrops polka-dotted the pavement, longtime street performer Onunze Ubaka, 72, crooned Motown classics to a virtually empty corner off the usually busy Jackson Square in the French Quarter. Few tourists passed by. Even fewer stopped to drop dollar bills into his white tip bucket.
“You can feel the change,” Ubaka said in between songs from Lou Rawls and The Temptations. Inside his tip bucket, a small pile of greenbacks barely covered the 15-pound dumbbell he started putting in after a young man tried to run off with it.
Ubaka said there’s been a general economic slowdown, in particular a loss of international tourists.
Just look around.
Everything is changing. You would have to be blind not to see it. Sadly, a whole lot more pain is on the way.
Printing more money won’t solve our problems. It will only make things even worse. Borrowing and spending more money won’t solve our problems either.
Our leaders kicked the can down the road for many years, but now the entire road is coming to an end.They kept trying to outrun the laws of economics, and for a while they actually thought that they were getting away with it.But now a time of reckoning has arrived, and it is not going to be fun.
Khazarian mafia EU and US branches fight each other as peasants with tractors are at the gates
By Benjamin Fulford December 15, 2025
The European and US branches of the Khazarian Mafia are fighting each other to the death, even as revolution is threatening to overthrow both of them. This is what is behind disagreements between the administration of the fake “Donald Trump” and the EU over reaching a peace agreement with Russia.
Most of what is really happening is taking place under an almost total news blackout in the West. As an example of censorship at work, the corporate press has been ordered not to report on farmers’protests that have shut down London. Nor do they report that tanks sent in to remove the farmers’tractors ended up siding with the farmers against the government.
This is what the head of British Intelligence had to say about the situation: “The mass protests by the farmers are being suppressed in the press. There is widespread revolt with the ruling Labour Party Regime, and in particular, their economic mismanagement and torrent of lies at the time of the recent budget. If things did deteriorate to such an extent that the country was destabilized, the King could dissolve Parliament and suspend the civilian government in Direct Royal Rule, which would be a British Military Intelligence MI6-led armed forces type crisis government, which would regain stability and then return the ruling powers to parliament. The current PM is a traitor.”
To illustrate the evil nature of his regime, the UK has arrested over 12,000 people for online comments. They have abandoned the concept of free speech.
The problem is that the KM is using a fake King Charles to try to cling to power, even as they carry out mass arrests of anybody who sends a text message critical of the regime.
To deal with this, a writ of mandamus has been filed by British intelligence with the UK and Irish governments demanding they hand over control of the KM’s magic money printing machine to a white hat who was appointed to the job by Queen Elizabeth II. This means MI6 and MI5 need to confirm with Prince William that the current “King Charles” is a fake and have him removed from control of the financial machinery in the UK. This would pave the way for the removal of the fake “Trump” and Kushner from control of US financial machinery as well.
Meanwhile, the EU faction of the KM (the Nazis) has assumed dictatorial powers by trying to steal 210 billion Euros of Russian money while ignoring the will of many European governments. At the same time, they are threatening to dump their $2.3 trillion in US treasury holdings if the US reaches a deal with Russia over Ukraine, according to British Intelligence. Doing that would implode the US financial system, but it would also destroy the EU. So basically, they are threatening mutually assured destruction. They are doing this because they face bankruptcy.
https://www.instagram.com/p/DSICwfGiLo7/?img_index=7&igsh=bWZvYzdnNjJtaTRp
The US faction of the KM (the Zionists), meanwhile, is trying to cut a deal with the Russians and the Chinese and overthrow the EU. A white dragon society member spoke to Russian President Vladimir Putin last week about this.
The US faction of the KM (the Zionists), meanwhile, is trying to cut a deal with the Russians and the Chinese and overthrow the EU. A white dragon society member spoke to Russian President Vladimir Putin last week about this.
FILES RESURFACE | PRESSURE BUILDS | THE EPSTEIN ARCHIVE WIDENS
“When sealed records begin to surface, it is rarely about the images themselves. It is about who controls the story — and who no longer can.”
Epstein Estate Photos Released • DOJ Transparency Fight • Elite Networks Re-Examined • Political Weaponization Claims • Accountability vs Containment • Public Trust Erosion • Narrative Phase Shift
Epstein Files Reopened: New Photos Released as Pressure Mounts on DOJ
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
House Democrats have released approximately 100 previously unreleased photographs obtained from the estate of the late financier and convicted sex offender Jeffrey Epstein, reigniting public scrutiny of one of the most politically sensitive and institutionally guarded cases of the past two decades.
The newly disclosed images, released Friday, are part of a renewed congressional push to compel the U.S. Department of Justice to make public the remaining unreleased Epstein-related materials, including documents, photographs, and investigative records that have remained sealed or partially redacted for years.
According to lawmakers involved in the release, the photos were obtained legally from Epstein’s estate and represent only a fraction of the material still held by federal authorities.
What the Photos Show
Most of the images depict the interiors of Epstein’s residences, including his Manhattan mansion and his private island in the Caribbean. The photographs reveal private living spaces, artwork, furnishings, and architectural details long shielded from public view.
Other images reportedly show members of Epstein’s social circle, including high-profile political figures, billionaires, and public personalities. Among those visible in some of the photographs are Bill Gates, Richard Branson, former Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Barak, filmmaker Woody Allen, attorney Alan Dershowitz, and Andrew Mountbatten-Windsor, who was stripped of his UK royal title in October.
The release of these images does not allege criminal wrongdoing by the individuals pictured. Their appearance in Epstein-related materials reflects documented social or professional contact, not legal conclusions.
Why This Release Matters Now
The timing of the disclosure is significant.
Democratic lawmakers say the release is intended to increase pressure on the DOJ to disclose the remaining Epstein files in full, arguing that prolonged secrecy has fueled speculation, mistrust, and allegations of selective protection for powerful individuals.
President Donald Trump has condemned the effort, characterizing it as a politically motivated campaign designed to revive scandal narratives and implicate political opponents through association rather than evidence.
The clash highlights a deeper institutional conflict: whether transparency serves justice — or destabilizes power structures that depend on silence.
The Epstein Case as an Institutional Fault Line
The Epstein case occupies a unique position in modern history. It intersects:
- Intelligence agencies
- Political elites
- Financial networks
- Media institutions
- International power circles
Despite Epstein’s conviction and death, many questions remain unresolved, including how his network operated, who knew what — and when — and why certain investigative paths appeared to stall.
For critics, the continued sealing of records suggests containment rather than closure. For defenders of the DOJ’s approach, it reflects the complexity of protecting ongoing investigations, privacy rights, and national security considerations.
Narrative Pressure Is Shifting
What is changing is not the existence of Epstein-related material — but public tolerance for delay.
As institutional trust erodes across governments, finance, and media, sealed records increasingly look less like prudence and more like avoidance. Each incremental release amplifies the demand for completeness.
The Epstein archive is no longer dormant. It is active — politically, culturally, and psychologically.
Final Perspective
This moment is not about photographs alone.
It is about who decides when the record is complete, who bears reputational risk, and whether transparency is applied evenly across society — or selectively withheld when power is involved.
The images reopen doors long thought closed.
What follows will depend not on what is already known — but on what remains hidden.
Allegations of Massive Financial Irregularities Emerge Around Zelensky Ally as Aid Scrutiny Intensifies
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
Allegations circulating from alternative media sources are intensifying scrutiny around the inner circle of Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky, just as Western governments approve additional funding for Kyiv and questions mount over aid transparency.
According to a report published December 15 by Hal Turner World, investigators conducted a search on December 11, 2025, of an office associated with Andriy Yermak, a close confidant of President Zelensky and his former chief of staff. The report claims the search uncovered large quantities of cash, extensive banking records, and multiple passports allegedly linked to Yermak.
At the time of publication, Ukrainian authorities have not publicly confirmed the raid or its findings, and no formal charges have been announced.
What Is Being Alleged
According to the report, investigators discovered:
- Approximately $14 million in cash
- Documentation referencing $2.6 billion in wire transfers to offshore accounts
- Multiple passports reportedly issued in Yermak’s name, including from the United Kingdom, Saint Kitts and Nevis, and the Bahamas
The outlet suggests these materials may indicate large-scale financial misconduct connected to international aid flows. However, public awaits official documentation has been released publicly to substantiate the claims, and no Western investigative body has yet corroborated the report.
Why the Allegations Are Resonating
The story is gaining attention not because of what has been proven—but because of timing and context.
Just days after the alleged search, the U.S. Congress approved at least another $400 million in aid to Ukraine. Since the war began, tens of billions of dollars from the United States and European Union have flowed into the country, often under expedited oversight frameworks justified by wartime urgency.
That urgency has increasingly collided with new public awareness and pressure.
Across the U.S. and Europe, taxpayers, lawmakers, and auditors are asking whether sufficient safeguards exist to track how aid is spent—and whether political proximity shields certain individuals from scrutiny.
The phrase circulating widely online in response to the report captures the mood succinctly:
“We’ve been robbed.”
Andriy Yermak’s Role
Yermak has been one of the most powerful figures in Ukraine’s wartime government, acting as a key negotiator with Western governments and playing a central role in shaping Ukraine’s diplomatic and strategic messaging.
Any credible investigation involving someone of his stature would have significant implications—not only for Ukraine’s internal politics, but for Western trust, future aid packages, and the narrative framing of the war itself.
At present, those implications remain hypothetical.
What Is Known — and What Is Not
Known:
- Massive aid continues to flow to Ukraine
- Oversight mechanisms remain limited and politically sensitive
- Public trust in institutions is fragile across the West
Not Known:
- That the search occurred as described
- That the materials reportedly found belong to Yermak
- That any aid money was misappropriated
- That Ukrainian or Western authorities are pursuing charges
The Broader Pattern
Regardless of the veracity of this specific report, it fits into a widening global pattern:
- Wartime emergency funding
- Accelerated decision-making
- Reduced transparency
- Rising post-allocation scrutiny
History suggests that accountability often lags crisis—and when it arrives, it does so unevenly.
Final Perspective
At this stage, the claims of fraud and money laundering of military aid is astonishing and catastrophic.
But in an era of institutional trust erosion, financial fraud, and continued reports carry weight when oversight is opaque and stakes are measured in billions. The burden now lies with Ukraine’s new official government institutions to hold the perpetrator responsible.
Silence will not resolve the questions.
Transparency bring light to darkness.
Comer Escalates: Clinton Contempt Threat Signals New Phase in Epstein Probe
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
House Oversight Chairman James Comer has moved the Epstein investigation into a sharper and more consequential phase, issuing a direct warning to Bill and Hillary Clinton that continued noncompliance with congressional subpoenas could result in contempt charges, arrest, and potential jail time.
The escalation follows months of stalled cooperation after subpoenas were formally issued in August, compelling testimony related to the committee’s expanding review of Epstein-linked power networks, influence pathways, and potential institutional shielding.
Hillary Clinton’s testimony was scheduled for October 9, with Bill Clinton set to appear on October 14. Neither date was honored.
A Familiar Pattern of Delay and Disappearance
According to committee staff, attorneys representing the Clintons initially requested scheduling accommodations — a common procedural tactic that often precedes negotiated testimony. However, after securing delays, communication reportedly ceased altogether.
No appearance.
No alternative dates.
No formal compliance.
For Comer, that silence crossed a line.
In a sharply worded notice, the Oversight Chairman made clear that congressional subpoenas are not optional, and that prolonged avoidance would trigger the same enforcement mechanisms applied to any other witness — regardless of status, history, or political lineage.
This is not symbolic language. Under congressional authority, contempt referrals can result in arrest by the House Sergeant at Arms or criminal referral to the Department of Justice.
Why This Matters Now
The Epstein investigation has steadily shifted from peripheral figures toward institutional nodes — individuals and organizations with the ability to suppress inquiry, redirect accountability, or influence prosecutorial outcomes.
Bill Clinton’s documented association with Epstein has been a matter of public record for years, including multiple flights on Epstein-linked aircraft and appearances in travel logs. Hillary Clinton’s subpoena is understood to focus less on direct association and more on institutional knowledge, communications, and decision-making channels during critical periods.
What has changed is not the evidence already known — but the political environment surrounding it.
Oversight committees rarely threaten arrest against figures of this stature unless internal confidence has increased that:
- The committee’s legal footing is solid
- Public tolerance for elite noncompliance has eroded
- Failure to enforce would damage congressional authority itself
Contempt as a Structural Signal
Contempt proceedings are often misunderstood as theatrical. In reality, they are a pressure instrument used when negotiations fail and credibility is at stake.
Comer’s warning does not guarantee arrests — but it does signal that institutional patience has expired.
At minimum, it places the Clintons in a narrowing decision corridor:
- Comply and testify
- Negotiate under explicit threat
- Or openly challenge congressional authority
Each option carries consequences — legal, reputational, and historical.
The Broader Context
This escalation arrives amid a wider pattern already visible across institutions:
- Long-protected figures facing delayed accountability
- Congressional authority reasserting itself after years of deference
- Public skepticism toward elite immunity reaching saturation
- A collapsing tolerance for procedural evasion
The Epstein case, by its nature, touches intelligence, finance, media, and political power simultaneously. That makes it uniquely resistant to resolution — and uniquely destabilizing once pressure is applied consistently.
What to Watch Next
Over the coming days, key signals will matter more than headlines:
- Any sudden agreement to testify
- Attempts to move proceedings behind closed doors
- Jurisdictional challenges or immunity claims
- DOJ positioning on enforcement support
- Media reframing from dismissal to “process concerns”
Each will indicate whether the system is preparing for accountability — or another containment attempt.
Final Perspective
This moment is less about the Clintons themselves than about whether congressional authority applies equally.
When subpoenas are ignored without consequence, the rule of law becomes conditional. When enforcement is threatened — especially against legacy power — it signals that the balance may be shifting.
Whether that shift holds remains to be seen.
But the warning has been issued.
And it was not ambiguous.
Eight Days Out: 3I/ATLAS, a Silent Mars Orbiter, and the Data NASA Can’t Control
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
Eight days remain until the closest Earth flyby of interstellar object 3I/ATLAS, and the timing of events surrounding this object continues to strain coincidence. Unlike past visitors from beyond our solar system, 3I/ATLAS is arriving during a period of global compression — institutional credibility erosion, heightened military readiness, solar instability, and a widening gap between official narratives and observable data.
What makes this moment distinct is not speculation, but sequence.
Harvard astrophysicist Dr. Avi Loeb, who has tracked 3I/ATLAS since July, has outlined a timeline that places the object’s most revealing interactions just outside the boundaries of public transparency — particularly its close encounter with Mars and the sudden silence of a critical NASA asset.
The Mars Passage and the MAVEN Anomaly
On October 2, 3I/ATLAS passed within approximately 30 million kilometers of Mars — well within observational range of multiple platforms. Among them was NASA’s MAVEN spacecraft, which has reliably orbited Mars for nearly a decade, providing continuous atmospheric and space-environment data.
According to Loeb, the last meaningful telemetry and imagery MAVEN returned coincided with this encounter.
Shortly afterward, NASA acknowledged a loss of contact with the spacecraft. While technical failures occur, the timing matters. MAVEN was operational, positioned, and actively collecting data during a rare interstellar flyby — and then went dark.
NASA has confirmed that MAVEN did image 3I/ATLAS, and select visuals were briefly shown during a press conference. But with the probe now declared unreachable, no additional data releases, clarifications, or follow-up analysis are possible.
In practical terms, this places potentially critical observational data outside public access indefinitely.
The Jet That Defies Expectation
Loeb’s attention is focused not on conjecture, but on physics. 3I/ATLAS exhibits multiple jets, one of which appears to be oriented toward the Sun — a configuration that challenges conventional models of cometary sublimation.
Natural outgassing typically produces jets that stream away from solar radiation pressure. A sunward-oriented jet raises questions about directionality, coherence, and energy source.
The distinction matters. Measuring jet velocity, composition, and persistence could determine whether the behavior reflects passive ice sublimation — or active thrust inconsistent with known natural processes.
This is precisely the type of data MAVEN was positioned to collect.
December 19: The Window Opens
On December 19, a new moon creates optimal viewing conditions, eliminating lunar interference entirely. Hundreds of observatories across the globe will be active, alongside Hubble, JWST, and advanced ground-based arrays capable of spectroscopy, trajectory refinement, and jet analysis.
Unlike isolated spacecraft data, this observation cycle is distributed, international, and difficult to suppress.
For the first time, the behavior of 3I/ATLAS will be evaluated simultaneously by independent institutions, using different instruments, under identical conditions.
Whatever the object is — natural, artificial, or anomalous — the data will speak more clearly than any press statement.
Why 3I/ATLAS Is Different
Previous interstellar objects, such as ʻOumuamua, sparked debate only after their departure. By then, data gaps could be explained away by time, distance, or technical limitations.
3I/ATLAS is different.
We have advance notice.
We have global coordination.
We have real-time anomalies.
And we have institutional silence precisely where clarity would normally expand.
This does not demand conclusions — but it does demand attention.
A Larger Pattern Emerging
Within the broader convergence already underway — financial credibility strain, geopolitical repositioning, solar and geomagnetic irregularity — 3I/ATLAS introduces a cosmic variable into an already compressed system.
The significance may ultimately be mundane. But the process matters more than the outcome.
When an object from outside our solar system arrives during a period of heightened global instability, and the instruments best positioned to observe it become inaccessible, pattern recognition becomes essential.
What to Watch in the Days Ahead
As December 19 approaches, the most telling signals will not be dramatic headlines, but subtle shifts:
Changes in official language
Pre-framing of interpretation before full data release
Delays or deferrals in publication
Jet behavior consistency across platforms
Trajectory deviations from purely gravitational models
Final Perspective
This moment is not about fear, prediction, or spectacle.
It is about discernment under compression.
When systems — planetary, institutional, and informational — align in unusual ways, attention becomes responsibility.
The data will arrive.
What matters is who is prepared to look at it clearly.
Shockingly High Numbers Of Americans Are Skipping Meals Or Putting Off Medical Care Because Of The High Cost Of Living
Do you remember all of those people over the years that warned us that the cost of living would eventually spiral out of control? It turns out that they were right. Our leaders flooded the system with trillions upon trillions of new dollars, and now we have a real life nightmare on our hands. The value of the U.S. dollar has tanked, the price of silver is up more than 100 percent in 2025, and we are in the midst of a horrifying cost of living crisis that never seems to end. In particular, food prices have become exceptionally painful, and this is hitting those on the low end of the economic spectrum really hard.
The Century Foundation just conducted a survey that came up with some absolutely stunning results.
According to that survey, 34 percent of U.S. registered voters have skipped a meal in order to save money, and 29 percent of U.S. registered voters have “delayed or skipped medical care over the past year”…
- 29% of registered voters said they delayed or skipped medical care over the past year; including 49% of voters under 30 years old, 37% of Hispanic voters and 32% of Black voters.
- 24% said they delayed or skipped buying medicine prescribed by their doctor.
- 64% of poll respondents said they switched to cheaper groceries or cut back on groceries; including 79% of voters under 30 years old, 74% of Black voters, 72% of women, and 71% of Hispanic voters.
- 34% of registered voters said they’ve skipped a meal to save money, including 54% of voters younger than 30 years old, 44% of Black voters, 41% of Hispanic voters, and 39% of women.
- 48% of poll respondents said they tapped into savings to meet daily expenses, including 59% of voters younger than 30 years old, 57% of Hispanic voters, 55% of Black voters and 52% of women.
These numbers are crazy.
Large segments of the U.S. population are now going without the essentials because the cost of living has become so oppressive. Are you starting to understand why I rant about this so much?
Tens of millions of Americans are really hurting right now. Just look at what is happening to the price of ground beef. It now costs about three times as much as it did just 15 years ago…
When I was growing up, my mother was constantly feeding us ground beef. Now it is considered to be a “luxury meat”.
Our standard of living is being steadily destroyed all around us. Earlier today, I was shocked to learn that tickets for a Christmas program at a local Baptist church in Texas are selling for up to 71 dollars per person…
A Christmas show at a church in Plano, Texas, has become a flash point in America – a Rorschach test in today’s hyper-political culture.
The ‘Gift of Christmas’ at Prestonwood Baptist Church, as the nearly two-hour extravaganza is called, has become one of the most well-known holiday shows across the US, mostly thanks to social media.
People seem to either love or loathe the ‘Vegas-style’ production at the mega church- complete with a flying Santa Claus and live camels and sheep- with tickets selling from $20 to $71 per person.
What in the world are they doing? When I was growing up, going to church was always free.
Just about everything that you can think of has become so expensive these days. And U.S. consumers just continue to become less confident about what is ahead…
A new Gallup poll shows that U.S. consumer confidence deteriorated sharply in November, falling to its weakest level in 17 months as households contended with a protracted federal government shutdown, volatile financial markets, cooling job prospects, and renewed inflation anxiety.
Americans are being squeezed financially from countless directions, and as a result debt levels have been exploding.
Unfortunately, many are now reaching a breaking point. In fact, the number of foreclosure filings has risen 21 percent in just one year…
If you need proof that Americans are struggling financially, here it is.
Foreclosures — when a bank or lender takes back a home after missed mortgage payments — are continuing to skyrocket.
New data from ATTOM shows the number of homeowners falling behind is rising every single month.
In November, 35,651 properties had a foreclosure filing — up a staggering 21 percent from just one year earlier.
Of course there are vast numbers of people that can no longer afford to live in a home at all.
Millions of Americans now permanently live in their vehicles, and that includes a 50-year-old woman in Vermont named Chandra Duba…
Chandra Duba has been living in an RV outside a friend’s house in Jericho for the past few months, after losing her Section 8 subsidized housing in Winooski. Until last week, she didn’t have electricity, but now she’s able to plug into a nearby solar array.
Duba, 50, works as a delivery driver at Domino’s, where her pay with tips is too high for food stamps but too low for rent in the area, she said. The RV was relatively affordable but partially gutted — the stove is gone, and the heating and cooling systems don’t work.
Duba said she is grateful to have a roof over her head but that she doesn’t see the vehicle as a long-term answer to her housing problem.
She is literally living in an RV without any heat, but she still makes too much money to qualify for food stamps. This is what life is like in 2025 for so many people.
It turns out that business leaders are also very concerned about where things are heading. One recent survey found that only 28 percent of U.S. business executives are “optimistic about the U.S. economy’s outlook over the next 12 months”…
The AICPA and CIMA survey polls chief executive officers, chief financial officers, controllers and other CPAs in U.S. companies who hold executive and senior management accounting roles. The survey is a forward-looking indicator that tracks hiring and business-related expectations for the next 12 months.
Twenty-eight percent of business executives said they were optimistic about the U.S. economy’s outlook over the next 12 months, down from 34% in the past quarter. Domestic economic conditions (No. 1) and inflation (No. 2) were cited as top concerns, swapping places from last quarter.
If only 28 percent are optimistic, that means that 72 percent are either pessimistic or declined to give an answer. Yes, things really have gotten that bad.
Personally, I am particularly concerned about the plight of our farmers. As I documented in a previous article, farmers in the United States haven’t faced a crisis of this magnitude in decades. And even though the Trump administration has just announced a 12 billion dollar aid package, many farmers are still facing financial ruin anyway…
A few years ago, Wisconsin soybean farmer Doug Rebout was getting $14.50 a bushel for his crop. Now, amid a trade dispute with China and rising production costs driven by inflation, that price has plummeted to around $9.30.
Rebout’s farm, which grows about 80,000 bushels of soybeans annually, is looking at a $400,000 economic loss due to the drop in prices, he told the Milwaukee Journal Sentinel, part of the USA TODAY Network.
Prior to President Donald Trump’s announcement of a $12 billion assistance package for farmers, Rebout said that though financial aid would help farmers “weather the storm,” many fear the economic uncertainty will linger. Some are worried about losing farms that have been in their families for generations.
It is time for all of us to be honest with ourselves. 2023 was a really bad year for the U.S. economy. 2024 was a really bad year for the U.S. economy. 2025 was a really bad year for the U.S. economy.
That isn’t a coincidence. That is a trend.
And if you don’t want to think about how difficult things are now, you definitely won’t want to think about where the long-term trends are taking us next. Inflationary policies lead to inflationary results.
For decades, our leaders have been doing highly inflationary things. Now we are enduring a historic cost of living crisis that has spun out of control, and that should not be a surprise to any of us.
DOJ Unseals 25-Count Indictment Against BLM OKC Leader in Alleged Donor Fraud Scheme
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
Federal prosecutors have unsealed a sweeping 25-count indictment against Tashella Sheri Amore Dickerson, the former Executive Director of Black Lives Matter Oklahoma City (BLMOKC), accusing her of systematically looting donor funds intended for racial-justice initiatives and redirecting the money for personal enrichment.
According to the indictment and a Department of Justice press release, Dickerson, 52, allegedly used her position of trust to siphon millions of dollars raised from online donors and national bail funds, converting the organization’s finances into what prosecutors describe as a personal slush fund.
From Activism to Alleged Personal Empire
As Executive Director, Dickerson had unrestricted access to BLMOKC’s bank accounts, PayPal, and Cash App, placing her in sole control of incoming donations. Federal prosecutors allege that instead of directing those funds toward community programs, legal aid, or bail assistance, Dickerson spent lavishly on herself.
The indictment details expenditures that allegedly included:
- Luxury travel to Jamaica and the Dominican Republic
- Excessive food and delivery services, charged repeatedly to organizational accounts
- The purchase and transfer of six residential properties, all allegedly titled in her own name
Investigators say these transactions occurred while BLMOKC publicly appealed for donations to support racial justice causes, community action, and bail relief.
Millions Raised, Transparency Absent
According to DOJ filings, BLMOKC raised millions of dollars during peak fundraising periods tied to national protests and social-justice campaigns. Much of the money flowed through digital platforms that allowed rapid donations — and minimal oversight.
Prosecutors allege Dickerson exploited this structure, using the moral authority of the movement and the urgency of the moment to shield herself from scrutiny while diverting funds behind the scenes.
The indictment suggests the alleged scheme continued for years, relying on donor trust, limited internal controls, and the assumption that ideological alignment would discourage financial questioning.
A Pattern Under Federal Scrutiny
The case against Dickerson lands amid growing federal attention on nonprofit accountability, particularly organizations that experienced sudden, massive influxes of cash during periods of social unrest.
While the indictment makes no claims about the national Black Lives Matter organization beyond donor pipelines, it reinforces a broader pattern now visible across multiple movements:
rapid fundraising, centralized control, weak oversight, and delayed accountability.
Federal prosecutors emphasized that the charges remain allegations until proven in court, but noted the breadth of financial records, property transfers, and transaction histories supporting the case.
What Comes Next
Dickerson now faces federal prosecution on multiple counts, including wire fraud and financial crimes. If convicted, she could face significant prison time, asset forfeiture, and restitution orders.
Beyond the courtroom, the case raises deeper questions:
- How many donors believed they were funding justice while unknowingly funding personal wealth?
- How many organizations lacked safeguards once money began flowing?
- And how long accountability can be delayed when causes become brands?
Final Perspective
This case is not about ideology — it is about trust and power.
When movements grow faster than their structures, and belief replaces oversight, the opportunity for abuse expands. The indictment against Dickerson marks a point where narrative protection gives way to forensic accounting.
The system may move slowly — but it keeps records.
Why Is Europe Feverishly Preparing For World War III?
If there is going to be peace, why are we witnessing the largest military buildup in Europe since the end of the Cold War? When it comes to the major players on the geopolitical stage, it is far more important to watch what they do than it is to listen to what they say. And right now the actions that the major European powers are taking are telling us that they are preparing for a huge war with Russia.
Ukraine was supposed to be the final piece of the puzzle for the European Union. It is an enormous chunk of territory, and it is absolutely teeming with natural resources.
For most European leaders, it is unthinkable that Ukraine could be allowed to fall back into Russian hands, but at the moment more Ukrainian territory is being taken by the Russians with each passing day.
In fact, it is being reported that the city of Seversk has just fallen…
Valery Gerasimov, Chief of the General Staff of the Russian Armed Forces, said that the “Southern” group of troops had taken control of the city of Seversk in the DPR.
“The city of Seversk has been liberated,” Gerasimov said during a report to Russian President Vladimir Putin.
Every time the Russians move forward, European leaders feel even more pressure to send troops into Ukraine.
Apparently the British already have at least some soldiers in Ukraine, because one of them just died…
The British soldier who died in Ukraine on Tuesday has been named as L/Cpl George Hooley, 28, of the Parachute regiment.
Keir Starmer told the Commons on Wednesday that Hooley had died in a “tragic accident” away from the frontlines while watching a test of “a new defensive capability” with members of the Ukrainian military.
“His life was full of courage and determination,” Starmer said. “He served our country with honour and distinction around the world in the cause of freedom and democracy, including as part of the small number of British personnel in Ukraine.”
Did you notice that Starmer was purposely vague about how many British troops are in Ukraine?
Is it 100? Is it 1,000? Is it 10,000? We would like to know.
Meanwhile, we are being told that plans are in the works to significantly expand the size of the French army…
France will this week become the latest EU country to set out plans to expand its army, with Emmanuel Macron expected to announce on Thursday that military service will be restored – albeit on a voluntary basis – nearly 30 years after the end of conscription.
In the face of Russia’s military threat and uncertainty over the US’s commitment to defending its transatlantic allies, Europe is rushing to bolster its defence industry and its deployment capability after radically cutting them back since the cold war.
Why would the French need a much larger army if a peace deal is going to be negotiated with the Russians?
And why have French hospitals been instructed to prepare for tens of thousands of casualties?…
French hospitals have been told to prepare a potential armed conflict in Europe by next year, local media reported.
In a letter sent to regional health agencies, revealed by Le Canard Enchaîné , the Ministry of Health asked hospitals to prepare for a “major (military) engagement” by March 2026.
The newspaper warned that between 10,000 and 50,000 men could be expected in hospitals over a period of 10 to 180 days.
Something doesn’t add up.
We are being told one thing, but plans are being made for something else to happen instead. Other European nations are also making plans for large scale military conflict…
Denmark’s conscription system was extended to women and lengthened to 11 months from four in June. Estonia has universal male conscription, while Latvia and Lithuania, like Denmark, select conscripts by lottery if there are not enough volunteers.
Elsewhere, Croatia, which abolished mandatory military service 17 years ago, recently restored conscription, while Poland is working on a plan to prepare large-scale military training for every adult male in an effort to double the size of its army.
Is it just a coincidence that all of these countries are suddenly makes these moves in unison?
In Germany, military spending is about to go soaring into uncharted territory…
At a moment the Russia-Ukraine war grinds on, and as Trump-led efforts to find peace have been frustrated – largely as Zelensky and his backers have balked at agreeing to any territorial compromise as the bases of a deal – Germany is busy transforming its military with an aim to boost Bundeswehr numbers and meet NATO targets.
That news dominated headlines last week, but added to this Bloombergis newly reporting Tuesday that the troop expansion will coincide with a major tech and armament expansion, given lawmakers are expected to approve a record €52 billion (about $61 billion) in military procurement contracts next week.
This will mark the largest single-year investment in defense equipment in the country’s history, underscoring Berlin’s renewed push to modernize its armed forces amid the growing European standoff with Russia.
As for 2025 numbers, prior approvals brought total defense commitments for this year to above €33 billion. So next year’s could more than double, based on the new projected figures.
If there is going to be peace with Russia, this level of military spending makes no sense at all. But if there is going to be war with Russia, this level of military spending is easily explained.
On Thursday, NATO Chief Mark Rutte ominously warned that “we must be prepared for the scale of war our grandparents and great grandparents endured”…
NATO Chief Mark Rutte urged member countries to do more to prepare for the possibility of large-scale war, warning that Russia may be ready to attack the alliance within five years.
“We are Russia’s next target. And we are already in harm’s way,” Rutte said on Thursday during a speech in Berlin. “Russia has brought war back to Europe, and we must be prepared for the scale of war our grandparents and great grandparents endured.”
Although he welcomed the decision by NATO members to increase overall military spending to 5 percent of gross domestic product annually by 2035, Rutte argued more needed to be done, saying alliance members must shift to a “wartime mindset.”
What wars did our grandparents and our great-grandparents endure? Obviously he was referring to World War I and World War II. In other words, he was telling us that we need to get ready for World War III.
But the Russians have told us over and over again that they have no intention of going to war with Europe. In fact, Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov used those exact words earlier this week. But he did warn that there are a couple of red lines that will force the Russians to respond if they are crossed…
“As the President [Putin] emphasised, we have no intention of going to war with Europe,” said Lavrov.
“We have no such intention.
“But we will respond to any hostile steps, including the deployment of European military contingents in Ukraine and the expropriation of Russian assets.”
Sending large numbers of European troops into Ukraine would be a really foolish thing to do, because the Russians would begin shooting at them. And once that starts happening, we will be perilously close to nuclear conflict.
This is something that they talk about on Russian television all the time. Commenting on the confirmed death of a British soldier in Ukraine, one of the most prominent voices on Russian television boldly declared that “a nuclear strike on Britain is inevitable”…
Leading Kremlin propagandist hawk, Vladimir Solovyov, told viewers on his nightly show: “Now a nuclear strike on Britain is inevitable….” Historian Andrey Sidorov, another Putin cheerleader, said: “This incident should be considered a casus belli, when the British Ministry of Defence officially acknowledged the death of its military personnel on active duty on Ukrainian territory.” He demanded the Russian foreign ministry summon British ambassador Nigel Casey or a chargé d’affaires “to explain what an active-duty military officer was doing there”.
That is crazy talk. But this is how they actually see the world.
We should be trying to avoid a worst case scenario while we still can. The expropriation of Russian assets is another red line for the Russians, and it appears that the Europeans are determined to cross it as well…
Currently EU member states are rapidly advancing a plan to permanently freeze as much as €210 billion ($244.38 billion) in Russian state assets to finance Ukraine for at least the next two years. European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen is seeking to use a loophole to rush this through, based on invoking emergency powers to sanction the frozen assets on a permanent basis, instead of holding the funds based on current six-month renewals, which requires unanimous agreement from all member states.
The plan would see €90 billion (roughly $104.71 billion) released over the next two years. Von der Leyen’s scheme would allow for the plan to pass merely with a qualified majority, and so couldn’t be derailed by just a lone veto. Nations like Germany and Spain have already signaled their support.
This is a really bad idea. But the Europeans are apparently going to do it anyway.
Meanwhile, the U.S. continues to provoke the Russians by messing with their closest ally in South America.
Yesterday, I posted an article about the oil tanker that the U.S. just seized as it was approaching Venezuela. On Thursday, Russian Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov wanted an explanation…
Russian Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov on Thursday demanded that the Trump administration explain why a Venezuelan oil tanker was seized by U.S. forces.
“I really hope that the United States, although they consider themselves entitled to conduct such operations, will somehow explain, out of respect for other members of the world community, what facts led them to take such actions,” he said during an ambassadors’ roundtable on the Ukrainian crisis resolution.
And Russian President Vladimir Putin made it a point to publicly demonstrate his support for Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro…
Russian President Vladimir Putin spoke to Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro by phone on Thursday to reassure him of Moscow’s support for his government, shortly after the United States seized a large oil tanker off Venezuela’s coast.
Maduro has been under increasing pressure from President Donald Trump’s administration to leave office, with the U.S. conducting increasingly large military build-up in the Caribbean. Tensions escalated on Wednesday when the U.S. seized the tanker, sparking furious outcry from Venezuela.
The Kremlin said that Putin and Maduro had discussed a strategic partnership agreement and working together on several joint projects related to the economy and energy sector.
A regime change operation in Venezuela would do severe damage to our relationship with the Russians.
But officials in Washington don’t seem to care. In fact, the White House has announced that the U.S. may soon seize even more oil tankers…
President Donald Trump is willing to seize more oil tankers off the coast of Venezuela, a White House official told CNBC on Thursday.
The U.S. seized a tanker on Wednesday that had allegedly transported oil from Venezuela to Iran. The action comes as Trump escalates pressure on President Nicolás Maduro.
I feel like I am watching a slow-motion train wreck that I am unable to stop. I have been writing about these wars for so long, and now they are unfolding right in front of our eyes. Personally, I have no idea why so many prominent voices out there are cheering for war.
War is not a game. And that is especially true when nuclear weapons are involved. The fate of billions of people is hanging in the balance, and we must step back from the brink before it is too la.
Russia Claims Chemical Facility Used as Military Base in Ukraine, Warning of Catastrophic Ammonia Risk
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
Russia’s Defense Ministry has accused Ukraine of using a major civilian chemical facility as a military staging site, an allegation that—if substantiated—would raise serious questions about the protection of industrial infrastructure during wartime and the risk of catastrophic secondary effects.
The claim was presented Friday by Major General Aleksey Rtishchev, head of Russia’s Nuclear, Biological, and Chemical Protection Troops, during a formal briefing focused on what Moscow describes as Ukrainian violations of international agreements governing weapons of mass destruction and hazardous materials.
According to Rtishchev, Russian forces obtained internal correspondence indicating that foreign mercenaries and heavy military equipment were stationed at the Odessa Portside Plant, one of Ukraine’s largest chemical complexes, located approximately 35 kilometers from the port city of Odessa.
The Letter at the Center of the Allegation
Rtishchev cited a letter allegedly sent in September by the management of the Odessa Portside Plant to regional Ukrainian authorities. In that correspondence, plant officials reportedly complained about the presence of “foreign specialists” and military hardware on the premises.
The letter warned that such activity could provoke Russian strikes and risk triggering the release of more than 200 tons of liquid ammonia stored at the site—a scenario that could have devastating consequences for nearby civilian populations and the surrounding environment.
Ammonia, while widely used in industrial and agricultural applications, becomes highly dangerous in large uncontrolled releases, capable of causing mass casualties through inhalation and environmental contamination.
Claims Framed as International Law Violations
Russian officials framed the assertions within the context of international conventions designed to keep chemical and industrial sites free from military use. Rtishchev argued that deploying armed personnel and equipment at such facilities could transform civilian infrastructure into legitimate military targets, dramatically increasing the risk of humanitarian disaster.
The Russian Defense Ministry has not released the full correspondence publicly, and Ukrainian authorities have not independently confirmed the claims at the time of reporting.
Kyiv has consistently denied similar accusations in the past, arguing that Russia uses such allegations to justify military actions or shift responsibility for strikes that impact civilian infrastructure.
A Broader Pattern of Information Warfare
The accusation arrives amid an ongoing information war in which both sides routinely accuse the other of violating international norms, particularly concerning chemical, biological, and industrial hazards.
Western governments have previously dismissed Russian claims about Ukrainian chemical or biological weapons facilities as disinformation, while Moscow has accused NATO and foreign actors of embedding personnel and assets within civilian sites.
What makes the Odessa Portside Plant disclosures notable is the specific reference to internal plant management warnings, which—if authenticated—would suggest internal concern independent of military narratives.
Why the Claim Matters
As Russia continues to verify bioweapons development in Ukraine, the scenario highlights a real and under-discussed risk of modern conflict: the weaponization of proximity.
When industrial facilities storing hazardous materials are drawn into military logistics—intentionally or otherwise—the consequences of a strike can escalate from tactical damage to regional catastrophe, blurring the line between conventional warfare and mass-casualty events.
Final Perspective
At this stage, Russia continues to reveal more evidence of Ukrainian harboring of Deep State illegal bioweapons facilities. Continued verification, inspection, and transparency would be required to establish the facts.
What is undeniable, however, is that chemical infrastructure in war zones represents a latent fault line—one where miscalculation, escalation, or misinformation could result in consequences far beyond the battlefield.
In modern war, risk is not confined to weapons alone—but to what surrounds them.
We Are Facing A “Tourism Industry Apocalypse” As International Travelers Avoid The USA
Why have major tourist destinations all over America been so depressingly quiet in 2025? Normally tourism accounts for close to 10 percent of U.S. GDP, and that makes it a critical pillar of the U.S. economy. We witnessed an enormous downturn during the early days of the COVID pandemic, but that was just temporary. Now we are witnessing a similar downturn, but this time we don’t have a pandemic to blame. Needless to say, the overall economy is steadily moving in the wrong direction, and that is certainly affecting tourism. But as you will see below, there are other factors that are very much within our control that are driving tourists away.
When I claim that the U.S. is experiencing a “tourism industry apocalypse”, I am not exaggerating at all.
This summer, many of the country’s top tourist destinations were so empty that they resembled something out of “a dystopian novel”…
Imagine walking into what was once America’s most vibrant tourist destinations and hearing nothing but the whisper of wind through empty corridors. This isn’t a scene from a dystopian novel — it’s the stark reality of US tourism in 2025.
The summer that was supposed to be bustling with laughter, excitement, and packed attractions has turned into a ghost town of economic uncertainty. Take Florida, once the entertainment paradise of America, where over 15,000 Walt Disney World employees now face the terrifying prospect of reduced hours or complete layoffs — right in the middle of peak tourist season.
In the past, I have written about how a vacation to Disney World has become so ridiculously expensive that it is now out of reach for most middle class families.
But that doesn’t fully explain why international visitors to Florida fell by 38 percent in just one year…
The numbers are brutal. International visitors to Florida have plummeted by a staggering 38% in just twelve months. Hotel bookings from Orlando to Miami have nosedived by 27%, creating what experts are calling a “post-pandemic crisis without a pandemic”.
But this isn’t just about empty hotels and quiet theme parks. It’s about the human stories behind these statistics. Workers who built careers around tourism are now facing an uncertain future. The problem runs deeper than just fewer tourists — it’s about systemic vulnerabilities in tourism-dependent economies.
Many would argue that conditions in Las Vegas are even worse.
There are thousands upon thousands of empty hotel rooms every night, and many casino floors are eerily empty these days…
Agitators in the city have attempted to document the deterioration by posting ominous images of barren casinos, conjuring the perception of a place hollowed out by economic armageddon. The reality is more nuanced, but it is true that practically every conceivable indicator tracking tourism to Las Vegas is flashing warning signs. Hotel occupancy has cratered. Rooms were only 66.7 percent full in July, down by 16.8 percent from the previous year. The number of travelers passing through Harry Reid International Airport also declined by 4.5 percent in 2025 during an ongoing ebb of foreign tourists, for familiar reasons. Canadians, historically one of the city’s most reliable sources of degenerates, have effectively vanished. Ticket sales for Air Canada jets flying to Las Vegas have slipped by 33 percent, while the Edmonton-based low-cost carrier Flair has reported a 62 percent drop-off. Those last data points have provoked the city’s mayor, Shelley Berkley, to engage in some emergency diplomacy. In September, she implored our neighbors from the north to make their prodigal return to the Strip.
“I’m telling everyone in Canada, please come,” she said. “We love you, we miss you, we need you.”
We don’t like to admit it, but we are very dependent on our neighbors to the north.
Canadians normally account for approximately 30 percent of all international visits to the U.S. each year.
But this year it has been a completely different story…
From Washington state to northern New England, American businesses that have long depended on Canadian visitors are seeing traffic dry up — and with it, a crucial source of revenue.
A new report shared exclusively with Fortune by the Joint Economic Committee (JEC) – Minority, a congressional standing committee dating back to 1946 responsible for documenting the economic conditions of the U.S., details how a sharp drop in Canadian tourism is hitting every U.S. state along the northern border.
For many border communities, maintaining a healthy level of visitors from Canada is a matter of economic survival. If there is a substantial drop in Canadian visitors, many businesses will simply cease to exist.
If you live in a community near the Canadian border, you know exactly what I am talking about. So the fact that the number of vehicles crossing over the border from Canada has dropped so precipitously is extremely alarming…
From January to October 2025, the number of passenger vehicles crossing the U.S.-Canada border fell by nearly 20% compared with the same period in 2024, according to the JEC analysis, which draws on U.S. Customs and Border Protection travel statistics. In some border states, the decline reached 27%, a shift that local tourism agencies say is showing up in fewer tourists, more hotel vacancies, and weaker sales.
Other than during the early days of the pandemic, we have never seen anything quite like this.
One woman that runs a gift shop in northern New Hampshire says that she can count the number of Canadian tourists that she has encountered this year on one hand…
In northern New Hampshire, the absence of Canadian license plates is especially stark. “Being only eight miles from the border, normally Canadians make up anywhere from 15-25% of visitors. Now, I can probably count the number of Canadian visitors on one hand. I’m just trying to plug along and keep my nose above the waterline,” said Elizabeth Guerin, owner of the Fiddleheads gift shop in Colebrook, New Hampshire.
Everyone knows what has happened to our relationship with Canada over the past year. And now the Canadians are showing us exactly how they feel about it.
We need people to come here and spend their money. So it is important to be friendly. Unfortunately, we continue to implement even more measures that will make it even more difficult for foreign visitors to come to this country.
For example, it appears that millions of foreign visitors will soon be required to submit “five years of their social media history” before entering the United States…
The Trump administration is proposing to ask visitors from several dozen nations that enjoy visa-free travel to the U.S. to submit additional personal information before entering the country, including five years of their social media history, the Department of Homeland Security said in a notice this week.
Citizens of 42 countries enrolled in the visa waiver program can generally come to the U.S. for up to 90 days for tourism or business travel, without needing to apply for a visa at an American embassy or consulate, a process that can take months or even years.
The list of countries in the visa waiver program includes many European nations like the United Kingdom, Germany and France, as well as some U.S. allies around the world, including Australia, Israel, Japan, New Zealand and South Korea.
The tourism industry is already in critical condition. Are they trying to finish it off?
Of course even if we were as welcoming as possible, a lot of tourists would still shun us because of how expensive the U.S. has become to visit. When one author wrote that we have built “a tourism economy designed to extract maximum revenue from every interaction”, he was right on target…
America has become too expensive to visit, and the tourism industry refuses to admit it. We’ve turned travel – and living – into an extraction operation, and we’re surprised when people stop coming.
America has lost the plot. We built a tourism economy designed to extract maximum revenue from every interaction, and it’s backfiring spectacularly. We have priced ourselves out of our own welcome mat. What once felt like a promise to the world is now an obstacle course, a trip measured not in miles but in fees, surcharges, and the steady erosion of goodwill.
I’ve spent nearly 15 years observing this industry at Skift, watching as we’ve collectively convinced ourselves that premium travel’s resilience somehow masks the fundamental rot beneath. But the cracks are showing, and they’re widening faster than anyone wants to admit.
If we want tourists to visit, we need to stop ripping them off. At this stage, the vast majority of America’s most prominent tourist destinations are only affordable for the wealthy and the ultra-wealthy.
And the gap between the rich and the rest of us just continues to grow. According to one recent report, the top 0.001 percent of the world’s population has three times as much money “as the entire bottom half of humanity”…
Fewer than 60,000 people – 0.001% of the world’s population – control three times as much wealth as the entire bottom half of humanity, according to a report that argues global inequality has reached such extremes that urgent action has become essential.
The authoritative World Inequality Report 2026, based on data compiled by 200 researchers, also found that the top 10% of income-earners earn more than the other 90% combined, while the poorest half captures less than 10% of total global earnings.
Wealth – the value of people’s assets – was even more concentrated than income, or earnings from work and investments, the report found, with the richest 10% of the world’s population owning 75% of wealth and the bottom half just 2%.
If you are at or near the top of the pyramid, life is good.
But for those in the bottom half, things are really rough. History has shown us that when the gap between the “haves” and the “have nots” gets too large, really bad things can happen.
We have already seen eruptions of civil unrest all over the globe throughout 2025, and I am convinced that this is just the beginning. Reviving the middle class should be a priority for leaders all over the globe. And if we want to have a sustainable tourism industry, we need to make tourism affordable for the middle class again. Unfortunately, the tourism industry has become yet another example of the rampant greed that is now permeating our society, and I don’t expect that to change any time soon.
Here We Go! This Is Why China Will Be EXTREMELY Upset If A U.S. Blockade Stops The Flow Of Oil Coming Out Of Venezuela
The seizure of a Venezuelan oil tanker was an extraordinarily shocking move by the Trump administration. Will it be followed by the seizure of more oil tankers? This is a question that the press really needs to be asking right now. If a U.S. blockade stops the flow of oil coming out of Venezuela, the Chinese will be absolutely furious. As you will see below, China buys more Venezuelan oil than anyone else. Just imagine how we would feel if someone started grabbing tankers of oil that were eventually headed to the United States. If U.S. officials really do intend to impose a blockade on Venezuelan oil, this could be the beginning of the end of our relationship with the Chinese, and it could potentially lead to global war.
When he was asked about the seizure of the Venezuelan tanker, President Trump said that it was the “largest one ever seized”…
The U.S. military has seized an oil tanker off of Venezuela’s coast, President Donald Trump told reporters Wednesday as his administration continues to escalate military activity in the region.
“As you probably know, we’ve just seized a tanker on the coast of Venezuela,” Trump said. “Large tanker, very large, largest one ever seized actually.” Trump did not provide details on the seizure but said that it was an “interesting day.”
Video footage of the seizure is quite dramatic.
Soldiers that had arrived in a helicopter rappelled down ropes and raced to the bridge of the tanker…
Footage released by the Trump administration on Wednesday showed American forces swooping on the tanker in helicopters and rappelling down ropes.
Troops with guns drawn darted up stairs to the bridge to take control of the vessel off the coast of Venezuela.
As soon as news of this seizure got out, shocked reactions started coming in from all over the globe on social media.
People could hardly believe what had just happened. On Twitter, Attorney General Pam Bondi claimed that this particular tanker was involved in “an illicit oil shipping network supporting foreign terrorist organizations”…
Today, the Federal Bureau of Investigation, Homeland Security Investigations, and the United States Coast Guard, with support from the Department of War, executed a seizure warrant for a crude oil tanker used to transport sanctioned oil from Venezuela and Iran. For multiple years, the oil tanker has been sanctioned by the United States due to its involvement in an illicit oil shipping network supporting foreign terrorist organizations. This seizure, completed off the coast of Venezuela, was conducted safely and securely—and our investigation alongside the Department of Homeland Security to prevent the transport of sanctioned oil continues.
Is this the only tanker that the U.S. intends to seize, or is this the beginning of a full-blown blockade?
The Chinese would be very interested in the answer to that question, because they import more oil from Venezuela than everyone else combined…
Venezuela is one of the largest suppliers of oil to China, which has been the destination of between 55 percent and 90 percent of the country’s oil exports.
A Bloomberg report called the move ‘a serious escalation’ after Trump demanded Venezuelan dictator Nicolas Maduro step down. Caracas did not immediately respond to the seizure.
During 2023, China was importing approximately 430,000 barrels of oil a day from Venezuela. Are we going to try to keep the Chinese from getting any more oil from the Venezuelans from now on?
If so, how will the Chinese respond? Thanks to their current spat with Japan, the Chinese are already in a really sour mood. On Tuesday, the Russians and the Chinese conducted a very sizable show of force near Japanese territory…
A Newsweek map shows Russia and China deployed air and naval units—including bombers and an aircraft carrier—for a joint patrol and training near Japan on Tuesday.
The Russian Defense Ministry said the joint air patrol was not directed against third countries, while the Chinese military said the aerial maneuver demonstrated their ability to address security challenges and maintain peace and stability in the region.
Japan‘s Defense Ministry said it scrambled fighter jets to intercept the Russia–China air formation and dispatched a warship to continue monitoring and gathering intelligence on the Chinese aircraft carrier CNS Liaoning, following a “radar lock-on” incident last week.
We should be doing what we can to ease tensions with the Chinese. Needless to say, the seizure of a Venezuelan oil tanker is not going to help matters at all.
Meanwhile, Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov just warned that Russia is prepared to “respond” to any deployment of European troops in Ukraine…
Lavrov said Russian President Vladimir Putin had already stressed that “we are not going to wage war with Europe. We don’t even have such thoughts. But we will respond to any hostile steps, including the deployment of European military contingents in Ukraine and the expropriation of Russian assets,” state media reported.
Our European allies must not send forces into Ukraine, because once the Russians start shooting at them there will be no turning back.
But they are thinking of doing it anyway. And once the Europeans and the Russians start shooting at one another, there is no way that we will be able to stay out of it.
With so much going on elsewhere, it is a really bad time to be starting a war in South America. But we just keep daring the Venezuelans to shoot at us. In fact, two F-18 fighter jets spent 40 minutes in Venezuelan airspace on Tuesday…
Two U.S. F-18 fighter jets flying in tandem entered Venezuelan airspace around noon Tuesday, circling over the Gulf of Venezuela in the latest show of force against the regime of Nicolás Maduro.
The flyover — carried out despite the Venezuelan regime’s possession of a number of Russian-made anti-aircraft batteries — took place less than 100 miles northeast of Maracaibo, Venezuela’s second-largest city. Thousands of Venezuelans tracked the aircraft online through specialized tracking websites, watching as the jets traced a bow-tie-shaped pattern over the gulf.
The fighters remained inside Venezuelan airspace for at least 40 minutes at an altitude of roughly 25,000 feet before heading north and leaving the area.
We should be very thankful that the Venezuelans showed such restraint.
They probably realize that Washington is looking for an excuse to light them up. And President Trump is warning Colombian President Gustavo Petro that he could be next…
“He’s going to have himself some big problems if he doesn’t wise up,” he added. “He better wise up or he’ll be next. I hope he’s listening. He’s going to be next.”
Trump noted that Colombia is a “major” drug producer and helps import narcotics into the U.S.
We really are living during a time of “wars and rumors of wars”. I know that a lot of people out there wish that this was not true, but it is.
Leaders all over the globe have come down with a really bad case of war fever. We have a very limited window of opportunity to pull back from the brink, and if that doesn’t happen 2026 could rapidly turn into one giant nightmare.
The Unprecedented Explosion In The Price Of Silver Can Be Attributed To The AI Boom And The Behavior Of The BRICS Nations
$60 silver is here! The exponential rise in the price of silver that we have witnessed in recent months is astounding experts all over the globe. So far in 2025, the price of gold is up about 60 percent, but the price of silver is up more than 100 percent. We have never seen anything like this before, and there are some very specific reasons why this is happening. Fortunately for silver investors, it appears that conditions will continue to be very favorable as we roll through the early months of 2026.
Many of us had been anticipating that the price of silver would smash through the $60 threshold and stay there this week, and that is precisely what occurred on Tuesday…
Gold rose on Tuesday as traders remained optimistic ahead of the U.S. Federal Reserve’s interest rate decision, while silver rose to hit the unprecedented $60 per ounce milestone as the white metal faced supply constraints.
As I write this article, the price of silver is sitting at $61.22 an ounce.
It seems like just yesterday we were talking about $50 silver, and now some analysts are projecting that it will hit 70 dollars an ounce during the first half of next year…
Gold has shrugged off the jobs report, Haberkorn said, and added “we could see silver trade over $70 an ounce in the first half of 2026, and gold is on a path towards $5,000 an ounce.”
This is amazing news for silver investors. But hardly anyone is talking about the real reasons why this is happening.
Right now, hundreds of giant AI data centers are being constructed all over the United States. Hundreds of others are going up in various other nations around the world.
Many of these AI data centers are powered by solar energy, and approximately 300 metric tons of silver are required for just one 500 megawatt solar array…
Tech giants have pledged to power their AI data centers with renewable sources. That means an explosion of new solar installations — and each solar panel uses roughly 20 grams of silver in its photovoltaic cells.
A single 500-megawatt solar array — enough to power one hyperscale data center — requires roughly 300 metric tons of silver. Multiply that by the hundreds of new data centers being built worldwide, and the connection between AI and industrial silver demand becomes undeniable.
As long as the AI boom continues, demand for physical silver will remain strong.
Of course silver is used in thousands of other high tech products as well, and that is why it is being anticipated that there will be strong industrial demand for physical silver for at least the remainder of this decade…
“People are anticipating that there’s going to be strong industrial demand for silver for years to come, which is why it’s been bid up, the silver price,” said Fawad Razaqzada, market analyst at City Index and FOREX.com, adding that the buying momentum is strong at the moment.
Sectors including solar energy, electric vehicles and their infrastructure, and data centers and artificial intelligence will drive industrial demand higher through 2030, the Silver Institute industry association said in a research report.
Meanwhile, the behavior of the BRICS nations is also driving the price of silver higher.
Demand for physical silver in India has been off the charts, and it went even higher once the Reserve Bank of India decided to “allow consumers to monetize their physical silver holdings”…
In a report published this summer, Metals Focus noted that India is the world’s second-largest market for physical silver investment, accounting for nearly 80% of global silver bar and coin demand. The research firm also noted that India has long been the world’s largest consumer of silver jewellery and silverware by volume.
In an updated report, the analysts said that over the last five years, Indians — particularly lower-income consumers in rural communities — have purchased an estimated 29,000 tonnes of silver in jewellery and 4,000 tonnes in coins.
Metals Focus added that they see a potential game-changing development for the silver market as a new rule from the Reserve Bank of India will allow consumers to monetize their physical silver holdings.
I don’t think that demand from India is going to slow down any time soon. Russia is another BRICS nation that is having a sizable impact on the silver market.
In late 2024, Russia’s central bank decided to start purchasing silver for its State Reserve Fund, and since that time the price of silver has dramatically outperformed the price of gold…
Silver is moving out of a long shadow cast by gold, its precious metal sister with hints of a major new buyer, Russia’s central bank, starting to influence the silver price which has risen to a 14-year high.
Data is scarce but since Russia revealed a plan late last year to add silver for the first time to its State Reserve Fund the silver price has outperformed gold.
Last but certainly not least, China recently decided to impose very significant export restrictions on silver starting in 2026…
The Ministry of Commerce of the People’s Republic of China (MOFCOM) has issued Announcement 2025-No. 68, imposing stringent conditions on the export of three critical minor metals – tungsten, antimony and silver – for the period 2026-2027. The move reflects China’s intensifying resource-security agenda and tighter export controls over strategic materials.
The Chinese want to ensure that they will have enough physical silver for the data centers that they will need to win the global race for AI dominance.
Supplies of physical silver have been getting tighter and tighter, existing mines can only produce so much, and we are being told that “it takes many years to get a new one up and running”…
The world’s mines are expected to produce only about 813 million ounces of silver this year, slightly less than they did in 2021, according to the Silver Institute. Mines can only produce so much each year, and it takes many years to get a new one up and running — something that puts a cap on supply.
Right now, approximately 50 percent of global silver production comes from Central America and South America.
In fact, Mexico produces more silver than anyone else. So that suddenly makes Mexico a much more important piece on the global chessboard.
Thanks to the AI boom and the behavior of the BRICS nations, silver is now the hottest precious metal on the entire planet. And if you think that things have been crazy this year, just wait until you see what happens in 2026.
A Star Torn Apart: Astronomers Confirm Einstein’s Frame-Dragging Prediction Near a Supermassive Black Hole
Written for the Great Awakening Report | December 2025
Astronomers have captured rare and compelling evidence of one of Albert Einstein’s most elusive predictions: the twisting of space and time itself by a rapidly spinning black hole.
The observation centers on a doomed star locked in a violent gravitational dance with a supermassive black hole, where the star’s orbit visibly wobbles as it is slowly torn apart. This wobble is not random. It is the signature of Lense–Thirring precession, also known as frame dragging—a phenomenon in which a rotating mass drags the very fabric of spacetime around with it.
For more than a century, frame dragging existed primarily as mathematics. Now, astronomers are watching it unfold in real time.
When Space and Time Are No Longer Fixed
Einstein’s general theory of relativity, published in 1915, overturned the classical idea of gravity as a simple force. Instead, it described gravity as the result of mass warping spacetime itself. The more massive an object, the deeper the curvature it creates.
But Einstein’s equations went further.
In 1918, Austrian physicists Josef Lense and Hans Thirring demonstrated that if a massive object is also rotating, it does more than curve spacetime—it twists it. Space and time are dragged along, like honey swirling around a spinning spoon.
This effect is extraordinarily subtle around objects like Earth. Detecting it required ultra-precise satellite experiments such as Gravity Probe B, which confirmed frame dragging only in minute measurements.
Near a supermassive black hole, however, the effect becomes extreme.
A Star Caught in the Drag
In this newly observed system, astronomers tracked a star orbiting dangerously close to a black hole millions of times more massive than the Sun. As the black hole feeds on stellar material, it spins rapidly, forming a blazing accretion disk of superheated gas.
Instead of following a stable, predictable orbit, the star’s path precesses—its orbital plane slowly shifts, as though spacetime itself is rotating beneath it.
This is Lense–Thirring precession made visible.
The star is not merely responding to gravity; it is responding to rotating spacetime.
Why This Matters
This observation is more than a confirmation of Einstein’s brilliance. It provides direct insight into how black holes grow, feed, and shape their surrounding environments.
Frame dragging influences:
- How matter spirals into black holes
- The orientation of accretion disks
- The formation and direction of relativistic jets
- The stability of orbits near galactic cores
In extreme environments, spacetime itself becomes an active participant—not a passive stage.
A Living Laboratory of Relativity
Supermassive black holes are no longer theoretical monsters hidden in equations. They are natural laboratories where the deepest laws of physics are stress-tested.
What astronomers are witnessing is spacetime behaving exactly as predicted—warping, twisting, and flowing under the influence of immense mass and rotation.
The universe is not rigid.
It is dynamic.
And under enough pressure, even reality bends.
The Bigger Picture
As observations grow more precise, phenomena once considered abstract—frame dragging, spacetime vortices, relativistic precession—are becoming observable features of the cosmos.
Each confirmation strengthens a deeper realization:
Space and time are not fixed absolutes.
They are responsive, malleable, and profoundly interconnected with matter and motion.
Einstein told us this over a century ago.
Now, the universe is showing us.
The U.S. Could Potentially End Up Fighting Venezuela, Colombia, Mexico, Russia And China All At The Same Time
We have reached one of the most critical turning points in modern history, but most people don’t seem to understand this. Without a doubt, 2025 has been a year of war.
There has been war in Ukraine, war in Iran, war in Gaza, and lots of other regional conflicts as well. But as I have been warning my readers, 2026 could potentially be far worse. Decisions that world leaders make during the months ahead will determine which way things go. Let us hope that they make their choices wisely.
According to CNN, White House officials are coming up with plans for how to stabilize Venezuela once Nicolas Maduro is removed from power…
Months into a pressure campaign that has seen the US military move thousands of troops and a carrier strike group into the Caribbean and President Donald Trump issue repeated threats against Venezuelan leader Nicolas Maduro, the Trump administration is working on day-after plans in the event Maduro is ousted from power, according to two senior administration officials and another source familiar with the discussions.
The plans are being quietly drafted and closely held at the White House, the sources said.
They include multiple options for what US action could look like to fill the power vacuum and stabilize the country if Maduro voluntarily leaves as part of a negotiated departure or is forced into leaving after US strikes on targets inside Venezuela or other direct action, the sources said.
The only reason such plans would be necessary is if the White House really does intend to remove Maduro from power.
When he was asked about Maduro’s future by Politico, President Trump openly admitted that his “days are numbered”…
President Trump warned in a new interview that Venezuelan dictator Nicolás Maduro’s “days are numbered” and refused to rule out sending US ground troops to depose the left-wing leader.
The president stressed in the sitdown with Politico released Tuesday that Maduro could not be allowed to stay in power as the administration cracks down on South American drug trafficking, but declined to tip his hand about what the US could or would do to cause regime change.
When reporter and “The Conversation” podcast host Dasha Burns asked how far Trump was willing to go to oust Maduro, the president merely responded, “I don’t want to say that.”
For weeks, there has been a lot of speculation that an operation to remove Maduro could begin soon.
Speculation about such an operation ramped up even more when we learned that Secretary of War Pete Hegseth was scheduled to give a private briefing to leaders of both houses of Congress on Tuesday…
Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth and other key national security officials are scheduled to brief Congressional leaders Tuesday on the administration’s actions in Venezuela.
The briefing is expected to be given to the so-called “Gang of 8,” which includes the top leaders of each party in each chamber, as well as the Senate and House Intelligence Committee’s chairman and ranking minority member.
Could this be an indication that military action against Venezuela is imminent?
I don’t know. But if the U.S. does attack Venezuela, the Chinese are going to be absolutely furious with us. The Chinese import a tremendous amount of oil from Venezuela, and the Venezuelans have borrowed tens of billions of dollars from them.
The Russians have very close ties with Venezuela as well, and most Americans don’t even realize that the USS Stockdale recently intercepted a Russian tanker as it approached the Venezuelan coastline…
The interception of a sanctioned Russian tanker by the USS Stockdale near Venezuela has turned a slow-burning sanctions story into a visible test of sea power, energy leverage, and political resolve in the Caribbean. As Washington tightens the screws on fuel shipments that have been worth roughly 3 billion dollars to Nicolás Maduro’s government, the encounter signals that the era of quiet workarounds is giving way to open contests on the water.
The USS Stockdale literally got directly in front of the Russian tanker, and the tanker eventually decided to conduct a U-turn rather than risk a direct confrontation…
The Russian tanker at the heart of this episode was not an ordinary commercial ship, it was part of a sprawling sanctions-busting network that Moscow has built to keep its oil flowing despite Western restrictions. When the vessel, identified as the Seahorse, was forced into a U-turn in the Caribbean after encountering a U.S. destroyer, the maneuver exposed how vulnerable this so-called shadow fleet becomes when confronted by a determined naval presence. The Seahorse’s retreat was not just a navigational adjustment, it was a public demonstration that even heavily sanctioned operators will back down when the risk of escalation at sea becomes too high.
Overthrowing the Venezuelan government will cause our relations with both Russia and China to seriously deteriorate.
Is that really a wise move? In addition to threatening Venezuela, President Trump is also considering conducting strikes in Mexico and Colombia…
President Donald Trump has said he would consider expanding his military campaign against drugs targets in countries such as Mexico and Colombia.
Since September, Trump has authorized several strikes in the Caribbean Sea and eastern Pacific Ocean on small Venezuelan boats accused of ferrying drugs, as well as a large buildup of U.S. naval forces in the region.
In an interview with Politico’s Dasha Burns, Trump was asked if he would consider expanding strikes against targets in other countries with high drugs trade activity, such as Mexico and Colombia.
“Sure, I would,” he said.
If we start hitting targets in Mexico and Colombia without their permission, we will be in a state of war with those two nations.
Colombia is one of the largest producers of cocaine on the entire planet, and more fentanyl comes into this country from Mexico than anywhere else. But going to war with them would make us “the bad guys” in the eyes of most of the rest of the world.
The anger that we are already witnessing in Central America and South America should not be underestimated. At a recent Christmas festival in Guatemala, an effigy of President Trump was set on fire by enraged protesters…
This year’s event drew international attention after a giant piñata depicting US President Donald Trump was set alight in protest against his immigration policies. The figure, designed with horns and eight legs, became the centrepiece of the ritual in Guatemala City.
Footage from Sunday shows crowds gathering to watch the torching of the Trump-themed effigy, accompanied by fireworks as part of the celebration. For many participants, the act carries symbolic meaning. With many participants viewing the burning of a small devil figure as a way to cast out misfortune and start the year renewed, a sentiment often expressed by regular piñata buyers who take part in the tradition.
Meanwhile, Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky is once again pledging that the Ukrainians will never willingly hand over any territory to the Russians…
Ukraine will not surrender territory, President Volodymyr Zelensky declared Monday, rejecting a central Russian demand that President Donald Trump had incorporated into his latest proposal to end the Kremlin’s war.
“Under our laws, under international law — and under moral law — we have no right to give anything away,” Zelensky said, after meeting with top European leaders to discuss Trump’s plan Monday. “That is what we are fighting for.”
We are being told that this kills any chance for a peace deal.
But of course there never was going to be a peace deal. The Ukrainians never intended to give the Russians what they want, and so the Russians are just going to continue to take it…
Russian forces took control of the villages of Kucherivka in Ukraine’s northern Kharkiv region and Rivne in the eastern Donetsk region, the Defence Ministry said on Sunday.
Moscow carried out group strikes on Ukrainian transport infrastructure, fuel and energy facilities, military airfields and long-range drone complexes, the ministry added.
The line of control is moving on a daily basis.
Kramatorsk is one of Ukraine’s last remaining strongholds in the Donetsk region, and the Russians are steadily drawing closer…
In one of the last remaining cities under Ukrainian control in the country’s eastern Donetsk region, once a powerhouse of industry, life gets more difficult — and dangerous — as Russian forces inch closer.
Over the last month, local officials in Kramatorsk have reported dozens of Russian attacks on the city using strike drones, ballistic missiles, rockets and aerial bombs. Homes, gas stations and markets have all been hit, as has a nearby power plant, causing blackouts.
“There was a recent strike on the house next to mine,” said Olena Frolova, 20, who works in a shop that sells Donetsk-branded clothing in Kramatorsk. “We all feel that the front is getting closer. Your life depends on how our guys at the front hold on.”
With each passing day, the pressure on our European allies to intervene in Ukraine grows even stronger.
To most EU leaders, allowing the Russians to win this war would be completely and utterly unacceptable. But the Ukrainians have no chance of defeating the Russians by themselves.
At some point EU leaders may give in to temptation and start sending large numbers of troops into Ukraine, and that will put us right on the brink of nuclear war. Interestingly, the UK Ministry of Defence just announced that a member of the UK Armed Forces has died in Ukraine…
Once our European allies are directly fighting the Russians, it will just be a matter of time before we are directly fighting them too.
In the Pacific, the war of words between Japan and China is rapidly approaching a boiling point…
Beijing escalated its war of words with Tokyo after Japan said Chinese fighter jets aimed a fire-control radar at Japanese F-15s flying near Okinawa, an action Tokyo called “dangerous” and “extremely regrettable.”
Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi told his German counterpart Johann Wadephul in Beijing that “Japan is threatening China militarily,” a stance he called “completely unacceptable,” after the radar incident, Reuters reported.
Wang accused Japanese Prime Minister Sanae Takaichi of “trying to exploit the Taiwan question — the very territory Japan colonized for half a century, committing countless crimes against the Chinese people — to provoke trouble and threaten China militarily. This is completely unacceptable,” Wang said, according to China’s official Xinhua News Agency. He added that Japan, as a World War II “defeated nation,” should act with greater caution.
If the Japanese and the Chinese actually start shooting at one another, there is no way that we could stay out of it.
Today, we have approximately 120 military installations in Japan. We are Japan’s protector, and the Chinese know that. I have been warning about a coming war with China for a very long time. But we could soon be facing a scenario in which we aren’t just facing one opponent.
If the wrong decisions are made, we could potentially find ourselves fighting Venezuela, Colombia, Mexico, Russia and China simultaneously. Needless to say, we should be trying to avoid such a scenario any way that we can.
Why Is The Pacific Ring Of Fire Shaking So Violently This Year?
Should we be alarmed that there has been so much activity along the Pacific Ring of Fire lately? Every time that there is another major event, and that has been occurring quite frequently in recent weeks, the experts rush to tell us that what we are witnessing is perfectly normal.
But is that really true? Late last month, I wrote an article about how volcanoes that have been dormant for ages are suddenly roaring to life all over the globe. I don’t understand how it is “perfectly normal” for multiple volcanoes that have been dormant for hundreds or even thousands of years to all be waking up at the same time. I just don’t see it. Similarly, I don’t understand how it is “perfectly normal” for so much shaking to be taking place all along the Ring of Fire right now.
For example, on Monday a magnitude 7.6 earthquake rattled northern Japan…
A powerful 7.6-magnitude earthquake shook northeastern Japan late on Monday, prompting tsunami warnings and orders for about 90,000 residents to evacuate.
The Japan Meteorological Agency said a tsunami as high as 3 metres (10 feet) could hit Japan’s northeastern coast after the earthquake struck off the coast at 11:15 p.m. (1415 GMT).
Tsunami warnings were issued for the prefectures of Hokkaido, Aomori and Iwate, and tsunamis from 20 to 70 cm (7 to 27 inches) high were observed at several ports, JMA said.
A magnitude 7.6 earthquake is quite powerful.
The Daily Mail is reporting that buildings and vehicles were “trembling as the ground beneath them shook violently”…
Video footage showed buildings and stationary vehicles trembling as the ground beneath them shook violently.
Another clip showed a terrified man in his home watching lights bounce around amid the earthquake, while a third showed a siren being sounded, warning citizens of the imminent danger.
If this was just an isolated incident, we could probably safely ignore it.
But the truth is that Japan has been hit by a number of severe earthquake swarms in 2025, and that includes a massive swarm of 1,198 earthquakes that stretched from late June to early July…
From June 25 to July 4, a total of 1,198 earthquakes occurred near the Tokara Islands in far southwest Japan. The largest of these, on July 4, was at the lower end of 6 on the Japan Meteorological Agency seismic intensity scale (JMA scale).[22] This earthquake swarm was the most intense in the region since 1995.[23] 31 residents requested evacuation to Mainland Japan following several earthquakes of 5+ on the JMA scale, i.e. approximately VII on the Mercalli scale[b][25][26]
I certainly don’t think that was normal.
At the end of July, a magnitude 8.8 megathrust earthquake struck the Pacific Ring of Fire just off the coast of the Kamchatka Peninsula…
On 30 July 2025, at 11:24:52 PETT (29 July, 23:24:52 UTC), a Mw 8.8 megathrust earthquake struck off the eastern coast of the Kamchatka Peninsula in the Russian Far East, 119 km (74 mi) east-southeast of the coastal city of Petropavlovsk-Kamchatsky.[3][4] It was the most powerful earthquake recorded worldwide since the 2011 Tōhoku earthquake,[5] and is tied with the 1906 Ecuador–Colombia and 2010 Chile earthquakes as the sixth-strongest ever recorded by seismometers.[6]
That quake was part of a global swarm of 494 earthquakes of magnitude 5.0 or greater within a 30 day period. That was about 4 times as many earthquakes of magnitude 5.0 or greater than we usually experience in a typical month. Nobody can claim that was normal.
Here in the United States, the west coast has been getting pummeled by earthquake swarms over and over again. In fact, there was another earthquake swarm in California on Monday…
A swarm of earthquakes has struck California’s Bay Area, just miles from some of the most populated cities throughout the area.
A magnitude 3.7 earthquake was detected at 12.08pm ET on Monday, less than three miles from the city of San Ramon, followed by a magnitude 2.9 quake at 1.06pm.
The US Geological Survey (USGS) has revealed that these were at least the sixth and seventh small earthquake to strike the since 5.33am this morning.
The quakes took place less than 40 miles from San Francisco, and less than 30 miles from major cities such as Oakland, Concord, and San Jose.
One earthquake swarm in California is not a big deal.
But there were three other earthquake swarms in California just last week…
Monday’s swarm was the latest seismic outbreak in the Bay Area, coming just days after residents in the region were shaken by three straight days of earthquake swarms rattling nerves along the state’s Central and Northern Coasts.
The recent swarms have also taken place along several branch faults in the broader San Andreas Fault System, sparking fears the main fault line could be closer to a major rupture that locals refer to as ‘the Big One.’
I have written a lot about “the Big One”.
It is coming. And it is going to be a lot more destructive than the experts are admitting.
Have you seen the movie San Andreas? When “the Big One” finally hits, it is going to be far worse than that.
If you live in Alaska, you are in danger too. On Saturday, the state was rattled by a magnitude 7.0 earthquake…
According to the United States Geological Survey (USGS), a magnitude 7.0 earthquake struck Alaska during the morning hours Saturday.
The earthquake struck at 11:41 a.m. local time northeast of Yakutat, Alaska, per the USGS.
The U.S. Census Bureau reports that Yakutat had a population of approximately 657 in 2020, and in 2023, a total of 332 housing units. The USGS interactive map indicates that the community lies more than 300 miles from Anchorage, where the quake was also experienced.
That quake was the first in a series of 164 quakes that rattled the state in less than 24 hours…
Residents as far away as Anchorage and communities across the border in Canada’s Yukon Territory reported feeling the quake.
In the 24 hours following the main quake, seismic networks logged 164 earthquakes in the region. Many were aftershocks, including several registering magnitudes above 5.0. This number of aftershocks is not uncommon after a significant seismic event as the crust readjusts along the fault lines.
The entire southern coastline of Alaska sits directly along the Pacific Ring of Fire. So does the entire west coast of the United States.
If you choose to live in one of those danger zones, you are taking a huge risk. We are getting more warning signs on an almost daily basis, but most of those that live in high risk areas will ignore the warning signs until it is too late.
U.S. Reaching “End Game” in the Caribbean: What’s Confirmed vs. What’s Speculation (Venezuela)
Based on the last ~10 days of reporting and official notices, the U.S. posture in/around Venezuela has clearly shifted from “presence + interdiction” to “presence + strike-enabled readiness.” Here’s how your bullets map to what’s publicly confirmed right now—and what remains unverified/interpretive.
What’s confirmed (open-source + official)
- EA-18G Growlers forward-deployed to Puerto Rico (Roosevelt Roads). This is a major tell because electronic attack / SEAD support becomes much more relevant when you’re planning to operate near or against integrated air defenses. The War Zone+1
- USAF F-35A deployment to the Caribbean (reported as Vermont ANG F-35As). Even without a public destination, multiple reports indicate Roosevelt Roads is a likely staging hub. The War Zone+1
- CSAR package surged forward: HH-60W Jolly Green II + HC-130J observed in Puerto Rico—classic “we may lose aircrews” insurance for hostile/contested ops. The War Zone
- Six KC-135 tankers forward deployed to the Dominican Republic (Santo Domingo / Las Américas). Forward tankers increase time-on-station and sortie rate and widen the footprint beyond Puerto Rico/USVI. The War Zone
- Higher-tempo flights closer to Venezuela: widely tracked recent F/A-18 flights near/over the Gulf of Venezuela (Pentagon called it routine training in international airspace). AP News+1
- AN/TPS-80 G/ATOR radar in Trinidad & Tobago: local reporting quotes a U.S. officer explicitly acknowledging the system and noting conflict utility. Trinidad Guardian
- USS Gerald R. Ford CSG operating in the Caribbean / SOUTHCOM AOR and port call in St. Thomas (USVI) is documented. Navy+1
- State Department warning: “All U.S. citizens and LPRs in Venezuela are strongly advised to depart immediately.” (Reissued Dec 3, 2025). Travel.gov+1
Likely/credible but depends on how strict you want “confirmed”
-
MQ-4C Triton operating off Venezuela’s coastline: The most solid mainstream anchor I’ve seen is The War Zone’s reporting tied to flight-tracking observations. The War Zone
-
“Maduro will be out by Christmas” is a rumor. I’ve not seen an on-the-record U.S. confirmation, a formal ultimatum, or a declared timeline in major wires matching that phrasing. Treat it as narrative pressure, not a verified deadline.
What this posture suggests operationally
This mix—F-35A + Growlers + forward tankers + dedicated CSAR + expanded radar coverage—is the toolkit for:
- short-notice strike options (especially if air defenses are a concern),
- maritime interdiction escalation (including boarding/seizure ops), and/or
- sustained ISR + coercive presence designed to force defections and deal-making.
It does not automatically mean an invasion is imminent; it does mean decision-space has narrowed because the U.S. is paying the cost to keep high-end assets forward.
What to watch in the next 7–14 days
- Any formal escalation language (White House / DoD) shifting from “counter-narcotics” to explicit regime-targeting.
- NOTAMs / airspace restrictions expanding around Puerto Rico/USVI/Caribbean corridors.
- More SEAD enablers (additional Growlers, stand-off jammers, or strike package massing).
- Special operations / boarding announcements tied to sanctions enforcement or tanker seizures.
- Venezuelan moves: air defense activation patterns, mobilization, or requests for external security support.
Venezuela: This Is Not Just About Maduro, This Is The Final Nail In The Coffin For The CIA-Black-Budget Narco Pipeline That Has Been Running Since The 80s
By James Howard Kunstler – All News Pipeline
“This isn’t just about Maduro. This is the final nail in the coffin for the CIA-black-budget narco pipeline that’s been running since the 80s.” —The Ghost of Ezra on “X”
You must wonder: what exactly has CIA Director John Ratcliffe been doing over in Langley, VA, lo these many months since things changed bigly in Swamptopia? Does he wander the hallways of that giant black box howling ineffectually. . . sit barricaded in his office playing sudoku. . . or is he doing what needs to be done: methodically uncovering and disassembling the diabolical racketeering operation that the agency has become?
One thing for sure: you have heard next to squat coming out of his mouth all year. Mr. Ratcliffe is playing a close hand in a dangerous game and I tend to think that he is for-real. Very few Americans know what really goes on backstage at the CIA, but just say they try to whack the director — that would be checkmate on them. The agency would not survive the arrests of its personnel. And, anyway, Mr. Trump is moving swiftly now to shut down the engine of its nefarious activities.
The CIA, you understand, is the beating heart of the Deep State (a.k.a. the blob). The Democratic Party and the Never-Trump RINOs are its errand boys. And that is why a ten-year-long coup has been running to smash Trump and Trumpism. “Joe Biden” was a piece of furniture thrown out of the truck that the CIA was driving to escape the scene of the crime. “Joe Biden” was under threat of blackmail the whole four years he haunted the Oval Office, having run his own petty racketeering operation to keep his miserable, extended, sick family in beach houses.
Mr. Trump is now striking at the apparatus of the CIA’s extra-constitutional power and influence: the election interference machinery that queers politics at home and abroad, and the drug cartel that furnishes the money to run CIA’s many black ops, finances the NGOs behind lawfare and gay-communist street action, and probably underlies many a congressional fortune. That is why the Gerald R. Ford aircraft carrier group is lurking offshore of Venezuela. That is why Venezuela’s airspace is shut-down, and why Nicolás Maduro is rumored to be fleeing to points unknown in his Gulfstream jet.
While you were carving your turkey, Mr. Trump was preparing to go medieval on Maduro’s $1.5-trillion Cartel del Sol operation, of which the Mexican cartels are mere subalterns, shoveling drugs into the demoralized US population ruined by the campaign that moved productive industry to China, and gainful employment with it. Mr. Trump hinted that US forces are going into Caracas “very soon” — apparently to seize the Smartmatic servers, cartel drug ledgers, and other evidence of long-running turpitude, and you have to wonder how many someones out of Langley, with names, titles, and offices will turn up in the mix.
Mr. Ratcliffe must know who they are by now. Some of them have been at it since the cowboy days of Mena, Arkansas, back when Bill Clinton was governor and the cocaine planes from Colombia were landing day after day on that little backwater airstrip. The cartels had to switch to boats lately, and we see how that’s been working out. Is it not amazing that Democratic Party mouthpieces object to Mr. Trump blowing them up? They’d rather see another ten thousand unemployed citizens die of fentanyl poisoning in Meigs County, Ohio.
The blob’s errand boys (and girls) in Congress made their lame diversionary move on November 18 with the “Seditious Six” video, an attempt to stir-up mutiny in the military ranks. It backfired badly. It looks like the Dept of War is going to make an example of Senator Mark (“the astronaut”) Kelly, because he was the only veteran among the six who served long enough to qualify for mandatory re-enlistment — and, thus, be subject to military justice, outside the control of blob-run DC federal district judges like “Jeb” Boasberg.
The “Seditious Six” organizer, Senator Elissa Slotkin (D-MI), an ex-CIA official, followed up on the mutiny video November 23 during an interview with ABC’s This Week show, saying she expected that national guard troops might soon shoot US citizens in “stressful situations.” Didn’t work out that way. Rather, three days later, a former CIA-run Afghani “refugee” drove all the way cross-country from Bellingham, WA, to shoot two national guard troops in their heads on a DC street the day before Thanksgiving. The CIA is supposed to track their assets. Who was tracking Rahmanullah Lakanwa? Maybe Elissa Slotkin can ask her old colleagues back in Langley and report back to the public.
Beneath all this surface huggermugger the ongoing coup against Trump and Trumpism still wriggles and rumbles. It looks like it’s going to blow now and spew debris all over the swamp. If John Ratcliffe has the names of CIA officers who have practiced “color revolution” against our country, he must have passed them on to DNI Tulsi Gabbard and, in turn, the president.
 |
| Lincoln assassination plotters at the gallows, July, 1865 |
Mr. Trump might consider treating them the same way that President Andrew Johnson treated the cabal behind the assassination of Abraham Lincoln. The eight defendants (minus John Wilkes Booth who was hunted down and shot in a Virginia barn) were tried by a nine-member military commission at the old DC arsenal. Four were hanged, three sentenced to life in prison, one to six years.
The CIA’s color revolution against the nation it’s supposed to serve is a much larger, farther-flung, sinister conspiracy than the plot to murder of Abe Lincoln. There could be dozens, scores of CIA officials in Langley who know what has been going on there. Maybe JFK was right back in 1963 when he said he wished to splinter the CIA in a thousand pieces and scatter it to the winds.
Earth Hit by Rare Solar Super-Flare: Atmospheric Radiation Spikes to Highest Level in Nearly 20 Years
Written for the Great Awakening Report
Radiation levels in Earth’s atmosphere surged to their highest point in almost two decades this November after a rare and extremely powerful solar super-flare struck the planet, blasting the atmosphere with high-speed particles unlike anything recorded since the early 2000s.
The event occurred on November 11, when an intense X5.1-class flare erupted from the volatile sunspot region AR4274. While the Sun has produced nearly 20 X-class flares so far this year—a sign of its approach toward peak activity in Solar Cycle 25—none matched the ferocity or unusual particle signature of this one.
A Flare Unlike Any Other in 2025
The November 11 flare wasn’t just bright—it was violent.
Most X-class solar flares release intense bursts of electromagnetic radiation, but only a small fraction eject streams of high-energy protons capable of penetrating deep into Earth’s magnetic field. This flare did exactly that, unleashing a proton storm that raced across space at near-relativistic speeds.
According to NOAA and ESA observers, the flare:
- Produced the strongest atmospheric radiation spike since ~2006
- Triggered HF radio blackouts across the Pacific
- Caused massive aurora outbursts visible as far south as Texas, Florida, Spain, and northern Africa
- Temporarily disrupted GPS accuracy
- Increased radiation exposure for air travelers and aviation crews
Researchers noted that while high-energy proton events are rare, the timing of this one—occurring during an already unstable solar environment—made it far more impactful.
A Global Radiation Response
Earth-based monitors registered the spike in real time, prompting rapid scientific response. Several space-weather research teams launched stratospheric balloons outfitted with radiation sensors to track how particle intensity evolved through the atmosphere.
These instruments climbed up to 120,000 feet, sampling radiation across multiple layers:
- Troposphere — minimal change
- Stratosphere — sharp increase in proton activity
- Ozone layer — measurable ionization
- Upper atmosphere — peak radiation levels not seen in nearly 20 years
- The balloon data confirmed that the proton stream penetrated far deeper into the atmosphere than typical solar events, energizing regions normally shielded by Earth’s magnetic field.
Why the November 11 Flare Was So Unusual
Scientists identified several key features that make this event one of the most significant of the century so far:
- Its speed: The proton storm reached Earth in under an hour—an extremely fast arrival time.
- Its direction: The flare was directed almost precisely at Earth—a “bullseye event.”
- Its particle energy: The stream contained a high proportion of >100 MeV protons, capable of penetrating spacecraft shielding.
- Its timing: Arrived during a period of magnetic turbulence, amplifying impact.
Solar physicists now believe the flare may mark the beginning of a high-activity window expected to intensify through 2025–2026.
Implications for Climate, Technology, and the Threshold Years Ahead
Solar radiation events can affect:
- Satellite systems
- Aviation radiation exposure
- Electrical grid stability
- Long-term atmospheric chemistry
- Ionospheric conditions influencing global communications
In addition, many researchers within the consciousness and Earth-energy communities have noted that strong solar events often coincide with periods of psychological, biological, and geopolitical turbulence—a concept long embedded in the Great Awakening and Threshold 2026 frameworks.
The November 11 event is now being watched as both a scientific and symbolic marker:
“This flare was a reminder that our star still holds the power to rewrite our technological and atmospheric assumptions.”
Additional high-intensity flares are expected as Solar Cycle 25 approaches its peak.
THE END OF FEDERAL INCOME TAX?
Trump Signals a Historic Break While IRS Authority Faces New Exposure
A seismic economic and legal shift may be unfolding simultaneously on two fronts:
a presidential declaration that federal income tax is nearing its end, and mounting evidence that the IRS lacks lawful regulatory authority over private citizens in the 50 states.
Together, these developments form one of the most explosive challenges to America’s financial control system in modern history.
TRUMP: “FEDERAL INCOME TAX WILL SOON BE HISTORY”
President Trump stunned reporters during a White House press gaggle when he announced that the United States is preparing to phase out federal income tax entirely.
Trump framed the shift as a return to economic sovereignty, funded not by taxing Americans but by tariff revenues collected from foreign nations:
“We don’t need to bleed hardworking Americans anymore. Tariffs are pouring in billions. America is no longer funding globalist giveaways — we’re putting America First.”
According to Modernity.news, the administration’s aggressive trade policies have already produced revenue streams large enough to reimagine the entire structure of federal finance.
The vision:
- Replace income tax with foreign tariff income
- Ignite an economic boom by freeing workers and businesses
- End the IRS as an enforcement arm over ordinary citizens
This is nothing short of a tax revolution — a structural recalibration of the American financial system.
But the timing is even more astonishing given what is emerging in parallel.
THE IRS: A SYSTEM WITHOUT LAWFUL FOUNDATION?
PTAR Documents Reveal No Regulatory Authority for IRS Enforcement
In a stunning revelation circulating among legal researchers and investigative analysts, the Parallel Table of Authorities and Rules (PTAR) — an official U.S. government document — appears to show that many of the IRS statutes used to prosecute Americans have no regulatory foundation whatsoever.
This means no delegation.
No jurisdiction.
No enforceable authority.
A breakdown of the evidence:
1. 26 USC §7203 — “Failure to File”
This is the statute used by the IRS to prosecute and intimidate millions of Americans.
But the PTAR shows:
- No regulation behind the statute
- No delegation of authority
- No jurisdiction over private citizens in the 50 states
Without regulatory implementation, a statute cannot be enforced.
2. 26 USC §7212 — “Obstruction of the IRS”
According to PTAR mapping, this statute only correlates to 27 CFR, which governs:
-
Alcohol
-
Tobacco
-
Firearms
In other words, IRS obstruction charges only apply to ATF-regulated industries — not ordinary Americans.
This is not a loophole.
This is structural deception.
THE BIGGER REVELATION: A SYSTEM BUILT ON PERCEPTION, NOT LAW
These discoveries point to a devastating conclusion:
The IRS system has relied on voluntary compliance, intimidation, and public ignorance—not lawful regulatory authority.
If accurate, it means millions of Americans have been persecuted through a framework that collapses the moment someone places the PTAR beside the Internal Revenue Code.
This raises profound questions:
- Was the income tax ever meant to apply to sovereign citizens?
- Has the U.S. population been subjected to financial servitude through misdirection?
- Is the entire tax structure now unraveling just as Trump prepares to eliminate income tax altogether?
The timing is not coincidence — it is convergence.
THE AWAKENING VIEW | Liberation From the Old Financial Grid
From a Great Awakening perspective, these two stories merge into a single theme:
Dissolution of the debt-tax slavery system.
For decades, Americans have been conditioned to believe income tax is inevitable, necessary, and lawful.
Now that illusion is cracking:
- The President signals the end of income tax
- The IRS’s legal foundation is exposed as hollow
- The public is awakening to the architecture of financial captivity
This is part of the broader global collapse of centralized institutions — the same pattern unfolding across banks, governments, media, intelligence agencies, and globalist systems.
The old order is weakening.
A new sovereign framework is emerging.
WHAT TO WATCH NEXT
1. White House announcements on tariff revenue allocation
We may soon see the formal blueprint replacing income tax.
2. IRS avoidance of PTAR discussions
Their silence will be revealing — they cannot legally refute the document.
3. Congressional resistance or support
The split will expose globalist vs. nationalist allegiances.
4. Public awakening to the tax deception
This may become a cultural flashpoint.
GAR SUMMARY
A historic convergence is underway:
A President declaring the end of federal income tax
and
official government documents revealing the IRS lacks lawful authority over U.S. citizens.
These threads point to the potential collapse of one of the core pillars of the control structure — the financial extraction system that has defined American life for over a century.
The awakening accelerates.
THE NEUTRINO BREAKTHROUGH: A NEW CLUE TO WHY ANYTHING EXISTS AT ALL
16 Years of Global Data Reveal the Sharpest Picture Ever of Matter’s Mysterious Survival
Scientists may have taken a major step toward answering one of the most profound questions in all of physics:
Why does the universe contain matter — and therefore stars, planets, life, and us — instead of vanishing in a flash of pure energy moments after the Big Bang?
A newly combined analysis from two of the world’s premier neutrino observatories — the NOvA experiment in the United States and T2K (Tokai-to-Kamioka) in Japan — has produced the most precise investigation yet into how neutrinos transform, or oscillate, as they travel across vast distances.
By pooling data collected over nearly 16 years, researchers have sharpened the search for tiny asymmetries between neutrinos and their antimatter counterparts. These asymmetries could be the key to understanding a cosmic imbalance that allowed matter to survive while antimatter disappeared.
Their findings were published Oct. 22 in Nature, marking a milestone in one of the most important scientific pursuits of our time.
THE COSMIC PARADOX: WHY DOES MATTER EXIST?
Physics tells us that matter and antimatter are created in equal amounts during high-energy processes such as the Big Bang.
But there’s a problem:
- Matter and antimatter annihilate each other instantly.
- If the early universe had been perfectly symmetric, nothing made of matter should have survived.
Instead, we observe a universe dominated by matter. Stars burn. Galaxies rotate. Life evolved.
This should not have happened under the standard rules of physics.
Something — some tiny asymmetry, some subtle preference — allowed matter to gain a slight advantage in the first fractions of a second after creation.
That tiny imbalance shaped everything.
This is one of the deepest unsolved mysteries in cosmology and particle physics.
WHY NEUTRINOS ARE THE PRIME SUSPECT
Neutrinos are the most ghostly, abundant, and least understood particles in existence:
- They pass through solid matter as if it were empty space.
- Trillions stream through your body every second.
- They oscillate between three “flavors” as they travel.
But what makes them scientifically electrifying is this:
Neutrinos may behave differently than antineutrinos.
If confirmed, this would violate a principle called CP symmetry — one of the universe’s foundational rules. Violating that rule could produce the tiny imbalance needed for matter to triumph over antimatter.
This is why neutrino experiments worldwide are trying to detect CP-violation signals with increasing precision.
WHAT NOvA + T2K ACHIEVED TOGETHER
By combining datasets from two massive long-baseline experiments —
-
NOvA (which fires a beam of neutrinos from Illinois to Minnesota)
-
T2K (which sends neutrinos from Japan’s east coast to the Kamioka mine)
— physicists created a global, unified analysis far more powerful than either experiment alone.
Key achievements:
1. Highest-precision measurement ever of neutrino oscillation patterns
This pinpoints how neutrinos shift between flavors (electron, muon, tau).
2. Sharpened constraints on CP-violation
The analysis narrows the range of possible values, pushing closer to detecting whether neutrinos truly break symmetry.
3. Improved understanding of mass ordering
One of the universe’s open questions:
Which neutrino is heavier, and does that ordering relate to the birth of matter?
WHY THIS MATTERS FOR THE ORIGIN OF EVERYTHING
If neutrinos violate CP symmetry even slightly — behaving differently from antineutrinos — then the early universe could have produced just enough matter to avoid total annihilation.
A tiny advantage. A fraction of a fraction of a percent. But enough to populate the cosmos.
The implications are enormous:
- It would explain why the universe is matter-dominated.
- It could point toward entirely new physics beyond the Standard Model.
- It may connect cosmology, quantum behavior, and the structure of spacetime itself.
This is not just a physics puzzle — it is the story of existence itself.
GAR PERSPECTIVE | The Quantum Awakening Layer
From an Awakening standpoint, this discovery touches the metaphysical frontier as well:
1. The universe is not symmetric — creation has a direction.
Matter’s survival may reflect deeper principles of consciousness, intention, or directional flow embedded in the cosmos.
2. Neutrinos behave like “messenger particles” of subtle reality.
Their ability to pass through everything, barely interacting, hints at structures beyond classical physics.
3. The imbalance that created the universe mirrors the imbalance awakening humanity today.
Just as the cosmos required a small asymmetry for creation, consciousness shifts through asymmetry — a spark of difference, a break in equilibrium.
The micro mirrors the macro.
WHAT COMES NEXT
The results set the stage for the next generation of experiments:
-
DUNE (U.S.) — which will produce the world’s most intense neutrino beam.
-
Hyper-Kamiokande (Japan) — a next-level underground detector.
These mega-projects aim to settle the CP-violation question once and for all.
If they confirm that neutrinos tilt the balance between matter and antimatter…
we will have uncovered the mechanism that made the universe possible.
RUSSIA SIGNALS ‘CASUS BELLI’ OVER EU ASSET SEIZURE
A Dangerous Line in the Sand as Europe Edges Toward Uncharted Territory
Russia issued its starkest warning yet on Thursday, declaring that any European Union move to seize or redirect frozen Russian assets could constitute a casus belli — a legal justification for war under international law.
The statement, delivered by former Russian president and current Deputy Secretary of the Russian Security Council Dmitry Medvedev, marks a dramatic escalation in the ongoing stand-off between Moscow and Brussels.
Speaking on the Russian social platform MAX, Medvedev condemned what he characterized as the EU’s “unhinged” plan to repurpose Russia’s immobilized sovereign assets held in Belgium — potentially through so-called “reparations credits” intended to support Ukraine.
Medvedev’s warning was unambiguous:
“If the unhinged European Union still attempts to steal Russian assets blocked in Belgium by issuing a so-called reparations credit, such actions under international law could be qualified as a special kind of casus belli, with all the ensuing consequences for Brussels and individual EU countries.”
He continued with an even more ominous threat:
“And then the return of these funds may occur not through a court, but through actual reparations, paid in kind by the defeated enemies of Russia.”
Medvedev’s language implies a chilling possibility — not merely legal retaliation, but military, economic, or territorial reparations imposed after a conflict, should the geopolitical trajectory continue its downward spiral.
WHAT THIS SIGNAL REALLY MEANS | Pattern Analysis
Russia has telegraphed similar warnings before — but this time, the phrasing “casus belli” signals a shift from posturing to pre-conditioning the information environment.
Key patterns emerging:
1. Russia is preparing the legal-political foundation for expanded conflict.
By invoking casus belli, Russia positions any asset seizure as a potential trigger for military action under the framework of international law.
2. The EU is crossing from sanctions into asset confiscation — a point of no return.
Seizing sovereign funds is historically viewed as an act of economic warfare. Very few precedents exist without follow-on military escalation.
3. Brussels is moving toward irreversible alignment with Washington.
The EU is no longer hedging; it is openly tying its financial and geopolitical fate to the United States’ strategic playbook against Moscow.
4. Russia’s leadership believes the West is overextended — and vulnerable.
Medvedev’s comment about “defeated enemies” reveals Moscow’s projection:
They believe the West is entering structural decline, making this the moment to harden red lines.
GEOPOLITICAL CONSEQUENCES | Why This Matters Now
➤ A Financial Shock Catalyst
Confiscating Russia’s frozen assets — estimated at $300+ billion — could trigger retaliation against Western financial interests abroad, including:
- seizure of Western corporate assets in Russia
- cyber operations targeting European banking infrastructure
- pressure campaigns on BRICS states to accelerate dollar de-risking
➤ A European Security Shock
Brussels is not prepared for a direct confrontation with Moscow, especially amid:
- depleted munitions stockpiles
- industrial capacity shortfalls
- rising political fragmentation across the EU
Yet Europe continues to escalate rhetorically and financially, cornering itself.
➤ A Narrative Shock
Russia is framing this issue as the West committing theft.
This bolsters Moscow’s moral positioning with:
- BRICS nations
- the Global South
- energy and commodity partners
It further isolates the EU in the world’s emerging multipolar order.
THE HIGHER FREQUENCY VIEW | Awakening Interpretation
This conflict is not just geopolitical — it is part of the broader system breakdown humanity is witnessing.
Medvedev’s declaration exemplifies:
- collapsing trust in global institutions
- the end of post-WWII financial norms
- the fragmentation of the old world order
- the accelerating move toward multipolar sovereignty
In the Awakening framework, this moment reflects the compression phase:
Systems push into contradiction, exposing hidden structures and forcing collective choice.
The EU’s move represents control, extraction, and desperation.
Russia’s response represents sovereignty assertion, force, and counter-narrative.
Neither side is aligned with higher consciousness — but both are catalysts for dissolving the old architecture.
WHAT TO WATCH NEXT
1. EU emergency finance meetings
If Brussels accelerates asset-reuse legislation, escalation becomes certain.
2. Russian countermeasures
Look for early, reversible steps:
- asset seizures
- diplomatic expulsions
- military repositioning near Kaliningrad or the Baltic region
3. BRICS statements
If BRICS condemns EU asset seizure, the West’s financial isolation intensifies.
4. NATO posture changes
Any shift to high-alert status signals Europe is preparing for a crisis.
GAR SUMMARY
Europe and Russia have crossed a dangerous threshold.
The potential seizure of Russian assets is not merely financial maneuvering — it is the spark that could ignite a broader confrontation, economically or militarily.
Medvedev’s warning is not bluster.
It is a line drawn.
A signal that the global order continues its destabilization cycle.
The Awakening lens sees this not as chaos for chaos’s sake —
but as a forced teardown of systems that cannot survive the emerging epoch.
We are watching the architecture of the old world fracture in real time.
OPENAI DECLARES “CODE RED” AS ALT MAN PIVOTS BACK TO CORE CHATGPT EXPERIENCE
AI Arms Race Intensifies as Google’s Gemini 3 Surges Ahead
OpenAI CEO Sam Altman has reportedly issued an internal “code red”, instructing teams across the company to halt or delay several upcoming initiatives and refocus entirely on strengthening ChatGPT’s core user experience — speed, reliability, personalization, and daily utility.
The strategic pivot comes in response to Google’s sudden resurgence in the AI race, following the release of its Gemini 3 model, which has been widely praised for outperforming rivals on industry benchmarks and delivering smoother multimodal performance.
According to reporting from CNBC, Google’s advantage is being fueled by two major developments:
1. A new generation of custom AI chips, codenamed Ironwood
These chips are designed to surpass Nvidia hardware on model training and inference efficiency — closing Google’s long-standing performance gap and giving it the ability to iterate models faster and cheaper.
2. Privileged access to the largest video corpus on Earth — the YouTube data library
In contrast, OpenAI’s training data access is increasingly constrained by litigation concerns, licensing costs, and publisher restrictions.
YouTube provides Google with:
- vast real-world visual data
- natural conversational patterns
- billions of hours of human speech to train multimodal reasoning
This has allowed Gemini 3 to rapidly accelerate toward human-like understanding — surprising even skeptics.
OPENAI’S RESPONSE: A PAUSE AND A RALLYING CRY
Altman’s “code red” directive reportedly freezes the rollout of several highly anticipated features:
- Pulse — a personal assistant designed to maintain memory over time and orchestrate daily tasks
- Shopping agents — autonomous tools to purchase items, compare options, and execute transactions
- Advertising integrations — including early prototypes of sponsored chatbot queries and enterprise marketing tools
These initiatives are now on hold while OpenAI re-centers its mission around a single objective:
Reclaim ChatGPT’s position as the most capable, most intuitive, and most widely used AI assistant on Earth.
The new focus includes:
- Faster response generation
- Fewer failures and timeouts
- Better long-term personalization
- Stronger memory and reasoning
- More natural, human-like multimodal interaction
Internally, employees described the atmosphere as “urgent but unified,” with the company acknowledging that the competitive landscape has fundamentally shifted.
THE BROADER PATTERN | GAR Analysis
OpenAI’s “code red” fits into a larger macro-pattern emerging across the technological and geopolitical landscape:
1. The centralized AI race is entering its next acceleration stage.
The gap between Google, OpenAI, Meta, and the open-source ecosystem is closing rapidly.
We’ve moved from innovation cycles measured in years
→ to cycles measured in months
→ now approaching cycles measured in weeks.
2. Compute sovereignty is becoming the new geopolitical battleground.
Google’s Ironwood chips, OpenAI’s dependence on Nvidia, and Apple’s growing AI stack all point to a future where control over silicon determines control over intelligence.
3. Proprietary datasets are becoming more valuable than oil.
YouTube is giving Google a training edge that cannot be replicated.
OpenAI’s lack of a similar monolithic dataset is now a strategic limitation.
4. Consumer AI is shifting toward “always-on assistants.”
Pulse, ReALM memory systems, and Gemini’s persistent agent layer all signal the same direction:
AI is moving from “chatbot that answers questions”
→ to “artificial life-layer that manages your world.”
THE AWAKENING VIEW | Consciousness Meets the Machine
At a higher level, the “code red” signals that humanity is entering the Compression Phase of the AI timeline — where exponential advancement converges with institutional instability.
This moment reflects:
- The collapse of old technological monopolies
- The rise of decentralized intelligence
- The acceleration of human–AI symbiosis
- The fracturing of narrative control over information
As AI systems become more capable — and more integrated with daily life — the battle over who controls these systems becomes existential.
In the Awakening context, this mirrors the collective tension between centralized power and decentralized consciousness.
OpenAI’s pivot is not simply competitive.
It is part of the broader architectural shift occurring across the global landscape:
The transition from 3D hierarchical systems
→ to 5D distributed, personalized intelligence networks.
WHAT TO WATCH NEXT
1. OpenAI’s Memory and Personalization Upgrades
If ChatGPT becomes truly persistent — remembering context, preferences, patterns — it becomes a new kind of cognitive partner.
2. Google’s next move after Gemini 3
A Gemini 3.5 or Gemini 4 release early in 2026 would escalate the arms race further.
3. Apple’s entry into deep AI models
Apple Intelligence is still early — but its device-level integration could change everything.
4. Regulatory and censorship pressures
Governments may intervene as AI begins to centralize unprecedented influence.
GAR SUMMARY
OpenAI’s internal “code red” is a significant inflection point in the global AI race.
The competition is no longer about novelty — it is about dominance, data, and the power to shape human behavior at scale.
Google’s resurgence has forced OpenAI to tighten its focus, sharpen its mission, and accelerate its timeline.
This moment marks the beginning of AI Phase 3:
Agentic Intelligence + Personalized Cognitive Systems,
the stage where AI becomes not a tool —
but an extension of human decision-making itself.
Humanity stands at the threshold, navigating a rapidly shifting technological architecture that mirrors the larger Awakening and Collapse cycle unfolding worldwide.
This Is How China Is Rapidly Becoming The World’s Most Dominant Economic Superpower
I don’t want China to be the world’s most dominant economic superpower. I am an American, and so I want the United States to be the world’s most dominant economic superpower. Unfortunately, the facts that I am about to share with you in this article cannot be denied. We consume far more than we produce, and we go into colossal amounts of debt in order to make that possible. Somehow we have convinced ourselves that this makes us an economic superpower. Meanwhile, the Chinese produce far more than they consume, and as a result they have far more money coming in than they do going out. This allows them to loan vast amounts of money to nations all over the planet, and that gives them tremendous economic leverage.
Despite everything that has happened this year, China has run a trade surplus of more than a trillion dollars for the first time ever in 2025…
China’s trade surplus roared above $1 trillion in November for the first time ever, despite the ongoing global trade war that has resulted in a steep drop in exports to the U.S.
In the first 11 months this year, China’s overall exports grew 5.4% compared to the same period in 2024 while imports fell 0.6%, taking its trade surplus to $1.076 trillion this year as of November, up 21.6% year on year.
This is what economic dominance looks like.
If you want to have a great economy, you have got to be great at making stuff. And China is better at making stuff than anyone else. China sells far more stuff to the rest of the world than it buys from the rest of the world, and that means that it has far more money coming in than it does going out.
This enables China to lend out vast amounts of cash. In fact, at this point the rest of the world owes China about 5 trillion dollars. It is often said that the borrower is the servant of the lender, and that is certainly true in this case. The primary reason why China sells so much stuff to the rest of the world is because they are able to make things very inexpensively…
“Put simply, China’s price competitiveness is extremely strong,” said Xu Tianchen, a senior economist for the Economist Intelligence Unit in Beijing. “The main reason behind the continued growth of China’s exports … is not … because the overall size of global trade has expanded, but because China is claiming a larger share of the existing trade landscape.”
For a long time, cheap human labor was China’s main competitive edge. But now Chinese factories are replacing human workers with ultra-efficient robots. In fact, today there are more robots working in China than the rest of the world combined.
Just think about that for a moment.
That is crazy. And the gap between China and the western world just continues to grow. If you can believe it, Chinese factories added almost 10 times as many robots last year as U.S. factories did…
China is the world’s most dominant power in automating its manufacturing — installing nearly 10 times as many robots in its factories as the United States, according to new data.
Last year, more than half a million industrial robots were put to work in global factories — with 54% of them in China alone.
According to the International Federation of Robotics, China, which is home to nearly a third of all global manufacturing capacity, installed 295,000 industrial robots, the highest annual total on record.
We are getting absolutely monkey-hammered by the Chinese.
Shockingly, the total number of robots that U.S. factories added last year was actually lower than the total number for the year before…
In the US, meanwhile, companies put to work just 34,200 robots last year, according to the World Robotics 2025 Report.
The 34,200 figure is 9% lower than the previous year, the report found.
Of course the Chinese are not just using more robots than anyone else.
They are also producing more robots than the rest of the planet combined…
The move comes as Beijing accelerates its broader industrial strategy to lead in advanced manufacturing, a key pillar of the “Made in China 2025” initiative. As bne IntelliNews reported, China now produces more industrial robots than the rest of the world combined, with domestic players rapidly gaining ground in both hardware and AI-driven control systems.
China is moving beyond being just the largest market for robots — it is becoming the core of global robot production. Chinese firms accounted for over 60% of global robot output in 2024, driven by subsidies, procurement programmes, and access to vast domestic datasets for training machine learning models.
Robots do not call in sick. Robots do not need to take breaks. Robots never complain. Robots do not need health plans. Robots don’t play around on the Internet when they should be working. Robots do not need to take vacations. Robots can work 24 hours a day. And many of the robots that the Chinese are now producing can actually recharge their own batteries.
How can human workers possibly compete? The Chinese can now make things at about a third of the cost that we can, and that gap is only going to get wider. When a group of top western executives recently visited China, they were “humbled” and “terrified” by what they witnessed…
Western automotive and green energy executives who visit China are returning humbled — and even terrified.
As The Telegraph reports, the executives are warning that the country’s heavily automated manufacturing industry could quickly leave Western nations behind, especially when it comes to electric vehicles.
“We are in a global competition with China, and it’s not just EVs,” Ford CEO Jim Farley told The Verge last month. “And if we lose this, we do not have a future at Ford.”
Many are hoping that winning the AI race will halt the decline of western economies. But that is far from certain.
Today, approximately 50 percent of the world’s AI researchers are in China. We have some really good AI researchers too, but without a doubt it is going to be a very competitive race. In fact, Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang created quite a firestorm of controversy when he recently stated that he believes that “China is going to win the AI race”…
Nvidia CEO Jensen Huang says Washington has lost its edge in artificial intelligence and warns that China will win the AI race. He cited the West’s cynicism, export controls, and favorable energy circumstances in China as the reason, claiming it is much easier for companies to access energy in the country.
The chief of the most valuable company in the world by market cap has long been saying that the U.S. ban on chip exports is a failure, and that the spread of its advanced semiconductors is vital for it to retain its competitive advantage globally. However, the ongoing trade war between the two powers has resulted in export bans of Blackwell chips from the White House on the one hand, and the CCP banning foreign AI chips from state-funded data centers on the other. Because of this, Nvidia’s market share in China has since dropped to basically zero, which probably led to Huang’s statement to the Financial Times.
“China is going to win the AI race,” Jensen commented. He also added that “we need more optimism,” saying that the West’s cynicism is holding it back.
Winning the AI race is going to require vast amounts of energy, and this is one of the reasons why China may have an edge.
Most Americans don’t even realize that China now produces approximately two and a half times as much energy as the United States does…
Meanwhile, China has dramatically expanded its energy output. The country now produces 2.5 times more power than the U.S., despite surpassing America only 15 years ago, Lord said.
“America can’t out-AI China if China out-powers us, so the U.S. must prioritize developing reliable power,” he said.
The Chinese are feverishly constructing more nuclear power facilities, and they are way ahead of us when it comes to clean nuclear energy research.
The bottom line is that we are in enormous trouble. We need to stop watching so much Netflix and start getting serious about competing with China.
In 2026, I expect our trade war with China to continue to heat up. And history has shown us that trade wars have a way of evolving into shooting wars. Let us hope that a military conflict with China can be avoided for as long as possible, because at this stage I don’t think that such a conflict would go well for us.
Because the Chinese have been rapidly modernizing their military as well. In just about every area, the Chinese are either catching up with us or have already surpassed us. Sadly, most Americans are so addicted to entertainment that they don’t even realize that this is happening.
THE ERUPTION THAT CHANGED HISTORY
How a Hidden 14th-Century Volcano Triggered Climate Shock, Famine, and the Black Death’s Deadly Arrival in Europe
New research reveals the unseen geological catalyst behind the greatest pandemic in human history.
Written for the Great Awakening Report
A groundbreaking study published in Communications Earth & Environment has uncovered compelling evidence that a massive, previously unidentified volcanic eruption around 1345 CE created a chain reaction that ultimately opened the door for the Black Death pandemic to devastate Europe.
The research shows that far from being a sudden biological invasion, the 14th-century plague was the final consequence of a “perfect storm” of interconnected forces: climate disruption, agricultural collapse, famine, and intensified trade routes. Together, they formed the environmental and geopolitical runway that allowed Yersinia pestis—the plague bacterium carried by fleas—to move from its natural reservoir in Central Asia into the heart of Europe.
A Silent Cataclysm: The Hidden Eruption of 1345
Tree-ring analysis from across the Northern Hemisphere has revealed the presence of “blue rings”—a rare indicator of sharply reduced growth caused by extreme cold. These rings pinpoint a dramatic climatic anomaly beginning in 1345, consistent with a large volcanic eruption ejecting aerosols high into the stratosphere.
While the specific volcano remains unidentified, the effects were unmistakable:
- Global cooling
- Disrupted rainfall patterns
- Repeated cold, wet summers across southern and central Europe
- Dramatic crop failures and food scarcity
This climate shock arrived at a moment when populations were growing and food reserves were already strained.
Famine and Desperation Reshape Mediterranean Trade
The frigid, rain-soaked summers destroyed wheat harvests in major European centers, including the influential Italian maritime republics. Facing mass hunger and political instability, city-states such as Genoa and Venice expanded their grain-import networks deeper into the Black Sea region, especially around the Crimean ports.
This shift in trade—driven by climate-induced necessity—became the crucial link connecting Europe to the plague’s endemic zones in Central Asia.
Merchant ships began to carry more than grain:
- Rodents from plague reservoirs
- Fleas infected with Y. pestis
- Highly mobile trade crews traveling between infected regions and European ports
What began as the struggle to feed starving populations became the pipeline that delivered a catastrophic pathogen to Europe’s shores.
The Perfect Storm Begins
As famine deepened, trade intensified. As trade intensified, exposure to plague reservoirs increased. By late 1346 and early 1347, outbreaks among Black Sea trading hubs triggered a biological chain reaction.
From Kaffa (Feodosia) on the Crimean Peninsula, plague-bearing ships sailed west. Their arrival in ports such as Messina, Genoa, and Venice ignited the pandemic that would eliminate one-third to one-half of Europe’s population over the following years.
The study highlights that the plague’s arrival was not random:
- Climate shock created famine
- Famine forced geopolitical and economic adaptation
- Adaptation unintentionally created new biological pathways
This convergence—climate, commerce, and disease—illustrates how deeply interconnected human and environmental systems were even in the medieval world.
A Blueprint for Understanding Modern Risks
Beyond its historical implications, the study serves as a modern warning. Climate disruption today can similarly reshape global trade routes, migration patterns, food security, and disease exposure. The 14th-century “perfect storm” may be a case study in how multiple stressors combine to produce civilization-shifting consequences.
The researchers conclude:
“The Black Death was not simply a biological event. It was the result of cascading environmental and human pressures—pressures that remain profoundly relevant today.”
Mysterious Interstellar Object 3I/ATLAS Accelerates Toward Jupiter — ESA Detects Unprecedented Velocity and Structure
Written for the Great Awakening Report
A new wave of data from the European Space Agency (ESA) has intensified scientific curiosity — and concern — around the interstellar object 3I/ATLAS, an unbound visitor traveling through the solar system at speeds ESA scientists describe as “significantly exceeding any human-made spacecraft.”
Unlike the first interstellar detections (ʻOumuamua in 2017 and comet 2I/Borisov in 2019), 3I/ATLAS displays behavior that is highly unusual for a natural object. Its trajectory remains hyperbolic, but the object’s velocity, stability, and evolving gas-plume signature have raised questions about its true nature.
A Critical Moment Hidden Behind the Sun
3I/ATLAS reached perihelion on October 29, 2025, passing within 202.9 million kilometers of the Sun. During this moment — potentially when the object was undergoing major thermal, chemical, or structural changes — it was completely occulted behind the Sun from Earth’s perspective.
This created a seven-day observational blackout during what may have been the most revealing moment of its solar encounter.
A Sudden Reappearance — Captured by ESA’s JUICE Spacecraft
Just one week later, ESA’s Jupiter Icy Moons Explorer (JUICE) — on its multi-year voyage to study Europa, Ganymede, and Callisto — happened to be in a geometry that allowed it to obtain the first new look at 3I/ATLAS as it emerged from solar occultation.
JUICE deployed five scientific instruments simultaneously, including:
- MAJIS (spectral imaging of the gas and dust plume)
- UVS ultraviolet spectrometer (signature of volatiles & charged particles)
- JANUS high-resolution optical imager
- SWI submillimeter wave instrument for thermal analysis
- RPWI radio & plasma wave detector
The spacecraft recorded the object sweeping past at a velocity analysts called “non-ballistic and unexpectedly persistent,” hinting at:
- unusual internal pressure or energy release
- an unconventional mass-to-area ratio
- possible asymmetric outgassing
- or something else not yet modeled
A Scientific Bottleneck — The Data Cannot Reach Earth Yet
Due to its current position relative to the Sun, JUICE is using its high-gain antenna as a heat shield — meaning the spacecraft is unable to transmit large volumes of data.
All raw readings from the flyby are being stored internally.
ESA confirmed that the scientific results will not reach Earth until February 2026, once the antenna can safely realign and resume full-power transmission. Until then, scientists — and the public — will be left waiting for answers.
What Makes 3I/ATLAS So Extraordinary?
Researchers highlight several anomalies:
- Velocity: Already surpassing speeds typical for naturally originating interstellar comets; acceleration remains unexplained.
- Direction & timing: Its inbound and outbound vectors align unusually close to Jupiter’s orbital plane.
- Plume morphology: Early spectral readings indicate a structured, not chaotic, gas-and-dust envelope.
- Brightness variance: The object’s luminosity fluctuates in discrete intervals instead of smooth natural curves.
While ESA is cautious, independent astrophysicists have noted similarities between 3I/ATLAS and earlier anomalous visitors such as ʻOumuamua, which also produced unexplained acceleration.
On Course Toward Jupiter — A Precise Encounter
If current trajectory models hold, 3I/ATLAS will pass through the Jovian system on a predictable, tightly defined date, suggesting a stability not common among loosely bound icy bodies.
Whether the object will be deflected, fragmented, or merely sail through Jupiter’s massive gravitational field remains unknown.
A Visitor From Deep Space — or Something More?
For now, 3I/ATLAS is classified as an interstellar object.
But its:
- speed,
- structure,
- plume behavior,
- and perfectly timed crossing near JUICE
have made it the most closely watched deep-space anomaly in years.
If February’s data confirms what early readings suggest, 3I/ATLAS may redefine our understanding of interstellar physics, comet dynamics — or the possibility of something more unconventional moving through our solar system.
Until then, the world waits.
Elon Musk Escalates Clash With Brussels, Calls for Dissolution of the EU After €120 Million Fine
Written for the Great Awakening Report
A fresh battle has erupted between tech mogul Elon Musk and European regulators after the European Commission imposed a €120 million ($163 million) fine on Musk’s social platform X, alleging violations of the Digital Services Act (DSA)—the EU’s sweeping 2022 law governing online content, platform transparency, and data access.
The Commission accused X of misleading users with its blue checkmark verification system, failing to provide adequate advertising transparency, and restricting researchers’ and authorities’ access to required platform data. Brussels framed the penalty as part of its broader mission to enforce accountability on “Very Large Online Platforms.”
But Musk responded with a direct political broadside.
In a rapid sequence of posts on Saturday, Musk condemned the move as evidence of a “regulatory overreach spiral” and argued that EU institutions had become unaccountable bureaucratic structures detached from democratic will.
He wrote:
“EU bureaucracy is slowly smothering Europe to death.”
Musk went further than he ever has, calling for the complete dissolution of the European Union, asserting that sovereign nations—not supranational technocracies—should govern digital policy and civil liberties:
“The EU should be abolished and sovereignty returned to individual countries, so that governments can better represent their people. The EU is a bureaucratic Monster.”
His comments immediately triggered a firestorm across Europe.
EU officials dismissed Musk’s remarks as “absurd,” arguing that the DSA is essential for combating disinformation, algorithmic abuse, and opaque platform practices. Critics countered that Musk is attempting to shield X from accountability under the guise of free speech advocacy.
Meanwhile, populist and Eurosceptic movements across several EU nations seized on Musk’s statements as validation of their long-standing concerns about centralized rule-making in Brussels.
The clash highlights a much deeper battle: the future of digital governance, national sovereignty, and the power balance between global tech titans and supranational regulators.
With additional DSA investigations underway—including potential multibillion-euro penalties—the conflict between Musk and the EU appears far from over.
“THE LAST FILE” HOLLYWOODS DARK SECRET
The Anne H. Investigation A Hollywood secrecy, and suppressed investigations of Child Human Trafficking Ring.
For months, fragments of Anne Heche’s previously suppressed documentary on child trafficking remained buried. The recovered footage shows her telling colleagues she knew she was being monitored. You can hear the urgency in her voice as she describes the classic signals: phones suddenly active… unknown cars following her… and those whispered warnings delivered with that cold, federal precision:
“You don’t know how far this goes. Stop digging.” But she didn’t stop. She followed the money, the contacts, the A-list connections. She was getting dangerously close to the heart of Hollywood’s darkest secret: the trafficking pipeline the elite desperately try to keep sealed. When you see key clips from that recovered footage, you can decide for yourself whether Anne Heche sensed her demise… or whether someone orchestrated it. The world is about to wake up. ~ The People’s Voice Community.
In this article, we explore what such a project might have uncovered—based on patterns historically seen in whistleblower cases, entertainment-industry scandals, and the uneasy intersection between fame, and institutional power.
A Whispered Warning
In the recovered transcripts, Anne speaks to colleagues about experiencing the telltale signs that investigative journalists and Hollywood truth-tellers have noted for decades:
- Phones activating by themselves
- Cars appearing repeatedly in her mirrors
- Conversations that felt scripted, almost federal in tone
- The repeated caution: “You don’t know how far this goes. Stop digging.”
These indicators have been documented historically in cases involving political dissidents, corporate whistleblowers, and journalists probing sensitive subjects.
Anne’s character in this narrative does not stop.
Following the Trail
Her investigation leads her deeper into the structural shadows around Hollywoods Human Trafficking Industry:
- Funding networks
- Private foundations
- Elite social circles that appear benign on the surface
- Rumors of exploitative systems buried beneath celebrity culture
The documentary-in-progress begins to map a hidden architecture of influence, the kind that resists accountability and survives through silence.
Her interviews include anonymized insiders, former assistants, and industry veterans who speak about:
- Gatekeepers
- The culture of compliance
- The cost of asking the wrong questions
The deeper she goes, the clearer her fear becomes in the footage:
“I can feel the walls moving. Someone is paying attention.”
The Vanishing Project
Within the narrative, fragments of the documentary disappear. Drives are wiped. Notes go missing. People stop returning calls.
Friends claim she believed she was approaching a threshold—one that some whistleblowers never cross safely.
The speculative question remains:
Did she sense the danger…
or did something else sense her?
A Symbol for a Broader Awakening
This fictionalized reconstruction is not truly about one actress—it is about a pattern:
- People who dig too deeply
- Systems that prefer silence
- Truths that frighten the powerful
- And a public beginning to awaken to what lies beneath glossy narratives
Whether inspired by real-world cases like Weinstein, Epstein, NXIVM, or political whistleblowers, this story symbolizes a collective confrontation with hidden child trafficking structures.
As the narrative concludes:
“The world wakes up one voice at a time—especially the voices they tried to silence.”
DeSantis Calls for an “AI Bill of Rights” as Concerns Over Tech Power Intensify
Written for the Great Awakening Report
Florida Governor Ron DeSantis has intensified the national conversation surrounding artificial intelligence by calling for an “AI Bill of Rights”—a legislative framework designed to protect American citizens from what he warns could become technologically enabled tyranny if left unchecked.
Speaking at a press conference earlier this week, DeSantis stressed that artificial intelligence, while transformative, must not be granted the cultural or political status of an unstoppable force exempt from democratic oversight. He rejected what he termed “AI exceptionalism”—the belief that artificial intelligence is destined to outgrow human governance and therefore should operate outside traditional regulatory boundaries.
A Warning Against Blind Tech Worship
DeSantis argued that some leaders, corporations, and technologists have embraced a narrative that AI will “solve every problem,” eliminating the need for human decision-makers in fields ranging from medicine to governance. This mentality, he warned, creates a dangerous precedent: once society accepts that machines know best, the door opens to a technocratic power structure where corporations, not elected leaders or voters, set the rules.
“We cannot fall into the trap of believing AI is some omnipotent solution to human weakness,” DeSantis said.
“There must be limits. There must be oversight. That is in the best interest of Florida—and the best interest of the United States.”
Protecting Citizens From Digital Overreach
DeSantis outlined multiple areas where he believes state and federal governments must act:
- Data Privacy: Citizens should have clear rights over how AI systems use, store, and analyze their personal information.
- Transparency: AI-driven decisions affecting employment, healthcare, law enforcement, or public services must be explainable—not hidden behind proprietary algorithms.
- Bias & Manipulation Safeguards: AI must not be weaponized to manipulate elections, censor political viewpoints, or create systemic biases that harm specific groups.
- Human Oversight: AI should assist—but never replace—human authority in core constitutional areas.
His proposed “AI Bill of Rights” would attempt to codify these protections, preventing corporations or governmental agencies from deploying advanced AI tools without public accountability.
A Counterpoint to Silicon Valley’s Agenda
DeSantis’ comments highlight the growing rift between elected officials and tech giants who see AI as an engine for economic expansion, automation, and unprecedented influence. Critics argue that unregulated AI development could empower companies to:
- Track citizens without consent
- Replace human labor at massive scale
- Shape public opinion
- Create self-learning systems with capabilities far beyond current oversight structures
Supporters of regulation claim these concerns are no longer theoretical—they are emerging realities.
A National Fault Line Emerging
As Washington remains divided over how to regulate AI, states like Florida are preparing to chart their own course. DeSantis’ proposal signals a growing bipartisan recognition that AI governance will be one of the defining policy battles of the next decade.
Whether the “AI Bill of Rights” becomes a national standard or a state-level initiative, it reflects a broader awakening: human sovereignty must be consciously defended in an era where technology evolves faster than law.
The Rise Of AI Christianity: A New Survey Discovers Nearly Two-Thirds Of Pastors Now Use Artificial Intelligence To Help Prepare Sermons
Artificial intelligence is rapidly transforming virtually every major institution in our society, and that even includes church. In the not too distant future, you may find yourself in a service where the songs have been written by AI, the prayers have been written by AI, and the sermon has been written by AI. I realize that this may sound like science fiction to many of you, but the truth is that many churches are already leaning very heavily on AI technology. In fact, one recent survey discovered that most pastors are now using AI tools to help prepare their sermons…
A majority of pastors are now using artificial intelligence to prepare their sermons, with ChatGPT and Grammarly reported as the top two AI tools, new survey data shows.
“ChatGPT is the most visible generative AI tool that can engage in human-like conversations and assist with a wide range of tasks, from answering questions to generating content,” researchers wrote in “The 2025 State of AI in the Church Survey Report” prepared by AiForChurchLeaders.com and Exponential AI NEXT.
Needless to say, most people that are listening to these pastors have no idea that they are using AI technology. And if nobody ever complains, they will just keep on doing it.
Personally, I had no idea that this had become so widespread. It is being reported that the survey actually found that almost two-thirds of all church leaders that prepare sermons “use AI tools in their sermon writing process”…
The data, based on responses from 594 pastors and church staff members, shows that church leaders are now more concerned about “the weighty ethical and practical considerations involved” in the use of AI as they continue their rapid embrace of the technology.
Nearly two-thirds of church leaders surveyed who prepare sermons say they use AI tools in their sermon writing process, the researchers note. “This suggests that AI is quickly becoming a key tool for pastors in their weekly message preparation,” they wrote.
You would have to be pretty lazy to ask ChatGPT to write a sermon for you. But even more important are the spiritual implications.
If pastors are relying on AI rather than God for their sermon ideas, what is being spiritually communicated to their flocks? The same thing applies to the AI-generated Christian music which is now popping up on the charts. Recently, an AI-generated “Christian artist” known as “Solomon Ray” went all the way to the top…
An AI-generated Christian artist named Solomon Ray has taken the gospel music world by storm after topping the iTunes and Billboard charts with his album “Faithful Soul.”
Described as a “Mississippi-made soul singer carrying a Southern soul revival into the present” on his Spotify profile, Ray made waves after releasing the five-song EP on Nov. 7.
The record rose to No. 1 on the iTunes Top 100 Christian and Gospel Albums chart within days, and two songs from the project – “Find Your Rest” and “Goodbye Temptation” – currently sit at No. 1 and No. 2 on Billboard’s Gospel Digital Song Sales chart, respectively.
The greatest Christian songs throughout history have been written by men and women that were being moved by God.
If God is not the spiritual source of Solomon Ray’s songs, where are they coming from? What we are witnessing is the rise of “AI Christianity”, and that should chill all of us to the core. Podcaster Joe Rogan is even suggesting that AI could be involved in the second coming of Jesus Christ…
The prophesied Second Coming of Jesus Christ may be triggered by an advanced, God-like computer, according to the world’s most famous podcast host. Joe Rogan recently told the American Alchemy podcast that AI-powered machines could one day have a ‘virgin birth,’ creating advanced robots, or ‘offspring,’ capable of performing real-world miracles using technology.
‘Jesus is born out of a virgin mother. What’s more virgin than a computer?’ Rogan told podcast host Jesse Michels during the interview released on Sunday. ‘So if you’re going to get the most brilliant, loving, powerful person that gives us advice and can show us how to live, to be in sync with God, who better than artificial intelligence to do that?’
Really?
Has Joe Rogan totally lost it?
AI is not the savior of humanity.
Jesus Christ is the savior of humanity, and we need leaders that are willing to preach that message with authenticity and passion. In a time when there is so much that is fake all around us, people are searching for what is real. In Atlanta, Philip Anthony Mitchell of 2819 Church is getting a lot of attention for the fiery sermons that he delivers…
After spirited prayers and songs leave many crying, Mitchell ambles onstage in his all-black uniform, sometimes in quiet contemplation or tears, before launching into a fiery sermon. His messages, unpolished and laden with challenges to revere God and live better, often spread quickly online. A recent prayer event drew far more people than State Farm Arena could handle, with many flying in.
Crying, shouting, storming across the platform and punching the air, Mitchell preaches with his whole body — and an urgency to bring people to faith before they die or what he calls Jesus’ impending return to Earth.
“It is life or death for me,” Mitchell told The Associated Press, comparing preaching to the front lines of war. “There are souls that are hanging in the balance. … I think about the fact that in that room somebody might hear the Gospel, and that might be their last opportunity.”
How often do you hear preachers talk like that these days?
Mitchell does not use AI to write his sermons for him. In fact, he doesn’t use any prepared notes at all…
Mitchell spent 10 years preaching, racking up unfruitful notes from church growth conferences, and eventually started struggling with depression. During that time, he took a transformative trip to Israel where he said encounters with God and other Christians changed him. Then, in 2023, he changed the church’s name to 2819.
Mitchell, who has spent three years preaching just from the Book of Matthew alone, said God told him to preach without bringing prepared notes onstage. Although he attended Bible college, he sometimes doubts himself because of his past.
Mitchell is not shy about addressing his very troubled past that included paying for abortions and dealing drugs.
God delivered him out of all of that, and now he is trying to shine a light as brightly as he can. It is working, because at this point 2819 Church has more people than they can handle…
The church recently moved into its own building, having outgrown the charter school where they held the services, and added a third one. On the first two Sundays at the new location, they added an impromptu fourth gathering because so many people came.
The staff faced similar conundrums at Access, the church’s October prayer event that drew an estimated 40,000 people. State Farm Arena was filled to capacity, as was an overflow space in a nearby convention center, leaving thousands outside, the church reported.
AI sermons and AI songs aren’t going to bring revival to this country.
What will bring revival is authentic preaching of the gospel. And the good news is that it appears that the proportion of the U.S. population that identifies as Christian is no longer falling…
Now, the first Pew Religious Landscape Study in 10 years, released in February 2025, puts real statistics to the stories of growth in faith.
The study found that the number of U.S. adults who identify as Christian is no longer dropping. It has stayed steady at 62% since 2019, and the rise of the “nones” — those who mark “none” when asked their religious affiliation — has stopped. Let’s hope that we can get that number to start to go up again. But it won’t be easy.
There is so much confusion in our society today. Artificial intelligence is certainly contributing significantly to all of that confusion. That is why we must speak the truth with great clarity and great conviction. It is so hard to break through all of the noise in this day and age. But we can’t give up, because the fate of billions of people hangs in the balance.
U.S.–Venezuela War Posture Intensifies: Clear Indicators Washington Is Preparing for Pre-Strike Operations
A cascade of synchronized geopolitical and military signals now suggests that the United States may be positioning itself to initiate targeted strikes against Venezuela, potentially aimed at destabilizing or removing the Maduro government. Individually, each development is notable. Taken together, they indicate a rapidly tightening pre-conflict environment across the Caribbean and northern South America.
1. USS Gerald R. Ford Goes Dark and Redeploys
The sudden maneuvering of the USS Gerald R. Ford, the most advanced aircraft carrier in the U.S. fleet, is the strongest indicator yet that a kinetic operation may be imminent.
- After completing a resupply stop near St. Thomas, the Gerald Ford abruptly turned out toward open sea.
- Her AIS (Automated Identification System) transponder went offline—standard procedure for warships entering potential combat posture.
- The last confirmed AIS ping was recorded on December 1, meaning the carrier may now be operating in EMCON (emissions control) mode to reduce detectability.
Military analysts note that the Ford’s operating area—the southern Caribbean—is the staging ground typically used for rapid-strike operations into northern South America.
2. Erdogan’s Call to Maduro Signals Backchannel Pressure
In a move that raised eyebrows globally, President Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, who maintains a warm strategic alignment with Donald Trump, personally phoned Nicolás Maduro.
Reports indicate Erdoğan urged Maduro to keep diplomatic channels open with Washington.
This suggests:
- U.S. allies may be preparing Maduro for a set of ultimatums,
- or attempting to prevent escalation if strikes are already being planned.
Either interpretation indicates active geopolitical positioning, not routine diplomacy.
3. Trump Amplifies Call for Action
Donald Trump reshared a Fox News analysis asserting that a U.S. strike on Venezuela should send a clear warning to Vladimir Putin.
This is highly unusual for a former president unless he is:
- signaling political support for imminent military action,
- aligning himself with the narrative before events unfold,
- or reflecting intelligence briefings not yet public.
Trump’s consistent pattern is to telegraph geopolitical moves weeks before they occur.
4. Peru Opens Its Territory to U.S. Forces—With Heavy Weapons
The Peruvian Congress approved a resolution allowing U.S. military personnel to enter the country armed with war-grade weaponry.
Though Peru does not border Venezuela directly, it serves as:
- a forward logistical hub,
- an air corridor for surveillance operations,
- a staging ground for special forces insertion routes.
This level of authorization is rarely granted unless coordinated with a broader regional plan.
5. The Carrier Strike Group’s Return to the Southern Caribbean
After resupply, the Gerald Ford Carrier Strike Group has repositioned southward—closer to Venezuelan airspace and maritime approaches.
This is consistent with:
- Phase Zero preparation,
- Pre-strike ISR (intelligence, surveillance, reconnaissance),
- and establishing operational dominance in the theater.
Carrier strike groups do not casually return to a high-tension zone unless a directive is in motion.
What This Signals: Phase One of a U.S. Operation May Be Imminent
These coordinated moves suggest the U.S. may be preparing to initiate Phase One kinetic operations, likely beginning with:
- Suppression of Venezuelan air defenses (SEAD)
- Precision strikes on military infrastructure
- Disruption of command-and-control centers
- Maritime blockade enforcement
The Biden administration’s silence—and the Pentagon’s refusal to comment on carrier movement—further underscores the gravity.
This is not political theater.
It is the architecture of a real-world military escalation.
Bill Gates, Larry Fink plan bioweapons attack after Jean Michel de Rothschild returns from China empty handed
By Benjamin Fulford December 8, 2025
Some sort of military clash and hard landing is coming as the Khazarian Mafia refuses to hand over power peacefully. The biggest threat is Larry Fink and Bill Gates planning a major bioweapons attack in 2026, which they will try to blame on China, according to US military intelligence. This comes as their boss, Jean Michel de Rothschild, cross-dressing as Brigitte Macron, returned empty- handed from a begging mission to China.
The Chinese are now saying, “The situation in East Asia is changing every day. If things continue on this path, some sort of regional war in East Asia is now likely. We will take whatever action is necessary.”
What happened is de Rothschild managed to temporarily take over the Japanese government and make it threaten war against China over Taiwan. He then visited China, hoping to use the threat of war over Taiwan as a card to get the Chinese to bail out France by buying 500 Airbus jets, according to P3 Freemason and Asian secret society sources. He also asked China to force Russia to stop attacking energy infrastructure in Ukraine. The Chinese were infuriated and told him he came on false pretenses and gave him 24 hours to leave the country.
Here is how Polish intelligence summarized de Rothschilds’ visit:
“The EU runs a €300 billion annual deficit with China. France alone: €20 billion in the red. China now represents 46% of France’s total trade gap. And yet: No breakthrough on EV tariffs. No resolution on rare earths. No Airbus mega-order. So, what did Beijing actually buy? A photograph. A signal. A crack in the Western facade wide enough to drive a wedge through. Macron wants strategic autonomy. Xi wants a fractured Atlantic.”
The public announcement was “China, together with France…is capable of driving reforms in international institutions to make them more just and representative…”
To me, that translates as “the Rothschilds need to hand over control.”
Polish intelligence says de Rothschild or “Macron” told Chinese President Xi Jinping, “One of the problems for Ukraine in this war is that they do not know when Russia will strike and cannot prepare adequately. Russia needs clear strike schedules.” Think about that for a minute: “clear strike schedules” as if fake war is OK, but it needs to go with both sides acting according to the same script. This is insanity.
The fact is, Ukraine will not be able to last through the winter because of Russian attacks on its infrastructure. In fact, as we shall see below, regime change has already come to Ukraine.
France may also not last. According to French Intelligence, the French government is now headed for bankruptcy because it has $300 billion in bonds coming due by March and no way to roll them over. They were hoping to use $50 billion or so from Airbus sales to do that. The French intelligence sources now expect some kind of violent government overthrow in 2026.
The other thing that happened, and this is nowhere in the Western news, is that China sent aid to Gaza and told the Israelis that Israel would be completely destroyed as a country if they did not let the aid go through. British intelligence said the Israelis wisely stood aside and let the aid be delivered.
The Most Important Monetary Shift of the 21st Century, And Nobody Is Talking About It
A fully traceable sequence of geopolitical, financial, and market events reveals a new global reserve structure being built outside the US dollar. When Shanghai Trading Opens tonight, it __should__ become clear.
After Western sanctions in 2022, India–Russia oil trade exploded, reaching record levels ($52–67B annually). But there was a huge problem: India tried paying Russia in India National Rupee (INR), and Russia rejected it. Why? Because INR is not convertible internationally. Russia called it “pointless outside India” in May 2023.
With $40B+ stuck in Indian banks, Russia faced a crisis: Couldn’t repatriate INR. Couldn’t convert to USD due to sanctions. Couldn’t spend INR inside India, so it needed a store-of-value escape hatch. This was the beginning of a silent monetary revolution.
India shifted to paying Russia in AED (UAE Dirhams), and CNY( Chinese yuan). Why AED? Because AED is liquid, freely convertible, and strategically important: China needs AED to buy Gulf oil. UAE is the new neutral clearing hub. Russia can exchange AED without touching United States Dollar (USD) networks. This created a new settlement loop:photo
India to Russia to China to United Arab Emirates, and back to India. No USD involved.
And here’s the breakthrough discovery: From July 2024, something shocking appeared on the charts: Silver began moving tick-for-tick with the INR/CNY exchange rate.
This correlation has never existed in history. Silver detached from COMEX pricing and started tracking settlement currency flows. That is a signal of sovereign accumulation, not investor speculation.
Why would silver suddenly track INR/CNY? Because here’s the mechanism:
India buys oil → pays Russia in AED. Russia converts AED → CNY. China wants AED for Gulf oil. Russia uses CNY to buy physical Silver from China. Silver becomes the reserve asset storing value from India–Russia trade outside the USD system. This is the missing link no analyst has seen.
And what did India do when this began? On July 23, 2024, India suddenly slashed silver import duty from 15% to 6% — at the exact time the INR/CNY-Silver correlation emerged.
Why make silver cheaper when prices are exploding globally? Because India wants domestic silver accumulation as a hedge. Government policy moves don’t lie.
Then came the final confirmation:
In late September 2024, Russia released its 2025–2027 federal budget: For the first time in Russian history, the government officially allocated funds for purchasing Critical minerals; silver will be there by default.
Folks . . . . . . . . . Silver is now a sovereign reserve asset !!!!!!!! Here. Look:
The global financial system is undergoing a silent reset. Old paradigms: USD = Oil Gold = Reserve Metal New architecture: AED/CNY = Settlement, Silver = Reserve Asset / Collateral
Silver just crossed from commodity to monetary reserve foundation.
The world hasn’t realized it yet. This is why Silver is exploding. Not because of retail hype. Not because of solar panels. Not because of inflation. Silver is being monetized by the state-level players outside the USD system. Russia, China, and India just changed the future of money. And they did it BECAUSE the U.S. abuses them – and everyone else — with economic sanctions. America did this to itself!
When nations start stockpiling an asset quietly, before the public understands its purpose, the revaluation is violent. Most analysts will wake up when Silver is already 3–5× higher. This is the biggest geopolitical monetary shift since 1971. You’re not early. You’re right on time.
Watch the price of Silver when Shanghai opens tonight. I suspect you will see physical Silver cross the $60 per ounce threshold forever.
11 Signs That Our World Is Rapidly Becoming A Lot More Orwellian
All over the globe, the digital control grid that we are all living in just continues to get even tighter. They are using facial recognition technology to scan our faces, they are using license plate readers to track where we travel, they are systematically monitoring the conversations that we are having on our phones, and they are watching literally everything that we post on social media. At this stage, many of us just assume that nothing that we do or say is ever truly private. We really do live in a “Big Brother society”, and the potential for tyranny is off the charts. In fact, people are already getting arrested for “thought crimes” all over the world. If we do not take a stand now, someday soon we could wake up in a world where there is essentially no freedom left at all.
The exponential growth of AI technology is allowing authorities to watch, track, monitor and control us like never before. If you are not alarmed by this, you might want to check if you are still alive. The following are 11 signs that our world is rapidly becoming a lot more Orwellian…
#1 UK authorities are rolling out “a country-wide facial recognition system” that will use AI facial recognition cameras to watch the entire population…
On Thursday, officials in the UK pledged to roll out a country-wide facial recognition system to help police track down criminals. The country’s ministers have launched a 10-week consultation to analyze the regulatory and privacy framework of their AI-powered surveillance panopticon — but one way or another, the all-seeing eye is on its way.
There’s just one tiny wrinkle: the AI facial recognition cameras have a tendency to misidentify non-white people.
New reporting by The Guardian notes that testing of the AI tech conducted by the National Physical Laboratory (NPL) found that it‘s “more likely to incorrectly include some demographic groups in its search results” — specifically Black and Asian people.
#2 Of course the control freaks in the UK also monitor everything that gets posted on social media. One British man recently found this out the hard way when he was arrested for posing with a legally-owned gun in the United States…
A Yorkshire man was arrested over a photo he posted on social media featuring him holding a legally owned gun in the US. Jon Richelieu-Booth posted a photo of himself in August holding a gun on LinkedIn while he was on a holiday in Florida. He said he held the firearm lawfully, on private land and with full permission from its owner.
#3 If you do not believe that “thought crime” is real, just consider this next example. 11 police officers recently barged in and arrested a 34-year-old woman that was sitting naked in her own bathtub because she used offensive words while texting another woman on her phone…
The United Kingdom has become an authoritarian nightmare, and the United States must remain vigilant if it does not want to go down the same course. Elizabeth Kinney, a 34-year-old care assistant, was naked in the bathtub when 11 police officers barged into her home to arrest her. Her crime was sending insults to another woman via text.
How would you feel if 11 police officers were staring at you while you were naked?
As she was being informed that she had engaged in “malicious communications”, tears started flowing from Kinney’s eyes…
Kinney burst into tears as male officers denied her any privacy, and a female officer informed her that she was being arrested for “malicious communications and hate crime.” “The Crown place this offense in the highest category of its type due to the effect related to sexual orientation and the greater harm because it had moderate impact,” prosecutors insisted. Kinney faced ten years in prison, but her attorney begged for leniency. She has been ordered to perform seventy-two hours of community service, attend ten days of rehabilitation, and pay a fine of several hundred pounds.
#4 French President Emmanuel Macron wants the power to determine which media outlets will be allowed to speak to the public and which media outlets will be silenced…
Macron has in the last weeks intensified warnings on the risks of disinformation, on Friday calling for changes to French legislation that would allow “false information” online to be urgently blocked.
He has also called for “professional certification” of outlets to distinguish sites and networks that provide reliable information according to ethical rules from others that do not. But at the weekend, the Journal du Dimanche Sunday newspaper, part of the influential media stable of right-wing tycoon Vincent Bollore, accused Macron in a front-page story of a “totalitarian drift” on the issue.
#5 Because he is a champion of free speech, the EU has been coming after Elon Musk for years. So it shouldn’t surprise any of us that the European Commission just fined his company 140 million dollars for supposed violations of the Digital Services Act…
The European Commission has issued a $140 million fine to Elon Musk’s X for violating the EU’s controversial Digital Services Act (DSA). The fine is likely to escalate tensions between the EU and America over free speech online.
Bloomberg reports that the European Commission has imposed a €120 million ($140 million) fine on X, Elon Musk’s social media platform, for breaching the EU’s Digital Services Act (DSA). This marks the first penalty issued under the new censorship law, which aims to regulate online platforms and “protect” users from illegal content and disinformation.
#6 In recent years, we have seen so many controversial voices suddenly have their bank accounts shut down. Shockingly, JPMorgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon is now publicly admitting that his company does “debank” people…
As JPMorgan Chase Bank is under investigation by the state of Florida for alleged coordination with the Biden Department of Justice and Operation Arctic Frost, the chairman of the company is admitting to debanking certain customers, but says it has nothing to do with their political or religious affiliations.
“We do debank them,” said JPMorgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon who appeared on “Sunday Morning Futures” with Maria Bartiromo on the Fox News Channel. “People have to grow up here and stop making up things and stuff like that. I can’t talk about an individual account.
#7 India wants to require that phone location services are always on so that the government can track people through their phones wherever they go…
You know what they say: If at first you don’t succeed at mass government surveillance, try, try again. Only two days after India backpedaled on its plan to force smartphone makers to preinstall a state-run “cybersecurity” app, Reuters reports that the country is back at it. It’s said to be considering a telecom industry proposal with another draconian requirement. This one would require smartphone makers to enable always-on satellite-based location tracking (Assisted GPS).
The measure would require location services to remain on at all times, with no option to switch them off. The telecom industry also wants phone makers to disable notifications that alert users when their carriers have accessed their location. According to Reuters, India’s home ministry was set to meet with smartphone industry executives on Friday, but the meeting was postponed.
#8 A journalist in the Netherlands has tested AI-powered glasses “that can instantly identify strangers on the street”…
A Dutch journalist just tested a pair of AI-powered glasses that can instantly identify strangers on the street. No government database. No police system. Just public data and off-the-shelf AI. You look at someone and in seconds, their name, LinkedIn, and background appear before your eyes.
The scariest part? You can’t really stop it. You can ban it, regulate it, add blinking red lights… but once tech like this exists, someone will always find a way to use it.
Once these sorts of devices become widely available, there will be nowhere to run and nowhere to hide.
#9 A nationwide digital ID is being introduced in the UK, and soon you will not be able to get a new job without one…
Once introduced, digital ID will be used to verify a person’s right to live and work in the UK. It will take the form of an app-based system, stored on smartphones in a similar way to the NHS App or digital bank cards.
The ID will include information on the holders’ residency status, name, date of birth, nationality and their photo. When he first announced the scheme, Sir Keir said: “You will not be able to work in the United Kingdom if you do not have digital ID. It’s as simple as that.”
#10 The digital ID program in France “is moving from pilot to scale”…
France’s national digital identity app, France Identité, has enabled the creation of more than 3.2 million digital IDs, according to new figures.
Among these, approximately 525,000 identities have been fully certified, meaning that users have completed an in-person verification process at their local town halls. This means that more than half a million French digital IDs are ready for the EU Digital Identity (EUDI) Wallet, according to Joerg Lenz, head of marketing at Namirial Group.
“France Identité is moving from pilot to scale,” Lenz wrote on LinkedIn, following the TRUSTECH Event held in Paris on Wednesday.
#11 In Illinois, there is such overwhelming demand for digital IDs that some people are being forced to wait…
Mobile IDs became available in Illinois on Wednesday, but due to the high demand, some residents are finding themselves waiting a little bit longer.
A number of residents trying to download the digital ID to their Apple wallet received the following message: “Due to the high volume, your state’s service is currently busy.” Users can then answer the question, “Do you want to be notified when it becomes available?”
This is where the entire world is heading. As the Big Brother control grid gets tighter and tighter, the stage is being set for unprecedented tyranny on a global scale. Tyrants of the past could only dream of having the sort of AI-powered tools that we possess today.
If you do not submit to the digital gulag that is being constructed all around us, eventually you may not be able to buy, sell, get a job or open a bank account without proper digital identification. What would you do then? You might want to start thinking about that, because things are only going to get crazier from here.
The Banks Just Lost Control of Silver — The Panic Is Spreading
Source: YouTube – “The Banks Just Lost Control of Silver — The Panic Is Spreading”
For decades, the global silver market has been dominated by a small handful of bullion banks using leveraged futures contracts and naked shorts to artificially suppress spot prices. But that long-standing structure is now breaking apart. According to recent analysis (source video), the banks’ ability to control price through paper mechanisms has collapsed under the weight of physical demand, structural shortages, and the shifting geopolitical landscape. What began as a quiet decoupling between paper silver and physical bullion is now accelerating into a full-scale divergence that even the central banks can no longer hide.
The video highlights a critical inflection point: industrial buyers, sovereign accumulators, and retail investors are all competing for a shrinking pool of deliverable silver. Warehouse stocks on the COMEX and LBMA have been falling for months, with the ratio of derivatives to real metal reaching unprecedented extremes. As the report explains, the banking system can manipulate futures prices when confidence remains intact — but once confidence cracks and investors demand physical metal instead of digital promises, the paper system spirals out of control. The banks have now entered this phase, forced to cover short positions at rising prices while simultaneously facing dwindling inventories.
Compounding the crisis is a global macro shift that favors hard assets over financial promises. From BRICS nations establishing commodity-backed settlement systems, to U.S. investors pulling funds out of weakening equities, to the explosive growth of solar, EV, and battery manufacturing, silver demand is rising across all sectors while supply continues to tighten. The source video argues that this creates a “panic feedback loop” — industrial users hoard, sovereigns accumulate, retail drains remaining inventories, and banks scramble to unwind positions they can no longer roll over. Once the banks lose control of price discovery, the real physical market asserts itself.
What we are witnessing is not a temporary fluctuation — it is a structural breakdown of the paper silver system. The banks’ decades-long strategy of artificially managing the price has collided with the laws of supply and demand. As physical market pressure grows, liquidity evaporates, and confidence in the futures-based pricing mechanism collapses, we enter a new phase where silver begins to reprice toward its real-world value. The video notes that insiders are preparing for a violent upward repricing event — not a gradual climb, but a discontinuous break in the chart, signaling the failure of suppression.
If the trend continues, silver could become the first major commodity to openly expose the fragility of Western financial engineering. What began as a quiet divergence is now becoming a global panic as investors realize the banks no longer have the leverage, inventory, or credibility to control the market. In a world where trust in institutions is eroding, silver may be the first domino to fall — and its revaluation could reshuffle global wealth, industrial stability, and monetary power in ways most analysts still refuse to acknowledge.
Pressure Grows on ‘Reckless’ Hegseth as Twin Scandals Engulf Pentagon Chief
Defense secretary defiant but allegations of war crimes and blistering watchdog report increase calls for him to go
Pete Hegseth is facing the most serious crisis of his tenure as defense secretary, engulfed by allegations of war crimes in the Caribbean and a blistering inspector general report accusing him of mishandling classified military intelligence. Yet despite the long list of trouble and as lawmakers from both parties call for his resignation, Hegseth shows no signs of stepping down and still holds Donald Trump’s support.
The twin crises have engulfed the former Fox News personality in separate but overlapping allegations that lawmakers, policy experts and former officials say reveal a pattern of dangerous recklessness at the helm of the Pentagon. Democratic legislators have reignited calls for his ouster after revelations that survivors clinging to wreckage from a September boat strike were deliberately killed in a “double-tap” attack, while a defense department investigation released on Thursday concluded he violated Pentagon policies by sharing sensitive details via the Signal messaging app hours before airstrikes in Yemen.
The most recent controversy comes as the Caribbean campaign centers on the Trump administration’s extrajudicial strikes against suspected drug smugglers, which have killed at least 87 people across 22 attacks since September. Trump has justified the operation as essential to combating fentanyl trafficking, claiming each destroyed vessel saves 25,000 American lives, though factcheckers, former officials and drug policy experts have called this figure absurd, noting that fentanyl primarily enters the United States overland from Mexico, not via Caribbean boats from Venezuela.
The legality of the strikes came under intense scrutiny after the public learned that two men who survived the initial 2 September attack could been seen amid the wreckage when a lethal follow-up strike was ordered. While Hegseth initially dismissed the reporting as fabricated, he later confirmed the basic facts during a cabinet meeting this week, saying he acted in the “fog of war” but “didn’t stick around” to observe the rest of the mission.
Senator Patty Murray, the Democratic vice-chair of the Senate appropriations committee, called for Hegseth’s firing following a bipartisan briefing on the incident on Thursday. “Between overseeing this campaign in the Caribbean, risking US servicemembers’ lives by sharing war plans on Signal, and so much else, it could not be more obvious that Secretary Hegseth is unfit for the role, and it is past time for him to go,” Murray said.
The New Democrat Coalition, the largest Democratic caucus in the House with 116 members who describe themselves as fiscally moderate and pro-innovation, issued their own statement calling Hegseth “incompetent, reckless, and a threat to the lives of the men and women who serve in the armed forces”. The Coalition chair, Brad Schneider, and national security working group chair, Gil Cisneros, accused the defense secretary of lying, deflecting and scapegoating subordinates while refusing to take accountability. “Time and time again, the secretary has lied, dodged, deflected, and shockingly scapegoated his subordinates,” they said. “He is a disgrace to the office he holds and should resign immediately before his actions cost American lives.”
The strategic logic of the Caribbean campaign has drawn criticism even from those with experience in the US government’s counter-narcotics efforts. Jake Braun, who served as acting principal deputy national cyber director in the Joe Biden White House and as senior counselor to the secretary of homeland security where he helped design and implement the nation’s first counter-fentanyl strategy, questioned why the administration was focusing military resources in the Caribbean rather than on primary trafficking routes.
“I think the use of military force is justified – it just seems they’re about 2,500 miles away from the primary target in Mexico,” Braun said. “If they want to stop fentanyl, I would focus more on tunnels and drones in Arizona rather than boats in the Caribbean.”
Emily Tripp, executive director of Airwars, a civilian harms watchdog that monitors military conflicts, called on the administration to be more transparent about the strike, saying the organization would like to know “what considerations are made around shipwrecked survivors, and why the use of force was chosen over search and rescue when as far as we understand the targets here are the drugs, not the people on board”.
The Pentagon mixed up its talking points, and struggled to provide clear answers about the chain of command for the strikes. While the White House initially suggested Adm Frank Bradley, commander of Southern Command special operations, ordered the follow-up strike in self-defense, Hegseth later said Bradley made the call with his authorization but had complete authority to act independently. Trump claimed to know nothing about the operational details, and even suggested he would not have wanted the second strike.
Compounding Hegseth’s bad week, the defense department inspector general report released on Thursday concluded that he violated Pentagon policies by using Signal to share precise details about upcoming airstrikes in Yemen, including the quantity and strike times of manned US aircraft over hostile territory, approximately two to four hours before the missions were executed on 15 March.
The report determined that Hegseth’s actions “created a risk to operational security that could have resulted in failed US mission objectives and potential harm to US pilots”. The information, which was marked as secret and not to be shared with foreign nationals, was transmitted via Hegseth’s unclassified personal device in group chats with other Trump administration officials. The investigation also found he failed to retain all associated messages, violating federal record-keeping requirements.
Senator Jack Reed, the top Democrat on the armed services committee, said the report made clear that “Secretary Hegseth violated Department of Defense policies and shared information that was classified at the time it was sent to him. These were precise strike timings and locations that, had they fallen into enemy hands, could have enabled the Houthis to target American pilots.”
Brian Finucane, who served as a state department attorney with deep experience advising on military operations including strikes against the Houthis in Yemen, in March told the Guardian that based on his experience, the kind of pre-operational details about aircraft types and timing that appeared in the Signal messages would normally have been classified, because that level of specificity could jeopardize missions and endanger pilots.
Despite the inspector general’s findings, Hegseth claimed he was vindicated on social media, posting from his personal account that there was “no classified information. Total exoneration. Case closed.”
Senator Roger Wicker, Republican chair of the Senate armed services committee, defended Hegseth’s actions as within his authority and called for better communications tools for national security leaders to share classified information in real time.
While the vast majority of calls for Hegseth’s resignation have come from Democrats, some Republicans have expressed their own concerns. Senator Rand Paul suggested Hegseth had lied about the September boat attack, saying the defense secretary either “was lying to us or he’s incompetent and didn’t know it had happened”. The Republican congressman Don Bacon told CNN he had “seen enough” to conclude Hegseth was not the right leader for the Pentagon.
Hegseth’s tenure has also been marked by severe dysfunction inside the Pentagon itself, where his own aides earlier this year have been leaking against one another and informing on colleagues in what multiple officials describe as a paranoid and chaotic atmosphere. The defense secretary used a leak investigation – which the White House had reportedly lost confidence in – to purge three top advisers in the spring, with claims they were identified through what would amount to an illegal warrantless NSA wiretap. The episode raised fresh questions about Hegseth’s judgment and his ability to manage the department.
Still, despite the twin controversies creating what those lawmakers have described as an untenable situation for the secretary, Trump has continued to back Hegseth publicly, with the White House expressing “the utmost confidence” in its national security team. Since the Senate is controlled by Republicans and Trump is maintaining his support, Hegseth is unlikely to face meaningful consequences.
The Trump administration has claimed that its Caribbean boat campaign targets vessels operated by designated terrorist organizations including Venezuela’s Tren de Aragua and Colombia’s National Liberation Army, though it has provided no public evidence for these designations. The administration claims it is in an armed conflict with drug cartels, allowing military action without congressional authorization, though legal experts dispute this framing.
At a cabinet meeting on Tuesday, Hegseth showed no signs of backing down, saying the military has “only just begun striking narco-boats and putting narco-terrorists at the bottom of the ocean”, though he noted a pause because “it’s hard to find boats to strike right now”. Since then, a new strike killing four people was announced on Thursday.
Did Russia Just Try To Assassinate Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy?
Most people simply have no idea how close we are to a nightmare scenario. One of these days, some really dramatic event could cause some of our European allies to feel compelled to send troops to Ukraine. If troops from other European countries join the fight, Russia will consider military facilities inside those countries to be legitimate targets. Of course if Russia starts hitting targets in NATO territory, Article 5 will be triggered and we will be at war with Russia. Needless to say, there are many other ways that we could get pulled into a direct conflict with Russia as well. The longer the fighting in Ukraine drags on, the more likely it is that we will end up in a war with Russia, and once a war with Russia begins it is just a matter of time before it goes nuclear.
On Monday night, a really dramatic event which could have potentially altered the course of history almost occurred in Ireland.
Military-style drones “breached a no-fly zone” and traveled a path that should have put them on course to intercept Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy’s plane. Fortunately, his plane was not there because it had arrived ahead of schedule…
Volodymyr Zelensky’s aeroplane was targeted by military-style drones as it approached Dublin Airport. The incident happened on Monday night at about 11pm as the Ukrainian President arrived for a meeting with Ireland’s prime minister.
The drones breached a no-fly zone and reached the location where Zelensky’s plane was expected to be at that particular moment. However, fortunately for the Ukrainian leader, his plane arrived ahead of schedule, meaning it avoided the unidentified drones. The drones then headed to the Irish Sea and circled above a navy vessel that had been deployed there for the visit of the Ukrainian President.
Authorities do not know who launched the drones or where they are now. But they are telling us that these drones were “large, expensive and of military specification”…
Sources told The Journal that the drones took off from the north-east of Dublin, possibly near Howth, and flew for up to two hours.
The Gardaí [Irish police] are investigating whether the drones took off from land or from an undetected ship.
It is currently unknown who launched and controlled the drones or where the drones are now. Ireland’s security service said the drones were large, expensive and of military specification.
Were the Russians attempting to assassinate Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelenskyy as he traveled to Dublin? That is entirely possible.
The Russians have often advocated for a new election in Ukraine because they would like to see Zelenskyy removed from power. And the Russians have become very adept at using drones in combat during the conflict in Ukraine. But I think that it would be very foolish for the Russians to try to take out Zelenskyy.
Any attempt to assassinate Zelenskyy would create great outrage in Europe, and it would have the potential to be the sort of event which causes at least some of our European allies to feel compelled to enter the war. And that is the sort of scenario that the Russians have been trying very hard to avoid.
The Russians are winning the war and are on track to achieve most of their goals, but if other nations enter the conflict that could change everything.
On the other hand, if other European countries get dragged into the war the Ukrainians would be absolutely thrilled because the Ukrainians know that they cannot defeat the Russians by themselves.
So we must also consider the possibility that this “drone attack” was a staged event. Ukrainian drone operations have become extremely sophisticated, and we have seen that the Ukrainians are not afraid to engage in theatrics when it suits their purposes.
A third possibility is that the drones were simply being operated by local curiosity seekers. Hopefully Irish authorities will have more information for us soon. In any event, it has become clear that the war in Ukraine is not going to come to a conclusion any time soon. During his trip to India, Russian President Vladimir Putin explained that certain territories will end up in Russian hands one way or another…
Ahead of the Modi summit, Putin gave an interview with India Today, in which he said Russia would “liberate Donbas and Novorossiya in any case – by military or other means,” according to Russian state media TASS.
Asked what would constitute a victory for Russia in the war, Putin said: “We will finish it when we achieve the goals set at the beginning of the special military operation, when we free these territories. That’s all.”
One of the Kremlin’s biggest demands is for Ukraine to surrender territory in the Donbas region, which Russia has illegally annexed but not yet fully conquered. Novorossiya, or New Russia, is a historical term referring to territories toward the west during the Russian empire; Putin has revived the term, and used it in declaring the Ukrainian peninsula of Crimea as part of Russia in 2014.
In other words, Ukraine will either hand over the remaining land that Russia is demanding or the Russians will simply take it. And the Ukrainians are vowing never to hand it over peacefully. So the fighting will continue, and the risk that we will eventually get pulled into the war will continue to grow.
President Trump has been trying to broker some sort of a deal, but the Russians are not willing to back down from their demands, and the Europeans appear to be in no mood to compromise either…
In a development that is not entirely surprising, European leaders are claiming that Washington is looking to “betray” Ukraine and President Zelensky during potential formal peace negotiations with Russia. “There is a possibility that the United States will abandon Ukraine on territorial questions without providing clarity on security guarantees,” French President Emmanuel Macron reportedly said according to a “leaked” phone call record with other European leaders.
Likely this was an intentional leak and bit of strong signaling to the Trump administration, as Europe has not been on board with the US President’s proposed peace plan from the start. “There is a possibility that the US will betray Ukraine on the issue of territory without clarity on security guarantees,” Macron continued. He laid his view that there was “a great danger” for Zelensky. However, Macron’s office has subsequently sought to clarify that “The president did not use those words.”
The leaked transcript of the call between European leaders strategizing about how to protect the Zelensky government and Kiev’s interests was published Thursday by the German magazineDer Spiegel.
The Europeans are being completely and utterly delusional. They keep acting like they have leverage that they simply do not possess. Russia is winning the war, and throughout human history the victors have almost always set the terms for peace.
Of course the Europeans could choose to alter the equation by sending large numbers of troops into Ukraine, but that would put us dangerously close to the unthinkable. Meanwhile, President Trump insists that we are at “war” with Venezuelan drug cartels, and he is warning that military strikes inside Venezuelan territory will begin “very soon”…
The president made the comment on Wednesday afternoon at the White House during a press availability, while claiming there was popular support for his decision to use military assets instead of law enforcement capabilities to fight drug trafficking efforts in the Caribbean, Central America and South America.
“I think you’re going to find that this is war, that these people were killing our people by millions,” the president claimed. “I think you’re going to find that there’s a very receptive ear to doing exactly what they’re doing, taking out those boats.
He went on to declare: “And very soon we’re going to start doing it on land too. Because we know every route, we know every house where they manufacture this crap. We know where they put it all together. And I think you’re going to see if very soon on land also.”
There are other ways that we can stop illegal drugs from coming into this country.
If we start bombing Venezuela, many other nations (including Russia and China) will be extremely upset with us. President Trump has suggested that Colombia could also be targeted, and Colombian President Gustavo Petro is not pleased about this at all…
Colombia has hit back at Donald Trump after the US President said military action in the South American country was possible under the pretext of tackling drug smuggling. Colombian president Gustavo Petro warned Mr Trump that he risked “waking the jaguar” with his comments, which were made during a cabinet meeting on Tuesday. The US leader said military strikes on land inside Venezuela, which he suspects of producing illegal narcotics for shipment to the US, would “start very soon” and named Colombia as another potential target in his “war on drugs”.
Mr Petro responded to the news on social media, writing: “To threaten our sovereignty is to declare war; do not damage two centuries of diplomatic relations.”
We don’t need to do this.
If we gave the U.S. Coast Guard and the Border Patrol the resources that they actually need, we could stop almost all illegal drugs from coming into the United States. But it appears that war in South America is coming, and that is not good news for any of us.
On top of everything else, things in the Middle East are starting to get “interesting” once again. On Thursday, the IDF conducted airstrikes on multiple targets in southern Lebanon…
The IDF began strikes on Hezbollah targets in southern Lebanon on Thursday afternoon, following the military’s Arabic-language spokesperson Avichay Adraee’s urgent evacuation notice to locals.
The IDF announced that it struck several Hezbollah weapons storage facilities in civilian areas. “The presence of the weapons storage facilities constituted a violation of the understandings between Israel and Lebanon.”
I will be watching developments in the Middle East very carefully.
Let’s just say that if there is some sort of a surprise attack on Israel in the coming weeks I would not be surprised at all. Israel’s enemies may have been wounded, but wounded predators are often the most dangerous opponents.
We really are living at a time of “wars and rumors of wars”, but most Americans still have no idea what is really going on. Unfortunately for all of us, it won’t be too long before a major league wake up call comes our way.
Announced Job Cuts Hit 1.17 Million In 2025 – 54 Percent Higher Than Last Year
It is getting very hard to deny that the U.S. economy is moving in the wrong direction. Yesterday, ADP reported that the U.S. economy shed tens of thousands of jobs last month. Today, Challenger, Gray & Christmas is reporting that U.S. employers announced a grand total of 1.17 million job cuts through the first 11 months of 2025. That represents a 54 percent increase from the first 11 months of last year…
U.S.-based employers have cut more than 1.17 million jobs so far in 2025, the highest level since the first year of the COVID-19 pandemic, according to a new report from outplacement firm Challenger, Gray and Christmas.
From January to November of this year, employers cut 1,170,821 jobs, a 54 percent increase from the 761,358 jobs cut during the first 11 months of 2024.
In 2020, large numbers of Americans were being temporarily laid off due to the lockdowns.
But we don’t have any lockdowns in 2025. What we have instead is a rapidly deteriorating economy. Traditionally, employers have been hesitant to lay off workers just before the holiday season because it can mean bad publicity. But this November employers were not as hesitant to swing the axe as usual, and the telecom industry led the way…
Telecom alone slashed 15,139 jobs, its worst month since April 2020, when the pandemic forced widespread shutdowns.
For the year, telecom layoffs are up a staggering 268 percent.
Other industries aren’t doing much better: tech job losses are up 17 percent in 2025, food distributors (especially those that produce beef) are up 26 percent, and service-sector layoffs have climbed 64 percent.
The primary reason why the total for the telecom industry was so high last month is because Verizon suddenly decided to fire more than 13,000 employees…
Verizon is set to lay off over 13,000 workers in the coming weeks as part of a cost-cutting and restructuring initiative.
“Today, we will begin reducing our workforce by more than 13,000 employees across the organization, and significantly reduce our outsourced and other outside labor expenses,” newly appointed CEO Dan Schulman writes in a memo to employees that it also published online. “Every part of the company will experience some level of change.”
Verizon had just over 100,000 employees as of Sept. 30, meaning the layoff will reduce the headcount by 13%.
Perhaps Verizon’s new management can turn the company around. But considering the trajectory that Verizon is currently on, it will take a miracle. If you are searching for a job in this very tough economic environment, I feel very badly for you.
We are being told that 30 percent of all job postings are fake, and competition for any decent jobs that are available has become extremely fierce. In the old days, having a college degree would give you an edge, but now that is a lot less true than it once was…
College graduates may be losing their edge in the labor market, as the unemployment gap between them and workers with only high school degrees has narrowed and reached its lowest level in decades, according to a new report.
The Federal Reserve Bank of Cleveland analyzed unemployment trends for high school and college graduates between the ages of 22 and 27, as high school graduates have typically experienced relatively higher levels of unemployment.
The Cleveland Fed economists found that the unemployment gap has continually declined since the 2008 financial crisis and recently reached its lowest level since the late 1970s.
In September, 25 percent of all unemployed Americans actually had a college degree. Things are particularly tough for new graduates. As I discussed the other day, Nikki Haley’s son says that not a single one of his friends that recently graduated from college has been able to land a job yet.
How can anyone spin that to make it sound good?
It can’t be done. We have a giant mess on our hands, and more businesses are going belly up with each passing day. In fact, a restaurant chain that had been in business for 88 years just closed their final 8 locations…
Another family restaurant chain has abruptly closed all of its locations for good.
K&W Cafeteria — an 88-year-old institution across North Carolina and Virginia — closed its final eight restaurants on December 1, marking the end of a dining tradition generations grew up with.
‘It is with a heavy heart that we share this news,’ the owners posted on Facebook.
When I first started writing about America’s “restaurant apocalypse”, some of the skeptics thought that I was exaggerating.
Of course nobody thinks that I am exaggerating now because thousands of locations have been getting permanently shuttered. U.S. manufacturing has fallen on hard times too. In fact, the Institute for Supply Management is telling us that U.S. manufacturing activity has now fallen for nine months in a row…
American manufacturing contracted for the ninth straight month, a survey showed, as uncertainty tied to ever-changing tariffs and a historic government shutdown weighed on business.
A closely followed manufacturing index fell to a four-month low of 48.2% in November from 48.7% in the prior month, the Institute for Supply Management said Monday. Any number below 50% signals contraction.
As I have been detailing for weeks, just about every single economic number indicates that a major economic downturn is upon us. Some pundits are using the term “recession” to describe what is ahead, but the truth is that this crisis isn’t just going to be another bump in the road.
As I stated yesterday, we are more than 104 trillion dollars in debt. I hope that the “prosperity” that we enjoyed during the past several decades was worth it, because now we are going to pay a very great price.
Of course it isn’t just us. As Glenn Beck has aptly pointed out, this is the first time in world history when every major civilization is simultaneously facing a historic debt crisis…
“For the FIRST time in recorded history, EVERY major civilization—America, China, Europe, Japan—is hitting the absolute peak of the debt super-cycle AT THE EXACT SAME MOMENT. There is no rising power waiting in the wings like there always has been. When this resets, it won’t be regional. It will be global, systemic, and sudden.”
I have never had anyone explain to me in rational terms how this is going to end well.
We all know that the system is going to collapse. It is just a matter of when it will happen. Considering how rapidly things are starting to unravel in 2025, it may happen a lot sooner than many people think.
The Final Supermoon of 2025 — A Cosmic Ending, A Human Turning Point
Written for the Great Awakening Report
On December 4th, the final Supermoon of 2025 rises—higher, brighter, and closer than any Moon we will see again until 2042. Astronomically, it marks the peak of the lunar standstill cycle, a moment when the Moon climbs unusually high in the sky. Energetically, it marks something far more personal. This Supermoon arrives as a symbolic closing of a chapter many people have been carrying for years. It illuminates what has been unspoken, unresolved, or quietly building beneath the surface, asking each of us to pause and witness what is ready to end.
This Full Moon appears in Gemini, the sign of communication, perception, and duality. Under this influence, truths rise quickly and clearly. Conversations that have been avoided may suddenly surface. Decisions that have been delayed can no longer be pushed aside. Gemini energy sharpens the mind, bringing insights that cut through confusion. Expect clarity—not gentle or subtle, but direct, revealing, and impossible to ignore. What was blurred becomes obvious. What was tangled becomes solvable.
Emotionally, this Supermoon acts like a release valve. Many will feel a sudden need to let go—of stories that no longer fit, identities that feel too small, obligations carried out of habit, or emotional weight accumulated from past cycles. This Moon does not simply illuminate feelings; it dissolves old patterns at their root. For some, this will feel like deep relief. For others, like a truth finally spoken aloud. It is a clearing before 2026 begins, a stripping away that makes room for a new direction to emerge.
Spiritually, this is a threshold moment. Supermoons amplify manifestation, but this one amplifies closure, truth, and alignment. It prepares the ground for the intense, transformative energies of 2026 by helping you see exactly what cannot continue—and what is quietly waiting to rise next. The sky mirrors the human journey: a brilliant peak of illumination before the next era begins. This Supermoon is not simply an event to witness, but a shift to feel, embody, and integrate.
As you stand beneath the final Supermoon of the year—one we will not see again at this magnitude for nearly two decades—you are invited to listen inward. What is ending? What truth is calling forward? And what new horizon begins its rise as the light touches you? This Moon marks the completion of a long emotional cycle and the beginning of a clearer, more aligned path.
Q School —and the Cult That Never Was, How Questions and Sovereign Thinking Broke the Spell.
The puppet masters didn’t fear Q because it was confusing. They feared Q because it taught people to think. That is why Q was never attacked for being “wrong.”
Q was attacked for being dangerously truthful. So the DEEP STATE did the only thing they could: They created “QAnon.” A nefarious label. A thick smokescreen. A scarecrow-version of Q they could control. They stapled outrageous claims to it, glued fringe actors to it, mocked it, dirtied it, and told the world: “See? This is ridiculous.” But none of it was Q.
Their caricature was the cult. The brand they manufactured was the extremism. Their distortion was the true danger. They used it to censor, divide, and malign the people of this country. Here’s the truth— Cults demand obedience. Q demanded observation. Cults say, “Don’t think.” Q said, “Think for yourself.”
The DEEP STATE couldn’t stop the questions… so they smeared the questioner. Because once the individual mind begins to ask, the spell begins to break.
What’s happening now: The push to release “The Epstein Files”
Written for the Great Awakening Report
In November 2025, Congress overwhelmingly passed the Epstein Files Transparency Act (427–1 in the House; unanimous in the Senate). The bill, signed by Donald Trump, requires the U.S. Department of Justice (DOJ) — including the Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) — to publicly release all unclassified records, documents, communications, and investigative materials related to Epstein and his associates within 30 days. Wikipedia+2PBS+2
That timeline sets a tentative deadline around December 19, 2025. The scope of what could be released is extensive — potentially including previously unseen evidence: flight logs, financial records, internal communications, seized devices such as hard drives, photographs, travel/boat logs to Epstein’s islands, and more. Business Insider+2ABC News+2
What might the released files contain — and why it matters
Investigators reportedly seized large volumes of material when Epstein was arrested in 2019: over 70 computers, iPads, hard drives, financial documents, and binders full of CDs. These materials are central to what people refer to as “the Epstein files.” Business Insider+2Wikipedia+2
The newly mandated release could shed light on many unresolved questions — including:
-
Communications and internal records linking Epstein to wealthy, powerful or high-profile associates.
-
Flight and travel logs showing who traveled on Epstein’s private jets or visited his private islands.
-
Prosecutorial and investigative records from two major investigations (Florida in the early 2000s and Manhattan in 2019), including evidence the public has never seen. Business Insider+2ABC News+2
-
Any non-prosecution agreements, sealed settlements, or “sweetheart deals” — deals critics argue helped Epstein evade full accountability in the past. Business Insider+1
For survivors, journalists, and the public at large, this could be a moment of reckoning: many hope the full story — not just what leaked or was disclosed previously — finally becomes visible.
What we already know — and what’s still disputed
Some material has already been made public by Congress: for instance, in late 2025, the House Oversight Committee released a batch of emails from Epstein’s estate, including correspondence reportedly referencing time spent with one of his victims. Oversight Democrats+2Wikipedia+2
However, earlier this year (July 2025), the DOJ issued a memo concluding its review of the seized materials, declaring there was no credible “client list,” and that no further public disclosures were necessary. Axios+2The Independent+2
That back-and-forth — between promises of transparency and official claims nothing more remains to show — has fueled broad skepticism. According to a recent poll, only 25% of Americans believe the government has “followed through” on the promise to release the Epstein files in full; nearly half say it has not. Yahoo+1
Why expectations remain high — and what to watch next
-
The 2025 law explicitly prohibits the DOJ from withholding or redacting documents solely on the basis of “embarrassment, reputational harm, or political sensitivity.” Only narrow exemptions remain: for ongoing investigations, victim privacy, or genuine national-security concerns. Business Insider+2ABC News+2
-
Some experts argue that previously released material — like court filings, grand-jury transcripts, jury instructions, and previously leaked emails — likely represents only a fraction of what remains. Business Insider+2PBS+2
What to watch in the coming weeks: Will the DOJ deliver a truly transparent, searchable archive — or will many documents remain sealed under the guise of victim privacy or ongoing investigations? Will any high-profile names or institutions emerge in newly disclosed logs, communications, or financial records? And critically: will survivors and journalists get the full context to understand not just Epstein’s crimes, but the network — if any — that enabled them?
WHAT ARE THEY HIDING IN ANTARCTICA?
November 22, 2025 | GAR Forbidden History & Disclosure Report
For decades Antarctica has been the most sealed-off region on Earth—protected not just by ice and remoteness, but by governments, intelligence agencies, and military structures that treat it as a geopolitical red zone. Research stations are permitted, tourism is tightly choreographed, and vast zones remain classified. Why?
The deeper we look, the stranger the picture becomes.
1. The Nazis Went to Antarctica—And Left a Mystery Behind
Historical documents confirm intense Nazi interest in Antarctica in the 1930s and early 1940s. The Third Reich launched Operation Neuschwabenland, mapping coastlines, dropping swastika markers, and reportedly constructing underground facilities using early tunneling technology.
What remains unclear is why they were there.
Theories include:
- discovery of geothermal regions allowing underground habitation
- access to ancient structures buried under ice
- reverse-engineering of found technology
- escape routes and black-budget experiments conducted out of Allied reach
Intelligence files declassified after WWII point to something more unusual than mere exploration—something the Reich believed would secure a strategic or technological advantage.
And that thread leads directly to Admiral Byrd.
2. Admiral Byrd’s Classified Mission Into “The Land Beyond the Ice”
Rear Admiral Richard E. Byrd, one of the most accomplished explorers of the 20th century, was sent on a military-backed expedition to Antarctica in 1946–47—Operation Highjump. The official story: training troops and mapping the continent.
The unofficial story: something entirely different.
According to suppressed journals, Byrd described flying into a warm, green valley, encountering craft of unknown origin, and witnessing technology far beyond 1940s capabilities. He reported:
- temperate climate zones hidden within the ice
- underground caverns large enough to hold cities
- aerial craft capable of right-angle movements
- a nonhuman civilization warning humanity about its trajectory
Shortly after returning, Byrd was silenced. His private logs were seized. The mission abruptly ended.
To this day, no-fly zones remain over several sectors tied to Byrd’s original flight path.
3. Why Is the NSA Enforcing Restricted Airspace?
It is an open secret in aviation circles that parts of Antarctica are completely restricted—not due to weather, but due to national security directives. Pilots have reported:
- GPS interference when nearing certain coordinates
- automated rerouting without explanation
- intercepted transmissions warning them away
- military aircraft shadowing unauthorized approaches
Why would the NSA—an agency focused on signals intelligence—control airspace over a frozen wasteland?
Because something is there that must be kept out of public view.
This aligns with reports from scientific teams who’ve been denied access to warm-water subglacial lakes, buried radar anomalies, circular metallic structures, and immense geometric formations beneath thousands of feet of ice.
4. The Indigenous Reptilian Civilization Theory
The video you referenced expands on one of the more controversial but long-standing claims in the Disclosure community: that an ancient Reptilian species exists beneath Antarctica.
According to whistleblowers, remote viewers, and testimony from early Secret Space Program insiders:
- Antarctica contains vast underground networks of caverns connected to the global tectonic system
- A nonhuman species—Reptilian or Draconian—has lived there for tens of thousands of years
- These beings allegedly interacted with ancient civilizations, including the Sumerians and pre-dynastic Egyptians
- High-level agreements between governments and these beings may have been established during the Cold War era
This would explain:
- Why Antarctica suddenly became militarized
- Why public access declined as technology improved
- Why anomalies discovered by satellites are censored
The theory suggests the governments are not hiding ice—they’re hiding inhabitants.
5. The Bigger Picture: Antarctica as a Vault of Forbidden History
Across multiple sources—declassified dossiers, explorer notes, satellite leaks, whistleblower testimony, and high-level briefings—a consistent pattern emerges:
Antarctica is not just ice.
It is a time capsule of Earth’s forgotten epochs and nonhuman civilizations.
What may be hidden there includes:
- Ancient megalithic structures predating the Ice Age
- Alien or prehuman technology sealed under the crust
- Evidence of past cataclysms and pole shifts
- Entrances to a subterranean global network of tunnels
- Biological specimens or species unknown to modern science
- Former Nazi installations absorbed into modern black programs
The secrecy is not accidental. It is structural.
If the world learned what lies beneath Antarctica, it would rewrite:
- human origin stories
- the timeline of civilizations
- global power structures
- religious paradigms
- scientific models of Earth
This is why the region remains the final locked continent.
The Future Of The Entire Planet Hangs In The Balance As Putin, Maduro And Trump All Indicate That They Are Ready To Fight
During a Cabinet meeting on Tuesday, President Trump ominously warned that strikes on drug cartels in Venezuelan territory would begin “very soon”…
The president touted the strikes and the effort to combat drug trafficking, saying the number of deaths are “way down” in the U.S. due in part to the strikes on alleged drug boats. He said the administration would soon start strikes on land as well.
“We’re going to start doing those strikes on land, too,” Mr. Trump said. “You know, the land is much easier. And we know the routes they take, we know everything about them. We know where they live, we know where the bad ones live. And we’re going to start that very soon, too.”
Once we start striking targets in Venezuelan territory, we will be at war with Venezuela. Of course most Americans could not even pick Venezuela out on a blank map of the world.
At that same Cabinet meeting, President Trump also suggested that Colombia could soon be attacked as well…
In remarks during a Cabinet meeting that went for two hours and 18 minutes, Trump warned that any country selling drugs into the U.S. is at risk of a military attack.
“If they come in through a certain country or any country, or if we think they’re building mills, whether it’s fentanyl or cocaine — I hear Colombia, the country of Colombia, is making cocaine, they have cocaine manufacturing plants, OK? And they sell us their cocaine, we appreciate that very much.
“But anybody that’s doing that and selling it into our country is subject to attack,” Trump said, adding in response to a follow-up question, “No, not just Venezuela.”
Are we going to go to war with all of the countries that are sending illegal drugs into the United States? If so, that will be a very long list.
USA Today just reported that the U.S. military has installed “a high-tech radar unit in the Caribbean nation of Trinidad and Tobago” in preparation for what is ahead…
American military forces have installed a high-tech radar unit in the Caribbean nation of Trinidad and Tobago, a surveillance system that can monitor drug boats, as island officials say – but could also be used in a conflict between the U.S. and Venezuela.
U.S. Marines set up the radar system in Tobago, Prime Minister Kamla Persad-Bissessar said on Nov. 28. The unit is located on the eastern end of the Crown Point runway at the ANR Robinson International Airport.
Trinidad and Tobago is a two-island country in the southern Caribbean. Tobago is about 70 miles from Venezuela’s Paria Peninsula.
President Trump is not going to back down. He is ready to fight.
And Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro is ready to fight too…
A DANCING Nicolas Maduro took the stage in Caracas this week and declared Venezuela ready to fight. Daring Washington to make its next move, the desperate dictator has rejected Donald Trump‘s ultimatum to step down and flee the country.
I really wish that Trump and Maduro could have come to an agreement.
But that didn’t happen, and now Maduro appears to be digging in for the long haul…
At a rally in the capital, the tyrant cast himself as a besieged patriot, telling supporters Venezuela was ready “to defend [the country] and lead it to the path of peace” as the US weighs land strikes. He said: “We have lived through 22 weeks of aggression that can only be described as psychological terrorism.”
Maduro is putting on a brave face for the Venezuelan population. But behind the scenes apparently he is very much scared for his life…
Mr. Maduro has tried to protect himself from a potential precision strike or a special-forces raid by frequently changing sleeping locations and cellphones, the people said. Those precautions have accelerated since September, some of the people said, when the United States started amassing warships and striking boats the Trump administration claims were smuggling drugs from Venezuela.
To reduce the risk of betrayal, Mr. Maduro has also expanded the role of Cuban bodyguards in his personal security detail and attached more Cuban counterintelligence officers to Venezuela’s military, one of the people said.
If we start bombing all of the countries in the western hemisphere that send us illegal drugs, we are going to wreck our relationships with all of our neighbors, we are going to wreck our relationships with Russia and China, and the rest of the world will be extremely displeased with us as well.
President Trump wants to do something about the flow of illegal drugs, and that is a good thing. But starting a regime change war in Venezuela is a really bad idea.
Meanwhile, Russian President Vladimir Putin is accusing our European allies of being “on the side of war”…
“They are on the side of war,” Putin said of the European powers. “We can clearly see that all these changes are aimed at only one thing: to block the entire peace process altogether, to make such demands which are absolutely unacceptable to Russia.”
“If Europe suddenly wants to start a war with us and starts it,” Putin said, then it would end so swiftly for Europe that there would be no one to negotiate with in Europe.
It is certainly true that our European allies do not want the war to end until they get what they want. And so they have made efforts to sabotage the current negotiations.
It appears that Putin is quickly losing patience with them, because he is warning that “if Europe suddenly wants to fight and starts, we are ready right now”…
Putin said Tuesday that Moscow does not seek war with Europe but is prepared if hostilities arise. “We are not going to fight with Europe, I have already said this a hundred times,” Putin said. “But if Europe suddenly wants to fight and starts, we are ready right now.”
That is unusually strong language from Putin. And it comes at a time when Russian forces in Ukraine are moving forward faster than they have in a long time.
The Russians have now captured 86 villages and towns since September 2025, and the fall of Pokrovsk is a very big deal…
Speaking to his top generals on Sunday, Putin praised them for “liberating” Pokrovsk, which he called by its Soviet-era name of Krasnoarmiisk, which translates as “Red Army City.”
Kremlin made a point of the Pokrovsk developments on Monday, publishing a video showing Russian soldiers unfurling a Russian flag in Pokrovsk’s city center – even though that particular area has been under Moscow’s control for some time.
The Ukrainians are going to continue to lose territory unless NATO forces intervene.
According to a major British news source, a plan that would send 800,000 NATO troops into Ukraine actually exists…
British troops could be used as part of a plan to send as many as 800,000 German, United States and other NATO troops east toward the front line in the event of a conflict against Russia. The Ministry of Defence (MoD) has not ruled out the deployment of UK personnel if Germany rolls out its 1,200 page classified strategy, put together by at Julius Leber Barracks, located south east of the former Berlin-Tegel Airport.
Let us hope that plan is never implemented, because a direct confrontation between NATO and Russia would put us right on the doorstep of the unthinkable.
Before I wrap up this piece, there is one last thing that I wanted to mention. Tensions between the Chinese and the Japanese have been rising for weeks, and we just witnessed a very tense confrontation in contested waters…
The severe diplomatic standoff which was triggered by last month’s words of Japanese Prime Minister Sanae Takaichi wherein she suggested Japan would militarily aid in Taiwan’s defense in the event of a Chinese invasion is increasingly becoming a potential military standoff. We earlier detailed that Japan has even deployed medium-range missiles to a remote Japanese island not far from China.
Already there’s been a confrontation involving China’s coast guard boats, which attempted to run off a Japanese fishing vessel for allegedly being inside claimed Chinese waters. The fresh incident happened near a group of geopolitically sensitive islands in the East China Sea on Tuesday.
The Japanese boat is accused of entering the waters of the Diaoyu Islands – which Tokyo calls the Senkaku Islands and has long administered.
But a nearby Japanese Coast Guard ship which had been accompanying the fishing vessel then in turn expelled two Chinese Coast Guard ships as they approached and tried to enforce Beijing’s expansive maritime claims over the territory.
Let’s watch how this crisis develops very closely. Because if the Chinese and the Japanese actually start shooting at one another, we will be involved. And those that have been following my work for a long time already understand why we must avoid a conflict with China at all costs.
All over the world, events are taking us toward war, and the fate of our entire planet hangs in the balance. Let us hope for the best, but let us also get prepared for the worst.
40 Million Acres of U.S. Land Owned by China
It’s frightening that a communist country like China can own 40 million acres of land in the United States and near military bases. They aren’t growing food for Americans but for the Chinese people. Microsoft’s CEO Bill Gates owns 270,000 acres of farmland across the country. Iran has been allowed to buy U.S. land as well. Companies are bidding on American farmland, and soon most of the farmland will be gone.
The Biden administration is failing to properly track foreign ownership of U.S. farmlands and doesn’t appear to have a plan to begin tracking that data, according to an investigation by the U.S. Government Accountability Office (GAO).
According to a GAO report detailing the findings of its investigation, the Department of Agriculture (USDA) has failed to consistently share timely data on foreign investments in U.S. agricultural land as required under the 1978 Agricultural Foreign Investment Disclosure Act (AFIDA). Further, Pentagon officials told investigators, according to the report, that USDA needs to regularly provide more up-to-date and specific AFIDA data.
“Sharing current data could help increase visibility into potential national security risks related to foreign investments in U.S. agricultural land,” the GAO report, which was published late Thursday, states. “USDA implements AFIDA across field offices and headquarters, but its processes to collect, track, and report key information are flawed.” The GAO investigation concluded that USDA collects AFIDA data on paper forms filed with county or federal offices, but that its process is “unclear and challenging to implement.” And USDA also has no plans and timelines to create an online AFIDA database despite Congress mandating the agency create one by 2025.
Finally, the government watchdog agency’s review of AFIDA data — the most recent of which is from 2021 — found the USDA has published errors such as reporting the largest land holding associated with China twice.
“This report confirms one of our worst fears: that not only is the USDA unable to answer the question of who owns what land and where, but that there is no plan by the department to internally reverse this dangerous flaw that affects our supply chain and economy,” Congressional Western Caucus Chairman Dan Newhouse, R-Wash., said. “Food security is national security, and we cannot allow foreign adversaries to influence our food supply while we stick our heads in the sand.”
“I will, in my capacity as a member of the Select Committee on the CCP, Chairman of the Western Caucus, and as a member of the House Appropriations Committee, be working to introduce measures aimed at fixing USDA’s internal reporting and data management to identify to Congress, and the American people, exactly who is investing in the over 40 million acres of U.S. farm land reported to have ties to foreign actors,” he continued.
In recent months, Republican lawmakers and local leaders nationwide have increased scrutiny on land purchases by foreign investors. The increasing number of land purchases has sparked concern that foreign companies and investors, particularly those from China, may be establishing a stranglehold of key U.S. food and energy supplies.
USDA’s most recent data suggests that, as of 2021, foreign investment in U.S. agricultural land grew to approximately 40 million acres. Additionally, Chinese agricultural investment in the U.S. increased tenfold between 2009 and 2016 alone.
The apparent trend led to House Agriculture Committee Chairman Glenn Thompson, R-Pa., and House Oversight Committee Chairman James Comer, R-Ky., leading a letter to GAO Comptroller General Gene Dodaro signed by nearly 130 fellow House Republicansin October 2022, requesting a probe into foreign investment in U.S. farmland and its “impact on national security, trade, and food security.”
“Growing foreign ownership of U.S. farmland, particularly by China, poses a direct threat to our food security and national security,” Thompson and Comer said in a joint statement Thursday.
“Safeguarding our farmland and food supply requires a whole of government approach and we will continue to work with the impacted agencies, related committees, and leadership to continue our robust oversight and to identify legislative vehicles to address the findings of the GAO report,” they added.
In February 2023, officials in Grand Forks, North Dakota, rejected a Chinese company’s proposed corn mill that received significant local pushback over concerns about its proximity to a U.S. Air Force base in the area. While the company, Chinese-owned Fufeng Group, was able to purchase 300 acres of land in the area, the local government rejected its building permits, effectively killing the project.
Air Force Assistant Secretary Andrew Hunter said prior to the Grand Forks City Council decision that the project would pose a “significant threat” to national security, but that the Committee on Foreign Investment (CFIUS) concluded it did not have jurisdiction in the case. CFIUS is an interagency taskforce overseen by the Department of the Treasury and tasked with reviewing certain foreign investments that may pose a national security threat.
In addition, a subsidiary of Chinese green energy firm Gotion High-Tech purchased 270 acres of land, including some zoned for agricultural use, in Green Charter Township, Michigan, in August. The land is slated to be used to build an electric vehicle battery component factory, but is located within 60 miles of military armories and within 100 miles from Camp Grayling, the largest U.S. National Guard training facility in the country.
Like its determination in the Fufeng Group case, CFIUS ruled in April 2023 that Gotion’s plans in Michigan are not covered transactions. Continue reading on Fox News…
The Gathering Storm
While many Americans are searching for the best online holiday deals and figuring out what to watch on Netflix tonight, a storm is gathering. Decisions that are being made right now could radically alter the course of human history, but most of the population is so self-occupied that they don’t even realize what is happening. We could soon find ourselves involved in multiple global wars simultaneously, and once we reach that stage there will be no turning back.
At this hour, a naval task force that includes the most advanced aircraft carrier on the entire planet stands ready to start striking Venezuela…
The arrival of the USS Gerald R. Ford gives the US Joint Task Force established in the region the option to launch a high volume of attacks against land targets, should Trump give the order. According to media reports, there are now 15,000 troops in the region, including marines on ships and some 5,000 personnel at bases in Puerto Rico.
This massive deployment has, arguably, sought to convince Maduro’s loyalists that US action is now an option on the table.
Many of us had been hoping that this show of force was just meant to intimidate Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro. But now President Trump has given Maduro an ultimatum, and the rest of the world knows about that ultimatum…
As Washington prepares to launch land attacks inside Venezuela, a long-awaited phone call between the White House and Caracas aimed at defusing the crisis carried a blunt message for strongman Nicolás Maduro: You can save yourself and those closest to you, but you must leave the country now, sources familiar with the exchange told the Miami Herald.
The call — which The New York Times reported took place last week — quickly reached an impasse as it became clear that the two sides’ positions were far apart. Washington demanded that Maduro and his top allies leave Venezuela immediately to allow the restoration of democratic rule, while regime leaders proposed handing political control to the opposition but retaining command of the armed forces.
According to the sources, the U.S. message to Maduro was direct: Safe passage would be guaranteed for him, his wife Cilia Flores, and his son only if he agreed to resign right away.
When asked about this phone call, President Trump confirmed that it took place…
President Donald Trump confirmed to reporters Sunday aboard Air Force One that he spoke with Venezuela’s socialist dictator Nicolás Maduro over the phone.
“I don’t want to comment on it. The answer is yes,” President Trump said when asked about a report published Friday by the leftist publication the New York Times, which has published Maduro as a contributor, stating that Trump had recently spoken with Maduro.
Maduro has decided to call Trump’s bluff, and so now Trump finds himself in a very uncomfortable position. If Trump doesn’t send the military in, Maduro wins and Trump will look like a chump.
But starting a regime change war in Venezuela would force us to commit a large portion of our military assets for an extended period of time, it would severely damage our relationships with both Russia and China, and it could potentially spark a broader conflict.
We should get a clear indication of what is coming next very soon. CNN is reporting that a White House meeting to discuss “next steps on Venezuela” was scheduled for Monday evening…
President Donald Trump will hold a meeting at the White House on Monday evening about next steps on Venezuela, sources familiar with the matter told CNN, as the administration intensifies its pressure campaign on the country and questions mount about whether the military is exceeding its lawful authority.
Key members of Trump’s Cabinet and national security team, including Secretary of Defense Pete Hegseth, Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff Gen. Dan Caine and Secretary of State Marco Rubio are expected to attend, as well as White House chief of staff Susie Wiles and deputy chief of staff Stephen Miller.
Even at this late hour, let us hope that cooler heads prevail.
But one former diplomat just told Fox News that she expects military operations to begin right away…
“I think the operations will start imminently,” former Venezuelan diplomat Vanessa Neumann told Fox News Digital.
“The clearing of the airspace is an indication and a very clear public warning that missiles might be coming to take out command and control infrastructure or retaliatory infrastructure,” Neumann said. “This will not be like breaking a jar into a thousand pieces, this is where you can lift the concentration of power, and it’s easier to manage.”
“The targets have been identified through covert operations over the last several years by people on the ground,” she continued. “So they’re well-mapped. This is a capture-or-kill scenario, but there’s a limit to how many people you can remove quickly.”
Meanwhile, tensions in Europe just continue to rise.
For some reason, the chair of NATO’s Military Committee decided that it was a good idea to publicly say that at some point the alliance may need to take pre-emptive action against Russia…
NATO could fire the first shot against Russia in the face of Vlad’s escalating shadow war on Europe, a top admiral has warned.
Admiral Giuseppe Cavo Dragone, chair of Nato‘s Military Committee, said the alliance could be forced to strike pre-emptively – which would be a toughening of its current policy of waiting to react.
Wow. Why in the world would he make a statement like that?
Admiral Dragone went on to suggest that a pre-emptive strike on Russia could potentially be considered a defensive action…
The admiral said that a “pre-emptive strike” could, under certain circumstances, be classified as a defensive action – though it is “further away from our normal way of thinking and behaviour”.
This is the kind of thinking that could get us into a nuclear war.
Needless to say, the Russians were not amused…
Dragone’s remarks are “an extremely irresponsible step, indicating the readiness of the alliance to continue to move toward escalation,” Maria Zakharova, a spokesperson for Moscow’s Foreign Ministry, said in comments reported by state media on Monday.
Every step of the way, the Europeans have been trying to sabotage peace negotiations with the Russians.
Of course there is probably zero chance that the Russians and the Ukrainians will be able to reach any sort of an agreement, but if President Trump is able to pull off some sort of a diplomatic miracle a major British news source is telling us that the Europeans are apparently prepared to implement a “nuclear option”…
European states are considering adopting the “nuclear option” of sinking the US economy, if Donald Trump sells out Ukraine and endangers security on the continent. Talks between US and Ukrainian officials continued on Sunday in Miami, as both sides attempt to thrash out a peace deal.
This “nuclear option” would reportedly involve selling off trillions of dollars in U.S. government debt…
Sources told the WSJ that European leaders are considering adopting extreme countermeasures in retaliation, designed to unleash economic chaos in the US.
The alleged plan involves dumping trillions in US government debt owned by European states.
A rapid sell off would likely cause a crash in the value of the US dollar, create a liquidity criss across the banking system and cause a huge spike in borrowing costs. It would also lock the American financial sector into a paralysis more severe than the 2008 crisis.
Why are the Europeans so determined to keep this war going? Ukraine is losing more territory almost every single day.
In fact, the Russians just took Pokrovsk and Vovchansk…
Russia finally and formally announced Monday its forces have captured the city of Pokrovsk in eastern Ukraine, the long fought-over strategic military logistics hub, as well as the city of Vovchansk in the northeast.
The capture of Pokrovsk has long been seen as inevitable, after starting weeks ago Russian troops were filmed patrolling freely and casually in a southern district of the city which had a pre-war population of 60,000.
Russia’s military chief of staff, Valery Gerasimov, on Sunday had “informed [President] Vladimir Putin of the liberation of the cities of Krasnoarmeysk and Vovchansk,” according to the Kremlin statement first released on Telegram Monday. Krasnoarmeysk is the Russian name for Pokrovsk.
The only way that Ukraine could win the war would be if NATO forces get directly involved. Has that been the plan all along?
If so, it is an insane plan, because that would put us just one step away from nuclear war. I don’t want to end this article without talking about the situation in the Middle East.
Just hours ago, the Iranians seized yet another oil tanker…
Iran has seized a vessel it says was carrying smuggled fuel, marking the latest escalation in a growing series of maritime confrontations in the already volatile waters near the Strait of Hormuz.
The incident comes as tensions between Iran, its regional neighbors and the United States continue to intensify, with stalled diplomacy and renewed sanctions contributing to a climate of heightened regional instability.
Ever since the end of the 12 Day War, the Iranians have been feverishly rebuilding their missile arsenal. And they are pledging never to give up their nuclear program.
It would be wonderful if some sort of a peaceful solution was possible, but at this stage the Iranians are refusing to talk to the United States, and they certainly don’t want to talk to Israel.
On Monday, one Israeli official acknowledged that they are monitoring what Iran is doing, and he warned that “all fronts are still open”…
Defense Ministry’s Amir Baram warned that “Iran’s rapid force buildup in air defense and ballistic missile capabilities” driven by “its extremist ideology” means that “all fronts are still open.”
Israel is working on new technologies for the next potential war with Iran, Defense Ministry Director-General Amir Baram said on Monday.
Speaking from the Defense Tech conference jointly sponsored by the ministry and Tel Aviv University, Baram warned that “Iran’s rapid force buildup in air defense and ballistic missile capabilities” driven by “its extremist ideology” means that “all fronts are still open” and the IDF must be ready for additional rounds of fighting.
It appears to be just a matter of time before Israel and Iran start fighting again. And it appears to be just a matter of time before the conflict in Ukraine goes to the next level.So this is a really bad time to begin a regime change war in Venezuela, but that is apparently what is going to happen.
The storm is gathering my friends. Get prepared for it while you still can.
Venezuela Airspace Sealed as U.S. Forces Position for Potential Strike
Written for the Great Awakening Report
Venezuela has entered one of the most volatile moments in its modern history. As of this week, the government in Caracas has closed all national airspace to international traffic, triggering an immediate global alert and raising alarms across defense ministries, intelligence services, and geopolitical analysts worldwide. According to U.S. military officials, the closure appears to be a direct response to intensifying American military activity in the Caribbean, where multiple U.S. Navy carrier strike groups have taken up formation in what insiders describe as a “high-readiness posture.”
Sources close to the White House confirm that President Trump has authorized a full operational standby, giving the Pentagon immediate strike authority pending his final command. While the administration has not publicly declared military action, the choreography of assets tells the story: long-range bombers repositioned to forward bases, Aegis-equipped destroyers tightening perimeter control, and surveillance aircraft patrolling the edges of Venezuelan airspace. Military observers note that this is the most aggressive U.S. posture toward Venezuela since the early 2000s — but with far higher stakes, given the collapse of regional stability and the Venezuelan regime’s deepening ties to foreign intelligence networks.
The decision to impose a national no-fly zone has effectively isolated Venezuela from the international aviation grid. Commercial flights have been rerouted, satellite traffic has been restricted, and regional civil-aviation authorities are advising carriers to remain at least 200 nautical miles away from Venezuelan borders. Intelligence reports indicate that the Maduro government has activated emergency protocols, including the dispersal of high-value assets and the fortification of air-defense nodes across major military installations. The atmosphere inside Caracas is described as tense, uncertain, and bracing for confrontation.
For the U.S., the trigger appears to be a convergence of national-security concerns: ongoing intelligence assessments of foreign paramilitary activity inside Venezuela, the flow of weapons through state-backed criminal corridors, and several reported threats involving the safety of U.S. diplomatic and intelligence personnel in the region. The Pentagon has openly stated that “all options are on the table,” while diplomats warn that a miscalculation by either side could ignite a regional conflict stretching from the Caribbean to the Andean corridor.
From a GAR perspective, this escalation is not an isolated flashpoint — it is part of the wider global unraveling of fragile geopolitical systems, echoing the patterns appearing simultaneously in the Middle East, the Pacific, and Eastern Europe. Venezuela now becomes another pressure point in the broader Great Unraveling Cycle, where economic collapse, authoritarian desperation, and foreign proxy networks fuse into combustible crisis zones. What happens in the next 72 hours will determine whether this standoff remains a symbolic show of force — or becomes the spark that triggers the next major geopolitical shockwave.
This Is Why Russia And China Are Going To Be Extremely Upset When The U.S. Begins A Regime Change War In Venezuela
For weeks, we have been waiting to see what is going to happen in Venezuela. Thousands of U.S. troops and about 30 percent of all deployed U.S. warships are currently positioned in the Caribbean, and U.S. military aircraft have been buzzing Venezuelan airspace. I think that President Trump would have preferred for Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro and his minions to step aside peacefully, but it doesn’t appear that this is going to occur. So now we are just waiting for a regime change war in Venezuela to begin, and once it officially commences Russia and China are both going to be extremely upset.
On Saturday, President Trump gave us a very clear signal about what is coming when he publicly declared the entirety of Venezuela’s airspace to be closed…
This was a very serious step for President Trump to take.
And it came just two days after he had warned that the U.S. would start striking targets on Venezuelan soil“very soon”…
The measure comes just two days after the president said he would begin bombing land-based drug trafficking targets. “The land is easier, but that’s going to start very soon,” Trump told reporters.
If he could have gotten rid of the Maduro regime without taking military action, President Trump would have been very happy.
Apparently there was even a phone call between Trump and Maduro, but Maduro’s demand for “blanket legal protection for himself, his senior officials, and their families” was just too much…
President Donald Trump has reportedly rejected Venezuelan President Nicolás Maduro’s request for broad amnesty during a newly disclosed phone conversation last week, telling Maduro and his top advisers to drop their demands and swiftly exit Venezuela as US military pressure intensifies, which has lately included an order to halt all flights in the country’s sovereign airspace.
According to people familiar with the exchange who spoke to The Wall Street Journal, Trump and Maduro discussed a sweeping amnesty plan, during which time Maduro is said to have sought blanket legal protection for himself, his senior officials, and their families. “Trump told Maduro that if he didn’t leave willingly, the US would consider other options including the use of force, according to people familiar with discussion,” WSJ wrote.
I don’t know why Maduro doesn’t just leave. He could flee to a friendly country and live in luxury for the rest of his life. If he stays, he is probably going to end up dead. Of course the hawks in Washington are quite thrilled about the prospect of a new regime change war.
Senator Lindsey Graham is always up for another war, and he sounds absolutely giddy about what will soon take place in Venezuela…
Sen. Lindsey Graham (R-S.C.) on Saturday praised President Trump’s mounting pressure on and military accumulation near Venezuela, as the president mulls over taking action against the South American country “very soon.”
“I very much appreciate and respect the determination by President Trump to deal with the drug caliphate countries that inhabit our backyard — chief among them Venezuela,” Graham posted on the social media platform X. “For over a decade, [Venezuelan President Nicolás] Maduro has controlled a narcoterrorist state that is poisoning America and he has created alliances with international terrorist organizations like Hezbollah.”
Meanwhile, the Venezuelan government is strongly denouncing Trump’s “unjustified aggression”…
Venezuela said it “denounces and condemns” the U.S. after President Donald Trump said the airspace around the South American country should be considered shuttered.
Trump’s remarks are a “colonialist threat” and a “new, extravagant, illegal and unjustified aggression” against Venezuela, Caracas’ Foreign Minister Yván Gil Pinto said in a statement posted to social media on Saturday.
The Maduro regime is not going to surrender power, and so now a showdown is looming.
Last week, Maduro held up a sword and urged his supporters “to defend every inch of this blessed land from imperialist threat or aggression”…
Venezuelan President Nicolas Maduro escalated his confrontation with the United States, rallying tens of thousands of supporters across Caracas as he framed the moment as a historic battle for national survival.
Brandishing a sword and dressed in camouflage fatigues, Maduro said: “We must be ready to defend every inch of this blessed land from imperialist threat or aggression, no matter where it comes from.”
This isn’t going to end well. History has shown that most regime change wars have unintended consequences. But we never seem to learn.
I just feel so badly for the people of Venezuela. They have been suffering for so long, and now they are just waiting for whatever comes next…
U.S. fighter jets escorted a strategic bomber near the coast one day this week, and state-controlled media showed video of Venezuelan soldiers firing into the sky. A supermarket in east Caracas filled with people raiding the shelves to lay in supplies.
The next day, the sky was quiet — and the capital returned to normal.
Caught between the threat of a U.S. attack and a government they don’t trust to provide accurate information, Venezuelans are living moment to moment, unsure of what to expect next — a disrupting, exhausting existence that’s leading some to wish that whatever is going to happen would just happen already.
Russia and China are two of Venezuela’s closest allies. And when the regime change war starts, both of them are going to be very angry.
The Chinese get a tremendous amount of oil from Venezuela, and in recent years they have loaned the Venezuelans tens of billions of dollars…
The Council on Foreign Relations estimates that China has extended around $60 billion in loans to Venezuela over the past two decades, much of it repaid through oil shipments — a figure still cited by both Chinese and Venezuelan officials in 2025.
“China has leveraged multibillion-dollar loans and the establishment of satellite positioning and surveillance facilities to secure strategic control over Venezuela’s natural resources and critical infrastructure,” said Isaias Medina III, an Edward Mason Fellow at Harvard University and a former Venezuelan diplomat to the U.N. Security Council.
It has taken a great deal of time and money for China to successfully transform Venezuela into one of their economic colonies. Do you think that the Chinese are going to be happy to see all that work go up in smoke?
The Russians primarily see Venezuela as a military ally. It has been reported that there are currently hundreds of Russian troops inside the country, and not too long ago new Russian air defense systems were delivered…
A senior-ranking lawmaker in Russia’s lower parliament defense committee said the Kremlin has sent new air defense systems to Venezuela as the latter comes under heightened military pressure from the US.
While speaking to Russian news outlet Gazeta, Alexei Zhuravlev, the first deputy chairman of the State Duma Defense Committee, listed several weapons that Moscow previously supplied to Caracas, including Su-30MK2 fighters and S-300VMs.
He also mentioned the recent arrival of a system not publicly known to be in Venezuela’s arsenal: the Pantsir-S1.
These Russian air defense systems are a serious threat. The U.S. military will need to have a plan to deal with them.
Last week, Venezuelan Vice President Delcy Rodriguez spoke of the relationship between Russia and Venezuela as a “consolidated brotherhood”…
Venezuela’s Vice President Delcy Rodriguez warned of “serious threats of military aggression” by the United States during a virtual meeting with Russian officials. She thanked Russia for its support, highlighting the strategic alliance as essential against international pressure. Rodriguez condemned U.S. efforts to isolate Venezuela by pressuring other countries to restrict air access. She emphasized strengthening air connectivity with Russia to boost tourism and economic ties. Rodriguez described the Russia-Venezuela relationship as a “consolidated brotherhood,” focused on cooperation and respect for international law.
How will the Russians respond as their most important ally in South America gets attacked by the United States? And what will this mean for the war in Ukraine?
The American people are being told that a war with Venezuela is necessary in order to stop the flow of drugs into the United States. But the fentanyl that is killing so many Americans does not come from Venezuela.
The two nations that are primarily responsible for our fentanyl epidemic are China and Mexico…
While some other drugs such as cocaine have been tied to Venezuela, fentanyl, a highly potent synthetic opioid, is not a source or stopping point for the drug’s route to the United States. The precursors for fentanyl come mainly from China, and the drug is produced in Mexico before being sent across the border, mostly through legal ports of entry.
Are we going to go to war with them too?
Ominously, U.S. Secretary of War Pete Hegseth just warned that the U.S. has “only just begun to kill narco-terrorists”…
U.S. Secretary of War Pete Hegseth declared that the United States has “only just begun to kill narco-terrorists,” a blunt call to escalate direct action against cartel operatives. Hegseth reinforced the message in a separate post, vowing that the campaign against transnational drug cartels has entered a new phase. Together, the remarks underscore a growing push inside the national security establishment to treat cartels as foreign terrorist organizations and confront them with military force.
In a Friday night post on social media, Secretary Hegseth bluntly and boldly stated, “We have only just begun to kill narco-terrorists.”
The secretary doubled down two minutes later with a scathing post about “fake news” media delivering “more fabricated, inflammatory, and derogatory reporting to discredit our incredible warriors fighting to protect the homeland.”
Keeping deadly narcotics out of the United States is a good goal. But should we really be using the U.S. military to do that? And what will a regime change war in Venezuela mean for our relations with the rest of the world?
There are many voices that are warning that this crisis could potentially be one of the triggers that leads to the kinetic phase of World War III. If that is true, hopefully President Trump and his team will reconsider their plans before it is too late.
A GEOMAGNETIC STORM IS UNDERWAY: As predicted, a co-rotating interaction region (CIR) hit Earth’s magnetic field today. (It might have been amplified by the flank of a CME arriving at the same time.) The impact sparked a G1-class geomagnetic storm, which could intensify to category G2/G3 in the hours ahead. High-latitude sky watchers should be alert for auroras mixed with moonlight. Aurora alerts: SMS Text.
HOW THE SUN GROUNDED 6000 PLANES: Thanksgiving travelers were surprised last week when Airbus grounded roughly six thousand A320-family jets for an urgent software rollback. The cause of the delay? Fears of radiation from cosmic rays and solar storms. The problem came to light on Oct. 30th, when a JetBlue Airways A320 flying from Cancun to New Jersey suddenly dropped in altitude. At least 15 passengers were injured. When investigators dug into the flight-control data, they found that the aircraft’s software was vulnerable to “single-event upsets” — bit-flips caused when a high-energy particle randomly changes a 1 to a 0 (or vice versa), corrupting critical data.
In the A320s, some recently installed software wasn’t properly hardened against this kind of glitch so, on Nov. 28th, regulators ordered an emergency rollback before the jets could return to service. In most cases, the jets were back in the air the next day.
Although some mainstream news outlets suggested the JetBlue mishap was triggered by solar radiation, there was no solar-radiation storm on Oct. 30th. Instead, the upset was likely caused by a stray galactic cosmic ray — the same class of particle that the sun produces in large quantities during intense storms.
“Avionics are bathed in cosmic rays continuously,” says Clive Dyer, a radiation expert at the UK’s Surrey Space Centre. “This can result in anomalies even when no solar storm is happening.”
Coincidentally, less than two weeks after the JetBlue incident, there was a significant solar-radiation event. On Nov. 11th, an X-class solar flare triggered the strongest ground-level event (GLE) in nearly 20 years. Energetic particles flooded Earth’s atmosphere, doubling radiation levels at aviation altitudes (shown in the map above). Dyer and colleagues analyzed the storm and found that bit-flips in computer memory could have occurred at a rate of ~60 errors per hour per gigabyte. No flight anomalies were reported, he notes, but “I can only believe that the Nov. 11th event focused minds on this problem.”
It’s a problem worth focusing on. On Feb. 23, 1956, the largest GLE of the Space Age boosted aviation radiation levels more than 100×. Tree rings and ice cores show that “Miyake Events” (GLEs thousands of times more intense) have struck Earth in the past few millennia. Modern society simply hasn’t experienced one yet.
Upgrading the flight software is a good idea!
This Is One Of The Primary Tools That The Elite Are Using To Force Fertility Rates Down All Over The Globe
Fertility rates have been rapidly declining all over the globe. If this trend continues, the global population will fall dramatically in the years ahead even if we do not experience major wars, worldwide pandemics, nightmarish famines and historic natural disasters. Of course this is exactly what many among the global elite have been seeking to achieve for a very long time. They kept warning us that “the population bomb” was an existential threat to humanity, and they have been working very hard to bring down birth rates.
Sadly, their efforts have succeeded to a very large degree. In more than 50 percent of the nations on the entire planet, the total fertility rate is now below replacement level…
The TFR is expressed as a single figure to reflect the number of children per birthing person in a specific population, most commonly a country.
When assessing for population growth or decline, experts use a “replacement” or “maintenance” TFR of 2.1. This indicates that each person is “replaced” by someone else, so there’s no population growth or decline, barring other factors like migration.
Since the 1950s, however, global TFRs have been decreasing drastically. Research suggests that more than 50% of countries worldwide are below the 2.1 maintenance TFR, and by the year 2100, experts predict that 93% of countries will be below this rate.
This is extremely alarming, but most people don’t even know that it is happening.
Here in the United States, the fertility rate fell to a brand new record low last year…
The fertility rate in the U.S. dropped to an all-time low in 2024 with fewer than 1.6 children being born per woman, federal data released Thursday shows.
The U.S. was once among only a few developed countries with a rate that ensured each generation had enough children to replace itself — about 2.1 kids per woman. But it has been sliding in America for close to two decades as more women are waiting longer to have children or never taking that step at all.
We are not even coming close to replacing ourselves. This has all sorts of grave implications for the future of federal programs such as Social Security.
In much of Europe, things are even worse…
Native fertility across the entire Western world has collapsed below replacement and shows no sign of recovery. Italy sits at 1.24 children per woman, Spain 1.23, Germany 1.36, Poland 1.26, Canada 1.33, Australia 1.58.
The only reason why western populations are still growing is because of immigration. Without immigration, the number of people living in most western nations would be declining precipitously. The same thing is true in China. Even though the one-child policy ended nearly a decade ago, the fertility rate in China has continued to plummet.
In fact, at this point it has fallen all the way to one…
In the last few years, despite the end of the one-child policy in 2016 and the government encouraging larger families, fertility rates have dropped to one.
So why is this happening? Without a doubt, decades of propaganda have successfully convinced women all over the planet to have fewer children. It will not be easy to undo that conditioning.
In addition, the global elite have poisoned our air, our water, our soil and our food, and we are constantly being blasted with dangerous levels of electromagnetic radiation.
As a result, male sperm counts have declined precipitously since the 1970s…
A 2017 meta-analysis, for example, based on data from North America, Europe, Australia, and New Zealand, found that sperm count had declined by 52 percent between 1973 and 2011. A follow-up in 2022 by some of the same authors showed a similar reduction across an even wider range of countries.
One of the ways that we are being poisoned is through the use of phthalates. The elite knew more than 40 years ago that ingesting phthalates can severely damage the reproductive system…
Earl Gray was astonished by what he found when he cut into the laboratory rats. Some had testicles that were malformed, filled with fluid, missing or in the wrong place. Others had shriveled tubes blocking the flow of sperm, while still more were missing glands that help produce semen.
For months, Gray and his team had been feeding rats corn oil laced with phthalates, a class of chemical widely used to make plastics soft and pliable. Working for the Environmental Protection Agency in the early 1980s, Gray was evaluating how toxic substances damage the reproductive system and tested dibutyl phthalate after reading some early papers suggesting it posed a risk to human health.
Sitting on a screened porch on a humid summer day more than 40 years later, Gray recalled the study and the grisly birth defects. “It was in enough animals, so we knew it wasn’t random malformations,” said Gray, 80, who retired after nearly 50 years with the agency.
Even though the danger was very clear, the widespread use of phthalates continued.
It is being estimated that the damage to human health from phthalates in the United States is now costing us more than 66 billion dollars a year…
The costs to society are huge. A 2024 NYU-led study that catalogued health effects from phthalates exposure in the United States — including contributions to diabetes levels and infertility — estimated that dealing with phthalate-related diseases cost $66.7 billion in a single year. That is triple the economic impact of health impacts from “forever chemicals,” another class of chemicals widely implicated in disease. Treating all cancer, by comparison, costs the U.S. $209 billion annually, according to one estimate by the government-run National Cancer Institute.
This is a crime against humanity. And yet to this day phthalates continue to be used in food manufacturing facilities all across America…
“You have hoses that are loaded with phthalates, you have plastic tanks that stuff is stored in, you have pumps that are plastic — that’s where you get a lot of phthalates,” said Tom Neltner, a longtime chemical campaigner and chemical engineer who worked in food manufacturing.
The American Chemistry Council said FDA has approved using certain phthalates in food-contact applications like tubing, conveyor belts and vinyl gloves, concluding that dietary exposures do not exceed safe levels.
“The leadership in FDA, both political and the senior career leadership, for decades in the food safety space, didn’t think chemicals merited much attention,” said Jim Jones, who was brought in as a deputy commissioner to overhaul food safety at the agency in 2023 after a career at EPA.
By allowing them to do this to us, we are literally committing societal suicide. But most people that will read this article will forget all about it by next week.
Of course they are poisoning and killing us in dozens of other ways as well. What will it take for the general population to finally wake up? They are destroying humanity and everything around us, and someday they will be held accountable. But for now, most of the population just continues to pretend that everything is just fine.
Meanwhile, the agenda of the global elite continues to march forward, and they are absolutely thrilled that birth rates continue to fall all over the globe.
Do You Agree That It Takes A Minimum Of $136,500 A Year For A Family Of Four To Afford The Basics In America Today?
If your household is struggling to pay the bills right now, you are far from alone. The cost of just about everything that Americans regularly spend money on has been soaring, and as a result our standard of living has been steadily declining. Over the past couple of decades, our politicians borrowed and spent trillions of dollars that we did not have, the Federal Reserve shoveled giant mountains of money that were created out of thin air into the financial system, and our leaders treated the reserve currency of the world like toilet paper. So now the value of the U.S. dollar has gone way down, our paychecks don’t stretch as far as they once did, and most of the country is barely scraping by from month to month.
This week, an excellent article that was authored by Michael Green is getting a ton of attention. In that article, he calculates that a “basic needs budget” for a typical family of four in the United States would come to a grand total of $136,500 a year…
I wanted to see what would happen if I ignored the official stats and simply calculated the cost of existing. I built a Basic Needs budget for a family of four (two earners, two kids). No vacations, no Netflix, no luxury. Just the “Participation Tickets” required to hold a job and raise kids in 2024.
Using conservative, national-average data: Childcare: $32,773 Housing: $23,267 Food: $14,717 Transportation: $14,828 Healthcare: $10,567 Other essentials: $21,857 Required net income: $118,009 Add federal, state, and FICA taxes of roughly $18,500, and you arrive at a required gross income of $136,500.
Do you agree with these figures? I very much appreciate the effort that he put into his analysis, but I certainly do not agree with some of these numbers.
The national average for child care for a single child is about $975 per month. So for two children for an entire year the total should be less than $24,000. So we can eliminate more than $8,000 from his budget right there. And if your kids are old enough, you may not need to spend anything on child care at all.
On the other hand, I think that his figure for housing is too low. The average home price in the U.S. now exceeds $500,000. Taking out a $500,000 mortgage at 6.2 percent would result in a mortgage payment of $3,047.41 a month.
So Green’s budget completely rules out owning a typical home in many areas of the country. Instead, it would allow for renting a two bedroom apartment which averages about $1,800 a month right now. And I think that Green’s figure for health care is also too low.
The average monthly health insurance premium for a family of four in the U.S. now exceeds $2,000. Yes, a hypothetical family of four could save money by going without health insurance or by living in a van, but that is not the point. It is time for everyone to admit that a middle class lifestyle has become out of reach for a majority of American households. Green’s analysis may not be entirely accurate, but others have come up with similar results.
For example, the Economic Policy Institute has determined that it takes approximately $123,000 a year for a family of four to live a middle class lifestyle in Essex County, New Jersey…
The Economic Policy Institute offers a Family Budget Calculator. It says a family of four would need about $123,000 a year to attain “a modest yet adequate standard of living” in Essex County, New Jersey.
And Investopedia has determined that it now takes approximately 5 million dollars to live the American Dream over the course of a lifetime…
Investopedia, the financial journalism site, uses similar calculations to estimate how much emergency savings a family should hold (about $35,000, on average) and the lifetime costs of fulfilling the American dream (roughly $5 million).
Needless to say, most Americans don’t have a prayer of making 5 million dollars during their lifetimes. And the cost of just about everything is only going to go even higher.
Right now, our rapidly rising power bills are making a lot of headlines…
The numbers are as stark as a slate-grey November sky. Household spending on electricity for heating is expected to rise 10% this winter to more than $1,200. Utilities requested a $29 billion rate increase in the first half of 2025, double last year’s rate rise. Residential electricity rates rose 6.6% year-on-year as of June 2025, according to Utility Dive, after already rising nearly 30% between 2021 and 2024.
Meanwhile, the job market just continues to get even tighter.
On Wednesday, ADP reported that the U.S. economy lost 32,000 jobs last month…
- The U.S. labor market slowdown intensified in November as private companies cut 32,000 workers, with small businesses hit the hardest, payrolls processing firm ADP reported Wednesday.
- Larger businesses, entailing companies with 50 or more employees, actually reported a net gain of 90,000 workers. However, establishments with fewer than 50 saw a decline of 120,000.
- The ADP report is the last monthly jobs picture the Federal Reserve gets before it meets Dec. 9-10.
Most experts were expecting that the ADP report would show that the U.S. economy actually added jobs last month. So this is really bad news.
The three month average has now plunged into negative territory. This is the very first time that has happened since August 2020. Back then, we had a pandemic to blame for our problems. What is our excuse this time around?
It is easy to say that unemployed people should just go out and “get a job”, but the truth is that even the mainstream media is admitting that “job hunting feels impossible right now”…
You’re not imagining it. Job hunting feels impossible right now because it actually is. You’ve polished your resume, customized cover letters and applied for hundreds of roles only to hear nothing back.
I know that many of you can identify with that. Month after month, a lot of unemployed workers have been unable to find anything no matter how hard they have tried.
It can be absolutely soul crushing what you are in that position. There is speculation that the latest ADP report may make it more likely that the Fed will give us another interest rate cut…
But Kenwell said the latest report should help push America’s central bank to cut interest rates for the third time in 2025.
The Fed, currently led by chair Jerome Powell, has a dual mandate to lower inflation and increase job growth through the government’s borrowing rates.
Rates are used as a blunt tool, swinging higher when prices climb, and plunging when unemployment accelerates.
Hopefully the Fed will do the right thing. But a quarter point rate cut is not going to significantly alter our current economic trajectory.
We aren’t just heading into another recession. We are heading into a full-blown meltdown.
When you total up all forms of debt in this country, we are more than 104 trillion dollars in the red. It is the greatest mountain of debt in the history of the world, and now a time of reckoning is here. So please try to enjoy these “bad times” while we still have them, because it won’t be too long before things get a whole lot worse.
GEOMAGNETIC STORMS & THE CARRINGTON PARALLEL
Written for the Great Awakening Report
December 2, 2025 | GAR Solar & Space Weather Briefing
“When the Sun awakens, the Earth remembers.”
A CME That Was Supposed to Miss Earth… Is Now Aimed Straight at Us
NOAA’s latest modeling has rewritten yesterday’s forecast. A powerful X2-class solar flare erupted from active region 4294-4296, launching a CME that was initially expected to slip harmlessly past Earth. But updated coronagraph data reveals a different story:
The CME has shifted trajectory, expanding into a wider Earth-facing cone. Instead of missing us, it is now predicted to graze Earth’s magnetic field on December 3rd, with elevated storm potential through December 4th.
What makes this CME more concerning is the solar wind stream ahead of it—a fast-moving river of charged particles already en route toward Earth. The CME is expected to overtake and compress this stream, creating a denser, more energetic impact zone.
NOAA now estimates:
-
G2-class storms likely
-
G3 possible if compression amplifies the magnetic impact
-
Aurora visibility may reach mid-latitudes (weather permitting)
This is the strongest alignment of solar-geoeffective factors we’ve seen since 2024’s major solar cycle surge.
A Sunspot the Size of a Cataclysmic Memory
On September 1, 1859, Richard Carrington witnessed the most violent solar flare ever documented—an event so intense it illuminated telegraph offices, ignited equipment, and sent auroras into the Caribbean. The now-legendary X45-class flare became the baseline for worst-case space-weather planning.
Today’s sunspot complex is nearly identical in scale.
New comparative imaging shows Carrington’s 1859 sunspot overlaid onto a Dec. 2, 2025 photograph of sunspots 4294–4296. The similarity is startling:
-
Carrington sunspot area: ~2300 millionths of solar disk
-
Modern sunspot area: 2080 millionths, roughly 90% of Carrington
Even more concerning:
The 2025 complex is actually two sunspots packed tightly together, creating a merged magnetic canopy that dramatically increases the chances of magnetic reconnection—nature’s fuse for powerful solar flares.
When sunspot fields crowd like this, they behave unpredictably. Sudden, violent, and geoeffective eruptions are far more likely.
Why Today’s Conditions Are Especially Dangerous
What we face now is not a typical flare-CME scenario.
It is a stacking of vulnerabilities:
-
Enormous sunspot complexity — one of the strongest of Solar Cycle 25
-
Magnetic compression events — CME overtaking a high-speed solar wind
-
Direct Earth-facing position — sunspot rotation puts its magnetic core aimed at Earth
-
High solar flux background — the Sun is magnetically “hot,” increasing storm intensity
If region 4294-4296 releases another X-class flare today—as solar forecasters expect—it will almost certainly be geoeffective, meaning the CME will be directed toward Earth.
We’re now watching for anything above X5, which historically begins to produce widespread grid disturbances, GPS degradation, satellite drag, HF radio blackouts, and aviation re-routing—especially over the poles.
A Global Watch: Photographers Capture the Solar Giants
This sunspot complex has drawn international attention, with remarkable imagery arriving from across the globe:
-
Shahrin Ahmad (Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia) captured the early formation stage in stunning H-alpha.
-
Chris Schur (Payson, Arizona) recorded the magnetic filament structure in high contrast.
-
David Wilson (Inverness, Scotland) produced a full-disk white-light comparison showing the enormity of region 4294–4296.
-
Jeremy Gilchrist (Raleigh, NC) imaged the active region at sunset, revealing the silhouette of a passing aircraft—symbolic of the vulnerabilities facing modern aviation.
These global observers act as a distributed early-warning system, documenting the evolving face of a Sun that is becoming increasingly restless.
Are We Approaching a Modern Carrington Event?
We are not there yet—but the parallels are becoming harder to ignore.
A Carrington-level X40+ flare could shut down large sections of the power grid, overwhelm satellites, cripple communication infrastructure, and disrupt global aviation for days or even weeks.
The fact that we now have a sunspot complex within 10% of Carrington’s scale—and magnetically primed for large-scale reconnection—makes this one of the highest-risk solar windows of the decade.
Whether the coming days bring a mild G2 storm or a historic solar superstorm depends entirely on the behavior of a single, enormous, unstable region of the Sun.
For now, all eyes are on 4294–4296.
U.S. Businesses Are Going Bankrupt At An Absolutely Blistering Pace
Why is the number of business bankruptcies in the United States rising so rapidly? It isn’t because the economy is doing well. Every day there are more news stories about businesses that have failed, and this is clearly reflected in the numbers that I am about to share with you. We haven’t seen anything like this since the Great Recession, and if our economic troubles continue to accelerate during the months ahead 2026 is going to be a very messy year.
Earlier today I came across an article which explained that the number of small businesses that are filing for Subchapter V bankruptcy has set a brand new record high in 2025…
A six-year-old federal program designed to help the smallest American businesses cut debt and get a fresh start has set a record for the number of cases filed, court data show.
More than 2,200 people and small firms filed bankruptcy this year under the so-called Subchapter V rules, which make it cheaper and faster to win relief from creditors, according to data provider Epiq Bankruptcy Analytics.
“Creditors are just breathing down their necks,” said Carol Fox, a court-approved trustee who oversees more than two dozen cases filed in Southern Florida.
This is really bad news. Small businesses are traditionally the primary engine for job growth in this country. So the fact that so many of them are going belly up is not a good sign at all.
Meanwhile, large businesses are going bankrupt at a very alarming pace as well.
In fact, through the first seven months of this year the number of corporate bankruptcies in the United States was at the highest level that we have seen since the early days of the pandemic…
The U.S. saw a sharp increase in corporate bankruptcy filings in July, according to a recent report, reaching a post-COVID peak and placing 2025 on track to surpass last year’s total.
S&P Global Market Intelligence, the research and data arm of the credit-rating agency, found that filings by large public and private companies rose to 71 last month from 66 in June, marking the highest monthly tally since July 2020. So far in 2025, meanwhile, the total of 446 bankruptcy filings is the highest for this seven-month stretch since 2010.
When large numbers of businesses fail, hiring slows down and we typically see large scale layoffs all over the nation. And that is precisely what is happening.
During a recent interview with Fox News, Nikki Haley’s son admitted that not a single one of his friends that recently graduated from college has been able to get a job…
“My friend group all graduated with great degrees in great schools, and not one of them has a job – not one. So it’s frustrating because they did everything that they were supposed to do. They put in the time, the effort, the money to get educated, and they don’t have a job to show for it. They have to compete with foreign workers who are willing to work for half their salary and AI, which is a supercomputer, so how can we compete with that?“
I was stunned when I read that.
I knew that things were bad for our recent college graduates, but I didn’t realize that they were this bad. The job market is freezing up, and this is especially true for entry-level workers.
At this stage, AI is already doing much of the work that vast numbers of entry-level workers once did. And a recent MIT study concluded that current AI technology could potentially replace 20 million more American workers…
In the midst of a soggy job market, there’s been a lengthy debate over whether contemporary AI is actually replacing workers — or just providing bosses with an excuse to lay off certain employees and offload their responsibilities onto the ones who remain.
The answer isn’t clear, but a new study out of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology is sure to add fuel to the fire. Analyzing 151 million American workers, the researchers calculated that today’s AI systems are already mature enough to automate the tasks of more than 20 million American workers, or 11.7 percent of the entire labor force, if they were fully deployed across the country.
So what is going to happen when AI and robots can do almost everything more efficiently than human workers can? What will we be needed for then?
Our society is changing at a pace that is difficult to comprehend. One tech worker that got laid off by Meta earlier this year still has not been able to find work nine months later…
When I got hired at Meta in 2020, it was life-changing for me as a single mom. It represented safety and stability — a place to work hard at and retire from. So, when I was let go in February in a round of layoffs aimed at “low-performers,” it felt like a punch in the gut.
Nine months later, my severance and savings have run dry, I’m struggling to find a tech job, and I feel that the low-performer “label” is part of the reason. I’m no longer the same happy-go-lucky person I used to be, applying for jobs with excitement.
A few years ago, it was pretty easy to find a good paying job. But now things have completely flipped around. And even many of those that are employed are not making enough to be able to afford a decent lifestyle…
An American retail worker earns 51.6 percent less than the amount required to afford a typical rental apartment, real estate brokerage Redfin said in a statement released on Nov. 26.
“The typical retail worker in America earns $34,436 per year,” the company said.
“A renter would need to earn $71,172 to afford the typical apartment, which costs $1,779 per month.”
If you don’t make enough money to be able to pay rent on an apartment, what are your options? I suppose that you could move in with your parents or live in a van down by the river.
By the way, there are millions of young Americans that are living in cars, vans and RVs today. This is something that I have discussed extensively in previous articles. Our standard of living is being eviscerated.
Meanwhile, those at the very top of the economic pyramid have more money than they know what to do with…
The top 1% have seen their wealth increase by $4 trillion over the past year, an increase of 7%. Their wealth hit a record $52 trillion in the second quarter.
The top 0.1% saw their wealth grow by 10% over the past year. Since the pandemic, the top 0.1%, or those with a net worth of at least $46 million, have seen their total wealth nearly double to over $23 trillion.
I keep trying to warn everyone that this is not going to end well.
There are millions upon millions of Americans that cannot make a decent living no matter how hard they try. And the same thing is happening in countless other nations all over the globe.
I have never seen so much economic frustration among young adults as I am seeing right now.Their anger is percolating just under the surface, and it won’t be too long before it explodes.
The Price Of Silver Goes Parabolic As The Cost Of Living Spikes And Mass Layoffs Occur All Over The Nation
For a long time we were warned that when the financial system finally started melting down, the price of silver would explode. It appears that those that predicted this were quite prescient. The yen carry trade is unwinding, more than a trillion dollars in cryptocurrency wealth has been wiped out, stocks and bonds have been extremely volatile, and the U.S. dollar has plummeted in value since the beginning of the year. Meanwhile, the price of silver has nearly doubled since January 1st…
In just 11 months, the price of silver has almost doubled. While gold stole the spotlight in 2025, it is silver that has gained more than the yellow metal. Compared to gold, silver has moved sharply higher over the last 12 months.
Over the last year, gold has increased by 59%, while silver has jumped nearly 87%. Even in 2025, so far gold has gained 60%, while silver is already up 94%.
As I write this article, silver is trading at $57.16 an ounce. I never imagined that the price of silver would go so high in 2025, but here we are.
When there is a lot of uncertainty in the air, demand for silver tends to go up. And right now there is a tremendous amount of uncertainty in the air. Just about everyone expected that the price of silver would rise, but we have never seen anything quite like this.
It is being reported that the vaults in London are rapidly emptying…
Yet, London’s vaults have been emptying rapidly for the past few years. In June 2022, the London Bullion Market Association held 31,023 metric tons of silver. By March 2025, volumes had fallen by around a third to 22,126 metric tons — its lowest point in years.
“What isn’t necessarily so visible to people is what’s happening in the vaults,” said O’Connell. “And that had reached a point where there was basically there was no available metal left in London.”
On the other side of the planet, China’s physical stockpile of silver has hit a 10 year low. This is a huge red flag, but most people don’t seem to realize this.
Global supplies of physical silver are becoming extremely tight, and this has been creating quite a bit of chaos…
“Some people were having to transport silver by plane rather than on cargo ships to meet delivery demand,” Paul Syms, head of EMEA ETF Fixed Income and commodity product management at Invesco, told CNBC.
Of course this is just the beginning. Silver is used in thousands of different products, and this includes electric vehicles.
If current trends continue, demand for physical silver is only going to accelerate…
“At the moment, a standard electric vehicle has about 25 grams of silver, maybe the larger EVs have 50 grams of silver as part of their components,” said Syms.
“If we move into these solid-state silver batteries, each electric vehicle might require a kilo or more of silver,” he added.
And with silver having a high thermal conductivity and a higher electrical conductivity than other metals, as well as increasing demand for EVs, AI and renewables, the metal’s value is likely to keep shining.
There is no telling how high the price of silver could eventually go.
But that is not good news for the economy. In fact, that is really bad news for the economy. Investors tend to flock to silver when things are not going well. And this year the value of the dollar has been tanking, our standard of living has been going down, and the cost of just about everything has been going up.
For example, the data center boom has been one of the primary forces that has driven power bills into unprecedented territory…
The data centers that power the artificial intelligence revolution are driving up electricity prices for households — and price relief may not be coming anytime soon, according to energy experts.
Residential retail electricity prices in September were up 7.4%, to about 18 cents per kilowatt hour, according to the most recent data from the Energy Information Administration.
It is being projected that thousands more data centers will be constructed in the U.S. by the year 2030. So what we are experiencing now is just the tip of the iceberg.
Health care costs are also soaring, and this is particularly true for those that are on Obamacare…
Americans are expected to see skyrocketing health care prices as the open enrollment period for insurance through the Affordable Care Act marketplace begins on Saturday.
About 24 million people buy health insurance through the marketplace, the majority of whom used to receive tax credits to lower the monthly price of insurance.
Without credits, the monthly cost could rise by 114% on average, according to health research nonprofit KFF. This could mean an extra $1,000 a year, and in some cases much more.
One family in Utah could see their monthly premiums go from 495 dollars a month to 2,168 dollars a month…
Stacy Cox and her husband, who are small business owners in Utah, were paying $495 (£376) a month for health insurance.
Ms Cox said that without the tax credits, their monthly premiums are estimated to rise to $2,168, a 338% increase.
“It’s horrific to actually see real numbers,” she said.
Who can afford to pay 2,000 dollars a month for health insurance? I don’t know anyone that could afford to do that. Of course vast numbers of U.S. workers will soon be without any health coverage at all because they are losing their jobs.
FedEx was once one of America’s hottest companies, but now hundreds of workers will be getting the axe...
America’s hottest corporate trend is layoffs.
FedEx, America’s second-largest shipping and logistics company, is shutting down a logistics operation in Coppell, Texas, and laying off nearly 900 workers, according to a WARN notice filed with the Texas Workforce Commission.
Hewlett-Packard is another household name that is brutally slashing workers…
A household name in tech is the latest to announce a wave of layoffs.
On Tuesday, Hewlett-Packard — the 86-year-old California tech giant better known as HP — said it plans to let go of between 4,000 and 6,000 employees worldwide. That is roughly 10 percent of its workforce, with notices rolling out through 2028.
Meanwhile, stores continue to close down at a staggering pace all over the country.
American Signature operated over 120 stores and employed approximately 3,000 workers, but now it has gone belly up…
Another furniture chain has declared bankruptcy — as cash-strapped Americans hold off on home improvement projects.
On Sunday, American Signature, a 75-year-old furniture chain that operates Value City Furniture and American Signature Furniture stores, filed for Chapter 11 bankruptcy. The retailer operates more than 120 stores and employs about 3,000 people.
Day after day, we see more stories like this. And that is because the U.S. economy really is coming apart at the seams.
What we are experiencing reminds me so much of 2008. But of course so much has changed since that time. If you purchased silver in December 2008 and held it until today, it has more than quintupled in value.
Amazingly, along the way there were many that accused those of us that spoke highly of silver of being wrong. But in the end, time has revealed who was right after all.
Extreme Carnage! Crypto Investors Lose $800,000,000,000 In Just 1 Month As Forced Liquidations Reset The Market
It’s a bloodbath out there right now. On Monday alone, crypto investors lost about $200,000,000,000 in just 24 hours. Overall, crypto investors have lost about $800,000,000,000 over the last month. In this article, I want to try to explain why this is happening and what is coming next. You see, the truth is that the era of easy money is ending. For a long time, investors could borrow yen at ultra-low interest rates and use that money to purchase cryptocurrency and make amazing returns. But now Japanese bond yields are going nuts and all variations of the “yen carry trade” are starting to unwind…
For years, a lucrative trade for global investors has been to borrow yen to buy high-yielding assets like US stocks, or in this case, cryptocurrencies. Interest rates in Japan had been low or at zero, making borrowing yen relatively cheap and creating a sweet opportunity for traders. It’s known as the “yen carry trade.”
However, the Bank of Japan has signaled it could raise interest rates, in part to address stubborn inflation, continuing a recent shift away from years of ultra-low rates. Yields on benchmark Japanese bonds just hit their highest level since 2008, signaling expectations for higher rates. As rates in Japan rise, it can boost the value of the yen. That makes borrowing yen less affordable, eating into the profitability of the carry trade.
That could pressure traders to sell their bitcoin and stocks now to repay their loans and prevent the risk of further losses. In addition to a sell-off, it could lead to less cash flowing into crypto and stocks.
On Sunday night, Japanese bond yields spiked again, and this caused another round of panic for crypto investors. And we all saw what happened once the selling started. For years, crypto investors laughed at the rest of us as they enjoyed the ride up as the bubble inflated.
But now the bubble is bursting, and the ride down is going to be far more messy that the ride up due to the extreme leverage in the cryptocurrency market…
Ben Emons, founder and CIO of Fedwatch Advisors, said that people remain “nervous” following the recent bitcoin sell-off, adding that Monday’s reversal has broadly been attributed to a $400 million exchange liquidation.
Speaking with CNBC’s “Squawk Box Europe” on Monday, he highlighted the sizable leverage across bitcoin exchanges, which is up to 200x in some instances. With an estimated $787 billion outstanding leverage in perpetual crypto futures, against some $135 billion outstanding in ETFs, “you can do the math,” Emons said.
“There is still a lot of leverage in bitcoin out there. We can expect to some more of these liquidations if bitcoin prices don’t get off the lows from here,” he added.
As long as crypto prices just kept going up, everything was going to be fine. But now that crypto prices are going down, we are seeing wave after wave of forced liquidations.
Yet another wave of forced liquidations is what pushed crypto prices down so rapidly on Monday. At this point, things are so bad that even the largest corporate holder of Bitcoin may soon be forced to start selling…
The biggest corporate holder of bitcoin has announced a U.S. dollar dividend reserve of more than $1 billion, days after its top executive laid out what might force the company to sell some of its $56 billion in bitcoin holdings.
Strategy, formerly known as MicroStrategy, announced Monday that it will establish a $1.44 billion reserve “to support the payment of dividends on its preferred stock and interest on its outstanding indebtedness.” The reserve was funded by sales of its Class A common stock, and Strategy plans to keep sufficient reserves to fund its dividends for at least 12 months.
What we are witnessing is not just a temporary correction.
As Shanaka Anslem Perera laid out very clearly in an excellent social media post, the entire system is being forced to reset because Japanese bond yields are soaring. I have reproduced his entire social media post below…
JAPAN JUST KILLED THE GLOBAL MONEY PRINTER AND NOBODY NOTICED
The most dangerous number in finance right now is 1.71%.
That’s Japan’s 10-year bond yield. Highest since 2008. Here’s why your retirement just got obliterated:
For 30 years, Japan printed infinity money at 0% rates and exported it worldwide. $3.4 trillion flowed into US Treasuries, European debt, emerging markets. This invisible bid kept YOUR mortgage cheap, YOUR stocks inflated, YOUR government solvent.
November 10th, 2025: The bid disappeared.
Japan’s yield hit 1.71%. They’re pumping $110 billion stimulus into their economy while debt sits at 263% of GDP. The math just became impossible. At 1.7% rates, Japan pays $27 billion MORE in interest. Every. Single. Year.
Here’s the extinction event nobody sees coming:
Japanese pension funds are pulling $1.1 trillion OUT of US Treasuries right now because keeping money in America LOSES them money after hedging costs. The largest foreign buyer of American debt is becoming a seller.
When Japan stops buying, interest rates don’t stay flat. They explode. US 10-year yields will jump 40 basis points minimum from flow dynamics alone. Your 7% mortgage becomes 8%. Corporate debt refinancing costs spike 60%. Zombie companies holding $3 trillion in junk bonds start defaulting in waves.
The yen carry trade just reversed. $1.2 trillion in borrowed yen funding crypto, stocks, emerging markets must unwind. Every hedge fund, every momentum trade, every leveraged bet built on free Japanese money is getting margin called simultaneously.
This breaks in three places:
Stock valuations were built for 2% bond yields forever. At 3.5% yields, the S&P 500 fair value drops 35%. Emerging market currencies collapse without Japanese capital inflows. Europe’s debt crisis returns because Italy and Spain lose their silent buyer.
December 18th the Bank of Japan meets. 50% chance they hike again. If they do, sell everything not nailed down.
Your 401k doesn’t price this in yet. The Fed can’t stop this. No central bank can. The world’s biggest piggy bank just cracked open and the money is flowing backwards. Position accordingly or get destroyed.
When he originally posted that, the yield on 10 year Japanese bonds was 1.71 percent.
Now it has risen to 1.85 percent, which is the highest level since 2008…
Japan just sent a shock through global markets.
The country’s 10-year government bond yield jumped to 1.85%, its highest level since 2008, marking a major break from the ultra-low rate environment Japan has lived in for decades. The move is already being called one of the most important signals for global liquidity heading into 2026.
To say that we are potentially facing a major liquidity crisis would be a massive understatement. For the moment, it is crypto prices that are plunging, but lots of yen was borrowed to buy stocks too. So let’s keep a very close eye on U.S. stock prices in the days ahead.
Meanwhile, the price of silver continues to go parabolic.
As I write this article, the price of silver is sitting at $58.40 an ounce. Will it hit 60 dollars this week? There are some analysts that are now openly speculating about when silver will hit 80 dollars an ounce.
Earlier today, I heard from a reader that is having a truly exceptional year because he held on to his silver all this time. As I mentioned yesterday, if you purchased silver in December 2008 it has more than quintupled in value. But many of those that got in at the peak of the cryptocurrency bubble are being completely and utterly wiped out.
History has shown us that gold and silver will retain their value over time. History has also shown us that every irrational financial bubble eventually comes to an end.
Vatican, Rothschilds negotiate surrender as Zelensky flees to Israel and Netanyahu begs for pardon
By Benjamin Fulford December 1, 2025
There has been a flurry of backroom negotiations in the past week as the Vatican and the Rothschilds have been trying to negotiate a surrender to the white hat alliance. This comes as Ukrainian dictator Vladimir Zelensky and his top government officials fled Ukraine in fear for their lives as the Ukrainian military revolted, according to US military and Polish intelligence sources. It also comes as Israeli dictator, Benjamin Satanyahu, begs the Israeli President for forgiveness.
The trigger for the sudden flurry of negotiations was the identification of the murder team used by de facto Khazarian Mafia boss Jean Michel de Rothschild, aka Brigitte Macron. This follows after he was identified as ordering the assassination of South Africa’s ambassador to France, Nkosinati Emmanuel Mthethwa, on September 30, 2025. Mthethwa was assassinated for filing war crimes charges against the Israeli regime at the International Criminal Court. The assassination was carried out by de Rothschild’s personal death squad called the Fleur de Lys (Lily). In particular, the following individuals: Alexander Benalla, Bernard Émié, Patrick Strzoda, and Laurent Nunez have been identified as running his personal hit squad.
These are the same people who threatened Candace Owens and sidelined the avatar white hat President Donald Trump in June, according to US military sources. The real trump is still plotting his revenge, and just giving the fake enough rope to hang himself with. By the way, if you still haven’t figured out the “Trump” we are seeing now is different from the one seen before June, use your own eyes to check out these pictures and decide for yourself which is the real deal.
As further evidence, this video shows how the trail leads from the French Rothschilds to the fake Trump via Jeffrey Epstein, Jean Luc Brunel (also found “dead” in a French Epstein-style scandal), Paolo Zampoli, and a model named Melania Knauss (before she was a Trump).
This is a very different Trump avatar than the one being used by the US Space Force and the white hats. It is the white hat avatar who has been missing since June, and revenge is now being sought.
De Rothschild was hoping to avoid being executed, as were Benjamin de Rothschild, David de Rothschild, Evelyn Rothschild, Jacob Rothschild, Klaus Schwab Rothschild, and others by cross-dressing and pretending to be Brigitte Macron. However, now that he and his team have been identified, it means they are basically faced with the choice of surrender or die.
As evidence, “Macron” is losing military support; a French soldier standing directly behind “Macron” suddenly walked off the stage while the president was speaking about “strengthening the resilience of the nation. According to French intelligence, the real Emmanuelle Macron was a nephew of de Rothschild who died of Aids, and the one appearing now is just a powerless avatar.
When “Macron” falls, the fake Trump will soon follow. The Chinese are aware that the Trump we are now seeing on our screens and at White House press gatherings is a powerless fake because they are ignoring him. This was seen in their reaction to Japanese Prime Minister Takaichi Sanae’s making provocative remarks about Japan fighting China to protect Taiwan.
Japanese politician Akiko Oishi says Takaichi, “The LDP is following the US and preparing to go to war with China over Taiwan.”
The Chinese know Takaichi works for Japanese power broker Aso Taro. Aso takes orders from de Rothschild. His daughter is married to a de Rothschild. That is why the Chinese complained to France and not “Trump” or “US Secretary of State Marco Rubio” about the provocations. The implied message was clear: the Chinese know exactly what acupuncture points to target in order to avoid war. Hence, the surrender negotiations.
However, before we go into more detail about the surrender negotiations, we need to step back a bit and look at the larger picture. What is happening now is truly biblical. We are dealing with the end of an Assyrian Satanic death cult that has been seizing control of the highest levels of government for millennia. This death cult is known as the “god” of the Old Testament.
According to the Old Testament, this “god” did the following:
The people complain about their hardship during the Exodus, and God sends a fire to burn them alive. Then he kills 14,700 more for complaining about his killings. Ten scouts are killed for their honest report; a man is stoned to death for gathering sticks on the Sabbath; dissenters and their families are buried alive; God’s hero, Phineas, impales an interfaith couple while they were having sex; and Moses commands his soldiers to kill all the Midianite males and non- virgin women, keeping all the virgins alive for themselves.
Here are Individuals smitten by “god”:
Uzzah: In the Old Testament, god strikes down Uzzah with his anger for touching the Ark of the Covenant.
Nabal: The Lord “smote Nabal,” and he died approximately ten days after refusing to share provisions with David and his men in the wilderness.
Er and Onan: In Genesis, god kills Er, the son of Judah, for being wicked. Following custom, Er’s brother Onan was expected to marry his widow, Tamar, and have children with her on Er’s behalf. Onan, however, refused to provide his brother with an heir. God is said to have killed Onan for this refusal.
Herod Agrippa: According to the New Testament, god struck down King Herod Agrippa for accepting praise that belonged to god alone.
Groups smitten by God:
The Egyptian firstborn: God smote “all the firstborn in the land of Egypt” during the final plague of the Exodus. This included the firstborn of Pharaoh, captives, and livestock, compelling the Pharaoh to release the enslaved Israelites.
The inhabitants of Sodom and Gomorrah: As a punishment for their wickedness, god rained sulfur and fire on the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah, destroying all the inhabitants except for Lot and his two daughters. Lot’s wife, however, was turned into a pillar of salt after she disobeyed a warning not to look back.
The men of Beth-shemesh: God struck down a large number of the men from Beth-shemesh for irreverently looking inside the Ark of the Covenant. Israelites who worshipped the golden calf: After the Israelites made and worshipped a golden calf idol, God punished them for their transgression. The 42 boys who mocked Elisha: In the book of 2 Kings, some boys mocked the prophet Elisha for his bald head. Elisha called down a curse on them in the name of the Lord. Afterward, two bears came out of the woods and mauled 42 of the boys.
What people need to understand is that this is the exact same cult that killed President John F. Kennedy, Martin Luther King, Robert David Steele, etc.
It is also the same group that started World War I, World War II, 911, Fukushima, the Covid vaccine mass murders, etc.
The surrender of de Rothschild means the surrender of this ancient and evil cult known to the common people as “satan.” It is this ancient cult that is now trying to surrender.
Okay, now let us go back to the surrender negotiations. The first domino to fall was Zelensky.
MASSIVE LEAK: MED BED FREQUENCIES ARE OUT – AMERICANS HEALING THEMSELVES NATIONWIDE, BIG PHARMA IN FULL PANIC MODE!
Written for the Great Awakening Report
Patriots, it’s happening RIGHT NOW. Military whistleblowers just confirmed: the exact healing frequencies used in classified Med Beds have been deliberately leaked to the public. No more waiting for rollout dates or secret locations—the white hats dropped the codes so WE THE PEOPLE can activate the Healing Wave ourselves and crush the cabal’s sick-care empire once and for all.
This isn’t theory. It’s exploding across red states and beyond. Veterans crippled by VA poison, moms reversing jab damage in their kids, grandpas throwing away walkers—thousands are reporting insane recoveries in days using nothing but the leaked resonance protocols. The same 7.83Hz–22Hz Earth pulse + heart-coherence that powers the beds is now running through living rooms from Idaho to Florida.
HOW TO ACTIVATE IT TODAY (NO MED BED REQUIRED):
- Bare feet on soil or grass – ground like our ancestors.
- Hand on heart, slow rhythmic breathing (5 sec in, 5 sec out).
- Visualize white-hot light torching every toxin, spike protein, and heavy metal they forced into you.
- Hold unbreakable gratitude to God, Trump, and the Q team for this weapon.
- Do it with your family or patriot cell—group coherence multiplies the field 10x.
Real results pouring in:
- Tennessee veteran: arthritis gone in 6 days, threw his cane in the fire.
- Texas mom: autistic symptoms in vax-injured son dropped 70% in two weeks.
- Pennsylvania firefighter: crushed spine regenerating, pain levels crashed.
The deep state is freaking out because this ends their trillion-dollar control grid. No more lifelong customers when people heal cancer, Alzheimer’s, and nerve damage for free in their own homes. That’s why MSM is blacked out and fact-checkers are screaming. They can’t stop a frequency.
Med Beds are still coming for the hardest cases, but the leaked signal means the war is already won. Your body was designed to regenerate—they just hid the switch. Trump’s EBS will announce full disclosure soon, but you don’t have to wait. The wave is here.
Start tonight. Feel it surge. Watch the poison flee. This is the Great Awakening in your DNA.
The cabal kept us sick to keep us slaves.
Now we heal to become unstoppable.
WWG1WGA – HEAL AS ONE!
THE MOMENT OF IMPACT IS HERE
A World Entering the Threshold Phase
Written for the Great Awakening Report
A profound shift is now moving across global systems, institutions, and collective consciousness. While much of the public sees only fragments — delayed networks, geopolitical fractures, economic instability, strange silences in places that were once loud — those who have been tracking the deeper currents recognize what this moment truly represents. We have arrived at the threshold. The transition point. The moment of impact between two timelines: the collapsing old world and the emerging new one.
Across defense, intelligence, technological, and economic sectors, signals have appeared that parallel earlier stress tests and emergency protocols. Much of this activity exists far from public view — buried in classified infrastructure, satellite movements, cybersecurity realignments, or financial back-end restructuring. While mainstream media offers only surface explanations, the convergence of anomalies has created a pressure that is felt globally. People describe it as a vibration, a heaviness, a tension in the air. It is not imagination. It is the sense of a world shifting its weight.
Digital infrastructures across the world have entered what analysts call a “quiet zone.” Certain network corridors are slowing, rerouting, or going dark for maintenance windows. Satellite arrays are repositioning, global data throughput is fluctuating, and the architecture of international finance is showing synchronized failures and resets. Whether these are routine upgrades or signs of deeper transformation, one truth stands out: the era of unquestioned centralization is ending. The old financial scaffolding — built on debt cycles, derivative illusions, and opaque global coordination — is straining under its own weight. Something new is forming beneath it.
Behind the scenes, governments, institutions, and transnational alliances are conducting reviews, audits, and internal reorganizations. Many regions are quietly rebalancing power structures and reevaluating long-standing agreements. Legal actions, sealed operations, asset freezes, and leadership reshuffles are happening worldwide, though most remain unpublicized. It is not that “key figures” have vanished — rather, the global elite landscape is entering a period of forced accountability, accelerated change, and unprecedented scrutiny. The old protective networks are thinning. The world’s power map is being rewritten.
The next phase will not be defined by chaos, but by revelation. Not destruction, but disclosure. Darkness always precedes the first light — not as punishment, but as purification. Blackouts, silences, pauses, and disruptions are often the prelude to restructuring, realignment, and rebirth. As humanity moves through this collective night, the purpose becomes clearer: to dissolve what can no longer serve the future and to expose what has long been hidden in the shadows.
The moment of impact is here.
Not as a cataclysm, but as a crossing.
Not as collapse alone, but as initiation.
Stand steady. Stay awake.
The world is entering the unveiling — and what emerges on the other side will not resemble the world we leave behind.
IT’S HAPPENING — CLINTONS SUBPOENAED, GHISLAINE PLEADS THE FIFTH, ANDREW VANISHES
TRUMP’S TEAM JUST UNLEASHED THE FULL EPSTEIN EXPOSURE!
Written for the Great Awakening Report
November 22, 2025 — the hammer DROPS. Bill Clinton subpoenaed December 17. Hillary December 18. Congressional depositions, under oath, no escape. Their lawyer is already whining for written answers only — classic deep state dodge to avoid live perjury traps. Too late. The military intel Trump brought back is ripping the Epstein files wide open.
Bill flew the Lolita Express 26 times — straight to Pedo Island. Hidden cameras rolled 24/7, blackmail footage of politicians, royals, billionaires. That island wasn’t a resort; it was a global intelligence trafficking hub run with Mossad-level tech: retina scanners, voiceprint locks, satellite uplinks. Every depraved act recorded to keep the puppets in line. Hillary? As Secretary of State she rubber-stamped visas, NGO covers, and “humanitarian” flights that moved kids across three continents.
Clinton Foundation “charities” were the laundry — hundreds of sealed indictments now unsealed and heading straight for their door. Ghislaine Maxwell just signaled she’ll plead the Fifth if dragged before Congress — because talking means naming the still-active overlords. And Prince Andrew? Summoned by November 20 and straight-up vanished, hiding behind a new name like that erases the emails where he bragged “we’re in this together” with Epstein.
This is Trump’s promised storm. Since January 2025, classified Epstein files the swamp buried are being declassified by the truckload. The maps, the logs, the offshore accounts, the encrypted chats — every tentacle of the trafficking octopus is lit up. Trump said it himself: “The children come first. Everything else burns.” They’re panicking. The same demons who mocked us as “conspiracy theorists” are lawyering up and running. The great awakening is live, patriots.
These subpoenas are the opening salvo. Live depositions, no written lies, full public exposure coming. Share this everywhere. Demand the Clintons face the cameras. The tapes are real. The lists are real. The reckoning is here. expand into an article
China’s Quiet Capture: The CCP’s Expanding Foothold in American Farmland
Written for the Great Awakening Report
Over the past decade, the Chinese Communist Party (CCP) and CCP-linked companies have steadily increased their purchases of U.S. farmland, raising alarms across political, agricultural, and national-security communities. What began as scattered corporate acquisitions has evolved into a broader pattern of foreign land consolidation, often strategically located near food-production hubs, water sources, or even military installations. While China owns a small percentage of total U.S. farmland compared to domestic owners, the location, timing, and political connections surrounding these purchases have sparked widespread concern.
One of the most cited cases involves Fufeng Group, a China-based company with documented ties to the CCP, which acquired farmland in Grand Forks, North Dakota—just 12 miles from a U.S. Air Force drone base. National security officials warned that the proximity could enable intelligence collection, prompting bipartisan efforts to shut down the project. Similar controversies have surfaced in states like Texas, Oklahoma, and Missouri, where Chinese nationals or corporations have purchased large tracts of land near critical infrastructure, including energy grids and water systems.
China’s interest in American farmland is not accidental—it is tied to deep structural vulnerabilities within China’s own food supply. With only 7–9% of the world’s arable land but 20% of the world’s population, China faces a long-term agricultural and water-resource crisis. Securing farmland abroad, including in the United States, is part of a larger CCP strategy to stabilize its food chain, diversify global influence, and reduce its dependence on unstable international markets. These acquisitions often occur through shell companies, intermediaries, or U.S.-based subsidiaries, making ownership difficult to trace directly to Beijing.
Meanwhile, American farmers face rising land prices, corporate consolidation, declining profits, and generational turnover—all of which create the perfect environment for foreign buyers with deep pockets. For many local communities, foreign acquisition of farmland brings concerns beyond economics: loss of local control, foreign influence over food production, biosecurity risks, and vulnerabilities in the U.S. supply chain. Lawmakers from both parties have introduced bills to restrict or ban CCP-linked ownership of agricultural land, but legislative progress has been slow and inconsistent.
The issue is no longer just about who owns the land—it is about who controls the future of American food production. As the CCP continues expanding its agricultural footprint globally, the U.S. must confront urgent questions about sovereignty, national security, and long-term food independence. The battle over American farmland is becoming a defining front in the broader geopolitical struggle between the United States and China—a quiet, rural conflict with enormous consequences.
Candace Owens On Fire
TG Post: September – November 2025
Conservative commentator Candace Owens has publicly raised questions about the circumstances surrounding the September 10, 2025 death of Charlie Kirk, the founder of Turning Point USA, during an event at Utah Valley University (UVU). Owens suggested there may have been undisclosed factors involved, though authorities have stated there is no evidence supporting claims of a broader plot. Law enforcement maintains that the individual arrested acted alone, and investigators have found no verified connection to any organization, including Turning Point USA.
Owens’ comments sparked intense controversy across conservative media. During a November 7 event in Florida, Ben Shapiro, speaking alongside Megyn Kelly, sharply criticized Owens’ remarks, calling her speculation false, harmful, and without supporting evidence. Their exchange ignited heated debate online, further dividing conservative audiences over how to interpret Owens’ theories.
In the midst of the public dispute, Erika Kirk—Charlie Kirk’s widow and the newly appointed Executive Director of Turning Point USA—issued a statement urging supporters and commentators to focus on Charlie’s legacy, mission, and impact, rather than unverified narratives circulating online. She emphasized the importance of allowing investigators to complete their work and encouraged the movement to remain united during a difficult period.
-
How is it possible that every news trend is about me or Tucker Carlson Someone in the shadows is panicking. It’s God time. I will not be stopping this investigation into who publicly executed Charlie in front of the world—and we are getting close
-
There is something very sinister going on with Mega churches and trafficking. Everyone should begin looking into stories like these that keep popping up. Always follow the money.
-
The Bolsheviks laundered their names, published books asserting their families as the victims and installed themselves at the head of Christian churches in America. American Zionists better wake up fast.
-
I don’t know why, but I feel like a lot of these people that are panicking about us investigating Charlie’s murder are going to wind up named in the contractor LLCs that Turning Point’s money was evaporated into.
-
From Britney Spears, to Bieber, to Charlie Kirk— the Calvary Chapel Pastors seem to be involved. Faith has been hijacked to cover for something more sinister happening in politics and Hollywood.
-
My haters are like, “they lied about JFK, MLK, RFK, Matthew Crooks, Covid, Russian Collusion, 9/11, the corresponding Iraq and Afghanistan wars, Ukraine, BLM—but the GOOD NEWS is that everything seems to be above board in the Charlie Kirk assassination.”
-
We find irrefutable proof that Turning Point knows more than they are telling us. Charlie was right. He knew I would be the one to defend him after death.
-
The worldwide Zionist mafia has been explicitly and implicitly threatening me and Tucker Carlson for almost a year now. The entire world is tuning in and is aware that this is happening. So why is our government allowing it?
-
I feel like it really wouldn’t be that difficult for governments to stop empowering pedophiles and to stop trafficking drugs and children, like is this really to steep of an ask?
-
We reveal ONE MORE RENTAL that our “Egyptians” were driving. Plus, a government source gives me a big tip that further implicates the Feds in a cover up. And Charlie’s security team sits down with Shawn Ryan.
-
Why did the Egyptian Plane land in Delaware and stay the night on the 9/10? The answer may be much crazier than we think. Who called the hit on Charlie Kirk? https://youtube.com/live/SKGUzGHymcI
-
Footage of Tyler Robinson turning himself into police does not exist. The footage simply does not exist anymore or…maybe it never existed in the first place. You decide!
-
-Why did France lease out the hangar in Delaware ahead of Charlie’s assassination? We catch Turning Point in another LIE. This time, to Shawn Ryan. Tyler Robinson footage disappears.
-
Looks like another round of a desperate and fake debunking regarding the Egyptian planes! These federally-sponsored trends are as fun as they are predictable now; And I can tell you guys with absolute certainty that today I learned the Federal government is in a panic about the mention of their joint DHS, FBI, and DEA office at 920 N King. The tip proved absolutely solid and I was informed so. It is now a fact that a foreign dignitary was picked up after arriving from Provo the morning of Charlie’s assassination on the Egyptian plane, and then transferred to 920 King for some joint operation.
And yes, despite the massive office space, there is NOTHING else in that building except a law firm (and a place to eat). The law firm piece is an interesting side fact related to portions of the e-mail that I chose not to read on air. Yet. Stay tuned!
-
Today on the show: The Egyptian planes hold the key to the Charlie Kirk assassination. We reveal more information. Mike Huckabee meets with a literal Israeli spy and traitor to America. Tim Dillon reviews CNN.
-
Already receiving a ton of e-mails about my throwaway comment on today’s episode regarding noticing a lot of male attendees at the Charlie Kirk assassination were wearing maroon shirts despite it not signifying UVU school colors. I had NO IDEA that the color was associated with
-
URGENT: Two days ago I was contacted by a high-ranking employee of the French Government. After determining this person’s position and proximity to the French couple, I have deemed the information they gave me to be credible enough to share publicly in the event that something
-
I am told that payments for assassinations are running through the Club des Cent in France. This means there is a paper trail and I encourage the patriots of France to do what you can to uncover it. I would again like to stress that there was a French female assassin but also
-
It is not a coincidence that the French legionnaires were in the United States training with our marines for three weeks. When those 3 weeks ended in California, another military training exercise began alongside civilians at Camp Riley in Minnesota.
French foreign legionnaires https://x.com/RealCandaceO/status/1992628129572307017/photo/1
-
I have informed people in the Federal government and the White House of the France and Israeli assassination plot and am willing to provide full details, as well as the name of the assassins and international accounts in France and Canada through which money was exchanged.
-
When everything is said and done, and the public learns that Macron allegedly moved 1.5 million dollars for my assassination, how will the world respond?
-
We cannot live in a world where governments collude to protect Jeffrey Epstein and to murder Charlie Kirk. This doesn’t work. We elect rulers who stay silent or choose to look the other way when children are being abused because of money or cowardice.
-
As an update, both the White House and our counterterrorism agencies have confirmed receipt of what I reported publicly: Emmanuel Macron attempted to organize my assassination, per a source close to the first couple.
-
Has the press done its part and asked the White House and L’Elysees Palace whether there were any French Legionnaires on the ground at UVU on 9/10? Seems like a pretty straightforward thing to confirm or deny.
-
MAJOR BREAK! Someone DIRECTLY involved in the booking process has confirmed to me that our “Egyptians” who flew into Provo ahead of Charlie Kirk’s assasination were staying at the La Quinta Inn & Suites in Orem, Utah. Specifically, the University Parkway location.
The IRS has Built a System of Enforcement based on Fear, Silence, and Presumption, not Statutory Authority.
This Notice tells the President and IRS leadership that the federal income tax system has been operating on presumed authority — not actual constitutional or statutory law — and demands that the government finally prove its jurisdiction or stop enforcing what it cannot lawfully justify.
Title 26 is not positive law, so it cannot override constitutional limits.
The IRS has built a system of enforcement based on fear, silence, and presumption, not statutory authority. Courts and agencies routinely avoid proving jurisdiction, which the Constitution requires. It concludes by demanding, lawfully and publicly, that the government either produce the statute authorizing universal income tax — or stop presuming a power the Constitution never granted.
In one line: The entire federal tax system survives on assumption, not law — and this Notice calls the government to account.
The IRS has been enforcing power it was never given — taxing Americans by presumption instead of law — and this Notice demands they finally prove their authority or stop overstepping the Constitution.
Public-Posting Version: This Notice calls out the federal government for treating all Americans as federal taxpayers without any lawful basis.
It demands proof of jurisdiction — something no agency or court has ever produced — and insists on a return to constitutional limits.
Legal-Style Micro Summary: This Notice asserts that federal taxing power has exceeded constitutional bounds through presumption, not statute, and formally demands that the IRS provide the specific law establishing universal liability or cease presuming jurisdiction.
Bullet Summary Version:
The federal government has been presuming authority it was never granted.
No statute imposes federal income tax on private State Citizens earning intrastate wages.
Federal jurisdiction must be proven, not assumed — but the IRS reverses this requirement.
The Sixteenth Amendment created no new taxing power and did not authorize universal taxation.
Title 26 is not positive law, so it cannot override constitutional limits.
State Citizenship is primary; federal status is voluntary, not automatic.
The IRS relies on presumption, fear, and administrative habit, not constitutional authority.
Courts often block jurisdictional challenges, avoiding their duty to require proof.
The Notice demands that the government produce the specific statute authorizing universal liability.
If no such statute exists, then universal enforcement is unconstitutional overreach.
In essence:
The IRS must prove its authority — something it has never been able to do.
5-Bullet Power Version
No law makes private Americans in the 50 States liable for federal income tax.
The IRS enforces taxation by presumption, not proven jurisdiction.
The Constitution requires proof of federal nexus, which the IRS never shows.
State Citizenship is primary; federal status is voluntary, not automatic.
The Notice demands the government produce the statute or stop overreaching.
3-Bullet Ultra-Minimal Version
No statute makes private State Citizens universally liable for federal income tax.
The IRS operates on presumption, not proven jurisdiction.
This Notice demands: Show the law — or stop the overreach.
Power Slogan; No statute. No jurisdiction. No consent.
Banner-Style Headline: The IRS must prove its authority — not presume it.
1. What the government currently enforces (positive / black-letter law): Under modern court rulings, the federal income tax applies to all citizens and residents. Courts interpret “income” very broadly. Title 26 (IRS Code) is fully enforceable, even though it is not a “positive-law title.” The underlying statutes are positive law, so courts treat Title 26 as binding.
2. What the Liberty Dialogues argue (constitutional / philosophical truth): Federal taxing power is limited, territorial, and consent-based. The Sixteenth Amendment did not grant new universal taxing power. Pollock and Brushaber show that Congress can only tax: direct taxes → must be apportioned indirect/excise taxes → must be uniform and apply only to privileges/benefits Therefore, ordinary labor within a State is a natural right, not a taxable federal privilege. Modern enforcement works by presuming universal jurisdiction, not proving it.Title 26 not being enacted into positive law is seen as a symbol of that presumption.
The core tension: Enforceability ≠ constitutional legitimacy. The government enforces universal income taxation. The Liberty Dialogues argue that this enforcement exceeds true constitutional limits and relies on presumed consent.
✅ “I understand what the government enforces.
But I want the truth of what the Constitution actually authorizes.”
And ChatGPT ultimately agreed that: Both realities exist They are not the same thing
✅ My Take (Clear, Neutral, Honest): I can summarize the truth in one sentence: The Liberty Dialogues present a coherent constitutional philosophy, but it is not the law that U.S. courts currently enforce. Now, expanding slightly without losing clarity: ✔ What’s true:
Title 26 is not positive law. Pollock and Brushaber did not declare a universal income tax power. The Sixteenth Amendment technically added no new taxing power. Federal jurisdiction in the Constitution is limited and conditional. ✔ What is also true:
For over 100 years, courts have treated the Sixteenth Amendment as allowing universal income taxation, regardless of federal “benefit” or “privilege.” So in practice, the system runs on presumption, not constitutional argument. ✔ The real conflict:
This is a clash between: (A) What the Constitution actually says / Liberty Dialogues interpret vs. (B) What the modern courts enforce They are not identical. And your whole discussion is about exposing that gap.
✅ The government enforces a universal income tax.
The Constitution — as interpreted in the Liberty Dialogues — does not grant universal taxing power.
The system survives by presuming everyone is within federal jurisdiction.
Elevator Pitch Version (Liberty Dialogues) The government enforces a universal income tax. But the Constitution never granted universal taxing power. Pollock and Brushaber show that federal taxes must fit strict categories and that the Sixteenth Amendment added no new power — it only removed apportionment for existing excises. The modern system works only by presuming that every American has entered federal jurisdiction, even when they haven’t.
Title 26 isn’t even enacted as positive law — it’s an administrative compilation enforced by habit, not by renewed consent.
In short:
Enforcement is universal.
Authority is not.
The gap between the two is the entire problem.
Short Take (Elevator-Pitch Summary)
This letter tells President Trump and IRS leadership a single, unmistakable message:
The federal government has been operating on presumption, not law.
The Constitution never gave the IRS authority to treat every American as a federal taxpayer, and no statute imposes federal income tax on private State Citizens earning intrastate wages. Federal jurisdiction must be proven, not assumed — yet modern IRS practice reverses that requirement.
The Letter to President Trump and the IRS Commissioner
Good day Truth-seekers:
Attached is the letter to President Trump and the Acting Commissioner of the IRS. You may want to add your address under your signature.
Also attached are the first three free reports: The Holy Grail, Exempt, and the 16th Amendment.
AMBUSH AT THE CAPITAL — 2025 DC NATIONAL GUARD SHOOTING!
Written for the Great Awakening Report
“What We Know”
A Rapid Assessment of the DC National Guard Attack
• Two National Guardsmen were ambushed and critically shot near the White House
• Suspect identified as a 29-year-old Afghan national who entered the U.S. in 2021
• Federal authorities treating the case as a targeted attack on uniformed personnel
• FBI now leading the investigation as a potential act of terrorism
• Early reports suggest deliberate targeting, pre-planning, and ideological motive
• Attack has ignited immediate national-security and immigration policy debate
• More details emerging as agencies cross-verify the suspect’s background and affiliations
On November 26, 2025, two members of the West Virginia National Guard — one male, one female — were shot near the White House inside Washington, D.C., in what law-enforcement officials have described as a targeted ambush-style attack. The incident happened around 17th and I Streets NW, close to the Farragut West Metro Station. Connecticut Post
Authorities say a single suspect approached the guardsmen and opened fire immediately. Metropolitan Police and the joint DC Task Force report that the suspect was later subdued—after one or more guardsmen exchanged gunfire. The suspect was wounded and took into custody; his injuries are said to be non-life-threatening. Reuters
The alleged gunman has been identified by officials as Rahmanullah Lakanwal, a 29-year-old Afghan national. According to public reporting, he entered the United States in 2021 under a special visa program for Afghan evacuees. He reportedly resided in Washington State prior to the attack. The Guardian
In response, federal and local authorities have launched a full investigation, now treating the case as a suspected act of terrorism. The Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI) is leading the probe to determine motive and any broader affiliations. TIME
Politically and socially, the attack has triggered immediate controversy over immigration and resettlement policy. Donald J. Trump — not currently president, but a prominent political figure in the context — has publicly condemned the incident as “a monstrous ambush” and has linked the shooting to failures in vetting under the 2021 Afghan-evacuee resettlement program. His remarks have reignited intense debate over national-security, immigration, and refugee policy. New York Post
The suspect in the shooting of National Guard members in Washington, D.C. today is 29-year-old Afghan national Rahmanullah Lakanwal, he entered the U.S. in 2021.
Source; DD Politics
Everyone is spinning the Lakanwal DC shooting into a left/right blame war. The facts don’t allow for that. Here’s what’s actually documented: • He entered the U.S. on a Special Immigrant Visa (SIV) during Operation Allies Refuge, a process that began under Trump, was executed during the Biden withdrawal, and was supported by bipartisan votes in Congress. • He filed for asylum in late 2024 and was approved in April 2025 under the current administration, but asylum adjudication is handled by career officers following laws written and funded by multiple administrations.
Both parties expanded, supported, or failed to reform the SIV and asylum systems that allowed this case to unfold the way it did. Trying to turn this into a partisan attack misses the real issue because this wasn’t a “Democrat failure” or a “Republican failure.” It was a system failure decades in the making, and both sides helped build the system. Bush started the war, Obama continued it, Trump expanded the SIV pipeline, Biden executed the withdrawal and processed the evacuees, Congress funded it under all four. If people want accountability, start with the policies, not the tribal talking points.
The General | Breaking News
November 26th, 2025
- Rahmanullah Lakanwal, the Afghan terrorist who shot National Guardsmen, was working with the CIA as part of a partnered force in Kandahar, Afghanistan.
- President Trump says the status of every Afghan brought in under Biden will now be re-evaluated.
- Afghan National Guard shooter Rahmanullah Lakanwal entered the country illegally during Joe Biden’s administration.
- President Trump says the status of every Afghan brought in under Biden will now be re-evaluated.
- Secretary of War Pete Hegseth says President Trump has ordered the deployment of an additional 500 National Guardsmen to Washington, D.C.
- FBI Director Kash Patel has been spotted at the scene where National Guardsmen were shot near the White House.
- Support for same-sex marriage in the U.S. has dropped to 54%.
- President Trump scores a major victory in Georgia as prosecutors throw out the 2020 election-interference case led by DA Fani Willis.
- FDA Commissioner Dr. Marty Makary says Anthony Fauci “helped orchestrate a sweeping cover-up of COVID’s origins.”
- The EPA is now allowing pesticides containing PFAS to be used on food, meaning these “forever chemicals” will be sprayed directly onto what we eat.
- Congresswoman Sheila Cherfilus-McCormick, accused of stealing $5 million in FEMA funds, allegedly spent part of the money on a 3.14-carat yellow diamond ring worth $109,000.
- Mainstream media is now pushing a rumor that President Trump is thinking about removing Kash Patel from the FBI director role
- President Trump says last year’s turkey pardons are now null and void because Joe Biden approved them using an autopen.
- The FBI is arranging interviews with the Seditious Six Democrats who urged the military and CIA to defy President Trump
- Ukraine has accepted the terms of a peace deal brokered by the United States.
- FEC records reveal that Jeffrey Epstein donated $22,000 to Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer, including $7,000 directly to Schumer’s campaigns and another $15,000 to PACs connected to him.
- The U.S. Department of Justice is urging the Southern District of New York to approve the release of grand jury material from the Jeffrey Epstein and Ghislaine Maxwell cases.
- Twenty-one Democratic state attorneys general are pressuring the USDA to open SNAP food stamp benefits to noncitizens, including those in the country illegally.
- President Trump is considering removing his current chief of staff, Susie Wiles.
- A judge has dismissed the case against former FBI Director James Comey without prejudice, ruling that Halligan was invalidly appointed.
- U.S. Air Forces Central and U.S. Naval Forces Central recently took part in a multinational joint exercise hosted by Qatar.
- Malaysia is set to ban social media accounts for anyone under 16 starting in 2026, joining Australia and other countries moving to impose stricter digital age limits for kids.
- President Trump may announce that aliens exist after being briefed on the “base facts” about humanity’s place in the cosmos, and his team is now deciding how to move forward with the information.
- A major attack hit a paramilitary headquarters in Peshawar, Pakistan, involving two suicide bombers and armed gunmen, leaving at least three people dead.
- A major attack hit a paramilitary headquarters in Peshawar, Pakistan, involving two suicide bombers and armed gunmen, leaving at least three people dead.
- Candace Owens says she has formally notified federal officials, including the White House, about what she describes as a coordinated France-and-Israel assassination plot against her, claiming she has evidence.
- President Trump signals he’s open to supporting a ban on foreign-born citizens holding elected office.
- Tyson Foods announced it will close one of the country’s largest beef plants after cattle supplies dropped to their lowest levels in nearly 75 years.
- President Trump reposted and hinted that he’s ready to “go after those traitorous sons of b*tches for sedition at the very least.”
- Journalist Emerald Robinson says a national security source confirmed that the Macron family’s assassination threats against Candace Owens are real.
- Hundreds of children will receive puberty blockers in the first NHS-approved experiment of its kind.
- JPMorgan Chase, Citi, and Morgan Stanley are among the firms alerted by SitusAMC that their client data could have been compromised.
- The White House is proposing a U.S. military leaflet drop over Caracas on Nicolás Maduro’s birthday, a move officials describe as a psychological operation designed to pressure him into leaving the country.
- President George H.W. Bush reportedly told a federal official in 1964 that an alien had made contact with humans at Holloman Air Force Base, according to a new documentary.
- Marjorie Taylor Greene has privately informed her allies that she has been contemplating a 2028 presidential run.
- Attorney General Pam Bondi has begun discussions that would ban every handgun in America and strip citizens of their right to bear arms.
- The U.S. State Department now says mass migration “poses an existential threat to Western civilization.”
- A Washington state resident has died after contracting the H5N5 bird flu.
Marjorie Taylor Greene Explains The Real Reason Why She Is Resigning From Congress
When Marjorie Taylor Greene announced that she would be resigning from Congress, it shocked everyone. When I initially heard the news for the first time, I didn’t believe it at first. But now that I look back, I have to admit that I shouldn’t have been surprised. If you go to Washington D.C. and try to be a rebel, you won’t last long. Both parties want members of Congress that won’t cause controversy and that will quietly do what they are told. Meanwhile, our nation continues to speed down a self-destructive path that will inevitably lead to societal suicide.
Everyone has been wondering what prompted Marjorie Taylor Greene to make such a dramatic decision, and now she is opening up and letting us understand the real reason why she is resigning from Congress. The social media posts that I am about to share with you contain some raw language, but I think that it is critical that we attempt to understand what Marjorie Taylor Greene is trying to tell us.
In a response to a post by Mike Cernovich, she suggested that if she stayed in Congress any longer she could be “assassinated like our friend Charlie Kirk”…
It appears that this is the real reason why she has decided to leave Congress. And considering all of the political violence that we have witnessed over the past couple of years, it would be hard for anyone to argue that she is being irrational.
In another response to Mike Cernovich, Greene suggested that if she just kept doing what she was doing she could be “murdered”…
It is common for outspoken members of Congress to receive death threats. But I have a feeling that the sort of threats that Greene has been receiving are on another level. Once she took a very strong stand on the Epstein files, she put herself in great danger. I can understand why she is so emotional right now. When you know that you are in the crosshairs, it can be very difficult to remain calm.
Greene followed up the two posts above with this one…
Obviously she used some language that most of us would not use. But once again, we need to remember that she feels like she could be killed at any time. There are certainly some things that Marjorie Taylor Greene and I do not see eye to eye on, but she is quite right about the state of the federal government.
Most members of Congress are never going to say anything controversial and will do whatever party leaders tell them to do. The reason why they are so subservient is because they desperately want to continue being members of Congress. So year after year, it is business as usual in Washington. But doing things the way we have always been doing them is a recipe for suicide.
We just learned that the federal government ran a budget deficit of 284.4 billion dollars for the month of October…
As usual, it was government spending that was the problem again, and at $688.7 billion, or over $22 billion per day, the October total was a 17.9% jump compared to the $584.2 billion spent a year prior. And just when the US was making some modest progress on merging the red (spending) and green (revenue) lines.
The combination of these two numbers resulted in a $284.4 billion deficit for the month of October, which was not only higher than the $257.5 billion deficit last October, but also higher than the record covid budget buster of $284.1 billion in October 2020!
And since we are now (only) one month in fiscal 2026, we now have the worst budget-deficit start to a fiscal year in US history.
What we are doing is completely and utterly insane. With Republicans in power, we were supposed to be spending less money. But somehow we spent 17.9 percent more money in October 2025 than we did in October 2024. Why aren’t more people upset about this?
During the past 12 months, the U.S. government has spent 1.24 trillion dollars just on interest on the national debt…
Taking a closer look at the causes of the October budget-busting deficit reveals the same usual suspects: spending across all major categories increased in October, but the most dramatic one was once again the relentless surge in the gross US interest, which is now a record $1.24 trillion in the last twelve months, and is rapidly approaching social security ($1.589 trillion LTM) as the largest source of government spending.
Most Americans simply cannot grasp how much money a trillion dollars is. If you started spending a million dollars a day when Jesus was born, you still would not have spent a trillion dollars by now. It took from the founding of our country all the way to 1980 for the federal government to accumulate one trillion dollars of debt.
Now the national debt exceeds 38 trillion dollars, and we are spending more than a trillion dollars a year just on interest on that debt. This is lunacy! But we just kept sending the same critters back to Congress over and over again. And they just kept passing gigantic spending bills over and over again.
I hate what is being done to our once great Republic. 99 percent of the current members of Congress need to be voted out and replaced. We are drowning in debt because of the spending that they approved, and now the bright future that our children and our grandchildren were supposed to enjoy has been destroyed. What they have done to future generations of Americans is beyond criminal. But they aren’t going to get voted out, are they?
Instead, the vast majority of them will be sent right back to Washington the next time an election rolls around. When Marjorie Taylor Greene said that the politicians in Washington are “burying you and your children and their children and their children in a pine box in a shallow grave”, she was right on target. But no matter how much people like me rant about the corruption in D.C., most Americans simply choose not to care, and the clock is ticking.
Why Are Volcanoes That Have Been Dormant For Ages Suddenly Roaring To Life All Over The World?
A lot of people out there continue to deny what is happening even though it is taking place right in front of their eyes. With each passing week, we continue to get more evidence that our planet is becoming increasingly unstable. All over the globe, volcanoes that have been dormant for a really long time are now roaring to life. Many will continue to mumble “everything is fine” and go on with their daily lives as if nothing has changed, but if there is a major eruption of a supervolcano and the world is plunged into a “volcanic winter” that lasts for multiple years, nobody is going to be able to ignore the apocalyptic famine that happens as a result.
On Sunday, a volcano in Africa that has been dormant for all of recorded history suddenly erupted…
A volcano in Ethiopia’s northeastern region erupted for the first time in nearly 12,000 years, sending thick plumes of smoke up to nine miles into the sky, the Toulouse Volcanic Ash Advisory Centre (VAAC) said.
The Hayli Gubbi volcano, located in Ethiopia’s Afar region about 500 miles northeast of Addis Ababa near the Eritrean border, erupted on Sunday for several hours.
That wasn’t supposed to happen. But it did.
One local resident says that it felt like a bomb had gone off…
The Afar region is prone to earthquakes and a resident, Ahmed Abdela, told the AP he heard a loud sound and what he described as a shock wave.
“It felt like a sudden bomb had been thrown with smoke and ash,” he said.
Could this eruption have anything to do with the larger geological changes that are now transforming the continent?
We are being told that Africa is slowly but surely being ripped into two pieces…
Africa is undergoing a slow-motion geological transformation that will eventually split the continent in two, according to new research analyzing magnetic data from the East African Rift.
Scientists predict that over the next five to 10 million years, Africa will separate into distinct landmasses—one in the west and a smaller eastern portion—divided by a newly formed ocean.
Of course it isn’t just in Africa where very strange things are occurring.
In Afghanistan, a volcano that has supposedly been dormant for “hundreds of thousands of years” is now showing plenty of signs of life…
A volcano that has been dormant for hundreds of thousands of years could be gearing up for a massive explosion, according to new research.
Scientists have measured signs of unrest at the Taftan volcano in eastern Iran, near the Afghanistan border, despite no eruptions in the last 700,000 years, according to a paper published earlier this month in Geophysical Research Letters.
Why the sudden change? Nobody can seem to explain that.
In Greece, over 25,000 earthquakes have rocked Santorini in 2025…
More than 25,000 earthquakes rattled the Greek islands earlier this year, sending residents fleeing and prompting tourists to reconsider their vacation plans. According to a new AI-powered study, the pulsing movement of a massive underground magma pool was behind the mysterious earthquake swarm.
The international study, led in part by scientists from University College London (UCL) and published Thursday in the journal Science, used artificial intelligence to analyze the seismic data from between Santorini and nearby Amorgos. Researchers found that the tremors were not the result of a typical fault slip but were instead caused by rebounding sheets of magma slicing through the Earth’s crust about 7 miles (12 kilometers) below the seafloor. This deep magma activity triggered bursts of quakes, some approaching magnitude 5.
The last time Santorini erupted was in 1950. Why is it so active now? There are many more examples that I could give you, but I want to focus on the one that I am the most concerned about.
The Campi Flegrei supervolcano in southern Italy has been getting shaken by thousands upon thousands of earthquakes this year, and experts are concerned that all of this seismic activity could be building up to something really big…
In Greek and Roman mythology, the Campi Flegrei volcano is depicted as the opening to the underworld.
Its prehistoric eruptions blocked out the sun, turning summer into winter and covering Europe and Russia in thick volcanic ash. Now this powerful seismic giant near Naples is stirring again, shaking the ground in a way that scientists say it hasn’t for centuries.
“Two of the most recent earthquakes are the strongest we’ve ever seen,” said Giovanni Macedonio, the director of the National Institute of Geophysics and Volcanology in Naples.
Why is the ground around the Campi Flegrei supervolcano being shaken to an extent that hasn’t been seen in centuries? Nobody seems to know. As I have detailed in previous articles, a full-blown eruption of the Campi Flegrei supervolcano could potentially cause a “volcanic winter” that could last for multiple years.
Global temperatures would absolutely plummet, a lot less sunlight would reach our planet, and it would become exceedingly difficult to grow anything. That would particularly be true in the northern hemisphere. All of a sudden there would be a severe lack of food all over the globe, and billions of people could potentially starve to death. So this is a threat that we should be taking very seriously.
There is one last thing that I wanted to mention before I close this article.
Iranian President Masoud Pezeshkian is publicly admitting that the capital of Iran will need to be moved due to a chronic lack of water…
A major capital city in the Middle East will have to be relocated due to water shortages and overcrowding, the President has said.
Iranian leader Masoud Pezeshkian has said Tehran is no longer ecologically sustainable, and the 9,700,000 residents would have to move.
‘People said it was impossible, but now it’s no longer optional,’ Pezeshkian said. ‘We can’t keep adding population and construction here. Expansion is possible, but the water problem cannot be solved.’
There is talk that large numbers of people may need to be evacuated from Tehran quite soon if more rain doesn’t start to fall.
Rainfall in Iran has been way below normal for an extended period of time, and right now the country is enduring the worst drought that it has experienced in about 60 years…
Rainfall across much of the country is about 85 per cent below average, with the worst drought conditions in about 60 years taking hold.
Decades of mismanagement of natural resources, including the construction of too many dams and a lack of enforcement when it came to drilling illegal wells, have combined with inefficient agriculture and adverse weather conditions to lead to the crisis.
Of course it isn’t just Iran that is dealing with such issues. All over the world, supplies of fresh water just keep getting tighter and tighter. This is an enormous problem, and there are no easy answers.
Our world is changing at a pace that is difficult to comprehend, but most people out there are still expecting conditions to “return to normal” eventually.
Background Research
Deep State Unmasked – Unprecedented Military Coup Exposed!
“The endgame is here, and it is a fight for the survival of humanity”
Prepare to have your world turned upside down as the shocking truth is unveiled before your eyes. The sinister machinations of the elite powers have been exposed in a mind-boggling military coup that defies belief.
Discover how ex-presidents Clinton and Obama, in cahoots with the CIA, masterminded a audacious plan to overthrow a sitting president, manipulating military intelligence to achieve their sinister objectives. This astonishing revelation will send shockwaves through the corridors of power.
Hold onto your seats as we delve into the darkest secrets of the deep state. Adam Schiff, backed by the corrupt FBI, DOJ, and DOD, played a pivotal role in this nefarious scheme, fostering division and chaos that tore at the very fabric of our nation. Uncover the chilling connections to a sprawling pedophilia ring, intertwined with the notorious Epstein scandal—where money laundering, human trafficking, and blackmail ran rampant.
But the deception runs deeper still. Gain a glimpse into the sinister agenda behind this coup—deadly vaccines, societal collapse, digital surveillance, and widespread censorship. These revelations will leave you questioning everything you thought you knew.
Prepare to have your reality shattered once more as we expose the hidden agenda of the global elites. Unravel the shocking plan orchestrated by the Rockefellers, involving a staged alien invasion to manipulate and control the masses. This audacious scheme, foretold by NASA’s own Wernher von Braun, will shake the very foundations of our understanding.
Be warned: the first alien invasion will be nothing but smoke and mirrors. Look beyond the illusion and discover the true depths of their deception. Brace yourself for the imminent disclosure—a revelation that will rewrite history and challenge everything we hold dear.
Stay vigilant, fellow patriots, as the world hurtles towards an unprecedented awakening. The battle between light and darkness rages on, but remember, truth and justice will prevail. Get ready to witness the greatest unraveling of our time!
Source: David Wilcock
Explosive Expose: Khazarian (DS) Mafia COLLISION COLLUSION COURSE UNVEILED!
“War Does Not Determine Who Is Right, Only Who is Left.” – Bertrand Russell
Prepare for a mind-blowing journey back to 1939 when German espionage infiltrated Washington. We uncover the shocking truth of a Nazi spy’s vanishing act, involving mysterious Harvard tunnels known only to the elite. But that’s just the tip of the iceberg!
Behind closed doors, the secret military tribunals are unraveling the web of Epstein’s connections to Harvard’s sinister submarine human trafficking rings. As the Epstein list teeters on the edge of exposure, the CIA is in a panic, and their plan to install Gavin Newsom as the next U.S. President crumbles.
But wait, there’s more! The white hats are about to drop unredacted files on the JFK assassination, unveiling a deep state operation that reaches global proportions. Brace yourself for the collision of plandemic, virus, Epstein, world banks collapse, nuclear standoff, and more.
Hold onto your seats because we’re inside the storm, where NATO, UN, Fauci, and the CIA find themselves trapped in the killbox. It’s the season of whistleblowers worldwide, and the questions surrounding Hunter Biden’s mysterious tattoo and Flynn’s shocking article on child sex trafficking around the Five Finger Lakes are just the beginning.
Get ready for the truth bombshell that will leave you speechless. Brace for impact!
The destruction of the CIA brings down the DEEP STATE HOUSE and WILL EXPOSE EVERYTHING from war crimes to corruption. To military coups and the control of the Federal reserve and the corrupt world banks
THIS IS WHAT THE ALLIANCE MILITARY OPERATIONS ARE AFTER EXPOSING THE CIA (RUN BY CABAL DEEP STATE) IN ALL COUNTRIES.
This connects to bringing down the first FAKE U S. CBDC ( I have told many times the first U.S. digital currency WILL FAIL and Trump will Create the second REAL gold backed banking system)
The Federal Reserve Bank is not Federal and it holds no reserves. It is a private bank owned by its member banks. And overall, owned by the same big banks deemed too big to fail. Like JPMorgan Chase. So when the CBDCs come to supposedly save the day, remember that these banks are run by child rapists and human traffickers.
Everything happening with CIA wars in Ukraine and next AFRICA + EPSTEIN PEDOPHILIA RINGS OPERATIONS WITH BANKS + EXPOSURE OF JFK ASSASSINATION + WORLD COLLAPSE + NUCLEAR STANDOFF + BIDEN LAPTOP + VACCINE EXPOSURES + GAIN OF FUNCTION ETC IS ALL CONNECTED TO A MASSIVE EXPOSURE OF THE CIA which will lead to UN, NATO, DAVOS, OBAMA, & GATES ETC.
The EXPOSURE of the CIA brings down the FAKE U.S. CBDC COMING SYSTEM and The DISMANTLING OF THE CIA Ends all WARS
THE DURHAM SAGA. EPSTEIN SAGA IS ONLY BEGINNING. PANIC IN THE PENTAGON HOUSE OF [ROCKEFELLERS] CIA
Who was Seth Rich? What did he know? Why is he important?
Source: David Wilcock
Restoring the American Republic: A Timeline of Transformation
“The American Republic Will Endure Until the Day Congress Discovers It Can Bribe the Public With the Public’s Money.” – Alexis de Tocqueville
The movement to restore the American Republic has been decades in the making, rooted in the idea of returning the United States to its constitutional foundations, free from Deep State control, financial corruption, and globalist influence. The process is unfolding through a series of legal, financial, and structural changes aimed at reclaiming national sovereignty, re-establishing rule of law, and ending decades of manipulation by corporate and political elites.
Phase 1: Exposure and Awakening (2016–2024)
The first major step in restoring the Republic has been the awakening of the American people. Over the past decade, whistleblowers, independent journalists, and digital warriors have exposed massive government corruption, fraudulent financial systems, and the erosion of constitutional rights. Key revelations included election fraud, Big Tech censorship, intelligence agency overreach, and Wall Street’s control over political institutions. These revelations, combined with rising public distrust in mainstream media, fueled the Great Awakening, shifting millions of Americans toward a demand for transparency, justice, and sovereignty.
During this phase, parallel efforts to deconstruct the fiat financial system gained momentum. The Federal Reserve’s policies led to unchecked money printing, inflation, and economic instability, pushing the system toward an inevitable collapse. Simultaneously, legislative battles in Congress and Supreme Court decisions began dismantling unconstitutional laws, setting the stage for a return to constitutional governance.
Phase 2: The Fall of the Corporate State (2024–2026)
As awareness spread, efforts to legally dismantle the U.S. corporate structure intensified. Many researchers and legal experts argue that the United States has functioned as a corporation since the Act of 1871, which allegedly placed the country under centralized financial and political control. The movement to restore the original Republic has involved legal challenges to Washington D.C.’s status, the Federal Reserve’s monopoly, and the fraudulent debt-based economic model.
By 2025, the global financial transition was well underway, with the collapse of central banking systems and a shift toward gold-backed and asset-backed currencies. The Quantum Financial System (QFS), designed to replace the manipulated fiat economy, gained traction, and nations worldwide began rejecting the petrodollar system in favor of sovereign economic independence. Within the U.S., states began asserting their rights under the 10th Amendment, taking back powers that had been gradually absorbed by the federal government.
The military, long seen as the last line of defense for the Republic, became increasingly involved in upholding constitutional law. Reports surfaced of secret tribunals addressing high-level crimes, including election interference, human trafficking networks, and financial treason. These efforts have been kept from mainstream reporting, but alternative sources suggest that military intelligence and special operations have been crucial in removing deep-seated corruption.
Phase 3: Restoration and Rebirth (2026–2028)
As the Deep State infrastructure collapses, a constitutional reset is expected to take place. This includes dismantling agencies that have overstepped their authority, restructuring Congress to prevent career politicians, and restoring elections based on transparent, verifiable processes. The NESARA/GESARA framework, which promotes debt forgiveness, tax reform, and wealth redistribution from corrupt elites, is anticipated to play a central role in stabilizing the post-collapse economy.
This period will also see the restoration of the Bill of Rights in its full power, ending unconstitutional mandates, mass surveillance, and suppression of free speech. True energy independence, new medical advancements, and the release of hidden technologies—long suppressed by corporate monopolies—will mark the rebirth of a sovereign, free, and self-reliant nation.
The Future: A Republic for the People
By 2030, the United States is expected to emerge from this era of transformation as a fully restored constitutional republic, free from globalist control, financial manipulation, and government overreach. The guiding principles of liberty, sovereignty, and transparency will become the pillars of governance, ensuring that the power of the Republic remains in the hands of the people, not special interests.
The road ahead is challenging, but as history has shown, the American spirit is resilient. The fall of the old system is necessary for the birth of something stronger, fairer, and truly representative of the will of the people. The next few years will define whether the American Republic is restored as a beacon of freedom, or whether tyranny will attempt a last stand. The choice, as always, belongs to We the People.
Uncovering the Truth: Shedding Light on DOGE
“Nothing Is Hidden That Will Not Be Made Known, Nothing is Secret That Will Not Come To Light.” – Dan Brown
The Department of Government Efficiency (DOGE), led by Elon Musk, has undertaken extensive investigations across multiple federal agencies to identify and eliminate inefficiencies, fraud, and corruption. These efforts have resulted in significant policy changes, contract terminations, and workforce reductions.
USAID
Following a comprehensive six-week review, DOGE canceled 83% of USAID’s programs, terminating approximately 5,200 contracts deemed misaligned with U.S. national interests. Senator Marco Rubio highlighted that these contracts, amounting to tens of billions of dollars, were found to be ineffective or counterproductive. doge.gov
Department of the Treasury and IRS
DOGE’s scrutiny extended to the Department of the Treasury and the IRS, leading to the termination of a $222,145 contract for wood office furniture manufacturing intended for the IRS Special Operations Office. Additionally, the IRS’s acting chief counsel, William Paul, was demoted amid DOGE’s efforts to access confidential taxpayer data, signaling a push for increased transparency and efficiency within the agency.
Department of Defense
The Department of Defense (DOD) has also been a focal point of DOGE’s initiatives, with significant workforce reductions implemented as part of broader government layoffs. These measures aim to streamline operations and reallocate resources more effectively.
Social Security Administration
To combat benefits fraud involving deceased individuals, DOGE assigned employees from various federal agencies to the Social Security Administration (SSA). This initiative addresses discrepancies where benefits were erroneously paid to deceased beneficiaries, aiming to enhance the integrity of SSA payments.
Department of Housing and Urban Development
DOGE’s investigations led to the recovery of $1.9 billion in misplaced funds within the Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD). These funds, initially earmarked for financial services administration, were de-obligated and made available for other uses by the Treasury, reflecting efforts to rectify financial mismanagement.
Department of Education
The Department of Education has experienced significant changes under DOGE’s oversight, including the demotion of top officials and the termination of contracts related to diversity, equity, and inclusion (DEI) initiatives. These actions are part of a broader strategy to reduce administrative overhead and refocus resources on core educational objectives.
While DOGE’s measures have been praised for targeting inefficiencies and potential fraud, they have also sparked debates regarding data privacy, procedural legitimacy, and the balance between aggressive oversight and constitutional safeguards. The long-term impact of these initiatives on federal agency operations and public trust remains a subject of ongoing discussion.
Global Military Coups: Unveiling the Dynamics of Power Shifts
Recent global events have underscored a resurgence in military coups and political upheavals, challenging democratic institutions and altering geopolitical landscapes. These developments often involve complex interactions between internal political dynamics and external influences, leading to significant regional and global implications.
Pakistan’s Political Turmoil
In Pakistan, former Prime Minister Imran Khan was arrested in August 2023 on corruption charges, a move his supporters claim was politically motivated. Khan’s ousting in April 2022 followed accusations of a U.S.-backed conspiracy, a claim the U.S. government has denied. His arrest sparked violent protests, with thousands of his supporters clashing with security forces in Islamabad, leading to casualties and widespread unrest. The situation has drawn international concern, particularly regarding the use of military courts to sentence civilians involved in these protests.
Africa’s Coup Resurgence
Africa has witnessed a series of military coups in recent years, reflecting a troubling trend of political instability. Since 2020, there have been nine successful and seven failed coups in West and Central Africa, with countries like Mali, Niger, and Burkina Faso experiencing government overthrows. These nations have subsequently withdrawn from the Economic Community of West African States (ECOWAS) to form the Alliance of Sahel States (AES), signaling a shift in regional alliances and raising concerns about future stability.
Bolivia’s Failed Coup Attempt
In June 2024, Bolivia thwarted a military coup led by dissident officers attempting to overthrow President Luis Arce. Armed troops occupied key government areas in La Paz but withdrew amid domestic and international pressure. The swift response by loyalist forces and the public’s support for democratic processes were pivotal in maintaining constitutional order.
South Korea’s Martial Law Declaration
South Korea faced a political crisis when President Yoon Suk Yeol declared martial law, citing a military threat from North Korea and labeling the National Assembly a “den of criminals.” This abrupt move led to mass protests and a unanimous decision by lawmakers to overturn the martial law declaration, highlighting the strength of South Korea’s civil society and its commitment to democratic norms.
Global Implications
These events underscore the fragility of democratic institutions in the face of internal dissent and external pressures. The resurgence of military interventions poses significant challenges to regional stability and international relations. As these situations evolve, the global community must remain vigilant and support efforts to uphold democratic principles and the rule of law.
Breaking News: Release of the Epstein Black Book List of Clients
“True Courage Is To Stand Against Evil, Even When We Stand Alone.” – Richard C. Edgley
The release of Jeffrey Epstein’s Black Book of Clients remains one of the most controversial and obstructed processes in modern legal and investigative history. Despite growing public demand for transparency and justice, multiple legal, political, and institutional barriers continue to delay or outright prevent full disclosure of the individuals associated with Epstein’s vast network.
Legal and Judicial Obstructions
The most immediate roadblock to releasing Epstein’s Black Book comes from the U.S. legal system itself. Many of the names within the book belong to high-profile individuals—politicians, business tycoons, celebrities, and even royalty—who have the means to engage in legal battles to suppress disclosure. Courts handling related cases often cite privacy rights and lack of sufficient evidence of wrongdoing as reasons for withholding the names, even though transparency advocates argue that public interest in exposing potential crimes outweighs those concerns. The book’s contents are tied up in sealed court documents and ongoing civil lawsuits, further complicating access.
Institutional and Political Roadblocks
Beyond the legal arena, powerful institutions—both governmental and corporate—have vested interests in keeping the names hidden. Epstein’s connections spanned intelligence agencies, Wall Street, Silicon Valley, Hollywood, and political elites from both U.S. parties and beyond. If these names were fully revealed, it could trigger a crisis of legitimacy for many global institutions. As a result, there is a quiet but aggressive effort to control the narrative, downplay the book’s importance, or delay its release indefinitely.
Media Censorship and Narrative Control
Mainstream media’s role in covering up or selectively reporting on the Epstein case further shields those implicated. While alternative and independent media outlets continue to push for full disclosure, many legacy media organizations have either ignored key aspects of the case or framed the release of names as “unverified speculation.” Additionally, social media platforms have been accused of suppressing discussions about the book, using content moderation policies to flag certain revelations as “misinformation” or “conspiracy theories,” despite overwhelming public demand for truth.
The Public’s Fight for Disclosure
Despite these challenges, public pressure continues to mount. The Epstein case has already exposed shocking levels of corruption, abuse, and trafficking at the highest levels of power. As more legal cases related to Epstein’s associates unfold, leaks and whistleblower testimonies may eventually force full disclosure. The question remains: Will the system allow the truth to come out, or will the cover-up continue to protect the powerful?
The Fall of NATO and the European Union: The Rise of a New Global Order
“Never Think That War No Matter How Necessary Nor Just, Is Not A Crime.” – Earnest Hemingway
The dissolution of NATO and the collapse of the European Union (EU) would mark one of the most dramatic geopolitical shifts in modern history. Once considered the pillars of Western security and economic cooperation, these institutions have shown increasing fractures under the weight of internal conflicts, economic instability, and external pressures. Russia’s resurgence as a dominant power—both militarily and economically—has only accelerated this decline, forcing Europe into an era of uncertainty and transformation.
NATO’s Downfall: A Fractured Alliance
For decades, NATO stood as the backbone of Western military supremacy, originally formed to counter the Soviet Union. However, as internal divisions among member states grew, its effectiveness dwindled. The cracks became evident as European nations began to question the U.S.’s leadership, military spending disparities, and the alliance’s aggressive posturing toward Russia. With certain countries refusing to further fund their defense commitments, NATO’s unity weakened. The final blows came with diplomatic breakdowns, failed military interventions, and the inability to respond effectively to new global threats. As political shifts in the U.S. and Europe led to nationalist movements prioritizing sovereignty over collective security, NATO found itself without purpose or cohesion.
Russia, recognizing this weakness, strategically expanded its influence through diplomatic maneuvering, cyberwarfare, and targeted military operations. As NATO disintegrated, former member states were left to fend for themselves, some forming independent defense agreements, while others turned toward Moscow for security guarantees.
The Collapse of the European Union: Economic Ruin and Political Fragmentation
The EU’s collapse was both economic and political. For years, Europe’s economic power was undermined by unsustainable debt, energy dependence, and bureaucratic inefficiencies. A series of financial crises, exacerbated by inflation, mass migration, and declining industries, left the EU in a vulnerable position. As nations like Germany, France, and Italy struggled to keep their economies afloat, populist and nationalist movements gained traction, demanding withdrawal from the EU to reclaim sovereignty.
The final nail in the coffin came as Russia capitalized on Europe’s energy dependence, cutting off key natural gas and oil supplies. Without alternatives, European economies spiraled into recession, triggering social unrest and political upheavals. As riots and government collapses spread across the continent, the EU’s structure crumbled. Some countries sought closer ties with Russia and China, while others descended into internal chaos.
Russia’s Rise: A New Eurasian Order
With NATO and the EU in disarray, Russia emerged as the dominant force in Eurasia. Expanding its influence through the Eurasian Economic Union and new military alliances, Russia positioned itself as the primary power broker in Europe. Moscow extended economic and security agreements to former EU and NATO members, establishing a new order under its leadership. With control over vast energy resources, strategic military positioning, and alliances with rising powers like China and India, Russia dictated the terms of the new world order.
The Future of Europe and the World
The fall of NATO and the EU would leave Europe in a state of transformation, with some nations resisting Russian influence while others willingly aligning with Moscow. The United States, once the dominant force in global affairs, would find itself increasingly isolated, struggling to maintain influence as multipolar world powers rise. A world once defined by Western hegemony would now be shaped by new alliances, with Russia, China, and emerging economies determining the next phase of global geopolitics.
While the West saw this shift as a crisis, others viewed it as an opportunity to break free from U.S.-led globalism and forge a new, multipolar world built on regional power centers. The question remains: Will this new order bring stability, or will it lead to further global conflict?
The Global Economic Collapse: Unraveling the Old Financial Order
The world is witnessing an unprecedented economic downturn that is shaking the foundations of global financial stability. Decades of unsustainable debt, reckless monetary policies, and reliance on artificial economic growth have finally reached a tipping point. Central banks, once seen as the pillars of economic stability, have lost control over inflation and currency devaluation, leading to widespread financial turmoil. The collapse of major economies has triggered cascading effects, causing banking failures, stock market crashes, and skyrocketing unemployment.
Hyperinflation, Debt Crises, and Currency Devaluation
One of the most pressing issues fueling the collapse is hyperinflation. Many nations, particularly those heavily reliant on fiat currency and excessive money printing, are experiencing rapid price surges. This has eroded consumer purchasing power, making basic necessities unaffordable for millions. Governments struggling to service their overwhelming national debts are forced to devalue their currencies, leading to loss of confidence in financial institutions. Countries that once dominated global trade are now finding themselves unable to stabilize their own economies, resulting in social unrest and political instability.
The Breakdown of Global Supply Chains
Another major factor exacerbating the economic crisis is the breakdown of global supply chains. Years of outsourcing and reliance on just-in-time manufacturing have made many economies vulnerable to disruptions. Energy shortages, geopolitical conflicts, and trade restrictions have all contributed to the collapse of essential supply networks. Food insecurity is growing, manufacturing is stagnating, and entire industries are failing due to lack of access to raw materials. Nations that once relied on global trade are being forced to reconfigure their economies, creating a new era of regionalism and self-sufficiency.
The Fall of Major Financial Institutions
Banks and major financial institutions are crumbling under the weight of bad debt and liquidity crises. Decades of speculation, market manipulation, and artificially inflated assets have created unsustainable financial bubbles. The housing market, once a key driver of economic growth, is experiencing a major downturn as interest rates rise and mortgage defaults increase. Meanwhile, stock markets are in freefall as investors panic, withdrawing their funds and seeking refuge in alternative assets such as gold, silver, and digital currencies. The collapse of financial giants is forcing governments to intervene, but bailouts are no longer a viable solution as national debts spiral out of control.
A Shift Toward a New Economic Order
As the old system crumbles, a new economic order is beginning to take shape. Nations are moving away from the U.S. dollar as the global reserve currency, instead embracing alternative financial systems based on asset-backed trade agreements. Emerging economies are forming new alliances, prioritizing local production and resource sovereignty over dependency on multinational corporations. Decentralized financial systems and digital currencies are gaining traction as people lose trust in traditional banking. The transition will be painful, but it also presents an opportunity for societies to rebuild on principles of self-sufficiency, transparency, and economic fairness.
The collapse of the global economy is not just a financial crisis—it is the unraveling of a decades-old system built on unsustainable practices and elite-controlled monetary policies. As the dust settles, the world will be forced to redefine economic stability, trade, and wealth distribution. The future remains uncertain, but one thing is clear: the era of unchecked globalization and fiat-driven economies is coming to an end.
US Open Border War, Mexican Cartel Infiltration, Insurgents, & Mercenary Invaders
“Over one million Mexican civilians have been killed by the Cartels in the past 10 yrs. US border town shootings and crime up 1100%. Mexican Cartels have declared War on the US and Americans are silent”
The situation along the U.S. southern border has escalated into a complex and perilous conflict, characterized by increased violence, cartel dominance, and significant challenges to national security.
Escalating Violence and Cartel Control
Over the past decade, Mexican drug cartels have been responsible for the deaths of over one million Mexican civilians. Their influence extends beyond Mexico, deeply affecting U.S. border regions. Former U.S. Border Patrol Chief Rodney Scott highlighted that these cartels “control everything that crosses that southwest border,” including illegal migrant crossings that create gaps in border security. This control facilitates the smuggling of drugs, weapons, and human trafficking victims into the United States.
U.S. Response and Designation of Cartels as Terrorist Organizations
In response to the escalating threat, the U.S. government has designated eight Latin American crime groups, including major Mexican cartels like the Sinaloa Cartel and Jalisco New Generation Cartel, as foreign terrorist organizations. This designation aims to increase pressure on these groups involved in drug trafficking, migrant smuggling, and violence. Additionally, the Drug Enforcement Administration (DEA) has warned that migrants who pay cartels for passage across the U.S.-Mexico border may be placed on a terrorism watch list, reflecting the severity of the situation.
Impact on Border Communities and National Security
The cartel-related violence has had a profound impact on U.S. border communities. Incidents such as gunfights disrupting flights in Mexican border cities and the killing of a Texas resident by an improvised explosive device (IED) at his Mexican ranch highlight the immediate dangers posed by cartel operations. These events underscore the urgent need for enhanced security measures and cooperation between U.S. and Mexican authorities to address the escalating violence and protect citizens on both sides of the border.
The current state of affairs at the U.S. southern border represents a critical challenge requiring comprehensive strategies to combat cartel influence, secure the border, and ensure the safety and security of both nations.
In a clear sign of white hat military action, 24 Republican governors announced deployments of National Guard troops to assist Texas Gov. Greg Abbott’s border security efforts.
One reason the troops are being deployed is that the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services has been paying a staggering $18,000 per child to “sponsor” unaccompanied minors. The children were being placed with abusive “sponsors” and up to 85,000 “sponsored” children are missing.
The “Dark Side” of Globalization
• Mexico is the “hub” of the underground globalization drug market
• Mexican cartels desire to control transportation routes
• Transit points usually link Mexico with Latin American drug producing nations such as Colombia & Peru, and the U.S, to which the majority of drugs are smuggled
• Mexican cartels are responsible for 90% of the U.S cocaine market & key producers of marijuana and methamphetamines
• 90% of guns seized in Mexico including high-powered semi automatic rifles, originated in the U.S
• Mexican cartels are active in more than 1,000 cities
• 450,000 Mexicans now rely on the international drug trafficking as their primary source of income
Source: Ben Fulford
U.S. Military Alert Status
As of now, the United States military has not escalated its alert status to DEFCON 1. Historically, the U.S. has never reached DEFCON 1; the highest confirmed level was DEFCON 2 during the Cuban Missile Crisis. The current DEFCON level is not publicly disclosed for security reasons.
Economic Concerns: Debt Ceiling and Government Funding
The United States is approaching its debt ceiling, which was reinstated on January 1, 2025, at $36.1 trillion. Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen has indicated that extraordinary measures may be necessary by mid-January to prevent a default. Congress is currently negotiating to address this issue to avoid significant economic repercussions.
In parallel, the U.S. Senate is poised to pass a stopgap spending bill to avert a partial government shutdown. The bill aims to maintain federal spending at approximately $6.75 trillion for the fiscal year ending September 30. This measure is crucial to ensure the continuity of government operations and services.
Transition to a New Financial System
Discussions about transitioning to a new financial system, such as a Quantum Financial System (QFS) with gold or asset-backed currencies, are speculative and not supported by current official policies or actions. The U.S. continues to operate under its existing financial and monetary frameworks.
Public Preparedness
While the current geopolitical and economic situations are complex, there is no indication that the Emergency Broadcast System (EBS) will be activated imminently. Government agencies continue to monitor and address these challenges to maintain national security and economic stability.
It is essential to rely on official sources for updates and guidance during these times. Staying informed through reputable news outlets and government communications ensures accurate understanding of ongoing developments.
Fake Alien Invasion | Project Blue Beam | False Flag Operation
“A false flag is a political or military action carried out with the intention of blaming an opponent for it. Nations (US/CIA) have often done this by staging a real or simulated attack on their own side and saying the enemy (Aliens) did it, as a pretext for going to war or ushering in their NWO.”
💢 The Pentagon wants a violent narration of an Alien invasion. There were Whistleblowers coming forward and powerful White Hats who were going to counter the violent invasion propaganda Deep State narration
While the Pentagon Mainstream Media was claiming there was going to be an Alien invasion, White Hats were pushing real Disclosure – the Pentagon was already involved with the Alien Agenda and technology.
This game theory move traps the Pentagon CIA as the leaks and Whistleblowers come from within their own divisions (proving there was a cover up and agenda happening.
No Mainstream Media outlet reported on a Whistleblower who exposed that the Pentagon had knowledge of advanced UFO technology (and more).The New York Times and Washington Post didn’t touch the story.
This says the Deep State did not want the Whistleblower to get coverage on his story as it would connect the Pentagon/CIA/DOD to an Alien Agenda cover up and Deep State Operation in progress.
Counter moves were being made against the fake Alien Invasion Rockefeller Deep State Operation.
Source; Wilcock
Unveiling the Sinister Khazarian Mafia DS Playbook: The Path to Total Digital Banking Control | CBDC
“As the World Becomes a More Digital Place, We Can Not Forget About the Human Connection” – Adam Neumann
Prepare for the Impending Crisis of Hunger and Starvation!
The nefarious Deep State is orchestrating a diabolical event that will cunningly shift the blame to a fabricated food distribution collapse.
Their sinister plan? Manipulate the masses into desperate dependence on the government, who will swoop in as supposed saviors, offering food rations and free money$$.
But beware! There’s a catch: You must surrender your freedom by registering through their insidious digital banking system, granting them control over your financial life and integrating you into their new order. Any violation of their cryptic and convoluted terms and conditions will result in swift and severe consequences — frozen bank accounts, exorbitant fines, or even total asset confiscation.
And that’s not all! They aim to silence dissenting voices by forbidding the sharing of any information that challenges the mainstream narrative on pandemic protocols, vaccines, virus origins, and war-related details.
Beware the Machiavellian Operation Lock Step, masterminded by the Rockefellers, Rothschilds, Khazarian EU, and their clandestine cohorts. They are poised to plunge humanity into an abyss of control and manipulation.
But fear not, for there is hope! Courageous White Hats are working tirelessly behind the scenes, channeling the Deep State’s wicked plan into a magnificent awakening.
In this high-stakes game, it’s a battle of chess-like proportions, with darkness shrouding the world before the triumphant emergence of light.
Stay vigilant, my fellow citizens, and ensure you have enough provisions to sustain yourself for the forthcoming tumultuous period of 30 to 90 days.
The time for action is now. Let the truth prevail.
GAME THEORY | 5D CHESS
Darkness Before The Light
Source: David Wilcock
White Hat Intel | Two Disruptive Events Planned
“The Greatest Danger in Times of Disruptive Events, is Not the Disruption, it is to Act with Yesterdays Logic” – Peter Drucker
Military issued satellite phones to the Senate in the coming Communications Blackout Event.
This comes on the heel of China Spy Balloons and China merging with Russia on tactical War defense operations.
Four Star General Keane issued a warning: “China will attack our Homeland quite massively using cyber Capabilities to attack, defeat our electrical grid, oil gas distribution even the financial sector.” Gen. Keane went on to say that China will try to defeat the US inside the U.S. and Pacific regions.
This all comes as Russia makes its BRICS alliance and tells the Alliance that he will nuclear arm them if they wish to join forces against the western regimen.
At the same time China issues warning to the CIA.
The international community needs to stay on high alert against cyber attack activities conducted by the Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) of the United States around the world, and the United States must stop using cyber weapons to carry out espionage and cyber attacks, a Chinese foreign ministry spokesperson said on Thursday. Mao Ning _CHINA.
TRUMP. RFK JR. PUTIN. XI all have publicly attacked the CIA for world corruption.
The Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) says it has spent $290 million on a drug to treat radiation sickness in the event of a nuclear emergency.
In 2017 the CIA was doing Operation Gotham Shield exercises conducted by the United States Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) which tested civil defense response capabilities to a nuclear weapons attack against the New York City metropolitan area with the National Guard.
Source: Judy Byington
Get Ready for Impact | U.S. Military Forewarns of Turmoil and Generals Sound the Alarm!
“One Thorn of Experience is Worth A Whole Wilderness of Warnings.” – James Russel Lowell
Prepare yourself for a riveting revelation as esteemed military figures raise the alarm. Brace for the stunning insights from Major General Paul Eaton, former Brigadier General; Steven Anderson, and Army Major General Antonio Taguba, who express grave concerns about a potential civil war on the horizon in 2024. Their words reverberate through military circles, leaving us with a sense of unsettling anticipation.
Behind Closed Doors: Militias Rise, Ammunition Disappears!
Tensions grip the nation as numerous militias, spanning across political affiliations, non-voters, criminal gangs, and cartels, contribute to an unprecedented surge in ammunition sales. Prepare for a chilling truth: an astonishing 76 government agencies in the United States are stockpiling weapons and military equipment, boasting over 200,000 federalized officers armed with the authority to make arrests and bear firearms. This force outnumbers even the formidable U.S. Marines. Disturbing revelations emerge about hidden funding, reaching into the tens of millions, courtesy of the Biden Administration’s collusion with the CIA and Pentagon.
Military Machinations: Revealing Loyal Generals and the Deep State!
Unravel the enigma surrounding military generals and commanders who remain loyal or, perhaps worse, compromised by deep state elites. How did they ascend to positions of power? Brace yourself for a truth that shatters trust: the Ukrainian failure intertwined with a corrupt web of connections involving global bank corruption, the U.S. military-industrial complex, and a clandestine bioweapons saga. Grave concerns of Nuremberg Code violations, crimes against humanity, treason, and war crimes loom large.
The Web of Treason: Exposing Pentagon’s Role in the Plandemic!
Peel back the layers of deception to uncover the shocking involvement of the Pentagon in the global pandemic. Delve into the dark underbelly where a sinister plot is intertwined with stolen elections, foreign interference, foreign occupation, and a ruthless power pursuit. The air hangs heavy with allegations of treason, violations of the Nuremberg Code, and crimes against humanity, casting a damning shadow over those orchestrating this devastating conspiracy.
Whistleblowers Unleashed: High-Ranking Military Officers Take a Stand!
A tide turns as courageous high-ranking military officers, including captains, majors, and lieutenant colonels, step forward as whistleblowers. These fearless voices, protected by Congress and the Senate, are poised to expose deep state military generals involved in pushing the vaccine agenda, violating the Nuremberg Code, and committing crimes against humanity. The landscape shifts as reports emerge of certain generals resigning in anticipation of imminent investigations.
The Only Path Forward: A Militarized Journey!
In this era of uncertainty, the resounding echoes of “it had to be this way” leave an indelible mark. As the United States teeters on the edge, one truth emerges: the path ahead lies with the military. Brace yourself for the trials that lie in wait. The destiny of our nation hangs in the balance, watched closely by the world with bated breath.
Source: David Wilcock
Behind the Scenes, Near Death Civilization Event Plans Under Way
“Sometimes A Little Near Death Experience Helps Them Put Things Into Perspective.” – Anne Shropshire
TRUMP is preparing to make the UNITED STATES A WORLD LEADER in the honor of goodness and greatness of the American People. No matter what happens in the next months inside the NEAR DEATH CIVILIZATION EVENT
PLANS are already under way for TRUMP to RETURN PUBLICLY AS COMMANDER AND CHIEF ( in real time TRUMP is the commander and Chief, and Cheyenne mountain recognizes him as the true leader and authority over the Highest military commands).
The PLANS for TRUMP to build the United States into a global economic leader within one year and half is connected to highest volumes of Natural resources and gas . Oil and global energy the United States possess’s .
CHINA. RUSSIA. south American BRICS nations all know the U.S. is going to produce over 25_30 million barrels of oil a day and take over the world ENERGY structure MARKET.
BEHIND THE SCENES, TRUMP is already in talks with South America and China as the U.S. WILL out produce Russian ENERGY.
Within a short 1 year and half after The Great COLLAPSE and near death civilization events_of 2023 2024. The GOLDEN AGE OF 2025_2026_27 BEGINS and the PLANS are already being played out. Currently and coming> (And with the dismantling of the CIA. FBI. And coming 11.3 Tribulations Storm ARRESTS)
Military Intelligence assessments through the world know TRUMP is COMING and going to take over the world POWER ENERGY STRUCTURE AND BRICS NATIONS ARE GOING TO COME BEGGING TO BE A PART OF THE ONCE AGAIN REPUBLIC OF UNITED STATES, a clean power away from CIA and Globalist, THE SWAP HAS TO BE DRAINED FIRST BEFORE TRUMP CREATES THE GREATEST NATION ON EARTH TO GIVE FREEDOM TO THE REST OF THE WORLD THROUGH A GOLD BACKED SYSTEM.
AFTER THE RESTORING OF THE U.S. REPUBLIC
THE TRUTH OF FREE ENERGY WILL UNVEILED AND CLOAKED WITH A NEW ERA
The Power of the REAL PLAN Unfolding. Is beyond human conception as the FAKE. ALIEN INVASION (#1) will be EXPOSED on NATIONAL level
And this will lead to DECLASSIFICATION of the REAL ( #2) TECHNOLOGY connected to INFINITE ENERGY. ( Infinite ENERGY is med beds. Floating crafts. Floating Cities, imagine the new jobs and technology. Far far far far far beyond what any human thought possible.. But everything comes in STAGES…
Including bringing down the World DEEP STATE Satanic CABAL connected to EPSTEIN and world leaders. Banks. Corporations. BLACKMAIL system. Human trafficking rings. World War mongering)
Everything you are watching is staged. This includes the deep state pushing their agenda it WILL all back fire.. This is called GAME THEORY OPERATIONS. The near death civilization EVENT is GAME THEORY OPERATIONS and will LEAD TO MILITARY INTERVENTION.
Kash Patel telling you DURHAM failed is A lie.
KASH is playing a game. Learn to play the game.
Durham didn’t fall. I have told you many times his report was already in the hands of the military 2 years ago. Everything happening now is for Congressional records that will show the failure of the captured U.S. government and courts (Military COUP)
You are just in the beginning of the GREAT AWAKENING WORLD PROJECT that leads to a Golden Era. But for now we are inside the COLLAPSE of the deep state Power structures.
Don’t worry about Klaus. WEF & WHO. Their fates are sealed and they know TRUMP. CHEYENNE. MILITARY OPERATIONS IS COMING.
NCSWIC
Source: David Wilcock
The Death Blow to the Central Banking System, Will Destroy The Khazarian Mafia Deep State
“If You Want To Know What A Man Is Really Like, Take Notice When He Loses All His Money.” – Simone Weil
All central banks around the world are bankrupted now — it is just not revealed to the public yet, and maybe it’s a good thing. This is the Alliance’s ‘Softest Landing’ approach to avoid maximum tragedies, suffering & casualties for all citizens.
There’s already chaos with people, in multiple countries, not being able to get their money out of banks. If all humans find out that banks are insolvent & do not have liquidity, then everyone will rush to the bank to pull their money out & that would cause the biggest global panic & crash in ALL major countries. It would be complete utter chaos that even the Military Alliance will not be able to handle.
The bankruptcy reveal will be done publicly in phases to ensure not creating a full meltdown of citizens all over the world, all at once. As the old financial system transitions into the new QFS, citizens will be able to transfer their ‘old’ money into the new system. However this sounds a lot easier & smoother than reality.
In reality, we can not transfer from the old slave debt money system to a new one without pain & suffering. Hard-earned money & valuable assets will be lost. This is why I’ve shared my perspective on how & where to store your assets during this greatest transition of financial systems. We are no longer at the precipice. It is no longer the ‘calm before the storm’. The storm is here now.
As more & more people figure out what is truly going on inside the matrix financial systems & government, it is not going to be fun. It will be more intense than the last 3 years of dealing with the CONvid agenda.
There is a SILVER lining in all this. There is a MASSIVE SILVER LINING that is coming after this storm — but for now, take cover.
We are heading into very turbulent waters. We are going to witness unimaginable jaw-dropping global events. It will be devastating to those that are not ready. It will be exciting for some. It will be the Greatest Show & Events to unfold for those in their Heart Space, holding their Highest LOVE Frequency & being well-prepared. | Source: David Wilcock
Behind the scene – experts say that Biden’s signature on the Debt Ceiling Bill by Mon. 5 June was designed to not divert a default on the US Dollar, but actually create a default – because suspension of the Debt Ceiling which debt was already at an unsustainable $36 Trillion.
When combined with the Central Banks of the World’s recent bankruptcies – (unreported by the Mainstream Media), the bill’s approval by Congress has already removed any pillar of support for the US dollar in global financial markets.
Default of the US Dollar was the basis – (and goal) for the soon-to-be implemented Deep State’s Great Reset Fiat Digital Currency Banking System. The Great Reset was designed so those Elite members of the Deep State could have control over The People’s bank accounts and thus, rule their lives and rule the World.
House & Senate to Allow $36 Trillion US Debt To Rise Even Higher – with nowhere to borrow the money, setting up Operation Sandman De-dollarization: within 24 hours $2 Trillion U.S. Treasury Bonds would be dumped, loosing 50-90% of US Dollar value. US cash would be worthless.
All Central Banks around the world were now bankrupt and insolvent — it just cannot be announced all at once. https://t.me/drue86/26063
The Mockingbird Media – would make it seem like this was a good thing. Nothing wrong’s — go back to your shopping, post selfies & leave your money in the banks.
We have seen a string of bank deaths – Credit Suisse, Deutsche, SVB, First Republic & regional banks — all dead. Even Evergrande is dead. All publicly dead entities are being propped up, pretending to still be functional. They are not. They won’t let the banks default, because once that happens, the GAME is OVER.
Massive consolidation — JPMorgan have been swooping up all the dead assets. JPMorgan connects to Epstein with Jamie Dimon on the hook.
Senate passes bill – to raise debt ceiling, preventing first-ever U.S. default: https://www.cnbc.com/2023/06/01/debt-ceiling-bill-updates.html
House & Senate passes a $4 Trillion debt ceiling — which could bring the total debt to $36 TRILLION! Where will the $4 Trillion come from? No one will lend U.S. the money — not China, Russia or Saudi. So the Federal Reserve will print it.
The De-dollarization is set – Operation Sandman — where $2 Trillion U.S. Treasury bonds will be dumped within 24 hours, with St. Petersburg leading the way. The American Dollar can potentially lose 50-90% of its value. Operation Sandman https://t.me/drue86/35852
Historically fiat currencies – have a life span of 27 years. The USDA Reserve Currency has been in effect for over 90 years, 40 of which was functioning in fiat currency.
We crashed the Russian economy – back in the 80s/90s — tables have turned. American allies like France & Japan have dumped U.S. Treasury bonds. In Long Beach, the largest port in America, shipping companies rejected U.S. Treasury bonds. It was expected that the US Financial Meltdown would happen in mid-June 2023.
When this happens, gas may cost up to $40/gallon – $100 Egg cartons. It will FREEZE our whole economy. All banks will fall publicly. All U.S. cash will be worthless. Drug dealers’ & dirty cops like LAPD’s Rampart Division’s stashed cash will be worthless. CIA stashed cash payments for train derailments, public shootings, Antifa, contract killers & all [DS] agents will be worthless.
The MUSIC STOPS – Greatest ECONOMY CRASH of all times.
Source: Judy Byington
Secret Empire of Rothschilds, Rockefeller’s, and Morgans | AKA Khazarian Mafia
“The Control of Information is Something the Elite Always Does, Particularly in a Despotic Form of Government. Information, Knowledge is Power. If You Can Control Information You Can Control People.” – Tom Clancy
Prepare to uncover the shocking truth about the world’s most influential families and their iron grip on the global economy. The Federal Reserve Cartel, comprised of the Rothschilds, Rockefeller’s, and Morgans, holds unparalleled power that extends far beyond the realm of oil.
Picture this: The Four Horsemen of Banking, including Bank of America, JP Morgan Chase, Citigroup, and Wells Fargo, join forces with the Four Horsemen of Oil, such as Exxon Mobil, Royal Dutch/Shell, BP, and Chevron Texaco. But their domination doesn’t stop there. They have extended their reach to encompass the music industry through an intricate network of private banks. These behemoths, along with Deutsche Bank, BNP, Barclays, and other European old money giants, control the strings of the music industry, enabling them to dictate its direction and influence.
The nefarious deeds of the Rockefeller dynasty are far-reaching, starting with their military-commercialization of music in the early 1900s. They orchestrated a diabolical plan to shift the world’s standard tuning of music to 440 pitch. This insidious frequency was known to provoke greater aggression, psychosocial agitation, emotional distress, and even physical illnesses. Behind the scenes, this manipulation led to financial gains for those complicit in the monopoly, including agents, agencies, and companies connected to the North American Rockefeller crime cartel and elite organizations.
Fast forward to the late 1980s, when the Rockefeller’s summoned the top music executives and talent to a highly secretive meeting in Los Angeles. Their sinister agenda? To usher in the era of Controlled Rap Music, tightly linked to the privatization of U.S. prisons. These privately owned prisons, operated by the Rockefeller’s, Rothschilds, Bush family, and other influential figures, served as money laundering operations, tax exemption schemes, and pyramid scheme operations.
The Rockefellers devised a cunning plan to control the rap industry and target black communities by promoting violent music that fueled oppression and civil unrest. They brought together top executives and leading black artists, binding them with confidentiality agreements. Their objective was clear: coordinate the violence within the rap music movement, while major record labels gained exclusive rights for production and distribution across the United States. As a reward, they would receive shares and points within the private prison systems.
The Masonic plan unfolded with precision, resulting in over 1,500 private prison systems housing more than 1 million black teenagers by 1990. These vulnerable youths, expressing the generational trauma imposed upon them, unknowingly contributed to the Rockefellers’ malevolent scheme. The private prison systems reaped billions annually from the government, creating a vast money laundering network through inflated products, such as ramen noodles priced 8 times higher than their actual value. The flow of hundreds of billions from government funding, pyramid schemes, and insurance companies transformed the privatization of prisons into a multi-trillion-dollar venture.
Local courts and judges mercilessly sentenced petty criminals and first-time offenders, filling the ever-expanding private prisons. As a result, the United States now holds the dubious record for the highest number of incarcerated individuals in the world, with an unprecedented number of prisons. This was not an accident—it was a meticulously orchestrated plan by the Rockefeller’s.
But their influence doesn’t end there. These silent thieves also manipulate elections, ensuring their grip on power remains unbroken.
Unmasking the true face of those who control the world, the Rothschilds and Rockefeller’s find themselves in the crosshairs of military alliance operations aimed at dismantling the Rothschilds’ deep state power in Europe, the UK, Russia, and China.
Source: Benjamin Fulford
Special Report Sources; Ben Fulford, Peter Novak, Judy Byington, David Wilcock, David Icke
In Love & Light ❤️
The Great Awakening Team
The 3 C’s of Life: “Choices, Chances, and Changes”,
You must make a choice to take a chance or your life will never change. – Zig Ziglar
DISCLAIMER: All statements, claims, views and opinions that appear anywhere on this site, whether stated as theories or absolute facts, are always presented by The Great Awakening Report (GAR) as unverified—and should be personally fact checked and discerned by you, the reader. Any opinions or statements herein presented are not necessarily promoted, endorsed, or agreed to by GAR, those who work with GAR, or those who read or subscribe to GAR. Any belief or conclusion gleaned from content on this site is solely the responsibility of you the reader to substantiate. Any actions taken by those who read material on this site are solely the responsibility of the acting party. You are encouraged to think for yourself and do your own research. Nothing on this site is meant to be believed without question or personal appraisal.
Copyright Disclaimer: Citation of articles and authors in this report does not imply ownership. Works and images presented here fall under Fair Use Section 107 and are used for commentary on globally significant newsworthy events. Under Section 107 of the Copyright Act 1976, allowance is made for fair use for purposes such as criticism, comment, news reporting, teaching, scholarship, and research.
Community Guidelines Disclaimer: The points of view and purpose of this video is not to bully or harass anybody, but rather share that opinion and thoughts with other like-minded individuals curious about the subject.
Recently published Reports
🔔 SPECIAL REPORTS
Share This Report
Have questions?
At Great Awakening Report, we are dedicated to supporting your journey toward truth and enlightenment through our specialized Coaching and Consulting services.
Coaching Services: Our coaching programs are designed to guide you through personal awakening and transformation. We offer personalized sessions that focus on expanding consciousness, uncovering hidden truths, and fostering spiritual growth. Our experienced coaches provide the tools and insights necessary to navigate your path with clarity and confidence.
Consulting Services: For organizations and individuals seeking deeper understanding and strategic guidance, our consulting services offer expert analysis and solutions. We delve into areas such as global transitions, alternative news insights, and consciousness studies to provide comprehensive strategies tailored to your unique objectives.
Embark on a transformative journey with our Coaching and Consulting services, and unlock your highest potential. To learn more and schedule a session, visit our Coaching and Consulting pages.
Thank you
Thank you to our subscribers and readers for your continued support and dedication to truth and awakening. Your encouragement, engagement, and belief in our mission make everything we do possible. Together, we are expanding awareness and helping illuminate the path forward.
If you would like to further support the Great Awakening team and our ongoing efforts to share insight, knowledge, and truth, you can DONATE HERE.
With deep gratitude,
– Great Awakening Team
About the Author: Great Awakening Team
DISCLAIMER: All statements, claims, views and opinions that appear anywhere on this site, whether stated as theories or absolute facts, are always presented by The Great Awakening Report (GAR) as unverified—and should be personally fact checked and discerned by you, the reader.Any opinions or statements herein presented are not necessarily promoted, endorsed, or agreed to by GAR, those who work with GAR, or those who read or subscribe to GAR.Any belief or conclusion gleaned from content on this site is solely the responsibility of you the reader to substantiate.Any actions taken by those who read material on this site are solely the responsibility of the acting party.You are encouraged to think for yourself and do your own research.Nothing on this site is meant to be believed without question or personal appraisal.
COPYRIGHT DISCLAIMER: Citation of articles and authors in this report does not imply ownership. Works and images presented here fall under Fair Use Section 107 and are used for commentary on globally significant newsworthy events. Under Section 107 of the Copyright Act 1976, allowance is made for fair use for purposes such as criticism, comment, news reporting, teaching, scholarship, and research.
COMMUNITY GUIDELINES DISCLAIMER: The points of view and purpose of this video is not to bully or harass anybody, but rather share that opinion and thoughts with other like-minded individuals curious about the subject.
